Mathworks-Matlab Programming Fundamentals r2017b-2017

MATLAB®
Programming Fundamentals
R2017b
How to Contact MathWorks
Latest news: www.mathworks.com
Sales and services: www.mathworks.com/sales_and_services
User community: www.mathworks.com/matlabcentral
Technical support: www.mathworks.com/support/contact_us
Phone: 508-647-7000
The MathWorks, Inc.

3 Apple Hill Drive
Natick, MA 01760-2098
MATLAB Programming Fundamentals
© COPYRIGHT 1984–2017 by The MathWorks, Inc.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. The software may be
used or copied only under the terms of the license agreement. No part of this manual may be photocopied
or reproduced in any form without prior written consent from The MathWorks, Inc.
FEDERAL ACQUISITION: This provision applies to all acquisitions of the Program and Documentation
by, for, or through the federal government of the United States. By accepting delivery of the Program or
Documentation, the government hereby agrees that this software or documentation qualifies as
commercial computer software or commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used or
defined in FAR 12.212, DFARS Part 227.72, and DFARS 252.227-7014. Accordingly, the terms and
conditions of this Agreement and only those rights specified in this Agreement, shall pertain to and govern
the use, modification, reproduction, release, performance, display, and disclosure of the Program and
Documentation by the federal government (or other entity acquiring for or through the federal
government) and shall supersede any conflicting contractual terms or conditions. If this License fails to
meet the government's needs or is inconsistent in any respect with federal procurement law, the
government agrees to return the Program and Documentation, unused, to The MathWorks, Inc.
Trademarks
MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of The MathWorks, Inc. See
www.mathworks.com/trademarksfor a list of additional trademarks. Other product or brand
names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Patents
MathWorks products are protected by one or more U.S. patents. Please see
www.mathworks.com/patents for more information.
Revision History
June 2004 First printing New for MATLAB 7.0 (Release 14)
October 2004 Online only Revised for MATLAB 7.0.1 (Release 14SP1)
March 2005 Online only Revised for MATLAB 7.0.4 (Release 14SP2)
June 2005 Second printing Minor revision for MATLAB 7.0.4
September 2005 Online only Revised for MATLAB 7.1 (Release 14SP3)
March 2006 Online only Revised for MATLAB 7.2 (Release 2006a)
September 2006 Online only Revised for MATLAB 7.3 (Release 2006b)
March 2007 Online only Revised for MATLAB 7.4 (Release 2007a)
September 2007 Online only Revised for Version 7.5 (Release 2007b)
March 2008 Online only Revised for Version 7.6 (Release 2008a)
October 2008 Online only Revised for Version 7.7 (Release 2008b)
April 2011 Online only Revised for Version 7.12 (Release 2011a)
October 2014 Online only Revised for Version 8.4 (Release 2014b)
October 2015 Online only Rereleased for Version 8.5.1 (Release
2015aSP1)
Contents
Language
Syntax Basics
1
Continue Long Statements on Multiple Lines . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Call Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Ignore Function Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Variable Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Valid Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Conflicts with Function Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Case and Space Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Command vs. Function Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Command and Function Syntaxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Avoid Common Syntax Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
How MATLAB Recognizes Command Syntax . . . . . . . . 1-11
Common Errors When Calling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Conflicting Function and Variable Names . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Undefined Functions or Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
v
Program Components
2
MATLAB Operators and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Arithmetic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Relational Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Logical Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
String and Character Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Array vs. Matrix Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Array Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Matrix Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Compatible Array Sizes for Basic Operations . . . . . . . . 2-19

Inputs with Compatible Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Inputs with Incompatible Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Array Comparison with Relational Operators . . . . . . . . 2-25

Array Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Logic Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Operator Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Precedence of AND and OR Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Overriding Default Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Average Similar Data Points Using a Tolerance . . . . . . 2-31
Group Scattered Data Using a Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Conditional Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Loop Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

What Is a Regular Expression? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Steps for Building Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Operators and Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
vi Contents
Lookahead Assertions in Regular Expressions . . . . . . . 2-57
Lookahead Assertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Overlapping Matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Logical AND Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Tokens in Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Multiple Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Unmatched Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Tokens in Replacement Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Named Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Dynamic Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Dynamic Match Expressions — (??expr) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Commands That Modify the Match Expression — (??
@cmd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Commands That Serve a Functional Purpose — (?
@cmd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Commands in Replacement Expressions — ${cmd} . . . . 2-71
Comma-Separated Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

What Is a Comma-Separated List? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Generating a Comma-Separated List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Assigning Output from a Comma-Separated List . . . . . 2-76
Assigning to a Comma-Separated List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
How to Use the Comma-Separated Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Fast Fourier Transform Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Alternatives to the eval Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83

Why Avoid the eval Function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Variables with Sequential Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Files with Sequential Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Function Names in Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Field Names in Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
vii
Classes (Data Types)
Overview of MATLAB Classes

3
Fundamental MATLAB Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Numeric Classes
4
Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Integer Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Creating Integer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Arithmetic Operations on Integer Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Largest and Smallest Values for Integer Classes . . . . . . 4-5
Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Double-Precision Floating Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Single-Precision Floating Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Creating Floating-Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Arithmetic Operations on Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . 4-9
Largest and Smallest Values for Floating-Point
Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Accuracy of Floating-Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Avoiding Common Problems with Floating-Point
Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Complex Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Creating Complex Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Infinity and NaN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Infinity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
NaN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Identifying Numeric Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
viii Contents
Display Format for Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Display Format Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Setting Numeric Format in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
The Logical Class

5
Find Array Elements That Meet a Condition . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Apply a Single Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Apply Multiple Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Replace Values that Meet a Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Determine if Arrays Are Logical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Identify Logical Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Test an Entire Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Test Each Array Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Summary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Reduce Logical Arrays to Single Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Truth Table for Logical Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Characters and Strings

6
Represent Text with Character and String Arrays . . . . . 6-2
Create Character Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Create Character Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Create Rectangular Character Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Identify Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Work with Space Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Expand Character Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Create String Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
ix
Cell Arrays of Character Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Convert to Cell Array of Character Vectors . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Functions for Cell Arrays of Character Vectors . . . . . . . 6-21
Analyze Text Data with String Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Test for Empty Strings and Missing Values . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Formatting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Fields of the Formatting Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Setting Field Width and Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Restrictions on Using Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Compare Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Search and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Convert from Numeric Values to Character Array . . . . 6-60

Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Convert Numbers to Character Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Represent Numbers as Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Convert to Specific Radix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Convert from Character Arrays to Numeric Values . . . 6-62

Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Convert from Character Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Convert Text that Represents Numeric Values . . . . . . . 6-63
Convert from Specific Radix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Dates and Time

7
Represent Dates and Times in MATLAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Specify Time Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Convert Date and Time to Julian Date or POSIX

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
x Contents
Set Date and Time Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Formats for Individual Date and Duration Arrays . . . . 7-12
datetime Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
duration Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
calendarDuration Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Default datetime Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Generate Sequence of Dates and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Sequence of Datetime or Duration Values Between
Endpoints with Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Add Duration or Calendar Duration to Create Sequence of
Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Specify Length and Endpoints of Date or Duration
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Sequence of Datetime Values Using Calendar Rules . . . 7-22
Share Code and Data Across Locales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Write Locale-Independent Date and Time Code . . . . . . 7-25
Write Dates in Other Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Read Dates in Other Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Extract or Assign Date and Time Components of

Datetime Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Combine Date and Time from Separate Variables . . . . 7-32
Date and Time Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Compare Dates and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Plot Dates and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Line Plot with Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Line Plot with Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Scatter Plot with Dates and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Plots that Support Dates and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Core Functions Supporting Date and Time Arrays . . . . 7-52
Convert Between Datetime Arrays, Numbers, and

Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Convert Between Datetime and Character Vectors . . . . 7-54
Convert Between Datetime and String Arrays . . . . . . . 7-55
xi
Convert Between Datetime and Date Vectors . . . . . . . . 7-56
Convert Serial Date Numbers to Datetime . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Convert Datetime Arrays to Numeric Values . . . . . . . . 7-57
Carryover in Date Vectors and Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Converting Date Vector Returns Unexpected Output . 7-60
Categorical Arrays
8
Create Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Convert Text in Table Variables to Categorical . . . . . . . 8-7
Plot Categorical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Compare Categorical Array Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Combine Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Combine Categorical Arrays Using Multiplication . . . . 8-27
Access Data Using Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Select Data By Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Common Ways to Access Data Using Categorical
Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Work with Protected Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Advantages of Using Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

Natural Representation of Categorical Data . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Mathematical Ordering for Character Vectors . . . . . . . 8-43
Reduce Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Ordinal Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Order of Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
How to Create Ordinal Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Working with Ordinal Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
xii Contents
Core Functions Supporting Categorical Arrays . . . . . . 8-50
Tables
9
Create and Work with Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Add and Delete Table Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Add and Delete Table Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Clean Messy and Missing Data in Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Modify Units, Descriptions and Table Variable

Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Access Data in a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Ways to Index into a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Create Table from Subset of Larger Table . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Create Array from the Contents of Table . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Calculations on Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Split Data into Groups and Calculate Statistics . . . . . . 9-45
Split Table Data Variables and Apply Functions . . . . . 9-49
Advantages of Using Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Grouping Variables To Split Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Grouping Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
The Split-Apply-Combine Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Missing Group Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Changes to DimensionNames Property in R2016b . . . . 9-65
xiii
Timetables
10
Create Timetables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Resample and Aggregate Data in Timetable . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Combine Timetables and Synchronize Their Data . . . 10-11
Retime and Synchronize Timetable Variables Using

Different Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Select Timetable Data by Row Time and Variable

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Clean Timetable with Missing, Duplicate, or Nonuniform

Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Using Row Labels in Table and Timetable

Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Structures
11
Create Structure Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Access Data in a Structure Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Concatenate Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Generate Field Names from Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Access Data in Nested Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Access Elements of a Nonscalar Struct Array . . . . . . . 11-17
Ways to Organize Data in Structure Arrays . . . . . . . . . 11-19

Plane Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Element-by-Element Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
xiv Contents
Memory Requirements for a Structure Array . . . . . . . 11-23
Cell Arrays
12
What Is a Cell Array? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Create Cell Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Access Data in Cell Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Add Cells to Cell Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Delete Data from Cell Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Combine Cell Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Pass Contents of Cell Arrays to Functions . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Preallocate Memory for Cell Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Cell vs. Struct Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Multilevel Indexing to Access Parts of Cells . . . . . . . . 12-25
Function Handles
13
Create Function Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
What Is a Function Handle? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Creating Function Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Anonymous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Arrays of Function Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Saving and Loading Function Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Pass Function to Another Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
xv
Call Local Functions Using Function Handles . . . . . . . 13-8
Compare Function Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Map Containers
14
Overview of Map Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Description of Map Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Properties of Map Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Methods of Map Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Create Map Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Construct Empty Map Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Construct Initialized Map Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Combine Map Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Examine Contents of Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Read and Write Using Key Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

Read From Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Add Key/Value Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Build Map with Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Modify Keys and Values in Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

Remove Keys and Values from Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Modify Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Modify Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Modify Copy of Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Map to Different Value Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

Map to Structure Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Map to Cell Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
xvi Contents
Combining Unlike Classes
15
Valid Combinations of Unlike Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Combining Unlike Integer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Example of Combining Unlike Integer Sizes . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Example of Combining Signed with Unsigned . . . . . . . . 15-4
Combining Integer and Noninteger Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Combining Cell Arrays with Non-Cell Arrays . . . . . . . . 15-6
Empty Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Concatenation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

Combining Single and Double Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Combining Integer and Double Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Combining Character and Double Types . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Combining Logical and Double Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Using Objects
16
Object Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Two Copy Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Handle Object Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Value Object Copy Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Handle Object Copy Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Testing for Handle or Value Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
xvii
Defining Your Own Classes
17
Scripts and Functions
Scripts
18
Create Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Add Comments to Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Run Code Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7

Divide Your File into Code Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Evaluate Code Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Navigate Among Code Sections in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Example of Evaluating Code Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Change the Appearance of Code Sections . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Use Code Sections with Control Statements and
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
Scripts vs. Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Add Functions to Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18

Add Local Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Access Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Run Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Add and Run Sections in Live Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Live Scripts
19
What Is a Live Script? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Live Script vs. Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
xviii Contents
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Unsupported Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Save Live Script as Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Create Live Scripts in the Live Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

Open New Live Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Run Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Display Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Format Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Run Sections in Live Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15

Divide Your File Into Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
Evaluate Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
View Code Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
Modify Figures in Live Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18

Explore Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18
Update Code with Figure Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
Add Formatting and Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21
Add and Modify Multiple Subplots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-24
Save and Print Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-30
Format Live Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-32

Autoformatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
Insert Equations into Live Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-37

Insert Equation Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-37
Insert LaTeX Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-40
Share Live Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-49
Live Script File Format (.mlx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-51

Benefits of Live Script File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-51
Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-51
xix
Function Basics
20
Create Functions in Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Syntax for Function Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Contents of Functions and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
End Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Add Help for Your Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Run Functions in the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Base and Function Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Share Data Between Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Best Practice: Passing Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Nested Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
Persistent Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13
Evaluating in Another Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14
Check Variable Scope in Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-16

Use Automatic Function and Variable Highlighting . . 20-16
Example of Using Automatic Function and Variable
Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17
Types of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20

Local and Nested Functions in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20
Private Functions in a Subfolder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21
Anonymous Functions Without a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21
Anonymous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-24

What Are Anonymous Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-24
Variables in the Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25
Multiple Anonymous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-26
Functions with No Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
Functions with Multiple Inputs or Outputs . . . . . . . . . 20-27
Arrays of Anonymous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28
Local Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30
xx Contents
Nested Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32
What Are Nested Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32
Requirements for Nested Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32
Sharing Variables Between Parent and Nested
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-33
Using Handles to Store Function Parameters . . . . . . . 20-34
Visibility of Nested Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37
Variables in Nested and Anonymous Functions . . . . . 20-39
Private Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
Function Precedence Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
Function Arguments
21
Find Number of Function Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Support Variable Number of Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Support Variable Number of Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
Validate Number of Function Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Argument Checking in Nested Functions . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Ignore Function Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
Check Function Inputs with validateattributes . . . . . 21-14
Parse Function Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-17
Input Parser Validation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21
xxi
Debugging MATLAB Code
22
Debug a MATLAB Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Set Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Run File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Pause a Running File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Find and Fix a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Step Through File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
End Debugging Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
Set Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9

Standard Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
Conditional Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
Error Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Breakpoints in Anonymous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Invalid Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
Disable Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Clear Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Examine Values While Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-16

Select Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-16
View Variable Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-16
Presenting MATLAB Code

23
Options for Presenting Your Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Publishing MATLAB Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Publishing Markup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7

Markup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
Sections and Section Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Text Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11
Bulleted and Numbered Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
Text and Code Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13
External File Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14
External Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-15
xxii Contents
Image Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-17
LaTeX Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20
HTML Markup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-23
LaTeX Markup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24
Output Preferences for Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-26

How to Edit Publishing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-26
Specify Output File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-27
Run Code During Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-28
Manipulate Graphics in Publishing Output . . . . . . . . . 23-30
Save a Publish Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-34
Manage a Publish Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-36
Create a MATLAB Notebook with Microsoft Word . . . 23-40

Getting Started with MATLAB Notebooks . . . . . . . . . 23-40
Creating and Evaluating Cells in a MATLAB
Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-42
Formatting a MATLAB Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-47
Tips for Using MATLAB Notebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-49
Configuring the MATLAB Notebook Software . . . . . . . 23-50
Coding and Productivity Tips

24
Open and Save Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Open Existing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Save Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Check Code for Errors and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6

Automatically Check Code in the Editor — Code
Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6
Create a Code Analyzer Message Report . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
Adjust Code Analyzer Message Indicators and
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
Understand Code Containing Suppressed Messages . . 24-15
Understand the Limitations of Code Analysis . . . . . . . 24-16
Enable MATLAB Compiler Deployment Messages . . . 24-19
xxiii
Improve Code Readability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-21
Indenting Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-21
Right-Side Text Limit Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-23
Code Folding — Expand and Collapse Code
Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-23
Find and Replace Text in Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-28

Find Any Text in the Current File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-28
Find and Replace Functions or Variables in the Current
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-28
Automatically Rename All Functions or Variables in a
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-30
Find and Replace Any Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-32
Find Text in Multiple File Names or Files . . . . . . . . . . 24-32
Function Alternative for Finding Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-32
Perform an Incremental Search in the Editor . . . . . . . 24-32
Go To Location in File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-33

Navigate to a Specific Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-33
Set Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-35
Navigate Backward and Forward in Files . . . . . . . . . . 24-36
Open a File or Variable from Within a File . . . . . . . . . 24-37
Display Two Parts of a File Simultaneously . . . . . . . . 24-38
Add Reminders to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-41

Working with TODO/FIXME Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-41
MATLAB Code Analyzer Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-44

Running the Code Analyzer Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-44
Changing Code Based on Code Analyzer Messages . . . 24-46
Other Ways to Access Code Analyzer Messages . . . . . . 24-46
Programming Utilities
25
Identify Program Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Simple Display of Program File Dependencies . . . . . . . 25-2
Detailed Display of Program File Dependencies . . . . . . 25-2
Dependencies Within a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
xxiv Contents
Protect Your Source Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
Building a Content Obscured Format with P-Code . . . . 25-7
Building a Standalone Executable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8
Create Hyperlinks that Run Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10

Run a Single Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
Run Multiple Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
Provide Command Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
Include Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
Create and Share Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13

Create Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
Share Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
Manage Java Class Path for Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
Software Development
Error Handling
26
Exception Handling in a MATLAB Application . . . . . . . 26-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Getting an Exception at the Command Line . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Getting an Exception in Your Program Code . . . . . . . . . 26-3
Generating a New Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
Capture Information About Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
The MException Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
Properties of the MException Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
Methods of the MException Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-14
Throw an Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15
Respond to an Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17
The try/catch Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17
xxv
Suggestions on How to Handle an Exception . . . . . . . . 26-19
Clean Up When Functions Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22
Examples of Cleaning Up a Program Upon Exit . . . . . 26-23
Retrieving Information About the Cleanup Routine . . 26-25
Using onCleanup Versus try/catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-26
onCleanup in Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-27
Issue Warnings and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28

Issue Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28
Throw Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28
Add Run-Time Parameters to Your Warnings and
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-29
Add Identifiers to Warnings and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . 26-30
Suppress Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-32

Turn Warnings On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-33
Restore Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-35

Disable and Restore a Particular Warning . . . . . . . . . 26-35
Disable and Restore Multiple Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 26-36
Change How Warnings Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-38

Enable Verbose Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-38
Display a Stack Trace on a Specific Warning . . . . . . . . 26-38
Use try/catch to Handle Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-40
Program Scheduling
27
Schedule Command Execution Using Timer . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Example: Displaying a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
Timer Callback Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5

Associating Commands with Timer Object Events . . . . 27-5
Creating Callback Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
xxvi Contents
Specifying the Value of Callback Function
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8
Handling Timer Queuing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10

Drop Mode (Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10
Error Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12
Queue Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13
Performance
28
Measure Performance of Your Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
Overview of Performance Timing Functions . . . . . . . . . 28-2
Time Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
Time Portions of Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
The cputime Function vs. tic/toc and timeit . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
Tips for Measuring Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
Profile to Improve Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5

What Is Profiling? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
Profiling Process and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
Using the Profiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6
Profile Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-8
Profile Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
Use Profiler to Determine Code Coverage . . . . . . . . . . 28-12
Techniques to Improve Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-14

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-14
Code Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-14
Programming Practices for Performance . . . . . . . . . . . 28-14
Tips on Specific MATLAB Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15
Preallocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-17
Preallocating a Nondouble Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-17
Vectorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-19
Using Vectorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-19
Array Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-20
Logical Array Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-22
xxvii
Matrix Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-23
Ordering, Setting, and Counting Operations . . . . . . . . 28-24
Functions Commonly Used in Vectorization . . . . . . . . 28-26
Memory Usage
29
Strategies for Efficient Use of Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Ways to Reduce the Amount of Memory Required . . . . . 29-2
Using Appropriate Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
How to Avoid Fragmenting Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
Reclaiming Used Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-8
Resolve “Out of Memory” Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-9

General Suggestions for Reclaiming Memory . . . . . . . . 29-9
Increase System Swap Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-10
Set the Process Limit on Linux Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 29-10
Disable Java VM on Linux Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-10
Free System Resources on Windows Systems . . . . . . . 29-11
How MATLAB Allocates Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-12

Memory Allocation for Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-12
Data Structures and Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-16
Custom Help and Documentation

30
Create Help for Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
Help Text from the doc Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
Custom Help Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
Check Which Programs Have Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9
Create Help Summary Files — Contents.m . . . . . . . . . 30-12

What Is a Contents.m File? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
Create a Contents.m File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
Check an Existing Contents.m File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
xxviii Contents
Display Custom Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Create HTML Help Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
Create info.xml File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17
Create helptoc.xml File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19
Build a Search Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-21
Address Validation Errors for info.xml Files . . . . . . . . 30-22
Display Custom Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25

How to Display Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
Elements of the demos.xml File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
Source Control Interface

31
About MathWorks Source Control Integration . . . . . . . 31-3
Classic and Distributed Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3
Select or Disable Source Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6

Select Source Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
Disable Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
Create New Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
Review Changes in Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-9
Mark Files for Addition to Source Control . . . . . . . . . . 31-10
Resolve Source Control Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-11

Examining and Resolving Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-11
Resolve Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-11
Merge Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-12
Extract Conflict Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-13
Commit Modified Files to Source Control . . . . . . . . . . 31-15
Revert Changes in Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-16

Revert Local Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-16
Revert a File to a Specified Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-16
xxix
Set Up SVN Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-17
SVN Source Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-17
Register Binary Files with SVN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-18
Standard Repository Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-21
Tag Versions of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-21
Enforce Locking Files Before Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-22
Share a Subversion Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-22
Check Out from SVN Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-24

Retrieve Tagged Version of Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-26
Update SVN File Status and Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-28

Refresh Status of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-28
Update Revisions of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-28
Get SVN File Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-29
Set Up Git Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-30

About Git Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-30
Install Command-Line Git Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-31
Register Binary Files with Git . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-32
Add Git Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-34
Clone from Git Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-36

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-37
Update Git File Status and Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-38

Refresh Status of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-38
Update Revisions of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-38
Branch and Merge with Git . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-40

Create Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-40
Switch Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-42
Compare Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-42
Merge Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-42
Revert to Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-43
Delete Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-43
Pull, Push and Fetch Files with Git . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-45

Pull and Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-45
Fetch and Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-46
xxx Contents
Move, Rename, or Delete Files Under Source
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-48
Customize External Source Control to Use MATLAB for

Diff and Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-49
MSSCCI Source Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-52
Set Up MSSCCI Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-53

Create Projects in Source Control System . . . . . . . . . . 31-53
Specify Source Control System with MATLAB
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-55
Register Source Control Project with MATLAB
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-56
Add Files to Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-58
Check Files In and Out from MSSCCI Source

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-60
Check Files Into Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-60
Check Files Out of Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-61
Undoing the Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-61
Additional MSSCCI Source Control Actions . . . . . . . . 31-63

Getting the Latest Version of Files for Viewing or
Compiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-63
Removing Files from the Source Control System . . . . . 31-64
Showing File History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-65
Comparing the Working Copy of a File to the Latest
Version in Source Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-66
Viewing Source Control Properties of a File . . . . . . . . 31-68
Starting the Source Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-68
Access MSSCCI Source Control from Editors . . . . . . . 31-70
Troubleshoot MSSCCI Source Control Problems . . . . 31-71

Source Control Error: Provider Not Present or Not
Installed Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-71
Restriction Against @ Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-72
Add to Source Control Is the Only Action Available . . . 31-72
More Solutions for Source Control Problems . . . . . . . . 31-73
xxxi
Unit Testing
32
Write Test Using Live Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
Write Script-Based Unit Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7
Write Script-Based Test Using Local Functions . . . . . 32-14
Extending Script-Based Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-18

Test Suite Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-18
Test Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-19
Programmatic Access of Test Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 32-20
Test Runner Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-20
Write Function-Based Unit Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22

Create Test Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22
Run the Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-25
Analyze the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-25
Write Simple Test Case Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 32-27
Write Test Using Setup and Teardown Functions . . . . 32-32
Extending Function-Based Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-39

Fixtures for Setup and Teardown Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-39
Test Logging and Verbosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-40
Test Suite Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-41
Test Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-41
Test Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-42
Programmatic Access of Test Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 32-42
Test Runner Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-43
Author Class-Based Unit Tests in MATLAB . . . . . . . . . 32-44

The Test Class Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-44
The Unit Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-44
Additional Features for Advanced Test Classes . . . . . . 32-46
Write Simple Test Case Using Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-48
Write Setup and Teardown Code Using Classes . . . . . 32-53

Test Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-53
xxxii Contents
Test Case with Method-Level Setup Code . . . . . . . . . . 32-53
Test Case with Class-Level Setup Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-54
Types of Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-57
Tag Unit Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-60

Tag Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-60
Select and Run Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-61
Write Tests Using Shared Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-65
Create Basic Custom Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-69
Create Advanced Custom Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-72
Create Basic Parameterized Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-79
Create Advanced Parameterized Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-85
Create Simple Test Suites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-94
Run Tests for Various Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-97

Set Up Example Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-97
Run All Tests in Class or Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-97
Run Single Test in Class or Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-98
Run Test Suites by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-99
Run Test Suites from Test Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-99
Run Tests with Customized Test Runner . . . . . . . . . . 32-99
Programmatically Access Test Diagnostics . . . . . . . . 32-101
Add Plugin to Test Runner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-102
Write Plugins to Extend TestRunner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-105

Custom Plugins Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-105
Extending Test Level Plugin Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-106
Extending Test Class Level Plugin Methods . . . . . . . 32-106
Extending Test Suite Level Plugin Methods . . . . . . . 32-107
Create Custom Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-109
Write Plugin to Save Diagnostic Details . . . . . . . . . . . 32-116
xxxiii
Plugin to Generate Custom Test Output Format . . . . 32-121
Analyze Test Case Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-125
Analyze Failed Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-129
Dynamically Filtered Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-132

Test Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-132
Method Setup and Teardown Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-135
Class Setup and Teardown Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-137
Create Custom Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-140
Create Custom Boolean Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-143
Create Custom Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-146
Overview of Performance Testing Framework . . . . . 32-152

Determine Bounds of Measured Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-152
Types of Time Experiments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-153
Write Performance Tests with Measurement
Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-154
Run Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-155
Understand Invalid Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-155
Test Performance Using Scripts or Functions . . . . . . 32-157
Test Performance Using Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-163
Create Mock Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-171
Specify Mock Object Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-180

Define Mock Method Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-180
Define Mock Property Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-182
Define Repeating and Subsequent Behavior . . . . . . . 32-183
Summary of Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-185
Qualify Mock Object Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-187

Qualify Mock Method Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-188
Qualify Mock Property Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-189
Use Mock Object Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-190
Summary of Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-192
xxxiv Contents
System object Usage and Authoring
33
What Are System Objects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
Running a System Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
System Object Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
System Objects vs MATLAB Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6

System Objects vs. MATLAB Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
Process Audio Data Using Only MATLAB Functions Code . . 33-6
Process Audio Data Using System Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
System Design in MATLAB Using System Objects . . . . . . . . 33-9

System Design and Simulation in MATLAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9
Predefined Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Create Components for Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Component Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Configure Component Property Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-11
Create and Configure Components at the Same Time . . . . . 33-11
Connecting System Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
Connect Components in a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
Run Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-13
Reconfiguring Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-13
Change a Tunable Property in Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-14
Define Basic System Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-15

Create System Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-15
Define Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-15
Change Number of Inputs or Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-18
Validate Property and Input Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-22
Initialize Properties and Setup One-Time Calculations . . . 33-25
Set Property Values at Construction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-28
Reset Algorithm and Release Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-30

Reset Algorithm State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-30
Release System Object Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-31
Define Property Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-33
xxxv
Hide Inactive Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-37
Specify Inactive Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-37
Complete Class Definition File with Inactive Properties
Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-37
Limit Property Values to Finite List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-39
Process Tuned Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-42
Define Composite System Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-44
Define Finite Source Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-47

Use the FiniteSource Class and Specify End of the Source . 33-47
Complete Class Definition File with Finite Source . . . . . . . 33-47
Save and Load System Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-49

Save System Object and Child Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-49
Load System Object and Child Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-49
Complete Class Definition Files with Save and Load . . . . . . 33-50
Define System Object Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-53
Specify Locked Input Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-55
Use Update and Output for Nondirect Feedthrough . . . . . 33-57
Methods Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-60

Setup Method Call Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-60
Running the Object (Step Method) Call Sequence . . . . . . . . 33-61
Reset Method Call Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-61
Release Method Call Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-62
Best Practices for Defining System Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-63

System Object Input Arguments and ~ in Code Examples . . 33-65
Insert System Object Code Using MATLAB Editor . . . . . . . 33-66

Define System Objects with Code Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-66
Create Fahrenheit Temperature String Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-70
Create Custom Property for Freezing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-71
Define Input Size As Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-72
Analyze System Object Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-74

View and Navigate System object Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-74
xxxvi Contents
Example: Go to StepImpl Method Using Analyzer . . . . . . . . 33-74
Use Enumerations in System Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-77
Use Global Variables in System Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-78

System Object Global Variables in MATLAB . . . . . . . . . . . 33-78
System Object Global Variables in Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-78
xxxvii
Language
39
1
Syntax Basics
• “Continue Long Statements on Multiple Lines” on page 1-2

• “Call Functions” on page 1-3
• “Ignore Function Outputs” on page 1-4
• “Variable Names” on page 1-5
• “Case and Space Sensitivity” on page 1-7
• “Command vs. Function Syntax” on page 1-9
• “Common Errors When Calling Functions” on page 1-13
1 Syntax Basics
Continue Long Statements on Multiple Lines

This example shows how to continue a statement to the next line using ellipsis (...).
s = 1 - 1/2 + 1/3 - 1/4 + 1/5 ...

- 1/6 + 1/7 - 1/8 + 1/9;
Build a long character vector by concatenating shorter vectors together:

mytext = ['Accelerating the pace of ' ...
'engineering and science'];
The start and end quotation marks for a character vector must appear on the same line.
For example, this code returns an error, because each line contains only one quotation
mark:
mytext = 'Accelerating the pace of ...
engineering and science'
An ellipsis outside a quoted text is equivalent to a space. For example,

x = [1.23...
4.56];
is the same as
x = [1.23 4.56];
1-2
Call Functions
Call Functions
These examples show how to call a MATLAB function. To run the examples, you must
first create numeric arrays A and B, such as:
A = [1 3 5];
B = [10 6 4];
Enclose inputs to functions in parentheses:
max(A)
Separate multiple inputs with commas:
max(A,B)
Store output from a function by assigning it to a variable:
maxA = max(A)
Enclose multiple outputs in square brackets:
[maxA, location] = max(A)
Call a function that does not require any inputs, and does not return any outputs, by
typing only the function name:
clc
Enclose text inputs in single quotation marks:
disp('hello world')
See Also
Related Examples
• “Ignore Function Outputs” on page 1-4
1-3
1 Syntax Basics
Ignore Function Outputs

This example shows how to request specific outputs from a function.
Request all three possible outputs from the fileparts function.
helpFile = which('help');
[helpPath,name,ext] = fileparts(helpFile);
The current workspace now contains three variables from fileparts: helpPath, name,
and ext. In this case, the variables are small. However, some functions return results
that use much more memory. If you do not need those variables, they waste space on
your system.
Request only the first output, ignoring the second and third.
helpPath = fileparts(helpFile);
For any function, you can request only the first outputs (where is less than or equal
to the number of possible outputs) and ignore any remaining outputs. If you request
more than one output, enclose the variable names in square brackets, [].
Ignore the first output using a tilde (~).
[~,name,ext] = fileparts(helpFile);
You can ignore any number of function outputs, in any position in the argument list.
Separate consecutive tildes with a comma, such as
[~,~,ext] = fileparts(helpFile);
1-4
Variable Names
Variable Names
In this section...
“Valid Names” on page 1-5
“Conflicts with Function Names” on page 1-5
Valid Names
A valid variable name starts with a letter, followed by letters, digits, or underscores.
MATLAB is case sensitive, so A and a are not the same variable. The maximum length of
a variable name is the value that the namelengthmax command returns.
You cannot define variables with the same names as MATLAB keywords, such as if or
end. For a complete list, run the iskeyword command.
Examples of valid names: Invalid names:
x6 6x
lastValue end
n_factorial n!
Conflicts with Function Names

Avoid creating variables with the same name as a function (such as i, j, mode, char,
size, and path). In general, variable names take precedence over function names. If you
create a variable that uses the name of a function, you sometimes get unexpected results.
Check whether a proposed name is already in use with the exist or which function.
exist returns 0 if there are no existing variables, functions, or other artifacts with the
proposed name. For example:
exist checkname
ans =
0
If you inadvertently create a variable with a name conflict, remove the variable from
memory with the clear function.
1-5
1 Syntax Basics
Another potential source of name conflicts occurs when you define a function that calls
load or eval (or similar functions) to add variables to the workspace. In some cases,
load or eval add variables that have the same names as functions. Unless these
variables are in the function workspace before the call to load or eval, the MATLAB
parser interprets the variable names as function names. For more information, see:
• “Unexpected Results When Loading Variables Within a Function”

• “Alternatives to the eval Function” on page 2-83
See Also
clear | exist | iskeyword | isvarname | namelengthmax | which
1-6
Case and Space Sensitivity
Case and Space Sensitivity

MATLAB code is sensitive to casing, and insensitive to blank spaces except when
defining arrays.
Uppercase and Lowercase
In MATLAB code, use an exact match with regard to case for variables, files, and
functions. For example, if you have a variable, a, you cannot refer to that variable as A. It
is a best practice to use lowercase only when naming functions. This is especially useful
when you use both Microsoft® Windows® and UNIX®1 platforms because their file
systems behave differently with regard to case.
When you use the help function, the help displays some function names in all uppercase,
for example, PLOT, solely to distinguish the function name from the rest of the text. Some
functions for interfacing to Oracle® Java® software do use mixed case and the command-
line help and the documentation accurately reflect that.
Spaces
Blank spaces around operators such as -, :, and ( ), are optional, but they can improve
readability. For example, MATLAB interprets the following statements the same way.
y = sin (3 * pi) / 2
y=sin(3*pi)/2
However, blank spaces act as delimiters in horizontal concatenation. When defining row
vectors, you can use spaces and commas interchangeably to separate elements:
A = [1, 0 2, 3 3]
A =
1 0 2 3 3
Because of this flexibility, check to ensure that MATLAB stores the correct values. For
example, the statement [1 sin (pi) 3] produces a much different result than [1
sin(pi) 3] does.
[1 sin (pi) 3]
1. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
1-7
1 Syntax Basics
Error using sin

Not enough input arguments.
[1 sin(pi) 3]
ans =
1.0000 0.0000 3.0000
1-8
Command vs. Function Syntax

In this section...
“Command and Function Syntaxes” on page 1-9
“Avoid Common Syntax Mistakes” on page 1-10
“How MATLAB Recognizes Command Syntax” on page 1-11
Command and Function Syntaxes

In MATLAB, these statements are equivalent:
load durer.mat % Command syntax
load('durer.mat') % Function syntax
This equivalence is sometimes referred to as command-function duality.
All functions support this standard function syntax:

[output1, ..., outputM] = functionName(input1, ..., inputN)
If you do not require any outputs from the function, and all of the inputs are character
vectors (that is, text enclosed in single quotation marks), you can use this simpler
command syntax:
functionName input1 ... inputN
With command syntax, you separate inputs with spaces rather than commas, and do not
enclose input arguments in parentheses. Single quotation marks are optional, unless the
input contains spaces. For example:
disp 'hello world'
When a function input is a variable, you must use function syntax to pass the value to
the function. Command syntax always passes inputs as literal text and cannot pass
variable values. For example, create a variable and call the disp function with function
syntax to pass the value of the variable:
A = 123;
disp(A)
This code returns the expected result,
1-9
1 Syntax Basics
123
You cannot use command syntax to pass the value of A, because this call
disp A
is equivalent to
disp('A')
and returns
A
Avoid Common Syntax Mistakes

Suppose that your workspace contains these variables:
filename = 'accounts.txt';
A = int8(1:8);
B = A;
The following table illustrates common misapplications of command syntax.

This Command... Is Equivalent to... Correct Syntax for Passing Value
open filename open('filename') open(filename)
isequal A B isequal('A','B') isequal(A,B)
strcmp class(A) int8 strcmp('class(A)','int8' strcmp(class(A),'int8')
)
cd matlabroot cd('matlabroot') cd(matlabroot)
isnumeric 500 isnumeric('500') isnumeric(500)
round 3.499 round('3.499'), which is round(3.499)
equivalent to round([51 46
52 57 57])
Passing Variable Names
Some functions expect character vectors for variable names, such as save, load, clear,
and whos. For example,
whos -file durer.mat X
1-10
requests information about variable X in the example file durer.mat. This command is
equivalent to
whos('-file','durer.mat','X')
How MATLAB Recognizes Command Syntax

Consider the potentially ambiguous statement
ls ./d
This could be a call to the ls function with the folder ./d as its argument. It also could
request element-wise division on the array ls, using the variable d as the divisor.
If you issue such a statement at the command line, MATLAB can access the current
workspace and path to determine whether ls and d are functions or variables. However,
some components, such as the Code Analyzer and the Editor/Debugger, operate without
reference to the path or workspace. In those cases, MATLAB uses syntactic rules to
determine whether an expression is a function call using command syntax.
In general, when MATLAB recognizes an identifier (which might name a function or a

variable), it analyzes the characters that follow the identifier to determine the type of
expression, as follows:
• An equal sign (=) implies assignment. For example:
ls =d
• An open parenthesis after an identifier implies a function call. For example:
ls('./d')
• Space after an identifier, but not after a potential operator, implies a function call
using command syntax. For example:
ls ./d
• Spaces on both sides of a potential operator, or no spaces on either side of the
operator, imply an operation on variables. For example, these statements are
equivalent:
ls ./ d
ls./d
1-11
1 Syntax Basics
Therefore, the potentially ambiguous statement ls ./d is a call to the ls function using
command syntax.
The best practice is to avoid defining variable names that conflict with common
functions, to prevent any ambiguity.
1-12
Common Errors When Calling Functions

In this section...
“Conflicting Function and Variable Names” on page 1-13
“Undefined Functions or Variables” on page 1-13
Conflicting Function and Variable Names

MATLAB throws an error if a variable and function have been given the same name and
there is insufficient information available for MATLAB to resolve the conflict. You may
see an error message something like the following:
Error: <functionName> was previously used as a variable,
conflicting with its use here as the name of a function
or command.
where <functionName> is the name of the function.
Certain uses of the eval and load functions can also result in a similar conflict between
variable and function names. For more information, see:
• “Conflicts with Function Names” on page 1-5

• “Unexpected Results When Loading Variables Within a Function”
Undefined Functions or Variables

You may encounter the following error message, or something similar, while working
with functions or variables in MATLAB:
Undefined function or variable 'x'.
These errors usually indicate that MATLAB cannot find a particular variable or
MATLAB program file in the current directory or on the search path. The root cause is
likely to be one of the following:
• The name of the function has been misspelled.

• The function name and name of the file containing the function are not the same.
1-13
1 Syntax Basics
• The toolbox to which the function belongs is not installed.

• The search path to the function has been changed.
• The function is part of a toolbox that you do not have a license for.
Follow the steps described in this section to resolve this situation.
Verify the Spelling of the Function Name
One of the most common errors is misspelling the function name. Especially with longer
function names or names containing similar characters (e.g., letter l and numeral one), it
is easy to make an error that is not easily detected.
If you misspell a MATLAB function, a suggested function name appears in the Command
Window. For example, this command fails because it includes an uppercase letter in the
function name:
accumArray
Undefined function or variable 'accumArray'.
Did you mean:

>> accumarray
Press Enter to execute the suggested command or Esc to dismiss it.
Make Sure the Function Name Matches the File Name
You establish the name for a function when you write its function definition line. This
name should always match the name of the file you save it to. For example, if you create
a function named curveplot,
function curveplot(xVal, yVal)

- program code -
then you should name the file containing that function curveplot.m. If you create a
pcode file for the function, then name that file curveplot.p. In the case of conflicting
function and file names, the file name overrides the name given to the function. In this
example, if you save the curveplot function to a file named curveplotfunction.m,
then attempts to invoke the function using the function name will fail:
curveplot
Undefined function or variable 'curveplot'.
1-14
If you encounter this problem, change either the function name or file name so that they
are the same. If you have difficulty locating the file that uses this function, use the
MATLAB Find Files utility as follows:
1
On the Home tab, in the File section, click Find Files.
2 Under Find files named: enter *.m
3 Under Find files containing text: enter the function name.
4 Click the Find button
Make Sure the Toolbox Is Installed
If you are unable to use a built-in function from MATLAB or its toolboxes, make sure
that the function is installed.
If you do not know which toolbox supports the function you need, search for the function
documentation at http://www.mathworks.com/help. The toolbox name appears at
the top of the function reference page.
1-15
1 Syntax Basics
Once you know which toolbox the function belongs to, use the ver function to see which
toolboxes are installed on the system from which you run MATLAB. The ver function
displays a list of all currently installed MathWorks® products. If you can locate the
toolbox you need in the output displayed by ver, then the toolbox is installed. For help
with installing MathWorks products, see the Installation Guide documentation.
If you do not see the toolbox and you believe that it is installed, then perhaps the
MATLAB path has been set incorrectly. Go on to the next section.
Verify the Path Used to Access the Function
This step resets the path to the default. Because MATLAB stores the toolbox information
in a cache file, you will need to first update this cache and then reset the path. To do this,
1
On the Home tab, in the Environment section, click Preferences.
The Preference dialog box appears.

2 Under the MATLAB > General node, click the Update Toolbox Path Cache
button.
3
On the Home tab, in the Environment section, click Set Path....
The Set Path dialog box opens.

4 Click Default.
A small dialog box opens warning that you will lose your current path settings if you
proceed. Click Yes if you decide to proceed.
(If you have added any custom paths to MATLAB, you will need to restore those later)
Run ver again to see if the toolbox is installed. If not, you may need to reinstall this
toolbox to use this function. See the Related Solution 1-1CBD3, "How do I install
additional toolboxes into my existing MATLAB" for more information about installing a
toolbox.
Once ver shows your toolbox, run the following command to see if you can find the
function:
which -all <functionname>
1-16
replacing <functionname> with the name of the function. You should be presented with
the path(s) of the function file. If you get a message indicating that the function name
was not found, you may need to reinstall that toolbox to make the function active.
Verify that Your License Covers The Toolbox
If you receive the error message “Has no license available”, there is a licensing
related issue preventing you from using the function. To find the error that is occurring,
you can use the following command:
license checkout <toolbox_license_key_name>
replacing <toolbox_license_key_name> with the proper key name for the toolbox
that contains your function. To find the license key name, look at the INCREMENT lines in
your license file. For information on how to find your license file see the related solution:
1-63ZIR6, "Where are the license files for MATLAB located?”
The license key names of all the toolboxes are located after each INCREMENT tag in the
license.dat file. For example:
INCREMENT MATLAB MLM 17 00-jan-0000 0 k

B454554BADECED4258 \HOSTID=123456 SN=123456
If your license.dat file has no INCREMENT lines, refer to your license administrator for
them. For example, to test the licensing for Symbolic Math Toolbox™, you would run the
following command:
license checkout Symbolic_Toolbox
A correct testing gives the result "ANS=1". An incorrect testing results in an error from
the license manager. You can either troubleshoot the error by looking up the license
manager error here:
http://www.mathworks.com/support/install.html
or you can contact the Installation Support Team with the error here:
http://www.mathworks.com/support/contact_us/index.html
When contacting support, provide your license number, your MATLAB version, the
function you are using, and the license manager error (if applicable).
1-17
2
Program Components
• “MATLAB Operators and Special Characters” on page 2-2

• “Array vs. Matrix Operations” on page 2-13
• “Compatible Array Sizes for Basic Operations” on page 2-19
• “Array Comparison with Relational Operators” on page 2-25
• “Operator Precedence” on page 2-29
• “Average Similar Data Points Using a Tolerance” on page 2-31
• “Group Scattered Data Using a Tolerance” on page 2-34
• “Conditional Statements” on page 2-37
• “Loop Control Statements” on page 2-39
• “Regular Expressions” on page 2-41
• “Lookahead Assertions in Regular Expressions” on page 2-57
• “Tokens in Regular Expressions” on page 2-60
• “Dynamic Regular Expressions” on page 2-66
• “Comma-Separated Lists” on page 2-74
2 Program Components
MATLAB Operators and Special Characters

This page contains a comprehensive listing of all MATLAB operators, symbols, and
special characters.
Arithmetic Operators
Symbol Role More Information
+ Addition plus
+ Unary plus uplus
- Subtraction minus
- Unary minus uminus
.* Element-wise multiplication times
* Matrix multiplication mtimes
./ Element-wise right division rdivide
/ Matrix right division mrdivide
.\ Element-wise left division ldivide
Matrix left division
\ mldivide
(also known as backslash)
.^ Element-wise power power
^ Matrix power mpower
.' Transpose transpose
' Complex conjugate transpose ctranspose
Relational Operators
== Equal to eq
~= Not equal to ne
> Greater than gt
>= Greater than or equal to ge
2-2

< Less than lt
<= Less than or equal to le
Logical Operators
& Logical AND and
| Logical OR or
Logical AND (with short-
&&
circuiting) Logical Operators:
Logical OR (with short- Short-Circuit && ||
||
circuiting)
~ Logical NOT not
Special Characters
Symbol Symbol Name Role
The @ symbol form

@ At symbol Function handle construction and reference anonymous functio
• “Create Functio
2-3
The period charact

• Decimal point MATLAB operator
enables you to acce
• Element-wise operations
. Period or dot
• Structure field access • “Array vs. Matr
• Object property or method specifier • “Structures”
• “Access Propert
Three or more per

or more periods oc
continues to the ne
that follows the th
Dot dot dot or
... Line continuation
ellipsis
Note MATLAB int
be valid as a single
• “Continue Long
2-4
Use commas to sep

, Comma Separator arguments, and co
• horzcat
2-5
Use the colon oper

• Vector creation of a for loop.
: Colon • Indexing
• colon
• For-loop iteration
• “Creating and C
2-6
Use semicolons to
• Signify end of row of a line of code.
; Semicolon
• Suppress output of code line
• vertcat
Use parentheses to
• Operator precedence into an array.
( ) Parentheses • Function argument enclosure
• “Operator Prec
• Indexing
• “Matrix Indexin
2-7
Square brackets en
• Array construction of array elements,
• Array concatenation
[ ] Square brackets • “Creating and C
• Empty matrix and array element deletion
• horzcat
• Multiple output argument assignment
• vertcat
Use curly braces to

{ } Curly brackets Cell array assignment and contents array.
• “Cell Arrays”
The percent sign is

program. This text
• Comment Some functions als
% Percent
• Conversion specifier
Two percent signs
• “Add Comment
2-8

The %{ and %} sym
Note With the exc

Percent curly
%{ %} Block comments the lines that imm
bracket
on these lines.
• “Add Comment
The exclamation p
! Exclamation point Operating system command MATLAB.
• “Shell Escape F
The question mark
? Question mark Metaclass for MATLAB class works only with a
• metaclass
Use single quotes
'' Single quotes Character array constructor
• “Represent Tex
Use double quotes
"" Double quotes String constructor
• “Represent Tex
Use the space char

N/A Space character Separator
by a function. In th
2-9
Use the tilde symb

• Logical NOT • not
~ Tilde
• Argument placeholder • “Ignore Functio
• “Ignore Functio
Use the equal sign

variable B.
= Equal sign Assignment
Note The = charac
two arrays. See eq
String and Character Formatting

Some special characters can only be used in the text of a character vector or string. You
can use these special characters to insert new lines or carriage returns, specify folder
paths, and more.
Use the special characters in this table to specify a folder path using a character vector
or string.
In addition to th
/
characters separ
Slash and Backslash File or folder path separation
\ systems, both sl
based systems, y
2-10

Two dots in succ
.. Dot dot Parent folder to specify folder
• cd
In addition to be
wildcard charac
* Asterisk Wildcard character Wildcards are ge
MATLAB match
character *, whi
An @ sign indica
@ At symbol Class folder indicator
• “Class and P
A + sign indicat
+ Plus Package directory indicator
• “Packages Cr
There are certain special characters that you cannot enter as ordinary text. Instead, you
must use unique character sequences to represent them. Use the symbols in this table to
format strings and character vectors on their own or in conjunction with formatting
functions like compose, sprintf, and error. For more information, see “Formatting
Text” on page 6-35.
Symbol Effect on Text
'' Single quotation mark
%% Single percent sign
\\ Single backslash
\a Alarm
\b Backspace
\f Form feed
\n New line
\r Carriage return
\t Horizontal tab
2-11
Symbol Effect on Text

\v Vertical tab
\xN Hexadecimal number, N
\N Octal number, N
See Also
More About
• “Find Array Elements That Meet a Condition” on page 5-2
• “Greek Letters and Special Characters in Graph Text”
2-12
Array vs. Matrix Operations

In this section...
“Introduction” on page 2-13
“Array Operations” on page 2-13
“Matrix Operations” on page 2-16
Introduction
MATLAB has two different types of arithmetic operations: array operations and matrix
operations. You can use these arithmetic operations to perform numeric computations,
for example, adding two numbers, raising the elements of an array to a given power, or
multiplying two matrices.
Matrix operations follow the rules of linear algebra. By contrast, array operations
execute element by element operations and support multidimensional arrays. The period
character (.) distinguishes the array operations from the matrix operations. However,
since the matrix and array operations are the same for addition and subtraction, the
character pairs .+ and .- are unnecessary.
Array Operations
Array operations execute element by element operations on corresponding elements of
vectors, matrices, and multidimensional arrays. If the operands have the same size, then
each element in the first operand gets matched up with the element in the same location
in the second operand. If the operands have compatible sizes, then each input is
implicitly expanded as needed to match the size of the other. For more information, see
“Compatible Array Sizes for Basic Operations” on page 2-19.
As a simple example, you can add two vectors with the same size.
A = [1 1 1]
A =
1 1 1
B = [1 2 3]
2-13
B =
1 2 3
A+B
ans =
2 3 4
If one operand is a scalar and the other is not, then MATLAB implicitly expands the
scalar to be the same size as the other operand. For example, you can compute the
element-wise product of a scalar and a matrix.
A = [1 2 3; 1 2 3]
A =
1 2 3
1 2 3
3.*A
ans =
3 6 9
3 6 9
Implicit expansion also works if you subtract a 1-by-3 vector from a 3-by-3 matrix
because the two sizes are compatible. When you perform the subtraction, the vector is
implicitly expanded to become a 3-by-3 matrix.
A = [1 1 1; 2 2 2; 3 3 3]
A =
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
m = [2 4 6]
m =
2 4 6
2-14
A - m
ans =
-1 -3 -5
0 -2 -4
1 -1 -3
A row vector and a column vector have compatible sizes. If you add a 1-by-3 vector to a 2-
by-1 vector, then each vector implicitly expands into a 2-by-3 matrix before MATLAB
executes the element-wise addition.
x = [1 2 3]
x =
1 2 3
y = [10; 15]
y =
10
15
x + y
ans =
11 12 13
16 17 18
If the sizes of the two operands are incompatible, then you get an error.
A = [8 1 6; 3 5 7; 4 9 2]
A =
8 1 6
3 5 7
4 9 2
m = [2 4]
m =
2 4
2-15
A - m
Matrix dimensions must agree.
The following table provides a summary of arithmetic array operators in MATLAB. For
function-specific information, click the link to the function reference page in the last
column.
Operator Purpose Description Reference
Page
+ Addition A+B adds A and B. plus
+ Unary plus +A returns A. uplus
- Subtraction A-B subtracts B from A minus
- Unary minus -A negates the elements of A. uminus
.* Element-wise A.*B is the element-by-element product of times
multiplication A and B.
.^ Element-wise A.^B is the matrix with elements A(i,j) power
power to the B(i,j) power.
./ Right array A./B is the matrix with elements A(i,j)/ rdivide
division B(i,j).
.\ Left array A.\B is the matrix with elements B(i,j)/ ldivide
division A(i,j).
.' Array A.' is the array transpose of A. For transpose
transpose complex matrices, this does not involve
conjugation.
Matrix Operations
Matrix operations follow the rules of linear algebra and are not compatible with
multidimensional arrays. The required size and shape of the inputs in relation to one
another depends on the operation. For nonscalar inputs, the matrix operators generally
calculate different answers than their array operator counterparts.
For example, if you use the matrix right division operator, /, to divide two matrices, the
matrices must have the same number of columns. But if you use the matrix
multiplication operator, *, to multiply two matrices, then the matrices must have a
common inner dimension. That is, the number of columns in the first input must be equal
2-16
to the number of rows in the second input. The matrix multiplication operator calculates
the product of two matrices with the formula,
n
C(i, j) = Â A(i, k)B(k, j).
k=1
To see this, you can calculate the product of two matrices.
A = [1 3;2 4]
A =
1 3
2 4
B = [3 0;1 5]
B =
3 0
1 5
A*B
ans =
6 15
10 20
The previous matrix product is not equal to the following element-wise product.
A.*B
ans =
3 0
2 20
The following table provides a summary of matrix arithmetic operators in MATLAB. For
function-specific information, click the link to the function reference page in the last
column.
2-17
Operator Purpose Description Reference

Page
* Matrix C = A*B is the linear algebraic product of mtimes
multiplication the matrices A and B. The number of
columns of A must equal the number of
rows of B.
\ Matrix left x = A\B is the solution to the equation Ax mldivide
division = B. Matrices A and B must have the same
number of rows.
/ Matrix right x = B/A is the solution to the equation xA mrdivide
division = B. Matrices A and B must have the same
number of columns. In terms of the left
division operator, B/A = (A'\B')'.
^ Matrix power A^B is A to the power B, if B is a scalar. For mpower
other values of B, the calculation involves
eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
' Complex A' is the linear algebraic transpose of A. ctranspose
conjugate For complex matrices, this is the complex
transpose conjugate transpose.
See Also
More About
2-18
Compatible Array Sizes for Basic Operations

Most binary (two-input) operators and functions in MATLAB support numeric arrays
that have compatible sizes. Two inputs have compatible sizes if, for every dimension, the
dimension sizes of the inputs are either the same or one of them is 1. In the simplest
cases, two array sizes are compatible if they are exactly the same or if one is a scalar.
MATLAB implicitly expands arrays with compatible sizes to be the same size during the
execution of the element-wise operation or function.
Inputs with Compatible Sizes

2-D Inputs
These are some combinations of scalars, vectors, and matrices that have compatible
sizes:
• Two inputs which are exactly the same size.
• One input is a scalar.
• One input is a matrix, and the other is a column vector with the same number of
rows.
2-19
• One input is a column vector, and the other is a row vector.
Multidimensional Arrays
Every array in MATLAB has trailing dimensions of size 1. For multidimensional arrays,
this means that a 3-by-4 matrix is the same as a matrix of size 3-by-4-by-1-by-1-by-1.
Examples of multidimensional arrays with compatible sizes are:
• One input is a matrix, and the other is a 3-D array with the same number of rows and
columns.
2-20
• One input is a matrix, and the other is a 3-D array. The dimensions are all either the
same or one of them is 1.
2-21
Empty Arrays
The rules are the same for empty arrays or arrays that have a dimension size of zero.
The size of the dimension that is not equal to 1 determines the size of the output. This
means that dimensions with a size of zero must be paired with a dimension of size 1 or 0
in the other array, and that the output has a dimension size of 0.
A: 1-by-0
B: 3-by-1
Result: 3-by-0
Inputs with Incompatible Sizes

Incompatible inputs have sizes that can not be implicitly expanded to be the same size.
For example:
• One of the dimension sizes are not equal, and neither is 1.

A: 3-by-2
B: 4-by-2
• Two nonscalar row vectors with lengths that are not the same.
A: 1-by-3
B: 1-by-4
Examples
Subtract Vector from Matrix
To simplify vector-matrix operations, use implicit expansion with dimensional functions

such as sum, mean, min, and others.
For example, calculate the mean value of each column in a matrix, then subtract the
mean value from each element.
A = magic(3)
A =
8 1 6
3 5 7
4 9 2
2-22
C = mean(A)
C =
5 5 5
A - C
ans =
3 -4 1
-2 0 2
-1 4 -3
Add Row and Column Vector
Row and column vectors have compatible sizes, and when you perform an operation on
them the result is a matrix.
For example, add a row and column vector. The result is the same as
bsxfun(@plus,a,b).
a = [1 2 3 4]
ans =
1 2 3 4
b = [5; 6; 7]
ans =
5
6
7
a + b
ans =
6 7 8 9
7 8 9 10
8 9 10 11
2-23
See Also
bsxfun
More About
2-24
Array Comparison with Relational Operators

In this section...
“Array Comparison” on page 2-25
“Logic Statements” on page 2-28
Relational operators compare operands quantitatively, using operators like “less than”,
“greater than”, and “not equal to.” The result of a relational comparison is a logical array
indicating the locations where the relation is true.
These are the relational operators in MATLAB.

Symbol Function Equivalent Description
< lt Less than
<= le Less than or equal to
> gt Greater than
>= ge Greater than or equal to
== eq Equal to
~= ne Not equal to
Array Comparison
Numeric Arrays
The relational operators perform element-wise comparisons between two arrays. The
arrays must have compatible sizes to facilitate the operation. Arrays with compatible
sizes are implicitly expanded to be the same size during execution of the calculation. In
the simplest cases, the two operands are arrays of the same size, or one is a scalar. For
more information, see “Compatible Array Sizes for Basic Operations” on page 2-19.
For example, if you compare two matrices of the same size, then the result is a logical
matrix of the same size with elements indicating where the relation is true.
A = [2 4 6; 8 10 12]
A =
2 4 6
8 10 12
2-25
B = [5 5 5; 9 9 9]
B =
5 5 5
9 9 9
A < B
ans =
1 1 0
1 0 0
Similarly, you can compare one of the arrays to a scalar.

A > 7
ans =
0 0 0
1 1 1
If you compare a 1-by-N row vector to an M-by-1 column vector, then MATLAB expands
each vector into an M-by-N matrix before performing the comparison. The resulting
matrix contains the comparison result for each combination of elements in the vectors.
A = 1:3
A =
1 2 3
B = [2; 3]
B =
2
3
A >= B
ans =
0 1 1
0 0 1
2-26
Empty Arrays
The relational operators work with arrays for which any dimension has size zero, as long
as both arrays have compatible sizes. This means that if one array has a dimension size
of zero, then the size of the corresponding dimension in the other array must be 1 or zero,
and the size of that dimension in the output is zero.
A = ones(3,0);
B = ones(3,1);
A == B
ans =
Empty matrix: 3-by-0
However, expressions such as

A == []
return an error if A is not 0-by-0 or 1-by-1. This behavior is consistent with that of all
other binary operators, such as +, -, >, <, &, |, and so on.
To test for empty arrays, use isempty(A).
Complex Numbers
• The operators >, <, >=, and <= use only the real part of the operands in performing
comparisons.
• The operators == and ~= test both real and imaginary parts of the operands.
Inf, NaN, NaT, and undefined Element Comparisons
• Inf values are equal to other Inf values.

• NaN values are not equal to any other numeric value, including other NaN values.
• NaT values are not equal to any other datetime value, including other NaT values.
• Undefined categorical elements are not equal to any other categorical value, including
other undefined elements.
2-27
Logic Statements
Use relational operators in conjunction with the logical operators A & B (AND), A | B
(OR), xor(A,B) (XOR), and ~A (NOT), to string together more complex logical
statements.
For example, you can locate where negative elements occur in two arrays.
A = [2 -1; -3 10]
A =
2 -1
-3 10
B = [0 -2; -3 -1]
B =
0 -2
-3 -1
A<0 & B<0
ans =
0 1
1 0
For more examples, see “Find Array Elements That Meet a Condition” on page 5-2.
See Also
eq | ge | gt | le | lt | ne
More About
2-28
Operator Precedence
Operator Precedence
You can build expressions that use any combination of arithmetic, relational, and logical
operators. Precedence levels determine the order in which MATLAB evaluates an
expression. Within each precedence level, operators have equal precedence and are
evaluated from left to right. The precedence rules for MATLAB operators are shown in
this list, ordered from highest precedence level to lowest precedence level:
1 Parentheses ()
2 Transpose (.'), power (.^), complex conjugate transpose ('), matrix power (^)
3 Power with unary minus (.^-), unary plus (.^+), or logical negation (.^~) as well
as matrix power with unary minus (^-), unary plus (^+), or logical negation (^~).
Note Although most operators work from left to right, the operators (^-), (.^-), (^
+), (.^+), (^~), and (.^~) work from second from the right to left. It is
recommended that you use parentheses to explicitly specify the intended precedence
of statements containing these operator combinations.
4 Unary plus (+), unary minus (-), logical negation (~)
5 Multiplication (.*), right division (./), left division (.\), matrix multiplication
(*), matrix right division (/), matrix left division (\)
6 Addition (+), subtraction (-)
7 Colon operator (:)
8 Less than (<), less than or equal to (<=), greater than (>), greater than or equal to
(>=), equal to (==), not equal to (~=)
9 Element-wise AND (&)
10 Element-wise OR (|)
11 Short-circuit AND (&&)
12 Short-circuit OR (||)
Precedence of AND and OR Operators

MATLAB always gives the & operator precedence over the | operator. Although
MATLAB typically evaluates expressions from left to right, the expression a|b&c is
2-29
evaluated as a|(b&c). It is a good idea to use parentheses to explicitly specify the

intended precedence of statements containing combinations of & and |.
The same precedence rule holds true for the && and || operators.
Overriding Default Precedence

The default precedence can be overridden using parentheses, as shown in this example:
A = [3 9 5];
B = [2 1 5];
C = A./B.^2
C =
0.7500 9.0000 0.2000
C = (A./B).^2
C =
2.2500 81.0000 1.0000
See Also
More About
2-30
Average Similar Data Points Using a Tolerance
Average Similar Data Points Using a Tolerance

This example shows how to use uniquetol to find the average z-coordinate of 3-D points
that have similar (within tolerance) x and y coordinates.
Use random points picked from the peaks function in the domain as
the data set. Add a small amount of noise to the data.
xy = rand(10000,2)*6-3;
z = peaks(xy(:,1),xy(:,2)) + 0.5-rand(10000,1);
A = [xy z];
plot3(A(:,1), A(:,2), A(:,3), '.')
view(-28,32)
2-31
Find points that have similar x and y coordinates using uniquetol with these options:
• Specify ByRows as true, since the rows of A contain the point coordinates.
• Specify OutputAllIndices as true to return the indices for all points that are
within tolerance of each other.
• Specify DataScale as [1 1 Inf] to use an absolute tolerance for the x and y
coordinates, while ignoring the z-coordinate.
DS = [1 1 Inf];
[C,ia] = uniquetol(A, 0.3, 'ByRows', true, ...
'OutputAllIndices', true, 'DataScale', DS);
Average each group of points that are within tolerance (including the z-coordinates),
producing a reduced data set that still holds the general shape of the original data.
for k = 1:length(ia)
aveA(k,:) = mean(A(ia{k},:),1);
end
Plot the resulting averaged-out points on top of the original data.

hold on
plot3(aveA(:,1), aveA(:,2), aveA(:,3), '.r', 'MarkerSize', 15)
2-32
See Also
See Also
uniquetol
More About
• “Group Scattered Data Using a Tolerance” on page 2-34
2-33
Group Scattered Data Using a Tolerance

This example shows how to group scattered data points based on their proximity to
points of interest.
Create a set of random 2-D points. Then create and plot a grid of equally spaced points
on top of the random data.
x = rand(10000,2);
[a,b] = meshgrid(0:0.1:1);
gridPoints = [a(:), b(:)];
plot(x(:,1), x(:,2), '.')
hold on
plot(gridPoints(:,1), gridPoints(:,2), 'xr', 'Markersize', 6)
2-34
Group Scattered Data Using a Tolerance
Use ismembertol to locate the data points in x that are within tolerance of the grid
points in gridPoints. Use these options with ismembertol:
• Specify ByRows as true, since the point coordinates are in the rows of x.
• Specify OutputAllIndices as true to return all of the indices for rows in x that are
within tolerance of the corresponding row in gridPoints.
[LIA,LocB] = ismembertol(gridPoints, x, 0.05, ...

'ByRows', true, 'OutputAllIndices', true);
For each grid point, plot the points in x that are within tolerance of that grid point.
figure
hold on
for k = 1:length(LocB)
plot(x(LocB{k},1), x(LocB{k},2), '.')
end
plot(gridPoints(:,1), gridPoints(:,2), 'xr', 'Markersize', 6)
2-35
See Also
ismembertol
More About
• “Average Similar Data Points Using a Tolerance” on page 2-31
2-36
Conditional Statements
Conditional Statements
Conditional statements enable you to select at run time which block of code to execute.
The simplest conditional statement is an if statement. For example:
% Generate a random number
a = randi(100, 1);
% If it is even, divide by 2
if rem(a, 2) == 0
disp('a is even')
b = a/2;
end
if statements can include alternate choices, using the optional keywords elseif or
else. For example:
a = randi(100, 1);
if a < 30
disp('small')
elseif a < 80
disp('medium')
else
disp('large')
end
Alternatively, when you want to test for equality against a set of known values, use a
switch statement. For example:
[dayNum, dayString] = weekday(date, 'long', 'en_US');
switch dayString
case 'Monday'
disp('Start of the work week')
case 'Tuesday'
disp('Day 2')
case 'Wednesday'
disp('Day 3')
case 'Thursday'
disp('Day 4')
case 'Friday'
disp('Last day of the work week')
otherwise
2-37
disp('Weekend!')
end
For both if and switch, MATLAB executes the code corresponding to the first true
condition, and then exits the code block. Each conditional statement requires the end
keyword.
In general, when you have many possible discrete, known values, switch statements are
easier to read than if statements. However, you cannot test for inequality between
switch and case values. For example, you cannot implement this type of condition with
a switch:
yourNumber = input('Enter a number: ');
if yourNumber < 0
disp('Negative')
elseif yourNumber > 0
disp('Positive')
else
disp('Zero')
end
See Also
end | if | return | switch
2-38
Loop Control Statements
Loop Control Statements

With loop control statements, you can repeatedly execute a block of code. There are two
types of loops:
• for statements loop a specific number of times, and keep track of each iteration with
an incrementing index variable.
For example, preallocate a 10-element vector, and calculate five values:

x = ones(1,10);
for n = 2:6
x(n) = 2 * x(n - 1);
end
• while statements loop as long as a condition remains true.
For example, find the first integer n for which factorial(n) is a 100-digit number:
n = 1;
nFactorial = 1;
while nFactorial < 1e100
n = n + 1;
nFactorial = nFactorial * n;
end
Each loop requires the end keyword.
It is a good idea to indent the loops for readability, especially when they are nested (that
is, when one loop contains another loop):
A = zeros(5,100);
for m = 1:5
for n = 1:100
A(m, n) = 1/(m + n - 1);
end
end
You can programmatically exit a loop using a break statement, or skip to the next
iteration of a loop using a continue statement. For example, count the number of lines
in the help for the magic function (that is, all comment lines until a blank line):
fid = fopen('magic.m','r');
count = 0;
2-39
while ~feof(fid)
line = fgetl(fid);
if isempty(line)
break
elseif ~strncmp(line,'%',1)
continue
end
count = count + 1;
end
fprintf('%d lines in MAGIC help\n',count);
fclose(fid);
Tip If you inadvertently create an infinite loop (a loop that never ends on its own), stop
execution of the loop by pressing Ctrl+C.
See Also
break | continue | end | for | while
2-40
Regular Expressions
Regular Expressions
In this section...
“What Is a Regular Expression?” on page 2-41
“Steps for Building Expressions” on page 2-43
“Operators and Characters” on page 2-46
What Is a Regular Expression?

A regular expression is a sequence of characters that defines a certain pattern. You
normally use a regular expression to search text for a group of words that matches the
pattern, for example, while parsing program input or while processing a block of text.
The character vector 'Joh?n\w*' is an example of a regular expression. It defines a

pattern that starts with the letters Jo, is optionally followed by the letter h (indicated by
'h?'), is then followed by the letter n, and ends with any number of word characters,
that is, characters that are alphabetic, numeric, or underscore (indicated by '\w*'). This
pattern matches any of the following:
Jon, John, Jonathan, Johnny
Regular expressions provide a unique way to search a volume of text for a particular
subset of characters within that text. Instead of looking for an exact character match as
you would do with a function like strfind, regular expressions give you the ability to
look for a particular pattern of characters.
For example, several ways of expressing a metric rate of speed are:

km/h
km/hr
km/hour
kilometers/hour
kilometers per hour
You could locate any of the above terms in your text by issuing five separate search
commands:
strfind(text, 'km/h');
strfind(text, 'km/hour');
% etc.
2-41
To be more efficient, however, you can build a single phrase that applies to all of these
search terms:
Translate this phrase into a regular expression (to be explained later in this section) and
you have:
pattern = 'k(ilo)?m(eters)?(/|\sper\s)h(r|our)?';
Now locate one or more of the terms using just a single command:
text = ['The high-speed train traveled at 250 ', ...

'kilometers per hour alongside the automobile ', ...
'travelling at 120 km/h.'];
regexp(text, pattern, 'match')
ans =
'kilometers per hour' 'km/h'
There are four MATLAB functions that support searching and replacing characters using
regular expressions. The first three are similar in the input values they accept and the
output values they return. For details, click the links to the function reference pages.
Function Description
regexp Match regular expression.
regexpi Match regular expression, ignoring case.
regexprep Replace part of text using regular expression.
regexptranslate Translate text into regular expression.
When calling any of the first three functions, pass the text to be parsed and the regular
expression in the first two input arguments. When calling regexprep, pass an
additional input that is an expression that specifies a pattern for the replacement.
2-42
Regular Expressions
Steps for Building Expressions

There are three steps involved in using regular expressions to search text for a particular
term:
1 Identify unique patterns in the string on page 2-44
This entails breaking up the text you want to search for into groups of like character
types. These character types could be a series of lowercase letters, a dollar sign
followed by three numbers and then a decimal point, etc.
2 Express each pattern as a regular expression on page 2-44
Use the metacharacters and operators described in this documentation to express

each segment of your search pattern as a regular expression. Then combine these
expression segments into the single expression to use in the search.
3 —Call the appropriate search function on page 2-45
Pass the text you want to parse to one of the search functions, such as regexp or
regexpi, or to the text replacement function, regexprep.
The example shown in this section searches a record containing contact information
belonging to a group of five friends. This information includes each person's name,
telephone number, place of residence, and email address. The goal is to extract specific
information from the text..
contacts = { ...
'Harry 287-625-7315 Columbus, OH hparker@hmail.com'; ...
'Janice 529-882-1759 Fresno, CA jan_stephens@horizon.net'; ...
'Mike 793-136-0975 Richmond, VA sue_and_mike@hmail.net'; ...
'Nadine 648-427-9947 Tampa, FL nadine_berry@horizon.net'; ...
'Jason 697-336-7728 Montrose, CO jason_blake@mymail.com'};
The first part of the example builds a regular expression that represents the format of a
standard email address. Using that expression, the example then searches the
information for the email address of one of the group of friends. Contact information for
Janice is in row 2 of the contacts cell array:
contacts{2}
ans =
Janice 529-882-1759 Fresno, CA jan_stephens@horizon.net
2-43
Step 1 — Identify Unique Patterns in the Text
A typical email address is made up of standard components: the user's account name,
followed by an @ sign, the name of the user's internet service provider (ISP), a dot
(period), and the domain to which the ISP belongs. The table below lists these
components in the left column, and generalizes the format of each component in the right
column.
Unique patterns of an email address General description of each pattern
Start with the account name One or more lowercase letters and underscores
jan_stephens . . .
Add '@' @ sign
jan_stephens@ . . .
Add the ISP One or more lowercase letters, no underscores
jan_stephens@horizon . . .
Add a dot (period) Dot (period) character
jan_stephens@horizon. . . .
Finish with the domain com or net
jan_stephens@horizon.net
Step 2 — Express Each Pattern as a Regular Expression
In this step, you translate the general formats derived in Step 1 into segments of a
regular expression. You then add these segments together to form the entire expression.
The table below shows the generalized format descriptions of each character pattern in
the left-most column. (This was carried forward from the right column of the table in
Step 1.) The second column shows the operators or metacharacters that represent the
character pattern.
Description of each segment Pattern
One or more lowercase letters and underscores [a-z_]+
@ sign @
One or more lowercase letters, no underscores [a-z]+
Dot (period) character \.
com or net (com|net)
Assembling these patterns into one character vector gives you the complete expression:
2-44
Regular Expressions
email = '[a-z_]+@[a-z]+\.(com|net)';
Step 3 — Call the Appropriate Search Function
In this step, you use the regular expression derived in Step 2 to match an email address
for one of the friends in the group. Use the regexp function to perform the search.
Here is the list of contact information shown earlier in this section. Each person's record
occupies a row of the contacts cell array:
contacts = { ...
'Harry 287-625-7315 Columbus, OH hparker@hmail.com'; ...
'Janice 529-882-1759 Fresno, CA jan_stephens@horizon.net'; ...
'Mike 793-136-0975 Richmond, VA sue_and_mike@hmail.net'; ...
'Nadine 648-427-9947 Tampa, FL nadine_berry@horizon.net'; ...
'Jason 697-336-7728 Montrose, CO jason_blake@mymail.com'};
This is the regular expression that represents an email address, as derived in Step 2:
email = '[a-z_]+@[a-z]+\.(com|net)';
Call the regexp function, passing row 2 of the contacts cell array and the email
regular expression. This returns the email address for Janice.
regexp(contacts{2}, email, 'match')
ans =
'jan_stephens@horizon.net'
MATLAB parses a character vector from left to right, “consuming” the vector as it goes. If
matching characters are found, regexp records the location and resumes parsing the
character vector, starting just after the end of the most recent match.
Make the same call, but this time for the fifth person in the list:
regexp(contacts{5}, email, 'match')
ans =
'jason_blake@mymail.com'
You can also search for the email address of everyone in the list by using the entire cell
array for the input argument:
regexp(contacts, email, 'match');
2-45
Operators and Characters

Regular expressions can contain characters, metacharacters, operators, tokens, and flags
that specify patterns to match, as described in these sections:
• “Metacharacters” on page 2-46

• “Character Representation” on page 2-47
• “Quantifiers” on page 2-48
• “Grouping Operators” on page 2-49
• “Anchors” on page 2-50
• “Lookaround Assertions” on page 2-50
• “Logical and Conditional Operators” on page 2-51
• “Token Operators” on page 2-52
• “Dynamic Expressions” on page 2-53
• “Comments” on page 2-55
• “Search Flags” on page 2-55
Metacharacters
Metacharacters represent letters, letter ranges, digits, and space characters. Use them to
construct a generalized pattern of characters.
Metacharacter Description Example
. Any single character, including '..ain' matches sequences of five
white space consecutive characters that end with
'ain'.
[c1c2c3] Any character contained within the '[rp.]ain' matches 'rain' or 'pain'
square brackets. The following or '.ain'.
characters are treated literally: $
| . * + ? and - when not used to
indicate a range.
[^c1c2c3] Any character not contained within '[^*rp]ain' matches all four-letter
the square brackets. The following sequences that end in 'ain', except
characters are treated literally: $ 'rain' and 'pain' and '*ain'. For
| . * + ? and - when not used to example, it matches 'gain', 'lain', or
indicate a range. 'vain'.
2-46
Regular Expressions
Metacharacter Description Example

[c1-c2] Any character in the range of c1 '[A-G]' matches a single character in
through c2 the range of A through G.
\w Any alphabetic, numeric, or '\w*' identifies a word.
underscore character. For English
character sets, \w is equivalent to
[a-zA-Z_0-9]
\W Any character that is not alphabetic, '\W*' identifies a term that is not a
numeric, or underscore. For English word.
character sets, \W is equivalent to
[â-zA-Z_0-9]
\s Any white-space character; '\w*n\s' matches words that end with
equivalent to [ \f\n\r\t\v] the letter n, followed by a white-space
character.
\S Any non-white-space character; '\d\S' matches a numeric digit followed
equivalent to [^ \f\n\r\t\v] by any non-white-space character.
\d Any numeric digit; equivalent to '\d*' matches any number of
[0-9] consecutive digits.
\D Any nondigit character; equivalent '\w*\D\>' matches words that do not
to [^0-9] end with a numeric digit.
\oN or \o{N} Character of octal value N '\o{40}' matches the space character,
defined by octal 40.
\xN or \x{N} Character of hexadecimal value N '\x2C' matches the comma character,
defined by hex 2C.
Character Representation
Operator Description
\a Alarm (beep)
\b Backspace
\f Form feed
\n New line
\r Carriage return
\t Horizontal tab
2-47
Operator Description
\v Vertical tab
\char Any character with special meaning in regular expressions that you want to match
literally (for example, use \\ to match a single backslash)
Quantifiers
Quantifiers specify the number of times a pattern must occur in the matching text.
Quantifier Matches the expression when it occurs... Example
expr* 0 or more times consecutively. '\w*' matches a word of any length.
expr? 0 times or 1 time. '\w*(\.m)?' matches words that
optionally end with the extension .m.
expr+ 1 or more times consecutively. '<img src="\w+\.gif">' matches an
<img> HTML tag when the file name
contains one or more characters.
expr{m,n} At least m times, but no more than n '\S{4,8}' matches between four and
times consecutively. eight non-white-space characters.
{0,1} is equivalent to ?.
expr{m,} At least m times consecutively. '<a href="\w{1,}\.html">' matches
an <a> HTML tag when the file name
{0,} and {1,} are equivalent to * and contains one or more characters.
+, respectively.
expr{n} Exactly n times consecutively. '\d{4}' matches four consecutive digits.
Equivalent to {n,n}.
Quantifiers can appear in three modes, described in the following table. q represents any
of the quantifiers in the previous table.
Mode Description Example
exprq Greedy expression: match as many Given the text
characters as possible. '<tr><td><p>text</p></td>', the
expression '</?t.*>' matches all
characters between <tr and /td>:
'<tr><td><p>text</p></td>'
2-48
Regular Expressions
Mode Description Example

exprq? Lazy expression: match as few Given the
characters as necessary. text'<tr><td><p>text</p></td>',
the expression '</?t.*?>' ends each
match at the first occurrence of the
closing angle bracket (>):
'<tr>' '<td>' '</td>'

exprq+ Possessive expression: match as much as Given the
possible, but do not rescan any portions text'<tr><td><p>text</p></td>',
of the text. the expression '</?t.*+>' does not
return any matches, because the closing
angle bracket is captured using .*, and
is not rescanned.
Grouping Operators
Grouping operators allow you to capture tokens, apply one operator to multiple elements,
or disable backtracking in a specific group.
Grouping Description Example
Operator
(expr) Group elements of the expression and 'Joh?n\s(\w*)' captures a token that
capture tokens. contains the last name of any person
with the first name John or Jon.
(?:expr) Group, but do not capture tokens. '(?:[aeiou][âeiou]){2}' matches
two consecutive patterns of a vowel
followed by a nonvowel, such as 'anon'.
Without grouping, '[aeiou][âeiou]

{2}'matches a vowel followed by two
nonvowels.
(?>expr) Group atomically. Do not backtrack 'A(?>.*)Z' does not match 'AtoZ',
within the group to complete the match, although 'A(?:.*)Z' does. Using the
and do not capture tokens. atomic group, Z is captured using .* and
is not rescanned.
2-49
Grouping Description Example

Operator
(expr1| Match expression expr1 or expression '(let|tel)\w+' matches words that
expr2) expr2. start with let or tel.
If there is a match with expr1, then

expr2 is ignored.
You can include ?: or ?> after the

opening parenthesis to suppress tokens
or group atomically.
Anchors
Anchors in the expression match the beginning or end of a character vector or word.
Anchor Matches the... Example
êxpr Beginning of the input text. '^M\w*' matches a word starting with
M at the beginning of the text.
expr$ End of the input text. '\w*m$' matches words ending with m
at the end of the text.
\<expr Beginning of a word. '\<n\w*' matches any words starting
with n.
expr\> End of a word. '\w*e\>' matches any words ending
with e.
Lookaround Assertions
Lookaround assertions look for patterns that immediately precede or follow the intended
match, but are not part of the match.
The pointer remains at the current location, and characters that correspond to the test
expression are not captured or discarded. Therefore, lookahead assertions can match
overlapping character groups.
2-50
Regular Expressions
Lookaround Description Example

Assertion
expr(?=test) Look ahead for characters that match '\w*(?=ing)' matches terms that are
test. followed by ing, such as 'Fly' and
'fall' in the input text 'Flying,
not falling.'
expr(?!test) Look ahead for characters that do not 'i(?!ng)' matches instances of the
match test. letter i that are not followed by ng.
(?<=test)expr Look behind for characters that match '(?<=re)\w*' matches terms that
test. follow 're', such as 'new', 'use', and
'cycle' in the input text 'renew,
reuse, recycle'
(?<!test)expr Look behind for characters that do not '(?<!\d)(\d)(?!\d)' matches
match test. single-digit numbers (digits that do not
precede or follow other digits).
If you specify a lookahead assertion before an expression, the operation is equivalent to a

logical AND.
Operation Description Example
(?=test)expr Match both test and expr. '(?=[a-z])[âeiou]' matches
consonants.
(?!test)expr Match expr and do not match test. '(?![aeiou])[a-z]' matches
consonants.
For more information, see “Lookahead Assertions in Regular Expressions” on page 2-57.
Logical and Conditional Operators
Logical and conditional operators allow you to test the state of a given condition, and
then use the outcome to determine which pattern, if any, to match next. These operators
support logical OR and if or if/else conditions. (For AND conditions, see “Lookaround
Assertions” on page 2-50.)
Conditions can be tokens on page 2-52, lookaround assertions on page 2-50, or dynamic
expressions on page 2-53 of the form (?@cmd). Dynamic expressions must return a
logical or numeric value.
2-51
Conditional Operator Description Example

expr1|expr2 Match expression expr1 or '(let|tel)\w+' matches words
expression expr2. that start with let or tel.
If there is a match with expr1,

then expr2 is ignored.
(?(cond)expr) If condition cond is true, then '(?(?@ispc)[A-Z]:\\)'
match expr. matches a drive name, such as C:\,
when run on a Windows system.
(?(cond)expr1|expr2) If condition cond is true, then 'Mr(s?)\..*?(?(1)her|his)
match expr1. Otherwise, match \w*' matches text that includes
expr2. her when the text begins with Mrs,
or that includes his when the text
begins with Mr.
Token Operators
Tokens are portions of the matched text that you define by enclosing part of the regular
expression in parentheses. You can refer to a token by its sequence in the text (an ordinal
token), or assign names to tokens for easier code maintenance and readable output.
Ordinal Token Operator Description Example
(expr) Capture in a token the characters 'Joh?n\s(\w*)' captures a token
that match the enclosed that contains the last name of any
expression. person with the first name John or
Jon.
\N Match the Nth token. '<(\w+).*>.*</\1>' captures
tokens for HTML tags, such as
'title' from the text
'<title>Some text</title>'.
(?(N)expr1|expr2) If the Nth token is found, then 'Mr(s?)\..*?(?(1)her|his)
match expr1. Otherwise, match \w*' matches text that includes
expr2. her when the text begins with Mrs,
or that includes his when the text
begins with Mr.
2-52
Regular Expressions
Named Token Operator Description Example

(?<name>expr) Capture in a named token the '(?<month>\d+)-(?<day>\d+)-
characters that match the (?<yr>\d+)' creates named
enclosed expression. tokens for the month, day, and year
in an input date of the form mm-
dd-yy.
\k<name> Match the token referred to by '<(?<tag>\w+).*>.*</
name. \k<tag>>' captures tokens for
HTML tags, such as 'title' from
the text '<title>Some text</
title>'.
(?(name)expr1|expr2) If the named token is found, then 'Mr(?<sex>s?)\..*?(?
match expr1. Otherwise, match (sex)her|his) \w*' matches
expr2. text that includes her when the
text begins with Mrs, or that
includes his when the text begins
with Mr.
Note If an expression has nested parentheses, MATLAB captures tokens that correspond
to the outermost set of parentheses. For example, given the search pattern '(and(y|
rew))', MATLAB creates a token for 'andrew' but not for 'y' or 'rew'.
For more information, see “Tokens in Regular Expressions” on page 2-60.
Dynamic Expressions
Dynamic expressions allow you to execute a MATLAB command or a regular expression

to determine the text to match.
The parentheses that enclose dynamic expressions do not create a capturing group.
2-53
Operator Description Example

(??expr) Parse expr and include the resulting '^(\d+)((??\\w{$1}))'
term in the match expression. determines how many characters to
match by reading a digit at the
When parsed, expr must correspond beginning of the match. The dynamic
to a complete, valid regular expression is enclosed in a second set
expression. Dynamic expressions that of parentheses so that the resulting
use the backslash escape character (\) match is captured in a token. For
require two backslashes: one for the instance, matching '5XXXXX'
initial parsing of expr, and one for the captures tokens for '5' and
complete match. 'XXXXX'.
(??@cmd) Execute the MATLAB command '(.{2,}).?(??@fliplr($1))'
represented by cmd, and include the finds palindromes that are at least
output returned by the command in four characters long, such as 'abba'.
the match expression.
(?@cmd) Execute the MATLAB command '\w*?(\w)(?@disp($1))\1\w*'
represented by cmd, but discard any matches words that include double
output the command returns. (Helpful letters (such as pp), and displays
for diagnosing regular expressions.) intermediate results.
Within dynamic expressions, use the following operators to define replacement terms.
Replacement Operator Description
$& or $0 Portion of the input text that is currently a match
$` Portion of the input text that precedes the current match
$' Portion of the input text that follows the current match (use $'' to
represent $')
$N Nth token
$<name> Named token
${cmd} Output returned when MATLAB executes the command, cmd
For more information, see “Dynamic Regular Expressions” on page 2-66.
2-54
Regular Expressions
Comments
The comment operator enables you to insert comments into your code to make it more
maintainable. The text of the comment is ignored by MATLAB when matching against
the input text.
Characters Description Example
(?#comment) Insert a comment in the regular '(?# Initial digit)\<\d\w+'
expression. The comment text is includes a comment, and matches
ignored when matching the input. words that begin with a number.
Search Flags
Search flags modify the behavior for matching expressions.

Flag Description
(?-i) Match letter case (default for regexp and regexprep).
(?i) Do not match letter case (default for regexpi).
(?s) Match dot (.) in the pattern with any character (default).
(?-s) Match dot in the pattern with any character that is not a newline
character.
(?-m) Match the ^ and $ metacharacters at the beginning and end of text
(default).
(?m) Match the ^ and $ metacharacters at the beginning and end of a line.
(?-x) Include space characters and comments when matching (default).
(?x) Ignore space characters and comments when matching. Use '\ ' and
'\#' to match space and # characters.
The expression that the flag modifies can appear either after the parentheses, such as
(?i)\w*
or inside the parentheses and separated from the flag with a colon (:), such as
(?i:\w*)
The latter syntax allows you to change the behavior for part of a larger expression.
2-55
See Also
regexp | regexpi | regexprep | regexptranslate
More About
• “Lookahead Assertions in Regular Expressions” on page 2-57
• “Tokens in Regular Expressions” on page 2-60
• “Dynamic Regular Expressions” on page 2-66
2-56
Lookahead Assertions in Regular Expressions
Lookahead Assertions in Regular Expressions
In this section...
“Lookahead Assertions” on page 2-57
“Overlapping Matches” on page 2-58
“Logical AND Conditions” on page 2-58
Lookahead Assertions
There are two types of lookaround assertions for regular expressions: lookahead and
lookbehind. In both cases, the assertion is a condition that must be satisfied to return a
match to the expression.
A lookahead assertion has the form (?=test) and can appear anywhere in a regular
expression. MATLAB looks ahead of the current location in the text for the test condition.
If MATLAB matches the test condition, it continues processing the rest of the expression
to find a match.
For example, look ahead in a character vector specifying a path to find the name of the
folder that contains a program file (in this case, fileread.m).
chr = which('fileread')
chr =
matlabroot\toolbox\matlab\iofun\fileread.m
regexp(chr,'\w+(?=\\\w+\.[mp])','match')
ans =
'iofun'
The match expression, \w+, searches for one or more alphanumeric or underscore
characters. Each time regexp finds a term that matches this condition, it looks ahead for
a backslash (specified with two backslashes, \\), followed by a file name (\w+) with
an .m or .p extension (\.[mp]). The regexp function returns the match that satisfies
the lookahead condition, which is the folder name iofun.
2-57
Overlapping Matches
Lookahead assertions do not consume any characters in the text. As a result, you can use
them to find overlapping character sequences.
For example, use lookahead to find every sequence of six nonwhitespace characters in a
character vector by matching initial characters that precede five additional characters:
chr = 'Locate several 6-char. phrases';

startIndex = regexpi(chr,'\S(?=\S{5})')
startIndex =
1 8 9 16 17 24 25
The starting indices correspond to these phrases:
Locate severa everal 6-char -char. phrase hrases
Without the lookahead operator, MATLAB parses a character vector from left to right,
consuming the vector as it goes. If matching characters are found, regexp records the
location and resumes parsing the character vector from the location of the most recent
match. There is no overlapping of characters in this process.
chr = 'Locate several 6-char. phrases';

startIndex = regexpi(chr,'\S{6}')
startIndex =
1 8 16 24
The starting indices correspond to these phrases:
Locate severa 6-char phrase
Logical AND Conditions

Another way to use a lookahead operation is to perform a logical AND between two
conditions. This example initially attempts to locate all lowercase consonants in a
character array consisting of the first 50 characters of the help for the normest function:
helptext = help('normest');
chr = helptext(1:50)
2-58
See Also
chr =
NORMEST Estimate the matrix 2-norm.
NORMEST(S
Merely searching for non-vowels ([âeiou]) does not return the expected answer, as the
output includes capital letters, space characters, and punctuation:
c = regexp(chr,'[âeiou]','match')
c =
Columns 1 through 14
' ' 'N' 'O' 'R' 'M' 'E' 'S' 'T' ' '
'E' 's' 't' 'm' 't'
...
Try this again, using a lookahead operator to create the following AND condition:
(lowercase letter) AND (not a vowel)
This time, the result is correct:
c = regexp(chr,'(?=[a-z])[âeiou]','match')
c =
's' 't' 'm ' 't' 't' 'h' 'm' 't' 'r' 'x'
'n' 'r' 'm'
Note that when using a lookahead operator to perform an AND, you need to place the
match expression expr after the test expression test:
(?=test)expr or (?!test)expr
See Also
regexp | regexpi | regexprep
More About
2-59
Tokens in Regular Expressions

In this section...
“Multiple Tokens” on page 2-62
“Unmatched Tokens” on page 2-62
“Tokens in Replacement Text” on page 2-63
“Named Capture” on page 2-64
Introduction
Parentheses used in a regular expression not only group elements of that expression
together, but also designate any matches found for that group as tokens. You can use
tokens to match other parts of the same text. One advantage of using tokens is that they
remember what they matched, so you can recall and reuse matched text in the process of
searching or replacing.
Each token in the expression is assigned a number, starting from 1, going from left to
right. To make a reference to a token later in the expression, refer to it using a backslash
followed by the token number. For example, when referencing a token generated by the
third set of parentheses in the expression, use \3.
As a simple example, if you wanted to search for identical sequential letters in a

character array, you could capture the first letter as a token and then search for a
matching character immediately afterwards. In the expression shown below, the (\S)
phrase creates a token whenever regexp matches any nonwhitespace character in the
character array. The second part of the expression, '\1', looks for a second instance of
the same character immediately following the first:
poe = ['While I nodded, nearly napping, ' ...

'suddenly there came a tapping,'];
[mat,tok,ext] = regexp(poe, '(\S)\1', 'match', ...

'tokens', 'tokenExtents');
mat
mat =
'dd' 'pp' 'dd' 'pp'
2-60
The tokens returned in cell array tok are:
'd', 'p', 'd', 'p'
Starting and ending indices for each token in poe are:
11 11, 26 26, 35 35, 57 57
For another example, capture pairs of matching HTML tags (e.g., <a> and </a>) and the
text between them. The expression used for this example is
expr = '<(\w+).*?>.*?</\1>';
The first part of the expression, '<(\w+)', matches an opening angle bracket (<)
followed by one or more alphabetic, numeric, or underscore characters. The enclosing
parentheses capture token characters following the opening angle bracket.
The second part of the expression, '.*?>.*?', matches the remainder of this HTML tag
(characters up to the >), and any characters that may precede the next opening angle
bracket.
The last part, '</\1>', matches all characters in the ending HTML tag. This tag is
composed of the sequence </tag>, where tag is whatever characters were captured as a
token.
hstr = '<!comment><a name="752507"></a><b>Default</b><br>';

expr = '<(\w+).*?>.*?</\1>';
[mat,tok] = regexp(hstr, expr, 'match', 'tokens');

mat{:}
ans =
<a name="752507"></a>
ans =
<b>Default</b>
tok{:}
ans =
'a'
ans =
'b'
2-61
Multiple Tokens
Here is an example of how tokens are assigned values. Suppose that you are going to
search the following text:
andy ted bob jim andrew andy ted mark
You choose to search the above text with the following search pattern:
and(y|rew)|(t)e(d)
This pattern has three parenthetical expressions that generate tokens. When you finally
perform the search, the following tokens are generated for each match.
Match Token 1 Token 2
andy y
ted t d
andrew rew
andy y
ted t d
Only the highest level parentheses are used. For example, if the search pattern and(y|
rew) finds the text andrew, token 1 is assigned the value rew. However, if the search
pattern (and(y|rew)) is used, token 1 is assigned the value andrew.
Unmatched Tokens
For those tokens specified in the regular expression that have no match in the text being
evaluated, regexp and regexpi return an empty character vector ('') as the token
output, and an extent that marks the position in the string where the token was
expected.
The example shown here executes regexp on a character vector specifying the path
returned from the MATLAB tempdir function. The regular expression expr includes six
token specifiers, one for each piece of the path. The third specifier [a-z]+ has no match
in the character vector because this part of the path, Profiles, begins with an
uppercase letter:
chr = tempdir
2-62
chr =
C:\WINNT\Profiles\bpascal\LOCALS~1\Temp\
expr = ['([A-Z]:)\\(WINNT)\\([a-z]+)?.*\\' ...

'([a-z]+)\\([A-Z]+~\d)\\(Temp)\\'];
[tok, ext] = regexp(chr, expr, 'tokens', 'tokenExtents');
When a token is not found in the text, regexp returns an empty character vector ('') as
the token and a numeric array with the token extent. The first number of the extent is
the string index that marks where the token was expected, and the second number of the
extent is equal to one less than the first.
In the case of this example, the empty token is the third specified in the expression, so
the third token returned is empty:
tok{:}
ans =
'C:' 'WINNT' '' 'bpascal' 'LOCALS~1' 'Temp'
The third token extent returned in the variable ext has the starting index set to 10,
which is where the nonmatching term, Profiles, begins in the path. The ending extent
index is set to one less than the starting index, or 9:
ext{:}
ans =
1 2
4 8
10 9
19 25
27 34
36 39
Tokens in Replacement Text

When using tokens in replacement text, reference them using $1, $2, etc. instead of \1,
\2, etc. This example captures two tokens and reverses their order. The first, $1, is
'Norma Jean' and the second, $2, is 'Baker'. Note that regexprep returns the
modified text, not a vector of starting indices.
regexprep('Norma Jean Baker', '(\w+\s\w+)\s(\w+)', '$2, $1')
2-63
ans =
Baker, Norma Jean
Named Capture
If you use a lot of tokens in your expressions, it may be helpful to assign them names
rather than having to keep track of which token number is assigned to which token.
When referencing a named token within the expression, use the syntax \k<name>
instead of the numeric \1, \2, etc.:
poe = ['While I nodded, nearly napping, ' ...
'suddenly there came a tapping,'];
regexp(poe, '(?<anychar>.)\k<anychar>', 'match')
ans =
'dd' 'pp' 'dd' 'pp'
Named tokens can also be useful in labeling the output from the MATLAB regular
expression functions. This is especially true when you are processing many pieces of text.
For example, parse different parts of street addresses from several character vectors. A
short name is assigned to each token in the expression:
chr1 = '134 Main Street, Boulder, CO, 14923';
chr2 = '26 Walnut Road, Topeka, KA, 25384';
chr3 = '847 Industrial Drive, Elizabeth, NJ, 73548';
p1 = '(?<adrs>\d+\s\S+\s(Road|Street|Avenue|Drive))';
p2 = '(?<city>[A-Z][a-z]+)';
p3 = '(?<state>[A-Z]{2})';
p4 = '(?<zip>\d{5})';
expr = [p1 ', ' p2 ', ' p3 ', ' p4];
As the following results demonstrate, you can make your output easier to work with by
using named tokens:
loc1 = regexp(chr1, expr, 'names')
loc1 =
adrs: '134 Main Street'
city: 'Boulder'
2-64
See Also
state: 'CO'
zip: '14923'
loc2 =
adrs: '26 Walnut Road'
city: 'Topeka'
state: 'KA'
zip: '25384'
loc3 =
adrs: '847 Industrial Drive'
city: 'Elizabeth'
state: 'NJ'
zip: '73548'
See Also
More About
2-65
Dynamic Regular Expressions

In this section...
“Dynamic Match Expressions — (??expr)” on page 2-67
“Commands That Modify the Match Expression — (??@cmd)” on page 2-68
“Commands That Serve a Functional Purpose — (?@cmd)” on page 2-69
“Commands in Replacement Expressions — ${cmd}” on page 2-71
Introduction
In a dynamic expression, you can make the pattern that you want regexp to match
dependent on the content of the input text. In this way, you can more closely match
varying input patterns in the text being parsed. You can also use dynamic expressions in
replacement terms for use with the regexprep function. This gives you the ability to
adapt the replacement text to the parsed input.
You can include any number of dynamic expressions in the match_expr or

replace_expr arguments of these commands:
regexp(text, match_expr)
regexpi(text, match_expr)
regexprep(text, match_expr, replace_expr)
As an example of a dynamic expression, the following regexprep command correctly

replaces the term internationalization with its abbreviated form, i18n. However,
to use it on a different term such as globalization, you have to use a different
replacement expression:
match_expr = '(^\w)(\w*)(\w$)';
replace_expr1 = '$118$3';
regexprep('internationalization', match_expr, replace_expr1)
ans =
i18n
replace_expr2 = '$111$3';
regexprep('globalization', match_expr, replace_expr2)
2-66
ans =
g11n
Using a dynamic expression ${num2str(length($2))} enables you to base the

replacement expression on the input text so that you do not have to change the
expression each time. This example uses the dynamic replacement syntax ${cmd}.
match_expr = '(^\w)(\w*)(\w$)';
replace_expr = '$1${num2str(length($2))}$3';
regexprep('internationalization', match_expr, replace_expr)
ans =
i18n
regexprep('globalization', match_expr, replace_expr)
ans =
g11n
When parsed, a dynamic expression must correspond to a complete, valid regular

expression. In addition, dynamic match expressions that use the backslash escape
character (\) require two backslashes: one for the initial parsing of the expression, and
one for the complete match. The parentheses that enclose dynamic expressions do not
create a capturing group.
There are three forms of dynamic expressions that you can use in match expressions, and
one form for replacement expressions, as described in the following sections
Dynamic Match Expressions — (??expr)

The (??expr) operator parses expression expr, and inserts the results back into the
match expression. MATLAB then evaluates the modified match expression.
Here is an example of the type of expression that you can use with this operator:
chr = {'5XXXXX', '8XXXXXXXX', '1X'};

regexp(chr, '^(\d+)(??X{$1})$', 'match', 'once');
The purpose of this particular command is to locate a series of X characters in each of the
character vectors stored in the input cell array. Note however that the number of Xs
varies in each character vector. If the count did not vary, you could use the expression
2-67
X{n} to indicate that you want to match n of these characters. But, a constant value of n
does not work in this case.
The solution used here is to capture the leading count number (e.g., the 5 in the first
character vector of the cell array) in a token, and then to use that count in a dynamic
expression. The dynamic expression in this example is (??X{$1}), where $1 is the value
captured by the token \d+. The operator {$1} makes a quantifier of that token value.
Because the expression is dynamic, the same pattern works on all three of the input
vectors in the cell array. With the first input character vector, regexp looks for five X
characters; with the second, it looks for eight, and with the third, it looks for just one:
regexp(chr, '^(\d+)(??X{$1})$', 'match', 'once')
ans =
'5XXXXX' '8XXXXXXXX' '1X'
Commands That Modify the Match Expression — (??@cmd)

MATLAB uses the (??@cmd) operator to include the results of a MATLAB command in
the match expression. This command must return a term that can be used within the
match expression.
For example, use the dynamic expression (??@flilplr($1)) to locate a palindrome,

“Never Odd or Even”, that has been embedded into a larger character vector.
First, create the input string. Make sure that all letters are lowercase, and remove all
nonword characters.
chr = lower(...
'Find the palindrome Never Odd or Even in this string');
chr = regexprep(str, '\W*', '')
chr =
findthepalindromeneveroddoreveninthisstring
Locate the palindrome within the character vector using the dynamic expression:
palchr = regexp(chr, '(.{3,}).?(??@fliplr($1))', 'match')
palchr =
'neveroddoreven'
2-68
The dynamic expression reverses the order of the letters that make up the character
vector, and then attempts to match as much of the reversed-order vector as possible. This
requires a dynamic expression because the value for $1 relies on the value of the token
(.{3,}).
Dynamic expressions in MATLAB have access to the currently active workspace. This
means that you can change any of the functions or variables used in a dynamic
expression just by changing variables in the workspace. Repeat the last command of the
example above, but this time define the function to be called within the expression using
a function handle stored in the base workspace:
fun = @fliplr;
palchr = regexp(str, '(.{3,}).?(??@fun($1))', 'match')
palchr =
'neveroddoreven'
Commands That Serve a Functional Purpose — (?@cmd)

The (?@cmd) operator specifies a MATLAB command that regexp or regexprep is to
run while parsing the overall match expression. Unlike the other dynamic expressions in
MATLAB, this operator does not alter the contents of the expression it is used in.
Instead, you can use this functionality to get MATLAB to report just what steps it is
taking as it parses the contents of one of your regular expressions. This functionality can
be useful in diagnosing your regular expressions.
The following example parses a word for zero or more characters followed by two
identical characters followed again by zero or more characters:
regexp('mississippi', '\w*(\w)\1\w*', 'match')
ans =
'mississippi'
To track the exact steps that MATLAB takes in determining the match, the example
inserts a short script (?@disp($1)) in the expression to display the characters that
finally constitute the match. Because the example uses greedy quantifiers, MATLAB
attempts to match as much of the character vector as possible. So, even though MATLAB
finds a match toward the beginning of the string, it continues to look for more matches
until it arrives at the very end of the string. From there, it backs up through the letters i
then p and the next p, stopping at that point because the match is finally satisfied:
2-69
regexp('mississippi', '\w*(\w)(?@disp($1))\1\w*', 'match')
i
p
p
ans =
'mississippi'
Now try the same example again, this time making the first quantifier lazy (*?). Again,
MATLAB makes the same match:
regexp('mississippi', '\w*?(\w)\1\w*', 'match')
ans =
'mississippi'
But by inserting a dynamic script, you can see that this time, MATLAB has matched the
text quite differently. In this case, MATLAB uses the very first match it can find, and
does not even consider the rest of the text:
regexp('mississippi', '\w*?(\w)(?@disp($1))\1\w*', 'match')
m
i
s
ans =
'mississippi'
To demonstrate how versatile this type of dynamic expression can be, consider the next
example that progressively assembles a cell array as MATLAB iteratively parses the
input text. The (?!) operator found at the end of the expression is actually an empty
lookahead operator, and forces a failure at each iteration. This forced failure is necessary
if you want to trace the steps that MATLAB is taking to resolve the expression.
MATLAB makes a number of passes through the input text, each time trying another
combination of letters to see if a fit better than last match can be found. On any passes in
which no matches are found, the test results in an empty character vector. The dynamic
script (?@if(~isempty($&))) serves to omit the empty character vectors from the
matches cell array:
matches = {};
expr = ['(Euler\s)?(Cauchy\s)?(Boole)?(?@if(~isempty($&)),' ...
2-70
'matches{end+1}=$&;end)(?!)'];
regexp('Euler Cauchy Boole', expr);
matches
matches =
'Euler Cauchy Boole' 'Euler Cauchy ' 'Euler '
'Cauchy Boole' 'Cauchy ' 'Boole'
The operators $& (or the equivalent $0), $`, and $' refer to that part of the input text
that is currently a match, all characters that precede the current match, and all
characters to follow the current match, respectively. These operators are sometimes
useful when working with dynamic expressions, particularly those that employ the (?
@cmd) operator.
This example parses the input text looking for the letter g. At each iteration through the
text, regexp compares the current character with g, and not finding it, advances to the
next character. The example tracks the progress of scan through the text by marking the
current location being parsed with a ^ character.
(The $` and $´ operators capture that part of the text that precedes and follows the
current parsing location. You need two single-quotation marks ($'') to express the
sequence $´ when it appears within text.)
chr = 'abcdefghij';
expr = '(?@disp(sprintf(''starting match: [%s^%s]'',$`,$'')))g';
regexp(chr, expr, 'once');
starting match: [âbcdefghij]

starting match: [a^bcdefghij]
starting match: [ab^cdefghij]
starting match: [abc^defghij]
starting match: [abcdêfghij]
starting match: [abcde^fghij]
starting match: [abcdef^ghij]
Commands in Replacement Expressions — ${cmd}

The ${cmd} operator modifies the contents of a regular expression replacement pattern,
making this pattern adaptable to parameters in the input text that might vary from one
2-71
use to the next. As with the other dynamic expressions used in MATLAB, you can include
any number of these expressions within the overall replacement expression.
In the regexprep call shown here, the replacement pattern is '$

{convertMe($1,$2)}'. In this case, the entire replacement pattern is a dynamic
expression:
regexprep('This highway is 125 miles long', ...

'(\d+\.?\d*)\W(\w+)', '${convertMe($1,$2)}');
The dynamic expression tells MATLAB to execute a function named convertMe using
the two tokens (\d+\.?\d*) and (\w+), derived from the text being matched, as input
arguments in the call to convertMe. The replacement pattern requires a dynamic
expression because the values of $1 and $2 are generated at runtime.
The following example defines the file named convertMe that converts measurements
from imperial units to metric.
function valout = convertMe(valin, units)

switch(units)
case 'inches'
fun = @(in)in .* 2.54;
uout = 'centimeters';
case 'miles'
fun = @(mi)mi .* 1.6093;
uout = 'kilometers';
case 'pounds'
fun = @(lb)lb .* 0.4536;
uout = 'kilograms';
case 'pints'
fun = @(pt)pt .* 0.4731;
uout = 'litres';
case 'ounces'
fun = @(oz)oz .* 28.35;
uout = 'grams';
end
val = fun(str2num(valin));
valout = [num2str(val) ' ' uout];
end
At the command line, call the convertMe function from regexprep, passing in values
for the quantity to be converted and name of the imperial unit:
2-72
See Also
regexprep('This highway is 125 miles long', ...

'(\d+\.?\d*)\W(\w+)', '${convertMe($1,$2)}')
ans =
This highway is 201.1625 kilometers long
regexprep('This pitcher holds 2.5 pints of water', ...

'(\d+\.?\d*)\W(\w+)', '${convertMe($1,$2)}')
ans =
This pitcher holds 1.1828 litres of water
regexprep('This stone weighs about 10 pounds', ...

'(\d+\.?\d*)\W(\w+)', '${convertMe($1,$2)}')
ans =
This stone weighs about 4.536 kilograms
As with the (??@ ) operator discussed in an earlier section, the ${ } operator has
access to variables in the currently active workspace. The following regexprep
command uses the array A defined in the base workspace:
A = magic(3)
A =
8 1 6
3 5 7
4 9 2
regexprep('The columns of matrix _nam are _val', ...

{'_nam', '_val'}, ...
{'A', '${sprintf(''%d%d%d '', A)}'})
ans =
The columns of matrix A are 834 159 672
See Also
More About
2-73
Comma-Separated Lists
In this section...
“What Is a Comma-Separated List?” on page 2-74
“Generating a Comma-Separated List” on page 2-74
“Assigning Output from a Comma-Separated List” on page 2-76
“Assigning to a Comma-Separated List” on page 2-77
“How to Use the Comma-Separated Lists” on page 2-79
“Fast Fourier Transform Example” on page 2-81
What Is a Comma-Separated List?

Typing in a series of numbers separated by commas gives you what is called a comma-
separated list. The MATLAB software returns each value individually:
1,2,3
ans =
ans =
ans =
Such a list, by itself, is not very useful. But when used with large and more complex data
structures like MATLAB structures and cell arrays, the comma-separated list can enable
you to simplify your MATLAB code.
Generating a Comma-Separated List

This section describes how to generate a comma-separated list from either a cell array or
a MATLAB structure.
2-74
Generating a List from a Cell Array
Extracting multiple elements from a cell array yields a comma-separated list. Given a 4-
by-6 cell array as shown here
C = cell(4,6);
for k = 1:24
C{k} = k*2;
end
C
C =
[2] [10] [18] [26] [34] [42]

[4] [12] [20] [28] [36] [44]
[6] [14] [22] [30] [38] [46]
[8] [16] [24] [32] [40] [48]
extracting the fifth column generates the following comma-separated list:
C{:,5}
ans =
34
ans =
36
ans =
38
ans =
40
This is the same as explicitly typing
C{1,5},C{2,5},C{3,5},C{4,5}
2-75
Generating a List from a Structure
For structures, extracting a field of the structure that exists across one of its dimensions
yields a comma-separated list.
Start by converting the cell array used above into a 4-by-1 MATLAB structure with six
fields: f1 through f6. Read field f5 for all rows and MATLAB returns a comma-
separated list:
S = cell2struct(C,{'f1','f2','f3','f4','f5','f6'},2);
S.f5
ans =
34
ans =
36
ans =
38
ans =
40
This is the same as explicitly typing

S(1).f5,S(2).f5,S(3).f5,S(4).f5
Assigning Output from a Comma-Separated List

You can assign any or all consecutive elements of a comma-separated list to variables
with a simple assignment statement. Using the cell array C from the previous section,
assign the first row to variables c1 through c6:
C = cell(4,6);
for k = 1:24
2-76
C{k} = k*2;
end
[c1,c2,c3,c4,c5,c6] = C{1,1:6};
c5
c5 =
34
If you specify fewer output variables than the number of outputs returned by the
expression, MATLAB assigns the first N outputs to those N variables, and then discards
any remaining outputs. In this next example, MATLAB assigns C{1,1:3} to the
variables c1, c2, and c3, and then discards C{1,4:6}:
[c1,c2,c3] = C{1,1:6};
You can assign structure outputs in the same manner:

S = cell2struct(C,{'f1','f2','f3','f4','f5','f6'},2);
[sf1,sf2,sf3] = S.f5;
sf3
sf3 =
38
You also can use the deal function for this purpose.
Assigning to a Comma-Separated List

The simplest way to assign multiple values to a comma-separated list is to use the deal
function. This function distributes all of its input arguments to the elements of a comma-
separated list.
This example uses deal to overwrite each element in a comma-separated list. First
create a list.
c{1} = [31 07];
c{2} = [03 78];
c{:}
ans =
31 7
2-77
ans =
3 78
Use deal to overwrite each element in the list.
[c{:}] = deal([10 20],[14 12]);

c{:}
ans =
10 20
ans =
14 12
This example does the same as the one above, but with a comma-separated list of vectors
in a structure field:
s(1).field1 = [31 07];
s(2).field1 = [03 78];
s.field1
ans =
31 7
ans =
3 78
Use deal to overwrite the structure fields.
[s.field1] = deal([10 20],[14 12]);

s.field1
ans =
10 20
2-78
ans =
14 12
How to Use the Comma-Separated Lists

Common uses for comma-separated lists are
• “Constructing Arrays” on page 2-79

• “Displaying Arrays” on page 2-80
• “Concatenation” on page 2-80
• “Function Call Arguments” on page 2-80
• “Function Return Values” on page 2-81
The following sections provide examples of using comma-separated lists with cell arrays.
Each of these examples applies to MATLAB structures as well.
Constructing Arrays
You can use a comma-separated list to enter a series of elements when constructing a
matrix or array. Note what happens when you insert a list of elements as opposed to
adding the cell itself.
When you specify a list of elements with C{:, 5}, MATLAB inserts the four individual
elements:
A = {'Hello',C{:,5},magic(4)}
A =
'Hello' [34] [36] [38] [40] [4x4 double]
When you specify the C cell itself, MATLAB inserts the entire cell array:
A = {'Hello',C,magic(4)}
A =
'Hello' {4x6 cell} [4x4 double]
2-79
Displaying Arrays
Use a list to display all or part of a structure or cell array:
A{:}
ans =
Hello
ans =
[2] [10] [18] [26] [34] [42]

[4] [12] [20] [28] [36] [44]
[6] [14] [22] [30] [38] [46]
[8] [16] [24] [32] [40] [48]
ans =
16 2 3 13
5 11 10 8
9 7 6 12
4 14 15 1
Concatenation
Putting a comma-separated list inside square brackets extracts the specified elements
from the list and concatenates them:
A = [C{:,5:6}]
A =
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
Function Call Arguments
When writing the code for a function call, you enter the input arguments as a list with
each argument separated by a comma. If you have these arguments stored in a structure
or cell array, then you can generate all or part of the argument list from the structure or
cell array instead. This can be especially useful when passing in variable numbers of
arguments.
2-80
This example passes several attribute-value arguments to the plot function:

X = -pi:pi/10:pi;
Y = tan(sin(X)) - sin(tan(X));
C = cell(2,3);
C{1,1} = 'LineWidth';
C{2,1} = 2;
C{1,2} = 'MarkerEdgeColor';
C{2,2} = 'k';
C{1,3} = 'MarkerFaceColor';
C{2,3} = 'g';
figure
plot(X,Y,'--rs',C{:})
Function Return Values
MATLAB functions can also return more than one value to the caller. These values are
returned in a list with each value separated by a comma. Instead of listing each return
value, you can use a comma-separated list with a structure or cell array. This becomes
more useful for those functions that have variable numbers of return values.
This example returns three values to a cell array:

C = cell(1,3);
[C{:}] = fileparts('work/mytests/strArrays.mat')
C =
'work/mytests' 'strArrays' '.mat'
Fast Fourier Transform Example

The fftshift function swaps the left and right halves of each dimension of an array.
For a simple vector such as [0 2 4 6 8 10] the output would be [6 8 10 0 2 4].
For a multidimensional array, fftshift performs this swap along each dimension.
fftshift uses vectors of indices to perform the swap. For the vector shown above, the
index [1 2 3 4 5 6] is rearranged to form a new index [4 5 6 1 2 3]. The function
then uses this index vector to reposition the elements. For a multidimensional array,
fftshift must construct an index vector for each dimension. A comma-separated list
makes this task much simpler.
Here is the fftshift function:
2-81
function y = fftshift(x)
numDims = ndims(x);
idx = cell(1,numDims);
for k = 1:numDims
m = size(x,k);
p = ceil(m/2);
idx{k} = [p+1:m 1:p];
end
y = x(idx{:});
end
The function stores the index vectors in cell array idx. Building this cell array is
relatively simple. For each of the N dimensions, determine the size of that dimension and
find the integer index nearest the midpoint. Then, construct a vector that swaps the two
halves of that dimension.
By using a cell array to store the index vectors and a comma-separated list for the
indexing operation, fftshift shifts arrays of any dimension using just a single
operation: y = x(idx{:}). If you were to use explicit indexing, you would need to write
one if statement for each dimension you want the function to handle:
if ndims(x) == 1
y = x(index1);
else if ndims(x) == 2
y = x(index1,index2);
end
end
Another way to handle this without a comma-separated list would be to loop over each
dimension, converting one dimension at a time and moving data each time. With a
comma-separated list, you move the data just once. A comma-separated list makes it very
easy to generalize the swapping operation to an arbitrary number of dimensions.
2-82
Alternatives to the eval Function
In this section...
“Why Avoid the eval Function?” on page 2-83
“Variables with Sequential Names” on page 2-83
“Files with Sequential Names” on page 2-84
“Function Names in Variables” on page 2-85
“Field Names in Variables” on page 2-85
“Error Handling” on page 2-86
Why Avoid the eval Function?

Although the eval function is very powerful and flexible, it is not always the best
solution to a programming problem. Code that calls eval is often less efficient and more
difficult to read and debug than code that uses other functions or language constructs.
For example:
• MATLAB compiles code the first time you run it to enhance performance for future
runs. However, because code in an eval statement can change at run time, it is not
compiled.
• Code within an eval statement can unexpectedly create or assign to a variable
already in the current workspace, overwriting existing data.
• Concatenated character vectors within an eval statement are often difficult to read.
Other language constructs can simplify the syntax in your code.
For many common uses of eval, there are preferred alternate approaches, as shown in
the following examples.
Variables with Sequential Names

A frequent use of the eval function is to create sets of variables such as A1, A2, ..., An,
but this approach does not use the array processing power of MATLAB and is not
recommended. The preferred method is to store related data in a single array. If the data
sets are of different types or sizes, use a structure or cell array.
2-83
For example, create a cell array that contains 10 elements, where each element is a
numeric array:
numArrays = 10;
A = cell(numArrays,1);
for n = 1:numArrays
A{n} = magic(n);
end
Access the data in the cell array by indexing with curly braces. For example, display the
fifth element of A:
A{5}
ans =
17 24 1 8 15
23 5 7 14 16
4 6 13 20 22
10 12 19 21 3
11 18 25 2 9
The assignment statement A{n} = magic(n) is more elegant and efficient than this
call to eval:
eval(['A', int2str(n),' = magic(n)']) % Not recommended
For more information, see:
• “Create Cell Array” on page 12-3

• “Create Structure Array” on page 11-2
Files with Sequential Names

Related data files often have a common root name with an integer index, such as
myfile1.mat through myfileN.mat. A common (but not recommended) use of the eval
function is to construct and pass each file name to a function using command syntax,
such as
eval(['save myfile',int2str(n),'.mat']) % Not recommended
The best practice is to use function syntax, which allows you to pass variables as inputs.
For example:
2-84
currentFile = 'myfile1.mat';
save(currentFile)
You can construct file names within a loop using the sprintf function (which is usually
more efficient than int2str), and then call the save function without eval. This code
creates 10 files in the current folder:
numFiles = 10;
for n = 1:numFiles
randomData = rand(n);
currentFile = sprintf('myfile%d.mat',n);
save(currentFile,'randomData')
end
• “Command vs. Function Syntax” on page 1-9

• “Import or Export a Sequence of Files”
Function Names in Variables

A common use of eval is to execute a function when the name of the function is in a
variable character vector. There are two ways to evaluate functions from variables that
are more efficient than using eval:
• Create function handles with the @ symbol or with the str2func function. For
example, run a function from a list stored in a cell array:
examples = {@odedemo,@sunspots,@fitdemo};
n = input('Select an example (1, 2, or 3): ');
examples{n}()
• Use the feval function. For example, call a plot function (such as plot, bar, or pie)
with data that you specify at run time:
plotFunction = input('Specify a plotting function: ','s');
data = input('Enter data to plot: ');
feval(plotFunction,data)
Field Names in Variables

Access data in a structure with a variable field name by enclosing the expression for the
field in parentheses. For example:
2-85
myData.height = [67, 72, 58];

myData.weight = [140, 205, 90];
fieldName = input('Select data (height or weight): ','s');

dataToUse = myData.(fieldName);
If you enter weight at the input prompt, then you can find the minimum weight value
with the following command.
min(dataToUse)
ans =
90
For an additional example, see “Generate Field Names from Variables” on page 11-14.
Error Handling
The preferred method for error handling in MATLAB is to use a try, catch statement.
For example:
try
B = A;
catch exception
disp('A is undefined')
end
If your workspace does not contain variable A, then this code returns:
A is undefined
Previous versions of the documentation for the eval function include the syntax
eval(expression,catch_expr). If evaluating the expression input returns an
error, then eval evaluates catch_expr. However, an explicit try/catch is
significantly clearer than an implicit catch in an eval statement. Using the implicit
catch is not recommended.
2-86
Classes (Data Types)
87
3
Overview of MATLAB Classes

3 Overview of MATLAB Classes
Fundamental MATLAB Classes

There are many different data types, or classes, that you can work with in the MATLAB
software. You can build matrices and arrays of floating-point and integer data,
characters and strings, and logical true and false states. Function handles connect
your code with any MATLAB function regardless of the current scope. Tables, structures,
and cell arrays provide a way to store dissimilar types of data in the same container.
There are 16 fundamental classes in MATLAB. Each of these classes is in the form of a
matrix or array. With the exception of function handles, this matrix or array is a
minimum of 0-by-0 in size and can grow to an n-dimensional array of any size. A function
handle is always scalar (1-by-1).
All of the fundamental MATLAB classes are shown in the diagram below:
Numeric classes in the MATLAB software include signed and unsigned integers, and
single- and double-precision floating-point numbers. By default, MATLAB stores all
numeric values as double-precision floating point. (You cannot change the default type
and precision.) You can choose to store any number, or array of numbers, as integers or
as single-precision. Integer and single-precision arrays offer more memory-efficient
storage than double-precision.
All numeric types support basic array operations, such as subscripting, reshaping, and
mathematical operations.
You can create two-dimensional double and logical matrices using one of two storage
formats: full or sparse. For matrices with mostly zero-valued elements, a sparse
3-2
Fundamental MATLAB Classes
matrix requires a fraction of the storage space required for an equivalent full matrix.
Sparse matrices invoke methods especially tailored to solve sparse problems.
These classes require different amounts of storage, the smallest being a logical value
or 8-bit integer which requires only 1 byte. It is important to keep this minimum size in
mind if you work on data in files that were written using a precision smaller than 8 bits.
The following table describes the fundamental classes in more detail.

Class Name Documentation Intended Use
double, single Floating-Point • Required for fractional numeric data.
Numbers on page • Double on page 4-7 and Single on page 4-7
4-7 precision.
• Use realmin and realmax to show range of values on
page 4-11.
• Two-dimensional arrays can be sparse.
• Default numeric type in MATLAB.
int8, uint8, Integers on page • Use for signed and unsigned whole numbers.
int16, uint16, 4-2 • More efficient use of memory. on page 29-4
int32, uint32,
• Use intmin and intmax to show range of values on
int64, uint64
page 4-5.
• Choose from 4 sizes (8, 16, 32, and 64 bits).
char, string “Characters and • Data type for text.
Strings” • Native or Unicode®.
• Converts to/from numeric.
• Use with regular expressions on page 2-41.
• For multiple character arrays, use cell arrays.
• Starting in R2016b, you also can store text in string
arrays. For more information, see string.
logical “Logical • Use in relational conditions or to test state.
Operations” • Can have one of two values: true or false.
• Also useful in array indexing.
• Two-dimensional arrays can be sparse.
3-3
3 Overview of MATLAB Classes
Class Name Documentation Intended Use

function_hand “Function • Pointer to a function.
le Handles” • Enables passing a function to another function
• Can also call functions outside usual scope.
• Use to specify graphics callback functions.
• Save to MAT-file and restore later.
table “Tables” • Rectangular container for mixed-type, column-oriented
data.
• Row and variable names identify contents.
• Use the properties of a table to store metadata such as
variable units.
• Manipulation of elements similar to numeric or logical
arrays.
• Access data by numeric or named index.
• Can select a subset of data and preserve the table
container or can extract the data from a table.
struct “Structures” • Fields store arrays of varying classes and sizes.
• Access one or all fields/indices in single operation.
• Field names identify contents.
• Method of passing function arguments.
• Use in comma-separated lists on page 2-74.
• More memory required for overhead
cell “Cell Arrays” • Cells store arrays of varying classes and sizes.
• Allows freedom to package data as you want.
• Manipulation of elements is similar to numeric or logical
arrays.
• Method of passing function arguments.
• Use in comma-separated lists.
• More memory required for overhead
3-4
See Also
See Also
More About
• “Valid Combinations of Unlike Classes” on page 15-2
3-5
4
Numeric Classes
• “Integers” on page 4-2

• “Floating-Point Numbers” on page 4-7
• “Complex Numbers” on page 4-17
• “Infinity and NaN” on page 4-18
• “Identifying Numeric Classes” on page 4-21
• “Display Format for Numeric Values” on page 4-22
4 Numeric Classes
Integers
In this section...
“Integer Classes” on page 4-2
“Creating Integer Data” on page 4-3
“Arithmetic Operations on Integer Classes” on page 4-4
“Largest and Smallest Values for Integer Classes” on page 4-5
Integer Classes
MATLAB has four signed and four unsigned integer classes. Signed types enable you to
work with negative integers as well as positive, but cannot represent as wide a range of
numbers as the unsigned types because one bit is used to designate a positive or negative
sign for the number. Unsigned types give you a wider range of numbers, but these
numbers can only be zero or positive.
MATLAB supports 1-, 2-, 4-, and 8-byte storage for integer data. You can save memory
and execution time for your programs if you use the smallest integer type that
accommodates your data. For example, you do not need a 32-bit integer to store the value
100.
Here are the eight integer classes, the range of values you can store with each type, and
the MATLAB conversion function required to create that type:
Class Range of Values Conversion Function
Signed 8-bit integer -27 to 27-1 int8
Signed 64-bit integer -263
to 2 -1
63 int64
Unsigned 8-bit integer 0 to 2 -1
8 uint8
16 uint16
32 uint32
Unsigned 64-bit integer 0 to 264-1 uint64
4-2
Integers
Creating Integer Data

MATLAB stores numeric data as double-precision floating point (double) by default. To
store data as an integer, you need to convert from double to the desired integer type.
Use one of the conversion functions shown in the table above.
For example, to store 325 as a 16-bit signed integer assigned to variable x, type
x = int16(325);
If the number being converted to an integer has a fractional part, MATLAB rounds to the
nearest integer. If the fractional part is exactly 0.5, then from the two equally nearby
integers, MATLAB chooses the one for which the absolute value is larger in magnitude:
x = 325.499;
int16(x)
ans =
int16
325
x = x + .001;
int16(x)
ans =
int16
326
If you need to round a number using a rounding scheme other than the default, MATLAB
provides four rounding functions: round, fix, floor, and ceil. The fix function
enables you to override the default and round towards zero when there is a nonzero
fractional part:
x = 325.9;
int16(fix(x))
ans =
int16
325
4-3
4 Numeric Classes
Arithmetic operations that involve both integers and floating-point always result in an
integer data type. MATLAB rounds the result, when necessary, according to the default
rounding algorithm. The example below yields an exact answer of 1426.75 which
MATLAB then rounds to the next highest integer:
int16(325) * 4.39
ans =
int16
1427
The integer conversion functions are also useful when converting other classes, such as
strings, to integers:
str = 'Hello World';
int8(str)
ans =
1×11 int8 row vector
72 101 108 108 111 32 87 111 114 108 100
If you convert a NaN value into an integer class, the result is a value of 0 in that integer
class. For example,
int32(NaN)
ans =
int32
Arithmetic Operations on Integer Classes

MATLAB can perform integer arithmetic on the following types of data:
• Integers or integer arrays of the same integer data type. This yields a result that has
the same data type as the operands:
x = uint32([132 347 528]) .* uint32(75);

class(x)
4-4
Integers
ans =
uint32
• Integers or integer arrays and scalar double-precision floating-point numbers. This
yields a result that has the same data type as the integer operands:
x = uint32([132 347 528]) .* 75.49;
class(x)
ans =
uint32
For all binary operations in which one operand is an array of integer data type (except
64-bit integers) and the other is a scalar double, MATLAB computes the operation using
element-wise double-precision arithmetic, and then converts the result back to the
original integer data type. For binary operations involving a 64-bit integer array and a
scalar double, MATLAB computes the operation as if 80-bit extended-precision
arithmetic were used, to prevent loss of precision.
Largest and Smallest Values for Integer Classes

For each integer data type, there is a largest and smallest number that you can represent
with that type. The table shown under “Integers” on page 4-2 lists the largest and
smallest values for each integer data type in the “Range of Values” column.
You can also obtain these values with the intmax and intmin functions:
intmax('int8')
ans =
int8
127
intmin('int8')
ans =
int8
-128
If you convert a number that is larger than the maximum value of an integer data type to
that type, MATLAB sets it to the maximum value. Similarly, if you convert a number
that is smaller than the minimum value of the integer data type, MATLAB sets it to the
minimum value. For example,
4-5
4 Numeric Classes
x = int8(300)
x =
int8
127
x = int8(-300)
x =
int8
-128
Also, when the result of an arithmetic operation involving integers exceeds the maximum
(or minimum) value of the data type, MATLAB sets it to the maximum (or minimum)
value:
x = int8(100) * 3
x =
int8
127
x = int8(-100) * 3
x =
int8
-128
4-6
Floating-Point Numbers
In this section...
“Double-Precision Floating Point” on page 4-7
“Single-Precision Floating Point” on page 4-7
“Creating Floating-Point Data” on page 4-8
“Arithmetic Operations on Floating-Point Numbers” on page 4-9
“Largest and Smallest Values for Floating-Point Classes” on page 4-11
“Accuracy of Floating-Point Data” on page 4-12
“Avoiding Common Problems with Floating-Point Arithmetic” on page 4-14
MATLAB represents floating-point numbers in either double-precision or single-precision

format. The default is double precision, but you can make any number single precision
with a simple conversion function.
Double-Precision Floating Point

MATLAB constructs the double-precision (or double) data type according to IEEE®
Standard 754 for double precision. Any value stored as a double requires 64 bits,
formatted as shown in the table below:
Bits Usage
63 Sign (0 = positive, 1 = negative)
62 to 52 Exponent, biased by 1023
51 to 0 Fraction f of the number 1.f
Single-Precision Floating Point

MATLAB constructs the single-precision (or single) data type according to IEEE
Standard 754 for single precision. Any value stored as a single requires 32 bits,
formatted as shown in the table below:
Bits Usage
31 Sign (0 = positive, 1 = negative)
30 to 23 Exponent, biased by 127
4-7
4 Numeric Classes
Bits Usage
22 to 0 Fraction f of the number 1.f
Because MATLAB stores numbers of type single using 32 bits, they require less
memory than numbers of type double, which use 64 bits. However, because they are
stored with fewer bits, numbers of type single are represented to less precision than
numbers of type double.
Creating Floating-Point Data

Use double-precision to store values greater than approximately 3.4 x 1038 or less than
approximately -3.4 x 1038. For numbers that lie between these two limits, you can use
either double- or single-precision, but single requires less memory.
Creating Double-Precision Data
Because the default numeric type for MATLAB is double, you can create a double with
a simple assignment statement:
x = 25.783;
The whos function shows that MATLAB has created a 1-by-1 array of type double for
the value you just stored in x:
whos x
Name Size Bytes Class
x 1x1 8 double
Use isfloat if you just want to verify that x is a floating-point number. This function
returns logical 1 (true) if the input is a floating-point number, and logical 0 (false)
otherwise:
isfloat(x)
ans =
logical
4-8
You can convert other numeric data, characters or strings, and logical data to double
precision using the MATLAB function, double. This example converts a signed integer
to double-precision floating point:
y = int64(-589324077574); % Create a 64-bit integer
x = double(y) % Convert to double

x =
-5.8932e+11
Creating Single-Precision Data
Because MATLAB stores numeric data as a double by default, you need to use the
single conversion function to create a single-precision number:
x = single(25.783);
The whos function returns the attributes of variable x in a structure. The bytes field of
this structure shows that when x is stored as a single, it requires just 4 bytes compared
with the 8 bytes to store it as a double:
xAttrib = whos('x');
xAttrib.bytes
ans =
4
You can convert other numeric data, characters or strings, and logical data to single
precision using the single function. This example converts a signed integer to single-
precision floating point:
y = int64(-589324077574); % Create a 64-bit integer
x = single(y) % Convert to single

x =
single
-5.8932e+11
Arithmetic Operations on Floating-Point Numbers

This section describes which classes you can use in arithmetic operations with floating-
point numbers.
4-9
4 Numeric Classes
Double-Precision Operations
You can perform basic arithmetic operations with double and any of the following other
classes. When one or more operands is an integer (scalar or array), the double operand
must be a scalar. The result is of type double, except where noted otherwise:
• single — The result is of type single

• double
• int* or uint* — The result has the same data type as the integer operand
• char
• logical
This example performs arithmetic on data of types char and double. The result is of
type double:
c = 'uppercase' - 32;
class(c)
ans =
double
char(c)
ans =
UPPERCASE
Single-Precision Operations
You can perform basic arithmetic operations with single and any of the following other
classes. The result is always single:
• single
• double
• char
• logical
In this example, 7.5 defaults to type double, and the result is of type single:
x = single([1.32 3.47 5.28]) .* 7.5;
class(x)
4-10
ans =
single
Largest and Smallest Values for Floating-Point Classes

For the double and single classes, there is a largest and smallest number that you can
represent with that type.
Largest and Smallest Double-Precision Values
The MATLAB functions realmax and realmin return the maximum and minimum
values that you can represent with the double data type:
str = 'The range for double is:\n\t%g to %g and\n\t %g to %g';

sprintf(str, -realmax, -realmin, realmin, realmax)
ans =
The range for double is:
-1.79769e+308 to -2.22507e-308 and
2.22507e-308 to 1.79769e+308
Numbers larger than realmax or smaller than -realmax are assigned the values of
positive and negative infinity, respectively:
realmax + .0001e+308
ans =
Inf
-realmax - .0001e+308
ans =
-Inf
Largest and Smallest Single-Precision Values
The MATLAB functions realmax and realmin, when called with the argument
'single', return the maximum and minimum values that you can represent with the
single data type:
str = 'The range for single is:\n\t%g to %g and\n\t %g to %g';

sprintf(str, -realmax('single'), -realmin('single'), ...
realmin('single'), realmax('single'))
ans =
4-11
4 Numeric Classes
The range for single is:

-3.40282e+38 to -1.17549e-38 and
1.17549e-38 to 3.40282e+38
Numbers larger than realmax('single') or smaller than -realmax('single') are

assigned the values of positive and negative infinity, respectively:
realmax('single') + .0001e+038
ans =
single
Inf
-realmax('single') - .0001e+038
ans =
single
-Inf
Accuracy of Floating-Point Data

If the result of a floating-point arithmetic computation is not as precise as you had
expected, it is likely caused by the limitations of your computer's hardware. Probably,
your result was a little less exact because the hardware had insufficient bits to represent
the result with perfect accuracy; therefore, it truncated the resulting value.
Double-Precision Accuracy
Because there are only a finite number of double-precision numbers, you cannot
represent all numbers in double-precision storage. On any computer, there is a small gap
between each double-precision number and the next larger double-precision number. You
can determine the size of this gap, which limits the precision of your results, using the
eps function. For example, to find the distance between 5 and the next larger double-
precision number, enter
format long
eps(5)
ans =
8.881784197001252e-16
4-12
This tells you that there are no double-precision numbers between 5 and 5 + eps(5). If
a double-precision computation returns the answer 5, the result is only accurate to
within eps(5).
The value of eps(x) depends on x. This example shows that, as x gets larger, so does
eps(x):
eps(50)
ans =
7.105427357601002e-15
If you enter eps with no input argument, MATLAB returns the value of eps(1), the
distance from 1 to the next larger double-precision number.
Single-Precision Accuracy
Similarly, there are gaps between any two single-precision numbers. If x has type
single, eps(x) returns the distance between x and the next larger single-precision
number. For example,
x = single(5);
eps(x)
returns
ans =
single
4.7684e-07
Note that this result is larger than eps(5). Because there are fewer single-precision
numbers than double-precision numbers, the gaps between the single-precision numbers
are larger than the gaps between double-precision numbers. This means that results in
single-precision arithmetic are less precise than in double-precision arithmetic.
For a number x of type double, eps(single(x)) gives you an upper bound for the
amount that x is rounded when you convert it from double to single. For example,
when you convert the double-precision number 3.14 to single, it is rounded by
double(single(3.14) - 3.14)
ans =
1.0490e-07
4-13
4 Numeric Classes
The amount that 3.14 is rounded is less than

eps(single(3.14))
ans =
single
2.3842e-07
Avoiding Common Problems with Floating-Point Arithmetic

Almost all operations in MATLAB are performed in double-precision arithmetic
conforming to the IEEE standard 754. Because computers only represent numbers to a
finite precision (double precision calls for 52 mantissa bits), computations sometimes
yield mathematically nonintuitive results. It is important to note that these results are
not bugs in MATLAB.
Use the following examples to help you identify these cases:
Example 1 — Round-Off or What You Get Is Not What You Expect
The decimal number 4/3 is not exactly representable as a binary fraction. For this
reason, the following calculation does not give zero, but rather reveals the quantity eps.
e = 1 - 3*(4/3 - 1)
e =
2.2204e-16
Similarly, 0.1 is not exactly representable as a binary number. Thus, you get the
following nonintuitive behavior:
a = 0.0;
for i = 1:10
a = a + 0.1;
end
a == 1
ans =
logical
Note that the order of operations can matter in the computation:
4-14
b = 1e-16 + 1 - 1e-16;
c = 1e-16 - 1e-16 + 1;
b == c
ans =
logical
There are gaps between floating-point numbers. As the numbers get larger, so do the
gaps, as evidenced by:
(2^53 + 1) - 2^53
ans =
0
Since pi is not really π, it is not surprising that sin(pi) is not exactly zero:
sin(pi)
ans =
1.224646799147353e-16
Example 2 — Catastrophic Cancellation
When subtractions are performed with nearly equal operands, sometimes cancellation
can occur unexpectedly. The following is an example of a cancellation caused by
swamping (loss of precision that makes the addition insignificant).
sqrt(1e-16 + 1) - 1
ans =
0
Some functions in MATLAB, such as expm1 and log1p, may be used to compensate for
the effects of catastrophic cancellation.
Example 3 — Floating-Point Operations and Linear Algebra
Round-off, cancellation, and other traits of floating-point arithmetic combine to produce

startling computations when solving the problems of linear algebra. MATLAB warns that
the following matrix A is ill-conditioned, and therefore the system Ax = b may be
sensitive to small perturbations:
4-15
4 Numeric Classes
A = diag([2 eps]);
b = [2; eps];
y = A\b;
Warning: Matrix is close to singular or badly scaled.
Results may be inaccurate. RCOND = 1.110223e-16.
These are only a few of the examples showing how IEEE floating-point arithmetic affects
computations in MATLAB. Note that all computations performed in IEEE 754 arithmetic
are affected, this includes applications written in C or FORTRAN, as well as MATLAB.
References
[1] Moler, Cleve. “Floating Points.” MATLAB News and Notes. Fall, 1996.
[2] Moler, Cleve. Numerical Computing with MATLAB. Natick, MA: The MathWorks,
Inc., 2004.
4-16
Complex Numbers
Complex Numbers
Creating Complex Numbers

Complex numbers consist of two separate parts: a real part and an imaginary part. The
basic imaginary unit is equal to the square root of -1. This is represented in MATLAB by
either of two letters: i or j.
The following statement shows one way of creating a complex value in MATLAB. The
variable x is assigned a complex number with a real part of 2 and an imaginary part of 3:
x = 2 + 3i;
Another way to create a complex number is using the complex function. This function
combines two numeric inputs into a complex output, making the first input real and the
second imaginary:
x = rand(3) * 5;
y = rand(3) * -8;
z = complex(x, y)
z =
4.7842 -1.0921i 0.8648 -1.5931i 1.2616 -2.2753i
2.6130 -0.0941i 4.8987 -2.3898i 4.3787 -3.7538i
4.4007 -7.1512i 1.3572 -5.2915i 3.6865 -0.5182i
You can separate a complex number into its real and imaginary parts using the real
and imag functions:
zr = real(z)
zr =
4.7842 0.8648 1.2616
2.6130 4.8987 4.3787
4.4007 1.3572 3.6865
zi = imag(z)
zi =
-1.0921 -1.5931 -2.2753
-0.0941 -2.3898 -3.7538
-7.1512 -5.2915 -0.5182
4-17
4 Numeric Classes
Infinity and NaN

In this section...
“Infinity” on page 4-18
“NaN” on page 4-18
Infinity
MATLAB represents infinity by the special value inf. Infinity results from operations
like division by zero and overflow, which lead to results too large to represent as
conventional floating-point values. MATLAB also provides a function called inf that
returns the IEEE arithmetic representation for positive infinity as a double scalar
value.
Several examples of statements that return positive or negative infinity in MATLAB are
shown here.
x = 1/0 x = 1.e1000
x = x =
Inf Inf
x = exp(1000) x = log(0)
x = x =
Inf -Inf
Use the isinf function to verify that x is positive or negative infinity:

x = log(0);
isinf(x)
ans =
1
NaN
MATLAB represents values that are not real or complex numbers with a special value
called NaN, which stands for “Not a Number”. Expressions like 0/0 and inf/inf result
in NaN, as do any arithmetic operations involving a NaN:
x = 0/0
x =
4-18
Infinity and NaN
NaN
You can also create NaNs by:

x = NaN;
whos x
x 1x1 8 double
The NaN function returns one of the IEEE arithmetic representations for NaN as a
double scalar value. The exact bit-wise hexadecimal representation of this NaN value is,
format hex
x = NaN
x =
fff8000000000000
Always use the isnan function to verify that the elements in an array are NaN:
isnan(x)
ans =
MATLAB preserves the “Not a Number” status of alternate NaN representations and
treats all of the different representations of NaN equivalently. However, in some special
cases (perhaps due to hardware limitations), MATLAB does not preserve the exact bit
pattern of alternate NaN representations throughout an entire calculation, and instead
uses the canonical NaN bit pattern defined above.
Logical Operations on NaN
Because two NaNs are not equal to each other, logical operations involving NaN always
return false, except for a test for inequality, (NaN ~= NaN):
NaN > NaN
ans =
0
4-19
4 Numeric Classes
NaN ~= NaN
ans =
1
4-20
Identifying Numeric Classes
Identifying Numeric Classes

You can check the data type of a variable x using any of these commands.
Command Operation
whos x Display the data type of x.
xType = class(x); Assign the data type of x to a variable.
isnumeric(x) Determine if x is a numeric type.
isa(x, 'integer') Determine if x is the specified numeric type. (Examples for
isa(x, 'uint64') any integer, unsigned 64-bit integer, any floating point,
isa(x, 'float') double precision, and single precision are shown here).
isa(x, 'double')
isa(x, 'single')
isreal(x) Determine if x is real or complex.
isnan(x) Determine if x is Not a Number (NaN).
isinf(x) Determine if x is infinite.
isfinite(x) Determine if x is finite.
4-21
4 Numeric Classes
Display Format for Numeric Values

In this section...
“Default Display” on page 4-22
“Display Format Examples” on page 4-22
“Setting Numeric Format in a Program” on page 4-23
Default Display
By default, MATLAB displays numeric output as 5-digit scaled, fixed-point values. You
can change the way numeric values are displayed to any of the following:
• 5-digit scaled fixed point, floating point, or the best of the two
• 15-digit scaled fixed point, floating point, or the best of the two
• A ratio of small integers
• Hexadecimal (base 16)
• Bank notation
All available formats are listed on the format reference page.
To change the numeric display setting, use either the format function or the
Preferences dialog box (accessible from the MATLAB File menu). The format function
changes the display of numeric values for the duration of a single MATLAB session,
while your Preferences settings remain active from one session to the next. These
settings affect only how numbers are displayed, not how MATLAB computes or saves
them.
Display Format Examples

Here are a few examples of the various formats and the output produced from the
following two-element vector x, with components of different magnitudes.
Check the current format setting:

get(0, 'format')
ans =
short
4-22
Display Format for Numeric Values
Set the value for x and display in 5-digit scaled fixed point:
x = [4/3 1.2345e-6]
x =
1.3333 0.0000
Set the format to 5-digit floating point:

format short e
x
x =
1.3333e+00 1.2345e-06
Set the format to 15-digit scaled fixed point:

format long
x
x =
1.333333333333333 0.000001234500000
Set the format to 'rational' for small integer ratio output:
format rational
x
x =
4/3 1/810045
Set an integer value for x and display it in hexadecimal (base 16) format:
format hex
x = uint32(876543210)
x =
343efcea
Setting Numeric Format in a Program

To temporarily change the numeric format inside a program, get the original format
using the get function and save it in a variable. When you finish working with the new
format, you can restore the original format setting using the set function as shown here:
origFormat = get(0, 'format');

format('rational');
-- Work in rational format --
4-23
4 Numeric Classes
set(0,'format', origFormat);
4-24
5
The Logical Class
• “Find Array Elements That Meet a Condition” on page 5-2

• “Determine if Arrays Are Logical” on page 5-7
• “Reduce Logical Arrays to Single Value” on page 5-11
• “Truth Table for Logical Operations” on page 5-14
5 The Logical Class
Find Array Elements That Meet a Condition

You can filter the elements of an array by applying one or more conditions to the array.
For instance, if you want to examine only the even elements in a matrix, find the location
of all 0s in a multidimensional array, or replace NaN values in a discrete set of data. You
can perform these tasks using a combination of the relational and logical operators. The
relational operators (>, <, >=, <=, ==, ~=) impose conditions on the array, and you
can apply multiple conditions by connecting them with the logical operators and, or, and
not, respectively denoted by &, |, and ~.
In this section...
“Apply a Single Condition” on page 5-2
“Apply Multiple Conditions” on page 5-4
“Replace Values that Meet a Condition” on page 5-5
Apply a Single Condition

To apply a single condition, start by creating a 5-by-5 matrix, A, that contains random
integers between 1 and 15.
rng default
A = randi(15,5)
A =
13 2 3 3 10
14 5 15 7 1
2 9 15 14 13
14 15 8 12 15
10 15 13 15 11
Use the relational less than operator, <, to determine which elements of A are less than 9.
Store the result in B.
B = A < 9
B =
0 1 1 1 0
0 1 0 1 1
5-2
1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
The result is a logical matrix. Each value in B represents a logical 1 (true) or logical 0
(false) state to indicate whether the corresponding element of A fulfills the condition A
< 9. For example, A(1,1) is 13, so B(1,1) is logical 0 (false). However, A(1,2) is 2,
so B(1,2) is logical 1 (true).
Although B contains information about which elements in A are less than 9, it doesn’t tell
you what their values are. Rather than comparing the two matrices element by element,
use B to index into A.
A(B)
ans =
2
2
5
3
8
3
7
1
The result is a column vector of the elements in A that are less than 9. Since B is a logical
matrix, this operation is called logical indexing. In this case, the logical array being used
as an index is the same size as the other array, but this is not a requirement. For more
information, see “Using Logicals in Array Indexing”.
Some problems require information about the locations of the array elements that meet a
condition rather than their actual values. In this example, use the find function to
locate all of the elements in A less than 9.
I = find(A < 9)
I =
3
6
7
11
5-3
5 The Logical Class
14
16
17
22
The result is a column vector of linear indices. Each index describes the location of an
element in A that is less than 9, so in practice A(I) returns the same result as A(B). The
difference is that A(B) uses logical indexing, whereas A(I) uses linear indexing.
Apply Multiple Conditions

You can use the logical and, or, and not operators to apply any number of conditions to
an array; the number of conditions is not limited to one or two.
First, use the logical and operator, denoted &, to specify two conditions: the elements
must be less than 9 AND greater than 2. Specify the conditions as a logical index to view
the elements that satisfy both conditions.
A(A<9 & A>2)
ans =
5
3
8
3
7
The result is a list of the elements in A that satisfy both conditions. Be sure to specify
each condition with a separate statement connected by a logical operator. For example,
you cannot specify the conditions above by A(2<A<9), since it evaluates to A(2<A |
A<9).
Next, find the elements in A that are less than 9 AND even numbered.
A(A<9 & ~mod(A,2))
ans =
2
2
8
5-4
The result is a list of all even elements in A that are less than 9. The use of the logical
NOT operator, ~, converts the matrix mod(A,2) into a logical matrix, with a value of
logical 1 (true) located where an element is evenly divisible by 2.
Finally, find the elements in A that are less than 9 AND even numbered AND not equal
to 2.
A(A<9 & ~mod(A,2) & A~=2)
ans =
The result, 8, is even, less than 9, and not equal to 2. It is the only element in A that
satisfies all three conditions.
Use the find function to get the index of the 8 element that satisfies the conditions.
find(A<9 & ~mod(A,2) & A~=2)
ans =
14
The result indicates that A(14) = 8.
Replace Values that Meet a Condition

Sometimes it is useful to simultaneously change the values of several existing array
elements. Use logical indexing with a simple assignment statement to replace the values
in an array that meet a condition.
Replace all values in A that are greater than 10 with the number 10.
A(A>10) = 10
A =
10 2 3 3 10
10 5 10 7 1
2 9 10 10 10
10 10 8 10 10
10 10 10 10 10
5-5
5 The Logical Class
A now has a maximum value of 10.
Replace all values in A that are not equal to 10 with a NaN value.
A(A~=10) = NaN
A =
10 NaN NaN NaN 10

10 NaN 10 NaN NaN
NaN NaN 10 10 10
10 10 NaN 10 10
10 10 10 10 10
The resulting matrix has element values of 10 or NaN.
Replace all of the NaN values in A with zeros and apply the logical NOT operator, ~A.
A(isnan(A)) = 0;
C = ~A
C =
0 1 1 1 0
0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
The resulting matrix has values of logical 1 (true) in place of the NaN values, and logical
0 (false) in place of the 10s. The logical NOT operation, ~A, converts the numeric array
into a logical array such that A&C returns a matrix of logical 0 (false) values and A|C
returns a matrix of logical 1 (true) values.
See Also
Logical Operators: Short Circuit | and | find | isnan | nan | not | or | xor
5-6
Determine if Arrays Are Logical

To determine whether an array is logical, you can test the entire array or each element
individually. This is useful when you want to confirm the output data type of a function.
This page shows several ways to determine if an array is logical.
In this section...
“Identify Logical Matrix” on page 5-7
“Test an Entire Array” on page 5-8
“Test Each Array Element” on page 5-8
“Summary Table” on page 5-9
Identify Logical Matrix

Create a 3-by-6 matrix and locate all elements greater than 0.5.
A = gallery('uniformdata',[3,6],0) > 0.5
A =
1 0 0 0 1 0
0 1 0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 1
The result, A, is a 3-by-6 logical matrix.
Use the whos function to confirm the size, byte count, and class (or data type) of the
matrix, A.
whos A
Name Size Bytes Class Attributes
A 3x6 18 logical
The result confirms that A is a 3-by-6 logical matrix.
5-7
5 The Logical Class
Test an Entire Array

Use the islogical function to test whether A is logical.
islogical(A)
ans =
The result is logical 1 (true).
Use the class function to display a string with the class name of A.
class(A)
ans =
logical
The result confirms that A is logical.
Test Each Array Element

Create a cell array, C, and use the 'islogical' option of the cellfun function to
identify which cells contain logical values.
C = {1, 0, true, false, pi, A};
cellfun('islogical',C)
ans =
0 0 1 1 0 1
The result is a logical array of the same size as C.
To test each element in a numeric matrix, use the arrayfun function.
arrayfun(@islogical,A)
ans =
1 1 1 1 1 1
5-8
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
The result is a matrix of logical values of the same size as A. arrayfun(@islogical,A)

always returns a matrix of all logical 1 (true) or logical 0 (false) values.
Summary Table
Use these MATLAB functions to determine if an array is logical.
Function Syntax Output Size Description
whos(A) N/A Displays the name, size,
storage bytes, class, and
attributes of variable A.
islogical(A) scalar Returns logical 1 (true) if A
is a logical array; otherwise,
it returns logical 0 (false).
The result is the same as
using isa(A,'logical').
isa(A,'logical') scalar Returns logical 1 (true) if A
is a logical array; otherwise,
it returns logical 0 (false).
The result is the same as
using islogical(A).
class(A) single string Returns a string with the
name of the class of variable
A.
cellfun('islogical',A) Array of the same size as A For cell arrays only.
Returns logical 1 (true) for
each cell that contains a
logical array; otherwise, it
returns logical 0 (false).
arrayfun(@islogical,A) Array of the same size as A Returns an array of logical
1 (true) values if A is
logical; otherwise, it returns
an array of logical 0 (false)
values.
5-9
5 The Logical Class
See Also
arrayfun | cellfun | class | isa | islogical | whos
5-10
Reduce Logical Arrays to Single Value
Reduce Logical Arrays to Single Value

Sometimes the result of a calculation produces an entire numeric or logical array when
you need only a single logical true or false value. In this case, use the any or all
functions to reduce the array to a single scalar logical for further computations.
The any and all functions are natural extensions of the logical | (OR) and & (AND)
operators, respectively. However, rather than comparing just two elements, the any and
all functions compare all of the elements in a particular dimension of an array. It is as if
all of those elements are connected by & or | operators and the any or all functions
evaluate the resulting long logical expression(s). Therefore, unlike the core logical
operators, the any and all functions reduce the size of the array dimension that they
operate on so that it has size 1. This enables the reduction of many logical values into a
single logical condition.
First, create a matrix, A, that contains random integers between 1 and 25.
rng(0)
A = randi(25,5)
A =
21 3 4 4 17
23 7 25 11 1
4 14 24 23 22
23 24 13 20 24
16 25 21 24 17
Next, use the mod function along with the logical NOT operator, ~, to determine which
elements in A are even.
A = ~mod(A,2)
A =
0 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0
The resulting matrices have values of logical 1 (true) where an element is even, and
logical 0 (false) where an element is odd.
5-11
5 The Logical Class
Since the any and all functions reduce the dimension that they operate on to size 1, it
normally takes two applications of one of the functions to reduce a 2–D matrix into a
single logical condition, such as any(any(A)). However, if you use the notation A(:) to
regard all of the elements of A as a single column vector, you can use any(A(:)) to get
the same logical information without nesting the function calls.
Determine if any elements in A are even.
any(A(:))
ans =
The result is logical 1 (true).
You can perform logical and relational comparisons within the function call to any or
all. This makes it easy to quickly test an array for a variety of properties.
Determine if all elements in A are odd.
all(~A(:))
ans =
The result is logical 0 (false).
Determine whether any main or super diagonal elements in A are even.
any(diag(A) | diag(A,1))
Error using |
Inputs must have the same size.
MATLAB returns an error since the vectors returned by diag(A) and diag(A,1) are
not the same size.
To reduce each diagonal to a single scalar logical condition and allow logical short-
circuiting, use the any function on each side of the short-circuit OR operator, ||.
any(diag(A)) || any(diag(A,1))
5-12
See Also
ans =
The result is logical 1 (true). It no longer matters that diag(A) and diag(A,1) are not
the same size.
See Also
Logical Operators: Short Circuit | all | and | any | or | xor
5-13
5 The Logical Class
Truth Table for Logical Operations

The following reference table shows the results of applying the binary logical operators to
a series of logical 1 (true) and logical 0 (false) scalar pairs. To calculate NAND, NOR
or XNOR logical operations, simply apply the logical NOT operator to the result of a
logical AND, OR, or XOR operation, respectively.
Inputs A and B and or xor not
A & B A | B xor(A,B) ~A
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0
See Also
Logical Operators: Short Circuit | and | not | or | xor
5-14
6
Characters and Strings
• “Represent Text with Character and String Arrays” on page 6-2

• “Create Character Arrays” on page 6-5
• “Create String Arrays” on page 6-11
• “Cell Arrays of Character Vectors” on page 6-20
• “Analyze Text Data with String Arrays” on page 6-23
• “Test for Empty Strings and Missing Values” on page 6-30
• “Formatting Text” on page 6-35
• “Compare Text” on page 6-46
• “Search and Replace Text” on page 6-53
• “Convert from Numeric Values to Character Array” on page 6-60
• “Convert from Character Arrays to Numeric Values” on page 6-62
• “Function Summary” on page 6-65
6 Characters and Strings
Represent Text with Character and String Arrays

There are two ways to represent text in MATLAB®. You can store text in character
arrays. A typical use is to store short pieces of text as character vectors. And starting in
R2016b, you can also store multiple pieces of text in string arrays. String arrays provide
a set of functions for working with text as data.
Represent Text with Character Vectors
Create a character vector by enclosing a sequence of characters in single quotation

marks. MATLAB® displays character vectors using single quotation marks.
chr = 'Hello, world'
chr =
'Hello, world'
Character vectors store characters as 1-by-n vectors. You can index directly into
character vectors to get characters, or to change them.
chr(1:5)
ans =
'Hello'
chr(1:5) = 'HELLO';
chr
chr =
'HELLO, world'
You can work with character vectors just as you would with arrays of any other type. For
example, you can concatenate character vectors.
street = '123 Maple St.';
city = 'Lakeview, MA 01234';
fullAddress = [street ', ' city]
fullAddress =
'123 Maple St., Lakeview, MA 01234'
Typical uses for character vectors include specifying file names, plot labels, or input
arguments for functions. For more information on character arrays, see “Create
Character Arrays” on page 6-5.
6-2
Represent Text with Character and String Arrays
Represent Text with String Arrays
You also can store text in string arrays. Each element of a string array stores a 1-by-n
character vector.
Starting in R2017a, you can create strings using double quotes. MATLAB® displays
strings with double quotes.
str = "Welcome, friend"
str =
"Welcome, friend"
As an alternative, you can convert a character vector to a string using the string
function.
chr = 'Hello, world';
str = string(chr)
str =
"Hello, world"
str is a 1-by-1 string, or string scalar. To find the number of characters in a string, use
the strlength function.
whos str
str 1x1 150 string
strlength(str)
ans = 12
You can store multiple pieces of text in a string array. Each element of the array can
contain a string of a different size.
str = ["Mercury","Gemini","Apollo";...
"Skylab","Skylab B","ISS"]
str = 2x3 string array

"Mercury" "Gemini" "Apollo"
"Skylab" "Skylab B" "ISS"
6-3
str is a 2-by-3 string array. You can find the lengths of the strings with the strlength
function.
whos str
str 2x3 460 string
L = strlength(str)
L =
7 6 6
6 8 3
As an alternative, you also can convert a cell array of character vectors to a string array
using the string function.
C = {'Mercury','Venus','Earth'};
str = string(C)

"Mercury" "Venus" "Earth"
Use string arrays to store and work with multiple pieces of text. You can find and replace
substrings, sort and reshape string arrays, and work with text as data. For more
information on string arrays, see “Create String Arrays” on page 6-11.
See Also
cellstr | char | string | strlength
Related Examples
• “Cell Arrays of Character Vectors” on page 6-20
6-4
Create Character Arrays
Create Character Vector

Create a character vector by enclosing a sequence of characters in single quotation
marks.
chr = 'Hello, world'
chr =
'Hello, world'
Character vectors are 1-by-n arrays of type char. In computer programming, string is a
frequently-used term for a 1-by-n array of characters. However, starting in R2016b
MATLAB also provides a string data type, so 1-by-n character arrays are referred to as
character vectors in MATLAB documentation.
whos chr
chr 1x12 24 char
If the text contains a single quotation mark, include two quotation marks when assigning
the character vector.
newChr = 'You''re right'
newChr =
'You're right'
Functions such as uint16 convert characters to their numeric codes.
chrNumeric = uint16(chr)
chrNumeric =
1×12 uint16 row vector
72 101 108 108 111 44 32 119 111 114 108 100
6-5
The char function converts the integer vector back to characters.

chrAlpha = char([72 101 108 108 111 44 32 119 111 114 108 100])
chrAlpha =
'Hello, world'
Create Rectangular Character Array

Character arrays are m-by-n arrays of characters, where m is not always 1. You can join
two or more character vectors together to create a character array. This is called
concatenation and is explained for numeric arrays in the section “Concatenating
Matrices”. As with numeric arrays, you can combine character arrays vertically or
horizontally to create a new character array.
However, it is recommended that you store character vectors in a cell array on page 6-
20, instead of using m-by-n character arrays. Cell arrays are flexible containers that
allow you to easily store character vectors of varying length.
Combine Character Vectors Vertically
To combine character vectors into a two-dimensional character array, use square

brackets or the char function.
• Apply the MATLAB concatenation operator, []. Separate each row with a semicolon
(;). Each row must contain the same number of characters. For example, combine
three character vectors of equal length:
devTitle = ['Thomas R. Lee'; ...
'Sr. Developer'; ...
'SFTware Corp.']
devTitle =
3×13 char array
'Thomas R. Lee'
'Sr. Developer'
'SFTware Corp.'
If the character vectors have different lengths, pad with space characters as needed.
For example:
6-6
mgrTitle = ['Harold A. Jorgensen '; ...

'Assistant Project Manager'; ...
'SFTware Corp. ']
mgrTitle =
3×25 char array
'Harold A. Jorgensen '

'Assistant Project Manager'
'SFTware Corp. '
• Call the char function. If the character vectors have different lengths, char pads the
shorter vectors with trailing blanks so that each row has the same number of
characters.
mgrTitle = char('Harold A. Jorgensen', ...

'Assistant Project Manager', 'SFTware Corp.')
mgrTitle =
3×25 char array
'Harold A. Jorgensen '

'Assistant Project Manager'
'SFTware Corp. '
Combining Character Vectors Horizontally
To combine character vectors into a single row vector, use square brackets or the strcat
function.
• Apply the MATLAB concatenation operator, []. Separate the input character vectors
with a comma or a space. This method preserves any trailing spaces in the input
arrays.
name = 'Thomas R. Lee';

title = 'Sr. Developer';
company = 'SFTware Corp.';
fullName = [name ', ' title ', ' company]
MATLAB returns
6-7
fullName =
'Thomas R. Lee, Sr. Developer, SFTware Corp.'

• Call the concatenation function, strcat. This method removes trailing spaces in the
inputs. For example, combine character vectors to create a hypothetical email
address.
name = 'myname ';

domain = 'mydomain ';
ext = 'com ';
address = strcat(name, '@', domain, '.', ext)
MATLAB returns
address =
'myname@mydomain.com'
Identify Characters
Use any of the following functions to identify a character array, or certain characters in a
character array.
ischar Determine whether the input is a character array
isletter Find all alphabetic letters in the input character array
isspace Find all space characters in the input character array
isstrprop Find all characters of a specific category
Find the spaces in a character vector.
chr = 'Find the space characters in this character vector';

% | | | | | | |
% 5 9 15 26 29 34 44
find(isspace(chr))
ans =
5 9 15 26 29 34 44
6-8
Work with Space Characters

The blanks function creates a character vector of space characters. Create a vector of 15
space characters. Character vectors always are displayed between single quotation
marks.
chr = blanks(15)
chr =
' '
Insert a few nonspace characters in the middle of the blank character vector.
chr(6:10) = 'AAAAA'
chr =
' AAAAA '
You can justify the positioning of these characters to the left or right using the strjust
function:
chrLeft = strjust(chr,'left')
chrLeft =
'AAAAA '
chrRight = strjust(chr,'right')
chrRight =
' AAAAA'
Remove all trailing space characters with deblank:

chrDeblank = deblank(chr)
chrDeblank =
' AAAAA'
Remove all leading and trailing spaces with strtrim:

chrTrim = strtrim(chr)
6-9
chrTrim =
'AAAAA'
Expand Character Arrays

Generally, MathWorks does not recommend expanding the size of an existing character
array by assigning additional characters to indices beyond the bounds of the array such
that part of the array becomes padded with zeros.
6-10
Create String Arrays

String arrays were introduced in R2016b. String arrays store pieces of text and provide a
set of functions for working with text as data. You can index into, reshape, and
concatenate strings arrays just as you can with arrays of any other type. You also can
access the characters in a string and append text to strings using the plus operator. To
rearrange strings within a string array, use functions such as split, join, and sort.
Create String Arrays from Variables
MATLAB® provides string arrays to store pieces of text. Each element of a string array
contains a 1-by-N character vector.
Starting in R2017a, you can create a string using double quotes.

str = "Hello, world"
str =
"Hello, world"
As an alternative, you can convert a character vector to a string using the string
function. chr is a 1-by-17 character vector. str is a 1-by-1 string that has the same text
as the character vector.
chr = 'Greetings, friend'
chr =
'Greetings, friend'
str = string(chr)
str =
"Greetings, friend"
Create a string array using the [] operator. str is a 2-by-3 string array that contains six
strings.
str = ["Mercury","Gemini","Apollo";
"Skylab","Skylab B","ISS"]

"Skylab" "Skylab B" "ISS"
6-11
Find the length of each string in str with the strlength function. Use strlength, not
length, to determine the number of characters in strings.
L = strlength(str)
L =
7 6 6
6 8 3
As an alternative, you can convert a cell array of character vectors to a string array using
the string function. MATLAB® displays strings in string arrays with double quotes,
and displays characters vectors in cell arrays with single quotes.
C = {'Mercury','Venus','Earth'}
C = 1x3 cell array

{'Mercury'} {'Venus'} {'Earth'}
str = string(C)

"Mercury" "Venus" "Earth"
In addition to character vectors, you can convert numeric, datetime, duration, and
categorical values to strings using the string function.
Convert a numeric array to a string array.

X = [5 10 20 3.1416];
string(X)
ans = 1x4 string array

"5" "10" "20" "3.1416"
Convert a datetime value to a string.

d = datetime('now');
string(d)
ans =
"19-Sep-2017 18:37:45"
6-12
Also, you can read text from files into string arrays using the readtable, textscan,
and fscanf functions.
Create Empty and Missing Strings
String arrays can contain both empty and missing values. An empty string contains zero
characters. When you display an empty string, the result is a pair of double quotes with
nothing between them (""). The missing string is the string equivalent to NaN for
numeric arrays. It indicates where a string array has missing values. When you display a
missing string, the result is <missing>, with no quotation marks.
Create an empty string array using the strings function. When you call strings with
no arguments, it returns an empty string. Note that the size of str is 1-by-1, not 0-by-0.
However, str contains zero characters.
str = strings
str =
""
Create an empty character vector using single quotes. Note that the size of chr is 0-by-0.
chr = ''
chr =
0x0 empty char array
Create a string array where every element is an empty string. You can preallocate a
string array with the strings function.
str = strings(2,3)

"" "" ""
"" "" ""
To create a missing string, convert a missing value using the string function. The
missing string displays as <missing>.
str = string(missing)
str =
<missing>
6-13
You can create a string array with both empty and missing strings. Use the ismissing
function to determine which elements are strings with missing values. Note that the
empty string is not a missing string.
str(1) = "";
str(2) = "Gemini";
str(3) = string(missing)

"" "Gemini" <missing>
ismissing(str)
ans = 1x3 logical array

0 0 1
Compare a missing string to another string. The result is always 0 (false), even when
you compare a missing string to another missing string.
str = string(missing);
str == "Gemini"
ans = logical
0
str == string(missing)
ans = logical
0
Access Elements of String Array
String arrays support array operations such as indexing and reshaping. Use array
indexing to access the first row of str and all of the columns.
"Skylab","Skylab B","ISS"];
str(1,:)

6-14
Access the second element in the second row of str.

str(2,2)
ans =
"Skylab B"
Assign a new string outside the bounds of str. MATLAB® expands the array and fills
unallocated elements with missing values.
str(3,4) = "Mir"

"Mercury" "Gemini" "Apollo" <missing>
"Skylab" "Skylab B" "ISS" <missing>
<missing> <missing> <missing> "Mir"
Access Characters Within Strings
You can index into a string array using curly braces, {}, to access characters directly.
Use curly braces when you need to access and modify characters within a string element.
Indexing with curly braces provides compatibility for code that could work with either
string arrays or cell arrays of character vectors. But whenever possible, use string
functions to work with the characters in strings.
Access the second element in the second row with curly braces. chr is a character vector,
not a string.
"Skylab","Skylab B","ISS"];
chr = str{2,2}
chr =
'Skylab B'
Access the character vector and return the first three characters.
str{2,2}(1:3)
ans =
'Sky'
Find the space characters in a string and replace them with dashes. Use the isspace
function to inspect individual characters within the string. isspace returns a logical
6-15
vector that contains a true value wherever there is a space character. Finally, display the
modified string element, str(2,2).
tf = isspace(str{2,2})
tf = 1x8 logical array

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
str{2,2}(tf) = "-";
str(2,2)
ans =
"Skylab-B"
Note that in this case, you can also replace spaces using the replace function, without
resorting to curly brace indexing.
replace(str(2,2)," ","-")
ans =
"Skylab-B"
Concatenate Strings into String Array
Concatenate strings into a string array just as you would concatenate arrays of any other
kind.
Concatenate two string arrays using square brackets, [].

str1 = ["Mercury","Gemini","Apollo"];
str2 = ["Skylab","Skylab B","ISS"];
str = [str1 str2]

"Mercury" "Gemini" "Apollo" "Skylab" "Skylab B" "ISS"
Transpose str1 and str2. Concatenate them and then vertically concatenate column
headings onto the string array. When you concatenate character vectors into a string
array, the character vectors are automatically converted to strings.
str1 = str1';
str2 = str2';
str = [str1 str2];
str = [["Mission:","Station:"] ; str]
6-16

"Mission:" "Station:"
"Mercury" "Skylab"
"Gemini" "Skylab B"
"Apollo" "ISS"
Append Text to Strings
To append text to strings, use the plus operator, +. The plus operator appends text to
strings but does not change the size of a string array.
Append a last name to an array of names. If you append a character vector to strings,
then the character vector is automatically converted to a string.
names = ["Mary";"John";"Elizabeth";"Paul";"Ann"];
names = names + ' Smith'
names = 5x1 string array

"Mary Smith"
"John Smith"
"Elizabeth Smith"
"Paul Smith"
"Ann Smith"
Append different last names. You can append text to a string array from a string array or
from a cell array of character vectors. When you add nonscalar arrays, they must be the
same size.
names = ["Mary";"John";"Elizabeth";"Paul";"Ann"];
lastnames = ["Jones";"Adams";"Young";"Burns";"Spencer"];
names = names + " " + lastnames

"Mary Jones"
"John Adams"
"Elizabeth Young"
"Paul Burns"
"Ann Spencer"
Append a missing string. When you append a missing string with the plus operator, the
output is a missing string.
6-17
str1 = "Jones";
str2 = string(missing);
str1 + str2
ans =
<missing>
Split, Join, and Sort String Array
MATLAB® provides a rich set of functions to work with string arrays. For example, you
can use the split, join, and sort functions to rearrange the string array names so
that the names are in alphabetical order by last name.
Split names on the space characters. Splitting changes names from a 5-by-1 string array
to a 5-by-2 array.
names = ["Mary Jones";"John Adams";"Elizabeth Young";"Paul Burns";"Ann Spencer"];
names = split(names)

"Mary" "Jones"
"John" "Adams"
"Elizabeth" "Young"
"Paul" "Burns"
"Ann" "Spencer"
Switch the columns of names so that the last names are in the first column. Add a
comma after each last name.
names = [names(:,2) names(:,1)];
names(:,1) = names(:,1) + ','

"Jones," "Mary"
"Adams," "John"
"Young," "Elizabeth"
"Burns," "Paul"
"Spencer," "Ann"
Join the last and first names. The join function places a space character between the
strings it joins. After the join, names is a 5-by-1 string array.
names = join(names)
6-18
See Also

"Jones, Mary"
"Adams, John"
"Young, Elizabeth"
"Burns, Paul"
"Spencer, Ann"
Sort the elements of names so that they are in alphabetical order.
names = sort(names)

"Adams, John"
"Burns, Paul"
"Jones, Mary"
"Spencer, Ann"
"Young, Elizabeth"
See Also
ismissing | isspace | join | plus | sort | split | string | strings |
strlength
Related Examples
6-19
Cell Arrays of Character Vectors

Convert to Cell Array of Character Vectors
When you create character arrays from character vectors, all of the vectors must have
the same length. This often means that you have to pad blanks at the end of character
vectors to equalize their length. However, another type of MATLAB array, the cell array,
can hold different sizes and types of data in an array without padding. A cell array of
character vectors is a cell array where every cell contains a character vector. Cell arrays
of character vectors provide a flexible way to store character vectors of varying lengths.
Convert a character array to a cell array of character vectors. data is padded with spaces
so that each row has an equal number of characters. Use cellstr to convert the
character array.
data = ['Allison Jones';'Development ';'Phoenix '];
celldata = cellstr(data)
celldata =
3×1 cell array
{'Allison Jones'}
{'Development' }
{'Phoenix' }
data is a 3-by-13 character array, while celldata is a 3-by-1 cell array of character
vectors. cellstr also strips the blank spaces at the ends of the rows of data.
The iscellstr function determines if the input argument is a cell array of character
vectors. It returns a logical 1 (true) in the case of celldata:
iscellstr(celldata)
ans =
logical
Use char to convert back to a padded character array.

chr = char(celldata)
6-20
Cell Arrays of Character Vectors
chr =
3×13 char array
'Allison Jones'
'Development '
'Phoenix '
For more information on cell arrays, see “Access Data in Cell Array” on page 12-5.
While the phrase "cell array of strings" frequently has been used to describe such arrays,
the phrase is not accurate because such a cell array holds character vectors, not strings.
Starting in R2016b, MATLAB provides string arrays as another means of storing text. If
you create variables that have the string data type, store them in string arrays, not cell
arrays.
Functions for Cell Arrays of Character Vectors

This table describes the MATLAB functions for working with cell arrays of character
vectors.
cellstr Convert a character array to a cell array of character vectors.
char Convert a cell array of character vectors to a character array.
deblank Remove trailing blanks from a character array.
iscellstr Return true for a cell array of character arrays.
sort Sort elements in ascending or descending order.
strcat Concatenate character arrays or cell arrays of character arrays.
strcmp Compare character arrays or cell arrays of character arrays.
You can also use the following set functions with cell arrays of character vectors.
intersect Set the intersection of two vectors.
ismember Detect members of a set.
setdiff Return the set difference of two vectors.
setxor Set the exclusive OR of two vectors.
6-21
union Set the union of two vectors.
unique Set the unique elements of a vector.
6-22
Analyze Text Data with String Arrays

This example shows how to store text from a file as a string array, sort the words by their
frequency, plot the result, and collect basic statistics for the words found in the file.
Import Text File to String Array
Read text from Shakespeare's Sonnets with the fileread function. fileread returns
the text as a 1-by-100266 character vector.
sonnets = fileread('sonnets.txt');
sonnets(1:35)
ans =
'THE SONNETS
by William Shakespeare'
Convert the text to a string using the string function. Then, split it on newline
characters using the splitlines function. sonnets becomes a 2625-by-1 string array,
where each string contains one line from the poems. Display the first five lines of
sonnets.
sonnets = string(sonnets);
sonnets = splitlines(sonnets);
sonnets(1:5)

"THE SONNETS"
""
"by William Shakespeare"
""
""
Clean String Array
To calculate the frequency of the words in sonnets, first clean it by removing empty
strings and punctuation marks. Then reshape it into a string array that contains
individual words as elements.
Remove the strings with zero characters ("") from the string array. Compare each
element of sonnets to "", the empty string. Starting in R2017a, you can create strings,
6-23
including an empty string, using double quotes. TF is a logical vector that contains a true
value wherever sonnets contains a string with zero characters. Index into sonnets
with TF and delete all strings with zero characters.
TF = (sonnets == "");
sonnets(TF) = [];
sonnets(1:10)

"THE SONNETS"
" I"
" From fairest creatures we desire increase,"
" That thereby beauty's rose might never die,"
" But as the riper should by time decease,"
" His tender heir might bear his memory:"
" But thou, contracted to thine own bright eyes,"
" Feed'st thy light's flame with self-substantial fuel,"
" Making a famine where abundance lies,"
Replace some punctuation marks with space characters. For example, replace periods,
commas, and semi-colons. Keep apostrophes because they can be part of some words in
the Sonnets, such as light's.
p = [".","?","!",",",";",":"];
sonnets = replace(sonnets,p," ");
sonnets(1:10)

"THE SONNETS"
" I"
" From fairest creatures we desire increase "
" That thereby beauty's rose might never die "
" But as the riper should by time decease "
" His tender heir might bear his memory "
" But thou contracted to thine own bright eyes "
" Feed'st thy light's flame with self-substantial fuel "
" Making a famine where abundance lies "
Strip leading and trailing space characters from each element of sonnets.
6-24
sonnets = strip(sonnets);
sonnets(1:10)

"THE SONNETS"
"I"
"From fairest creatures we desire increase"
"That thereby beauty's rose might never die"
"But as the riper should by time decease"
"His tender heir might bear his memory"
"But thou contracted to thine own bright eyes"
"Feed'st thy light's flame with self-substantial fuel"
"Making a famine where abundance lies"
Split sonnets into a string array whose elements are individual words. You can use the
split function to split elements of a string array on whitespace characters, or on
delimiters that you specify. However, split requires that every element of a string
array must be divisible into an equal number of new strings. The elements of sonnets
have different numbers of spaces, and therefore are not divisible into equal numbers of
strings. To use the split function on sonnets, write a for-loop that calls split on one
element at a time.
Create the empty string array sonnetWords using the strings function. Write a for-
loop that splits each element of sonnets using the split function. Concatenate the
output from split onto sonnetWords. Each element of sonnetWords is an individual
word from sonnets.
sonnetWords = strings(0);
for i = 1:length(sonnets)
sonnetWords = [sonnetWords ; split(sonnets(i))];
end
sonnetWords(1:10)

"THE"
"SONNETS"
"by"
"William"
"Shakespeare"
"I"
"From"
6-25
"fairest"
"creatures"
"we"
Sort Words Based on Frequency
Find the unique words in sonnetWords. Count them and sort them based on their
frequency.
To count words that differ only by case as the same word, convert sonnetWords to
lowercase. For example, The and the count as the same word. Find the unique words
using the unique function. Then, count the number of times each unique word occurs
using the histcounts function.
sonnetWords = lower(sonnetWords);
[words,~,idx] = unique(sonnetWords);
numOccurrences = histcounts(idx,numel(words));
Sort the words in sonnetWords by number of occurrences, from most to least common.
[rankOfOccurrences,rankIndex] = sort(numOccurrences,'descend');
wordsByFrequency = words(rankIndex);
Plot Word Frequency
Plot the occurrences of words in the Sonnets from the most to least common words. Zipf's
Law states that the distribution of occurrences of words in a large body text follows a
power-law distribution.
loglog(rankOfOccurrences);
xlabel('Rank of word (most to least common)');
ylabel('Number of Occurrences');
6-26
Display the ten most common words in the Sonnets.
wordsByFrequency(1:10)

"and"
"the"
"to"
"my"
"of"
"i"
"in"
"that"
"thy"
6-27
"thou"
Collect Basic Statistics in Table
Calculate the total number of occurrences of each word in sonnetWords. Calculate the
number of occurrences as a percentage of the total number of words, and calculate the
cumulative percentage from most to least common. Write the words and the basic
statistics for them to a table.
numOccurrences = numOccurrences(rankIndex);
numOccurrences = numOccurrences';
numWords = length(sonnetWords);
T = table;
T.Words = wordsByFrequency;
T.NumOccurrences = numOccurrences;
T.PercentOfText = numOccurrences / numWords * 100.0;
T.CumulativePercentOfText = cumsum(numOccurrences) / numWords * 100.0;
Display the statistics for the ten most common words.

T(1:10,:)
ans=10x4 table
Words NumOccurrences PercentOfText CumulativePercentOfText
______ ______________ _____________ _______________________
"and" 490 2.7666 2.7666

"the" 436 2.4617 5.2284
"to" 409 2.3093 7.5377
"my" 371 2.0947 9.6324
"of" 370 2.0891 11.722
"i" 341 1.9254 13.647
"in" 321 1.8124 15.459
"that" 320 1.8068 17.266
"thy" 280 1.5809 18.847
"thou" 233 1.3156 20.163
6-28
See Also
The most common word in the Sonnets, and, occurs 490 times. Together, the ten most
common words account for 20.163% of the text.
See Also
histcounts | join | lower | replace | sort | split | splitlines | string |
strip | table | unique
Related Examples
6-29
Test for Empty Strings and Missing Values

String arrays can contain both empty strings and missing values. Empty strings contain
zero characters and display as double quotes with nothing between them (""). You can
determine if a string is an empty string using the == operator. The empty string is a
substring of every other string. Therefore, functions such as contains always find the
empty string within other strings. String arrays also can contain missing values. Missing
values in string arrays display as <missing>. To find missing values in a string array,
use the ismissing function instead of the == operator.
Test for Empty Strings
You can test a string array for empty strings using the == operator.
Starting in R2017a, you can create an empty string using double quotes with nothing
between them (""). Note that the size of str is 1-by-1, not 0-by-0. However, str contains
zero characters.
str = ""
str =
""
Create an empty character vector using single quotes. Note that the size of chr is 0-by-0.
The character array chr actually is an empty array, and not just an array with zero
characters.
chr = ''
chr =
0x0 empty char array
Create an array of empty strings using the strings function. Each element of the array
is a string with no characters.
str2 = strings(1,3)
str2 = 1x3 string array

"" "" ""
Test if str is an empty string by comparing it to an empty string.
6-30
if (str == "")
disp 'str has zero characters'
end
str has zero characters
Do not use the isempty function to test for empty strings. A string with zero characters
still has a size of 1-by-1. However, you can test if a string array has at least one
dimension with a size of zero using the isempty function.
Create an empty string array using the strings function. To be an empty array, at least
one dimension must have a size of zero.
str = strings(0,3)
str =
0x3 empty string array
Test str using the isempty function.
isempty(str)
ans = logical
1
Test a string array for empty strings. The == operator returns a logical array that is the
same size as the string array.
str = ["Mercury","","Apollo"]

"Mercury" "" "Apollo"
str == ''

0 1 0
6-31
Find Empty Strings Within Other Strings
Strings always contain the empty string as a substring. In fact, the empty string is
always at both the start and the end of every string. Also, the empty string is always
found between any two consecutive characters in a string.
Create a string. Then test if it contains the empty string.
str = "Hello, world";

TF = contains(str,"")
TF = logical
1
Test if str starts with the empty string.
TF = startsWith(str,"")
TF = logical
1
Count the number of characters in str. Then count the number of empty strings in str.
The count function counts empty strings at the beginning and end of str, and between
each pair of characters. Therefore if str has N characters, it also has N+1 empty strings.
str
str =
"Hello, world"
strlength(str)
ans = 12
count(str,"")
ans = 13
Replace a substring with the empty string. When you call replace with an empty string,
it removes the substring and replaces it with a string that has zero characters.
replace(str,"world","")
6-32
ans =
"Hello, "
Insert a substring after empty strings using the insertAfter function. Because there
are empty strings between each pair of characters, insertAfter inserts substrings
between each pair.
insertAfter(str,"","-")
ans =
"-H-e-l-l-o-,- -w-o-r-l-d-"
In general, string functions that replace, erase, extract, or insert substrings allow you to
specify empty strings as the starts and ends of the substrings to modify. When you do so,
these functions operate on the start and end of the string, and between every pair of
characters.
Test for Missing Values
You can test a string array for missing values using the ismissing function. The
missing string is the string equivalent to NaN for numeric arrays. It indicates where a
string array has missing values. The missing string displays as <missing>.
To create a missing string, convert a missing value using the string function.
str = string(missing)
str =
<missing>
You can create a string array with both empty and missing strings. Use the ismissing
function to determine which elements are strings with missing values. Note that the
empty string is not a missing string.
str(1) = "";
str(2) = "Gemini";
str(3) = string(missing)

"" "Gemini" <missing>
ismissing(str)
6-33

0 0 1
Compare str to a missing string. The comparison is always 0 (false), even when you
compare a missing string to another missing string.
str == string(missing)

0 0 0
To find missing strings, use the ismissing function. Do not use the == operator.
See Also
contains | endsWith | eq | erase | eraseBetween | extractAfter |
extractBefore | extractBetween | insertAfter | insertBefore | ismissing |
replace | replaceBetween | startsWith | string | strings | strlength
Related Examples
6-34
Formatting Text
Formatting Text
To convert data to text and control its format, you can use formatting operators with
common conversion functions, such as num2str and sprintf. These operators control
notation, alignment, significant digits, and so on. They are similar to those used by the
printf function in the C programming language. Typical uses for formatted text include
text for display and output files.
For example, %f converts floating-point values to text using fixed-point notation. Adjust
the format by adding information to the operator, such as %.2f to represent two digits
after the decimal mark, or %12f to represent 12 characters in the output, padding with
spaces as needed.
A = pi*ones(1,3);
txt = sprintf('%f | %.2f | %12f', A)
txt =
'3.141593 | 3.14 | 3.141593'
You can combine operators with ordinary text and special characters in a format
specifier. For instance, \n inserts a newline character.
txt = sprintf('Displaying pi: \n %f \n %.2f \n %12f', A)
txt =
'Displaying pi:
3.141593
3.14
3.141593'
Functions that support formatting operators are compose, num2str, sprintf, fprintf,
and the error handling functions assert, error, warning, and MException.
Fields of the Formatting Operator

A formatting operator can have six fields, as shown in the figure. From right to left, the
fields are the conversion character, subtype, precision, field width, flags, and numeric
identifier. (Space characters are not allowed in the operator. They are shown here only to
improve readability of the figure.) The conversion character is the only required field,
along with the leading % character.
6-35
% 3$ 0 12 .5 b u
Identifier Conversion character

Flags Subtype
Field width Precision
Conversion Character
The conversion character specifies the notation of the output. It consists of a single
character and appears last in the format specifier.
Specifier Description
c Single character.
d Decimal notation (signed).
e Exponential notation (using a lowercase e, as in 3.1415e+00).
E Exponential notation (using an uppercase E, as in 3.1415E+00).
f Fixed-point notation.
g The more compact of %e or %f. (Insignificant zeroes do not print.)
G Same as %g, but using an uppercase E.
o Octal notation (unsigned).
s Character vector or string array.
u Decimal notation (unsigned).
x Hexadecimal notation (unsigned, using lowercase letters a–f).
X Hexadecimal notation (unsigned, using uppercase letters A–F).
For example, format the number 46 using different conversion characters to display the
number in decimal, fixed-point, exponential, and hexadecimal formats.
A = 46*ones(1,4);
txt = sprintf('%d %f %e %X', A)
txt =
'46 46.000000 4.600000e+01 2E'
6-36
Formatting Text
Subtype
The subtype field is a single alphabetic character that immediately precedes the
conversion character. Without the subtype field, the conversion characters %o, %x, %X,
and %u treat input data as integers. To treat input data as floating-point values instead
and convert them to octal, decimal, or hexadecimal representations, use one of following
subtype specifiers.
b The input data are double-precision floating-point values rather than unsigned
integers. For example, to print a double-precision value in hexadecimal, use a
format like %bx.
t The input data are single-precision floating-point values rather than unsigned
integers.
Precision
The precision field in a formatting operator is a nonnegative integer that immediately

follows a period. For example, in the operator %7.3f, the precision is 3. For the %g
operator, the precision indicates the number of significant digits to display. For the %f,
%e, and %E operators, the precision indicates how many digits to display to the right of
the decimal point.
Display numbers to different precisions using the precision field.

txt = sprintf('%g %.2g %f %.2f', pi*50*ones(1,4))
txt =
'157.08 1.6e+02 157.079633 157.08'
While you can specify the precision in a formatting operator for input text (for example,
in the %s operator), there is usually no reason to do so. If you specify the precision as p,
and p is less than the number of characters in the input text, then the output contains
only the first p characters.
Field Width
The field width in a formatting operator is a nonnegative integer that specifies the
number of digits or characters in the output when formatting input values. For example,
in the operator %7.3f, the field width is 7.
Specify different field widths. To show the width for each output, use the | character. By
default, the output text is padded with space characters when the field width is greater
than the number of characters.
6-37
txt = sprintf('|%e|%15e|%f|%15f|', pi*50*ones(1,4))
txt =
'|1.570796e+02| 1.570796e+02|157.079633| 157.079633|'
When used on text input, the field width can determine whether to pad the output text
with spaces. If the field width is less than or equal to the number of characters in the
input text, then it has no effect.
txt = sprintf('%30s', 'Pad left with spaces')
txt =
' Pad left with spaces'
Flags
Optional flags control additional formatting of the output text. The table describes the
characters you can use as flags.
Character Description Example
Minus sign (-) Left-justify the converted %-5.2d
argument in its field.
Plus sign (+) For numeric values, always %+5.2d
print a leading sign character %+5s
(+ or -).
For text values, right-justify
the converted argument in its
field.
Space ( ) Insert a space before the value. % 5.2f
Zero (0) Pad with zeroes rather than %05.2f
spaces.
6-38
Formatting Text
Character Description Example

Pound sign (#) Modify selected numeric %#5.0f
conversions:
• For %o, %x, or %X, print 0,

0x, or 0X prefix.
• For %f, %e, or %E, print
decimal point even when
precision is 0.
• For %g or %G, do not remove
trailing zeroes or decimal
point.
Right- and left-justify the output. The default behavior is to right-justify the output text.
txt = sprintf('right-justify: %12.2f\nleft-justify: %-12.2f',...
12.3, 12.3)
txt =
'right-justify: 12.30
left-justify: 12.30 '
Display a + sign for positive numbers. The default behavior is to omit the leading + sign
for positive numbers.
txt = sprintf('no sign: %12.2f\nsign: %+12.2f',...
12.3, 12.3)
txt =
'no sign: 12.30
sign: +12.30'
Pad to the left with spaces and zeroes. The default behavior is to pad with spaces.
txt = sprintf('Pad with spaces: %12.2f\nPad with zeroes: %012.2f',...
5.2, 5.2)
txt =
'Pad with spaces: 5.20
Pad with zeroes: 000000005.20'
6-39
Note You can specify more than one flag in a formatting operator.
Value Identifiers
By default, functions such as sprintf insert values from input arguments into the
output text in sequential order. To process the input arguments in a nonsequential order,
specify the order using numeric identifiers in the format specifier. Specify nonsequential
arguments with an integer immediately following the % sign, followed by a $ sign.
Ordered Sequentially Ordered By Identifier
sprintf('%s %s %s',... sprintf('%3$s %2$s %1$s',...
'1st','2nd','3rd') '1st','2nd','3rd')
ans = ans =
'1st 2nd 3rd' '3rd 2nd 1st'
Special Characters
Special characters can be part of the output text. But because they cannot be entered as
ordinary text, they require specific character sequences to represent them. To insert
special characters into output text, use any of the character sequences in the table.
Special Character Representation in Format
Specifier
Single quotation mark ''
Percent character %%
Backslash \\
Alarm \a
Backspace \b
Form feed \f
New line \n
Carriage return \r
Horizontal tab \t
Vertical tab \v
6-40
Formatting Text
Special Character Representation in Format

Specifier
Character whose Unicode numeric value can be \xN
represented by the hexadecimal number, N
Example: sprintf('\x5A')
returns 'Z'
Character whose Unicode numeric value can be \N
represented by the octal number, N
Example: sprintf('\132')
returns 'Z'
Setting Field Width and Precision

The formatting operator follows a set of rules for formatting output text to the specified
field width and precision. You also can specify values for the field width and precision
outside the format specifier, and use numbered identifiers with the field width and
precision.
Rules for Formatting Precision and Field Width
The figure illustrates how the field width and precision settings affect the output of the
formatting functions. In this figure, the zero following the % sign in the formatting
operator means to add leading zeroes to the output text rather than space characters.
Whole part of input Result has w digits,
value has has 3 digits extending to the
left with zeros
Format operator
123.45678 %09.3f 00123.457
field width: w = 9
precision: p = 3
Fractional part of input Fractional part of the
value has 5 digits result has p digits
and is rounded
• If the precision is not specified, then it defaults to six.
6-41
• If the precision p is less than the number of digits in the fractional part of the input,
then only p digits are shown after the decimal point. The fractional value is rounded
in the output.
• If the precision p is greater than the number of digits f in the fractional part of the
input, then p digits are shown after the decimal point. The fractional part is extended
to the right with p-f zeroes in the output.
• If the field width is not specified, then it defaults to p+1+n, where n is the number of
digits in the whole part of the input value.
• If the field width w is greater than p+1+n, then the whole part of the output value is
padded to the left with w-(p+1+n) additional characters. The additional characters
are space characters unless the formatting operator includes the 0 flag. In that case,
the additional characters are zeroes.
Specify Field Width and Precision Outside Format Specifier
You can specify the field width and precision using values from a sequential argument
list. Use an asterisk (*) in place of the field width or precision fields of the formatting
operator.
For example, format and display three numbers. In each case, use an asterisk to specify
that the field width or precision come from input arguments that follow the format
specifier.
txt = sprintf('%*f %.*f %*.*f',...

15,123.45678,...
3,16.42837,...
6,4,pi)
txt =
' 123.456780 16.428 3.1416'
The table describes the effects of each formatting operator in the example.
Formatting Operator Description
%*f Specify width as the following input
argument, 15.
%.*f Specify precision as the following input
argument, 3.
6-42
Formatting Text

%*.*f Specify width and precision as the
following input arguments, 6, and 4.
You can mix the two styles. For example, get the field width from the following input
argument and the precision from the format specifier.
txt = sprintf('%*.2f', 5, 123.45678)
txt =
'123.46'
Specify Numbered Identifiers in Width and Precision Fields
You also can specify field width and precision as values from a nonsequential argument
list, using an alternate syntax shown in the figure. Within the formatting operator,
specify the field width and precision with asterisks that follow numbered identifiers and
$ signs. Specify the values of the field width and precision with input arguments that
follow the format specifier.
For example, format and display three numbers. In each case, use a numbered identifier
to specify that the field width or precision come from input arguments that follow the
format specifier.
txt = sprintf('%1$*4$f %2$.*5$f %3$*6$.*7$f',...

123.45678, 16.42837, pi, 15, 3, 6, 4)
txt =
' 123.456780 16.428 3.1416'
The table describes the effect of each formatting operator in the example.
%1$*4$f 1$ specifies the first input argument,
123.45678, as the value
6-43

*4$ specifies the fourth input argument,
15, as the field width
%2$.*5$f 2$ specifies the second input argument,
16.42837, as the value
.*5$ specifies the fifth input argument, 3,
as the precision
%3$*6$.*7$f 3$ specifies the third input argument, pi,
as the value
*6$ specifies the sixth input argument, 6,
as the field width
.*7$ specifies the seventh input argument,
4, as the precision
Restrictions on Using Identifiers

If any of the formatting operators include an identifier field, then all the operators in the
format specifier must include identifier fields. If you use both sequential and
nonsequential ordering in the same function call, then the output is truncated at the first
switch between sequential and nonsequential identifiers.
Valid Syntax Invalid Syntax
sprintf('%d %d %d %d',... sprintf('%d %3$d %d %d',...
1,2,3,4) 1,2,3,4)
ans = ans =
'1 2 3 4' '1 '
If your function call provides more input arguments than there are formatting operators
in the format specifier, then the operators are reused. However, only function calls that
use sequential ordering reuse formatting operators. You cannot reuse formatting
operators when you use numbered identifiers.
6-44
See Also

sprintf('%d',1,2,3,4) sprintf('%1$d',1,2,3,4)
ans = ans =
'1234' '1'
If you use numbered identifiers when the input data is a vector or array, then the output
does not contain formatted data.
v = [1.4 2.7 3.1]; v = [1.4 2.7 3.1];
sprintf('%.4f %.4f %.4f',v) sprintf('%3$.4f %1$.4f %2$.4f',v)
ans = ans =
'1.4000 2.7000 3.1000' 1×0 empty char array
See Also
compose | fprintf | num2str | sprintf
Related Examples
• “Convert from Character Arrays to Numeric Values” on page 6-62
• “Convert from Numeric Values to Character Array” on page 6-60
6-45
Compare Text
Compare text in character arrays and string arrays in different ways. String arrays were
introduced in Release 2016b. You can compare string arrays and character vectors with
relational opertors and with the strcmp function. You can sort string arrays using the
sort function, just as you would sort arrays of any other type. MATLAB® also provides
functions to inspect characters in pieces of text. For example, you can determine which
characters in a character vector or string array are letters or space characters.
Compare String Arrays for Equality
You can compare string arrays for equality with the relational operators == and ~=.
When you compare string arrays, the output is a logical array that has 1 where the
relation is true, and 0 where it is not true.
Create two string scalars. Starting in R2017a, you can create strings using double quotes
instead of the string function.
str1 = "Hello";
str2 = "World";
str1,str2
str1 =
"Hello"
str2 =
"World"
Compare str1 and str2 for equality.

str1 == str2
ans = logical
0
Compare a string array with multiple elements to a string scalar.

str1 = ["Mercury","Gemini","Apollo";...
"Skylab","Skylab B","International Space Station"];
str2 = "Apollo";
str1 == str2

0 0 1
6-46
Compare Text
0 0 0
Compare a string array to a character vector. As long as one of the variables is a string
array, you can make the comparison.
chr = 'Gemini';
TF = (str1 == chr)
TF = 2x3 logical array

0 1 0
0 0 0
Index into str1 with TF to extract the string elements that matched Gemini. You can
use logical arrays to index into an array.
str1(TF)
ans =
"Gemini"
Compare for inequality using the ~= operator. Index into str1 to extract the elements
that do not match 'Gemini'.
TF = (str1 ~= chr)

1 0 1
1 1 1
str1(TF)

"Mercury"
"Skylab"
"Skylab B"
"Apollo"
"International Space Station"
Compare two nonscalar string arrays. When you compare two nonscalar arrays, they
must be the same size.
6-47
str2 = ["Mercury","Mars","Apollo";...
"Jupiter","Saturn","Neptune"];
TF = (str1 == str2)

1 0 1
0 0 0
Index into str1 to extract the matches.
str1(TF)

"Mercury"
"Apollo"
Compare String Arrays with Other Relational Operators
You can also compare strings with the relational operators >, >=, <, and <=. Strings that
start with uppercase letters come before strings that start with lowercase letters. For
example, the string "ABC" is less than "abc". Digits and some punctuation marks also
come before letters.
"ABC" < "abc"
ans = logical
1
Compare a string array that contains names to another name with the > operator. The
names Sanchez, de Ponte, and Nash come after Matthews, because S, d, and N all are
greater than M.
str = ["Sanchez","Jones","de Ponte","Crosby","Nash"];

TF = (str > "Matthews")

1 0 1 0 1
str(TF)
6-48
Compare Text

"Sanchez" "de Ponte" "Nash"
Sort String Arrays
You can sort string arrays. MATLAB® stores characters as Unicode® using the UTF-16
character encoding scheme. Character and string arrays are sorted according to the
UTF-16 code point order. For the characters that are also the ASCII characters, this
order means that uppercase letters come before lowercase letters. Digits and some
punctuation also come before letters.
Sort the string array str.
sort(str)

"Crosby" "Jones" "Nash" "Sanchez" "de Ponte"
Sort a 2-by-3 string array. The sort function sorts the elements in each column
separately.
sort(str2)

"Jupiter" "Mars" "Apollo"
"Mercury" "Saturn" "Neptune"
To sort the elements in each row, sort str2 along the second dimension.
sort(str2,2)

"Apollo" "Mars" "Mercury"
"Jupiter" "Neptune" "Saturn"
Compare Character Vectors
You can compare character vectors and cell arrays of character vectors to each other. Use
the strcmp function to compare two character vectors, or strncmp to compare the first N
characters. You also can use strcmpi and strncmpi for case-insensitive comparisons.
6-49
Compare two character vectors with the strcmp function. chr1 and chr2 are not equal.
chr1 = 'hello';
chr2 = 'help';
TF = strcmp(chr1,chr2)
TF = logical
0
Note that the MATLAB strcmp differs from the C version of strcmp. The C version of
strcmp returns 0 when two character arrays are the same, not when they are different.
Compare the first two characters with the strncmp function. TF is 1 because both
character vectors start with the characters he.
TF = strncmp(chr1,chr2,2)
TF = logical
1
Compare two cell arrays of character vectors. strcmp returns a logical array that is the
same size as the cell arrays.
C1 = {'pizza'; 'chips'; 'candy'};

C2 = {'pizza'; 'chocolate'; 'pretzels'};
strcmp(C1,C2)

1
0
0
Inspect Characters in String and Character Arrays
You can inspect the characters in string arrays or character arrays with the isstrprop,
isletter, and isspace functions.
• The isstrprop inspects characters in either string arrays or character arrays.

• The isletter and isspace functions inspect characters in character arrays only.
6-50
Compare Text
Determine which characters in a character vector are space characters. isspace returns
a logical vector that is the same size as chr.
chr = 'Four score and seven years ago';
TF = isspace(chr)

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
The isstrprop function can query characters for many different traits. isstrprop can
determine whether characters in a string or character vector are letters, alphanumeric
characters, decimal or hexadecimal digits, or punctuation characters.
Determine which characters in a string are punctuation marks. isstrprop returns a

logical vector whose length is equal to the number of characters in str.
str = "A horse! A horse! My kingdom for a horse!"
str =
"A horse! A horse! My kingdom for a horse!"
isstrprop(str,"punct")

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1
Determine which characters in the character vector chr are letters.
6-51
isstrprop(chr,"alpha")

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
See Also
eq | ge | gt | isletter | isspace | isstrprop | le | lt | ne | sort | strcmp
Related Examples
6-52
Search and Replace Text

You can search for text in character arrays and string arrays, and replace substrings
with new text. String arrays, and new functions to search for and replace text, were
introduced in Release 2016b. Search for substrings with functions such as the contains
function. Similarly, replace text in strings with the replace function, or extract text
with functions such as extractBetween. You can use any of these functions with either
character vectors or string arrays. For compatibility, you can also use functions such as
strfind and strrep with both character vectors and string arrays.
Search for Text
Identify text in string arrays, character vectors, or cell arrays of character vectors with
the contains, startsWith, and endsWith function.
Create a string. Starting in R2017a, you can create strings using double quotes instead of
the string function.
str = "Rosemary Jones"
str =
"Rosemary Jones"
Determine whether str contains the substring mary. The contains function returns a
logical 1 if it finds the substring any place within the string.
TF = contains(str,"mary")
TF = logical
1
You can also use the strfind function to find matching text. strfind returns the index
of the start of each match. In this case, strfind returns 5 because the m in mary is the
fifth character of str.
idx = strfind(str,"mary")
idx = 5
Find multiple matches with strfind. When there are multiple matches, strfind
returns the indices as an array.
6-53
idx = strfind(str,"s")
idx =
3 14
Create a string array that contains many names. Determine which names contain the
substring Ann. The contains function returns a logical array that has a 1 wherever str
has an element that contains Ann. To create a new string array that includes only the
matches, index into str with TF.
str = ["Rosemary Ann Jones","Peter Michael Smith","Ann Marie Young"]

"Rosemary Ann Jones" "Peter Michael Smith" "Ann Marie Young"
TF = contains(str,"Ann")

1 0 1
matches = str(TF)
matches = 1x2 string array

"Rosemary Ann Jones" "Ann Marie Young"
Find the strings that begin with Ann.
TF = startsWith(str,"Ann");
matches = str(TF)
matches =
"Ann Marie Young"
Similarly, the endsWith function find strings that end with a specified piece of text.
You can also use the contains, startsWith, and endsWith functions to determine
whether character vectors contains text.
chr = 'John Paul Jones'
6-54
chr =
'John Paul Jones'
TF = contains(chr,'Paul')
TF = logical
1
TF = endsWith(chr,'Paul')
TF = logical
0
Use the contains function to find text in rows of a string array. census1905 contains a
few rows of simulated census data for the year 1905. Each row contains a name, year of
birth, and number of times that name was given in that year.
census1905 = ["Ann Mary","1905","230";

"John","1905","5400";
"Mary","1905","4600";
"Maryjane","1905","304";
"Paul","1905","1206"];
Find the rows where the name is equal to Mary.
TF = (census1905(:,1) == "Mary");
census1905(TF,:)

"Mary" "1905" "4600"
Find the rows where the name is a variation of Mary with the contains function.
TF = contains(census1905(:,1),"Mary");
census1905(TF,:)

"Ann Mary" "1905" "230"
"Mary" "1905" "4600"
"Maryjane" "1905" "304"
6-55
Replace Text
You can replace text in string arrays, character vectors, or cell arrays of character vectors
with the replace function.
Create a string. Replace the substring mary with anne.
str = "Rosemary Jones"
str =
"Rosemary Jones"
newStr = replace(str,"mary","anne")
newStr =
"Roseanne Jones"
You can also replace text using the strrep function. However, the replace function is
recommended.
newStr = strrep(str,"Jones","Day")
newStr =
"Rosemary Day"
Create a string array that contains many names.

str = ["Rosemary Ann Jones","Peter Michael Smith","Ann Marie Young"]

"Rosemary Ann Jones" "Peter Michael Smith" "Ann Marie Young"
Specify multiple names to replace.

oldText = ["Ann","Michael"];
newText = ["Beth","John"];
newStr = replace(str,oldText,newText)
newStr = 1x3 string array

"Rosemary Beth Jones" "Peter John Smith" "Beth Marie Young"
Replace text in a character vector. You can use replace and replaceBetween with
character vectors, as well as with strings.
6-56
chr = 'Mercury, Gemini, Apollo'
chr =
'Mercury, Gemini, Apollo'
replace(chr,'Gemini','Mars')
ans =
'Mercury, Mars, Apollo'
Replace text in a string array of file names. Append the file names to the address of a
website. The file names contain spaces, but spaces cannot be part of web addresses.
Replace the space character, " ", with %20, which is the standard for web addresses.
str = ["Financial Report.docx";

"Quarterly 2015 Details.docx";
"Slides.pptx"]

"Financial Report.docx"
"Quarterly 2015 Details.docx"
"Slides.pptx"
newStr = replace(str," ","%20")
newStr = 3x1 string array

"Financial%20Report.docx"
"Quarterly%202015%20Details.docx"
"Slides.pptx"
Append the file names to the address of a website.

filenames = "http://example.com/Documents/" + newStr
filenames = 3x1 string array

"http://example.com/Documents/Financial%20Report.docx"
"http://example.com/Documents/Quarterly%202015%20Details.docx"
"http://example.com/Documents/Slides.pptx"
6-57
Extract Text
Extract a substring from string arrays or character vectors with the extractAfter,
extractBefore, and extractBetween functions. Use these functions to extract
different substrings that precede, follow, or occur between specified pieces of text.
Create a string array that contains file names. Extract the portions of the names after C:
\Temp\ with the extractAfter function.
str = ["C:\Temp\MyReport.docx";
"C:\Temp\Data\Sample1.csv";
"C:\Temp\Slides.pptx"]

"C:\Temp\MyReport.docx"
"C:\Temp\Data\Sample1.csv"
"C:\Temp\Slides.pptx"
filenames = extractAfter(str,"C:\Temp\")
filenames = 3x1 string array

"MyReport.docx"
"Data\Sample1.csv"
"Slides.pptx"
Extract customer names from a string array that encodes the names within XML tags.
str = ["<CustomerName>Elizabeth Day</CustomerName>";

"<CustomerName>George Adams</CustomerName>";
"<CustomerName>Sarah Young</CustomerName>"]

"<CustomerName>Elizabeth Day</CustomerName>"
"<CustomerName>George Adams</CustomerName>"
"<CustomerName>Sarah Young</CustomerName>"
names = extractBetween(str,"<CustomerName>","</CustomerName>")

"Elizabeth Day"
"George Adams"
6-58
See Also
"Sarah Young"
See Also
contains | endsWith | erase | eraseBetween | extractAfter | extractBefore
| extractBetween | insertAfter | insertBefore | replace | replaceBetween |
startsWith | strfind | strrep
Related Examples
6-59
Convert from Numeric Values to Character Array
In this section...
“Function Summary” on page 6-60
“Convert Numbers to Character Codes” on page 6-61
“Represent Numbers as Text” on page 6-61
“Convert to Specific Radix” on page 6-61
Function Summary
The functions listed in this table provide a number of ways to convert numeric data to
character arrays.
Function Description Example
char Convert a positive integer to an equivalent [72 105] → 'Hi'
character. (Truncates any fractional parts.)
string Convert an array of double-precision values to a [72 105] → "72"
string array. "105"
[3.1416 2.178] →
"3.1416" "2.178"
int2str Convert a positive or negative integer to a character [72 105] → '72
type. (Rounds any fractional parts.) 105'
num2str Convert a numeric type to a character type of the [72 105] →
specified precision and format. '72/105/' (format set
to %1d/)
mat2str Convert a numeric type to a character type of the [72 105] → '[72
specified precision, returning a character vector 105]'
MATLAB can evaluate.
dec2hex Convert a positive integer to a character type of [72 105] → '48 69'
hexadecimal base.
dec2bin Convert a positive integer to a character type of [72 105] →
binary base. '1001000 1101001'
6-60
Convert from Numeric Values to Character Array

dec2base Convert a positive integer to a character type of any [72 105] → '110
base from 2 through 36. 151' (base set to 8)
Convert Numbers to Character Codes

The char function converts integers to Unicode character codes and returns a character
array composed of the equivalent characters:
x = [77 65 84 76 65 66];
char(x)
ans =
'MATLAB'
Represent Numbers as Text

The int2str, num2str, and mat2str functions represent numeric values as text where
each character represents a separate digit of the input value. The int2str and num2str
functions are often useful for labeling plots. For example, the following lines use
num2str to prepare automated labels for the x-axis of a plot:
function plotlabel(x, y)
plot(x, y)
chr1 = num2str(min(x));
chr2 = num2str(max(x));
out = ['Value of f from ' chr1 ' to ' chr2];
xlabel(out);
Convert to Specific Radix

Another class of conversion functions changes numeric values into character arrays
representing a decimal value in another base, such as binary or hexadecimal
representation. This includes dec2hex, dec2bin, and dec2base.
6-61
Convert from Character Arrays to Numeric Values

In this section...
“Function Summary” on page 6-62
“Convert from Character Code” on page 6-63
“Convert Text that Represents Numeric Values” on page 6-63
“Convert from Specific Radix” on page 6-64
Function Summary
The functions listed in this table provide a number of ways to convert character arrays to
numeric data.
uintN (e.g., uint8) Convert a character to an integer code that 'Hi' → 72 105
represents that character.
str2num Convert a character type to a numeric type. '72 105' → [72 105]
str2double Similar to str2num, but offers better "72" "105" → [72
performance and works with string arrays and 105]
cell arrays of character vectors.
{'72' '105'} → [72
105]
hex2num Convert a numeric type to a character type of 'A' →
specified precision, returning a character array '-1.4917e-154'
that MATLAB can evaluate.
hex2dec Convert a character type of hexadecimal base to 'A' → 10
a positive integer.
bin2dec Convert a character type of binary number to a '1010' → 10
decimal number.
base2dec Convert a character type of any base number '12' → 10 (if base ==
from 2 through 36 to a decimal number. 8)
6-62
Convert from Character Arrays to Numeric Values
Convert from Character Code

Character arrays and string arrays store each character as a 16-bit numeric value. Use
one of the integer conversion functions (e.g., uint8) or the double function to convert
characters to their numeric values, and char to revert to character representation:
name = 'Thomas R. Lee';
name = double(name)
name =
84 104 111 109 97 115 32 82 46 32 76 101 101
name = char(name)
name =
'Thomas R. Lee'
Convert Text that Represents Numeric Values

Use str2num to convert a character array to the numeric value it represents:
chr = '37.294e-1';
val = str2num(chr)
val =
3.7294
The str2double function converts a string array or a cell array of character vectors to
the double-precision values they represent:
c = {'37.294e-1'; '-58.375'; '13.796'};
str = string({'3.14159','2.718'});
d = str2double(c)
d =
3.7294
-58.3750
13.7960
x = str2double(str)
6-63
x =
3.1416 2.7180
whos
c 3x1 380 cell

d 3x1 24 double
str 1x2 196 string
x 1x2 16 double
Convert from Specific Radix

To convert from a character representation of a nondecimal number to the value of that
number, use one of these functions: hex2num, hex2dec, bin2dec, or base2dec.
The hex2num and hex2dec functions both take hexadecimal (base 16) inputs, but
hex2num returns the IEEE double-precision floating-point number it represents, while
hex2dec converts to a decimal integer.
6-64
Function Summary
Function Summary
MATLAB provides these functions for working with character arrays:
• Functions to Create Character Arrays

• Functions to Modify Character Arrays
• Functions to Read and Operate on Character Arrays
• Functions to Search or Compare Character Arrays
• Functions to Determine Class or Content
• Functions to Convert Between Numeric and Text Data Types
• Functions to Work with Cell Arrays of Character Vectors as Sets
Functions to Create Character Arrays
'chr' Create the character vector specified between quotes.
blanks Create a character vector of blanks.
sprintf Write formatted data as text.
strcat Concatenate character arrays.
char Concatenate character arrays vertically.
Functions to Modify Character Arrays
deblank Remove trailing blanks.
lower Make all letters lowercase.
sort Sort elements in ascending or descending order.
strjust Justify a character array.
strrep Replace text within a character array.
strtrim Remove leading and trailing white space.
upper Make all letters uppercase.
6-65
Functions to Read and Operate on Character Arrays
eval Execute a MATLAB expression.
sscanf Read a character array under format control.
Functions to Search or Compare Character Arrays
regexp Match regular expression on page 2-41.
strcmp Compare character arrays.
strcmpi Compare character arrays, ignoring case.
strfind Find a term within a character vector.
strncmp Compare the first N characters of character arrays.
strncmpi Compare the first N characters, ignoring case.
strtok Find a token in a character vector.
textscan Read data from a character array.
Functions to Determine Class or Content
iscellstr Return true for a cell array of character vectors.
ischar Return true for a character array.
isletter Return true for letters of the alphabet.
isstrprop Determine if a string is of the specified category.
isspace Return true for white-space characters.
6-66
Function Summary
Functions to Convert Between Numeric and Text Data Types
char Convert to a character array.
cellstr Convert a character array to a cell array of character vectors.
double Convert a character array to numeric codes.
int2str Represent an integer as text.
mat2str Convert a matrix to a character array you can run eval on.
num2str Represent a number as text.
str2num Convert a character vector to the number it represents.
str2double Convert a character vector to the double-precision value it
represents.
Functions to Work with Cell Arrays of Character Vectors as Sets
intersect Set the intersection of two vectors.
ismember Detect members of a set.
setdiff Return the set difference of two vectors.
setxor Set the exclusive OR of two vectors.
union Set the union of two vectors.
unique Set the unique elements of a vector.
6-67
7
Dates and Time
• “Represent Dates and Times in MATLAB” on page 7-2

• “Specify Time Zones” on page 7-6
• “Convert Date and Time to Julian Date or POSIX Time” on page 7-8
• “Set Date and Time Display Format” on page 7-12
• “Generate Sequence of Dates and Time” on page 7-17
• “Share Code and Data Across Locales” on page 7-25
• “Extract or Assign Date and Time Components of Datetime Array” on page 7-28
• “Combine Date and Time from Separate Variables” on page 7-32
• “Date and Time Arithmetic” on page 7-34
• “Compare Dates and Time” on page 7-41
• “Plot Dates and Durations” on page 7-45
• “Core Functions Supporting Date and Time Arrays” on page 7-52
• “Convert Between Datetime Arrays, Numbers, and Text” on page 7-53
• “Carryover in Date Vectors and Strings” on page 7-59
• “Converting Date Vector Returns Unexpected Output” on page 7-60
7 Dates and Time
Represent Dates and Times in MATLAB

The primary way to store date and time information is in datetime arrays, which
support arithmetic, sorting, comparisons, plotting, and formatted display. The results of
arithmetic differences are returned in duration arrays or, when you use calendar-based
functions, in calendarDuration arrays.
For example, create a MATLAB datetime array that represents two dates: June 28, 2014
at 6 a.m. and June 28, 2014 at 7 a.m. Specify numeric values for the year, month, day,
hour, minute, and second components for the datetime.
t = datetime(2014,6,28,6:7,0,0)
t =
28-Jun-2014 06:00:00 28-Jun-2014 07:00:00
Change the value of a date or time component by assigning new values to the properties
of the datetime array. For example, change the day number of each datetime by
assigning new values to the Day property.
t.Day = 27:28
t =
27-Jun-2014 06:00:00 28-Jun-2014 07:00:00
Change the display format of the array by changing its Format property. The following
format does not display any time components. However, the values in the datetime array
do not change.
t.Format = 'MMM dd, yyyy'
t =
Jun 27, 2014 Jun 28, 2014
If you subtract one datetime array from another, the result is a duration array in
units of fixed length.
t2 = datetime(2014,6,29,6,30,45)
t2 =
29-Jun-2014 06:30:45
7-2
Represent Dates and Times in MATLAB
d = t2 - t
d =
48:30:45 23:30:45
By default, a duration array displays in the format, hours:minutes:seconds. Change the

display format of the duration by changing its Format property. You can display the
duration value with a single unit, such as hours.
d.Format = 'h'
d =
48.512 hrs 23.512 hrs
You can create a duration in a single unit using the seconds, minutes, hours, days, or
years functions. For example, create a duration of 2 days, where each day is exactly 24
hours.
d = days(2)
d =
2 days
You can create a calendar duration in a single unit of variable length. For example, one
month can be 28, 29, 30, or 31 days long. Specify a calendar duration of 2 months.
L = calmonths(2)
L =
2mo
Use the caldays, calweeks, calquarters, and calyears functions to specify calendar
durations in other units.
Add a number of calendar months and calendar days. The number of days remains
separate from the number of months because the number of days in a month is not fixed,
and cannot be determined until you add the calendar duration to a specific datetime.
L = calmonths(2) + caldays(35)
L =
2mo 35d
7-3
7 Dates and Time
Add calendar durations to a datetime to compute a new date.

t2 = t + calmonths(2) + caldays(35)
t2 =
Oct 01, 2014 Oct 02, 2014
t2 is also a datetime array.
whos t2
t2 1x2 161 datetime
In summary, there are several ways to represent dates and times, and MATLAB has a
data type for each approach:
• Represent a point in time, using the datetime data type.

Example: Wednesday, June 18, 2014 10:00:00
• Represent a length of time, or a duration in units of fixed length, using the duration
data type. When using the duration data type, 1 day is always equal to 24 hours,
and 1 year is always equal to 365.2425 days.
Example: 72 hours and 10 minutes
• Represent a length of time, or a duration in units of variable length, using the
calendarDuration data type.
Example: 1 month, which can be 28, 29, 30, or 31 days long.
The calendarDuration data type also accounts for daylight saving time changes
and leap years, so that 1 day might be more or less than 24 hours, and 1 year can
have 365 or 366 days.
7-4
See Also
See Also
calendarDuration | datetime | duration
7-5
7 Dates and Time
Specify Time Zones

In MATLAB, a time zone includes the time offset from Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC), the daylight saving time offset, and a set of historical changes to those values.
The time zone setting is stored in the TimeZone property of each datetime array. When
you create a datetime, it is unzoned by default. That is, the TimeZone property of the
datetime is empty (''). If you do not work with datetime values from multiple time zones
and do not need to account for daylight saving time, you might not need to specify this
property.
You can specify a time zone when you create a datetime, using the 'TimeZone' name-
value pair argument. The time zone value 'local' specifies the system time zone. To
display the time zone offset for each datetime, include a time zone offset specifier such as
'Z' in the value for the 'Format' argument.
t = datetime(2014,3,8:9,6,0,0,'TimeZone','local',...
'Format','d-MMM-y HH:mm:ss Z')
t =
8-Mar-2014 06:00:00 -0500 9-Mar-2014 06:00:00 -0400
A different time zone offset is displayed depending on whether the datetime occurs
during daylight saving time.
You can modify the time zone of an existing datetime. For example, change the
TimeZone property of t using dot notation. You can specify the time zone value as the
name of a time zone region in the IANA Time Zone Database. A time zone region
accounts for the current and historical rules for standard and daylight offsets from UTC
that are observed in that geographic region.
t.TimeZone = 'Asia/Shanghai'
t =
8-Mar-2014 19:00:00 +0800 9-Mar-2014 18:00:00 +0800
You also can specify the time zone value as a character vector of the form +HH:mm or -
HH:mm, which represents a time zone with a fixed offset from UTC that does not observe
daylight saving time.
t.TimeZone = '+08:00'
7-6
See Also
t =
8-Mar-2014 19:00:00 +0800 9-Mar-2014 18:00:00 +0800
Operations on datetime arrays with time zones automatically account for time zone
differences. For example, create a datetime in a different time zone.
u = datetime(2014,3,9,6,0,0,'TimeZone','Europe/London',...
'Format','d-MMM-y HH:mm:ss Z')
u =
9-Mar-2014 06:00:00 +0000
View the time difference between the two datetime arrays.

dt = t - u
dt =
-19:00:00 04:00:00
When you perform operations involving datetime arrays, the arrays either must all have
a time zone associated with them, or they must all have no time zone.
See Also
datetime | timezones
Related Examples
• “Convert Date and Time to Julian Date or POSIX Time” on page 7-8
7-7
7 Dates and Time
Convert Date and Time to Julian Date or POSIX Time

You can convert datetime arrays to represent points in time in specialized numeric
formats. In general, these formats represent a point in time as the number of seconds or
days that have elapsed since a specified starting point. For example, the Julian date is
the number of days and fractional days that have elapsed since the beginning of the
Julian period. The POSIX® time is the number of seconds that have elapsed since
00:00:00 1-Jan-1970 UTC (Universal Coordinated Time). MATLAB® provides the
juliandate and posixtime functions to convert datetime arrays to Julian dates and
POSIX times.
While datetime arrays are not required to have a time zone, converting "unzoned"
datetime values to Julian dates or POSIX times can lead to unexpected results. To
ensure the expected result, specify the time zone before conversion.
Specify Time Zone Before Conversion
You can specify a time zone for a datetime array, but you are not required to do so. In
fact, by default the datetime function creates an "unzoned" datetime array.
Create a datetime value for the current date and time.
d = datetime('now')
d = datetime
19-Sep-2017 19:28:12
d is constructed from the local time on your machine and has no time zone associated
with it. In many contexts, you might assume that you can treat the times in an unzoned
datetime array as local times. However, the juliandate and posixtime functions
treat the times in unzoned datetime arrays as UTC times, not local times. To avoid any
ambiguity, it is recommended that you avoid using juliandate and posixtime on
unzoned datetime arrays. For example, avoid using posixtime(datetime('now'))
in your code.
If your datetime array has values that do not represent UTC times, specify the time
zone using the TimeZone name-value pair argument so that juliandate and
posixtime interpret the datetime values correctly.
d = datetime('now','TimeZone','America/New_York')
7-8
Convert Date and Time to Julian Date or POSIX Time
d = datetime
19-Sep-2017 19:28:12
As an alternative, you can specify the TimeZone property after you create the array.
d.TimeZone = 'America/Los_Angeles'
d = datetime
19-Sep-2017 16:28:12
To see a complete list of time zones, use the timezones function.
Convert Zoned and Unzoned Datetime Values to Julian Dates
A Julian date is the number of days (including fractional days) since noon on November
24, 4714 BCE, in the proleptic Gregorian calendar, or January 1, 4713 BCE, in the
proleptic Julian calendar. To convert datetime arrays to Julian dates, use the
juliandate function.
Create a datetime array and specify its time zone.

DZ = datetime('2016-07-29 10:05:24') + calmonths(1:3);
DZ.TimeZone = 'America/New_York'
DZ = 1x3 datetime array

29-Aug-2016 10:05:24 29-Sep-2016 10:05:24 29-Oct-2016 10:05:24
Convert D to the equivalent Julian dates.

format longG
JDZ = juliandate(DZ)
JDZ =
2457630.08708333 2457661.08708333 2457691.08708333
Create an unzoned copy of DZ. Convert D to the equivalent Julian dates. As D has no time
zone, juliandate treats the times as UTC times.
D = DZ;
D.TimeZone = '';
JD = juliandate(D)
7-9
7 Dates and Time
JD =
2457629.92041667 2457660.92041667 2457690.92041667
Compare JDZ and JD. The differences are equal to the time zone offset between UTC and
the America/New_York time zone in fractional days.
JDZ - JD
ans =
0.166666666511446 0.166666666511446 0.166666666511446
Convert Zoned and Unzoned Datetime Values to POSIX Times
The POSIX time is the number of seconds (including fractional seconds) elapsed since
00:00:00 1-Jan-1970 UTC (Universal Coordinated Time), ignoring leap seconds. To
convert datetime arrays to POSIX times, use the posixtime function.
Create a datetime array and specify its time zone.
DZ = datetime('2016-07-29 10:05:24') + calmonths(1:3);

DZ.TimeZone = 'America/New_York'
DZ = 1x3 datetime array

29-Aug-2016 10:05:24 29-Sep-2016 10:05:24 29-Oct-2016 10:05:24
Convert D to the equivalent POSIX times.
PTZ = posixtime(DZ)
PTZ =
1472479524 1475157924 1477749924
Create an unzoned copy of DZ. Convert D to the equivalent POSIX times. As D has no
time zone, posixtime treats the times as UTC times.
D = DZ;
D.TimeZone = '';
PT = posixtime(D)
7-10
See Also
PT =
1472465124 1475143524 1477735524
Compare PTZ and PT. The differences are equal to the time zone offset between UTC and
the America/New_York time zone in seconds.
PTZ - PT
ans =
14400 14400 14400
See Also
datetime | juliandate | posixtime | timezones
Related Examples
• “Specify Time Zones” on page 7-6
7-11
7 Dates and Time
Set Date and Time Display Format
In this section...
“Formats for Individual Date and Duration Arrays” on page 7-12
“datetime Display Format” on page 7-12
“duration Display Format” on page 7-13
“calendarDuration Display Format” on page 7-14
“Default datetime Format” on page 7-15
Formats for Individual Date and Duration Arrays

datetime, duration, and calendarDuration arrays have a Format property that
controls the display of values in each array. When you create a datetime array, it uses
the MATLAB global default datetime display format unless you explicitly provide a
format. Use dot notation to access the Format property to view or change its value. For
example, to set the display format for the datetime array, t, to the default format, type:
t.Format = 'default'
Changing the Format property does not change the values in the array, only their
display. For example, the following can be representations of the same datetime value
(the latter two do not display any time components):
Thursday, August 23, 2012 12:35:00

August 23, 2012
23-Aug-2012
The Format property of the datetime, duration, and calendarDuration data types
accepts different formats as inputs.
datetime Display Format

You can set the Format property to one of these character vectors.
Value of Format Description
'default' Use the default display format.
7-12

'defaultdate' Use the default date display format that
does not show time components.
To change the default formats, see “Default datetime Format” on page 7-15.
Alternatively, you can use the letters A-Z and a-z to specify a custom date format. You
can include nonletter characters such as a hyphen, space, or colon to separate the fields.
This table shows several common display formats and examples of the formatted output
for the date, Saturday, April 19, 2014 at 9:41:06 PM in New York City.
Value of Format Example
'yyyy-MM-dd' 2014-04-19
'dd/MM/yyyy' 19/04/2014
'dd.MM.yyyy' 19.04.2014
'yyyy 年 MM 月 dd 日' 2014 年 04 月 19 日
'MMMM d, yyyy' April 19, 2014
'eeee, MMMM d, yyyy h:mm a' Saturday, April 19, 2014 9:41 PM
'MMMM d, yyyy HH:mm:ss Z' April 19, 2014 21:41:06 -0400
'yyyy-MM-dd''T''HH:mmXXX' 2014-04-19T21:41-04:00
For a complete list of valid symbolic identifiers, see the Format property for datetime
arrays.
Note The letter identifiers that datetime accepts are different from those used by the
datestr, datenum, and datevec functions.
duration Display Format

To display a duration as a single number that includes a fractional part (for example,
1.234 hours), specify one of these character vectors:
'y' Number of exact fixed-length years. A fixed-length
year is equal to 365.2425 days.
7-13
7 Dates and Time

'd' Number of exact fixed-length days. A fixed-length day
is equal to 24 hours.
'h' Number of hours
'm' Number of minutes
's' Number of seconds
To specify the number of fractional digits displayed, use the format function.
To display a duration in the form of a digital timer, specify one of the following character
vectors.
• 'dd:hh:mm:ss'
• 'hh:mm:ss'
• 'mm:ss'
• 'hh:mm'
You also can display up to nine fractional second digits by appending up to nine S
characters. For example, 'hh:mm:ss.SSS' displays the milliseconds of a duration value
to 3 digits.
display.
calendarDuration Display Format

Specify the Format property of a calendarDuration array as a character vector that
can include the characters y, q, m, w, d, and t, in this order. The format must include m,
d, and t.
This table describes the date and time components that the characters represent.
Character Unit Required?
y Years no
q Quarters (multiples of no
3 months)
m Months yes
7-14
Character Unit Required?

w Weeks no
d Days yes
t Time (hours, minutes, yes
and seconds)
To specify the number of digits displayed for fractional seconds, use the format function.
If the value of a date or time component is zero, it is not displayed.
display.
Default datetime Format

You can set default formats to control the display of datetime arrays created without an
explicit display format. These formats also apply when you set the Format property of a
datetime array to 'default' or 'defaultdate'. When you change the default
setting, datetime arrays set to use the default formats are displayed automatically
using the new setting.
Changes to the default formats persist across MATLAB sessions.
To specify a default format, type

datetime.setDefaultFormats('default',fmt)
where fmt is a character vector composed of the letters A-Z and a-z described for the
Format property of datetime arrays, above. For example,
datetime.setDefaultFormats('default','yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss')
sets the default datetime format to include a 4-digit year, 2-digit month number, 2-digit
day number, and hour, minute, and second values.
In addition, you can specify a default format for datetimes created without time
components. For example,
datetime.setDefaultFormats('defaultdate','yyyy-MM-dd')
sets the default date format to include a 4-digit year, 2-digit month number, and 2-digit
day number.
7-15
7 Dates and Time
To reset the both the default format and the default date-only formats to the factory
defaults, type
datetime.setDefaultFormats('reset')
The factory default formats depend on your system locale.
You also can set the default formats in the Preferences dialog box. For more
information, see “Set Command Window Preferences”.
See Also
calendarDuration | datetime | duration | format
7-16
Generate Sequence of Dates and Time

In this section...
“Sequence of Datetime or Duration Values Between Endpoints with Step Size” on page
7-17
“Add Duration or Calendar Duration to Create Sequence of Dates” on page 7-20
“Specify Length and Endpoints of Date or Duration Sequence” on page 7-21
“Sequence of Datetime Values Using Calendar Rules” on page 7-22
Sequence of Datetime or Duration Values Between Endpoints with Step

Size
This example shows how to use the colon (:) operator to generate sequences of datetime
or duration values in the same way that you create regularly spaced numeric vectors.
Use Default Step Size
Create a sequence of datetime values starting from November 1, 2013 and ending on
November 5, 2013. The default step size is one calendar day.
t1 = datetime(2013,11,1,8,0,0);
t2 = datetime(2013,11,5,8,0,0);
t = t1:t2
t = 1x5 datetime array

Columns 1 through 3
01-Nov-2013 08:00:00 02-Nov-2013 08:00:00 03-Nov-2013 08:00:00
Columns 4 through 5
04-Nov-2013 08:00:00 05-Nov-2013 08:00:00
Specify Step Size
Specify a step size of 2 calendar days using the caldays function.
t = t1:caldays(2):t2
7-17
7 Dates and Time

01-Nov-2013 08:00:00 03-Nov-2013 08:00:00 05-Nov-2013 08:00:00
Specify a step size in units other than days. Create a sequence of datetime values spaced
18 hours apart.
t = t1:hours(18):t2

Columns 1 through 3
01-Nov-2013 08:00:00 02-Nov-2013 02:00:00 02-Nov-2013 20:00:00
Columns 4 through 6
03-Nov-2013 14:00:00 04-Nov-2013 08:00:00 05-Nov-2013 02:00:00
Use the years, days, minutes, and seconds functions to create datetime and duration
sequences using other fixed-length date and time units. Create a sequence of duration
values between 0 and 3 minutes, incremented by 30 seconds.
d = 0:seconds(30):minutes(3)
d = 1x7 duration array

0 min 0.5 min 1 min 1.5 min 2 min 2.5 min 3 min
Compare Fixed-Length Duration and Calendar Duration Step Sizes
Assign a time zone to t1 and t2. In the America/New_York time zone, t1 now occurs
just before a daylight saving time change.
t1.TimeZone = 'America/New_York';
t2.TimeZone = 'America/New_York';
If you create the sequence using a step size of one calendar day, then the difference
between successive datetime values is not always 24 hours.
t = t1:t2;
dt = diff(t)
7-18
dt = 1x4 duration array

24:00:00 25:00:00 24:00:00 24:00:00
Create a sequence of datetime values spaced one fixed-length day apart,

t = t1:days(1):t2

Columns 1 through 3
01-Nov-2013 08:00:00 02-Nov-2013 08:00:00 03-Nov-2013 07:00:00
Columns 4 through 5
04-Nov-2013 07:00:00 05-Nov-2013 07:00:00
Verify that the difference between successive datetime values is 24 hours.
dt = diff(t)

24:00:00 24:00:00 24:00:00 24:00:00
Integer Step Size
If you specify a step size in terms of an integer, it is interpreted as a number of 24-hour

days.
t = t1:1:t2

Columns 1 through 3
01-Nov-2013 08:00:00 02-Nov-2013 08:00:00 03-Nov-2013 07:00:00
Columns 4 through 5
7-19
7 Dates and Time
04-Nov-2013 07:00:00 05-Nov-2013 07:00:00
Add Duration or Calendar Duration to Create Sequence of Dates

This example shows how to add a duration or calendar duration to a datetime to create a
sequence of datetime values.
Create a datetime scalar representing November 1, 2013 at 8:00 AM.

t1 = datetime(2013,11,1,8,0,0);
Add a sequence of fixed-length hours to the datetime.

t = t1 + hours(0:2)

01-Nov-2013 08:00:00 01-Nov-2013 09:00:00 01-Nov-2013 10:00:00
Add a sequence of calendar months to the datetime.

t = t1 + calmonths(1:5)

Columns 1 through 3
01-Dec-2013 08:00:00 01-Jan-2014 08:00:00 01-Feb-2014 08:00:00
Columns 4 through 5
01-Mar-2014 08:00:00 01-Apr-2014 08:00:00
Each datetime in t occurs on the first day of each month.
Verify that the dates in t are spaced 1 month apart.

dt = caldiff(t)
dt = 1x4 calendarDuration array

1mo 1mo 1mo 1mo
Determine the number of days between each date.
7-20
dt = caldiff(t,'days')

31d 31d 28d 31d
Add a number of calendar months to the date, January 31, 2014, to create a sequence of
dates that fall on the last day of each month.
t = datetime(2014,1,31) + calmonths(0:11)

Columns 1 through 5
31-Jan-2014 28-Feb-2014 31-Mar-2014 30-Apr-2014 31-May-2014
30-Jun-2014 31-Jul-2014 31-Aug-2014 30-Sep-2014 31-Oct-2014
30-Nov-2014 31-Dec-2014
Specify Length and Endpoints of Date or Duration Sequence

This example shows how to use the linspace function to create equally spaced datetime
or duration values between two specified endpoints.
Create a sequence of five equally spaced dates between April 14, 2014 and August 4,
2014. First, define the endpoints.
A = datetime(2014,04,14);
B = datetime(2014,08,04);
The third input to linspace specifies the number of linearly spaced points to generate
between the endpoints.
C = linspace(A,B,5)
C = 1x5 datetime array

14-Apr-2014 12-May-2014 09-Jun-2014 07-Jul-2014 04-Aug-2014
7-21
7 Dates and Time
Create a sequence of six equally spaced durations between 1 and 5.5 hours.
A = duration(1,0,0);
B = duration(5,30,0);
C = linspace(A,B,6)
C = 1x6 duration array

01:00:00 01:54:00 02:48:00 03:42:00 04:36:00 05:30:00
Sequence of Datetime Values Using Calendar Rules

This example shows how to use the dateshift function to generate sequences of dates
and time where each instance obeys a rule relating to a calendar unit or a unit of time.
For instance, each datetime must occur at the beginning a month, on a particular day of
the week, or at the end of a minute. The resulting datetime values in the sequence are
not necessarily equally spaced.
Dates on Specific Day of Week
Generate a sequence of dates consisting of the next three occurrences of Monday. First,
define today's date.
t1 = datetime('today','Format','dd-MMM-yyyy eee')
t1 = datetime
19-Sep-2017 Tue
The first input to dateshift is always the datetime array from which you want to
generate a sequence. Specify 'dayofweek' as the second input to indicate that the
datetime values in the output sequence must fall on a specific day of the week. You can
specify the day of the week either by number or by name. For example, you can specify
Monday either as 2 or 'Monday'.
t = dateshift(t1,'dayofweek',2,1:3)

25-Sep-2017 Mon 02-Oct-2017 Mon 09-Oct-2017 Mon
7-22
Dates at Start of Month
Generate a sequence of start-of-month dates beginning with April 1, 2014. Specify

'start' as the second input to dateshift to indicate that all datetime values in the
output sequence should fall at the start of a particular unit of time. The third input
argument defines the unit of time, in this case, month. The last input to dateshift can
be an array of integer values that specifies how t1 should be shifted. In this case, 0
corresponds to the start of the current month, and 4 corresponds to the start of the fourth
month from t1.
t1 = datetime(2014,04,01);
t = dateshift(t1,'start','month',0:4)

01-Apr-2014 01-May-2014 01-Jun-2014 01-Jul-2014 01-Aug-2014
Dates at End of Month
Generate a sequence of end-of-month dates beginning with April 1, 2014.
t1 = datetime(2014,04,01);
t = dateshift(t1,'end','month',0:2)

30-Apr-2014 31-May-2014 30-Jun-2014
Determine the number of days between each date.
dt = caldiff(t,'days')

31d 30d
The dates are not equally spaced.
Other Units of Dates and Time
You can specify other units of time such as week, day, and hour.
t1 = datetime('now')
7-23
7 Dates and Time
t1 = datetime
19-Sep-2017 18:28:26
t = dateshift(t1,'start','hour',0:4)

Columns 1 through 3
19-Sep-2017 18:00:00 19-Sep-2017 19:00:00 19-Sep-2017 20:00:00
Columns 4 through 5
19-Sep-2017 21:00:00 19-Sep-2017 22:00:00
Previous Occurrences of Dates and Time
Generate a sequence of datetime values beginning with the previous hour. Negative
integers in the last input to dateshift correspond to datetime values earlier than t1.
t = dateshift(t1,'start','hour',-1:1)

19-Sep-2017 17:00:00 19-Sep-2017 18:00:00 19-Sep-2017 19:00:00
See Also
dateshift | linspace
7-24
Share Code and Data Across Locales
Share Code and Data Across Locales

In this section...
“Write Locale-Independent Date and Time Code” on page 7-25
“Write Dates in Other Languages” on page 7-26
“Read Dates in Other Languages” on page 7-27
Write Locale-Independent Date and Time Code

Follow these best practices when sharing code that handles dates and time with
MATLAB® users in other locales. These practices ensure that the same code produces
the same output display and that output files containing dates and time are read
correctly on systems in different countries or with different language settings.
Create language-independent datetime values. That is, create datetime values that use
month numbers rather than month names, such as 01 instead of January. Avoid using
day of week names.
For example, do this:
t = datetime('today','Format','yyyy-MM-dd')
t = datetime
2017-09-19
instead of this:
t = datetime('today','Format','eeee, dd-MMM-yyyy')
t = datetime
Tuesday, 19-Sep-2017
Display the hour using 24-hour clock notation rather than 12-hour clock notation. Use
the 'HH' identifiers when specifying the display format for datetime values.
For example, do this:
t = datetime('now','Format','HH:mm')
7-25
7 Dates and Time
t = datetime
19:33
instead of this:
t = datetime('now','Format','hh:mm a')
t = datetime
07:33 PM
When specifying the display format for time zone information, use the Z or X identifiers
instead of the lowercase z to avoid the creation of time zone names that might not be
recognized in other languages or regions.
Assign a time zone to t.

t.TimeZone = 'America/New_York';
Specify a language-independent display format that includes a time zone.

t.Format = 'dd-MM-yyyy Z'
t = datetime
19-09-2017 -0400
If you share files but not code, you do not need to write locale-independent code while you
work in MATLAB. However, when you write to a file, ensure that any text representing
dates and times is language-independent. Then, other MATLAB users can read the files
easily without having to specify a locale in which to interpret date and time data.
Write Dates in Other Languages

Specify an appropriate format for text representing dates and times when you use the
char or cellstr functions. For example, convert two datetime values to a cell array of
character vectors using cellstr. Specify the format and the locale to represent the day,
month, and year of each datetime value as text.
t = [datetime('today');datetime('tomorrow')]

19-Sep-2017
7-26
See Also
20-Sep-2017
S = cellstr(t,'dd. MMMM yyyy','de_DE')
S = 2x1 cell array

{'19. September 2017'}
{'20. September 2017'}
S is a cell array of character vectors representing dates in German. You can export S to a
text file to use with systems in the de_DE locale.
Read Dates in Other Languages

You can read text files containing dates and time in a language other than the language
that MATLAB uses, which depends on your system locale. Use the textscan or
readtable functions with the DateLocale name-value pair argument to specify the
locale in which the function interprets the dates in the file. In addition, you might need
to specify the character encoding of a file that contains characters that are not recognized
by your computer's default encoding.
• When reading text files using the textscan function, specify the file encoding when
opening the file with fopen. The encoding is the fourth input argument to fopen.
• When reading text files using the readtable function, use the FileEncoding name-
value pair argument to specify the character encoding associated with the file.
See Also
cellstr | char | datetime | readtable | textscan
7-27
7 Dates and Time
Extract or Assign Date and Time Components of Datetime Array

This example shows two ways to extract date and time components from existing
datetime arrays: accessing the array properties or calling a function. Then, the example
shows how to modify the date and time components by modifying the array properties.
Access Properties to Retrieve Date and Time Component
Create a datetime array.

t = datetime('now') + calyears(0:2) + calmonths(0:2) + hours(20:20:60)

20-Sep-2017 13:49:56 21-Oct-2018 09:49:56 22-Nov-2019 05:49:56
Get the year values of each datetime in the array. Use dot notation to access the Year
property of t.
t_years = t.Year
t_years =
2017 2018 2019
The output, t_years, is a numeric array.
Get the month values of each datetime in t by accessing the Month property.
t_months = t.Month
t_months =
9 10 11
You can retrieve the day, hour, minute, and second components of each datetime in t by
accessing the Hour, Minute, and Second properties, respectively.
Use Functions to Retrieve Date and Time Component
Use the month function to get the month number for each datetime in t. Using functions
is an alternate way to retrieve specific date or time components of t.
7-28
Extract or Assign Date and Time Components of Datetime Array
m = month(t)
m =
9 10 11
Use the month function rather than the Month property to get the full month names of
each datetime in t.
m = month(t,'name')
m = 1x3 cell array

{'September'} {'October'} {'November'}
You can retrieve the year, quarter, week, day, hour, minute, and second components of
each datetime in t using the year, quarter, week, hour, minute, and second
functions, respectively.
Get the week of year numbers for each datetime in t.
w = week(t)
w =
38 43 47
Get Multiple Date and Time Components
Use the ymd function to get the year, month, and day values of t as three separate
numeric arrays.
[y,m,d] = ymd(t)
y =
2017 2018 2019
m =
9 10 11
7-29
7 Dates and Time
d =
20 21 22
Use the hms function to get the hour, minute, and second values of t as three separate
numeric arrays.
[h,m,s] = hms(t)
h =
13 9 5
m =
49 49 49
s =
56.4970 56.4970 56.4970
Modify Date and Time Components
Assign new values to components in an existing datetime array by modifying the

properties of the array. Use dot notation to access a specific property.
Change the year number of all datetime values in t to 2014. Use dot notation to modify
the Year property.
t.Year = 2014

20-Sep-2014 13:49:56 21-Oct-2014 09:49:56 22-Nov-2014 05:49:56
Change the months of the three datetime values in t to January, February, and March,
respectively. You must specify the new value as a numeric array.
t.Month = [1,2,3]
7-30
See Also

20-Jan-2014 13:49:56 21-Feb-2014 09:49:56 22-Mar-2014 05:49:56
Set the time zone of t by assigning a value to the TimeZone property.
t.TimeZone = 'Europe/Berlin';
Change the display format of t to display only the date, and not the time information.
t.Format = 'dd-MMM-yyyy'

20-Jan-2014 21-Feb-2014 22-Mar-2014
If you assign values to a datetime component that are outside the conventional range,
MATLAB® normalizes the components. The conventional range for day of month
numbers is from 1 to 31. Assign day values that exceed this range.
t.Day = [-1 1 32]

30-Dec-2013 01-Feb-2014 01-Apr-2014
The month and year numbers adjust so that all values remain within the conventional
range for each date component. In this case, January -1, 2014 converts to December 30,
2013.
See Also
datetime | hms | week | ymd
7-31
7 Dates and Time
Combine Date and Time from Separate Variables

This example shows how to read date and time data from a text file. Then, it shows how
to combine date and time information stored in separate variables into a single datetime
variable.
Create a space-delimited text file named schedule.txt that contains the following (to
create the file, use any text editor, and copy and paste):
Date Name Time
10.03.2015 Joe 14:31
10.03.2015 Bob 15:33
11.03.2015 Bob 11:29
12.03.2015 Kim 12:09
12.03.2015 Joe 13:05
Read the file using the readtable function. Use the %D conversion specifier to read the
first and third columns of data as datetime values.
T = readtable('schedule.txt','Format','%{dd.MM.uuuu}D %s %{HH:mm}D','Delimiter',' ')
T =
Date Name Time
__________ _____ _____
10.03.2015 'Joe' 14:31
10.03.2015 'Bob' 15:33
11.03.2015 'Bob' 11:29
12.03.2015 'Kim' 12:09
12.03.2015 'Joe' 13:05
readtable returns a table containing three variables.
Change the display format for the T.Date and T.Time variables to view both date and
time information. Since the data in the first column of the file ("Date") have no time
information, the time of the resulting datetime values in T.Date default to midnight.
Since the data in the third column of the file ("Time") have no associated date, the date of
the datetime values in T.Time defaults to the current date.
T.Date.Format = 'dd.MM.uuuu HH:mm';
T.Time.Format = 'dd.MM.uuuu HH:mm';
T
T =
Date Name Time
7-32
See Also
________________ _____ ________________

10.03.2015 00:00 'Joe' 12.12.2014 14:31
10.03.2015 00:00 'Bob' 12.12.2014 15:33
11.03.2015 00:00 'Bob' 12.12.2014 11:29
12.03.2015 00:00 'Kim' 12.12.2014 12:09
12.03.2015 00:00 'Joe' 12.12.2014 13:05
Combine the date and time information from two different table variables by adding
T.Date and the time values in T.Time. Extract the time information from T.Time using
the timeofday function.
myDatetime = T.Date + timeofday(T.Time)
myDatetime =
10.03.2015 14:31
10.03.2015 15:33
11.03.2015 11:29
12.03.2015 12:09
12.03.2015 13:05
See Also
readtable | timeofday
7-33
7 Dates and Time
Date and Time Arithmetic

This example shows how to add and subtract date and time values to calculate future
and past dates and elapsed durations in exact units or calendar units. You can add,
subtract, multiply, and divide date and time arrays in the same way that you use these
operators with other MATLAB® data types. However, there is some behavior that is
specific to dates and time.
Add and Subtract Durations to Datetime Array
Create a datetime scalar. By default, datetime arrays are not associated wtih a time
zone.
t1 = datetime('now')
t1 = datetime
19-Sep-2017 18:12:09
Find future points in time by adding a sequence of hours.

t2 = t1 + hours(1:3)
t2 = 1x3 datetime array

19-Sep-2017 19:12:09 19-Sep-2017 20:12:09 19-Sep-2017 21:12:09
Verify that the difference between each pair of datetime values in t2 is 1 hour.
dt = diff(t2)

01:00:00 01:00:00
diff returns durations in terms of exact numbers of hours, minutes, and seconds.
Subtract a sequence of minutes from a datetime to find past points in time.

t2 = t1 - minutes(20:10:40)

19-Sep-2017 17:52:09 19-Sep-2017 17:42:09 19-Sep-2017 17:32:09
7-34
Add a numeric array to a datetime array. MATLAB® treats each value in the numeric
array as a number of exact, 24-hour days.
t2 = t1 + [1:3]

20-Sep-2017 18:12:09 21-Sep-2017 18:12:09 22-Sep-2017 18:12:09
Add to Datetime with Time Zone
If you work with datetime values in different time zones, or if you want to account for
daylight saving time changes, work with datetime arrays that are associated with time
zones. Create a datetime scalar representing March 8, 2014 in New York.
t1 = datetime(2014,3,8,0,0,0,'TimeZone','America/New_York')
t1 = datetime
08-Mar-2014 00:00:00
Find future points in time by adding a sequence of fixed-length (24-hour) days.
t2 = t1 + days(0:2)

08-Mar-2014 00:00:00 09-Mar-2014 00:00:00 10-Mar-2014 01:00:00
Because a daylight saving time shift occurred on March 9, 2014, the third datetime in t2
does not occur at midnight.
Verify that the difference between each pair of datetime values in t2 is 24 hours.
dt = diff(t2)

24:00:00 24:00:00
You can add fixed-length durations in other units such as years, hours, minutes, and
seconds by adding the outputs of the years, hours, minutes, and seconds functions,
respectively.
7-35
7 Dates and Time
To account for daylight saving time changes, you should work with calendar durations
instead of durations. Calendar durations account for daylight saving time shifts when
they are added to or subtracted from datetime values.
Add a number of calendar days to t1.
t3 = t1 + caldays(0:2)

08-Mar-2014 00:00:00 09-Mar-2014 00:00:00 10-Mar-2014 00:00:00
View that the difference between each pair of datetime values in t3 is not always 24
hours due to the daylight saving time shift that occurred on March 9.
dt = diff(t3)

24:00:00 23:00:00
Add Calendar Durations to Datetime Array
Add a number of calendar months to January 31, 2014.
t1 = datetime(2014,1,31)
t1 = datetime
31-Jan-2014
t2 = t1 + calmonths(1:4)

28-Feb-2014 31-Mar-2014 30-Apr-2014 31-May-2014
Each datetime in t2 occurs on the last day of each month.
Calculate the difference between each pair of datetime values in t2 in terms of a number
of calendar days using the caldiff function.
dt = caldiff(t2,'days')
7-36

31d 30d 31d
The number of days between successive pairs of datetime values in dt is not always the
same because different months consist of a different number of days.
Add a number of calendar years to January 31, 2014.
t2 = t1 + calyears(0:4)

31-Jan-2014 31-Jan-2015 31-Jan-2016 31-Jan-2017 31-Jan-2018
Calculate the difference between each pair of datetime values in t2 in terms of a number
of calendar days using the caldiff function.
dt = caldiff(t2,'days')

365d 365d 366d 365d
The number of days between successive pairs of datetime values in dt is not always the
same because 2016 is a leap year and has 366 days.
You can use the calquarters, calweeks, and caldays functions to create arrays of
calendar quarters, calendar weeks, or calendar days that you add to or subtract from
datetime arrays.
Adding calendar durations is not commutative. When you add more than one
calendarDuration array to a datetime, MATLAB® adds them in the order in which
they appear in the command.
Add 3 calendar months followed by 30 calendar days to January 31, 2014.
t2 = datetime(2014,1,31) + calmonths(3) + caldays(30)
t2 = datetime
30-May-2014
7-37
7 Dates and Time
First add 30 calendar days to the same date, and then add 3 calendar months. The result
is not the same because when you add a calendar duration to a datetime, the number of
days added depends on the original date.
t2 = datetime(2014,1,31) + caldays(30) + calmonths(3)
t2 = datetime
02-Jun-2014
Calendar Duration Arithmetic
Create two calendar durations and then find their sum.
d1 = calyears(1) + calmonths(2) + caldays(20)
d1 = calendarDuration
1y 2mo 20d
d2 = calmonths(11) + caldays(23)
d2 = calendarDuration
11mo 23d
d = d1 + d2
d = calendarDuration
2y 1mo 43d
When you sum two or more calendar durations, a number of months greater than 12 roll
over to a number of years. However, a large number of days does not roll over to a
number of months, because different months consist of different numbers of days.
Increase d by multiplying it by a factor of 2. Calendar duration values must be integers,

so you can multiply them only by integer values.
2*d
ans = calendarDuration
4y 2mo 86d
7-38
Calculate Elapsed Time in Exact Units
Subtract one datetime array from another to calculate elapsed time in terms of an exact
number of hours, minutes, and seconds.
Find the exact length of time between a sequence of datetime values and the start of the
previous day.
t2 = datetime('now') + caldays(1:3)

20-Sep-2017 18:12:11 21-Sep-2017 18:12:11 22-Sep-2017 18:12:11
t1 = datetime('yesterday')
t1 = datetime
18-Sep-2017
dt = t2 - t1

66:12:11 90:12:11 114:12:11
whos dt
dt 1x3 40 duration
dt contains durations in the format, hours:minutes:seconds.
View the elapsed durations in units of days by changing the Format property of dt.
dt.Format = 'd'

2.7585 days 3.7585 days 4.7585 days
Scale the duration values by multiplying dt by a factor of 1.2. Because durations have an
exact length, you can multiply and divide them by fractional values.
dt2 = 1.2*dt
7-39
7 Dates and Time
dt2 = 1x3 duration array

3.3102 days 4.5102 days 5.7102 days
Calculate Elapsed Time in Calendar Units
Use the between function to find the number of calendar years, months, and days
elapsed between two dates.
t1 = datetime('today')
t1 = datetime
19-Sep-2017
t2 = t1 + calmonths(0:2) + caldays(4)

23-Sep-2017 23-Oct-2017 23-Nov-2017
dt = between(t1,t2)

4d 1mo 4d 2mo 4d
See Also
between | caldiff | diff
7-40
Compare Dates and Time

This example shows how to compare datetime and duration arrays. You can perform
an element-by-element comparison of values in two datetime arrays or two duration
arrays using relational operators, such as > and <.
Compare Datetime Arrays
Compare two datetime arrays. The arrays must be the same size or one can be a scalar.
A = datetime(2013,07,26) + calyears(0:2:6)
A = 1x4 datetime array

26-Jul-2013 26-Jul-2015 26-Jul-2017 26-Jul-2019
B = datetime(2014,06,01)
B = datetime
01-Jun-2014
A < B

1 0 0 0
The < operator returns logical 1 (true) where a datetime in A occurs before a datetime in
B.
Compare a datetime array to text representing a date.
A >= 'September 26, 2014'

0 1 1 1
Comparisons of datetime arrays account for the time zone information of each array.
Compare September 1, 2014 at 4:00 p.m. in Los Angeles with 5:00 p.m. on the same day
in New York.
7-41
7 Dates and Time
A = datetime(2014,09,01,16,0,0,'TimeZone','America/Los_Angeles',...
'Format','dd-MMM-yyyy HH:mm:ss Z')
A = datetime
01-Sep-2014 16:00:00 -0700
B = datetime(2014,09,01,17,0,0,'TimeZone','America/New_York',...
'Format','dd-MMM-yyyy HH:mm:ss Z')
B = datetime
01-Sep-2014 17:00:00 -0400
A < B
ans = logical
0
4:00 p.m. in Los Angeles occurs after 5:00 p.m. on the same day in New York.
Compare Durations
Compare two duration arrays.
A = duration([2,30,30;3,15,0])
A = 2x1 duration array

02:30:30
03:15:00
B = duration([2,40,0;2,50,0])
B = 2x1 duration array

02:40:00
02:50:00
A >= B

0
1
7-42
Compare a duration array to a numeric array. Elements in the numeric array are treated
as a number of fixed-length (24-hour) days.
A < [1; 1/24]

1
0
Determine if Dates and Time Are Contained Within an Interval
Use the isbetween function to determine whether values in a datetime array lie
within a closed interval.
Define endpoints of an interval.

tlower = datetime(2014,08,01)
tlower = datetime
01-Aug-2014
tupper = datetime(2014,09,01)
tupper = datetime
01-Sep-2014
Create a datetime array and determine whether the values lie within the interval
bounded by t1 and t2.
A = datetime(2014,08,21) + calweeks(0:2)
A = 1x3 datetime array

21-Aug-2014 28-Aug-2014 04-Sep-2014
tf = isbetween(A,tlower,tupper)
7-43
7 Dates and Time
tf = 1x3 logical array

1 1 0
See Also
isbetween
More About
7-44
Plot Dates and Durations

You can create plots of datetime and duration values with a variety of graphics functions.
You also can customize the axes, such as changing the format of the tick labels or
changing the axis limits.
Line Plot with Dates

Create a line plot with datetime values on the x-axis. Then, change the format of the tick
labels and the x-axis limits.
Create t as a sequence of dates and create y as random data. Plot the vectors using the
plot function.
t = datetime(2014,6,28) + calweeks(0:9);
y = rand(1,10);
plot(t,y);
7-45
7 Dates and Time
By default, plot chooses tick mark locations based on the range of data. When you zoom
in and out of a plot, the tick labels automatically adjust to the new axis limits.
Change the x-axis limits. Also, change the format for the tick labels along the x-axis. For
a list of formatting options, see the xtickformat function.
xlim(datetime(2014,[7 8],[12 23]))

xtickformat('dd-MMM-yyyy')
7-46
Line Plot with Durations

Create a line plot with duration values on the x-axis. Then, change the format of the tick
labels and the x-axis limits.
Create t as seven linearly spaced duration values between 0 and 3 minutes. Create y as
a vector of random data. Plot the data.
t = 0:seconds(30):minutes(3);
y = rand(1,7);
plot(t,y);
7-47
7 Dates and Time
View the x-axis limits. Since the duration tick labels are in terms of a single unit
(minutes), the limits are stored in terms of that unit.
xl = xlim
xl = 1x2 duration array

-0.075 min 3.075 min
Change the format for the duration tick labels to display in the form of a digital timer
that includes more than one unit. For a list of formatting options, see the xtickformat
function.
xtickformat('mm:ss')
7-48
View the x-axis limits again. Since the duration tick labels are now in terms of multiple
units, the limits are stored in units of 24-hour days.
xl = xlim
xl = 1x2 duration array

-0:04 03:04
Scatter Plot with Dates and Durations

Create a scatter plot with datetime or duration inputs using the scatter or scatter3
functions. For example, create a scatter plot with dates along the x-axis.
7-49
7 Dates and Time
t = datetime('today') + caldays(1:100);
y = linspace(10,40,100) + 10*rand(1,100);
scatter(t,y)
Plots that Support Dates and Durations

You can create other types of plots with datetime or duration values. These graphics
functions support datetime and duration values.
bar barh
plot plot3
7-50
See Also
semilogx (x values must be numeric) semilogy (y values must be numeric)

stem stairs
scatter scatter3
area mesh
surf surface
fill fill3
line text
histogram
See Also
datetime | plot | xtickformat
7-51
7 Dates and Time
Core Functions Supporting Date and Time Arrays

Many functions in MATLAB operate on date and time arrays in much the same way that
they operate on other arrays.
This table lists notable MATLAB functions that operate on datetime, duration, and
calendarDuration arrays in addition to other arrays.
size isequal intersect plus plot
length isequaln ismember minus plot3
ndims setdiff uminus scatter
numel eq setxor times scatter3
ne unique rdivide bar
isrow lt union ldivide barh
iscolumn le mtimes histogram
ge abs mrdivide
cat gt floor mldivide stem
horzcat ceil diff stairs
vertcat sort round sum area
sortrows mesh
permute issorted min char surf
reshape max string surface
transpose mean cellstr
ctranspose median semilogx
mode semilogy
linspace fill
fill3
line
text
7-52
Convert Between Datetime Arrays, Numbers, and Text

In this section...
“Overview” on page 7-53
“Convert Between Datetime and Character Vectors” on page 7-54
“Convert Between Datetime and String Arrays” on page 7-55
“Convert Between Datetime and Date Vectors” on page 7-56
“Convert Serial Date Numbers to Datetime” on page 7-57
“Convert Datetime Arrays to Numeric Values” on page 7-57
Overview
datetime is the best data type for representing points in time. datetime values have
flexible display formats and up to nanosecond precision, and can account for time zones,
daylight saving time, and leap seconds. However, if you work with code authored in
MATLAB R2014a or earlier, or if you share code with others who use such a version, you
might need to work with dates and time stored in one of these three formats:
• Date String on page 7-54 — A character vector.

Example: Thursday, August 23, 2012 9:45:44.946 AM
• Date Vector on page 7-56 — A 1-by-6 numeric vector containing the year, month,
day, hour, minute, and second.
Example: [2012 8 23 9 45 44.946]
• Serial Date Number on page 7-57 — A single number equal to the number of days
since January 0, 0000 in the proleptic ISO calendar. Serial date numbers are useful
as inputs to some MATLAB functions that do not accept the datetime or duration
data types.
Example: 7.3510e+005
Date strings, vectors, and numbers can be stored as arrays of values. Store multiple date
strings in a cell array of character vectors, multiple date vectors in an m-by-6 matrix, and
multiple serial date numbers in a matrix.
You can convert any of these formats to a datetime array using the datetime function.
If your existing MATLAB code expects a serial date number or date vector, use the
7-53
7 Dates and Time
datenum or datevec functions, respectively, to convert a datetime array to the

expected data format. To convert a datetime array to character vectors, use the char or
cellstr functions.
Starting in R2016b, you also can convert a datetime array to a string array with the
string function.
Convert Between Datetime and Character Vectors

A date string can be a character vector composed of fields related to a specific date and/or
time. There are several ways to represent dates and times in text format. For example,
all of the following are character vectors representing August 23, 2010 at 04:35:42 PM:
'23-Aug-2010 04:35:06 PM'
'Wednesday, August 23'
'08/23/10 16:35'
'Aug 23 16:35:42.946'
A date string includes characters that separate the fields, such as the hyphen, space, and
colon used here:
d = '23-Aug-2010 16:35:42'
Convert one or more date strings to a datetime array using the datetime function. For
best performance, specify the format of the input date strings as an input to datetime.
Note The specifiers that datetime uses to describe date and time formats differ from
the specifiers that the datestr, datevec, and datenum functions accept.
t = datetime(d,'InputFormat','dd-MMM-yyyy HH:mm:ss')
t =
datetime
23-Aug-2010 16:35:42
Although the date string, d, and the datetime scalar, t, look similar, they are not equal.
View the size and data type of each variable.
whos d t
7-54
d 1x20 40 char
t 1x1 17 datetime
Convert a datetime array to a character vector using char or cellstr. For example,
convert the current date and time to a timestamp to append to a file name.
t = datetime('now','Format','yyyy-MM-dd''T''HHmmss')
t =
datetime
2017-01-03T151105
S = char(t);
filename = ['myTest_',S]
filename =
'myTest_2017-01-03T151105'
Convert Between Datetime and String Arrays

Starting in R2016b, you can use the string function to create a string array. If a string
array contains date strings, then you can convert the string array to a datetime array
with the datetime function. Similarly, you can convert a datetime array to a string
array with the string function.
Convert a string array. MATLAB displays strings in double quotes. For best
performance, specify the format of the input date strings as an input to datetime.
str = string({'24-Oct-2016 11:58:17';
'19-Nov-2016 09:36:29';
'12-Dec-2016 10:09:06'})
str =
3×1 string array
"24-Oct-2016 11:58:17"
"19-Nov-2016 09:36:29"
"12-Dec-2016 10:09:06"
7-55
7 Dates and Time
t = datetime(str,'InputFormat','dd-MMM-yyyy HH:mm:ss')
t =
3×1 datetime array
24-Oct-2016 11:58:17
19-Nov-2016 09:36:29
12-Dec-2016 10:09:06
Convert a datetime value to a string.

t = datetime('25-Dec-2016 06:12:34');
str = string(t)
str =
"25-Dec-2016 06:12:34"
Convert Between Datetime and Date Vectors

A date vector is a 1-by-6 vector of double-precision numbers. Elements of a date vector
are integer-valued, except for the seconds element, which can be fractional. Time values
are expressed in 24-hour notation. There is no AM or PM setting.
A date vector is arranged in the following order:

year month day hour minute second
The following date vector represents 10:45:07 AM on October 24, 2012:

[2012 10 24 10 45 07]
Convert one or more date vectors to a datetime array using the datetime function:
t = datetime([2012 10 24 10 45 07])
t =
datetime
24-Oct-2012 10:45:07
Instead of using datevec to extract components of datetime values, use functions such
as year, month, and day instead:
7-56
y = year(t)
y =
2012
Alternatively, access the corresponding property, such as t.Year for year values:
y = t.Year
y =
2012
Convert Serial Date Numbers to Datetime

A serial date number represents a calendar date as the number of days that has passed
since a fixed base date. In MATLAB, serial date number 1 is January 1, 0000.
Serial time can represent fractions of days beginning at midnight; for example, 6 p.m.
equals 0.75 serial days. So the character vector '31-Oct-2003, 6:00 PM' in MATLAB
is date number 731885.75.
Convert one or more serial date numbers to a datetime array using the datetime
function. Specify the type of date number that is being converted:
t = datetime(731885.75,'ConvertFrom','datenum')
t =
datetime
31-Oct-2003 18:00:00
Convert Datetime Arrays to Numeric Values

Some MATLAB functions accept numeric data types but not datetime values as inputs.
To apply these functions to your date and time data, convert datetime values to
meaningful numeric values. Then, call the function. For example, the log function
accepts double inputs, but not datetime inputs. Suppose that you have a datetime
array of dates spanning the course of a research study or experiment.
t = datetime(2014,6,18) + calmonths(1:4)
7-57
7 Dates and Time
t =
1×4 datetime array
18-Jul-2014 18-Aug-2014 18-Sep-2014 18-Oct-2014
Subtract the origin value. For example, the origin value might be the starting day of an
experiment.
dt = t - datetime(2014,7,1)
dt =
1×4 duration array
408:00:00 1152:00:00 1896:00:00 2616:00:00
dt is a duration array. Convert dt to a double array of values in units of years, days,

hours, minutes, or seconds using the years, days, hours, minutes, or seconds
function, respectively.
x = hours(dt)
x =
408 1152 1896 2616
Pass the double array as the input to the log function.
y = log(x)
y =
6.0113 7.0493 7.5475 7.8694
See Also
cellstr | char | datenum | datetime | datevec
More About
7-58
Carryover in Date Vectors and Strings
Carryover in Date Vectors and Strings

If an element falls outside the conventional range, MATLAB adjusts both that date
vector element and the previous element. For example, if the minutes element is 70,
MATLAB adjusts the hours element by 1 and sets the minutes element to 10. If the
minutes element is -15, then MATLAB decreases the hours element by 1 and sets the
minutes element to 45. Month values are an exception. MATLAB sets month values less
than 1 to 1.
In the following example, the month element has a value of 22. MATLAB increments the
year value to 2010 and sets the month to October.
datestr([2009 22 03 00 00 00])
ans =
03-Oct-2010
The carrying forward of values also applies to time and day values in text representing
dates and times. For example, October 3, 2010 and September 33, 2010 are interpreted to
be the same date, and correspond to the same serial date number.
datenum('03-Oct-2010')
ans =
734414
datenum('33-Sep-2010')
ans =
734414
The following example takes the input month (07, or July), finds the last day of the
previous month (June 30), and subtracts the number of days in the field specifier (5 days)
from that date to yield a return date of June 25, 2010.
datestr([2010 07 -05 00 00 00])
ans =
25-Jun-2010
7-59
7 Dates and Time
Converting Date Vector Returns Unexpected Output

Because a date vector is a 1-by-6 vector of numbers, datestr might interpret your input
date vectors as vectors of serial date numbers, or vice versa, and return unexpected
output.
Consider a date vector that includes the year 3000. This year is outside the range of
years that datestr interprets as elements of date vectors. Therefore, the input is
interpreted as a 1-by-6 vector of serial date numbers:
datestr([3000 11 05 10 32 56])
ans =
18-Mar-0008
11-Jan-0000
05-Jan-0000
10-Jan-0000
01-Feb-0000
25-Feb-0000
Here datestr interprets 3000 as a serial date number, and converts it to the date string
'18-Mar-0008'. Also, datestr converts the next five elements to date strings.
When converting such a date vector to a character vector, first convert it to a serial date
number using datenum. Then, convert the date number to a character vector using
datestr:
dn = datenum([3000 11 05 10 32 56]);
ds = datestr(dn)
ds =
05-Nov-3000 10:32:56
When converting dates to character vectors, datestr interprets input as either date
vectors or serial date numbers using a heuristic rule. Consider an m-by-6 matrix.
datestr interprets the matrix as m date vectors when:
• The first five columns contain integers.

• The absolute value of the sum of each row is in the range 1500–2500.
7-60
Converting Date Vector Returns Unexpected Output
If either condition is false, for any row, then datestr interprets the m-by-6 matrix as m-
by-6 serial date numbers.
Usually, dates with years in the range 1700–2300 are interpreted as date vectors.
However, datestr might interpret rows with month, day, hour, minute, or second values
outside their normal ranges as serial date numbers. For example, datestr correctly
interprets the following date vector for the year 2014:
datestr([2014 06 21 10 51 00])
ans =
21-Jun-2014 10:51:00
But given a day value outside the typical range (1–31), datestr returns a date for each
element of the vector:
datestr([2014 06 2110 10 51 00])
ans =
06-Jul-0005
06-Jan-0000
10-Oct-0005
10-Jan-0000
20-Feb-0000
00-Jan-0000
When you have a matrix of date vectors that datestr might interpret incorrectly as
serial date numbers, first convert the matrix to serial date numbers using datenum.
Then, use datestr to convert the date numbers.
When you have a matrix of serial date numbers that datestr might interpret as date
vectors, first convert the matrix to a column vector. Then, use datestr to convert the
column vector.
7-61
8
Categorical Arrays
• “Create Categorical Arrays” on page 8-2

• “Convert Text in Table Variables to Categorical” on page 8-7
• “Plot Categorical Data” on page 8-12
• “Compare Categorical Array Elements” on page 8-20
• “Combine Categorical Arrays” on page 8-23
• “Combine Categorical Arrays Using Multiplication” on page 8-27
• “Access Data Using Categorical Arrays” on page 8-30
• “Work with Protected Categorical Arrays” on page 8-38
• “Advantages of Using Categorical Arrays” on page 8-43
• “Ordinal Categorical Arrays” on page 8-46
• “Core Functions Supporting Categorical Arrays” on page 8-50
8 Categorical Arrays
Create Categorical Arrays

This example shows how to create a categorical array. categorical is a data type for
storing data with values from a finite set of discrete categories. These categories can
have a natural order, but it is not required. A categorical array provides efficient storage
and convenient manipulation of data, while also maintaining meaningful names for the
values. Categorical arrays are often used in a table to define groups of rows.
By default, categorical arrays contain categories that have no mathematical ordering.

For example, the discrete set of pet categories {'dog' 'cat' 'bird'} has no
meaningful mathematical ordering, so MATLAB® uses the alphabetical ordering
{'bird' 'cat' 'dog'}. Ordinal categorical arrays contain categories that have a
meaningful mathematical ordering. For example, the discrete set of size categories
{'small', 'medium', 'large'} has the mathematical ordering small < medium <
large.
When you create categorical arrays from cell arrays of character vectors or string arrays,
leading and trailing spaces are removed. For example, if you specify the text {' cat' 'dog '}
as categories, then when you convert them to categories they become {'cat' 'dog'}.
Create Categorical Array from Cell Array of Character Vectors
You can use the categorical function to create a categorical array from a numeric
array, logical array, string array, cell array of character vectors, or an existing
categorical array.
Create a 1-by-11 cell array of character vectors containing state names from New
England.
state = {'MA','ME','CT','VT','ME','NH','VT','MA','NH','CT','RI'};
Convert the cell array, state, to a categorical array that has no mathematical order.
state = categorical(state)
state = 1x11 categorical array

Columns 1 through 9
MA ME CT VT ME NH VT MA NH
8-2
CT RI
class(state)
ans =
'categorical'
List the discrete categories in the variable state.
categories(state)
ans = 6x1 cell array

{'CT'}
{'MA'}
{'ME'}
{'NH'}
{'RI'}
{'VT'}
The categories are listed in alphabetical order.
Create Ordinal Categorical Array from Cell Array of Character Vectors
Create a 1-by-8 cell array of character vectors containing the sizes of eight objects.
AllSizes = {'medium','large','small','small','medium',...
'large','medium','small'};
The cell array, AllSizes, has three distinct values: 'large', 'medium', and 'small'.
With the cell array of character vectors, there is no convenient way to indicate that
small < medium < large.
Convert the cell array, AllSizes, to an ordinal categorical array. Use valueset to
specify the values small, medium, and large, which define the categories. For an
ordinal categorical array, the first category specified is the smallest and the last category
is the largest.
valueset = {'small','medium','large'};
sizeOrd = categorical(AllSizes,valueset,'Ordinal',true)
sizeOrd = 1x8 categorical array

Columns 1 through 6
8-3
medium large small small medium large
Columns 7 through 8
medium small
class(sizeOrd)
ans =
'categorical'
The order of the values in the categorical array, sizeOrd, remains unchanged.
List the discrete categories in the categorical variable, sizeOrd.

categories(sizeOrd)

{'small' }
{'medium'}
{'large' }
The categories are listed in the specified order to match the mathematical ordering
Create Ordinal Categorical Array by Binning Numeric Data
Create a vector of 100 random numbers between zero and 50.

x = rand(100,1)*50;
Use the discretize function to create a categorical array by binning the values of x.
Put all values between zero and 15 in the first bin, all the values between 15 and 35 in
the second bin, and all the values between 35 and 50 in the third bin. Each bin includes
the left endpoint, but does not include the right endpoint.
catnames = {'small','medium','large'};
binnedData = discretize(x,[0 15 35 50],'categorical',catnames);
binnedData is a 100-by-1 ordinal categorical array with three categories, such that
8-4
Use the summary function to print the number of elements in each category.
summary(binnedData)
small 30
medium 35
large 35
Create Categorical Array from String Array
Starting in R2016b, you can create string arrays with the string function and convert
them to categorical array.
Create a string array that contains names of planets.

str = string({'Earth','Jupiter','Neptune','Jupiter','Mars','Earth'})

"Earth" "Jupiter" "Neptune" "Jupiter" "Mars" "Earth"
Convert str to a categorical array.
planets = categorical(str)
planets = 1x6 categorical array

Earth Jupiter Neptune Jupiter Mars Earth
Add missing elements to str and convert it to a categorical array. Where str has
missing values, planets has undefined values.
str(8) = 'Mars'

Columns 1 through 6
"Earth" "Jupiter" "Neptune" "Jupiter" "Mars" "Earth"
Columns 7 through 8
<missing> "Mars"
planets = categorical(str)
8-5
planets = 1x8 categorical array

Columns 1 through 6
Earth Jupiter Neptune Jupiter Mars Earth
Columns 7 through 8
<undefined> Mars
See Also
categorical | categories | discretize | summary
Related Examples
More About
8-6
Convert Text in Table Variables to Categorical

This example shows how to convert a variable in a table from a cell array of character
vectors to a categorical array.
Load Sample Data and Create a Table
Load sample data gathered from 100 patients.
load patients
whos
Age 100x1 800 double

Diastolic 100x1 800 double
Gender 100x1 12212 cell
Height 100x1 800 double
LastName 100x1 12416 cell
Location 100x1 15008 cell
SelfAssessedHealthStatus 100x1 12340 cell
Smoker 100x1 100 logical
Systolic 100x1 800 double
Weight 100x1 800 double
Store the patient data from Age, Gender, Height, Weight,

SelfAssessedHealthStatus, and Location in a table. Use the unique identifiers in
the variable LastName as row names.
T = table(Age,Gender,Height,Weight,...
SelfAssessedHealthStatus,Location,...
'RowNames',LastName);
Convert Table Variables from Cell Arrays of Character Vectors to Categorical Arrays
The cell arrays of character vectors, Gender and Location, contain discrete sets of
unique values.
Convert Gender and Location to categorical arrays.
T.Gender = categorical(T.Gender);
T.Location = categorical(T.Location);
8-7
The variable, SelfAssessedHealthStatus, contains four unique values: Excellent,

Fair, Good, and Poor.
Convert SelfAssessedHealthStatus to an ordinal categorical array, such that the

categories have the mathematical ordering Poor < Fair < Good < Excellent.
T.SelfAssessedHealthStatus = categorical(T.SelfAssessedHealthStatus,...
{'Poor','Fair','Good','Excellent'},'Ordinal',true);
Print a Summary
View the data type, description, units, and other descriptive statistics for each variable
by using summary to summarize the table.
format compact
summary(T)
Variables:
Age: 100x1 double
Values:
Min 25
Median 39
Max 50
Gender: 100x1 categorical
Values:
Female 53
Male 47
Height: 100x1 double
Values:
Min 60
Median 67
Max 72
Weight: 100x1 double
Values:
Min 111
Median 142.5
Max 202
SelfAssessedHealthStatus: 100x1 ordinal categorical
Values:
Poor 11
Fair 15
Good 40
Excellent 34
8-8
Location: 100x1 categorical

Values:
County General Hospital 39
St. Mary s Medical Center 24
VA Hospital 37
The table variables Gender, SelfAssessedHealthStatus, and Location are

categorical arrays. The summary contains the counts of the number of elements in each
category. For example, the summary indicates that 53 of the 100 patients are female and
47 are male.
Select Data Based on Categories
Create a subtable, T1, containing the age, height, and weight of all female patients who
were observed at County General Hospital. You can easily create a logical vector based
on the values in the categorical arrays Gender and Location.
rows = T.Location=='County General Hospital' & T.Gender=='Female';
rows is a 100-by-1 logical vector with logical true (1) for the table rows where the
gender is female and the location is County General Hospital.
Define the subset of variables.

vars = {'Age','Height','Weight'};
Use parentheses to create the subtable, T1.
T1 = T(rows,vars)
T1=19x3 table
Age Height Weight
___ ______ ______
Brown 49 64 119
Taylor 31 66 132
Anderson 45 68 128
Lee 44 66 146
Walker 28 65 123
Young 25 63 114
Campbell 37 65 135
Evans 39 62 121
Morris 43 64 135
Rivera 29 63 130
Richardson 30 67 141
8-9
Cox 28 66 111
Torres 45 70 137
Peterson 32 60 136
Ramirez 48 64 137
Bennett 35 64 131
A is a 19-by-3 table.
Since ordinal categorical arrays have a mathematical ordering for their categories, you
can perform element-wise comparisons of them with relational operations, such as
greater than and less than.
Create a subtable, T2, of the gender, age, height, and weight of all patients who assessed
their health status as poor or fair.
First, define the subset of rows to include in table T2.
rows = T.SelfAssessedHealthStatus<='Fair';
Then, define the subset of variables to include in table T2.
vars = {'Gender','Age','Height','Weight'};
Use parentheses to create the subtable T2.
T2 = T(rows,vars)
T2=26x4 table
Gender Age Height Weight
______ ___ ______ ______
Johnson Male 43 69 163
Jones Female 40 67 133
Thomas Female 42 66 137
Jackson Male 25 71 174
Garcia Female 27 69 131
Rodriguez Female 39 64 117
Lewis Female 41 62 137
Lee Female 44 66 146
Hall Male 25 70 189
Hernandez Male 36 68 166
Lopez Female 40 66 137
Gonzalez Female 35 66 118
Mitchell Male 39 71 164
Campbell Female 37 65 135
8-10
See Also
Parker Male 30 68 182

Stewart Male 49 68 170
T2 is a 26-by-4 table.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Create and Work with Tables” on page 9-2
• “Access Data in a Table” on page 9-32
More About
8-11
Plot Categorical Data

This example shows how to plot data from a categorical array.
Load Sample Data

load patients
whos

Create Categorical Arrays from Cell Arrays of Character Vectors
The workspace variable, Location, is a cell array of character vectors that contains the
three unique medical facilities where patients were observed.
To access and compare data more easily, convert Location to a categorical array.
Location = categorical(Location);
Summarize the categorical array.

summary(Location)

St. Mary's Medical Center 24
VA Hospital 37
39 patients were observed at County General Hospital, 24 at St. Mary's Medical Center,
and 37 at the VA Hospital.
8-12
The workspace variable, SelfAssessedHealthStatus, contains four unique values,

Excellent, Fair, Good, and Poor.
Convert SelfAssessedHealthStatus to an ordinal categorical array, such that the

categories have the mathematical ordering Poor < Fair < Good < Excellent.
SelfAssessedHealthStatus = categorical(SelfAssessedHealthStatus,...
{'Poor' 'Fair' 'Good' 'Excellent'},'Ordinal',true);
Summarize the categorical array, SelfAssessedHealthStatus.
summary(SelfAssessedHealthStatus)
Poor 11
Fair 15
Good 40
Excellent 34
Plot Histogram
Create a histogram bar plot directly from a categorical array.

figure
histogram(SelfAssessedHealthStatus)
title('Self Assessed Health Status From 100 Patients')
8-13
The function histogram accepts the categorical array, SelfAssessedHealthStatus,

and plots the category counts for each of the four categories.
Create a histogram of the hospital location for only the patients who assessed their
health as Fair or Poor.
figure
histogram(Location(SelfAssessedHealthStatus<='Fair'))
title('Location of Patients in Fair or Poor Health')
8-14
Create Pie Chart
Create a pie chart directly from a categorical array.

figure
pie(SelfAssessedHealthStatus);
8-15
The function pie accepts the categorical array, SelfAssessedHealthStatus, and plots
a pie chart of the four categories.
Create Pareto Chart
Create a Pareto chart from the category counts for each of the four categories of
SelfAssessedHealthStatus.
figure
A = countcats(SelfAssessedHealthStatus);
C = categories(SelfAssessedHealthStatus);
pareto(A,C);
8-16
The first input argument to pareto must be a vector. If a categorical array is a matrix or
multidimensional array, reshape it into a vector before calling countcats and pareto.
Create Scatter Plot
Convert the cell array of character vectors to a categorical array.

Gender = categorical(Gender);
Summarize the categorical array, Gender.

summary(Gender)
Female 53
Male 47
8-17
Gender is a 100-by-1 categorical array with two categories, Female and Male.
Use the categorical array, Gender, to access Weight and Height data for each gender
separately.
X1 = Weight(Gender=='Female');
Y1 = Height(Gender=='Female');
X2 = Weight(Gender=='Male');
Y2 = Height(Gender=='Male');
X1 and Y1 are 53-by-1 numeric arrays containing data from the female patients.
X2 and Y2 are 47-by-1 numeric arrays containing data from the male patients.
Create a scatter plot of height vs. weight. Indicate data from the female patients with a
circle and data from the male patients with a cross.
figure
h1 = scatter(X1,Y1,'o');
hold on
h2 = scatter(X2,Y2,'x');
title('Height vs. Weight')

xlabel('Weight (lbs)')
ylabel('Height (in)')
8-18
See Also
See Also
bar | categorical | countcats | histogram | pie | rose | scatter | summary
Related Examples
8-19
Compare Categorical Array Elements

This example shows how to use relational operations with a categorical array.
Create Categorical Array from Cell Array of Character Vectors
Create a 2-by-4 cell array of character vectors.
C = {'blue' 'red' 'green' 'blue';...

'blue' 'green' 'green' 'blue'};
colors = categorical(C)
colors = 2x4 categorical array

blue red green blue
blue green green blue
colors is a 2-by-4 categorical array.
List the categories of the categorical array.
categories(colors)

{'blue' }
{'green'}
{'red' }
Determine If Elements Are Equal
Use the relational operator, eq (==), to compare the first and second rows of colors.
colors(1,:) == colors(2,:)

1 0 1 1
Only the values in the second column differ between the rows.
8-20
Compare Categorical Array Elements
Compare Entire Array to Character Vector
Compare the entire categorical array, colors, to the character vector 'blue' to find the
location of all blue values.
colors == 'blue'

1 0 0 1
1 0 0 1
There are four blue entries in colors, one in each corner of the array.
Convert to an Ordinal Categorical Array
Add a mathematical ordering to the categories in colors. Specify the category order that
represents the ordering of color spectrum, red < green < blue.
colors = categorical(colors,{'red','green' 'blue'},'Ordinal',true)
colors = 2x4 categorical array

blue red green blue
blue green green blue
The elements in the categorical array remain the same.
List the discrete categories in colors.
categories(colors)

{'red' }
{'green'}
{'blue' }
Compare Elements Based on Order
Determine if elements in the first column of colors are greater than the elements in the
second column.
colors(:,1) > colors(:,2)
8-21

1
1
Both values in the first column, blue, are greater than the corresponding values in the
second column, red and green.
Find all the elements in colors that are less than 'blue'.
colors < 'blue'

0 1 1 0
0 1 1 0
The function lt (<) indicates the location of all green and red values with 1.
See Also
categorical | categories
Related Examples
More About
• “Relational Operations”
8-22
Combine Categorical Arrays
Combine Categorical Arrays

This example shows how to combine two categorical arrays.
Create a categorical array, A, containing the preferred lunchtime beverage of 25 students

in classroom A.
A = gallery('integerdata',3,[25,1],1);
A = categorical(A,1:3,{'milk' 'water' 'juice'});
A is a 25-by-1 categorical array with three distinct categories: milk, water, and juice.
Summarize the categorical array, A.

summary(A)
milk 8
water 8
juice 9
Eight students in classroom A prefer milk, eight prefer water, and nine prefer juice.
Create another categorical array, B, containing the preferences of 28 students in

classroom B.
B = gallery('integerdata',3,[28,1],3);
B = categorical(B,1:3,{'milk' 'water' 'juice'});
B is a 28-by-1 categorical array containing the same categories as A.
Summarize the categorical array, B.

summary(B)
milk 12
water 10
juice 6
Twelve students in classroom B prefer milk, ten prefer water, and six prefer juice.
Concatenate Categorical Arrays
Concatenate the data from classrooms A and B into a single categorical array, Group1.
8-23
Group1 = [A;B];
Summarize the categorical array, Group1

summary(Group1)
milk 20
water 18
juice 15
Group1 is a 53-by-1 categorical array with three categories: milk, water, and juice.
Create Categorical Array with Different Categories
Create a categorical array, Group2, containing data from 50 students who were given the
additional beverage option of soda.
Group2 = gallery('integerdata',4,[50,1],2);
Group2 = categorical(Group2,1:4,{'juice' 'milk' 'soda' 'water'});
Summarize the categorical array, Group2.

summary(Group2)
juice 18
milk 10
soda 13
water 9
Group2 is a 50-by-1 categorical array with four categories: juice, milk, soda, and
water.
Concatenate Arrays with Different Categories
Concatenate the data from Group1 and Group2.

students = [Group1;Group2];
Summarize the resulting categorical array, students.

summary(students)
milk 30
water 27
juice 33
soda 13
8-24
See Also
Concatenation appends the categories exclusive to the second input, soda, to the end of
the list of categories from the first input, milk, water, juice, soda.
Use reordercats to change the order of the categories in the categorical array,
students.
students = reordercats(students,{'juice','milk','water','soda'});
categories(students)

{'juice'}
{'milk' }
{'water'}
{'soda' }
Union of Categorical Arrays
Use the function union to find the unique responses from Group1 and Group2.
C = union(Group1,Group2)
C = 4x1 categorical array

milk
water
juice
soda
union returns the combined values from Group1 and Group2 with no repetitions. In this
case, C is equivalent to the categories of the concatenation, students.
All of the categorical arrays in this example were nonordinal. To combine ordinal
categorical arrays, they must have the same sets of categories including their order.
See Also
cat | categorical | categories | horzcat | summary | union | vertcat
8-25
Related Examples
More About
8-26
Combine Categorical Arrays Using Multiplication
Combine Categorical Arrays Using Multiplication

This example shows how to use the times function to combine categorical arrays,
including ordinal categorical arrays and arrays with undefined elements. When you call
times on two categorical arrays, the output is a categorical array with new categories.
The set of new categories is the set of all the ordered pairs created from the categories of
the input arrays, or the Cartesian product. times forms each element of the output array
as the ordered pair of the corresponding elements of the input arrays. The output array
has the same size as the input arrays.
Combine Two Categorical Arrays
Combine two categorical arrays using times. The input arrays must have the same
number of elements, but can have different numbers of categories.
A = categorical({'blue','red','green'});
B = categorical({'+','-','+'});
C = A.*B

blue + red - green +
Cartesian Product of Categories
Show the categories of C. The categories are all the ordered pairs that can be created
from the categories of A and B, also known as the Cartesian product.
categories(C)

{'blue +' }
{'blue -' }
{'green +'}
{'green -'}
{'red +' }
{'red -' }
As a consequence, A.*B does not equal B.*A.
D = B.*A
8-27
D = 1x3 categorical array

+ blue - red + green
categories(D)

{'+ blue' }
{'+ green'}
{'+ red' }
{'- blue' }
{'- green'}
{'- red' }
Multiplication with Undefined Elements
Combine two categorical arrays. If either A or B have an undefined element, the

corresponding element of C is undefined.
A = categorical({'blue','red','green','black'});
B = categorical({'+','-','+','-'});
A = removecats(A,{'black'});
C = A.*B

blue + red - green + <undefined>
Cartesian Product of Ordinal Categorical Arrays
Combine two ordinal categorical arrays. C is an ordinal categorical array only if A and B
are both ordinal. The ordering of the categories of C follows from the orderings of the
input categorical arrays.
A = categorical({'blue','red','green'},{'green','red','blue'},'Ordinal',true);
B = categorical({'+','-','+'},'Ordinal',true);
C = A.*B;
categories(C)

{'green +'}
{'green -'}
{'red +' }
{'red -' }
8-28
See Also
{'blue +' }
{'blue -' }
See Also
categorical | categories | summary | times
Related Examples
More About
8-29
Access Data Using Categorical Arrays

In this section...
“Select Data By Category” on page 8-30
“Common Ways to Access Data Using Categorical Arrays” on page 8-30
Select Data By Category

Selecting data based on its values is often useful. This type of data selection can involve
creating a logical vector based on values in one variable, and then using that logical
vector to select a subset of values in other variables. You can create a logical vector for
selecting data by finding values in a numeric array that fall within a certain range.
Additionally, you can create the logical vector by finding specific discrete values. When
using categorical arrays, you can easily:
• Select elements from particular categories. For categorical arrays, use the
logical operators == or ~= to select data that is in, or not in, a particular category. To
select data in a particular group of categories, use the ismember function.
For ordinal categorical arrays, use inequalities >, >=, <, or <= to find data in
categories above or below a particular category.
• Delete data that is in a particular category. Use logical operators to include or
exclude data from particular categories.
• Find elements that are not in a defined category. Categorical arrays indicate
which elements do not belong to a defined category by <undefined>. Use the
isundefined function to find observations without a defined value.
Common Ways to Access Data Using Categorical Arrays

This example shows how to index and search using categorical arrays. You can access
data using categorical arrays stored within a table in a similar manner.
Load Sample Data

load patients
whos
8-30

Create Categorical Arrays from Cell Arrays of Character Vectors
Gender and Location contain data that belong in categories. Each cell array contains
character vectors taken from a small set of unique values (indicating two genders and
three locations respectively). Convert Gender and Location to categorical arrays.
Location = categorical(Location);
Search for Members of a Single Category
For categorical arrays, you can use the logical operators == and ~= to find the data that
is in, or not in, a particular category.
Determine if there are any patients observed at the location, 'Rampart General
Hospital'.
any(Location=='Rampart General Hospital')
ans = logical
0
There are no patients observed at Rampart General Hospital.
Search for Members of a Group of Categories
You can use ismember to find data in a particular group of categories. Create a logical
vector for the patients observed at County General Hospital or VA Hospital.
VA_CountyGenIndex = ...
ismember(Location,{'County General Hospital','VA Hospital'});
8-31
VA_CountyGenIndex is a 100-by-1 logical array containing logical true (1) for each
element in the categorical array Location that is a member of the category County
General Hospital or VA Hospital. The output, VA_CountyGenIndex contains 76
nonzero elements.
Use the logical vector, VA_CountyGenIndex to select the LastName of the patients
observed at either County General Hospital or VA Hospital.
VA_CountyGenPatients = LastName(VA_CountyGenIndex);
VA_CountyGenPatients is a 76-by-1 cell array of character vectors.
Select Elements in a Particular Category to Plot
Use the summary function to print a summary containing the category names and the
number of elements in each category.
summary(Location)

VA Hospital 37
Location is a 100-by-1 categorical array with three categories. County General

Hospital occurs in 39 elements, St. Mary s Medical Center in 24 elements, and VA
Hospital in 37 elements.
Use the summary function to print a summary of Gender.
summary(Gender)
Female 53
Male 47
Gender is a 100-by-1 categorical array with two categories. Female occurs in 53

elements and Male occurs in 47 elements.
Use logical operator == to access the age of only the female patients. Then plot a
histogram of this data.
figure()
histogram(Age(Gender=='Female'))
title('Age of Female Patients')
8-32
histogram(Age(Gender=='Female')) plots the age data for the 53 female patients.
Delete Data from a Particular Category
You can use logical operators to include or exclude data from particular categories.
Delete all patients observed at VA Hospital from the workspace variables, Age and
Location.
Age = Age(Location~='VA Hospital');
Location = Location(Location~='VA Hospital');
Now, Age is a 63-by-1 numeric array, and Location is a 63-by-1 categorical array.
List the categories of Location, as well as the number of elements in each category.
8-33
summary(Location)

VA Hospital 0
The patients observed at VA Hospital are deleted from Location, but VA Hospital is
still a category.
Use the removecats function to remove VA Hospital from the categories of Location.
Location = removecats(Location,'VA Hospital');
Verify that the category, VA Hospital, was removed.

categories(Location)

{'County General Hospital' }
{'St. Mary's Medical Center'}
Location is a 63-by-1 categorical array that has two categories.
Delete Element
You can delete elements by indexing. For example, you can remove the first element of
Location by selecting the rest of the elements with Location(2:end). However, an
easier way to delete elements is to use [].
Location(1) = [];
summary(Location)

Location is a 62-by-1 categorical array that has two categories. Deleting the first
element has no effect on other elements from the same category and does not delete the
category itself.
Check for Undefined Data
Remove the category County General Hospital from Location.

Location = removecats(Location,'County General Hospital');
8-34
Display the first eight elements of the categorical array, Location.
Location(1:8)
ans = 8x1 categorical array

St. Mary's Medical Center
<undefined>
<undefined>
<undefined>
After removing the category, County General Hospital, elements that previously
belonged to that category no longer belong to any category defined for Location.
Categorical arrays denote these elements as undefined.
Use the function isundefined to find observations that do not belong to any category.
undefinedIndex = isundefined(Location);
undefinedIndex is a 62-by-1 categorical array containing logical true (1) for all
undefined elements in Location.
Set Undefined Elements
Use the summary function to print the number of undefined elements in Location.
summary(Location)

<undefined> 38
The first element of Location belongs to the category, St. Mary's Medical Center.
Set the first element to be undefined so that it no longer belongs to any category.
Location(1) = '<undefined>';
summary(Location)

<undefined> 39
8-35
You can make selected elements undefined without removing a category or changing
the categories of other elements. Set elements to be undefined to indicate elements with
values that are unknown.
Preallocate Categorical Arrays with Undefined Elements
You can use undefined elements to preallocate the size of a categorical array for better
performance. Create a categorical array that has elements with known locations only.
definedIndex = ~isundefined(Location);
newLocation = Location(definedIndex);
summary(newLocation)
Expand the size of newLocation so that it is a 200-by-1 categorical array. Set the last
new element to be undefined. All of the other new elements also are set to be
undefined. The 23 original elements keep the values they had.
newLocation(200) = '<undefined>';
summary(newLocation)

<undefined> 177
newLocation has room for values you plan to store in the array later.
See Also
any | categorical | categories | histogram | isundefined | removecats |
summary
Related Examples
• “Plot Categorical Data” on page 8-12
• “Work with Protected Categorical Arrays” on page 8-38
8-36
See Also
More About
8-37
Work with Protected Categorical Arrays

This example shows how to work with a categorical array with protected categories.
When you create a categorical array with the categorical function, you have the
option of specifying whether or not the categories are protected. Ordinal categorical
arrays always have protected categories, but you also can create a nonordinal categorical
array that is protected using the 'Protected',true name-value pair argument.
When you assign values that are not in the array's list of categories, the array updates
automatically so that its list of categories includes the new values. Similarly, you can
combine (nonordinal) categorical arrays that have different categories. The categories in
the result include the categories from both arrays.
When you assign new values to a protected categorical array, the values must belong to
one of the existing categories. Similarly, you can only combine protected arrays that have
the same categories.
• If you want to combine two nonordinal categorical arrays that have protected
categories, they must have the same categories, but the order does not matter. The
resulting categorical array uses the category order from the first array.
• If you want to combine two ordinal categorical array (that always have protected
categories), they must have the same categories, including their order.
To add new categories to the array, you must use the function addcats.
Create Ordinal Categorical Array
Create a categorical array containing the sizes of 10 objects. Use the names small,
medium, and large for the values 'S', 'M', and 'L'.
A = categorical({'M';'L';'S';'S';'M';'L';'M';'L';'M';'S'},...
{'S','M','L'},{'small','medium','large'},'Ordinal',true)
A = 10x1 categorical array

medium
large
small
small
medium
large
medium
8-38
large
medium
small
A is a 10-by-1 categorical array.
Display the categories of A.

categories(A)

{'small' }
{'medium'}
{'large' }
Verify That Categories Are Protected
When you create an ordinal categorical array, the categories are always protected.
Use the isprotected function to verify that the categories of A are protected.
tf = isprotected(A)
tf = logical
1
The categories of A are protected.
Assign Value in New Category
If you try to assign a new value that does not belong to one of the existing categories,
then MATLAB® returns an error. For example, you cannot assign the value 'xlarge' to
the categorical array, as in the expression A(2) = 'xlarge', because xlarge is not a
category of A. Instead, MATLAB® returns the error:
Error using categorical/subsasgn (line 68)
Cannot add a new category 'xlarge' to this categorical array
because its categories are protected. Use ADDCATS to
add the new category.
8-39
To add a new category for xlarge, use the addcats function. Since A is ordinal you must
specify the order for the new category.
A = addcats(A,'xlarge','After','large');
Now, assign a value for 'xlarge', since it has an existing category.

A(2) = 'xlarge'
A = 10x1 categorical array

medium
xlarge
small
small
medium
large
medium
large
medium
small
A is now a 10-by-1 categorical array with four categories, such that small < medium <
large < xlarge.
Combine Two Ordinal Categorical Arrays
Create another ordinal categorical array, B, containing the sizes of five items.
B = categorical([2;1;1;2;2],1:2,{'xsmall','small'},'Ordinal',true)
B = 5x1 categorical array

small
xsmall
xsmall
small
small
B is a 5-by-1 categorical array with two categories such that xsmall < small.
To combine two ordinal categorical arrays (which always have protected categories), they
must have the same categories and the categories must be in the same order.
Add the category 'xsmall' to A before the category 'small'.
8-40
A = addcats(A,'xsmall','Before','small');
categories(A)

{'xsmall'}
{'small' }
{'medium'}
{'large' }
{'xlarge'}
Add the categories {'medium','large','xlarge'} to B after the category 'small'.
B = addcats(B,{'medium','large','xlarge'},'After','small');
categories(B)

{'xsmall'}
{'small' }
{'medium'}
{'large' }
{'xlarge'}
The categories of A and B are now the same including their order.
Vertically concatenate A and B.
C = [A;B]

medium
xlarge
small
small
medium
large
medium
large
medium
small
small
xsmall
8-41
xsmall
small
small
The values from B are appended to the values from A.
List the categories of C.
categories(C)

{'xsmall'}
{'small' }
{'medium'}
{'large' }
{'xlarge'}
C is a 16-by-1 ordinal categorical array with five categories, such that xsmall < small
< medium < large < xlarge.
See Also
addcats | categorical | categories | isordinal | isprotected | summary
Related Examples
More About
8-42
Advantages of Using Categorical Arrays
Advantages of Using Categorical Arrays

In this section...
“Natural Representation of Categorical Data” on page 8-43
“Mathematical Ordering for Character Vectors” on page 8-43
“Reduce Memory Requirements” on page 8-43
Natural Representation of Categorical Data

categorical is a data type to store data with values from a finite set of discrete
categories. One common alternative to using categorical arrays is to use character arrays
or cell arrays of character vectors. To compare values in character arrays and cell arrays
of character vectors, you must use strcmp which can be cumbersome. With categorical
arrays, you can use the logical operator eq (==) to compare elements in the same way
that you compare numeric arrays. The other common alternative to using categorical
arrays is to store categorical data using integers in numeric arrays. Using numeric
arrays loses all the useful descriptive information from the category names, and also
tends to suggest that the integer values have their usual numeric meaning, which, for
categorical data, they do not.
Mathematical Ordering for Character Vectors

Categorical arrays are convenient and memory efficient containers for nonnumeric data
with values from a finite set of discrete categories. They are especially useful when the
categories have a meaningful mathematical ordering, such as an array with entries from
the discrete set of categories {'small','medium','large'} where small < medium
< large.
An ordering other than alphabetical order is not possible with character arrays or cell
arrays of character vectors. Thus, inequality comparisons, such as greater and less than,
are not possible. With categorical arrays, you can use relational operations to test for
equality and perform element-wise comparisons that have a meaningful mathematical
ordering.
Reduce Memory Requirements

This example shows how to compare the memory required to store data as a cell array of
character vectors versus a categorical array. Categorical arrays have categories that are
8-43
defined as character vectors, which can be costly to store and manipulate in a cell array
of character vectors or char array. Categorical arrays store only one copy of each
category name, often reducing the amount of memory required to store the array.
Create a sample cell array of character vectors.

state = [repmat({'MA'},25,1);repmat({'NY'},25,1);...
repmat({'CA'},50,1);...
repmat({'MA'},25,1);repmat({'NY'},25,1)];
Display information about the variable state.
whos state
state 150x1 17400 cell
The variable state is a cell array of character vectors requiring 17,400 bytes of memory.
Convert state to a categorical array.
state = categorical(state);
Display the discrete categories in the variable state.
categories(state)

{'CA'}
{'MA'}
{'NY'}
state contains 150 elements, but only three distinct categories.
Display information about the variable state.
whos state
state 150x1 500 categorical
There is a significant reduction in the memory required to store the variable.
8-44
See Also
See Also
categorical | categories
Related Examples
More About
8-45
Ordinal Categorical Arrays
In this section...
“Order of Categories” on page 8-46
“How to Create Ordinal Categorical Arrays” on page 8-46
“Working with Ordinal Categorical Arrays” on page 8-48
Order of Categories
categorical is a data type to store data with values from a finite set of discrete
categories, which can have a natural order. You can specify and rearrange the order of
categories in all categorical arrays. However, you only can treat ordinal categorical
arrays as having a mathematical ordering to their categories. Use an ordinal categorical
array if you want to use the functions min, max, or relational operations, such as greater
than and less than.
The discrete set of pet categories {'dog' 'cat' 'bird'} has no meaningful
mathematical ordering. You are free to use any category order and the meaning of the
associated data does not change. For example, pets =
categorical({'bird','cat','dog','dog','cat'}) creates a categorical array
and the categories are listed in alphabetical order, {'bird' 'cat' 'dog'}. You can
choose to specify or change the order of the categories to {'dog' 'cat' 'bird'} and
the meaning of the data does not change.
ordinal categorical arrays contain categories that have a meaningful mathematical

ordering. For example, the discrete set of size categories {'small', 'medium',
'large'} has the mathematical ordering small < medium < large. The first
category listed is the smallest and the last category is the largest. The order of the
categories in an ordinal categorical array affects the result from relational comparisons
of ordinal categorical arrays.
How to Create Ordinal Categorical Arrays

This example shows how to create an ordinal categorical array using the categorical
function with the 'Ordinal',true name-value pair argument.
8-46
Ordinal Categorical Arrays
Ordinal Categorical Array from a Cell Array of Character Vectors
Create an ordinal categorical array, sizes, from a cell array of character vectors, A. Use
valueset, specified as a vector of unique values, to define the categories for sizes.
A = {'medium' 'large';'small' 'medium'; 'large' 'small'};

valueset = {'small', 'medium', 'large'};
sizes = categorical(A,valueset,'Ordinal',true)
sizes = 3x2 categorical array

medium large
small medium
large small
sizes is 3-by-2 ordinal categorical array with three categories such that small <
medium < large. The order of the values in valueset becomes the order of the
categories of sizes.
Ordinal Categorical Array from Integers
Create an equivalent categorical array from an array of integers. Use the values 1, 2, and
3 to define the categories small, medium, and large, respectively.
A2 = [2 3; 1 2; 3 1];
valueset = 1:3;
catnames = {'small','medium','large'};
sizes2 = categorical(A2,valueset,catnames,'Ordinal',true)
sizes2 = 3x2 categorical array

medium large
small medium
large small
Compare sizes and sizes2
isequal(sizes,sizes2)
ans = logical
1
8-47
sizes and sizes2 are equivalent categorical arrays with the same ordering of
categories.
Convert a Categorical Array from Nonordinal to Ordinal
Create a nonordinal categorical array from the cell array of character vectors, A.
sizes3 = categorical(A)
sizes3 = 3x2 categorical array

medium large
small medium
large small
Determine if the categorical array is ordinal.
isordinal(sizes3)
ans = logical
0
sizes3 is a nonordinal categorical array with three categories,

{'large','medium','small'}. The categories of sizes3 are the sorted unique values
from A. You must use the input argument, valueset, to specify a different category
order.
Convert sizes3 to an ordinal categorical array, such that small < medium < large.
sizes3 = categorical(sizes3,{'small','medium','large'},'Ordinal',true);
sizes3 is now a 3-by-2 ordinal categorical array equivalent to sizes and sizes2.
Working with Ordinal Categorical Arrays

In order to combine or compare two categorical arrays, the sets of categories for both
input arrays must be identical, including their order. Furthermore, ordinal categorical
arrays are always protected. Therefore, when you assign values to an ordinal categorical
array, the values must belong to one of the existing categories. For more information see
“Work with Protected Categorical Arrays” on page 8-38.
8-48
See Also
See Also
categorical | categories | isequal | isordinal
Related Examples
More About
8-49
Core Functions Supporting Categorical Arrays

Many functions in MATLAB operate on categorical arrays in much the same way that
they operate on other arrays. A few of these functions might exhibit special behavior
when operating on a categorical array. If multiple input arguments are ordinal
categorical arrays, the function often requires that they have the same set of categories,
including order. Furthermore, a few functions, such as max and gt, require that the
input categorical arrays are ordinal.
The following table lists notable MATLAB functions that operate on categorical arrays in
addition to other arrays.
size isequal intersect plot double
length isequaln ismember plot3 single
ndims setdiff scatter int8
numel eq setxor scatter3 int16
ne unique bar int32
isrow lt union barh int64
iscolumn le histogram uint8
ge times uint16
cat gt pie uint32
horzcat sort rosestem uint64
vertcat min sortrows stairs char
max issorted area string
median mesh cellstr
mode permute surf
reshape surface
transpose
ctranspose semilogx
semilogy
fill
fill3
line
text
8-50
9
Tables

• “Add and Delete Table Rows” on page 9-14
• “Add and Delete Table Variables” on page 9-18
• “Clean Messy and Missing Data in Tables” on page 9-22
• “Modify Units, Descriptions and Table Variable Names” on page 9-28
• “Calculations on Tables” on page 9-41
• “Split Data into Groups and Calculate Statistics” on page 9-45
• “Split Table Data Variables and Apply Functions” on page 9-49
• “Advantages of Using Tables” on page 9-54
• “Grouping Variables To Split Data” on page 9-61
• “Changes to DimensionNames Property in R2016b” on page 9-65
9 Tables
Create and Work with Tables

This example shows how to create a table from workspace variables, work with table
data, and write tables to files for later use. table is a data type for collecting
heterogeneous data and metadata properties such as variable names, row names,
descriptions, and variable units, in a single container.
Tables are suitable for column-oriented or tabular data that are often stored as columns
in a text file or in a spreadsheet. Each variable in a table can have a different data type,
but must have the same number of rows. However, variables in a table are not restricted
to column vectors. For example, a table variable can contain a matrix with multiple
columns as long as it has the same number of rows as the other table variables. A typical
use for a table is to store experimental data, where rows represent different observations
and columns represent different measured variables.
Tables are convenient containers for collecting and organizing related data variables and
for viewing and summarizing data. For example, you can extract variables to perform
calculations and conveniently add the results as new table variables. When you finish
your calculations, write the table to a file to save your results.
Create and View Table
Create a table from workspace variables and view it. Alternatively, use the Import Tool
or the readtable function to create a table from a spreadsheet or a text file. When you
import data from a file using these functions, each column becomes a table variable.
Load sample data for 100 patients from the patients MAT-file to workspace variables.
load patients
whos

9-2
Populate a table with column-oriented variables that contain patient data. You can
access and assign table variables by name. When you assign a table variable from a
workspace variable, you can assign the table variable a different name.
Create a table and populate it with the Gender, Smoker, Height, and Weight
workspace variables. Display the first five rows.
T = table(Gender,Smoker,Height,Weight);
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x4 table
Gender Smoker Height Weight
________ ______ ______ ______
'Male' true 71 176

'Male' false 69 163
'Female' false 64 131
As an alternative, use the readtable function to read the patient data from a comma-
delimited file. readtable reads all the columns that are in a file.
Create a table by reading all columns from the file, patients.dat.
T2 = readtable('patients.dat');
T2(1:5,:)
ans=5x10 table
LastName Gender Age Location Height Weight
__________ ________ ___ ___________________________ ______ ______
'Smith' 'Male' 38 'County General Hospital' 71 176

'Johnson' 'Male' 43 'VA Hospital' 69 163
'Williams' 'Female' 38 'St. Mary's Medical Center' 64 131
'Jones' 'Female' 40 'VA Hospital' 67 133
'Brown' 'Female' 49 'County General Hospital' 64 119
You can assign more column-oriented table variables using dot notation, T.varname,
where T is the table and varname is the desired variable name. Create identifiers that
are random numbers. Then assign them to a table variable, and name the table variable
9-3
9 Tables
ID. All the variables you assign to a table must have the same number of rows. Display
the first five rows of T.
T.ID = randi(1e4,100,1);
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 table
Gender Smoker Height Weight ID
________ ______ ______ ______ ____
'Male' true 71 176 8148

'Male' false 69 163 9058
'Female' false 64 131 1270
All the variables you assign to a table must have the same number of rows.
by creating a table summary using the summary function.
summary(T)
Variables:
Gender: 100x1 cell array of character vectors
Smoker: 100x1 logical
Values:
True 34
False 66
Values:
Min 60
Median 67
Max 72
9-4
Values:
Min 111
Median 142.5
Max 202
ID: 100x1 double
Values:
Min 120
Median 5485.5
Max 9706
Return the size of the table.

size(T)
ans =
100 5
T contains 100 rows and 5 variables.
Create a new, smaller table containing the first five rows of T and display it. You can use
numeric indexing within parentheses to specify rows and variables. This method is
similar to indexing into numeric arrays to create subarrays. Tnew is a 5-by-5 table.
Tnew = T(1:5,:)
Tnew=5x5 table
________ ______ ______ ______ ____
'Male' true 71 176 8148

'Male' false 69 163 9058
Create a smaller table containing all rows of Tnew and the variables from the second to
the last. Use the end keyword to indicate the last variable or the last row of a table. Tnew
is a 5-by-4 table.
9-5
9 Tables
Tnew = Tnew(:,2:end)
Tnew=5x4 table
Smoker Height Weight ID
______ ______ ______ ____
true 71 176 8148

false 69 163 9058
false 64 131 1270
false 67 133 9134
false 64 119 6324
Access Data by Row and Variable Names
Add row names to T and index into the table using row and variable names instead of
numeric indices. Add row names by assigning the LastName workspace variable to the
RowNames property of T.
T.Properties.RowNames = LastName;
Display the first five rows of T with row names.
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 table
________ ______ ______ ______ ____
Smith 'Male' true 71 176 8148

Johnson 'Male' false 69 163 9058
Williams 'Female' false 64 131 1270
Jones 'Female' false 67 133 9134
Brown 'Female' false 64 119 6324
Return the size of T. The size does not change because row and variable names are not
included when calculating the size of a table.
size(T)
ans =
100 5
9-6
Select all the data for the patients with the last names 'Smith' and 'Johnson'. In this
case, it is simpler to use the row names than to use numeric indices. Tnew is a 2-by-5
table.
Tnew = T({'Smith','Johnson'},:)
Tnew=2x5 table
______ ______ ______ ______ ____
Smith 'Male' true 71 176 8148

Johnson 'Male' false 69 163 9058
Select the height and weight of the patient named 'Johnson' by indexing on variable
names. Tnew is a 1-by-2 table.
Tnew = T('Johnson',{'Height','Weight'})
Tnew=1x2 table
Height Weight
______ ______
Johnson 69 163
You can access table variables either with dot syntax, as in T.Height, or by named
indexing, as in T(:,'Height').
Calculate and Add Result as Table Variable
You can access the contents of table variables, and then perform calculations on them
using MATLAB® functions. Calculate body-mass-index (BMI) based on data in the
existing table variables and add it as a new variable. Plot the relationship of BMI to a
patient's status as a smoker or a nonsmoker. Add blood-pressure readings to the table,
and plot the relationship of blood pressure to BMI.
Calculate BMI using the table variables, Weight and Height. You can extract Weight
and Height for the calculation while conveniently keeping Weight, Height, and BMI in
the table with the rest of the patient data. Display the first five rows of T.
T.BMI = (T.Weight*0.453592)./(T.Height*0.0254).^2;
T(1:5,:)
9-7
9 Tables
ans=5x6 table
Gender Smoker Height Weight ID BMI
________ ______ ______ ______ ____ ______
Smith 'Male' true 71 176 8148 24.547

Johnson 'Male' false 69 163 9058 24.071
Williams 'Female' false 64 131 1270 22.486
Jones 'Female' false 67 133 9134 20.831
Brown 'Female' false 64 119 6324 20.426
Populate the variable units and variable descriptions properties for BMI. You can add
metadata to any table variable to describe further the data contained in the variable.
T.Properties.VariableUnits{'BMI'} = 'kg/m^2';
T.Properties.VariableDescriptions{'BMI'} = 'Body Mass Index';
Create a histogram to explore whether there is a relationship between smoking and

body-mass-index in this group of patients. You can index into BMI with the logical values
from the Smoker table variable, because each row contains BMI and Smoker values for
the same patient.
tf = (T.Smoker == false);
h1 = histogram(T.BMI(tf),'BinMethod','integers');
hold on
tf = (T.Smoker == true);
h2 = histogram(T.BMI(tf),'BinMethod','integers');
xlabel('BMI (kg/m^2)');
ylabel('Number of Patients');
legend('Nonsmokers','Smokers');
title('BMI Distributions for Smokers and Nonsmokers');
hold off
9-8
Add blood pressure readings for the patients from the workspace variables Systolic
and Diastolic. Each row contains Systolic, Diastolic, and BMI values for the same
patient.
T.Systolic = Systolic;
T.Diastolic = Diastolic;
Create a histogram to show whether there is a relationship between high values of

Diastolic and BMI.
tf = (T.BMI <= 25);
h1 = histogram(T.Diastolic(tf),'BinMethod','integers');
hold on
tf = (T.BMI > 25);
9-9
9 Tables
h2 = histogram(T.Diastolic(tf),'BinMethod','integers');
xlabel('Diastolic Reading (mm Hg)');
ylabel('Number of Patients');
legend('BMI <= 25','BMI > 25');
title('Diastolic Readings for Low and High BMI');
hold off
Reorder Table Variables and Rows for Output
To prepare the table for output, reorder the table rows by name, and table variables by
position or name. Display the final arrangement of the table.
Sort the table by row names so that patients are listed in alphabetical order.
9-10
T = sortrows(T,'RowNames');
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x8 table
Gender Smoker Height Weight ID BMI Systolic
________ ______ ______ ______ ____ ______ ________
Adams 'Female' false 66 137 8235 22.112 127

Alexander 'Male' true 69 171 1300 25.252 128
Allen 'Female' false 63 143 7432 25.331 113
Anderson 'Female' false 68 128 1577 19.462 114
Bailey 'Female' false 68 130 2239 19.766 113
Create a BloodPressure variable to hold blood pressure readings in a 100-by-2 table

variable.
T.BloodPressure = [T.Systolic T.Diastolic];
Delete Systolic and Diastolic from the table since they are redundant.
T.Systolic = [];
T.Diastolic = [];
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x7 table
Gender Smoker Height Weight ID BMI BloodPress
________ ______ ______ ______ ____ ______ __________
Adams 'Female' false 66 137 8235 22.112 127 83

Alexander 'Male' true 69 171 1300 25.252 128 99
Allen 'Female' false 63 143 7432 25.331 113 80
Anderson 'Female' false 68 128 1577 19.462 114 77
Bailey 'Female' false 68 130 2239 19.766 113 81
To put ID as the first column, reorder the table variables by position.

T = T(:,[5 1:4 6 7]);
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x7 table
ID Gender Smoker Height Weight BMI BloodPress
9-11
9 Tables
____ ________ ______ ______ ______ ______ __________
Adams 8235 'Female' false 66 137 22.112 127 83

Alexander 1300 'Male' true 69 171 25.252 128 99
Allen 7432 'Female' false 63 143 25.331 113 80
Anderson 1577 'Female' false 68 128 19.462 114 77
Bailey 2239 'Female' false 68 130 19.766 113 81
You also can reorder table variables by name. To reorder the table variables so that
Gender is last:
1 Find 'Gender' in the VariableNames property of the table.

2 Move 'Gender' to the end of a cell array of variable names.
3 Use the cell array of names to reorder the table variables.
varnames = T.Properties.VariableNames;
others = ~strcmp('Gender',varnames);
varnames = [varnames(others) 'Gender'];
T = T(:,varnames);
Display the first five rows of the reordered table.

T(1:5,:)
ans=5x7 table
ID Smoker Height Weight BMI BloodPressure Gend
____ ______ ______ ______ ______ _____________ _____
Adams 8235 false 66 137 22.112 127 83 'Fema

Alexander 1300 true 69 171 25.252 128 99 'Male
Allen 7432 false 63 143 25.331 113 80 'Fema
Anderson 1577 false 68 128 19.462 114 77 'Fema
Bailey 2239 false 68 130 19.766 113 81 'Fema
Write Table to File
You can write the entire table to a file, or create a subtable to write a selected portion of
the original table to a separate file.
Write T to a file with the writetable function.
writetable(T,'allPatientsBMI.txt');
9-12
See Also
You can use the readtable function to read the data in allPatientsBMI.txt into a
new table.
Create a subtable and write the subtable to a separate file. Delete the rows that contain
data on patients who are smokers. Then remove the Smoker variable. nonsmokers
contains data only for the patients who are not smokers.
nonsmokers = T;
toDelete = (nonsmokers.Smoker == true);
nonsmokers(toDelete,:) = [];
nonsmokers.Smoker = [];
Write nonsmokers to a file.
writetable(nonsmokers,'nonsmokersBMI.txt');
See Also
Import Tool | array2table | cell2table | readtable | sortrows |
struct2table | summary | table | writetable
Related Examples
More About
9-13
9 Tables
Add and Delete Table Rows

This example shows how to add and delete rows in a table. You can also edit tables using
the Variables Editor.
Load Sample Data
Load the sample patients data and create a table, T.
load patients
T = table(LastName,Gender,Age,Height,Weight,Smoker,Systolic,Diastolic);
size(T)
ans =
100 8
The table, T, has 100 rows and eight variables (columns).
Add Rows by Concatenation
Read data on more patients from a comma-delimited file, morePatients.csv, into a

table, T2. Then, append the rows from T2 to the end of the table, T.
T2 = readtable('morePatients.csv');
Tnew = [T;T2];
size(Tnew)
ans =
104 8
The table Tnew has 104 rows. In order to vertically concatenate two tables, both tables
must have the same number of variables, with the same variable names. If the variable
names are different, you can directly assign new rows in a table to rows from another
table. For example, T(end+1:end+4,:) = T2.
Add Rows from Cell Array
To append new rows stored in a cell array, vertically concatenate the cell array onto the
end of the table. You can concatenate directly from a cell array when it has the right
9-14
Add and Delete Table Rows
number of columns and the contents of its cells can be concatenated onto the
corresponding table variables.
cellPatients = {'Edwards','Male',42,70,158,0,116,83;
'Falk','Female',28,62,125,1,120,71};
Tnew = [Tnew;cellPatients];
size(Tnew)
ans =
106 8
You also can convert a cell array to a table using the cell2table function.
Add Rows from Structure
You also can append new rows stored in a structure. Convert the structure to a table, and
then concatenate the tables.
structPatients(1,1).LastName = 'George';
structPatients(1,1).Gender = 'Male';
structPatients(1,1).Age = 45;
structPatients(1,1).Height = 76;
structPatients(1,1).Weight = 182;
structPatients(1,1).Smoker = 1;
structPatients(1,1).Systolic = 132;
structPatients(1,1).Diastolic = 85;
structPatients(2,1).LastName = 'Hadley';
structPatients(2,1).Gender = 'Female';
structPatients(2,1).Age = 29;
structPatients(2,1).Height = 58;
structPatients(2,1).Weight = 120;
structPatients(2,1).Smoker = 0;
structPatients(2,1).Systolic = 112;
structPatients(2,1).Diastolic = 70;
Tnew = [Tnew;struct2table(structPatients)];
size(Tnew)
ans =
108 8
9-15
9 Tables
Omit Duplicate Rows
To omit any rows in a table that are duplicated, use the unique function.
Tnew = unique(Tnew);
size(Tnew)
ans =
106 8
unique deleted two duplicate rows.
Delete Rows by Row Number
Delete rows 18, 20, and 21 from the table.
Tnew([18,20,21],:) = [];
size(Tnew)
ans =
103 8
The table contains information on 103 patients now.
Delete Rows by Row Name
First, specify the variable of identifiers, LastName, as row names. Then, delete the
variable, LastName, from Tnew. Finally, use the row name to index and delete rows.
Tnew.Properties.RowNames = Tnew.LastName;
Tnew.LastName = [];
Tnew('Smith',:) = [];
size(Tnew)
ans =
102 7
The table now has one less row and one less variable.
9-16
See Also
Search for Rows to Delete
You also can search for observations in the table. For example, delete rows for any
patients under the age of 30.
toDelete = Tnew.Age < 30;
Tnew(toDelete,:) = [];
size(Tnew)
ans =
85 7
The table now has 17 fewer rows.
See Also
array2table | cell2table | readtable | struct2table | table
Related Examples
9-17
9 Tables
Add and Delete Table Variables

This example shows how to add and delete column-oriented variables in a table. You also
can edit tables using the Variables Editor.
Load Sample Data
Load the sample patients data and create two tables. Create one table, T, with
information collected from a patient questionnaire and create another table, T1, with
data measured from the patient.
load patients
T = table(Age,Gender,Smoker);
T1 = table(Height,Weight,Systolic,Diastolic);
Display the first five rows of each table.

T(1:5,:)
ans=5x3 table
Age Gender Smoker
___ ________ ______
38 'Male' true
43 'Male' false
38 'Female' false
40 'Female' false
49 'Female' false
T1(1:5,:)
ans=5x4 table
Height Weight Systolic Diastolic
______ ______ ________ _________
71 176 124 93
69 163 109 77
64 131 125 83
67 133 117 75
64 119 122 80
The table T has 100 rows and 3 variables.
9-18
Add and Delete Table Variables
The table T1 has 100 rows and 4 variables.
Add Variables by Concatenating Tables
Add variables to the table, T, by horizontally concatenating it with T1.
T = [T T1];
Display the first five rows of the table, T.
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x7 table
Age Gender Smoker Height Weight Systolic Diastolic
___ ________ ______ ______ ______ ________ _________
38 'Male' true 71 176 124 93

43 'Male' false 69 163 109 77
38 'Female' false 64 131 125 83
40 'Female' false 67 133 117 75
49 'Female' false 64 119 122 80
The table, T, now has 7 variables and 100 rows.
If the tables that you are horizontally concatenating have row names, horzcat
concatenates the tables by matching the row names. Therefore, the tables must use the
same row names, but the row order does not matter.
Add and Delete Variables by Name
First create a new variable for blood pressure as a horizontal concatenation of the two
variables Systolic and Diastolic. Then, delete the variables Systolic and
Diastolic by name using dot indexing.
T.BloodPressure = [T.Systolic T.Diastolic];
T.Systolic = [];
T.Diastolic = [];
Alternatively, you can also use parentheses with named indexing to delete the variables
Systolic and Diastolic at once, T(:,{'Systolic','Diastolic'}) = [];.
9-19
9 Tables
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x6 table
Age Gender Smoker Height Weight BloodPressure
___ ________ ______ ______ ______ _____________
38 'Male' true 71 176 124 93

43 'Male' false 69 163 109 77
38 'Female' false 64 131 125 83
40 'Female' false 67 133 117 75
49 'Female' false 64 119 122 80
T now has 6 variables and 100 rows.
Add a new variable, BMI, in the table, T, to contain the body mass index for each patient.
BMI is a function of height and weight.
T.BMI = (T.Weight*0.453592)./(T.Height*0.0254).^2;
The operators ./ and .^ in the calculation of BMI indicate element-wise division and
exponentiation, respectively.
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x7 table
Age Gender Smoker Height Weight BloodPressure BMI
___ ________ ______ ______ ______ _____________ ______
38 'Male' true 71 176 124 93 24.547

43 'Male' false 69 163 109 77 24.071
38 'Female' false 64 131 125 83 22.486
40 'Female' false 67 133 117 75 20.831
49 'Female' false 64 119 122 80 20.426
T has 100 rows and 7 variables.
Delete Variables by Number
Delete the third variable, Smoker, and the sixth variable, BloodPressure, from the
table.
9-20
See Also
T(:,[3,6]) = [];
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 table
Age Gender Height Weight BMI
___ ________ ______ ______ ______
38 'Male' 71 176 24.547

43 'Male' 69 163 24.071
38 'Female' 64 131 22.486
40 'Female' 67 133 20.831
49 'Female' 64 119 20.426
See Also
array2table | cell2table | readtable | struct2table | table
Related Examples
9-21
9 Tables
Clean Messy and Missing Data in Tables

This example shows how to find, clean, and delete table rows with missing data.
Load Sample Data
Load sample data from a comma-separated text file, messy.csv. The file contains many
different missing data indicators:
• Empty character vector ('')

• period (.)
• NA
• NaN
• -99
To specify the character vectors to treat as empty values, use the 'TreatAsEmpty'
name-value pair argument with the readtable function.
T = readtable('messy.csv','TreatAsEmpty',{'.','NA'})
T=21x5 table
A B C D E
______ ____ _____ ____ ____
'afe1' 3 'yes' 3 3
'egh3' NaN 'no' 7 7
'wth4' 3 'yes' 3 3
'atn2' 23 'no' 23 23
'arg1' 5 'yes' 5 5
'jre3' 34.6 'yes' 34.6 34.6
'wen9' 234 'yes' 234 234
'ple2' 2 'no' 2 2
'dbo8' 5 'no' 5 5
'oii4' 5 'yes' 5 5
'wnk3' 245 'yes' 245 245
'abk6' 563 '' 563 563
'pnj5' 463 'no' 463 463
'wnn3' 6 'no' 6 6
'oks9' 23 'yes' 23 23
'wba3' NaN 'yes' NaN 14
9-22
T is a table with 21 rows and five variables. 'TreatAsEmpty' only applies to numeric
columns in the file and cannot handle numeric literals, such as '-99'.
Summarize Table
by creating a table summary using the summary function.
summary(T)
Variables:
A: 21x1 cell array of character vectors
B: 21x1 double
Values:
Min -99
Median 14
Max 563
NumMissing 3
C: 21x1 cell array of character vectors
D: 21x1 double
Values:
Min -99
Median 7
Max 563
NumMissing 2
E: 21x1 double
Values:
Min -99
Median 14
Max 563
When you import data from a file, the default is for readtable to read any variables
with nonnumeric elements as a cell array of character vectors.
9-23
9 Tables
Find Rows with Missing Values
Display the subset of rows from the table, T, that have at least one missing value.
TF = ismissing(T,{'' '.' 'NA' NaN -99});
T(any(TF,2),:)
ans=5x5 table
A B C D E
______ ___ _____ ___ ___
'egh3' NaN 'no' 7 7

'abk6' 563 '' 563 563
'poj2' -99 'yes' -99 -99
'gry5' NaN 'yes' NaN 21
readtable replaced '.' and 'NA' with NaN in the numeric variables, B, D, and E.
Replace Missing Value Indicators
Clean the data so that the missing values indicated by code -99 have the standard
MATLAB® numeric missing value indicator, NaN.
T = standardizeMissing(T,-99)
T=21x5 table
A B C D E
______ ____ _____ ____ ____
'afe1' 3 'yes' 3 3
'egh3' NaN 'no' 7 7
'wth4' 3 'yes' 3 3
'atn2' 23 'no' 23 23
'arg1' 5 'yes' 5 5
'jre3' 34.6 'yes' 34.6 34.6
'wen9' 234 'yes' 234 234
'ple2' 2 'no' 2 2
'dbo8' 5 'no' 5 5
'oii4' 5 'yes' 5 5
'wnk3' 245 'yes' 245 245
'abk6' 563 '' 563 563
'pnj5' 463 'no' 463 463
'wnn3' 6 'no' 6 6
9-24
'oks9' 23 'yes' 23 23
standardizeMissing replaces three instances of -99 with NaN.
Create a new table, T2, and replace missing values with values from previous rows of the
table. fillmissing provides a number of ways to fill in missing values.
T2 = fillmissing(T,'previous')
T2=21x5 table
A B C D E
______ ____ _____ ____ ____
'afe1' 3 'yes' 3 3
'egh3' 3 'no' 7 7
'wth4' 3 'yes' 3 3
'atn2' 23 'no' 23 23
'arg1' 5 'yes' 5 5
'jre3' 34.6 'yes' 34.6 34.6
'wen9' 234 'yes' 234 234
'ple2' 2 'no' 2 2
'dbo8' 5 'no' 5 5
'oii4' 5 'yes' 5 5
'wnk3' 245 'yes' 245 245
'abk6' 563 'yes' 563 563
'pnj5' 463 'no' 463 463
'wnn3' 6 'no' 6 6
'oks9' 23 'yes' 23 23
'wba3' 23 'yes' 23 14
Remove Rows with Missing Values
Create a new table, T3, that contains only the rows from T without missing values.
T3 = rmmissing(T)
T3=16x5 table
A B C D E
______ ____ _____ ____ ____
'afe1' 3 'yes' 3 3
'wth4' 3 'yes' 3 3
9-25
9 Tables
'atn2' 23 'no' 23 23
'arg1' 5 'yes' 5 5
'jre3' 34.6 'yes' 34.6 34.6
'wen9' 234 'yes' 234 234
'ple2' 2 'no' 2 2
'dbo8' 5 'no' 5 5
'oii4' 5 'yes' 5 5
'wnk3' 245 'yes' 245 245
'pnj5' 463 'no' 463 463
'wnn3' 6 'no' 6 6
'oks9' 23 'yes' 23 23
'pkn4' 2 'no' 2 2
'adw3' 22 'no' 22 22
'bas8' 23 'no' 23 23
T3 contains 16 rows and five variables.
Organize Data
Sort the rows of T3 in descending order by C, and then sort in ascending order by A.
T3 = sortrows(T2,{'C','A'},{'descend','ascend'})
T3=21x5 table
A B C D E
______ ____ _____ ____ ____
'abk6' 563 'yes' 563 563

'afe1' 3 'yes' 3 3
'arg1' 5 'yes' 5 5
'gry5' 23 'yes' 23 21
'jre3' 34.6 'yes' 34.6 34.6
'oii4' 5 'yes' 5 5
'oks9' 23 'yes' 23 23
'poj2' 22 'yes' 22 22
'wba3' 23 'yes' 23 14
'wen9' 234 'yes' 234 234
'wnk3' 245 'yes' 245 245
'wth4' 3 'yes' 3 3
'adw3' 22 'no' 22 22
'atn2' 23 'no' 23 23
'bas8' 23 'no' 23 23
'dbo8' 5 'no' 5 5
9-26
See Also
In C, the rows are grouped first by 'yes', followed by 'no'. Then in A, the rows are
listed alphabetically.
Reorder the table so that A and C are next to each other.
T3 = T3(:,{'A','C','B','D','E'})
T3=21x5 table
A C B D E
______ _____ ____ ____ ____
'abk6' 'yes' 563 563 563

'afe1' 'yes' 3 3 3
'arg1' 'yes' 5 5 5
'gry5' 'yes' 23 23 21
'jre3' 'yes' 34.6 34.6 34.6
'oii4' 'yes' 5 5 5
'oks9' 'yes' 23 23 23
'poj2' 'yes' 22 22 22
'wba3' 'yes' 23 23 14
'wen9' 'yes' 234 234 234
'wnk3' 'yes' 245 245 245
'wth4' 'yes' 3 3 3
'adw3' 'no' 22 22 22
'atn2' 'no' 23 23 23
'bas8' 'no' 23 23 23
'dbo8' 'no' 5 5 5
See Also
fillmissing | ismissing | readtable | rmmissing | sortrows |
standardizeMissing | summary
Related Examples
• “Missing Data in MATLAB”
9-27
9 Tables
Modify Units, Descriptions and Table Variable Names

This example shows how to access and modify table properties for variable units,
descriptions and names. You also can edit these property values using the Variables
Editor.
Load Sample Data
Load the sample patients data and create a table.
load patients
BloodPressure = [Systolic Diastolic];
T = table(Gender,Age,Height,Weight,Smoker,BloodPressure);
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x6 table null

Gender Age Height Weight Smoker BloodPressure
________ ___ ______ ______ ______ _____________
'Male' 38 71 176 true 124 93

'Male' 43 69 163 false 109 77
'Female' 38 64 131 false 125 83
'Female' 40 67 133 false 117 75
'Female' 49 64 119 false 122 80
Add Variable Units
Specify units for each variable in the table by modifying the table property,
VariableUnits. Specify the variable units as a cell array of character vectors.
T.Properties.VariableUnits = {'' 'Yrs' 'In' 'Lbs' '' ''};
An individual empty character vector within the cell array indicates that the
corresponding variable does not have units.
9-28
Modify Units, Descriptions and Table Variable Names
Add a Variable Description for a Single Variable
Add a variable description for the variable, BloodPressure. Assign a single character
vector to the element of the cell array containing the description for BloodPressure.
T.Properties.VariableDescriptions{'BloodPressure'} = 'Systolic/Diastolic';
You can use the variable name, 'BloodPressure', or the numeric index of the variable,
6, to index into the cell array of character vectors containing the variable descriptions.
Summarize the Table
summary(T)
Variables:
Age: 100x1 double
Units: Yrs
Values:
Min 25
Median 39
Max 50
Units: In
Values:
Min 60
Median 67
Max 72
Units: Lbs
Values:
9-29
9 Tables
Min 111
Median 142.5
Max 202
Values:
True 34
False 66
BloodPressure: 100x2 double
Description: Systolic/Diastolic
Values:
BloodPressure_1 BloodPressure_2
_______________ _______________
Min 109 68
Median 122 81.5
Max 138 99
The BloodPressure variable has a description and the Age, Height, Weight, and
BloodPressure variables have units.
Change a Variable Name
Change the variable name for the first variable from Gender to Sex.
T.Properties.VariableNames{'Gender'} = 'Sex';

T(1:5,:)
ans=5x6 table null

Sex Age Height Weight Smoker BloodPressure
________ ___ ______ ______ ______ _____________
'Male' 38 71 176 true 124 93

'Male' 43 69 163 false 109 77
'Female' 38 64 131 false 125 83
'Female' 40 67 133 false 117 75
'Female' 49 64 119 false 122 80
9-30
See Also
In addition to properties for variable units, descriptions and names, there are table
properties for row and dimension names, a table description, and user data.
See Also
array2table | cell2table | readtable | struct2table | summary | table
Related Examples
9-31
9 Tables
Access Data in a Table

In this section...
“Ways to Index into a Table” on page 9-32
“Create Table from Subset of Larger Table” on page 9-34
“Create Array from the Contents of Table” on page 9-37
Ways to Index into a Table

A table is a container for storing column-oriented variables that have the same number
of rows. Parentheses allow you to select a subset of the data in a table and preserve the
table container. Curly braces and dot indexing allow you to extract data from a table.
If you use curly braces, the resulting array is the horizontal concatenation of the
specified table variables containing only the specified rows. The data types of all the
specified variables must be compatible for concatenation. You can then perform
calculations using MATLAB functions.
Dot indexing extracts data from one table variable. The result is an array of the same
data type as extracted variable. You can follow the dot indexing with parentheses to
specify a subset of rows to extract from a variable.
T.Variables horizontally concatenates all table variables into an array. T.Variables

is equivalent to T{:,:}.
To subscript into a table and select variables of a specified type, use the vartype
function.
Summary of Table Indexing Methods
Consider a table, T.
Type of Result Syntax Rows Variables
Indexing
Parentheses table T(rows,var One or more rows, One or more variables,
s) specified by rows specified by vars
Curly Braces extracte T{rows,var One or more rows, One or more variables,
d data s} specified by rows specified by vars
9-32
Type of Result Syntax Rows Variables

Indexing
Dot Indexing extracte T.var All rows One variable, specified
d data by var (a name) or by
T. varindex (a number)
(varindex)
Dot Indexing extracte T.var(rows One or more rows, One variable, specified
d data ) specified by rows by var (a name)
Variables extracte T.Variable All rows All variables when they
Property d data s can be horizontally
concatenated into an
array
Subscripting table S = One or more rows, One or more variables
by Variable vartype(ty specified by rows of the specified type
Type pe); (for example,
'numeric')
T(rows,S)
Subscripting extracte S = One or more rows, One or more variables
by Variable d data vartype(ty specified by rows of the specified type
Type pe); (for example,
'numeric')
T{rows,S}
How to Specify Rows to Access
When indexing into a table with parentheses, curly braces, or dot indexing, you can
specify rows as a colon, numeric indices, or logical expressions. Furthermore, you can
index by name using a single row name or a cell array of row names.
A logical expression can contain curly braces or dot indexing to extract data from which
you can define the subset of rows. For example, rows = T.Var2>0 returns a logical
array with logical true (1) for rows where the value in the variable Var2 is greater than
zero.
How to Specify Variables to Access
When indexing into a table with parentheses or curly braces, you can specify vars as a
colon, numeric indices, logical expressions, a single variable name, a cell array of variable
names, or as the output of the vartype function..
9-33
9 Tables
When using dot indexing, you must specify a single variable to access. For a single
variable name, use T.var. For a single variable index, specified as a positive integer, use
T.(varindex).
Create Table from Subset of Larger Table

This example shows how to create a table from a subset of a larger table.
Load Sample Data
Load the sample patients data and create a table. Use the unique identifiers in
LastName as row names.
load patients
patients = table(Age,Gender,Height,Weight,Smoker,...
The table, patients, contains 100 rows and 5 variables.
summary(patients)
Variables:
Age: 100x1 double
Values:
Min 25
Median 39
Max 50
Values:
Min 60
Median 67
9-34
Max 72
Values:
Min 111
Median 142.5
Max 202
Values:
True 34
False 66
Index Using Numeric Indices
Create a subtable containing the first five rows and all the variables from the table,
patients. Use numeric indexing within the parentheses to specify the desired rows and
variables. This is similar to indexing with numeric arrays.
T1 = patients(1:5,:)
T1=5x5 table
Age Gender Height Weight Smoker
___ ________ ______ ______ ______
Smith 38 'Male' 71 176 true

Johnson 43 'Male' 69 163 false
Williams 38 'Female' 64 131 false
Jones 40 'Female' 67 133 false
Brown 49 'Female' 64 119 false
T1 is a 5-by-5 table. In addition to numeric indices, you can use row or variable names
inside the parentheses. In this case, using row indices and a colon is more compact than
using row or variable names.
Index Using Names
Select all the data for the patients with the last names 'Adams' and 'Brown'. In this
case, it is simpler to use the row names than to use the numeric index.
9-35
9 Tables
T2 = patients({'Adams','Brown'},:)
T2=2x5 table
Age Gender Height Weight Smoker
___ ________ ______ ______ ______
Adams 48 'Female' 66 137 false

Brown 49 'Female' 64 119 false
Index Using a Logical Expression
Create a new table, T3, containing the gender, height, and weight of the patients under
the age of 30. Select only the rows where the value in the variable, Age, is less than 30.
Use dot notation to extract data from a table variable and a logical expression to define
the subset of rows based on that extracted data.
rows = patients.Age<30;
vars = {'Gender','Height','Weight'};
rows is a 100-by-1 logical array containing logical true (1) for rows where the value in
the variable, Age, is less than 30.
Use parentheses to return a table containing the desired subset of the data.
T3 = patients(rows,vars)
T3=15x3 table
Gender Height Weight
________ ______ ______
Moore 'Male' 68 183

Jackson 'Male' 71 174
Garcia 'Female' 69 131
Walker 'Female' 65 123
Hall 'Male' 70 189
Young 'Female' 63 114
Hill 'Female' 64 138
Rivera 'Female' 63 130
Cooper 'Female' 65 127
Cox 'Female' 66 111
Howard 'Female' 68 134
9-36
James 'Male' 66 186

Jenkins 'Male' 69 189
Perry 'Female' 64 120
Alexander 'Male' 69 171
Create Array from the Contents of Table

This example shows how to extract the contents of a table using curly braces or dot
indexing.
Load Sample Data
Load the sample patients data and create a table. Use the unique identifiers in
LastName as row names.
load patients
patients = table(Age,Gender,Height,Weight,Smoker,...
The table, patients, contains 100 rows and 5 variables.
Extract Multiple Rows and Multiple Variables
Extract data from multiple variables in the table, patients by using curly braces. Since
dot indexing extracts data from a single variable at a time, braces are more convenient
when you want to extract more than one variable.
Extract the height and weight for the first five patients. Use numeric indices to select the
subset of rows, 1:5, and variable names to select the subset of variables,
{Height,Weight}.
A = patients{1:5,{'Height','Weight'}}
A =
71 176
69 163
64 131
67 133
9-37
9 Tables
64 119
A is a 5-by-2 numeric array.
Extract Data from One Variable
Use dot indexing to easily extract the contents of a single variable. Plot a histogram of
the numeric data in the variable, Weight.
figure()
histogram(patients.Weight)
title(' Patient Weight')
9-38
See Also
patients.Weight is a double-precision column vector with 100 rows. Alternatively, you

can use curly braces, patients{:,'Weight'}, to extract all the rows for the variable
Weight.
To specify a subset of rows for a single variable, you can follow the dot indexing with
parentheses or curly braces. Extract the heights of the nonsmoker patients under the age
of 30.
Use dot notation to extract data from table variables and a logical expression to define
the subset of rows based on that extracted data.
rows = patients.Smoker==false & patients.Age<30;
Use dot notation to extract the desired rows from the variable, Height.
patients.Height(rows)
ans =
68
71
70
63
64
63
65
66
68
66
The output is a 11-by-1 numeric array. Alternatively, you can specify the single variable,
Height, within curly braces to extract the desired data, patients{rows,'Height'}.
See Also
histogram | summary | table
Related Examples
9-39
9 Tables
More About
9-40
Calculations on Tables
This example shows how to perform calculations on tables.
The functions rowfun and varfun each apply a specified function to a table, yet many
other functions require numeric or homogeneous arrays as input arguments. You can
extract data from individual variables using dot indexing or from one or more variables
using curly braces. The extracted data is then an array that you can use as input to other
functions.
Read Sample Data into Table
Read data from a comma-separated text file, testScores.csv, into a table using the
readtable function. testScores.csv contains test scores for several students. Use the
student names in the first column of the text file as row names in the table.
T = readtable('testScores.csv','ReadRowNames',true)
T=10x4 table
Gender Test1 Test2 Test3
________ _____ _____ _____
HOWARD 'male' 90 87 93
WARD 'male' 87 85 83
TORRES 'male' 86 85 88
PETERSON 'female' 75 80 72
GRAY 'female' 89 86 87
RAMIREZ 'female' 96 92 98
JAMES 'male' 78 75 77
WATSON 'female' 91 94 92
BROOKS 'female' 86 83 85
KELLY 'male' 79 76 82
T is a table with 10 rows and four variables.
Summarize the Table
by using the summary function to summarize the table.
summary(T)
9-41
9 Tables
Variables:
Test1: 10x1 double
Values:
Min 75
Median 86.5
Max 96
Test2: 10x1 double
Values:
Min 75
Median 85
Max 94
Test3: 10x1 double
Values:
Min 72
Median 86
Max 98
The summary contains the minimum, median, and maximum score for each test.
Find the Average Across Each Row
Extract the data from the second, third, and fourth variables using curly braces, {}, find
the average of each row, and store it in a new variable, TestAvg.
T.TestAvg = mean(T{:,2:end},2)
T=10x5 table
Gender Test1 Test2 Test3 TestAvg
________ _____ _____ _____ _______
HOWARD 'male' 90 87 93 90
WARD 'male' 87 85 83 85
TORRES 'male' 86 85 88 86.333
PETERSON 'female' 75 80 72 75.667
9-42
GRAY 'female' 89 86 87 87.333

RAMIREZ 'female' 96 92 98 95.333
JAMES 'male' 78 75 77 76.667
WATSON 'female' 91 94 92 92.333
BROOKS 'female' 86 83 85 84.667
KELLY 'male' 79 76 82 79
Alternatively, you can use the variable names, T{:,{'Test1','Test2','Test3'}} or

the variable indices, T{:,2:4} to select the subset of data.
Compute Statistics Using Grouping Variable
Compute the mean and maximum of TestAvg by gender of the students.
varfun(@mean,T,'InputVariables','TestAvg',...
'GroupingVariables','Gender')
ans=2x3 table
Gender GroupCount mean_TestAvg
________ __________ ____________
'female' 5 87.067
'male' 5 83.4
Replace Data Values
The maximum score for each test is 100. Use curly braces to extract the data from the
table and convert the test scores to a 25 point scale.
T{:,2:end} = T{:,2:end}*25/100
T=10x5 table
Gender Test1 Test2 Test3 TestAvg
________ _____ _____ _____ _______
HOWARD 'male' 22.5 21.75 23.25 22.5

WARD 'male' 21.75 21.25 20.75 21.25
TORRES 'male' 21.5 21.25 22 21.583
PETERSON 'female' 18.75 20 18 18.917
GRAY 'female' 22.25 21.5 21.75 21.833
RAMIREZ 'female' 24 23 24.5 23.833
JAMES 'male' 19.5 18.75 19.25 19.167
WATSON 'female' 22.75 23.5 23 23.083
9-43
9 Tables
BROOKS 'female' 21.5 20.75 21.25 21.167

KELLY 'male' 19.75 19 20.5 19.75
Change Variable Name
Change the variable name from TestAvg to Final.
T.Properties.VariableNames{end} = 'Final'
T=10x5 table
Gender Test1 Test2 Test3 Final
________ _____ _____ _____ ______
HOWARD 'male' 22.5 21.75 23.25 22.5

WARD 'male' 21.75 21.25 20.75 21.25
TORRES 'male' 21.5 21.25 22 21.583
PETERSON 'female' 18.75 20 18 18.917
GRAY 'female' 22.25 21.5 21.75 21.833
RAMIREZ 'female' 24 23 24.5 23.833
JAMES 'male' 19.5 18.75 19.25 19.167
WATSON 'female' 22.75 23.5 23 23.083
BROOKS 'female' 21.5 20.75 21.25 21.167
KELLY 'male' 19.75 19 20.5 19.75
See Also
findgroups | rowfun | splitapply | summary | table | varfun
Related Examples
9-44
Split Data into Groups and Calculate Statistics

This example shows how to split data from the patients.mat data file into groups.
Then it shows how to calculate mean weights and body mass indices, and variances in
blood pressure readings, for the groups of patients. It also shows how to summarize the
results in a table.
Load Patient Data

load patients
Convert Gender and SelfAssessedHealthStatus to categorical arrays.

SelfAssessedHealthStatus = categorical(SelfAssessedHealthStatus);
whos

Gender 100x1 346 categorical
SelfAssessedHealthStatus 100x1 592 categorical
Calculate Mean Weights
Split the patients into nonsmokers and smokers using the Smoker variable. Calculate
the mean weight for each group.
[G,smoker] = findgroups(Smoker);
meanWeight = splitapply(@mean,Weight,G)
meanWeight =
149.9091
161.9412
9-45
9 Tables
The findgroups function returns G, a vector of group numbers created from Smoker.
The splitapply function uses G to split Weight into two groups. splitapply applies
the mean function to each group and concatenates the mean weights into a vector.
findgroups returns a vector of group identifiers as the second output argument. The
group identifiers are logical values because Smoker contains logical values. The patients
in the first group are nonsmokers, and the patients in the second group are smokers.
smoker
smoker = 2x1 logical array

0
1
Split the patient weights by both gender and status as a smoker and calculate the mean
weights.
G = findgroups(Gender,Smoker);
meanWeight = splitapply(@mean,Weight,G)
meanWeight =
130.3250
130.9231
180.0385
181.1429
The unique combinations across Gender and Smoker identify four groups of patients:
female nonsmokers, female smokers, male nonsmokers, and male smokers. Summarize
the four groups and their mean weights in a table.
[G,gender,smoker] = findgroups(Gender,Smoker);
T = table(gender,smoker,meanWeight)
T=4x3 table
gender smoker meanWeight
______ ______ __________
Female false 130.32

Female true 130.92
Male false 180.04
Male true 181.14
9-46
T.gender contains categorical values, and T.smoker contains logical values. The data
types of these table variables match the data types of Gender and Smoker respectively.
Calculate body mass index (BMI) for the four groups of patients. Define a function that
takes Height and Weight as its two input arguments, and that calculates BMI.
meanBMIfcn = @(h,w)mean((w ./ (h.^2)) * 703);
BMI = splitapply(meanBMIfcn,Height,Weight,G)
BMI =
21.6721
21.6686
26.5775
26.4584
Group Patients Based on Self-Reports
Calculate the fraction of patients who report their health as either Poor or Fair. First,
use splitapply to count the number of patients in each group: female nonsmokers,
female smokers, male nonsmokers, and male smokers. Then, count only those patients
who report their health as either Poor or Fair, using logical indexing on S and G. From
these two sets of counts, calculate the fraction for each group.
[G,gender,smoker] = findgroups(Gender,Smoker);
S = SelfAssessedHealthStatus;
I = ismember(S,{'Poor','Fair'});
numPatients = splitapply(@numel,S,G);
numPF = splitapply(@numel,S(I),G(I));
numPF./numPatients
ans =
0.2500
0.3846
0.3077
0.1429
Compare the standard deviation in Diastolic readings of those patients who report
Poor or Fair health, and those patients who report Good or Excellent health.
stdDiastolicPF = splitapply(@std,Diastolic(I),G(I));
stdDiastolicGE = splitapply(@std,Diastolic(~I),G(~I));
9-47
9 Tables
Collect results in a table. For these patients, the female nonsmokers who report Poor or
Fair health show the widest variation in blood pressure readings.
T = table(gender,smoker,numPatients,numPF,stdDiastolicPF,stdDiastolicGE,BMI)
T=4x7 table
gender smoker numPatients numPF stdDiastolicPF stdDiastolicGE BM
______ ______ ___________ _____ ______________ ______________ ___
Female false 40 10 6.8872 3.9012 21.

Female true 13 5 5.4129 5.0409 21.
Male false 26 8 4.2678 4.8159 26.
Male true 21 3 5.6862 5.258 26.
See Also
findgroups | splitapply
Related Examples
More About
9-48
Split Table Data Variables and Apply Functions

This example shows how to split power outage data from a table into groups by region
and cause of the power outages. Then it shows how to apply functions to calculate
statistics for each group and collect the results in a table.
Load Power Outage Data
The sample file, outages.csv, contains data representing electric utility outages in the
United States. The file contains six columns: Region, OutageTime, Loss, Customers,
RestorationTime, and Cause. Read outages.csv into a table.
T = readtable('outages.csv');
Convert Region and Cause to categorical arrays, and OutageTime and

RestorationTime to datetime arrays. Display the first five rows.
T.Region = categorical(T.Region);
T.Cause = categorical(T.Cause);
T.OutageTime = datetime(T.OutageTime);
T.RestorationTime = datetime(T.RestorationTime);
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x6 table
Region OutageTime Loss Customers RestorationTime C
_________ ________________ ______ __________ ________________ ______
SouthWest 2002-02-01 12:18 458.98 1.8202e+06 2002-02-07 16:50 winter

SouthEast 2003-01-23 00:49 530.14 2.1204e+05 NaT winter
SouthEast 2003-02-07 21:15 289.4 1.4294e+05 2003-02-17 08:14 winter
West 2004-04-06 05:44 434.81 3.4037e+05 2004-04-06 06:10 equipm
MidWest 2002-03-16 06:18 186.44 2.1275e+05 2002-03-18 23:23 severe
Calculate Maximum Power Loss
Determine the greatest power loss due to a power outage in each region. The
findgroups function returns G, a vector of group numbers created from T.Region. The
splitapply function uses G to split T.Loss into five groups, corresponding to the five
regions. splitapply applies the max function to each group and concatenates the
maximum power losses into a vector.
9-49
9 Tables
G = findgroups(T.Region);
maxLoss = splitapply(@max,T.Loss,G)
maxLoss =
1.0e+04 *
2.3141
2.3418
0.8767
0.2796
1.6659
Calculate the maximum power loss due to a power outage by cause. To specify that
Cause is the grouping variable, use table indexing. Create a table that contains the
maximum power losses and their causes.
T1 = T(:,'Cause');
[G,powerLosses] = findgroups(T1);
powerLosses.maxLoss = splitapply(@max,T.Loss,G)
powerLosses=10x2 table
Cause maxLoss
________________ _______
attack 582.63
earthquake 258.18
energy emergency 11638
equipment fault 16659
fire 872.96
severe storm 8767.3
thunder storm 23418
unknown 23141
wind 2796
winter storm 2883.7
powerLosses is a table because T1 is a table. You can append the maximum losses as
another table variable.
Calculate the maximum power loss by cause in each region. To specify that Region and
Cause are the grouping variables, use table indexing. Create a table that contains the
maximum power losses and display the first 15 rows.
9-50
T1 = T(:,{'Region','Cause'});
[G,powerLosses] = findgroups(T1);
powerLosses.maxLoss = splitapply(@max,T.Loss,G);
powerLosses(1:15,:)
ans=15x3 table
Region Cause maxLoss
_________ ________________ _______
MidWest attack 0
MidWest energy emergency 2378.7
MidWest equipment fault 903.28
MidWest severe storm 6808.7
MidWest thunder storm 15128
MidWest unknown 23141
MidWest wind 2053.8
MidWest winter storm 669.25
NorthEast attack 405.62
NorthEast earthquake 0
NorthEast energy emergency 11638
NorthEast equipment fault 794.36
NorthEast fire 872.96
NorthEast severe storm 6002.4
NorthEast thunder storm 23418
Calculate Number of Customers Impacted
Determine power-outage impact on customers by cause and region. Because T.Loss

contains NaN values, wrap sum in an anonymous function to use the 'omitnan' input
argument.
osumFcn = @(x)(sum(x,'omitnan'));
powerLosses.totalCustomers = splitapply(osumFcn,T.Customers,G);
powerLosses(1:15,:)
ans=15x4 table
Region Cause maxLoss totalCustomers
_________ ________________ _______ ______________
MidWest attack 0 0
MidWest energy emergency 2378.7 6.3363e+05
MidWest equipment fault 903.28 1.7822e+05
MidWest severe storm 6808.7 1.3511e+07
MidWest thunder storm 15128 4.2563e+06
9-51
9 Tables
MidWest unknown 23141 3.9505e+06

MidWest wind 2053.8 1.8796e+06
MidWest winter storm 669.25 4.8887e+06
NorthEast attack 405.62 2181.8
NorthEast earthquake 0 0
NorthEast energy emergency 11638 1.4391e+05
NorthEast equipment fault 794.36 3.9961e+05
NorthEast fire 872.96 6.1292e+05
NorthEast severe storm 6002.4 2.7905e+07
NorthEast thunder storm 23418 2.1885e+07
Calculate Mean Durations of Power Outages
Determine the mean durations of all U.S. power outages in hours. Add the mean
durations of power outages to powerLosses. Because T.RestorationTime has NaT
values, omit the resulting NaN values when calculating the mean durations.
D = T.RestorationTime - T.OutageTime;
H = hours(D);
omeanFcn = @(x)(mean(x,'omitnan'));
powerLosses.meanOutage = splitapply(omeanFcn,H,G);
powerLosses(1:15,:)
ans=15x5 table
Region Cause maxLoss totalCustomers meanOutage
_________ ________________ _______ ______________ __________
MidWest attack 0 0 335.02

MidWest energy emergency 2378.7 6.3363e+05 5339.3
MidWest equipment fault 903.28 1.7822e+05 17.863
MidWest severe storm 6808.7 1.3511e+07 78.906
MidWest thunder storm 15128 4.2563e+06 51.245
MidWest unknown 23141 3.9505e+06 30.892
MidWest wind 2053.8 1.8796e+06 73.761
MidWest winter storm 669.25 4.8887e+06 127.58
NorthEast attack 405.62 2181.8 5.5117
NorthEast earthquake 0 0 0
NorthEast energy emergency 11638 1.4391e+05 77.345
NorthEast equipment fault 794.36 3.9961e+05 87.204
NorthEast fire 872.96 6.1292e+05 4.0267
NorthEast severe storm 6002.4 2.7905e+07 2163.5
9-52
See Also
NorthEast thunder storm 23418 2.1885e+07 46.098
See Also
findgroups | rowfun | splitapply | varfun
Related Examples
More About
9-53
9 Tables
Advantages of Using Tables

Conveniently Store Mixed-Type Data in Single Container
You can use the table data type to collect mixed-type data and metadata properties,
such as variable name, row names, descriptions, and variable units, in a single container.
Tables are suitable for column-oriented or tabular data that is often stored as columns in
a text file or in a spreadsheet. For example, you can use a table to store experimental
data, with rows representing different observations and columns representing different
measured variables.
Tables consist of rows and column-oriented variables. Each variable in a table can have a
different data type and a different size, but each variable must have the same number of
rows.
For example, load sample patients data.
load patients
Then, combine the workspace variables, Systolic and Diastolic into a single
BloodPressure variable and convert the workspace variable, Gender, from a cell array
of character vectors to a categorical array.
BloodPressure = [Systolic Diastolic];

whos('Gender','Age','Smoker','BloodPressure')

BloodPressure 100x2 1600 double
Gender 100x1 346 categorical
The variables Age, BloodPressure, Gender, and Smoker have varying data types and
are candidates to store in a table since they all have the same number of rows, 100.
Now, create a table from the variables and display the first five rows.
T = table(Gender,Age,Smoker,BloodPressure);
T(1:5,:)
9-54
ans=5x4 table
Gender Age Smoker BloodPressure
______ ___ ______ _____________
Male 38 true 124 93

Male 43 false 109 77
Female 38 false 125 83
The table displays in a tabular format with the variable names at the top.
Each variable in a table is a single data type. If you add a new row to the table,
MATLAB® forces consistency of the data type between the new data and the
corresponding table variables. For example, if you try to add information for a new
patient where the first column contains the patient's age instead of gender, as in the
expression T(end+1,:) = {37,{'Female'},true,[130 84]}, then you receive the
error:
Invalid RHS for assignment to a categorical array.
The error occurs because MATLAB® cannot assign numeric data, 37, to the categorical
array, Gender.
For comparison of tables with structures, consider the structure array, StructArray,
that is equivalent to the table, T.
StructArray = table2struct(T)
StructArray = 100x1 struct array with fields:

Gender
Age
Smoker
BloodPressure
Structure arrays organize records using named fields. Each field's value can have a
different data type or size. Now, display the named fields for the first element of
StructArray.
StructArray(1)
ans = struct with fields:

Gender: Male
9-55
9 Tables
Age: 38
Smoker: 1
BloodPressure: [124 93]
Fields in a structure array are analogous to variables in a table. However, unlike with
tables, you cannot enforce homogeneity within a field. For example, you can have some
values of S.Gender that are categorical array elements, Male or Female, others that are
character vectors, 'Male' or 'Female', and others that are integers, 0 or 1.
Now consider the same data stored in a scalar structure, with four fields each containing
one variable from the table.
ScalarStruct = struct(...
'Gender',{Gender},...
'Age',Age,...
'Smoker',Smoker,...
'BloodPressure',BloodPressure)
ScalarStruct = struct with fields:

Gender: [100x1 categorical]
Age: [100x1 double]
Smoker: [100x1 logical]
BloodPressure: [100x2 double]
Unlike with tables, you cannot enforce that the data is rectangular. For example, the
field ScalarStruct.Age can be a different length than the other fields.
A table allows you to maintain the rectangular structure (like a structure array) and
enforce homogeneity of variables (like fields in a scalar structure). Although cell arrays
do not have named fields, they have many of the same disadvantages as structure arrays
and scalar structures. If you have rectangular data that is homogeneous in each variable,
consider using a table. Then you can use numeric or named indexing, and you can use
table properties to store metadata.
Access Data Using Numeric or Named Indexing
You can index into a table using parentheses, curly braces, or dot indexing. Parentheses
allow you to select a subset of the data in a table and preserve the table container. Curly
braces and dot indexing allow you to extract data from a table. Within each table
indexing method, you can specify the rows or variables to access by name or by numeric
index.
9-56
Consider the sample table from above. Each row in the table, T, represents a different
patient. The workspace variable, LastName, contains unique identifiers for the 100 rows.
Add row names to the table by setting the RowNames property to LastName and display
the first five rows of the updated table.
T.Properties.RowNames = LastName;
T(1:5,:)
ans=5x4 table
Gender Age Smoker BloodPressure
______ ___ ______ _____________
Smith Male 38 true 124 93

Johnson Male 43 false 109 77
Williams Female 38 false 125 83
Jones Female 40 false 117 75
Brown Female 49 false 122 80
In addition to labeling the data, you can use row and variable names to access data in the
table. For example, use named indexing to display the age and blood pressure of the
patients Williams and Brown.
T({'Williams','Brown'},{'Age','BloodPressure'})
ans=2x2 table
Age BloodPressure
___ _____________
Williams 38 125 83
Brown 49 122 80
Now, use numeric indexing to return an equivalent subtable. Return the third and fifth
row from the second and fourth variables.
T(3:2:5,2:2:4)
ans=2x2 table
Age BloodPressure
___ _____________
Williams 38 125 83
Brown 49 122 80
9-57
9 Tables
With cell arrays or structures, you do not have the same flexibility to use named or
numeric indexing.
• With a cell array, you must use strcmp to find desired named data, and then you can
index into the array.
• With a scalar structure or structure array, it is not possible to refer to a field by
number. Furthermore, with a scalar structure, you cannot easily select a subset of
variables or a subset of observations. With a structure array, you can select a subset
of observations, but you cannot select a subset of variables.
• With a table, you can access data by named index or by numeric index. Furthermore,
you can easily select a subset of variables and a subset of rows.
For more information on table indexing, see “Access Data in a Table” on page 9-32.
Use Table Properties to Store Metadata
In addition to storing data, tables have properties to store metadata, such as variable
names, row names, descriptions, and variable units. You can access a property using
T.Properties.PropName, where T is the name of the table and PropName is one of the
table properties.
For example, add a table description, variable descriptions, and variable units for Age.
T.Properties.Description = 'Simulated Patient Data';
T.Properties.VariableDescriptions = ...
{'Male or Female' ...
'' ...
'true or false' ...
'Systolic/Diastolic'};
T.Properties.VariableUnits{'Age'} = 'Yrs';
Individual empty character vectors within the cell array for VariableDescriptions
indicate that the corresponding variable does not have a description. For more
information, see the Properties section of table.
To print a table summary, use the summary function.

summary(T)
Description: Simulated Patient Data
9-58
See Also
Variables:
Gender: 100x1 categorical
Description: Male or Female

Values:
Female 53
Male 47
Age: 100x1 double
Units: Yrs
Values:
Min 25
Median 39
Max 50
Description: true or false

Values:
True 34
False 66
BloodPressure: 100x2 double
Description: Systolic/Diastolic
Values:
BloodPressure_1 BloodPressure_2
_______________ _______________
Min 109 68
Median 122 81.5
Max 138 99
Structures and cell arrays do not have properties for storing metadata.
See Also
summary | table
9-59
9 Tables
Related Examples
9-60
Grouping Variables To Split Data
Grouping Variables To Split Data

You can use grouping variables to split data variables into groups. Typically, selecting
grouping variables is the first step in the Split-Apply-Combine workflow. You can split
data into groups, apply a function to each group, and combine the results. You also can
denote missing values in grouping variables, so that corresponding values in data
variables are ignored.
Grouping Variables
Grouping variables are variables used to group, or categorize, observations—that is, data
values in other variables. A grouping variable can be any of these data types:
• Numeric, logical, categorical, datetime, or duration vector

• Cell array of character vectors
• Table, with table variables of any data type in this list
Data variables are the variables that contain observations. A grouping variable must
have a value corresponding to each value in the data variables. Data values belong to the
same group when the corresponding values in the grouping variable are the same.
This table shows examples of data variables, grouping variables, and the groups that you
can create when you split the data variables using the grouping variables.
Data Variable Grouping Variable Groups of Data
[5 10 15 20 25 30] [0 0 0 0 1 1] [5 10 15 20] [25 30]
[10 20 30 40 50 60] [1 3 3 1 2 1] [10 40 60] [50] [20 30]
[64 72 67 69 64 68] {'F','M','F','M','F','F [64 67 64 68] [72 69]
'}
You can give groups of data meaningful names when you use cell arrays of character
vectors or categorical arrays as grouping variables. A categorical array is an efficient and
flexible choice of grouping variable.
Group Definition
Typically, there are as many groups as there are unique values in the grouping variable.
(A categorical array also can include categories that are not represented in the data.) The
groups and the order of the groups depend on the data type of the grouping variable.
9-61
9 Tables
• For numeric, logical, datetime, or duration vectors, or cell arrays of character

vectors, the groups correspond to the unique values sorted in ascending order.
• For categorical arrays, the groups correspond to the unique values observed in the
array, sorted in the order returned by the categories function.
The findgroups function can accept multiple grouping variables, for example G =
findgroups(A1,A2). You also can include multiple grouping variables in a table, for
example T = table(A1,A2); G = findgroups(T). The findgroups function
defines groups by the unique combinations of values across corresponding elements of
the grouping variables. findgroups decides the order by the order of the first grouping
variable, and then by the order of the second grouping variable, and so on. For example,
if A1 = {'a','a','b','b'} and A2 = [0 1 0 0], then the unique values across the
grouping variables are 'a' 0, 'a' 1, and 'b' 0, defining three groups.
The Split-Apply-Combine Workflow

After you select grouping variables and split data variables into groups, you can apply
functions to the groups and combine the results. This workflow is called the Split-Apply-
Combine workflow. You can use the findgroups and splitapply functions together to
analyze groups of data in this workflow. This diagram shows a simple example using the
grouping variable Gender and the data variable Height to calculate the mean height by
gender.
The findgroups function returns a vector of group numbers that define groups based on
the unique values in the grouping variables. splitapply uses the group numbers to
split the data into groups efficiently before applying a function.
9-62
See Also
Missing Group Values

Grouping variables can have missing values. This table shows the missing value
indicator for each data type. If a grouping variable has missing values, then findgroups
assigns NaN as the group number, and splitapply ignores the corresponding values in
the data variables.
Grouping Variable Data Type Missing Value Indicator
Numeric NaN
Logical (Cannot be missing)
Categorical <undefined>
datetime NaT
duration NaN
Cell array of character vectors ''
See Also
findgroups | rowfun | splitapply | varfun
9-63
9 Tables
Related Examples
9-64
Changes to DimensionNames Property in R2016b

The table data type is suitable for collecting column-oriented, heterogeneous data in a
single container. Tables also contain metadata properties such as variable names, row
names, dimension names, descriptions, and variable units. Starting in R2016b, you can
use the dimension names to access table data and metadata using dot subscripting. To
support that, the dimension names must satisfy the same requirements as the variable
names. For backwards compatibility, tables enforce those restrictions by automatically
modifying dimension names when needed.
Create a table that has row names and variable names.

Number = [8; 21; 13; 20; 11];
Name = {'Van Buren'; 'Arthur'; 'Fillmore'; 'Garfield'; 'Polk'};
Party = categorical({'Democratic'; 'Republican'; 'Whig'; 'Republican'; 'Republican'});
T = table(Number,Party,'RowNames',Name)
T =
Number Party
______ __________
Van Buren 8 Democratic

Arthur 21 Republican
Fillmore 13 Whig
Garfield 20 Republican
Polk 11 Republican
Display its properties, including the dimension names. The default values of the
dimension names are 'Row' and 'Variables'.
T.Properties
ans =
struct with fields:
Description: ''
UserData: []
DimensionNames: {'Row' 'Variables'}
VariableNames: {'Number' 'Party'}
VariableDescriptions: {}
VariableUnits: {}
RowNames: {5×1 cell}
9-65
9 Tables
Starting in R2016b, you can assign new names to the dimension names, and use them to
access table data. Dimension names must be valid MATLAB identifiers, and must not be
one of the reserved names, 'Properties', 'RowNames', or 'VariableNames'.
Assign a new name to the first dimension name, and use it to access the row names of
the table.
T.Properties.DimensionNames{1} = 'Name';
T.Name
ans =
5×1 cell array
'Van Buren'
'Arthur'
'Fillmore'
'Garfield'
'Polk'
Create a new table variable called Name. When you create the variable, the table modifies
its first dimension name to prevent a conflict. The updated dimension name becomes
Name_1.
T{:,'Name'} = {'Martin'; 'Chester'; 'Millard'; 'James'; 'James'}
Warning: DimensionNames property was modified to avoid conflicting dimension and variab
Considerations for Using Tables for more details. This will become an error in a future
T =
Number Party Name

______ __________ _________
Van Buren 8 Democratic 'Martin'

Arthur 21 Republican 'Chester'
Fillmore 13 Whig 'Millard'
Garfield 20 Republican 'James'
Polk 11 Republican 'James'
T.Properties.DimensionNames
ans =
1×2 cell array
9-66
'Name_1' 'Data'
Similarly, if you assign a dimension name that is not a valid MATLAB identifier, the
name is modified.
T.Properties.DimensionNames{1} = 'Last Name';
T.Properties.DimensionNames
Warning: DimensionNames property was modified to make the name 'Last Name' a valid MATL
Considerations for Using Tables for more details. This will become an error in a future
ans =
1×2 cell array
'LastName' 'Data'
In R2016b, tables raise warnings when dimension names are not valid identifiers, or
conflict with variable names or reserved names, so that you can continue to work with
code and tables created with previous releases. If you encounter these warnings, it is
recommended that you update your code to avoid them.
9-67
10
Timetables
• “Create Timetables” on page 10-2

• “Resample and Aggregate Data in Timetable” on page 10-7
• “Combine Timetables and Synchronize Their Data” on page 10-11
• “Retime and Synchronize Timetable Variables Using Different Methods”
on page 10-18
• “Select Timetable Data by Row Time and Variable Type” on page 10-25
• “Clean Timetable with Missing, Duplicate, or Nonuniform Times” on page 10-32
• “Using Row Labels in Table and Timetable Operations” on page 10-42
10 Timetables
Create Timetables
This example shows how to create a timetable, combine timetables, and adjust the data
from multiple timetables to a common time vector. The common time vector can contain
the times from either or both timetables, or it can be an entirely new time vector that you
specify. The example shows how to compute and display a daily mean for weather
measurements contained in different timetables.
A timetable is a type of table that associates a time with each row. A timetable can store
column-oriented data variables that have different data types and sizes, so long as each
variable has the same number of rows. In addition, timetables provide time-specific
functions to combine, subscript into, and adjust their data.
Import Timetables from Files
Load air quality data and weather measurements into two different timetables. The
dates of the measurements range from November 15, 2015, to November 19, 2015. The
air quality data come from a sensor inside a building, while the weather measurements
come from sensors outside.
Read the air quality data from a table with the readtable function. Then convert it
from a table to a timetable with the table2timetable function. The readtable
function returns a table only, not a timetable.
indoors = readtable('indoors.csv');
indoors = table2timetable(indoors);
You also can create a timetable from an M-by-N array with the array2timetable
function, or from workspace variables with the timetable function.
Display the first five rows of indoors. Each row of the timetable has a time that labels
that row of data.
indoors(1:5,:)
ans=5x2 timetable
Time Humidity AirQuality
___________________ ________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:24 36 80
2015-11-15 01:13:35 36 80
2015-11-15 02:26:47 37 79
10-2
Create Timetables
2015-11-15 03:39:59 37 82
2015-11-15 04:53:11 36 80
Load the timetable with weather measurements. Display the first five rows of outdoors.
load outdoors
outdoors(1:5,:)
ans=5x3 timetable
Time Humidity TemperatureF PressureHg
___________________ ________ ____________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:24 49 51.3 29.61

2015-11-15 01:30:24 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 03:00:24 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 04:30:24 48.8 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 06:00:24 48.7 51.5 29.6
Synchronize Timetables
The timetables, indoors and outdoors, contain different measurements taken inside
and outside a building at different times. Combine all the data into one timetable with
the synchronize function.
tt = synchronize(indoors,outdoors);
tt(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
Time Humidity_indoors AirQuality Humidity_outdoors Tempe
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:24 36 80 49 51.3

2015-11-15 01:13:35 36 80 NaN NaN
2015-11-15 01:30:24 NaN NaN 48.9 51.5
2015-11-15 02:26:47 37 79 NaN NaN
2015-11-15 03:00:24 NaN NaN 48.9 51.5
The output timetable, tt contains all the times from both timetables. synchronize puts
a missing data indicator where there are no data values to place in tt. When both input
timetables have a variable with the same name, such as Humidity, synchronize
renames both variables and adds both to the output timetable.
10-3
10 Timetables
Synchronize the timetables again, and this time fill in missing data values with linear
interpolation.
ttLinear = synchronize(indoors,outdoors,'union','linear');
ttLinear(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:24 36 80 49 51.

2015-11-15 01:13:35 36 80 48.919 51.46
2015-11-15 01:30:24 36.23 79.77 48.9 51.
2015-11-15 02:26:47 37 79 48.9 51.
2015-11-15 03:00:24 37 80.378 48.9 51.
Adjust Data in One Timetable
You also can adjust the data in a single timetable to a new time vector. Calculate the
means of the variables in ttLinear over six-hour intervals with the retime function. If
any rows have NaN values after you adjust the data, remove them with the rmmissing
function.
tv = [datetime(2015,11,15):hours(6):datetime(2015,11,18)];
ttHourly = retime(ttLinear,tv,'mean');
ttHourly = rmmissing(ttHourly);
Plot Timetable Data
Normalize the data in ttHourly to the mean for each variable in the timetable. Plot the
mean daily values of these measurements. You can use the Variables property of a
timetable to access the variables. ttHourly.Variables returns the same variables as
ttHourly{:,:}.
ttMeanVars = ttHourly.Variables./mean(ttHourly.Variables);
plot(ttHourly.Time,ttMeanVars);
legend(ttHourly.Properties.VariableNames,'Interpreter','none');
xlabel('Time');
ylabel('Normalized Weather Measurements');
title('Mean Daily Weather Trends');
10-4
See Also
See Also
retime | rmmissing | synchronize | table2timetable | timerange | timetable
Related Examples
• “Retime and Synchronize Timetable Variables Using Different Methods” on page
10-18
10-5
10 Timetables
10-6
Resample and Aggregate Data in Timetable
Resample and Aggregate Data in Timetable

This example shows how to resample and aggregate data in a timetable. A timetable is a
type of table that associates a time with each row. A timetable can store column-oriented
data variables that have different data types and sizes, so long as each variable has the
same number of rows. With the retime function, you can resample timetable data, or
aggregate timetable data into time bins you specify.
Import Timetable
Load a timetable containing weather measurements taken from November 15, 2015, to
November 19, 2015. The timetable contains humidity, temperature, and pressure
readings taken over this time period.
load outdoors
outdoors(1:5,:)
ans=5x3 timetable
___________________ ________ ____________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:24 49 51.3 29.61

2015-11-15 01:30:24 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 03:00:24 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 04:30:24 48.8 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 06:00:24 48.7 51.5 29.6
Determine if the timetable is regular. A regular timetable is one in which the differences
between all consecutive row times are the same. outdoors is not a regular timetable.
TF = isregular(outdoors)
TF = logical
0
Find the differences in the time steps. They vary between half a minute and an hour and
a half.
dt = unique(diff(outdoors.Time))

00:00:24
10-7
10 Timetables
01:29:36
01:30:00
Resample Timetable with Interpolation
Adjust the data in the timetable with the retime function. Specify an hourly time vector.
Interpolate the timetable data to the new row times.
TT = retime(outdoors,'hourly','spline');
TT(1:5,:)
ans=5x3 timetable
___________________ ________ ____________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:00 49.001 51.298 29.61

2015-11-15 01:00:00 48.909 51.467 29.61
2015-11-15 02:00:00 48.902 51.51 29.61
2015-11-15 03:00:00 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 04:00:00 48.844 51.498 29.611
Resample Timetable with Nearest Neighbor Values
Specify an hourly time vector for TT. For each row in TT, copy values from the
corresponding row in outdoors whose row time is nearest.
TT = retime(outdoors,'hourly','nearest');
TT(1:5,:)
ans=5x3 timetable
___________________ ________ ____________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:00 49 51.3 29.61

2015-11-15 01:00:00 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 02:00:00 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 03:00:00 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 04:00:00 48.8 51.5 29.61
10-8
See Also
Aggregate Timetable Data and Calculate Daily Mean
The retime function provides aggregation methods, such as mean. Calculate the daily
means for the data in outdoors.
TT = retime(outdoors,'daily','mean');
TT
TT=4x3 timetable
___________________ ________ ____________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:00 48.931 51.394 29.607

2015-11-16 00:00:00 47.924 51.571 29.611
2015-11-17 00:00:00 48.45 51.238 29.613
2015-11-18 00:00:00 49.5 50.8 29.61
Aggregate Timetable Data to Different Time Vector
Calculate the means over six-hour time intervals. Specify a time vector to use with the
retime function. Specify a format for the time vector to display both date and time when
you display the timetable.
tv = datetime(2015,11,15):hours(6):datetime(2015,11,18);
tv.Format = 'dd-MMM-yyyy HH:mm:ss';
TT = retime(outdoors,tv,'mean');
TT(1:5,:)
ans=5x3 timetable
____________________ ________ ____________ __________
15-Nov-2015 00:00:00 48.9 51.45 29.61

15-Nov-2015 06:00:00 48.9 51.45 29.6
15-Nov-2015 12:00:00 49.025 51.45 29.61
15-Nov-2015 18:00:00 48.9 51.225 29.607
16-Nov-2015 00:00:00 48.5 51.4 29.61
See Also
retime | synchronize | table2timetable | timetable
10-9
10 Timetables
Related Examples
10-18
10-10
Combine Timetables and Synchronize Their Data

You can combine timetables and synchronize their data in a variety of ways. You can
concatenate timetables vertically or horizontally, but only when they contain the same
row times or timetable variables. Use the synchronize function to combine timetables
with different row times and timetable variables. synchronize creates a timetable that
contains all variables from all input timetables. It then synchronizes the data from the
input timetables to the row times of the output timetable. synchronize can fill in
missing elements of the output timetable with missing data indicators, with values
copied from their nearest neighbors, or with interpolated values. synchronize also can
aggregate timetable data over time bins you specify.
Concatenate Timetables Vertically
Load timetables from openPricesSmall and concatenate them vertically. The

timetables are opWeek1 and opWeek2. They contain opening prices for some stocks
during the first and second weeks of January 2016.
load openPricesSmall
Display the two timetables.

opWeek1
opWeek1=5x2 timetable
Time AAPL FB
____________________ ______ ______
08-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.55 99.88

07-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.68 100.5
06-Jan-2016 09:00:00 100.56 101.13
05-Jan-2016 09:00:00 105.75 102.89
04-Jan-2016 09:00:00 102.61 101.95
opWeek2
opWeek2=5x2 timetable
Time AAPL FB
____________________ ______ ______
14-Jan-2016 09:00:00 97.96 95.85

13-Jan-2016 09:00:00 100.32 100.58
10-11
10 Timetables
12-Jan-2016 09:00:00 100.55 99

11-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.97 97.91
08-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.55 99.88
Concatenate the timetables. You can concatenate timetables vertically when they have
the same variables. The row times label the rows and are not contained in a timetable
variable. Note that the row times of a timetable can be out of order and do not need to be
regularly spaced. For example, op does not include days that fall on weekends. A
timetable also can contain duplicate times. op contains two rows for 08-Jan-2016
09:00:00.
op = [opWeek2;opWeek1]
op=10x2 timetable
Time AAPL FB
____________________ ______ ______
14-Jan-2016 09:00:00 97.96 95.85

13-Jan-2016 09:00:00 100.32 100.58
12-Jan-2016 09:00:00 100.55 99
11-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.97 97.91
08-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.55 99.88
08-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.55 99.88
07-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.68 100.5
06-Jan-2016 09:00:00 100.56 101.13
05-Jan-2016 09:00:00 105.75 102.89
04-Jan-2016 09:00:00 102.61 101.95
Concatenate Timetables Horizontally
You also can concatenate timetables horizontally. The timetables must have the same
row times and different variables.
Display the timetable opOtherStocks. The timetable has the same row times as
opWeek1, but variables for different stocks.
opOtherStocks
opOtherStocks=5x2 timetable
Time MSFT TWTR
____________________ _____ _____
10-12
08-Jan-2016 09:00:00 52.37 20.51

07-Jan-2016 09:00:00 52.7 21
06-Jan-2016 09:00:00 54.32 21.62
05-Jan-2016 09:00:00 54.93 22.79
04-Jan-2016 09:00:00 54.32 22.64
Concatenate opWeek1 and opOtherStock. The output timetable has one set of row
times and the variables from both timetables.
op = [opWeek1 opOtherStocks]
op=5x4 timetable
Time AAPL FB MSFT TWTR
____________________ ______ ______ _____ _____
08-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.55 99.88 52.37 20.51

07-Jan-2016 09:00:00 98.68 100.5 52.7 21
06-Jan-2016 09:00:00 100.56 101.13 54.32 21.62
05-Jan-2016 09:00:00 105.75 102.89 54.93 22.79
04-Jan-2016 09:00:00 102.61 101.95 54.32 22.64
Synchronize Timetables and Indicate Missing Data
Load air quality data and weather measurements from two different timetables and
synchronize them. The dates of the measurements range from November 15, 2015, to
November 19, 2015. The air quality data come from a sensor inside a building, while the
weather measurements come from sensors outside.
load indoors
load outdoors
Display the first five lines of each timetable. They contain measurements of different
quantities taken at different times.
indoors(1:5,:)
ans=5x2 timetable
Time Humidity AirQuality
___________________ ________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:24 36 80
2015-11-15 01:13:35 36 80
2015-11-15 02:26:47 37 79
10-13
10 Timetables
2015-11-15 03:39:59 37 82
2015-11-15 04:53:11 36 80
outdoors(1:5,:)
ans=5x3 timetable
___________________ ________ ____________ __________
2015-11-15 00:00:24 49 51.3 29.61

2015-11-15 01:30:24 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 03:00:24 48.9 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 04:30:24 48.8 51.5 29.61
2015-11-15 06:00:24 48.7 51.5 29.6
Synchronize the timetables. The output timetable tt contains all the times from both
timetables. synchronize puts a missing data indicator where there are no data values
to place in tt. When both input timetables have a variable with the same name, such as
Humidity, synchronize renames both variables and adds both to the output timetable.
tt = synchronize(indoors,outdoors);
tt(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:24 36 80 49 51.3

2015-11-15 01:13:35 36 80 NaN NaN
2015-11-15 01:30:24 NaN NaN 48.9 51.5
2015-11-15 02:26:47 37 79 NaN NaN
2015-11-15 03:00:24 NaN NaN 48.9 51.5
Synchronize and Interpolate Data Values
Synchronize the timetables, and fill in missing timetable elements with linear
interpolation. To synchronize on a time vector that includes all times from both
timetables, specify 'union' for the output times.
ttLinear = synchronize(indoors,outdoors,'union','linear');
ttLinear(1:5,:)
10-14
ans=5x5 timetable
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:24 36 80 49 51.

2015-11-15 01:13:35 36 80 48.919 51.46
2015-11-15 01:30:24 36.23 79.77 48.9 51.
2015-11-15 02:26:47 37 79 48.9 51.
2015-11-15 03:00:24 37 80.378 48.9 51.
Synchronize to Different Times
Synchronize the timetables to an hourly time vector. The input timetables had irregular
row times. The output timetable has regular row times with one hour as the time step.
ttHourly = synchronize(indoors,outdoors,'hourly','linear');
ttHourly(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:00 36 80 49 51.29

2015-11-15 01:00:00 36 80 48.934 51.43
2015-11-15 02:00:00 36.634 79.366 48.9 51.
2015-11-15 03:00:00 37 80.361 48.9 51.
2015-11-15 04:00:00 36.727 81.453 48.834 51.
Synchronize the timetables to a time vector that specifies half-hour intervals.

tv = [datetime(2015,11,15):minutes(30):datetime(2015,11,18)];
tv.Format = indoors.Time.Format;
ttHalfHour = synchronize(indoors,outdoors,tv,'linear');
ttHalfHour(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:00 36 80 49 51.29

2015-11-15 00:30:00 36 80 48.967 51.36
2015-11-15 01:00:00 36 80 48.934 51.43
2015-11-15 01:30:00 36.224 79.776 48.9 51.49
10-15
10 Timetables
2015-11-15 02:00:00 36.634 79.366 48.9 51.
Synchronize and Aggregate Data Values
Synchronize the timetables and calculate the daily means for all variables in the output
timetable.
ttDaily = synchronize(indoors,outdoors,'daily','mean');
ttDaily
ttDaily=4x5 timetable
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:00 36.5 80.05 48.931 51.39

2015-11-16 00:00:00 36.85 80.35 47.924 51.57
2015-11-17 00:00:00 36.85 79.45 48.45 51.23
2015-11-18 00:00:00 NaN NaN 49.5 50.
Synchronize the timetables to six-hour time intervals and calculate means for each
interval.
tv = [datetime(2015,11,15):hours(6):datetime(2015,11,18)];
tv.Format = indoors.Time.Format;
tt6Hours = synchronize(indoors,outdoors,tv,'mean');
tt6Hours(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
___________________ ________________ __________ _________________ _____
2015-11-15 00:00:00 36.4 80.2 48.9 51.4

2015-11-15 06:00:00 36.4 79.8 48.9 51.4
2015-11-15 12:00:00 36.6 80.4 49.025 51.4
2015-11-15 18:00:00 36.6 79.8 48.9 51.22
2015-11-16 00:00:00 36.6 80.2 48.5 51.
See Also
retime | synchronize | table2timetable | timetable
10-16
See Also
Related Examples
10-18
10-17
10 Timetables
Retime and Synchronize Timetable Variables Using Different

Methods
This example shows how to fill in gaps in timetable variables, using different methods for
different variables. You can specify whether each timetable variable contains continuous
or discrete data using the VariableContinuity property of the timetable. When you
resample the timetable using the retime function, retime either interpolates, fills in
with previous values, or fills in with missing data indicators, depending on the values in
the VariableContinuity property. Similarly, the synchronize function interpolates
or fills in values based on the VariableContinuity property of the input timetables.
Create Timetable
Create a timetable that has simulated weather measurements for several days in May
2017. The timetable variables Tmax and Tmin contain maximum and minimum
temperature readings for each day, and PrecipTotal contains total precipitation for the
day. WXEvent is a categorical array, recording whether certain kinds of weather events,
such as thunder or hail, happened on any given day. The timetable has simulated data
from May 4 to May 10, 2017, but is missing data for two days, May 6th and May 7th.
Date = [datetime(2017,5,4) datetime(2017,5,5) datetime(2017,5,8:10)]';
Tmax = [60 62 56 59 60]';
Tmin = [44 45 40 42 45]';
PrecipTotal = [0.2 0 0 0.15 0]';
WXEvent = [2 0 0 1 0]';
WXEvent = categorical(WXEvent,[0 1 2 3 4],{'None','Thunder','Hail','Fog','Tornado'});
Station1 = timetable(Date,Tmax,Tmin,PrecipTotal,WXEvent)
Station1 =
5x4 timetable
Date Tmax Tmin PrecipTotal WXEvent

___________ ____ ____ ___________ _______
04-May-2017 60 44 0.2 Hail

05-May-2017 62 45 0 None
08-May-2017 56 40 0 None
09-May-2017 59 42 0.15 Thunder
10-May-2017 60 45 0 None
10-18
Retime and Synchronize Timetable Variables Using Different Methods
Resample Continuous and Discrete Timetable Variables
One way to fill in data for the two missing days is to use the retime function. If you call
retime without specifying a method, then retime fills in gaps with missing data
indicators. For instance, retime fills gaps in numeric variables with NaN values, and
gaps in the categorical variable with undefined elements.
Station1Daily = retime(Station1,'daily')
Station1Daily =
7x4 timetable

___________ ____ ____ ___________ ___________
04-May-2017 60 44 0.2 Hail

05-May-2017 62 45 0 None
06-May-2017 NaN NaN NaN <undefined>
08-May-2017 56 40 0 None
09-May-2017 59 42 0.15 Thunder
10-May-2017 60 45 0 None
If you specify a method when you call retime, it uses the same method to fill gaps in
every variable. To apply different methods to different variables, you can call retime
multiple times, each time indexing into the timetable to access a different subset of
variables.
However, you also can apply different methods by specifying the VariableContinuity
property of the timetable. You can specify whether each variable contains continuous or
discrete data. Then the retime function applies a different method to each timetable
variable, depending on the corresponding VariableContinuity value.
If you specify VariableContinuity, then the retime function fills in the output
timetable variables using the following methods:
• 'unset' — Fill in values using the missing data indicator for that type (such as NaN
for numeric variables).
• 'continuous' — Fill in values using linear interpolation.
10-19
10 Timetables
• 'step' — Fill in values using previous value.

• 'event' — Fill in values using the missing data indicator for that type.
Specify that the temperature data in Station1 is continuous, that PrecipTotal is step
data, and that WXEvent is event data.
Station1.Properties.VariableContinuity = {'continuous','continuous','step','event'};
Station1.Properties
ans =
struct with fields:
Description: ''
UserData: []
DimensionNames: {'Date' 'Variables'}
VariableNames: {'Tmax' 'Tmin' 'PrecipTotal' 'WXEvent'}
VariableUnits: {}
VariableContinuity: [continuous continuous step event]
RowTimes: [5x1 datetime]
Resample the data in Station1. Given the values assigned to VariableContinuity,

the retime function interpolates the temperature data, fills in the previous day's values
in PrecipTotal, and fills in WXEvent with undefined elements.
Station1Daily = retime(Station1,'daily')
Station1Daily =
7x4 timetable

___________ ____ ______ ___________ ___________
04-May-2017 60 44 0.2 Hail

05-May-2017 62 45 0 None
06-May-2017 60 43.333 0 <undefined>
07-May-2017 58 41.667 0 <undefined>
08-May-2017 56 40 0 None
09-May-2017 59 42 0.15 Thunder
10-20
Retime and Synchronize Timetable Variables Using Different Methods
10-May-2017 60 45 0 None
If you specify a method, then retime applies that method to all variables, overriding the
values in VariableContinuity.
Station1Missing = retime(Station1,'daily','fillwithmissing')
Station1Missing =
7x4 timetable

___________ ____ ____ ___________ ___________
04-May-2017 60 44 0.2 Hail

05-May-2017 62 45 0 None
08-May-2017 56 40 0 None
09-May-2017 59 42 0.15 Thunder
10-May-2017 60 45 0 None
Synchronize Timetables That Contain Continuous and Discrete Data
The synchronize function also fills in output timetable variables using different
methods, depending on the values specified in the VariableContinuity property of
each input timetable.
Create a second timetable that contains pressure readings in millibars from a second
weather station. The timetable has simulated readings from May 4 to May 8, 2017.
Date = datetime(2017,5,4:8)';
Pressure = [995 1003 1013 1018 1006]';
Station2 = timetable(Date,Pressure)
Station2 =
5x1 timetable
Date Pressure
___________ ________
10-21
10 Timetables
04-May-2017 995
05-May-2017 1003
06-May-2017 1013
07-May-2017 1018
08-May-2017 1006
Synchronize the data from the two stations using the synchronize function.
synchronize fills in values for variables from Station1 according to the values in the
VariableContinuity property of Station1. However, since the
VariableContinuity property of Station2 is empty, synchronize fills in Pressure
with NaN values.
BothStations = synchronize(Station1,Station2)
BothStations =
7x5 timetable
Date Tmax Tmin PrecipTotal WXEvent Pressure

___________ ____ ______ ___________ ___________ ________
04-May-2017 60 44 0.2 Hail 995

05-May-2017 62 45 0 None 1003
06-May-2017 60 43.333 0 <undefined> 1013
07-May-2017 58 41.667 0 <undefined> 1018
08-May-2017 56 40 0 None 1006
09-May-2017 59 42 0.15 Thunder NaN
10-May-2017 60 45 0 None NaN
To indicate that Station2.Pressure contains continuous data, specify the

VariableContinuity property of Station2. Though Station2 contains only one
variable, you must specify VariableContinuity using a cell array, not a character
vector.
Station2.Properties.VariableContinuity = {'continuous'};
Station2.Properties
ans =
10-22
See Also
struct with fields:
Description: ''
UserData: []
DimensionNames: {'Date' 'Variables'}
VariableNames: {'Pressure'}
VariableUnits: {}
VariableContinuity: continuous
RowTimes: [5x1 datetime]
Synchronize the data from the two stations. synchronize fills in values in
BothStations.Pressure because Station2.Pressure has continuous data.
BothStations = synchronize(Station1,Station2)
BothStations =
7x5 timetable
Date Tmax Tmin PrecipTotal WXEvent Pressure

___________ ____ ______ ___________ ___________ ________
04-May-2017 60 44 0.2 Hail 995

05-May-2017 62 45 0 None 1003
06-May-2017 60 43.333 0 <undefined> 1013
07-May-2017 58 41.667 0 <undefined> 1018
08-May-2017 56 40 0 None 1006
09-May-2017 59 42 0.15 Thunder 994
10-May-2017 60 45 0 None 982
If you specify a method as an input argument to synchronize, then synchronize

applies that method to all variables, just as the retime function does.
See Also
retime | synchronize | timetable
10-23
10 Timetables
Related Examples
10-24
Select Timetable Data by Row Time and Variable Type

A timetable is a type of table that associates a time with each row. You can subscript into
a timetable to select subsets of its data in a number of different ways. To select timetable
rows with row times that fall within a given time range, specify the time range using the
timerange function. Since a timetable is a table, you can index on rows and variables
using either smooth parentheses or curly braces. You can index on specific row times, or
select rows with row times that match specified times within a tolerance you set using
the withtol function. You can also subscript into a table or timetable to select all the
variables that match a type you specify with the vartype function. Finally, extract data
from a timetable into a matrix using the Variables property.
Create Timetable from File
Create a timetable from the sample file outages.csv, containing data representing
electric utility outages in the United States. Read the table from the file with the
readtable function. Convert T.Cause and T.Region into categorical arrays. Then
convert the table to a timetable using the table2timetable function. Display the first
five rows of the timetable. TT is a timetable containing outage data from February 2002
to January 2014.
T = readtable('outages.csv');
T.Cause = categorical(T.Cause);
T.Region = categorical(T.Region);
TT = table2timetable(T);
TT(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
OutageTime Region Loss Customers RestorationTime C
________________ _________ ______ __________ ________________ ______
2002-02-01 12:18 SouthWest 458.98 1.8202e+06 2002-02-07 16:50 winter

2003-01-23 00:49 SouthEast 530.14 2.1204e+05 NaT winter
2003-02-07 21:15 SouthEast 289.4 1.4294e+05 2003-02-17 08:14 winter
2004-04-06 05:44 West 434.81 3.4037e+05 2004-04-06 06:10 equipm
2002-03-16 06:18 MidWest 186.44 2.1275e+05 2002-03-18 23:23 severe
Summarize Timetable and Access Row Times
Display a summary of TT. It is a timetable that contains 1468 rows and five variables.
summary(TT)
10-25
10 Timetables
RowTimes:
OutageTime: 1468x1 datetime

Values:
Min 2002-02-01 12:18

Median 2010-03-18 21:05
Max 2014-01-15 02:41
Variables:
Region: 1468x1 categorical
Values:
MidWest 142
NorthEast 557
SouthEast 389
SouthWest 26
West 354
Loss: 1468x1 double
Values:
Min 0
Median 180.26
Max 23418
NumMissing 604
Customers: 1468x1 double
Values:
Min 0
Median 75765
Max 5.9689e+06
NumMissing 328
RestorationTime: 1468x1 datetime
Values:
Min 2002-02-07 16:50
10-26
Median 2010-03-31 10:54

Max 2042-09-18 23:31
NumMissing 29
Cause: 1468x1 categorical
Values:
attack 294
earthquake 2
energy emergency 188
equipment fault 156
fire 25
severe storm 338
thunder storm 201
unknown 24
wind 95
winter storm 145
Access the row times. The row times are not in a variable. Instead, the vector of row
times is a property of the timetable. However, you can access the row times with dot
syntax. TT.OutageTime is a 1468-by-1 vector of datetime values. Display the first five
rows of TT.OutageTime.
TT.OutageTime(1:5)
ans = 5x1 datetime array

2002-02-01 12:18
2003-01-23 00:49
2003-02-07 21:15
2004-04-06 05:44
2002-03-16 06:18
Subscript on Time Range
To select all timetable rows that fall in a time range, create a subscript as a helper, using
the timerange function. The start and end times you specify do not have to match any of
the row times in the timetable.
Select all rows with outages that occurred between January 2002 and December 2003.
Display the first five rows of TT2.
10-27
10 Timetables
TR = timerange('2002-01-01','2003-12-31');
TT2 = TT(TR,:);
TT2(1:5,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
OutageTime Region Loss Customers RestorationTime Cau
________________ _________ ______ __________ ________________ ______

2003-01-23 00:49 SouthEast 530.14 2.1204e+05 NaT winter
2002-03-16 06:18 MidWest 186.44 2.1275e+05 2002-03-18 23:23 severe
2003-06-18 02:49 West 0 0 2003-06-18 10:54 attack
Display the last five rows of TT2.

TT2(end-4:end,:)
ans=5x5 timetable
OutageTime Region Loss Customers RestorationTime C
________________ _________ ______ __________ ________________ ______
2003-09-02 19:46 SouthEast 0 0 2003-09-16 22:25 severe

2003-09-15 14:56 MidWest 418.7 61045 2003-09-22 04:21 thunde
2003-09-24 22:43 SouthWest 2576.9 9.4873e+05 2003-09-25 14:46 severe
2003-09-18 10:40 SouthWest 301.8 2.3973e+05 2003-09-27 08:17 severe
2003-10-11 19:36 SouthEast 309.8 93582 2003-10-11 19:49 energy
TT2 is a timetable with only 98 rows, containing outage data only from 2002 and 2003.
Index on Specified Times
You can index into TT with datetime values or character vectors representing specific
times in TT.OutageTime. But when you do so, the times you specify must have exact
matches in the time vector, and only those times are selected. Index into TT on times for
the first and third rows of TT.
TT({'2002-02-01 12:18:00','2003-02-07 21:15:00'},:)
ans=2x5 timetable
________________ _________ ______ __________ ________________ ______
10-28

Index on Specified Times with Tolerances
Specify a tolerance when indexing on times. You can use the withtol function to create
a subscript as a helper. With the output of withtol, you can select row times that match
within the specified tolerance.
Index into TT on specified dates. Specify a tolerance of one day to return rows with row
times that are within one day of the specified dates. The times must be in a datetime or
duration vector, or in a cell array of character vectors that can be converted to datetime
or duration values. The tolerance must be specified as a duration, using a function such
as seconds, minutes, hours, or days.
rowTimes = {'2002-02-01','2003-02-07'};
S = withtol(rowTimes,days(1));
TT(S,:)
ans=2x5 timetable
________________ _________ ______ __________ ________________ ______

Subscript by Variable Type
To select all timetable variables that are of a given type, create a subscript as a helper,
using the vartype function. You can specify variable types without having to specify
their names or positions in the timetable.
Select all variables that contain numeric data. TT2 contains only the variables Loss and
Customers. The other three variables of TT are either categorical or datetime variables.
Display the first five rows of TT2.
S = vartype('numeric');
TT2 = TT(:,S);
TT2(1:5,:)
ans=5x2 timetable
OutageTime Loss Customers
10-29
10 Timetables
________________ ______ __________
2002-02-01 12:18 458.98 1.8202e+06

2003-01-23 00:49 530.14 2.1204e+05
2003-02-07 21:15 289.4 1.4294e+05
2004-04-06 05:44 434.81 3.4037e+05
2002-03-16 06:18 186.44 2.1275e+05
Subscript both on a time range and by variable type.

TR = timerange('2002-01-01','2003-12-31');
TT2 = TT(TR,S);
TT2(1:5,:)
ans=5x2 timetable
OutageTime Loss Customers
________________ ______ __________
2002-02-01 12:18 458.98 1.8202e+06

2003-01-23 00:49 530.14 2.1204e+05
2003-02-07 21:15 289.4 1.4294e+05
2002-03-16 06:18 186.44 2.1275e+05
2003-06-18 02:49 0 0
Extract Data with Variables Property
Tables and timetables have a property, Variables, that you can use to extract data
from variables into a matrix, as long as the variables can be concatenated together.
Extract the numeric data from TT2 using the Variables property. A is a 1468-by-2
matrix of doubles. When you extract data from a timetable into an array, the row times
are not included.
A = TT2.Variables;
A(1:5,:)
ans =
1.0e+06 *
0.0005 1.8202
0.0005 0.2120
0.0003 0.1429
10-30
See Also
0.0002 0.2128
0 0
The result of TT2.Variables is the same as the result of using curly braces to extract
data, using the TT2{:,:} syntax.
You can concatenate the variables in TT2 into an array of doubles. However, TT contains
numeric, categorical, and datetime variables that cannot be concatenated. The
Variables property returns an error when variables cannot be concatenated. To avoid
such an error, you can subscript by variable type before using the Variables property.
Subscript into TT to select numeric variables and extract them into a matrix.
A = TT(:,vartype('numeric')).Variables;
A(1:5,:)
ans =
1.0e+06 *
0.0005 1.8202
0.0005 0.2120
0.0003 0.1429
0.0004 0.3404
0.0002 0.2128
See Also
retime | synchronize | table2timetable | timerange | timetable | vartype |
withtol
Related Examples
10-31
10 Timetables
Clean Timetable with Missing, Duplicate, or Nonuniform Times

This example shows how to create a regular timetable from one that has missing,
duplicate, or nonuniform times. A timetable is a type of table that associates a time-
stamp, or row time, with each row of data. In a regular timetable, the row times are
sorted and unique, and differ by the same regular time step. The example also shows how
to export the data from a timetable for use with other functions.
Timetables can be irregular. They can contain rows that are not sorted by their row
times. Timetables can contain multiple rows with the same row time, though the rows
can have different data values. Even when row times are sorted and unique, they can
differ by time steps of different sizes. Timetables can even contain NaT or NaN values to
indicate missing row times.
Timetables provide a number of different ways to resolve missing, duplicate, or

nonuniform times, and to resample or aggregate data to regular row times.
• To find missing row times, use ismissing.

• To remove missing times and data, use rmmissing.
• To sort a timetable by its row times, use sortrows.
• To make a timetable with unique and sorted row times, use unique and retime.
• To remove duplicate times, specify a unique time vector and use retime.
• To make a regular timetable, specify a regular time vector and use retime.
10-32
Load Timetable
Load a sample timetable from the MAT-file badTimes that contains weather
measurements taken over several hours on June 9, 2016. The timetable includes
temperature, rainfall, and wind speed measurements taken at irregular times
throughout that day.
load badTimes
TT
TT=12x3 timetable
Time Temp Rain WindSpeed
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3

09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
10-33
10 Timetables
56 0 0
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 75.8 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 67.2 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 04:12:00 58.8 NaN NaN
Remove Rows with Missing Times
Remove rows that have NaT, or a missing value, as the row time. To find missing values
in the vector of row times, use the ismissing function. ismissing returns a logical
vector that contains 1 wherever TT.Time has a missing value. Index back into the
timetable to keep only those rows that do not have missing values as row times. Assign
those rows to TT2.
TF = ismissing(TT.Time);
TT2 = TT(~TF,:);
TT2
TT2=11x3 timetable
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3

09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 75.8 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 67.2 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 04:12:00 58.8 NaN NaN
This method removes only the rows that have missing row times. The table variables
might still have missing data values. For example, the last row of TT2 has NaN values for
the Rain and Windspeed variables.
10-34
Remove Rows with Missing Times or Missing Data
You can remove missing row times and missing data values using the rmmissing
function. rmmissing removes any timetable row that has a missing row time, missing
data values, or both.
Display the missing row time and missing data values of TT. Then remove all missing
values from TT.
TT
TT=12x3 timetable
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3

09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
56 0 0
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 75.8 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 67.2 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 04:12:00 58.8 NaN NaN
TT = rmmissing(TT)
TT=10x3 timetable
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3

09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 75.8 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3
10-35
10 Timetables
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 67.2 0.01 2.7
Sort Timetable and Determine Whether It Is Regular
Determine whether TT is sorted. Then, sort the timetable on its row times using the
sortrows function.
TF = issorted(TT)
TF = logical
0
TT = sortrows(TT)
TT=10x3 timetable
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3

09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3
09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 75.8 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 67.2 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
Determine whether TT is regular. A regular timetable has the same time interval
between consecutive row times. Even a sorted timetable can have time steps that are not
uniform.
TF = isregular(TT)
TF = logical
0
Display the differences between row times.

diff(TT.Time)
10-36
ans = 9x1 duration array

00:57:53
01:58:19
00:49:47
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
01:04:47
00:00:00
00:00:00
Remove Duplicate Rows
Timetables can have duplicate rows. Timetable rows are duplicates if they have the same
row times and the same data values. In this example, the last two rows of TT are
duplicates.
To remove the duplicate rows, use the unique function. unique returns the unique rows
and sorts them by their row times.
TT = unique(TT)
TT=9x3 timetable
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3

09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3
09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 67.2 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 75.8 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
Find Rows with Duplicate Times and Different Data
Timetables can have rows with duplicate row times but different data values. In this
example, TT has several rows with the same row times but different values.
Find the rows that have duplicate row times. First, sort the row times and find
consecutive times that have no difference between them. Times with no difference
10-37
10 Timetables
between them are the duplicates. Index back into the vector of row times and return a
unique set of times that identify the duplicate row times in TT.
dupTimes = sort(TT.Time);
TF = (diff(dupTimes) == 0);
dupTimes = dupTimes(TF);
dupTimes = unique(dupTimes)
dupTimes = 2x1 datetime array

09-Jun-2016 08:49:10
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57
Index into the timetable to display the rows with duplicate row times. When you index on
times, the output timetable contains all rows with matching row times.
TT(dupTimes,:)
ans=6x3 timetable
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7

09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 67.2 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 75.8 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
Select First and Last Rows with Duplicate Times
Select either the first and the last of the rows with duplicate row times using the unique
and retime functions.
First, create a vector of unique row times from TT using the unique function.
uniqueTimes = unique(TT.Time);
Select the first row from each set of rows that have duplicate times.
TT2 = retime(TT,uniqueTimes)
TT2=5x3 timetable
10-38
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3

09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3
09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 62 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 59 0.03 3.4
Select the last rows from each set of rows that have duplicate times. Specify the
'previous' method of retime to copy data from the last row. When you specify
'previous', then retime starts at the end of the vector of row times and stops when it
encounters a duplicate row time. Then it copies the data from that row.
TT2 = retime(TT,uniqueTimes,'previous')
TT2=5x3 timetable
____________________ ____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3

09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3
09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 82 0.01 2.7
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 67 0.03 3.4
Aggregate Data from All Rows with Duplicate Times
Aggregate data from rows that have duplicate row times. For example, you can calculate
the means of several measurements of the same quantity taken at the same time.
Calculate the mean temperature, rainfall, and wind speed for rows with duplicate row
times using the retime function.
TT = retime(TT,uniqueTimes,'mean')
TT=5x3 timetable
____________________ _____ ____ _________
09-Jun-2016 05:03:11 66.2 0.05 3

09-Jun-2016 06:01:04 73 0.01 2.3
09-Jun-2016 07:59:23 59 0.08 0.9
09-Jun-2016 08:49:10 71.75 0.01 2.7
10-39
10 Timetables
09-Jun-2016 09:53:57 63 0.03 3.4
Make Timetable Regular
Create a regular timetable using retime. Interpolate the data onto a regular hourly time
vector. To use linear interpolation, specify 'linear'. Each row time in TT begins on the
hour, and there is a one-hour interval between consecutive row times.
TT = retime(TT,'hourly','linear')
TT=6x3 timetable
____________________ ______ ________ _________
09-Jun-2016 05:00:00 65.826 0.0522 3.0385

09-Jun-2016 06:00:00 72.875 0.010737 2.3129
09-Jun-2016 07:00:00 66.027 0.044867 1.6027
09-Jun-2016 08:00:00 59.158 0.079133 0.9223
09-Jun-2016 09:00:00 70.287 0.013344 2.8171
09-Jun-2016 10:00:00 62.183 0.031868 3.4654
Extract Regular Timetable Data
You can export the timetable data for use with functions to analyze data that is regularly
spaced in time. For example, the Econometrics Toolbox™ and the Signal Processing
Toolbox™ have functions you can use for further analysis on regularly spaced data.
Extract the timetable data as an array. You can use the Variables property to return
the data as an array when the table variables can be concatenated.
A = TT.Variables;
A(1:5,:)
ans =
65.8260 0.0522 3.0385

72.8747 0.0107 2.3129
66.0266 0.0449 1.6027
59.1579 0.0791 0.9223
70.2868 0.0133 2.8171
TT.Variables is equivalent to using curly braces to access all variables.
10-40
See Also
A2 = TT{:,:};
A2(1:5,:)
ans =
65.8260 0.0522 3.0385

72.8747 0.0107 2.3129
66.0266 0.0449 1.6027
59.1579 0.0791 0.9223
70.2868 0.0133 2.8171
See Also
diff | fillmissing | isregular | issorted | retime | rmmissing | sortrows |
table2timetable | timetable | unique
Related Examples
10-18
10-41
10 Timetables
Using Row Labels in Table and Timetable Operations

Tables and timetables provide ways to label the rows in your data. In tables, you can
label the rows with names. In timetables, you must label the rows with dates, times, or
both. Row names are optional for tables, but row times are required for timetables. These
row labels are part of the metadata in a table or timetable. In some functions you also
can use row labels as key variables, grouping variables, and so on, just as you can use the
data variables in a table or timetable. These functions are sortrows, join, innerjoin,
outerjoin, varfun, rowfun, stack, and unstack. There are some limitations on using
these table functions and on using row labels as key variables.
Sort on Row Labels
For example, you can sort a timetable on its row times, on one or more of its data
variables, or on row times and data variables together.
Create a timetable using the timetable function. A timetable has row times along its
first dimension, labeling the rows. The row times are a property of the timetable, not a
timetable variable.
Date = datetime(2016,7,[10;10;11;11;10;10;11;11]);
X = [1;1;1;1;2;2;2;2];
Y = {'a';'b';'a';'b';'a';'b';'a';'b'};
Z = [1;2;3;4;5;6;7;8];
TT = timetable(X,Y,Z,'RowTimes',Date)
TT=8x3 timetable
Time X Y Z
___________ _ ___ _
10-Jul-2016 1 'a' 1
10-Jul-2016 1 'b' 2
11-Jul-2016 1 'a' 3
11-Jul-2016 1 'b' 4
10-Jul-2016 2 'a' 5
10-Jul-2016 2 'b' 6
11-Jul-2016 2 'a' 7
11-Jul-2016 2 'b' 8
Rename the first dimension. By default, the name of the first dimension of a timetable is
Time. You can access the Properties.DimensionNames property to rename a
dimension.
10-42
TT.Properties.DimensionNames{1} = 'Date';
TT.Properties.DimensionNames

{'Date'} {'Variables'}
As an alternative, you can specify the row times as the first input argument to
timetable, without specifying 'RowTimes'. The timetable function names the row
times, or the first dimension, after the first input argument, just as it names the
timetable variables after the other input arguments.
TT = timetable(Date,X,Y,Z)
TT=8x3 timetable
Date X Y Z
___________ _ ___ _
10-Jul-2016 1 'a' 1
10-Jul-2016 1 'b' 2
11-Jul-2016 1 'a' 3
11-Jul-2016 1 'b' 4
10-Jul-2016 2 'a' 5
10-Jul-2016 2 'b' 6
11-Jul-2016 2 'a' 7
11-Jul-2016 2 'b' 8
Sort the timetable by row times. To sort on row times, refer to the first dimension of the
timetable by name.
sortrows(TT,'Date')
ans=8x3 timetable
Date X Y Z
___________ _ ___ _
10-Jul-2016 1 'a' 1
10-Jul-2016 1 'b' 2
10-Jul-2016 2 'a' 5
10-Jul-2016 2 'b' 6
11-Jul-2016 1 'a' 3
11-Jul-2016 1 'b' 4
11-Jul-2016 2 'a' 7
10-43
10 Timetables
11-Jul-2016 2 'b' 8
Sort by the data variables X and Y. sortrows sorts on X first, then on Y.

sortrows(TT,{'X' 'Y'})
ans=8x3 timetable
Date X Y Z
___________ _ ___ _
10-Jul-2016 1 'a' 1
11-Jul-2016 1 'a' 3
10-Jul-2016 1 'b' 2
11-Jul-2016 1 'b' 4
10-Jul-2016 2 'a' 5
11-Jul-2016 2 'a' 7
10-Jul-2016 2 'b' 6
11-Jul-2016 2 'b' 8
Sort by row times and X together.

sortrows(TT,{'Date' 'X'})
ans=8x3 timetable
Date X Y Z
___________ _ ___ _
10-Jul-2016 1 'a' 1
10-Jul-2016 1 'b' 2
10-Jul-2016 2 'a' 5
10-Jul-2016 2 'b' 6
11-Jul-2016 1 'a' 3
11-Jul-2016 1 'b' 4
11-Jul-2016 2 'a' 7
11-Jul-2016 2 'b' 8
Use Row Labels as Grouping or Key Variables
When you group rows together using the rowfun, varfun, stack, and unstack
functions, you can specify row labels as grouping variables. When you join tables or
timetable together using the join, innerjoin, and outerjoin functions, you can
specify row labels as key variables.
10-44
For example, you can perform an inner join two tables together, using row names and a
table variable together as key variables. An inner join keeps only those table rows that
match with respect to the key variables.
Create two tables of patient data. A table can have row names along its first dimension,
labeling the rows, but is not required to have them. Specify the last names of patients as
the row names of the tables. Add the first names of the patients as table variables.
A = table({'Michael';'Louis';'Alice';'Rosemary';'Julie'},[38;43;45;40;49],...
'VariableNames',{'FirstName' 'Age'},...
'RowNames',{'Garcia' 'Johnson' 'Wu' 'Jones' 'Picard'})
A=5x2 table
FirstName Age
__________ ___
Garcia 'Michael' 38
Johnson 'Louis' 43
Wu 'Alice' 45
Jones 'Rosemary' 40
Picard 'Julie' 49
B = table({'Michael';'Beverly';'Alice'},...
[64;69;67],...
[119;163;133],...
[122 80; 109 77; 117 75],...
'VariableNames',{'FirstName' 'Height' 'Weight' 'BloodPressure'},...
'RowNames',{'Garcia' 'Johnson' 'Wu'})
B=3x4 table
FirstName Height Weight BloodPressure
_________ ______ ______ _____________
Garcia 'Michael' 64 119 122 80

Johnson 'Beverly' 69 163 109 77
Wu 'Alice' 67 133 117 75
If a table has row names, then you can index into it by row name. Indexing by row names
is a convenient way to select rows of a table. Index into B by a patient's last name to
retrieve information about the patient.
B('Garcia',:)
10-45
10 Timetables
ans=1x4 table
FirstName Height Weight BloodPressure
_________ ______ ______ _____________
Garcia 'Michael' 64 119 122 80
Perform an inner join on the two tables. Both tables use the last names of patients as row
names, and contain the first names as a table variable. Some patients in the two tables
have matching last names but different first names. To ensure that both last and first
names match, use the row names and FirstName as key variables. To specify the row
names as a key or grouping variable, use the name of the first dimension of the table. By
default, the name of the first dimension is 'Row'.
C = innerjoin(A,B,'Keys',{'Row','FirstName'})
C=2x5 table
FirstName Age Height Weight BloodPressure
_________ ___ ______ ______ _____________
Garcia 'Michael' 38 64 119 122 80

Wu 'Alice' 45 67 133 117 75
If you rename the first dimension of a table, then you can refer to the row names by that
name instead of using 'Row'. Perform the same inner join as above but use a different
name to refer to the row names.
Show the dimension names of A by accessing its Properties.DimensionNames

property.
A.Properties.DimensionNames

{'Row'} {'Variables'}
Change the name of the first dimension of the table by using its
Properties.DimensionNames property. Then use the new name as a key variable.
A.Properties.DimensionNames{1} = 'LastName';
A.Properties.DimensionNames
10-46
See Also

{'LastName'} {'Variables'}
Perform an inner join on A and B using LastName and FirstName as key variables.
B.Properties.DimensionNames{1} = 'LastName';
D = innerjoin(A,B,'Keys',{'LastName','FirstName'})
D=2x5 table
FirstName Age Height Weight BloodPressure
_________ ___ ______ ______ _____________
Garcia 'Michael' 38 64 119 122 80

Wu 'Alice' 45 67 133 117 75
Notes on Use of Table Functions and Row Labels
• You cannot stack or unstack row labels using the stack and unstack functions.
However, you can use row labels as grouping variables.
• You cannot perform a join using the join, innerjoin, or outerjoin functions when
the first argument is a table and the second argument is a timetable. However, you
can perform a join when both arguments are tables, both are timetables, or the first
argument is a timetable and the second is a table.
• The output of a join operation can have row labels if you specify row labels as key
variables. For more details on row labels from a join operation, see the documentation
on the 'Keys', 'LeftKeys', and 'RightKeys' arguments of the join, innerjoin,
and outerjoin functions.
See Also
innerjoin | join | outerjoin | rowfun | sortrows | stack | unstack | varfun
10-47
11
Structures

• “Access Data in a Structure Array” on page 11-7
• “Concatenate Structures” on page 11-11
• “Generate Field Names from Variables” on page 11-14
• “Access Data in Nested Structures” on page 11-15
• “Access Elements of a Nonscalar Struct Array” on page 11-17
• “Ways to Organize Data in Structure Arrays” on page 11-19
• “Memory Requirements for a Structure Array” on page 11-23
11 Structures
Create Structure Array

This example shows how to create a structure array. A structure is a data type that
groups related data using data containers called fields. Each field can contain data of any
type or size.
Store a patient record in a scalar structure with fields name, billing, and test.
patient(1).name = 'John Doe';

patient(1).billing = 127.00;
patient(1).test = [79, 75, 73; 180, 178, 177.5; 220, 210, 205];
patient
patient = struct with fields:

name: 'John Doe'
billing: 127
test: [3x3 double]
Add records for other patients to the array by including subscripts after the array name.
11-2
Create Structure Array
patient(2).name = 'Ann Lane';

patient(2).test = [68, 70, 68; 118, 118, 119; 172, 170, 169];
patient
patient = 1x2 struct array with fields:

name
billing
test
Each patient record in the array is a structure of class struct. An array of structures is
often referred to as a struct array. Like other MATLAB arrays, a struct array can have
any dimensions.
A struct array has the following properties:
• All structs in the array have the same number of fields.

• All structs have the same field names.
• Fields of the same name in different structs can contain different types or sizes of
data.
11-3
11 Structures
Any unspecified fields for new structs in the array contain empty arrays.
patient(3).name = 'New Name';
patient(3)
ans = struct with fields:

name: 'New Name'
billing: []
test: []
Access data in the structure array to find how much the first patient owes, and to create
a bar graph of his test results.
amount_due = patient(1).billing
amount_due = 127
bar(patient(1).test)
title(['Test Results for ', patient(1).name])
11-4
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
11-5
11 Structures
More About
• “Cell vs. Struct Arrays” on page 12-19
11-6
Access Data in a Structure Array

This example shows how to access the contents of a structure array. To run the code in
this example, load several variables into a scalar (1-by-1) structure named S.
S = load('clown.mat')
S = struct with fields:

X: [200x320 double]
map: [81x3 double]
caption: [2x1 char]
The variables from the file (X, caption, and map) are now fields in the struct.
Access the data using dot notation of the form structName.fieldName. For example,
pass the numeric data in field X to the image function:
image(S.X)
colormap(S.map)
11-7
11 Structures
To access part of a field, add indices as appropriate for the size and type of data in the
field. For example, pass the upper left corner of X to the image function:
upperLeft = S.X(1:50,1:80);
image(upperLeft);
11-8
If a particular field contains a cell array, use curly braces to access the data, such as
S.cellField{1:50,1:80}.
Data in Nonscalar Structure Arrays
Create a nonscalar array by loading data from the file mandrill.mat into a second
element of array S:
S(2) = load('mandrill.mat')
Each element of a structure array must have the same fields. Both clown.mat and
mandrill.mat contain variables X, map, and caption.
S is a 1-by-2 array.
11-9
11 Structures
S =
1×2 struct array with fields:
X
map
caption
For nonscalar structures, the syntax for accessing a particular field is

structName(indices).fieldName. Redisplay the clown image, specifying the index
for the clown struct (1):
image(S(1).X)
colormap(S(1).map)
Add indices to select and redisplay the upper left corner of the field contents:
upperLeft = S(1).X(1:50,1:80);
image(upperLeft)
Note You can index into part of a field only when you refer to a single element of a
structure array. MATLAB does not support statements such as S(1:2).X(1:50,1:80),
which attempt to index into a field for multiple elements of the structure.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Access Data in Nested Structures” on page 11-15
• “Generate Field Names from Variables” on page 11-14
11-10
Concatenate Structures
Concatenate Structures
This example shows how to concatenate structure arrays using the [] operator. To
concatenate structures, they must have the same set of fields, but the fields do not need
to contain the same sizes or types of data.
Create scalar (1-by-1) structure arrays struct1 and struct2, each with fields a and b:
struct1.a = 'first';
struct1.b = [1,2,3];
struct2.a = 'second';
struct2.b = rand(5);
struct1,struct2
struct1 =
struct with fields:
a: 'first'
b: [1 2 3]
struct2 =
struct with fields:
a: 'second'
b: [5x5 double]
Just as concatenating two scalar values such as [1,2] creates a 1-by-2 numeric array,
concatenating struct1 and struct2 creates a 1-by-2 structure array.
combined = [struct1,struct2]
combined =
1x2 struct array with fields:
a
b
11-11
11 Structures
When you want to access the contents of a particular field, specify the index of the
structure in the array. For example, access field a of the first structure.
combined(1).a
ans =
'first'
Concatenation also applies to nonscalar structure arrays. For example, create a 2-by-2
structure array named new. Because the 1-by-2 structure combined and the 2-by-2
structure new both have two columns, you can concatenate them vertically with a
semicolon separator.
new(1,1).a = 1;
new(1,1).b = 10;
new(1,2).a = 2;
new(1,2).b = 20;
new(2,1).a = 3;
new(2,1).b = 30;
new(2,2).a = 4;
new(2,2).b = 40;
larger = [combined; new]
larger =
3x2 struct array with fields:
a
b
Access field a of the structure larger(2,1). It contains the same value as new(1,1).a.
larger(2,1).a
ans =
11-12
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
• “Creating and Concatenating Matrices”
11-13
11 Structures
Generate Field Names from Variables

This example shows how to derive a structure field name at run time from a variable or
expression. The general syntax is
structName.(dynamicExpression)
where dynamicExpression is a variable or expression that, when evaluated, returns a

character vector. Field names that you reference with expressions are called dynamic
field names.
For example, create a field name from the current date:

currentDate = datestr(now,'mmmdd');
myStruct.(currentDate) = [1,2,3]
If the current date reported by your system is February 29, then this code assigns data to
a field named Feb29:
myStruct =
Feb29: [1 2 3]
Field names, like variable names, must begin with a letter, can contain letters, digits, or
underscore characters, and are case sensitive. To avoid potential conflicts, do not use the
names of existing variables or functions as field names. For more information, see
“Variable Names” on page 1-5.
11-14
Access Data in Nested Structures
Access Data in Nested Structures

This example shows how to index into a structure that is nested within another
structure. The general syntax for accessing data in a particular field is
structName(index).nestedStructName(index).fieldName(indices)
When a structure is scalar (1-by-1), you do not need to include the indices to refer to the
single element. For example, create a scalar structure s, where field n is a nested scalar
structure with fields a, b, and c:
s.n.a = ones(3);
s.n.b = eye(4);
s.n.c = magic(5);
Access the third row of field b:
third_row_b = s.n.b(3,:)
Variable third_row_b contains the third row of eye(4).
third_row_b =
0 0 1 0
Expand s so that both s and n are nonscalar (1-by-2):
s(1).n(2).a = 2*ones(3);
s(1).n(2).b = 2*eye(4);
s(1).n(2).c = 2*magic(5);
s(2).n(1).a = '1a';
s(2).n(2).a = '2a';
s(2).n(1).b = '1b';
s(2).n(2).b = '2b';
s(2).n(1).c = '1c';
s(2).n(2).c = '2c';
Structure s now contains the data shown in the following figure.
11-15
11 Structures
s(1)
.n(1) .a 1 1 1 .n(2) .a 2 2 2
1 1 1 2 2 2
1 1 1 2 2 2
.b 1 0 0 0 .b 2 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2
.c 17 24 1 8 15 .c 34 48 2 16 30
23 5 7 14 16 46 10 14 28 32
4 6 13 20 22 8 12 26 40 44
10 12 19 21 3 20 24 38 42 6
11 18 25 2 9 22 36 50 4 18
s(2)
.n(1) .a 1a .n(2) .a 2a
.b 1b .b 2b
.c 1c .c 2c
Access part of the array in field b of the second element in n within the first element of s:
part_two_eye = s(1).n(2).b(1:2,1:2)
This returns the 2-by-2 upper left corner of 2*eye(4):
part_two_eye =
2 0
0 2
11-16
Access Elements of a Nonscalar Struct Array
Access Elements of a Nonscalar Struct Array

This example shows how to access and process data from multiple elements of a
nonscalar structure array:
Create a 1-by-3 structure s with field f:
s(1).f = 1;
s(2).f = 'two';
s(3).f = 3 * ones(3);
Although each structure in the array must have the same number of fields and the same
field names, the contents of the fields can be different types and sizes. When you refer to
field f for multiple elements of the structure array, such as
s(1:3).f
or
s.f
MATLAB returns the data from the elements in a comma-separated list, which displays
as follows:
ans =
1
ans =
two
ans =
3 3 3
3 3 3
3 3 3
You cannot assign the list to a single variable with the syntax v = s.f because the
fields can contain different types of data. However, you can assign the list items to the
same number of variables, such as
[v1, v2, v3] = s.f;
or assign to elements of a cell array, such as

c = {s.f};
11-17
11 Structures
If all of the fields contain the same type of data and can form a hyperrectangle, you can
concatenate the list items. For example, create a structure nums with scalar numeric
values in field f, and concatenate the data from the fields:
nums(1).f = 1;
nums(2).f = 2;
nums(3).f = 3;
allNums = [nums.f]
This code returns

allNums =
1 2 3
If you want to process each element of an array with the same operation, use the
arrayfun function. For example, count the number of elements in field f of each struct
in array s:
numElements = arrayfun(@(x) numel(x.f), s)
The syntax @(x) creates an anonymous function. This code calls the numel function for
each element of array s, such as numel(s(1).f), and returns
numElements =
1 3 9
For related information, see:

• “Anonymous Functions” on page 20-24
11-18
Ways to Organize Data in Structure Arrays

There are at least two ways you can organize data in a structure array: plane
organization and element-by-element organization. The method that best fits your data
depends on how you plan to access the data, and, for very large data sets, whether you
have system memory constraints.
Plane organization allows easier access to all values within a field. Element-by-element
organization allows easier access to all information related to a single element or record.
The following sections include an example of each type of organization:
• “Plane Organization” on page 11-19

• “Element-by-Element Organization” on page 11-21
When you create a structure array, MATLAB stores information about each element and
field in the array header. As a result, structures with more elements and fields require
more memory than simpler structures that contain the same data. For more information
on memory requirements for arrays, see “How MATLAB Allocates Memory” on page 29-
12.
Plane Organization
Consider an RGB image with three arrays corresponding to color intensity values.
11-19
11 Structures
If you have arrays RED, GREEN, and BLUE in your workspace, then these commands
create a scalar structure named img that uses plane organization:
img.red = RED;
img.green = GREEN;
img.blue = BLUE;
Plane organization allows you to easily extract entire image planes for display, filtering,
or other processing. For example, multiply the red intensity values by 0.9:
adjustedRed = .9 * img.red;
If you have multiple images, you can add them to the img structure, so that each element
img(1),...,img(n) contains an entire image. For an example that adds elements to a
structure, see the following section.
11-20
Element-by-Element Organization
Consider a database with patient information. Each record contains data for the patient’s
name, test results, and billing amount.
These statements create an element in a structure array named patient:

patient(1).test = [79, 75, 73; 180, 178, 177.5; 220, 210, 205];
Additional patients correspond to new elements in the structure. For example, add an
element for a second patient:
patient(2).test = [68, 70, 68; 118, 118, 119; 172, 170, 169];
Element-by-element organization supports simple indexing to access data for a particular

patient. For example, find the average of the first patient’s test results, calculating by
rows (dimension 2) rather than by columns:
aveResultsDoe = mean(patient(1).test,2)
This code returns

aveResultsDoe =
75.6667
11-21
11 Structures
178.5000
212.0000
For information on processing data from more than one element at a time, see “Access
Data in a Structure Array” on page 11-7.
11-22
Memory Requirements for a Structure Array
Memory Requirements for a Structure Array

Structure arrays do not require completely contiguous memory. However, each field
requires contiguous memory, as does the header that MATLAB creates to describe the
array. For very large arrays, incrementally increasing the number of fields or the
number of elements in a field results in Out of Memory errors.
Allocate memory for the contents by assigning initial values with the struct function,
such as
newStruct(1:25,1:50) = struct('a',ones(20),'b',zeros(30),'c',rand(40));
This code creates and populates a 25-by-50 structure array S with fields a, b, and c.
If you prefer not to assign initial values, you can initialize a structure array by assigning
empty arrays to each field of the last element in the structure array, such as
newStruct(25,50).a = [];
newStruct(25,50).b = [];
newStruct(25,50).c = [];
or, equivalently,
newStruct(25,50) = struct('a',[],'b',[],'c',[]);
However, in this case, MATLAB only allocates memory for the header, and not for the
contents of the array.
• “Preallocating Memory”
• “How MATLAB Allocates Memory” on page 29-12
11-23
12
Cell Arrays
• “What Is a Cell Array?” on page 12-2

• “Access Data in Cell Array” on page 12-5
• “Add Cells to Cell Array” on page 12-8
• “Delete Data from Cell Array” on page 12-10
• “Combine Cell Arrays” on page 12-12
• “Pass Contents of Cell Arrays to Functions” on page 12-13
• “Preallocate Memory for Cell Array” on page 12-18
• “Multilevel Indexing to Access Parts of Cells” on page 12-25
12 Cell Arrays
What Is a Cell Array?

A cell array is a data type with indexed data containers called cells. Each cell can contain
any type of data. Cell arrays commonly contain pieces of text, combinations of text and
numbers from spreadsheets or text files, or numeric arrays of different sizes.
There are two ways to refer to the elements of a cell array. Enclose indices in smooth
parentheses, (), to refer to sets of cells — for example, to define a subset of the array.
Enclose indices in curly braces, {}, to refer to the text, numbers, or other data within
individual cells.

12-2
Create Cell Array
Create Cell Array

This example shows how to create a cell array using the {} operator or the cell
function.
When you have data to put into a cell array, create the array using the cell array
construction operator, {}.
myCell = {1, 2, 3;
'text', rand(5,10,2), {11; 22; 33}}
myCell = 2x3 cell array

{[ 1]} {[ 2]} {[ 3]}
{'text'} {5x10x2 double} {3x1 cell}
Like all MATLAB® arrays, cell arrays are rectangular, with the same number of cells in
each row. myCell is a 2-by-3 cell array.
You also can use the {} operator to create an empty 0-by-0 cell array.
C = {}
C =
0x0 empty cell array
To add values to a cell array over time or in a loop, create an empty N-dimensional array
using the cell function.
emptyCell = cell(3,4,2)
emptyCell = 3x4x2 cell array

emptyCell(:,:,1) =
{0x0 double} {0x0 double} {0x0 double} {0x0 double}

emptyCell(:,:,2) =

12-3
12 Cell Arrays
emptyCell is a 3-by-4-by-2 cell array, where each cell contains an empty array, [].
See Also
cell
Related Examples
• “Multidimensional Cell Arrays”
More About
12-4
Access Data in Cell Array
Access Data in Cell Array

This example shows how to read and write data to and from a cell array.
Create a 2-by-3 cell array of text and numeric data.
C = {'one', 'two', 'three';

1, 2, 3}
C = 2x3 cell array

{'one'} {'two'} {'three'}
{[ 1]} {[ 2]} {[ 3]}
There are two ways to refer to the elements of a cell array. Enclose indices in smooth
parentheses, (), to refer to sets of cells--for example, to define a subset of the array.
Enclose indices in curly braces, {}, to refer to the text, numbers, or other data within
individual cells.
Cell Indexing with Smooth Parentheses, ()
Cell array indices in smooth parentheses refer to sets of cells. For example, to create a 2-
by-2 cell array that is a subset of C, use smooth parentheses.
upperLeft = C(1:2,1:2)
upperLeft = 2x2 cell array

{'one'} {'two'}
{[ 1]} {[ 2]}
Update sets of cells by replacing them with the same number of cells. For example,
replace cells in the first row of C with an equivalent-sized (1-by-3) cell array.
C(1,1:3) = {'first','second','third'}
C = 2x3 cell array

{'first'} {'second'} {'third'}
{[ 1]} {[ 2]} {[ 3]}
If cells in your array contain numeric data, you can convert the cells to a numeric array
using the cell2mat function.
12-5
12 Cell Arrays
numericCells = C(2,1:3)
numericCells = 1x3 cell array

{[1]} {[2]} {[3]}
numericVector = cell2mat(numericCells)
numericVector =
1 2 3
numericCells is a 1-by-3 cell array, but numericVector is a 1-by-3 array of type

double.
Content Indexing with Curly Braces, {}
Access the contents of cells--the numbers, text, or other data within the cells--by indexing
with curly braces. For example, to access the contents of the last cell of C, use curly
braces.
last = C{2,3}
last = 3
last is a numeric variable of type double, because the cell contains a double value.
Similarly, you can index with curly braces to replace the contents of a cell.
C{2,3} = 300
C = 2x3 cell array

{'first'} {'second'} {'third'}
{[ 1]} {[ 2]} {[ 300]}
You can access the contents of multiple cells by indexing with curly braces. MATLAB®
returns the contents of the cells as a comma-separated list. Because each cell can contain
a different type of data, you cannot assign this list to a single variable. However, you can
assign the list to the same number of variables as cells. MATLAB® assigns to the
variables in column order.
Assign contents of four cells of C to four variables.
12-6
See Also
[r1c1, r2c1, r1c2, r2c2] = C{1:2,1:2}
r1c1 =
'first'
r2c1 = 1
r1c2 =
'second'
r2c2 = 2
If each cell contains the same type of data, you can create a single variable by applying
the array concatenation operator, [], to the comma-separated list.
Concatenate the contents of the second row into a numeric array.

nums = [C{2,:}]
nums =
1 2 300
See Also
cell | cell2mat
Related Examples
• “Multidimensional Cell Arrays”
12-7
12 Cell Arrays
Add Cells to Cell Array

This example shows how to add cells to a cell array.
Create a 1-by-3 cell array.

C = {1, 2, 3}
C = 1x3 cell array

{[1]} {[2]} {[3]}
Assign data to a cell outside the current dimensions. MATLAB® expands the cell array
to a rectangle that includes the specified subscripts. Any intervening cells contain empty
arrays.
C{4,4} = 44
C = 4x4 cell array

{[ 1]} {[ 2]} {[ 3]} {0x0 double}
{0x0 double} {0x0 double} {0x0 double} {[ 44]}
Add cells without specifying a value by assigning an empty array as the contents of a
cell. C is now a 5-by-5 cell array.
C{5,5} = []
C = 5x5 cell array

Columns 1 through 4
{[ 1]} {[ 2]} {[ 3]} {0x0 double}

{0x0 double} {0x0 double} {0x0 double} {[ 44]}
Column 5
{0x0 double}
{0x0 double}
{0x0 double}
12-8
See Also
{0x0 double}
{0x0 double}
See Also
Related Examples
• “Combine Cell Arrays” on page 12-12
• “Delete Data from Cell Array” on page 12-10
12-9
12 Cell Arrays
Delete Data from Cell Array

This example shows how to remove data from individual cells, and how to delete entire
cells from a cell array.
Create a 3-by-3 cell array

C = {1, 2, 3; 4, 5, 6; 7, 8, 9}
C = 3x3 cell array

{[1]} {[2]} {[3]}
{[4]} {[5]} {[6]}
{[7]} {[8]} {[9]}
Delete the contents of a particular cell by assigning an empty array to the cell, using
curly braces for content indexing, {}.
C{2,2} = []
C = 3x3 cell array

{[1]} {[ 2]} {[3]}
{[4]} {0x0 double} {[6]}
{[7]} {[ 8]} {[9]}
Delete sets of cells using standard array indexing with smooth parentheses, (). For
example, remove the second row of C.
C(2,:) = []
C = 2x3 cell array

{[1]} {[2]} {[3]}
{[7]} {[8]} {[9]}
See Also
Related Examples
• “Add Cells to Cell Array” on page 12-8
12-10
See Also
12-11
12 Cell Arrays
Combine Cell Arrays

This example shows how to combine cell arrays by concatenation or nesting. To run the
code in this example, create several cell arrays with the same number of columns:
C1 = {1, 2, 3};
C2 = {'A', 'B', 'C'};
C3 = {10, 20, 30};
Concatenate cell arrays with the array concatenation operator, []. In this example,
vertically concatenate the cell arrays by separating them with semicolons:
C4 = [C1; C2; C3]
C4 is a 3-by-3 cell array:
C4 =
[ 1] [ 2] [ 3]
'A' 'B' 'C'
[10] [20] [30]
Create a nested cell array with the cell array construction operator, {}:
C5 = {C1; C2; C3}
C5 is a 3-by-1 cell array, where each cell contains a cell array:
C5 =
{1x3 cell}
{1x3 cell}
{1x3 cell}
To combine cell arrays of character vectors into one character vector, use the strjoin
function.
See Also
strjoin
Related Examples
• “Concatenating Matrices”
12-12
Pass Contents of Cell Arrays to Functions

These examples show several ways to pass data from a cell array to a MATLAB®
function that does not recognize cell arrays as inputs.
Pass the contents of a single cell by indexing with curly braces, {}.
This example creates a cell array that contains text and a 20-by-2 array of random
numbers.
randCell = {'Random Data', rand(20,2)};

plot(randCell{1,2})
title(randCell{1,1})
12-13
12 Cell Arrays
Plot only the first column of data by indexing further into the content (multilevel
indexing).
figure
plot(randCell{1,2}(:,1))
title('First Column of Data')
Combine numeric data from multiple cells using the cell2mat function.
This example creates a 5-by-2 cell array that stores temperature data for three cities, and
plots the temperatures for each city by date.
temperature(1,:) = {'01-Jan-2010', [45, 49, 0]};

temperature(2,:) = {'03-Apr-2010', [54, 68, 21]};
12-14
temperature(3,:) = {'20-Jun-2010', [72, 85, 53]};

temperature(4,:) = {'15-Sep-2010', [63, 81, 56]};
temperature(5,:) = {'31-Dec-2010', [38, 54, 18]};
allTemps = cell2mat(temperature(:,2));
dates = datenum(temperature(:,1), 'dd-mmm-yyyy');
plot(dates, allTemps)
datetick('x','mmm')
Pass the contents of multiple cells as a comma-separated list to functions that accept multiple
inputs.
This example plots X against Y , and applies line styles from a 2-by-3 cell array C.
12-15
12 Cell Arrays
X = -pi:pi/10:pi;
Y = tan(sin(X)) - sin(tan(X));
C(:,1) = {'LineWidth'; 2};

C(:,2) = {'MarkerEdgeColor'; 'k'};
C(:,3) = {'MarkerFaceColor'; 'g'};
plot(X, Y, '--rs', C{:})
12-16
See Also
See Also
More About
12-17
12 Cell Arrays
Preallocate Memory for Cell Array

This example shows how to initialize and allocate memory for a cell array.
Cell arrays do not require completely contiguous memory. However, each cell requires
contiguous memory, as does the cell array header that MATLAB creates to describe the
array. For very large arrays, incrementally increasing the number of cells or the number
of elements in a cell results in Out of Memory errors.
Initialize a cell array by calling the cell function, or by assigning to the last element.
For example, these statements are equivalent:
C = cell(25,50);
C{25,50} = [];
MATLAB creates the header for a 25-by-50 cell array. However, MATLAB does not
allocate any memory for the contents of each cell.
See Also
cell
Related Examples
• “Preallocating Memory”
12-18
Cell vs. Struct Arrays

This example compares cell and structure arrays, and shows how to store data in each
type of array. Both cell and structure arrays allow you to store data of different types and
sizes.
Structure Arrays
Structure arrays contain data in fields that you access by name.
For example, store patient records in a structure array.

patient(1).test = [79, 75, 73; 180, 178, 177.5; 220, 210, 205];

patient(2).test = [68, 70, 68; 118, 118, 119; 172, 170, 169];
patient
patient = 1x2 struct array with fields:

name
billing
test
Create a bar graph of the test results for each patient.

numPatients = numel(patient);
for p = 1:numPatients
figure
bar(patient(p).test)
title(patient(p).name)
xlabel('Test')
ylabel('Result')
end
12-19
12 Cell Arrays
12-20
Cell Arrays
Cell arrays contain data in cells that you access by numeric indexing. Common
applications of cell arrays include storing separate pieces of text and storing
heterogeneous data from spreadsheets.
For example, store temperature data for three cities over time in a cell array.
temperature(1,:) = {'2009-12-31', [45, 49, 0]};

temperature(2,:) = {'2010-04-03', [54, 68, 21]};
temperature(3,:) = {'2010-06-20', [72, 85, 53]};
temperature(4,:) = {'2010-09-15', [63, 81, 56]};
temperature(5,:) = {'2010-12-09', [38, 54, 18]};
12-21
12 Cell Arrays
temperature
temperature = 5x2 cell array

{'2009-12-31'} {1x3 double}
{'2010-04-03'} {1x3 double}
{'2010-06-20'} {1x3 double}
{'2010-09-15'} {1x3 double}
{'2010-12-09'} {1x3 double}
Plot the temperatures for each city by date.

allTemps = cell2mat(temperature(:,2));
dates = datetime(temperature(:,1));
plot(dates,allTemps)
title('Temperature Trends for Different Locations')
xlabel('Date')
ylabel('Degrees (Fahrenheit)')
12-22
See Also
Other Container Arrays
Struct and cell arrays are the most commonly used containers for storing heterogeneous
data. Tables are convenient for storing heterogeneous column-oriented or tabular data.
Alternatively, use map containers, or create your own class.
See Also
cell | cell2mat | containers.Map | datetime | plot | struct | table
12-23
12 Cell Arrays
Related Examples
More About
12-24
Multilevel Indexing to Access Parts of Cells
Multilevel Indexing to Access Parts of Cells

This example shows techniques for accessing data in arrays stored within cells of cell
arrays.
Create a sample cell array.

myNum = [1, 2, 3];
myCell = {'one', 'two'};
myStruct.Field1 = ones(3);
myStruct.Field2 = 5*ones(5);
C = {myNum, 100*myNum;
myCell, myStruct}
C = 2x2 cell array

{1x3 double} {1x3 double}
{1x2 cell } {1x1 struct}
Access the complete contents of a particular cell using curly braces, {}. For example,
return a numeric vector from the cell that contains it.
C{1,2}
ans =
100 200 300
Access part of the contents of a cell by appending indices, using syntax that matches the
data type of the contents.
Enclose numeric indices in smooth parentheses. For example, C{1,1} returns the 1-by-3
numeric vector, [1 2 3]. Access the second element of that vector using smooth
parentheses.
C{1,1}(1,2)
ans = 2
Enclose cell array indices in curly braces. For example, C{2,1} returns the cell array,
{'one','two'}. Access the contents of the second cell within that cell array using curly
braces.
12-25
12 Cell Arrays
C{2,1}{1,2}
ans =
'two'
Refer to fields of a struct array with dot notation, and index into the array as described
for numeric and cell arrays. For example, C{2,2} returns a structure array, where
Field2 contains a 5-by-5 numeric array of fives. Access the element in the fifth row and
first column of that field using dot notation and smooth parentheses.
C{2,2}.Field2(5,1)
ans = 5
You can nest any number of cell and structure arrays. For example, add nested cells and
structures to C.
C{2,1}{2,2} = {pi, eps};

C{2,2}.Field3 = struct('NestedField1', rand(3), ...
'NestedField2', magic(4), ...
'NestedField3', {{'text'; 'more text'}} );
Access parts of the new data using curly braces, smooth parentheses, or dot notation.
copy_pi = C{2,1}{2,2}{1,1}
copy_pi = 3.1416
part_magic = C{2,2}.Field3.NestedField2(1:2,1:2)
part_magic =
16 2
5 11
nested_cell = C{2,2}.Field3.NestedField3{2,1}
nested_cell =
'more text'
12-26
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
12-27
13
Function Handles
• “Create Function Handle” on page 13-2

• “Pass Function to Another Function” on page 13-6
• “Call Local Functions Using Function Handles” on page 13-8
• “Compare Function Handles” on page 13-10
13 Function Handles
Create Function Handle

In this section...
“What Is a Function Handle?” on page 13-2
“Creating Function Handles” on page 13-2
“Anonymous Functions” on page 13-4
“Arrays of Function Handles” on page 13-4
“Saving and Loading Function Handles” on page 13-5
You can create function handles to named and anonymous functions. You can store
multiple function handles in an array, and save and load them, as you would any other
variable.
What Is a Function Handle?

A function handle is a MATLAB data type that stores an association to a function.
Indirectly calling a function enables you to invoke the function regardless of where you
call it from. Typical uses of function handles include:
• Pass a function to another function (often called function functions). For example,
passing a function to integration and optimization functions, such as integral and
fzero.
• Specify callback functions. For example, a callback that responds to a UI event or
interacts with data acquisition hardware.
• Construct handles to functions defined inline instead of stored in a program file
(anonymous functions).
• Call local functions from outside the main function.
You can see if a variable, h, is a function handle using isa(h,'function_handle').
Creating Function Handles

To create a handle for a function, precede the function name with an @ sign. For example,
if you have a function called myfunction, create a handle named f as follows:
f = @myfunction;
13-2
Create Function Handle
You call a function using a handle the same way you call the function directly. For
example, suppose that you have a function named computeSquare, defined as:
function y = computeSquare(x)
y = x.^2;
end
Create a handle and call the function to compute the square of four.
f = @computeSquare;
a = 4;
b = f(a)
b =
16
If the function does not require any inputs, then you can call the function with empty
parentheses, such as
h = @ones;
a = h()
a =
Without the parentheses, the assignment creates another function handle.

a = h
a =
@ones
Function handles are variables that you can pass to other functions. For example,
calculate the integral of x2 on the range [0,1].
q = integral(f,0,1);
Function handles store their absolute path, so when you have a valid handle, you can
invoke the function from any location. You do not have to specify the path to the function
when creating the handle, only the function name.
Keep the following in mind when creating handles to functions:
13-3
13 Function Handles
• Name length — Each part of the function name (including package and class names)
must be less than the number specified by namelengthmax. Otherwise, MATLAB
truncates the latter part of the name.
• Scope — The function must be in scope at the time you create the handle. Therefore,
the function must be on the MATLAB path or in the current folder. Or, for handles to
local or nested functions, the function must be in the current file.
• Precedence — When there are multiple functions with the same name, MATLAB uses
the same precedence rules to define function handles as it does to call functions. For
more information, see “Function Precedence Order” on page 20-43.
• Overloading — If the function you specify overloads a function in a class that is not a
fundamental MATLAB class, the function is not associated with the function handle
at the time it is constructed. Instead, MATLAB considers the input arguments and
determines which implementation to call at the time of evaluation.
Anonymous Functions
You can create handles to anonymous functions. An anonymous function is a one-line
expression-based MATLAB function that does not require a program file. Construct a
handle to an anonymous function by defining the body of the function,
anonymous_function, and a comma-separated list of input arguments to the
anonymous function, arglist. The syntax is:
h = @(arglist)anonymous_function
For example, create a handle, sqr, to an anonymous function that computes the square
of a number, and call the anonymous function using its handle.
sqr = @(n) n.^2;
x = sqr(3)
x =
For more information, see “Anonymous Functions” on page 20-24.
Arrays of Function Handles

You can create an array of function handles by collecting them into a cell or structure
array. For example, use a cell array:
13-4
See Also
C = {@sin, @cos, @tan};

C{2}(pi)
ans =
-1
Or use a structure array:

S.a = @sin; S.b = @cos; S.c = @tan;
S.a(pi/2)
ans =
Saving and Loading Function Handles

You can save and load function handles in MATLAB, as you would any other variable. In
other words, use the save and load functions. If you save a function handle, MATLAB
does not save the path information. If you load a function handle, and the function file no
longer exists on the path, the handle is invalid. An invalid handle occurs if the file
location or file name has changed since you created the handle. If a handle is invalid,
MATLAB might display a warning when you load the file. When you invoke an invalid
handle, MATLAB issues an error.
See Also
func2str | functions | isa | str2func
Related Examples
• “Pass Function to Another Function” on page 13-6
More About
13-5
13 Function Handles
Pass Function to Another Function

You can use function handles as input arguments to other functions, which are called
function functions . These functions evaluate mathematical expressions over a range of
values. Typical function functions include integral, quad2d, fzero, and fminbnd.
For example, to find the integral of the natural log from 0 through 5, pass a handle to the
log function to integral.
a = 0;
b = 5;
q1 = integral(@log,a,b)
q1 = 3.0472
Similarly, to find the integral of the sin function and the exp function, pass handles to
those functions to integral.
q2 = integral(@sin,a,b)
q2 = 0.7163
q3 = integral(@exp,a,b)
q3 = 147.4132
Also, you can pass a handle to an anonymous function to function functions. An

anonymous function is a one-line expression-based MATLAB® function that does not
require a program file. For example, evaluate the integral of on the range
[0,Inf]:
fun = @(x)x./(exp(x)-1);
q4 = integral(fun,0,Inf)
q4 = 1.6449
Functions that take a function as an input (called function functions) expect that the
function associated with the function handle has a certain number of input variables. For
example, if you call integral or fzero, the function associated with the function handle
must have exactly one input variable. If you call integral3, the function associated
with the function handle must have three input variables. For information on calling
function functions with more variables, see “Parameterizing Functions”.
13-6
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
• “Parameterizing Functions”
More About
13-7
13 Function Handles
Call Local Functions Using Function Handles

This example shows how to create handles to local functions. If a function returns
handles to local functions, you can call the local functions outside of the main function.
This approach allows you to have multiple, callable functions in a single file.
Create the following function in a file, ellipseVals.m, in your working folder. The
function returns a struct with handles to the local functions.
% Copyright 2015 The MathWorks, Inc.
function fh = ellipseVals
fh.focus = @computeFocus;
fh.eccentricity = @computeEccentricity;
fh.area = @computeArea;
end
function f = computeFocus(a,b)
f = sqrt(a^2-b^2);
end
function e = computeEccentricity(a,b)
f = computeFocus(a,b);
e = f/a;
end
function ae = computeArea(a,b)
ae = pi*a*b;
end
Invoke the function to get a struct of handles to the local functions.

h = ellipseVals
h =
struct with fields:
focus: @computeFocus
eccentricity: @computeEccentricity
13-8
See Also
area: @computeArea
Call a local function using its handle to compute the area of an ellipse.
h.area(3,1)
ans =
9.4248
Alternatively, you can use the localfunctions function to create a cell array of
function handles from all local functions automatically. This approach is convenient if
you expect to add, remove, or modify names of the local functions.
See Also
localfunctions
Related Examples
More About
• “Local Functions” on page 20-30
13-9
13 Function Handles
Compare Function Handles

Compare Handles Constructed from Named Function
MATLAB® considers function handles that you construct from the same named function
to be equal. The isequal function returns a value of true when comparing these types of
handles.
fun1 = @sin;
fun2 = @sin;
isequal(fun1,fun2)
ans =
logical
If you save these handles to a MAT-file, and then load them back into the workspace,
they are still equal.
Compare Handles to Anonymous Functions
Unlike handles to named functions, function handles that represent the same
anonymous function are not equal. They are considered unequal because MATLAB
cannot guarantee that the frozen values of nonargument variables are the same. For
example, in this case, A is a nonargument variable.
A = 5;
h1 = @(x)A * x.^2;
h2 = @(x)A * x.^2;
isequal(h1,h2)
ans =
logical
If you make a copy of an anonymous function handle, the copy and the original are equal.
13-10
Compare Function Handles
h1 = @(x)A * x.^2;
h2 = h1;
isequal(h1,h2)
ans =
logical
Compare Handles to Nested Functions
MATLAB considers function handles to the same nested function to be equal only if your
code constructs these handles on the same call to the function containing the nested
function. This function constructs two handles to the same nested function.
function [h1,h2] = test_eq(a,b,c)

h1 = @findZ;
h2 = @findZ;
function z = findZ
z = a.^3 + b.^2 + c';
end
end
Function handles constructed from the same nested function and on the same call to the
parent function are considered equal.
[h1,h2] = test_eq(4,19,-7);
isequal(h1,h2)
ans =
logical
Function handles constructed from different calls are not considered equal.
13-11
13 Function Handles
[q1,q2] = test_eq(4,19,-7);
isequal(h1,q1)
ans =
logical
See Also
isequal
Related Examples
13-12
14
Map Containers
• “Overview of Map Data Structure” on page 14-2

• “Description of Map Class” on page 14-4
• “Create Map Object” on page 14-6
• “Examine Contents of Map” on page 14-9
• “Read and Write Using Key Index” on page 14-11
• “Modify Keys and Values in Map” on page 14-16
• “Map to Different Value Types” on page 14-19
14 Map Containers
Overview of Map Data Structure

A Map is a type of fast key lookup data structure that offers a flexible means of indexing
into its individual elements. Unlike most array data structures in the MATLAB software
that only allow access to the elements by means of integer indices, the indices for a Map
can be nearly any scalar numeric value or a character vector.
Indices into the elements of a Map are called keys. These keys, along with the data
values associated with them, are stored within the Map. Each entry of a Map contains
exactly one unique key and its corresponding value. Indexing into the Map of rainfall
statistics shown below with a character vector representing the month of August yields
the value internally associated with that month, 37.3.
KEYS VALUES
Jan 327.2
Feb 368.2
Mar 197.6
Apr 178.4
May 100.0
Jun 69.9
Jul 32.3
Aug Aug 37.3 37.3
Sep 19.0
Oct 37.0
Nov 73.2
Dec 110.9
Annual 1551.0
Mean monthly rainfall statistics (mm)
Keys are not restricted to integers as they are with other arrays. Specifically, a key may
be any of the following types:
• 1-by-N character array

• Scalar real double or single
• Signed or unsigned scalar integer
14-2
See Also
The values stored in a Map can be of any type. This includes arrays of numeric values,
structures, cells, character arrays, objects, or other Maps.
Note A Map is most memory efficient when the data stored in it is a scalar number or a
character array.
See Also
containers.Map | keys | values
Related Examples
14-3
14 Map Containers
Description of Map Class

A Map is actually an object, or instance, of a MATLAB class called Map. It is also a
handle object and, as such, it behaves like any other MATLAB handle object. This section
gives a brief overview of the Map class. For more details, see the containers.Map
reference page.
Properties of Map Class

All objects of the Map class have three properties. You cannot write directly to any of
these properties; you can change them only by means of the methods of the Map class.
Property Description Default
Count Unsigned 64-bit integer that represents the total number of 0
key/value pairs contained in the Map object.
KeyType Character vector that indicates the type of all keys char
contained in the Map object. KeyType can be any of the
following: double, single, char, and signed or unsigned
32-bit or 64-bit integer. If you attempt to add keys of an
unsupported type, int8 for example, MATLAB makes
them double.
ValueType Character vector that indicates the type of values contained any
in the Map object. If the values in a Map are all scalar
numbers of the same type, ValueType is set to that type. If
the values are all character arrays, ValueType is 'char'.
Otherwise, ValueType is 'any'.
To examine one of these properties, follow the name of the Map object with a dot and
then the property name. For example, to see what type of keys are used in Map mapObj,
use
mapObj.KeyType
A Map is a handle object. As such, if you make a copy of the object, MATLAB does not
create a new Map; it creates a new handle for the existing Map that you specify. If you
alter the Map's contents in reference to this new handle, MATLAB applies the changes
you make to the original Map as well. You can, however, delete the new handle without
affecting the original Map.
14-4
See Also
Methods of Map Class

The Map class implements the following methods. Their use is explained in the later
sections of this documentation and also in the function reference pages.
Method Description
isKey Check if Map contains specified key
keys Names of all keys in Map
length Length of Map
remove Remove key and its value from Map
size Dimensions of Map
values Values contained in Map
See Also
containers.Map | isKey | keys | length | remove | size | values
Related Examples
14-5
14 Map Containers
Create Map Object

A Map is an object of the Map class. It is defined within a MATLAB package called
containers. As with any class, you use its constructor function to create any new
instances of it. You must include the package name when calling the constructor:
newMap = containers.Map(optional_keys_and_values)
Construct Empty Map Object

When you call the Map constructor with no input arguments, MATLAB constructs an
empty Map object. When you do not end the command with a semicolon, MATLAB
displays the following information about the object you have constructed:
newMap = containers.Map
newMap =
Map with properties:
Count: 0
KeyType: char
ValueType: any
The properties of an empty Map object are set to their default values:
• Count = 0
• KeyType = 'char'
• ValueType = 'any'
Once you construct the empty Map object, you can use the keys and values methods to
populate it. For a summary of MATLAB functions you can use with a Map object, see
“Methods of Map Class” on page 14-5
Construct Initialized Map Object

Most of the time, you will want to initialize the Map with at least some keys and values
at the time you construct it. You can enter one or more sets of keys and values using the
syntax shown here. The brace operators ({}) are not required if you enter only one key/
value pair:
14-6
Create Map Object
mapObj = containers.Map({key1, key2, ...}, {val1, val2, ...});
For those keys and values that are character vectors, be sure that you specify them
enclosed within single quotation marks. For example, when constructing a Map that has
character vectors as keys, use
mapObj = containers.Map(...
{'keystr1', 'keystr2', ...}, {val1, val2, ...});
As an example of constructing an initialized Map object, create a new Map for the
following key/value pairs taken from the monthly rainfall map shown earlier in this
section.
KEYS VALUES
Jan 327.2
Feb 368.2
Mar 197.6
Apr 178.4
May 100.0
Jun 69.9
Jul 32.3
Aug 37.3
Sep 19.0
Oct 37.0
Nov 73.2
Dec 110.9
Annual 1551.0
k = {'Jan', 'Feb', 'Mar', 'Apr', 'May', 'Jun', ...

'Jul', 'Aug', 'Sep', 'Oct', 'Nov', 'Dec', 'Annual'};
v = {327.2, 368.2, 197.6, 178.4, 100.0, 69.9, ...

32.3, 37.3, 19.0, 37.0, 73.2, 110.9, 1551.0};
rainfallMap = containers.Map(k, v)
rainfallMap =
Map with properties:
14-7
14 Map Containers
Count: 13
KeyType: char
ValueType: double
The Count property is now set to the number of key/value pairs in the Map, 13, the
KeyType is char, and the ValueType is double.
Combine Map Objects

You can combine Map objects vertically using concatenation. However, the result is not a
vector of Maps, but rather a single Map object containing all key/value pairs of the
contributing Maps. Horizontal vectors of Maps are not allowed. See “Build Map with
Concatenation” on page 14-13, below.
See Also
containers.Map | keys | values
Related Examples
14-8
Examine Contents of Map
Examine Contents of Map

Each entry in a Map consists of two parts: a unique key and its corresponding value. To
find all the keys in a Map, use the keys method. To find all of the values, use the values
method.
Create a new Map called ticketMap that maps airline ticket numbers to the holders of
those tickets. Construct the Map with four key/value pairs:
ticketMap = containers.Map(...
{'2R175', 'B7398', 'A479GY', 'NZ1452'}, ...
{'James Enright', 'Carl Haynes', 'Sarah Latham', ...
'Bradley Reid'});
Use the keys method to display all keys in the Map. MATLAB lists keys of type char in
alphabetical order, and keys of any numeric type in numerical order:
keys(ticketMap)
ans =
'2R175' 'A479GY' 'B7398' 'NZ1452'
Next, display the values that are associated with those keys in the Map. The order of the
values is determined by the order of the keys associated with them.
This table shows the keys listed in alphabetical order:

keys values
2R175 James Enright
A479GY Sarah Latham
B7398 Carl Haynes
NZ1452 Bradley Reid
The values method uses the same ordering of values:
values(ticketMap)
ans =
'James Enright' 'Sarah Latham' 'Carl Haynes' 'Bradley Reid'
14-9
14 Map Containers
See Also
Related Examples
14-10
Read and Write Using Key Index

When reading from the Map, use the same keys that you have defined and associated
with particular values. Writing new entries to the Map requires that you supply the
values to store with a key for each one.
Note For a large Map, the keys and value methods use a lot of memory as their outputs
are cell arrays.
Read From Map

After you have constructed and populated your Map, you can begin to use it to store and
retrieve data. You use a Map in the same manner that you would an array, except that
you are not restricted to using integer indices. The general syntax for looking up a value
(valueN) for a given key (keyN) is shown here. If the key is a character vector, enclose it
in single quotation marks:
valueN = mapObj(keyN);
Start with the Map ticketMap :

{'2R175', 'B7398', 'A479GY', 'NZ1452'}, ...
'Bradley Reid'});
You can find any single value by indexing into the Map with the appropriate key:
passenger = ticketMap('2R175')
passenger =
James Enright
Find the person who holds ticket A479GY:

sprintf(' Would passenger %s please come to the desk?\n', ...
ticketMap('A479GY'))
ans =
Would passenger Sarah Latham please come to the desk?
14-11
14 Map Containers
To access the values of multiple keys, use the values method, specifying the keys in a
cell array:
values(ticketMap, {'2R175', 'B7398'})
ans =
'James Enright' 'Carl Haynes'
Map containers support scalar indexing only. You cannot use the colon operator to access
a range of keys as you can with other MATLAB classes. For example, the following
statements throw an error:
ticketMap('2R175':'B7398')
ticketMap(:)
Add Key/Value Pairs

Unlike other array types, each entry in a Map consists of two items: the value and its
key. When you write a new value to a Map, you must supply its key as well. This key
must be consistent in type with any other keys in the Map.
Use the following syntax to insert additional elements into a Map:

existingMapObj(newKeyName) = newValue;

{'2R175', 'B7398', 'A479GY', 'NZ1452'}, ...
'Bradley Reid'});
Add two more entries to the ticketMap Map. Verify that ticketMap now has six key/
value pairs:
ticketMap('947F4') = 'Susan Spera';
ticketMap('417R93') = 'Patricia Hughes';
ticketMap.Count
ans =
14-12
List all of the keys and values in ticketMap:
keys(ticketMap), values(ticketMap)
ans =
'2R175' '417R93' '947F4' 'A479GY' 'B7398' 'NZ1452'
ans =
'James Enright' 'Patricia Hughes' 'Susan Spera' 'Sarah Latham' 'Carl Ha
Build Map with Concatenation

You can add key/value pairs to a Map in groups using concatenation. The concatenation
of Map objects is different from other classes. Instead of building a vector of Map objects,
MATLAB returns a single Map containing the key/value pairs from each of the
contributing Map objects.
Rules for the concatenation of Map objects are:
• Only vertical vectors of Map objects are allowed. You cannot create an m-by-n array
or a horizontal vector of Map objects. For this reason, vertcat is supported for Map
objects, but not horzcat.
• All keys in each Map being concatenated must be of the same class.
• You can combine Maps with different numbers of key/value pairs. The result is a
single Map object containing key/value pairs from each of the contributing Map
objects:
tMap1 = containers.Map({'2R175', 'B7398', 'A479GY'}, ...

{'James Enright', 'Carl Haynes', 'Sarah Latham'});
tMap2 = containers.Map({'417R93', 'NZ1452', '947F4'}, ...

{'Patricia Hughes', 'Bradley Reid', 'Susan Spera'});
% Concatenate the two maps:

ticketMap = [tMap1; tMap2];
The result of this concatenation is the same 6-element Map that was constructed in
the previous section:
14-13
14 Map Containers
ticketMap.Count
ans =
keys(ticketMap), values(ticketMap)
ans =
'2R175' '417R93' '947F4' 'A479GY' 'B7398' 'NZ1452'
ans =
'James Enright' 'Patricia Hughes' 'Susan Spera' 'Sarah Latham' 'Carl

• Concatenation does not include duplicate keys or their values in the resulting Map
object.
In the following example, both objects m1 and m2 use a key of 8. In Map m1, 8 is a key
to value C; in m2, it is a key to value X:
m1 = containers.Map({1, 5, 8}, {'A', 'B', 'C'});

m2 = containers.Map({8, 9, 6}, {'X', 'Y', 'Z'});
Combine m1 and m2 to form a new Map object, m:
m = [m1; m2];
The resulting Map object m has only five key/value pairs. The value C was dropped
from the concatenation because its key was not unique:
keys(m), values(m)
ans =
[1] [5] [6] [8] [9]
ans =
'A' 'B' 'Z' 'X' 'Y'
14-14
See Also
See Also
containers.Map | isKey | keys | values
Related Examples
14-15
14 Map Containers
Modify Keys and Values in Map
Note Keep in mind that if you have more than one handle to a Map, modifying the
handle also makes changes to the original Map. See “Modify Copy of Map” on page 14-
17, below.
Remove Keys and Values from Map

Use the remove method to delete any entries from a Map. When calling this method,
specify the Map object name and the key name to remove. MATLAB deletes the key and
its associated value from the Map.
The syntax for the remove method is

remove(mapName, 'keyname');
{'2R175', 'B7398', 'A479GY', 'NZ1452'}, ...
'Bradley Reid'});
Remove one entry (the specified key and its value) from the Map object:
remove(ticketMap, 'NZ1452');
values(ticketMap)
ans =
'James Enright' 'Sarah Latham' 'Carl Haynes'
Modify Values
You can modify any value in a Map simply by overwriting the current value. The
passenger holding ticket A479GY is identified as Sarah Latham:
ticketMap('A479GY')
ans =
14-16
Modify Keys and Values in Map
Sarah Latham
Change the passenger's first name to Anna Latham by overwriting the original value for
the A479GY key:
ticketMap('A479GY') = 'Anna Latham';
Verify the change:

ticketMap('A479GY')
ans =
Anna Latham
Modify Keys
To modify an existing key while keeping the value the same, first remove both the key
and its value from the Map. Then create a new entry, this time with the corrected key
name.
Modify the ticket number belonging to passenger James Enright:

remove(ticketMap, '2R175');
ticketMap('2S185') = 'James Enright';
k = keys(ticketMap); v = values(ticketMap);
str1 = ' ''%s'' has been assigned a new\n';
str2 = ' ticket number: %s.\n';
fprintf(str1, v{1})
fprintf(str2, k{1})
'James Enright' has been assigned a new

ticket number: 2S185.
Modify Copy of Map

Because ticketMap is a handle object, you need to be careful when making copies of the
Map. Keep in mind that by copying a Map object, you are really just creating another
handle to the same object. Any changes you make to this handle are also applied to the
original Map.
14-17
14 Map Containers
Make a copy of the ticketMap Map. Write to this copy, and notice that the change is
applied to the original Map object itself:
copiedMap = ticketMap;
copiedMap('AZ12345') = 'unidentified person';

ticketMap('AZ12345')
ans =
unidentified person
Clean up:
remove(ticketMap, 'AZ12345');
clear copiedMap;
See Also
Related Examples
14-18
Map to Different Value Types
Map to Different Value Types

It is fairly common to store other classes, such as structures or cell arrays, in a Map
structure. However, Maps are most memory efficient when the data stored in them
belongs to one of the basic MATLAB types such as double, char, integers, and logicals.
Map to Structure Array

The following example maps airline seat numbers to structures that contain ticket
numbers and destinations. Start with the Map ticketMap, which maps ticket numbers
to passengers:
{'2R175', 'B7398', 'A479GY', 'NZ1452'}, ...
'Bradley Reid'});
Then create the following structure array, containing ticket numbers and destinations:
s1.ticketNum = '2S185'; s1.destination = 'Barbados';
s1.reserved = '06-May-2008'; s1.origin = 'La Guardia';
s2.ticketNum = '947F4'; s2.destination = 'St. John';
s2.reserved = '14-Apr-2008'; s2.origin = 'Oakland';
s3.ticketNum = 'A479GY'; s3.destination = 'St. Lucia';
s3.reserved = '28-Mar-2008'; s3.origin = 'JFK';
s4.ticketNum = 'B7398'; s4.destination = 'Granada';
s4.reserved = '30-Apr-2008'; s4.origin = 'JFK';
s5.ticketNum = 'NZ1452'; s5.destination = 'Aruba';
s5.reserved = '01-May-2008'; s5.origin = 'Denver';
Map five seats to these structures:

seatingMap = containers.Map( ...
{'23F', '15C', '15B', '09C', '12D'}, ...
{s5, s1, s3, s4, s2});
Using this Map object, find information about the passenger who has reserved seat 09C:
seatingMap('09C')
ans =
ticketNum: 'B7398'
14-19
14 Map Containers
destination: 'Granada'
reserved: '30-Apr-2008'
origin: 'JFK'
Using ticketMap and seatingMap together, you can find the name of the person who
has reserved seat 15B:
ticket = seatingMap('15B').ticketNum;
passenger = ticketMap(ticket)
passenger =
Sarah Latham
Map to Cell Array

As with structures, you can also map to a cell array in a Map object. Continuing with the
airline example of the previous sections, some of the passengers on the flight have
“frequent flyer” accounts with the airline. Map the names of these passengers to records
of the number of miles they have used and the number of miles they still have available:
accountMap = containers.Map( ...

{'Susan Spera','Carl Haynes','Anna Latham'}, ...
{{247.5, 56.1}, {0, 1342.9}, {24.6, 314.7}});
Use the Map to retrieve account information on the passengers:
name = 'Carl Haynes';

acct = accountMap(name);
fprintf('%s has used %.1f miles on his/her account,\n', ...

name, acct{1})
fprintf(' and has %.1f miles remaining.\n', acct{2})
Carl Haynes has used 0.0 miles on his/her account,

and has 1342.9 miles remaining.
See Also
cell | containers.Map | isKey | keys | struct | values
14-20
See Also
Related Examples
14-21
15
Combining Unlike Classes
• “Valid Combinations of Unlike Classes” on page 15-2

• “Combining Unlike Integer Types” on page 15-3
• “Combining Integer and Noninteger Data” on page 15-5
• “Combining Cell Arrays with Non-Cell Arrays” on page 15-6
• “Empty Matrices” on page 15-7
• “Concatenation Examples” on page 15-8
15 Combining Unlike Classes
Valid Combinations of Unlike Classes

Matrices and arrays can be composed of elements of most any MATLAB data type as long
as all elements in the matrix are of the same type. If you do include elements of unlike
classes when constructing a matrix, MATLAB converts some elements so that all
elements of the resulting matrix are of the same type.
Data type conversion is done with respect to a preset precedence of classes. The following
table shows the five classes you can concatenate with an unlike type without generating
an error (that is, with the exception of character and logical).
TYPE character integer single double logical
character character character character character invalid
integer character integer integer integer integer
single character integer single single single
double character integer single double double
logical invalid integer single double logical
For example, concatenating a double and single matrix always yields a matrix of type
single. MATLAB converts the double element to single to accomplish this.
See Also
More About
• “Combining Unlike Integer Types” on page 15-3
• “Combining Integer and Noninteger Data” on page 15-5
• “Combining Cell Arrays with Non-Cell Arrays” on page 15-6
• “Concatenation Examples” on page 15-8
15-2
Combining Unlike Integer Types
Combining Unlike Integer Types

In this section...
“Example of Combining Unlike Integer Sizes” on page 15-3
“Example of Combining Signed with Unsigned” on page 15-4
Overview
If you combine different integer types in a matrix (e.g., signed with unsigned, or 8-bit
integers with 16-bit integers), MATLAB returns a matrix in which all elements are of one
common type. MATLAB sets all elements of the resulting matrix to the data type of the
left-most element in the input matrix. For example, the result of the following
concatenation is a vector of three 16-bit signed integers:
A = [int16(450) uint8(250) int32(1000000)]
Example of Combining Unlike Integer Sizes

After disabling the integer concatenation warnings as shown above, concatenate the
following two numbers once, and then switch their order. The return value depends on
the order in which the integers are concatenated. The left-most type determines the data
type for all elements in the vector:
A = [int16(5000) int8(50)]
A =
5000 50
B = [int8(50) int16(5000)]
B =
50 127
The first operation returns a vector of 16-bit integers. The second returns a vector of 8-bit
integers. The element int16(5000) is set to 127, the maximum value for an 8-bit
signed integer.
The same rules apply to vertical concatenation:

C = [int8(50); int16(5000)]
C =
15-3
50
127
Note You can find the maximum or minimum values for any MATLAB integer type using
the intmax and intmin functions. For floating-point types, use realmax and realmin.
Example of Combining Signed with Unsigned

Now do the same exercise with signed and unsigned integers. Again, the left-most
element determines the data type for all elements in the resulting matrix:
A = [int8(-100) uint8(100)]
A =
-100 100
B = [uint8(100) int8(-100)]
B =
100 0
The element int8(-100) is set to zero because it is no longer signed.
MATLAB evaluates each element prior to concatenating them into a combined array. In
other words, the following statement evaluates to an 8-bit signed integer (equal to 50)
and an 8-bit unsigned integer (unsigned -50 is set to zero) before the two elements are
combined. Following the concatenation, the second element retains its zero value but
takes on the unsigned int8 type:
A = [int8(50), uint8(-50)]
A =
50 0
15-4
Combining Integer and Noninteger Data
Combining Integer and Noninteger Data

If you combine integers with double, single, or logical classes, all elements of the
resulting matrix are given the data type of the left-most integer. For example, all
elements of the following vector are set to int32:
A = [true pi int32(1000000) single(17.32) uint8(250)]
15-5
Combining Cell Arrays with Non-Cell Arrays

Combining a number of arrays in which one or more is a cell array returns a new cell
array. Each of the original arrays occupies a cell in the new array:
A = [100, {uint8(200), 300}, 'MATLAB'];
whos A
A 1x4 477 cell
Each element of the combined array maintains its original class:

fprintf('Classes: %s %s %s %s\n',...
class(A{1}),class(A{2}),class(A{3}),class(A{4}))
Classes: double uint8 double char
15-6
Empty Matrices
Empty Matrices
If you construct a matrix using empty matrix elements, the empty matrices are ignored
in the resulting matrix:
A = [5.36; 7.01; []; 9.44]
A =
5.3600
7.0100
9.4400
15-7
Concatenation Examples
In this section...
“Combining Single and Double Types” on page 15-8
“Combining Integer and Double Types” on page 15-8
“Combining Character and Double Types” on page 15-9
“Combining Logical and Double Types” on page 15-9
Combining Single and Double Types

Combining single values with double values yields a single matrix. Note that
5.73*10^300 is too big to be stored as a single, thus the conversion from double to
single sets it to infinity. (The class function used in this example returns the data
type for the input value).
x = [single(4.5) single(-2.8) pi 5.73*10^300]

x =
4.5000 -2.8000 3.1416 Inf
class(x) % Display the data type of x

ans =
single
Combining Integer and Double Types

Combining integer values with double values yields an integer matrix. Note that the
fractional part of pi is rounded to the nearest integer. (The int8 function used in this
example converts its numeric argument to an 8-bit integer).
x = [int8(21) int8(-22) int8(23) pi 45/6]

x =
21 -22 23 3 8
class(x)
ans =
int8
15-8
Concatenation Examples
Combining Character and Double Types

Combining character values with double values yields a character matrix.
MATLAB converts the double elements in this example to their character
equivalents:
x = ['A' 'B' 'C' 68 69 70]
x =
ABCDEF
class(x)
ans =
char
Combining Logical and Double Types

Combining logical values with double values yields a double matrix. MATLAB
converts the logical true and false elements in this example to double:
x = [true false false pi sqrt(7)]

x =
1.0000 0 0 3.1416 2.6458
class(x)
ans =
double
15-9
16
Using Objects
16 Using Objects
Object Behavior
In this section...
“Two Copy Behaviors” on page 16-2
“Handle Object Copy” on page 16-2
“Value Object Copy Behavior” on page 16-2
“Handle Object Copy Behavior” on page 16-3
“Testing for Handle or Value Class” on page 16-6
Two Copy Behaviors

There are two fundamental kinds of MATLAB objects — handles and values.
Value objects behave like MATLAB fundamental types with respect to copy operations.
Copies are independent values. Operations that you perform on one object do not affect
copies of that object.
Handle objects are referenced by their handle variable. Copies of the handle variable
refer to the same object. Operations that you perform on a handle object are visible from
all handle variables that reference that object.
Handle Object Copy

If you are defining classes and want to support handle object copy, see “Implement Copy
for Handle Classes”.
Value Object Copy Behavior

MATLAB numeric variables are value objects. For example, when you copy a to the
variable b, both variables are independent of each other. Changing the value of a does
not change the value of b:
a = 8;
b = a;
Now reassign a. b is unchanged:
16-2
Object Behavior
a = 6;
b
b =
8
Clearing a does not affect b:
clear a
b
b =
8
Value Object Properties
The copy behavior of values stored as properties in value objects is the same as numeric
variables. For example, suppose vobj1 is a value object with property a:
vobj1.a = 8;
If you copy vobj1 to vobj2, and then change the value of vobj1 property a, the value of
the copied object's property, vobj2.a, is unaffected:
vobj2 =vobj1;
vobj1.a = 5;
vobj2.a
ans =
8
Handle Object Copy Behavior

Here is a handle class called HdClass that defines a property called Data.
classdef HdClass < handle

properties
Data
end
methods
function obj = HdClass(val)
if nargin > 0
obj.Data = val;
end
16-3
16 Using Objects
end
end
end
Create an object of this class:
hobj1 = HdClass(8)
Because this statement is not terminated with a semicolon, MATLAB displays

information about the object:
hobj1 =
HdClass with properties:
Data: 8
The variable hobj1 is a handle that references the object created. Copying hobj1 to
hobj2 results in another handle referring to the same object:
hobj2 = hobj1
hobj2 =
Data: 8
Because handles reference the object, copying a handle copies the handle to a new
variable name, but the handle still refers to the same object. For example, given that
hobj1 is a handle object with property Data:
hobj1.Data
ans =
Change the value of hobj1's Data property and the value of the copied object's Data
property also changes:
hobj1.Data = 5;
hobj2.Data
16-4
Object Behavior
ans =
Because hobj2 and hobj1 are handles to the same object, changing the copy, hobj2,
also changes the data you access through handle hobj1:
hobj2.Data = 17;
hobj1.Data
ans =
17
Reassigning Handle Variables
Reassigning a handle variable produces the same result as reassigning any MATLAB
variable. When you create an object and assign it to hobj1:
hobj1 = HdClass(3.14);
hobj1 references the new object, not the same object referenced previously (and still
referenced by hobj2).
Clearing Handle Variables
When you clear a handle from the workspace, MATLAB removes the variable, but does
not remove the object referenced by the other handle. However, if there are no references
to an object, MATLAB destroys the object.
Given hobj1 and hobj2, which both reference the same object, you can clear either
handle without affecting the object:
hobj1.Data = 2^8;
clear hobj1
hobj2
hobj2 =
Data: 256
If you clear both hobj1 and hobj2, then there are no references to the object. MATLAB
destroys the object and frees the memory used by that object.
16-5
16 Using Objects
Deleting Handle Objects
To remove an object referenced by any number of handles, use delete. Given hobj1 and
hobj2, which both refer to the same object, delete either handle. MATLAB deletes the
object:
hobj1 = HdClass(8);
hobj2 = hobj1;
delete(hobj1)
hobj2
hobj2 =
handle to deleted HdClass
Use clear to remove the variable from the workspace.
Modifying Objects
When you pass an object to a function, MATLAB passes a copy of the object into the
function workspace. If the function modifies the object, MATLAB modifies only the copy
of the object that is in the function workspace. The differences in copy behavior between
handle and value classes are important in such cases:
• Value object — The function must return the modified copy of the object. To modify
the object in the caller’s workspace, assign the function output to a variable of the
same name
• Handle object — The copy in the function workspace refers to the same object.
Therefore, the function does not have to return the modified copy.
Testing for Handle or Value Class

To determine if an object is a handle object, use the isa function. If obj is an object of
some class, this statement determines if obj is a handle:
isa(obj,'handle')
For example, the containers.Map class creates a handle object:

hobj = containers.Map({'Red Sox','Yankees'},{'Boston','New York'});
isa(hobj,'handle')
16-6
See Also
ans =
hobj is also a containers.Map object:
isa(hobj,'containers.Map')
ans =
Querying the class of hobj shows that it is a containers.Map object:
class(hobj)
ans =
containers.Map
The class function returns the specific class of an object.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Implement Copy for Handle Classes”
16-7
17
Defining Your Own Classes
All MATLAB data types are implemented as object-oriented classes. You can add data
types of your own to your MATLAB environment by creating additional classes. These
user-defined classes define the structure of your new data type, and the functions, or
methods, that you write for each class define the behavior for that data type.
These methods can also define the way various MATLAB operators, including arithmetic
operations, subscript referencing, and concatenation, apply to the new data types. For
example, a class called polynomial might redefine the addition operator (+) so that it
correctly performs the operation of addition on polynomials.
With MATLAB classes you can
• Create methods that overload existing MATLAB functionality

• Restrict the operations that are allowed on an object of a class
• Enforce common behavior among related classes by inheriting from the same parent
class
• Significantly increase the reuse of your code
For more information, see “Role of Classes in MATLAB”.

Scripts and Functions
3
18
Scripts
• “Create Scripts” on page 18-2

• “Add Comments to Programs” on page 18-4
• “Run Code Sections” on page 18-7
• “Scripts vs. Functions” on page 18-16
• “Add Functions to Scripts” on page 18-18
18 Scripts
Create Scripts
Scripts are the simplest kind of program file because they have no input or output
arguments. They are useful for automating series of MATLAB commands, such as
computations that you have to perform repeatedly from the command line or series of
commands you have to reference.
You can create a new script in the following ways:
• Highlight commands from the Command History, right-click, and select Create
Script.
•
Click the New Script button on the Home tab.
• Use the edit function. For example, edit new_file_name creates (if the file does
not exist) and opens the file new_file_name. If new_file_name is unspecified,
MATLAB opens a new file called Untitled.
After you create a script, you can add code to the script and save it. For example, you can
save this code that generates random numbers between 0 and 100 as a script called
numGenerator.m.
columns = 10000;
rows = 1;
bins = columns/100;
rng(now);
list = 100*rand(rows,columns);
histogram(list,bins)
Save your script and run the code using either of these methods:
• Type the script name on the command line and press Enter. For example, to run the
numGenerator.m script, type numGenerator.
•
Click the Run button on the Editor tab
You also can run the code from a second program file. To do this, add a line of code with
the script name to the second program file. For example, to run the numGenerator.m
script from a second program file, add the line numGenerator; to the file. MATLAB
runs the code in numGenerator.m when you run the second file.
18-2
See Also
When execution of the script completes, the variables remain in the MATLAB workspace.
In the numGenerator.m example, the variables columns, rows, bins, and list remain
in the workspace. To see a list of variables, type whos at the command prompt. Scripts
share the base workspace with your interactive MATLAB session and with other scripts.
See Also
More About
• “Run Code Sections” on page 18-7
• “Base and Function Workspaces” on page 20-10
• “Create Live Scripts in the Live Editor” on page 19-8
18-3
18 Scripts
Add Comments to Programs

When you write code, it is a good practice to add comments that describe the code.
Comments allow others to understand your code, and can refresh your memory when you
return to it later.
Add comments to MATLAB code using the percent (%) symbol. Comment lines can appear
anywhere in a program file, and you can append comments to the end of a line of code.
For example,
% Add up all the vector elements.
y = sum(x) % Use the sum function.
In live scripts, you can also describe a process or code by inserting lines of text before and
after code. Text lines provide additional flexibility such as standard formatting options,
and the insertion of images, hyperlinks, and equations. For more information, see
“Create Live Scripts in the Live Editor” on page 19-8.
Note When you have a MATLAB code file (.m) containing text that has characters in a
different encoding than that of your platform, when you save or publish your file,
MATLAB displays those characters as garbled text. Live scripts (.mlx) support storing
and displaying characters across all locales.
Comments are also useful for program development and testing—comment out any code
that does not need to run. To comment out multiple lines of code, you can use the block
comment operators, %{ and %}:
a = magic(3);
%{
sum(a)
diag(a)
sum(diag(a))
%}
sum(diag(fliplr(a)))
The %{ and %} operators must appear alone on the lines that immediately precede and
follow the block of help text. Do not include any other text on these lines.
To comment out part of a statement that spans multiple lines, use an ellipsis (...)
instead of a percent sign. For example,
18-4
See Also
header = ['Last Name, ', ...

'First Name, ', ...
... 'Middle Initial, ', ...
'Title']
The MATLAB Editor includes tools and context menu items to help you add, remove, or
change the format of comments for MATLAB, Java, and C/C++ code. For example, if you
paste lengthy text onto a comment line, such as
% This is a program that has a comment that is a little more than 75 columns wide.
disp('Hello, world')
and then press the button next to Comment on the Editor or Live Editor tab, the
Editor wraps the comment:
% This is a program that has a comment that is a little more than 75
% columns wide.
disp('Hello, world')
By default, as you type comments in the Editor, the text wraps when it reaches a column
width of 75. To change the column where the comment text wraps, or to disable
automatic comment wrapping, adjust the Editor/Debugger Language preference
settings labeled Comment formatting.
The Editor does not wrap comments with:
• Code section titles (comments that begin with %%)

• Long contiguous text, such as URLs
• Bulleted list items (text that begins with * or #) onto the preceding line
Preference changes do not apply in live scripts.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Add Help for Your Program” on page 20-6
18-5
18 Scripts
More About
• “Editor/Debugger Preferences”
18-6
Run Code Sections
Run Code Sections

In this section...
“Divide Your File into Code Sections” on page 18-7
“Evaluate Code Sections” on page 18-7
“Navigate Among Code Sections in a File” on page 18-9
“Example of Evaluating Code Sections” on page 18-9
“Change the Appearance of Code Sections” on page 18-12
“Use Code Sections with Control Statements and Functions” on page 18-13
Divide Your File into Code Sections

MATLAB files often consist of many commands. You typically focus efforts on a single
part of your program at a time, working with the code in chunks. Similarly, when
explaining your files to others, often you describe your program in chunks. To facilitate
these processes, use code sections, also known as code cells or cell mode. A code section
contains contiguous lines of code that you want to evaluate as a group in a MATLAB
script, beginning with two comment characters (%%).
To define code section boundaries explicitly, insert section breaks using these methods:
•
On the Editor tab, in the Edit section, in the Insert button group, click .
• Enter two percent signs (%%) at the start of the line where you want to begin the new
code section.
The text on the same line as %% is called the section title. Including section titles is
optional, however, it improves the readability of the file and appears as a heading if you
publish your code.
Evaluate Code Sections

As you develop a MATLAB file, you can use the Editor section features to evaluate the
file section-by-section. This method helps you to experiment with, debug, and fine-tune
your program. You can navigate among sections, and evaluate each section individually.
To evaluate a section, it must contain all the values it requires, or the values must exist
in the MATLAB workspace.
18-7
18 Scripts
The section evaluation features run the section code currently highlighted in yellow.
MATLAB does not automatically save your file when evaluating individual code sections.
The file does not have to be on your search path.
This table provides instructions on evaluating code sections.

Operation Instructions
Run the code in the • Place the cursor in the code section.
current section. •
On the Editor tab, in the Run section, click Run
Section.
Run the code in the • Place the cursor in the code section.
current section, and then •
move to the next section. On the Editor tab, in the Run section, click Run
and Advance.
Run all the code in the • Type the saved script name in the Command Window.
file. •
On the Editor tab, in the Run section, click Run.
Note You cannot debug when running individual code sections. MATLAB ignores any
breakpoints.
Increment Values in Code Sections
You can increment numbers within a section, rerunning that section after every change.
This helps you fine-tune and experiment with your code.
To increment or decrement a number in a section:
1 Highlight or place your cursor next to the number.

2 Right-click to open the context menu.
3 Select Increment Value and Run Section. A small dialog box appears.
4 Input appropriate values in the / text box or / text box.
18-8
Run Code Sections
5 Click the , , , or button to add to, subtract from, multiply, or divide the
selected number in your section.
MATLAB runs the section after every click.
Note MATLAB software does not automatically save changes you make to the numbers
in your script.
Navigate Among Code Sections in a File

You can navigate among sections in a file without evaluating the code within those
sections. This facilitates jumping quickly from section to section within a file. You might
do this, for example, to find specific code in a large file.
Move to the next section. •
On the Editor tab, in the Run section, click
Advance.
Move to the previous • Press Ctrl + Up arrow.
section.
Move to a specific section. •
On the Editor tab, in the Navigate section, use the
Go To to move the cursor to a selected section.
Example of Evaluating Code Sections

This example defines two code sections in a file called sine_wave.m and then
increments a parameter to adjust the created plot. To open this file in your Editor, run
the following command, and then save the file to a local folder:
edit(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_env',...
'examples','sine_wave.m'))
After the file is open in your Editor:
1 Insert a section break and the following title on the first line of the file.
%% Calculate and Plot Sine Wave
2 Insert a blank line and a second section break after plot(x,y). Add a section title,
Modify Plot Properties, so that the entire file contains this code:
18-9
18 Scripts

% Define the range for x.
% Calculate and plot y = sin(x).
x = 0:1:6*pi;
y = sin(x);
plot(x,y)
%% Modify Plot Properties

title('Sine Wave')
xlabel('x')
ylabel('sin(x)')
fig = gcf;
fig.MenuBar = 'none';
3 Save the file.
4 Place your cursor in the section titled Calculate and Plot Sine Wave. On the
Editor tab, in the Run section, click Run Section.
A figure displaying a course plot of sin(x) appears.
5 Smooth the sine plot.
1 Highlight 1 in the statement: x = 0:1:6*pi; .

2 Right-click and select Increment Value and Run Section. A small dialog box
appears.
18-10
Run Code Sections
3 Type 2 in the / text box.

4 Click the button several times.
The sine plot becomes smoother after each subsequent click.
5 Close the Figure and save the file.

6 Run the entire sine_wave.m file. A smooth sine plot with titles appears in a new
Figure.
18-11
18 Scripts
Change the Appearance of Code Sections

You can change how code sections appear within the MATLAB Editor. MATLAB
highlights code sections in yellow, by default, and divides them with horizontal lines.
When the cursor is positioned in any line within a section, the Editor highlights the
entire section.
To change how code sections appear:
1
The Preference dialog box appears.

2 In the left pane, select MATLAB > Colors > Programming Tools.
3 Under Section display options, select the appearance of your code sections.
You can choose whether to highlight the sections, the color of the highlighting, and
whether dividing lines appear between code sections.
18-12
Run Code Sections
Use Code Sections with Control Statements and Functions

Unexpected results can appear when using code sections within control statements and
functions because MATLAB automatically inserts section breaks that do not appear in
the Editor unless you insert section breaks explicitly. This is especially true when nested
code is involved. Nested code occurs wherever you place a control statement or function
within the scope of another control statement or function.
MATLAB automatically defines section boundaries in a code block, according to this

criteria:
• MATLAB inserts a section break at the top and bottom of a file, creating a code
section that encompasses the entire file. However, the Editor does not highlight the
resulting section, which encloses the entire file, unless you add one or more explicit
code sections to the file.
• If you define a section break within a control flow statement (such as an if or while
statement), MATLAB automatically inserts section breaks at the lines containing the
start and end of the statement.
• If you define a section break within a function, MATLAB inserts section breaks at the
function declaration and at the function end statement. If you do not end the function
with an end statement, MATLAB behaves as if the end of the function occurs
immediately before the start of the next function.
If an automatic break occurs on the same line as a break you insert, they collapse into
one section break.
Nested Code Section Breaks
The following code illustrates the concept of nested code sections:

t = 0:.1:pi*4;
y = sin(t);
for k = 3:2:9
%%
y = y + sin(k*t)/k;
if ~mod(k,3)
%%
display(sprintf('When k = %.1f',k));
plot(t,y)
end
end
18-13
18 Scripts
If you copy and paste this code into a MATLAB Editor, you see that the two section
breaks create three nested levels:
• At the outermost level of nesting, one section spans the entire file.
MATLAB only defines section in a code block if you specify section breaks at the same
level within the code block. Therefore, MATLAB considers the cursor to be within the
section that encompasses the entire file.
• At the second level of nesting, a section exists within the for loop.
• At the third-level of nesting, one section exists within the if statement.
18-14
See Also
See Also
More About
18-15
18 Scripts
Scripts vs. Functions

This topic discusses the differences between scripts and functions, and shows how to
convert a script to a function.
Both scripts and functions allow you to reuse sequences of commands by storing them in
program files. Scripts are the simplest type of program, since they store commands
exactly as you would type them at the command line. However, functions are more
flexible and more easily extensible.
Create a script in a file named triarea.m that computes the area of a triangle:
b = 5;
h = 3;
a = 0.5*(b.*h)
After you save the file, you can call the script from the command line:
triarea
a =
7.5000
To calculate the area of another triangle using the same script, you could update the
values of b and h in the script and rerun it. Each time you run it, the script stores the
result in a variable named a that is in the base workspace.
However, instead of manually updating the script each time, you can make your program
more flexible by converting it to a function. Replace the statements that assign values to
b and h with a function declaration statement. The declaration includes the function
keyword, the names of input and output arguments, and the name of the function.
function a = triarea(b,h)
a = 0.5*(b.*h);
end
After you save the file, you can call the function with different base and height values
from the command line without modifying the script:
a1 = triarea(1,5)
a2 = triarea(2,10)
a3 = triarea(3,6)
18-16
See Also
a1 =
2.5000
a2 =
10
a3 =
9
Functions have their own workspace, separate from the base workspace. Therefore, none
of the calls to the function triarea overwrite the value of a in the base workspace.
Instead, the function assigns the results to variables a1, a2, and a3.
See Also
More About
• “Create Functions in Files” on page 20-2
18-17
18 Scripts
Add Functions to Scripts

MATLAB scripts, including live scripts, can contain code to define functions. These
functions are called local functions. Local functions are useful if you want to reuse code
within a script. By adding local functions, you can avoid creating and managing separate
function files. They are also useful for experimenting with functions, which can be added,
modified, and deleted easily as needed. Functions in scripts are supported in R2016b or
later.
Add Local Functions

Local functions are only visible within the file where they are defined, both to the script
code and other local functions within the file. They are not visible to functions in other
files, and cannot be called from the command line. They are equivalent to subroutines in
other programming languages, and are sometimes called subfunctions.
To add local functions to a script, first, create the script. Go to the Home tab and select
New > Script. For more information about creating scripts, see “Create Scripts” on page
18-2. You can also “Create Live Scripts in the Live Editor” on page 19-8.
After you create the script, add code to the script and save it. For example, add this code
and save it as a script called mystats.m. This code declares an array, determines the
length of the array, and passes both values to the local functions mymean and mymedian.
The local functions mymean and mymedian calculate the average and median of the input
list and return the results.
Note Including functions in scripts requires MATLAB R2016b or later.
x = 1:10;
n = length(x);
avg = mymean(x,n);
med = mymedian(x,n);
function a = mymean(v,n)
% MYMEAN Example of a local function.
a = sum(v)/n;
end
18-18
Add Functions to Scripts
function m = mymedian(v,n)
% MYMEDIAN Another example of a local function.
w = sort(v);
if rem(n,2) == 1
m = w((n + 1)/2);
else
m = (w(n/2) + w(n/2 + 1))/2;
end
end
You can add local functions in any order, as long as they all appear after the rest of the
script code. Each function begins with its own function definition statement, and ends
with the end keyword. The definition statement is the first executable line of any
function, for example, function a = mymean(v,n). For more information about
function definition statements, including how to create them, see “Create Functions in
Files” on page 20-2.
Access Help
Although you cannot call a local function from the command line or from functions in
other files, you can access its help using the help command. Specify the names of both
the script and the local function, separating them with a > character:
help mystats>mymean
mymean Example of a local function.
Run Code
To run a script, including all local functions, click the Run (for scripts) or Run
All (for live scripts) button, or type the saved script name in the Command Window. You
can also run individual sections in a script by clicking the Run Section button.
Local functions in the current file have precedence over functions in other files. That is,
when you call a function within a program file, MATLAB checks whether the function is
a local function before looking for other functions. This allows you to create an alternate
version of a particular function while retaining the original in another file.
Scripts create and access variables in the base workspace. Local functions, similar to
other functions, have their own workspaces that are separate from the base workspace.
18-19
18 Scripts
Local functions cannot access variables in the workspace of other functions or in the base
workspace, unless you pass them as arguments. For more information, see “Base and
Function Workspaces” on page 20-10.
Add and Run Sections in Live Scripts

The Live Editor does not support running individual sections within local functions. For
this reason, you cannot add section breaks within local functions in live scripts. When
you add local functions to a live script, MATLAB automatically adds a section break
before the first local function definition, and removes all section breaks after it. You can
however run individual sections within the script code, even if they contain a call to one
of the local functions in the file. For more information on section breaks and running live
scripts, see “Run Sections in Live Scripts” on page 19-15.
See Also
More About
• “Function Precedence Order” on page 20-43
18-20
19
Live Scripts
19 Live Scripts
What Is a Live Script?

A MATLAB live script is an interactive document that combines MATLAB code with
embedded output, formatted text, equations, and images in a single environment called
the Live Editor. Live scripts are stored using the Live Script file format in a file with
a .mlx extension.
Use live scripts to
• Visually explore and analyze problems
• Write, execute, and test code in a single interactive environment.

• Run blocks of code individually or as a whole file, and view the results and
graphics with the code that produced them.
• Share richly formatted, executable narratives
• Add titles, headings, and formatted text to describe a process and include LaTeX
equations, images, and hyperlinks as supporting material.
• Save your narratives as richly formatted, executable documents and share them
with colleagues or the MATLAB community, or convert them to HTML, PDF, or
LaTeX files for publication.
19-2
• Create interactive lectures for teaching
• Combine code and results with formatted text and mathematical equations.
• Create step-by-step lectures and evaluate them incrementally to illustrate a topic.
• Modify code on the fly to answer questions or explore related topics.
• Share lectures with students as interactive documents or in hardcopy format, and
distribute partially completed files as assignments.
19-3
19 Live Scripts
Live Script vs. Script

Live scripts differ from plain code scripts in several ways. This table summarizes the
main differences.
Live Script Script
File Live Script file format. For more Plain Text file format
Format information, see “Live Script File
Format (.mlx)” on page 19-51
File .mlx .m
Extension
Output With code in the Live Editor In Command Window
Display
Internatio Interoperable across locales Non-7–bit ASCII characters are
nalization not compatible across all locales
Text Add and view formatted text in the Live Use publishing markup to add
Formattin Editor formatted text, publish to view
g
19-4
Live Script Script

Visual
Represent
ation
Requirements
• MATLAB R2016a — MATLAB supports live scripts in versions R2016a and above.
You can open live scripts as code only files in MATLAB versions R2014b, R2015a, and
R2015b.
Caution Saving a live script in MATLAB versions R2014b, R2015a, and R2015b
causes all formatted text, images, hyperlinks, equations, and generated output
content to be lost.
• Operating System — MATLAB supports live scripts in most of the operating systems
supported by MATLAB. For more information, see System Requirements.
Unsupported versions include:
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.

• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop versions 13.0 and earlier.
• Debian 7.6 and earlier.
19-5
19 Live Scripts
Some operating systems require additional configuration to run the Live Editor. If
you are unable to run the Live Editor on your system, Contact Technical Support for
information on how to configure your system.
Unsupported Features
When deciding whether to create a live script, it is important to note several features
that the Live Editor does not support:
• Functions and classes — The Live Editor only supports functions in live scripts. You
can create functions in the Live Editor by including them at the end of a live script.
For more information, see “Add Functions to Scripts” on page 18-18. To create class or
function files, create them as plain code files (.m). You then can call the functions and
classes from your live scripts.
• Debugging using the graphical debugger — In the Live Editor, you cannot set
breakpoints graphically or pause the execution of a live script using the Pause
button. To debug your file, see Debugging in live scripts on page 19-17.
Alternatively, you can Save your live script as a plain code file (.m) on page 19-6.
If a breakpoint is placed in a plain code file (.m) that is called from a live script,
MATLAB ignores the breakpoint when the live script is executed.
• Editor preferences — The Live Editor ignores most Editor preferences, including
custom keyboard shortcuts and Emacs-style keyboard shortcuts.
Save Live Script as Script

To save a live script as a plain code file (.m).
1 On the Live Editor tab, in the File section, select Save > Save As....
2 In the dialog box that appears, select MATLAB Code files (*.m) as the Save as
type.
3 Click Save.
When saving, MATLAB converts all formatted content to publish markup.
19-6
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
• “Live Script File Format (.mlx)” on page 19-51
19-7
19 Live Scripts
Create Live Scripts in the Live Editor

In this section...
“Open New Live Script” on page 19-8
“Run Code” on page 19-9
“Display Output” on page 19-11
“Format Text” on page 19-13
Live scripts are program files that contain your code, output, and formatted text together
in a single interactive environment called the Live Editor. In live scripts, you can write
your code and view the generated output and graphics along with the code that produced
it. Add formatted text, images, hyperlinks, and equations to create an interactive
narrative that you can share with others.
Open New Live Script

To open a new live script in the Live Editor, use one of these methods:
•
On the Home tab, click New Live Script .
• Highlight commands from the Command History, right-click, and select Create Live
Script.
• Use the edit function. To ensure that a live script is created, specify a .mlx
extension. For example:
19-8
edit penny.mlx
If an extension is not specified, MATLAB defaults to a file with .m extension, which

only supports plain code.
Open Existing Script as Live Script
If you have an existing script, you can open it as a live script in the Live Editor. Opening
a script as a live script creates a copy of the file and leaves the original file untouched.
MATLAB converts publishing markup from the original script to formatted content in
the new live script.
To open an existing script (.m) as a live script (.mlx) from the Editor, right-click the
document tab, and select Open scriptName as Live Script from the context menu. You
also can go to the Editor tab, click Save , and select Save As. Then, set the Save as
type: to MATLAB Live Scripts (*.mlx) and click Save.
To open an existing script as a live script from the Current Folder browser, right-click
the file and select Open as Live Script from the context menu.
Note
• You must use one of the described conversion methods to convert your script to a live
script. Simply renaming the script with a .mlx extension does not work and can
corrupt the file.
• Only script files can be opened as live scripts. The Live Editor does not support
functions and classes.
Run Code
After you create a live script, you can add code and run it. For example, add this code
that plots a vector of random data and draws a horizontal line on the plot at the mean.
n = 50;
r = rand(n,1);
plot(r)
m = mean(r);
hold on
19-9
19 Live Scripts
plot([0,n],[m,m])
hold off
title('Mean of Random Uniform Data')
By default, MATLAB autocompletes parentheses and quotes when entering code in the
Live Editor. For example, type
r = rand(
MATLAB automatically adds the closing parenthesis to the statement.
r = rand()
MATLAB also autocompletes comments, character vectors, and strings when split across
two lines. To escape out of an autocompletion, press Ctrl+Z or the Undo button .
Autocompletions are enabled by default. To disable them, see “Editor/Debugger
Autocoding Preferences”.
To run the code, click the vertical striped bar to the left of the code. Alternatively, go to
the Live Editor tab and in the Section section, click Run Section.
You do not need to save your live script to run it. When you do save your live script,
MATLAB automatically saves it with a .mlx extension. For example, to save your
current live script, on the Live Editor tab, click Save. Enter the name plotRand.
MATLAB saves the live script as plotRand.mlx.
19-10
Display Output
By default, MATLAB displays the output to the right of the code. Each output is
displayed with the line that creates it, like in the Command Window.
You can change the size of the output display panel by dragging left or right on the
resizer bar between the code and output.
To clear all output, right-click anywhere in the script and select Clear All Output.
Alternatively, go to the View tab and in the Output section, click the Clear all Output
button.
When scrolling, MATLAB aligns the output to the code that generates it:
• To disable the alignment of output to code, right-click the output section and select
Disable Synchronous Scrolling.
• To reenable the alignment of output to code, right-click the output section and select
Enable Synchronous Scrolling.
To view the output in line with the code, click the icon to the right of the live script.
You also can go to the View tab and in the Layout section, click the Output Inline
button.
19-11
19 Live Scripts
To modify figures in the output, use the tools in the upper-right corner of the figure axes
or in the Figure toolstrip. You can use the tools to explore the data in a figure and add
formatting and annotations. For more information, see “Modify Figures in Live Scripts”
on page 19-18.
To open individual outputs, such as variables and figures in a separate window, click the
icon in the upper right corner of the output. Variables open in the Variables editor,
and figures open in a new figure window. Changes made to variables or figures outside of
a live script do no apply the output displayed in the live script.
19-12
Format Text
You can add formatted text, hyperlinks, images, and equations to your live scripts to
create a presentable document to share with others. For example, add a title and some
introductory text to plotRand.mlx:
1
Place your cursor at the top of the live script and in the Live Editor tab, select
Text. A new text line appears above the code.
2
Click and select Title.
3 Add the text Plot Random Data.
4 With your cursor still in the line, click the button to center the text.
5 Press Enter to move to the next line.
6 Type the text This script plots a vector of random data and draws a
horizontal line on the plot at the mean.
For more information including a list of all available formatting options, see “Format
Live Scripts” on page 19-32.
19-13
19 Live Scripts
See Also
More About
• “Run Sections in Live Scripts” on page 19-15
• “Modify Figures in Live Scripts” on page 19-18
• “Insert Equations into Live Scripts” on page 19-37
• “Format Live Scripts” on page 19-32
19-14
Run Sections in Live Scripts
Run Sections in Live Scripts
Divide Your File Into Sections

Live scripts often contain many commands and lines of text. You typically focus efforts on
a single part of your program at a time, working with the code and related text in pieces.
For easier document management and navigation, divide your file into sections. Code,
output, and related text can all appear together, in a single section.
To insert a section break into your live script, go to the Live Editor tab and in the
Insert section, click the Section Break button. The new section is highlighted in blue,
indicating that it is selected. A vertical striped bar to the left of the section indicates that
the section is stale. A stale section is a section that has not yet been run, or that has been
modified since it was last run.
This image shows a new blank section in a live script.
To delete a section break, click the beginning of the line directly after the section break
and press Backspace. You can also click the end of the line directly before the section
break and press Delete.
Evaluate Sections
Run your live script either by evaluating each section individually or by running all the
code at once. To evaluate a section individually, it must contain all the values it requires,
or the values must exist in the MATLAB workspace. Section evaluation runs the
currently selected section, highlighted in blue. If there is only one section in your
program file, the section is not highlighted, as it is always selected.
This table describes different ways to run your code.
19-15
19 Live Scripts
Run the code in the • Click the bar to the left of the section. If the bar is not
selected section. visible, hover the mouse on the left side of the section
until the bar appears.
OR
• On the Live Editor tab, in the Section section, click

Run Section.
Run the code in the • On the Live Editor tab, in the Section section, select
selected section, and then Run and Advance.
move to the next section.
Run the code in the • On the Live Editor tab, in the Section section, select
selected section, and then Run to End.
run all the code after the
selected section.
Run all the code in the • On the Live Editor tab, in the Run section, click
file. Run All.
OR
• Type the saved script name in the Command Window.
View Code Status
While your program is running, a status indicator appears at the top left of the Editor
window. A gray blinking bar to the left of a line indicates the line that MATLAB is
evaluating. To navigate to the line, click the status indicator.
If an error occurs while MATLAB is running your program, the status indicator becomes
an error icon . To navigate to the error, click the icon. An error icon to the right of
the line of code indicates the error. The corresponding error message is displayed as an
output.
19-16
See Also
Debugging
You can diagnose problems with your live script using several debugging methods:
• Visually — Remove semi-colons from the end of code lines to view output and
determine where the problem occurs. To make visual debugging easier, live scripts
display each output with the line of code that creates it.
• Programmatically — Use the command line debugger to create and navigate through
breakpoints. For a list of available command line debugging functions, see the
“Debugging” documentation.
Note Debugging using the graphical debugger is not supported in live scripts. For more
information, see “What Is a Live Script?” on page 19-2
See Also
Related Examples
• “Modify Figures in Live Scripts” on page 19-18
• “Share Live Scripts” on page 19-49
• “What Is a Live Script?” on page 19-2
19-17
19 Live Scripts
Modify Figures in Live Scripts

You can modify figures interactively in the Live Editor. Use the provided tools to explore
data and add formatting, annotations, or additional axes to your figures. Then, update
your code to reflect changes using the generated code.
Explore Data
Use the tools in the upper-right corner of each axes to pan, zoom, and rotate a figure in
your script. These tools appear when you hover over the axes of a selected figure.
• — Add data tips to display data values.

• — Rotate the plot (3-D plots only).
• — Pan the plot.
• , — Zoom in and out of the plot.
To undo or redo an action, click or at the upper right corner of the toolstrip. To
undo all pan, zoom, and rotate actions on a figure, right-click the axes and select Reset
to Original View.
Note
•
When you open a saved live script, appears next to each output figure, indicating
that the interactive tools are not available yet. To make these tools available, run the
live script.
• The interactive tools are not available for invisible axes.
Suppose that you want to explore the health information for 100 different patients.
Create a live script called patients.mlx and add code that loads the data.
load patients
Run the code by going to the Live Editor tab and clicking Run All.
Add a scatter plot that shows the height versus weight of two groups of patients, female
and male.
19-18
load patients
figure
scatter(Height(Gender=='Female'),Weight(Gender=='Female'));
hold on
scatter(Height(Gender=='Male'),Weight(Gender=='Male'));
hold off
Run the code to create the plot.
Explore the points where the patient height is 64 inches. Select the button and click
one of the data points where height is 64. MATLAB zooms into the figure.
19-19
19 Live Scripts
Update Code with Figure Changes

When modifying output figures in live scripts, changes to the figure are not automatically
added to the script. With each interaction, MATLAB generates the code needed to
reproduce the interactions and displays this code either underneath or to the right of the
figure. Use the Update Code button to add the generated code to your script. This
ensures that the interactions are reproduced the next time you run the live script.
For example, in the live script patients.mlx, after zooming in on patients with a height
of 64, click the Update Code button. MATLAB adds the generated code after the line
containing the code for creating the plot.
19-20
load patients
figure
hold on
hold off
xlim([61.31 69.31])
ylim([116.7 183.3])
If MATLAB is unable to determine where to place the generated code, the Update Code
button is disabled. This occurs, for example, if you modify the code without running the
script again. In this case, use the Copy button to copy the generated code into the
clipboard. You then can paste the code into your script at the appropriate location.
Add Formatting and Annotations

In addition to exploring the data, you can format and annotate your figures interactively
by adding titles, labels, legends, grid lines, arrows, and lines. To add an item, first select
the desired figure. Then, go to the Figure tab and, in the Annotations section, select
one of the available options. Use the down arrow on the right side of the section to
display all available annotations. To add a formatting or annotation option to your
favorites, click the star at the top right of the desired annotation icon. To undo or redo a
formatting or annotation action, click or at the upper right corner of the toolstrip.
Annotation options include:
•
Title — Add a title to the axes. To modify an existing title, click the existing
title and enter the modified text.
•
X-Label, Y-Label — Add a label to the axes. To modify an existing label,
click the existing label and enter the modified text.
•
Legend — Add a legend to the figure. To modify the existing legend
descriptions, click the existing descriptions and enter the modified text. Select
Remove Legend from the Annotations section to remove the legend from the axes.
19-21
19 Live Scripts
•
Colorbar — Add a colorbar legend to the figure. Select Remove Colorbar
from the Annotations section to remove the colorbar legend from the axes.
•
Grid, X-Grid, Y-Grid — Add grid lines to the figure. Select
Remove Grid from the Annotations section to remove all the grid lines from the
axes.
•
Line, Arrow, Text Arrow, Double Arrow — Add a line
or arrow annotation to the figure. Draw the arrow from tail to head. To move an
existing annotation, click the annotation to select it and drag it to the desired
location. Press the Delete key to delete the selected annotation.
Note Adding formatting and annotations using the Figure tab is not supported for
invisible axes.
For example, suppose that you want to add formatting and annotations to the figure in
patients.mlx.
1
Add a title — In the Annotations section, select Title. A blue rectangle
appears prompting you to enter text. Type the text Weight vs. Height and press
Enter.
2
Add X and Y Labels — In the Annotations section, select X-Label. A blue
rectangle appears prompting you to enter text. Type the text Height and press
Enter. Select Y-Label. A blue rectangle appears prompting you to enter text.
Type the text Weight and press Enter.
3
Add a legend — In the Annotations section, select Legend. A legend
appears at the top right corner of the axes. Click the data1 description in the legend
and replace the text with Female. Click the data2 description in the legend and
replace the text with Male. Press Enter.
4
Add grid lines — In the Annotations section, select Grid. Grid lines appear
in the axes.
19-22
5
Add an arrow annotation — In the Annotations section, select Text
Arrow. Drawing the arrow from tail to head, position the arrow on the scatter plot
pointing to the lightest patient. Enter the text Lightest Patient and press Enter
6 Update the code — In the selected figure, click the Update Code button. The live
script now contains the code needed to reproduce the figure changes.
load patients
figure
hold on
hold off
xlim([61.31 69.31])
ylim([116.7 183.3])
grid on
legend({'Female','Male'})
title('Weight vs Height')
xlabel('Height')
ylabel('Weight')
annotation('textarrow',[0.455 0.3979],[0.3393 0.13],'String','Lightest Patient');
19-23
19 Live Scripts
Add and Modify Multiple Subplots

You can combine multiple plots by creating subplots in a figure. To add multiple subplots
to your figure, use the Subplot button to divide the figure into a grid of subplots. First,
select the desired figure. Then, go to the Figure tab and choose a subplot layout using
the Subplot button. You only can add additional subplots to a figure if the figure
contains one subplot. If a figure contains multiple subplots, the Subplot button is
disabled.
19-24
For example, suppose that you want to compare the blood pressure of smoking and non-
smoking patients. Create a live script called patients_smoking.mlx and add code that
loads the health information for 100 different patients.
load patients
Run the code by going to the Live Editor tab and clicking Run All.
Add a scatter plot that shows the systolic blood pressure of patients that smoke versus
the systolic blood pressure of patients that do not smoke. Run the code.
load patients
figure
scatter(Age(Smoker==1),Systolic(Smoker==1));
hold on
hold off
In the Figure tab, select Subplot and choose the layout for two horizontal graphs.
19-25
19 Live Scripts
In the newly created figure, click the Update Code button. The live script now contains
the code needed to reproduce the two subplots.
load patients
figure
hold on
hold off
subplot(2,1,1,gca)
subplot(2,1,2)
19-26
Add a scatter plot that shows the diastolic blood pressure of patients that smoke versus
the diastolic blood pressure of patients that do not smoke. Run the code.
load patients
figure
hold on
hold off
subplot(2,1,1,gca)
subplot(2,1,2)
scatter(Age(Smoker==1),Diastolic(Smoker==1));
hold on
hold off
Add formatting:
1
Add titles to each subplot — In the Annotations section, select Title. A
blue rectangle appears in each subplot prompting you to enter text. Type the text
Systolic Blood Pressure of Smokers vs Non-Smokers in the first subplot
and Diastolic Blood Pressure of Smokers vs Non-Smokers in the second
subplot and press Enter.
19-27
19 Live Scripts
2
Add grid lines to each subplot — In the Annotations section, select Grid.
An Add Grid icon appears on each subplot. Click the Add Grid icon on each
subplot. Grid lines appear in both subplots.
19-28
3 Update the code — In the selected figure, click the Update Code button. The live
script now contains the code needed to reproduce the figure changes.
load patients
figure
hold on
hold off
subplot(2,1,1,gca)
subplot(2,1,2)
19-29
19 Live Scripts
hold on
hold off
subplot(2,1,1)
grid on
title('Systolic Blood Pressure of Smokers vs Non-Smokers')
subplot(2,1,2)
grid on
title('Diastolic Blood Pressure of Smokers vs Non-Smokers')
Save and Print Figure

At any point during figure modification, you can choose to save or print the figure for
future use.
19-30
See Also
1
Click the icon in the upper-right corner of the output. This opens the figure in a
separate figure window.
2 a To save the figure — Select File > Save As. For more information on saving
figures, see “Save Figure to Open in Another Application” or “Save Figure to
Reopen in MATLAB Later”.
b To print the figure — Select File > Print. For more information on printing
figures, see “Print Figure from File Menu”.
Note Any changes made to the figure in the separate figure window are not reflected in
the live script. Similarly, any changes made to the figure in the live script are not
reflected in the open figure window.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Run Sections in Live Scripts” on page 19-15
19-31
19 Live Scripts
Format Live Scripts

You can add formatted text, hyperlinks, images, and equations to your live scripts to
create a presentable document to share with others.
To insert a new item, go to the Insert tab and select from the available options:
Option Description Additional Details
Insert a blank You can insert a code line before, after, or between text
Code line of code. lines.
Insert a You can insert a section break to divide your live script
Section section break. into manageable sections to evaluate individually. In live
Break scripts, a section can consist of code, text, and output. For
more information, see “Run Sections in Live Scripts” on
page 19-15.
Insert a blank A text line can contain formatted text, hyperlinks, images,
Text line of text. or equations. You can insert a text line before, after, or
between code lines.
Insert an You can add images only in text lines. If you insert an
Image
image. image into a code line, MATLAB places the image in a new
text line directly under the selected code line.
Insert a You can add hyperlinks only in text lines. If you insert a
Hyperlink hyperlink. hyperlink into a code line, MATLAB places the hyperlink
in a new text line directly under the selected code line.
Equation Insert an You can add equations only in text lines. If you insert an
equation equation into a code line, MATLAB places the equation in
a new text line directly under the selected code line. For
more information, see “Insert Equations into Live Scripts”
on page 19-37.
To format existing text, use any of the options included in the Live Editor tab Text
section:
19-32
Format Live Scripts
Format Type Options

Text Style
Normal
Heading
Title
Text Left
Alignment
Center
Right
Lists Numbered list
Bulleted list
Standard Bold
Formatting
Italic
Underline
Monospace
Autoformatting
For quick formatting in live scripts, you can use a combination of keyboard shortcuts and
character sequences. Formatting appears after you enter the final character in a
sequence.
This table shows a list of formatting styles and their available keyboard shortcuts and
autoformatting sequences.
19-33
19 Live Scripts
Formatting Autoformatting Keyboard Shortcut

Style Sequence
Title # text + Ctrl + Alt + L
Enter
Heading ## text + Ctrl + Alt + H
Enter
Section break %% text + With cursor at beginning of line with text:
with heading Enter
Ctrl + Alt + H, then Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Section break %% + Enter Ctrl + Alt + Enter
--- + Enter
*** + Enter
Bulleted list * text Ctrl + Alt + U
- text
+ text
Numbered number. Ctrl + Alt + O
list text
Italic *text* Ctrl + I
_text_
Bold **text** Ctrl + B
__text__
Bold and ***text*** Ctrl + B, then Ctrl + I
italic
___text___
Monospace `text` Ctrl + M
|text|
Underline None Ctrl + U
LaTeX $LaTeX$ Ctrl + Alt + G
equation
19-34
Format Live Scripts
Formatting Autoformatting Keyboard Shortcut

Style Sequence
Hyperlink URL + Space Ctrl + K
or Enter
<URL>
[Label]
(URL)
Note Title, heading, section break, and list sequences must be entered at the beginning
of a line.
Sometimes you want an autoformatting sequence such as *** to appear literally. To

display the characters in the sequence, escape out of the autoformatting by pressing the
Backspace key or by clicking Undo . For example, if you type ## text + Enter, a
heading with the word text appears. To undo the formatting style and simply display ##
text, press the Backspace key. You only can escape out of a sequence directly after
completing it. After you enter another character or move the cursor, escaping is no longer
possible.
To revert the autoformatting for LaTeX equations and hyperlinks, use the Backspace
key at any point.
To force formatting to reappear after escaping out of a sequence, click the Redo
button. You only can redo an action directly after escaping it. After you enter another
character or move the cursor, the redo action is no longer possible. In this case, to force
the formatting to reappear, delete the last character in the sequence and type it again.
To disable all or certain autoformatting sequences, you can adjust the “Editor/Debugger
Autoformatting Preferences”.
19-35
19 Live Scripts
See Also
More About
• “Insert Equations into Live Scripts” on page 19-37
19-36
Insert Equations into Live Scripts

To describe a mathematical process or method used in your code, insert equations into
your live script. Only text lines can contain equations. If you insert an equation into a
code line, MATLAB places the equation into a new text line directly under the selected
code line.
There are two ways to insert an equation into a live script.
• Insert an equation interactively — You can build an equation interactively by

selecting from a graphical display of symbols and structures.
• Insert a LaTeX equation — You can enter LaTeX commands and the Live Editor
inserts the corresponding equation.
Insert Equation Interactively

To insert an equation interactively:
1 Go to the Live Editor tab and in the Insert section, click Equation.
A blank equation appears.
19-37
19 Live Scripts
2 Build your equation by selecting symbols, structures, and matrices from the options
displayed in the Equation tab. View additional options by clicking the to the right
of each section.
When adding or editing a matrix, a context menu appears, which you can use to
delete and insert rows and columns.
3 Format your equation using the options available in the Format section. Formatting
is only available for text within the equation. Numbers and symbols cannot be
formatted. The formatting option is disabled unless the cursor is placed within text
that can be formatted.
Keyboard Shortcuts for Equation Editing
The equation editor provides a few shortcuts for adding elements to your equation:
• To insert symbols, structures, and matrices, type a backslash followed by the name of
the symbol. For example, type \pi to insert a π symbol into the equation. To discover
the name of a symbol or structure, hover over the corresponding icon in the Equation
tab. You can also type backslash in the equation editor to bring up a completion menu
of all supported names.
19-38
Note Although the \name syntax closely resembles LaTeX command syntax, entering
full LaTeX expressions is not supported when inserting equations interactively.
• To insert subscripts, superscripts, and fractions, use the symbols ‘_’, ‘^’ or ‘/’. For
example:
•
Type x_2 to insert x2 into the equation.
•
Type x^2 to insert x2 into the equation.
•
x
Type x/2 to insert into the equation.
2
• To insert a new column into a matrix, type a ‘,’ at the end of the last cell in a matrix
row. To insert a new row, type a semicolon ‘;’ at the end of the last cell in a matrix
column.
• To insert the common symbols listed in this table, type a combination of other
symbols.
Keyboard Input Symbol Keyboard Input Symbol Keyboard Input Symbol
|| ∥ => ⇒ != ≠
|= ⊧ <--> !< ≮
|– ⊢ <-> ´ !> ≯
19-39
19 Live Scripts
Keyboard Input Symbol Keyboard Input Symbol Keyboard Input Symbol

–| ⊣ <= ≤ !<= ≰
-> → >= ≥ !>= ≱
<- ← <> ≠
<-- ~= ≠
Insert LaTeX Equation

To insert a LaTeX equation:
1 Go to the Live Editor tab and in the Insert section, click Equation and select
LaTeX Equation.
2 Enter a LaTeX expression in the dialog box that appears. For example, you can enter
\sin(x) = \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}{\frac{(-1)^n x^{2n+1}}{(2n+1)!}}.
The preview pane shows a preview of equation as it would appear in the live script.
3 Press OK to insert the equation into your live script.
LaTeX expressions describe a wide range of equations. This table shows several examples
of LaTeX expressions and their appearance when inserted into a live script.
19-40
LaTeX Expression Equation in Live Script

a^2 + b^2 = c^2
a2 + b2 = c2
\int_{0}^{2} x^2\sin(x) dx
2 2
Ú0 x sin( x) dx
\sin(x) = \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}{\frac{(-1)^n
x^{2n+1}}{(2n+1)!}} •
( -1) n x2n +1
sin( x) = Â
{a,b,c} \neq \{a,b,c\} n =0 (2 n + 1)!
a, b, c π { a, b, c}
x^{2} \geq 0\qquad \text{for all}x\in
\mathbf{R} x2 ≥ 0 for all x Œ R
\matrix{a & b \cr c & d}
a b
c d
Supported LaTeX Commands
MATLAB supports most standard LaTeX math mode commands. These tables show a list
of supported LaTeX commands.
Greek/Hebrew Letters
Symbol LaTeX Command Symbol LaTeX Command Symbol
α alpha ν nu ξ
β beta ω omega ζ
χ chi о omicron ɛ
δ delta ϕ phi φ
ε epsilon π pi ϖ
η eta ψ psi ϱ
v gamma ρ rho ς
ι iota σ sigma J
κ kappa τ tau ‫א‬
λ lambda θ theta
19-41
19 Live Scripts

μ mu υ upsilon
Δ Delta Φ Phi Θ
Γ Gamma Π Pi ϒ
Λ Lambda Ψ Psi Ξ
Ω Omega Σ Sigma
Operator Symbols
* ast ± pm ∩
☆ star ∓ mp ∪
· cdot ∐ amalg ⊎
○ circ ⊙ odot ⊓
• bullet ⊖ ominus ⊔
⋄ diamond ⊕ oplus ∧
∖ setminus ⊘ oslash ∨
× times ⊗ otimes ◁
÷ div † dagger ▷
⊥ bot, perp ‡ ddagger V
⊤ top ≀ wr ‰
∑ sum ∏ prod ∫
biguplus bigoplus
≈ ⁄
« bigcap bigotimes
ƒ Ÿ
» bigcup bigodot
e
Relation Symbols
≡ equiv < lt >
19-42

≅ cong ≤ le, leq ≥
≠ neq, ne, not= ≮ not< ≯
∼ sim ≺ prec ≻
≃ simeq ≼ preceq ≽
≈ approx ≪ ll ≫
≍ asymp ⊂ subset ⊃
≐ doteq ⊆ subseteq ⊇
∝ propto ⊑ sqsubseteq ⊒
⊧ models ∣ mid ∊
⋈ bowtie ∥ parallel ∉
⊢ vdash ⇔ iff ∍
⊣ dashv
Note The leq, geq, equiv, approx, cong, sim, simeq, models, ni, succ, succeq,
prec, preceq, parallel, subset, supset, subseteq, and supseteq commands can be
combined with the not command to create the negated version of the symbol. For
example, \not\leq creates the symbol ≰.
Arrows
← leftarrow → rightarrow ↑
⇐ Leftarrow ⇒ Rightarrow ⇑
longleftarrow longrightarrow ↓
Longleftarrow Longrightarrow ⇓
↩ hookleftarrow ↪ hookrightarrow
b
↽ leftharpoondown ⇁ rightharpoondow
n c
↼ leftharpoonup ⇀ rightharpoonup ´
19-43
19 Live Scripts

↙ swarrow ↗ nearrow ¤
↖ nwarrow ↘ searrow
↦ mapsto longmapsto
Brackets
{ lbrace } rbrace |
[ lbrack ] rbrack ‖
〈 langle 〉 rangle \
⌈ lceil ⌉ rceil
⌊ lfloor ⌋ rfloor
Sample LaTeX Command Sample LaTeX Command
big, bigl, bigr, brace
bigm { abc}
Big, Bigl, Bigr, brack
Bigm [ abc]
bigg, biggl, choose
biggr, biggm ( abc)
Bigg, Biggl,
Biggr, Biggm
Misc Symbols
∞ infty ∀ forall ℘
∇ nabla ∃ exists ∠
∂ partial ∆ emptyset △
ℑ Im i ħ
19-44

ℜ Re j ′
ℓ ell imath ¬
… dots, ldots jmath

÷
L cdots : colon ←
O ddots ◊ cdotp →
⋮ vdots . ldotp
Note The exists command can be combined with the not command to create the
negated version of the symbol. For example, \not\exists creates the symbol ∄.
Accents
á acute && ddot
a a%
a bar a& dot r

a
( breve à grave
a
check hat
˙ â
a
Functions
Sample LaTeX Command Sample LaTeX Command Sample
arccos arccos det ln
det
arcsin dim
arcsin dim log
arctan arctan exp exp max
arg arg gcd min

gcd
cos cos hom Pr
hom
19-45
19 Live Scripts

cosh ker sec
cosh ker
cot cot lg
lg sin
coth lim lim
coth sinh
csc csc lim inf liminf sup
deg limsup tan
deg limsup
Math Constructs
frac over
a
abc a b
xyz b
sqrt overwithdelims
abc
È a˘ b
Íb˙ a
Î ˚
bmod suuuu overleftarrow
mod a abc
Êa bˆ
Á ˜
Ëc d¯
pmod uuuur overrightarrow
( mod a ) abc
a b
c d
widehat overleftrightar
·
suuur
abc abc row a b
c d
² widetilde limits
abc
b Ïa b
Ì
Ú Óc d
left a right
ab
cd
19-46
See Also
Note To create a matrix using the matrix and pmatrix commands, use the & symbol to
separate columns, and \cr to separate rows. For example, to create a 2–by–2 matrix, use
the expression \matrix{a & b \cr c & d}.
White Space
negthinspace mathord
abc a[ b
thinspace mathop
ab a]b
aÂ b
enspace mathbin
ab a+b a| b
quad mathrel
a b a=b a b
qquad mathpunct
a b a, b
Text Styling
displaystyle text, textnormal ABCDE
ABCDE
textstyle bf, textbf, mathbf

ABCDE ABCDE
scriptstyle it, textit, mathit
ABCDE A BCD E
scriptscriptsty rm, textrm, mathrm
ABCDE ABCDE
le
See Also
Related Examples
19-47
19 Live Scripts
External Websites
• http://www.latex-project.org/
19-48
Share Live Scripts
Share Live Scripts

You can share live scripts with others for teaching or demonstration purposes, or to
provide readable, external documentation of your code. You can share live scripts with
other MATLAB users, or you can share static PDF, HTML, and LaTeX files for viewing
outside of MATLAB.
This table shows the different ways to share live scripts.

Ways to Share Live Scripts Instructions
As an interactive document. Distribute the live script file (.mlx).
Recipients of the file can open and view the
file in MATLAB in the same state that you
last saved it in. This includes generated
output.
MATLAB supports live scripts in Versions

R2016a and above.
With users of previous MATLAB versions. Save the live script as a plain code file (.m)
and distribute it. Recipients of the file can
open and view the file in MATLAB.
MATLAB converts formatted content from
the live script to publish markup in the
new script.
For more information, see “Save Live Script

as Script” on page 19-6.
In MATLAB Versions R2014b, R2015a,

and R2015b, you can open live scripts as
code only files.
Caution Saving a live script in MATLAB

Versions R2014b, R2015a, and R2015b
causes all formatted text, images,
hyperlinks, equations, and generated
output content to be lost.
19-49
19 Live Scripts
Ways to Share Live Scripts Instructions

As a static document capable of being Export the script to a standard format.
viewed outside of MATLAB. Available formats include PDF, HTML, and
LaTeX.
To export your live script to one of these

formats, on the Live Editor tab, select
Save > Export to PDF, Save > Export to
HTML, or Save > Export to LaTeX.
The saved file closely resembles the

appearance of your live script when viewed
in the Editor with output inline.
When exporting to LaTeX, MATLAB

creates a separate Extensible Stylesheet
Language (XSL) file in the same folder as
the output document, if one does not exist
already. XSL files give you more control
over the appearance of the output
document. For more details, see http://
docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/
doc/.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Format Live Scripts” on page 19-32
19-50
Live Script File Format (.mlx)
Live Script File Format (.mlx)

MATLAB stored live scripts using the Live Script file format in a file with a .mlx
extension. The Live Script file format uses Open Packaging Conventions technology,
which is an extension of the zip file format. Code and formatted content are stored in an
XML document separate from the output using the Office Open XML (ECMA-376)
format.
Benefits of Live Script File Format

• Interoperable Across Locales — Live script files support storing and displaying
characters across all locales, facilitating sharing files internationally. For example, if
you create a live script with a Japanese locale setting, and open the live script with a
Russian locale setting, the characters in the live script display correctly.
• Extensible — Live script files can be extended through the ECMA-376 format, which
supports the range of formatting options offered by Microsoft Word. The ECMA-376
format also accommodates arbitrary name-value pairs, should there be a need to
extend the format beyond what the standard offers.
• Forward Compatible — Future versions of live script files are compatible with
previous versions of MATLAB by implementing the ECMA-376 standard's forward
compatibility strategy.
• Backward Compatible — Future versions of MATLAB can support live script files
created by a previous version of MATLAB.
Source Control
To determine and display code differences between live scripts, use the MATLAB
Comparison Tool.
If you use source control, register the .mlx extension as binary. For more information,
see “Register Binary Files with SVN” on page 31-18 or “Register Binary Files with Git”
on page 31-32.
19-51
19 Live Scripts
See Also
More About
External Websites
• Open Packaging Conventions Fundamentals
• Office Open XML File Formats (ECMA-376)
19-52
20
Function Basics

• “Run Functions in the Editor” on page 20-8
• “Share Data Between Workspaces” on page 20-11
• “Check Variable Scope in Editor” on page 20-16
• “Types of Functions” on page 20-20
• “Nested Functions” on page 20-32
• “Variables in Nested and Anonymous Functions” on page 20-39
• “Private Functions” on page 20-41
20 Function Basics
Create Functions in Files

Both scripts and functions allow you to reuse sequences of commands by storing them in
program files. Scripts are the simplest type of program, since they store commands
exactly as you would type them at the command line. Functions provide more flexibility,
primarily because you can pass input values and return output values. For example, this
function named fact computes the factorial of a number (n) and returns the result (f).
function f = fact(n)
f = prod(1:n);
end
This type of function must be defined within a file, not at the command line. Often, you
store a function in its own file. In that case, the best practice is to use the same name for
the function and the file (in this example, fact.m), since MATLAB associates the
program with the file name. Save the file either in the current folder or in a folder on the
MATLAB search path.
You can call the function from the command line, using the same syntax rules that apply
to functions installed with MATLAB. For instances, calculate the factorial of 5.
x = 5;
y = fact(5)
y =
120
Starting in R2016b, another option for storing functions is to include them at the end of a
script file. For instance, create a file named mystats.m with a few commands and two
functions, fact and perm. The script calculates the permutation of (3,2).
x = 3;
y = 2;
z = perm(x,y)
function p = perm(n,r)
p = fact(n)*fact(n-r);
end
function f = fact(n)
f = prod(1:n);
end
20-2
Create Functions in Files
Call the script from the command line.
mystats
z =
Syntax for Function Definition

The first line of every function is the definition statement, which includes the following
elements.
function keyword Use lowercase characters for the keyword.
(required)
Output arguments If your function returns one output, you can specify the
(optional) output name after the function keyword.
function myOutput = myFunction(x)
If your function returns more than one output, enclose the

output names in square brackets.
function [one,two,three] = myFunction(x)
If there is no output, you can omit it.

function myFunction(x)
Or you can use empty square brackets.

function [] = myFunction(x)
Function name (required) Valid function names follow the same rules as variable
names. They must start with a letter, and can contain letters,
digits, or underscores.
Note To avoid confusion, use the same name for both the
function file and the first function within the file. MATLAB
associates your program with the file name, not the function
name. Script files cannot have the same name as a function
in the file.
20-3
20 Function Basics
Input arguments If your function accepts any inputs, enclose their names in
(optional) parentheses after the function name. Separate inputs with
commas.
function y = myFunction(one,two,three)
If there are no inputs, you can omit the parentheses.
Tip When you define a function with multiple input or output arguments, list any
required arguments first. This ordering allows you to call your function without
specifying optional arguments.
Contents of Functions and Files

The body of a function can include valid MATLAB expressions, control flow statements,
comments, blank lines, and nested functions. Any variables that you create within a
function are stored within a workspace specific to that function, which is separate from
the base workspace.
Program files can contain multiple functions. If the file contains only function definitions,
the first function is the main function, and is the function that MATLAB associates with
the file name. Functions that follow the main function or script code are called local
functions. Local functions are only available within the file.
End Statements
Functions end with either an end statement, the end of the file, or the definition line for
a local function, whichever comes first. The end statement is required if:
• Any function in the file contains a nested function (a function completely contained
within its parent).
• The function is a local function within a function file, and any local function in the file
uses the end keyword.
• The function is a local function within a script file.
Although it is sometimes optional, use end for better code readability.
20-4
See Also
See Also
function
More About
• “Files and Folders that MATLAB Accesses”
20-5
20 Function Basics
Add Help for Your Program

This example shows how to provide help for the programs you write. Help text appears in
the Command Window when you use the help function.
Create help text by inserting comments at the beginning of your program. If your
program includes a function, position the help text immediately below the function
definition line (the line with the function keyword).
For example, create a function in a file named addme.m that includes help text:
function c = addme(a,b)
% ADDME Add two values together.
% C = ADDME(A) adds A to itself.
% C = ADDME(A,B) adds A and B together.
%
% See also SUM, PLUS.
switch nargin
case 2
c = a + b;
case 1
c = a + a;
otherwise
c = 0;
end
When you type help addme at the command line, the help text displays in the
Command Window:
addme Add two values together.

C = addme(A) adds A to itself.
C = addme(A,B) adds A and B together.
See also sum, plus.
The first help text line, often called the H1 line, typically includes the program name and
a brief description. The Current Folder browser and the help and lookfor functions use
the H1 line to display information about the program.
Create See also links by including function names at the end of your help text on a line
that begins with % See also. If the function exists on the search path or in the current
20-6
See Also
folder, the help command displays each of these function names as a hyperlink to its
help. Otherwise, help prints the function names as they appear in the help text.
You can include hyperlinks (in the form of URLs) to Web sites in your help text. Create
hyperlinks by including an HTML <a></a> anchor element. Within the anchor, use a
matlab: statement to execute a web command. For example:
% For more information, see <a href="matlab:

% web('http://www.mathworks.com')">the MathWorks Web site</a>.
End your help text with a blank line (without a %). The help system ignores any comment
lines that appear after the help text block.
Note When multiple programs have the same name, the help command determines
which help text to display by applying the rules described in “Function Precedence
Order” on page 20-43. However, if a program has the same name as a MathWorks
function, the Help on Selection option in context menus always displays documentation
for the MathWorks function.
See Also
help | lookfor
Related Examples
• “Add Comments to Programs” on page 18-4
• “Create Help Summary Files — Contents.m” on page 30-12
• “Check Which Programs Have Help” on page 30-9
• “Display Custom Documentation” on page 30-15
• “Use Help Files with MEX Files”
20-7
20 Function Basics
Run Functions in the Editor

This example shows how to run a function that requires some initial setup, such as input
argument values, while working in the Editor.
1 Create a function in a program file named myfunction.m.
function y = myfunction(x)
y = x.^2 + x;
This function requires input x.

2 View the commands available for running the function by clicking Run on the
Editor tab. The command at the top of the list is the command that the Editor uses
by default when you click the Run icon.
3 Replace the text type code to run with an expression that allows you to run the
function.
y = myfunction(1:10)
You can enter multiple commands on the same line, such as

x = 1:10; y = myfunction(x)
For more complicated, multiline commands, create a separate script file, and then
run the script.
Note Run commands use the base workspace. Any variables that you define in a run
command can overwrite variables in the base workspace that have the same name.
4 Run the function by clicking Run or a specific run command from the drop-down list.
For myfunction.m, and an input of 1:10, this result appears in the Command
Window:
20-8
Run Functions in the Editor
y =
2 6 12 20 30 42 56 72 90 110
When you select a run command from the list, it becomes the default for the Run
button.
To edit or delete an existing run command, select the command, right-click, and then
select Edit or Delete.
20-9
20 Function Basics
Base and Function Workspaces

This topic explains the differences between the base workspace and function workspaces,
including workspaces for local functions, nested functions, and scripts.
The base workspace stores variables that you create at the command line. This includes
any variables that scripts create, assuming that you run the script from the command
line or from the Editor. Variables in the base workspace exist until you clear them or end
your MATLAB session.
Functions do not use the base workspace. Every function has its own function workspace.
Each function workspace is separate from the base workspace and all other workspaces
to protect the integrity of the data. Even local functions in a common file have their own
workspaces. Variables specific to a function workspace are called local variables.
Typically, local variables do not remain in memory from one function call to the next.
When you call a script from a function, the script uses the function workspace.
Like local functions, nested functions have their own workspaces. However, these
workspaces are unique in two significant ways:
• Nested functions can access and modify variables in the workspaces of the functions
that contain them.
• All of the variables in nested functions or the functions that contain them must be
explicitly defined. That is, you cannot call a function or script that assigns values to
variables unless those variables already exist in the function workspace.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Share Data Between Workspaces” on page 20-11
More About
20-10
Share Data Between Workspaces

In this section...
“Best Practice: Passing Arguments” on page 20-11
“Nested Functions” on page 20-12
“Persistent Variables” on page 20-12
“Global Variables” on page 20-13
“Evaluating in Another Workspace” on page 20-14
Introduction
This topic shows how to share variables between workspaces or allow them to persist
between function executions.
In most cases, variables created within a function are local variables known only within
that function. Local variables are not available at the command line or to any other
function. However, there are several ways to share data between functions or
workspaces.
Best Practice: Passing Arguments

The most secure way to extend the scope of a function variable is to use function input
and output arguments, which allow you to pass values of variables.
For example, create two functions, update1 and update2, that share and modify an
input value. update2 can be a local function in the file update1.m, or can be a function
in its own file, update2.m.
function y1 = update1(x1)
y1 = 1 + update2(x1);
function y2 = update2(x2)
y2 = 2 * x2;
Call the update1 function from the command line and assign to variable Y in the base
workspace:
20-11
20 Function Basics
X = [1,2,3];
Y = update1(X)
Y =
3 5 7
Nested Functions
A nested function has access to the workspaces of all functions in which it is nested. So,
for example, a nested function can use a variable (in this case, x) that is defined in its
parent function:
function primaryFx
x = 1;
nestedFx
function nestedFx
x = x + 1;
end
end
When parent functions do not use a given variable, the variable remains local to the
nested function. For example, in this version of primaryFx, the two nested functions
have their own versions of x that cannot interact with each other.
function primaryFx
nestedFx1
nestedFx2
function nestedFx1
x = 1;
end
function nestedFx2
x = 2;
end
end
For more information, see “Nested Functions” on page 20-32.
Persistent Variables
When you declare a variable within a function as persistent, the variable retains its
value from one function call to the next. Other local variables retain their value only
20-12
during the current execution of a function. Persistent variables are equivalent to static
variables in other programming languages.
Declare variables using the persistent keyword before you use them. MATLAB
initializes persistent variables to an empty matrix, [].
For example, define a function in a file named findSum.m that initializes a sum to 0,
and then adds to the value on each iteration.
function findSum(inputvalue)
persistent SUM_X
if isempty(SUM_X)
SUM_X = 0;
end
SUM_X = SUM_X + inputvalue;
When you call the function, the value of SUM_X persists between subsequent executions.
These operations clear the persistent variables for a function:
• clear all
• clear functionname
• Editing the function file
To prevent clearing persistent variables, lock the function file using mlock.
Global Variables
Global variables are variables that you can access from functions or from the command
line. They have their own workspace, which is separate from the base and function
workspaces.
However, global variables carry notable risks. For example:
• Any function can access and update a global variable. Other functions that use the
variable might return unexpected results.
• If you unintentionally give a “new” global variable the same name as an existing
global variable, one function can overwrite the values expected by another. This error
is difficult to diagnose.
Use global variables sparingly, if at all.
20-13
20 Function Basics
If you use global variables, declare them using the global keyword before you access
them within any particular location (function or command line). For example, create a
function in a file called falling.m:
function h = falling(t)
global GRAVITY
h = 1/2*GRAVITY*t.^2;
Then, enter these commands at the prompt:

global GRAVITY
GRAVITY = 32;
y = falling((0:.1:5)');
The two global statements make the value assigned to GRAVITY at the command prompt
available inside the function. However, as a more robust alternative, redefine the
function to accept the value as an input:
function h = falling(t,gravity)
h = 1/2*gravity*t.^2;
Then, enter these commands at the prompt:

GRAVITY = 32;
y = falling((0:.1:5)',GRAVITY);
Evaluating in Another Workspace

The evalin and assignin functions allow you to evaluate commands or variable names
from character vectors and specify whether to use the current or base workspace.
Like global variables, these functions carry risks of overwriting existing data. Use them
sparingly.
evalin and assignin are sometimes useful for callback functions in graphical user
interfaces to evaluate against the base workspace. For example, create a list box of
variable names from the base workspace:
function listBox
figure
lb = uicontrol('Style','listbox','Position',[10 10 100 100],...
'Callback',@update_listBox);
update_listBox(lb)
20-14
See Also
function update_listBox(src,~)
vars = evalin('base','who');
src.String = vars;
For other programming applications, consider argument passing and the techniques
described in “Alternatives to the eval Function” on page 2-83.
See Also
More About
20-15
20 Function Basics
Check Variable Scope in Editor

In this section...
“Use Automatic Function and Variable Highlighting” on page 20-16
“Example of Using Automatic Function and Variable Highlighting” on page 20-17
Scoping issues can be the source of some coding problems. For instance, if you are
unaware that nested functions share a particular variable, the results of running your
code might not be as you expect. Similarly, mistakes in usage of local, global, and
persistent variables can cause unexpected results.
The Code Analyzer does not always indicate scoping issues because sharing a variable
across functions is not an error—it may be your intent. Use MATLAB function and
variable highlighting features to identify when and where your code uses functions and
variables. If you have an active Internet connection, you can watch the Variable and
Function Highlighting video for an overview of the major features.
For conceptual information on nested functions and the various types of MATLAB
variables, see “Sharing Variables Between Parent and Nested Functions” on page 20-33
and “Share Data Between Workspaces” on page 20-11.
Use Automatic Function and Variable Highlighting

By default, the Editor indicates functions, local variables, and variables with shared
scope in various shades of blue. Variables with shared scope include: global variables on
page 20-13, persistent variables on page 20-12, and variables within nested functions.
(For more information, see “Nested Functions” on page 20-12.)
To enable and disable highlighting or to change the colors, click Preferences and
select MATLAB > Colors > Programming tools.
By default, the Editor:
• Highlights all instances of a given function or local variable in sky blue when you
place the cursor within a function or variable name. For instance:
• Displays a variable with shared scope in teal blue, regardless of the cursor location.
For instance:
20-16
Example of Using Automatic Function and Variable Highlighting

Consider the code for a function rowsum:
function rowTotals = rowsum

% Add the values in each row and
% store them in a new array
x = ones(2,10);
[n, m] = size(x);
rowTotals = zeros(1,n);
for i = 1:n
rowTotals(i) = addToSum;
end
function colsum = addToSum

colsum = 0;
thisrow = x(i,:);
for i = 1:m
colsum = colsum + thisrow(i);
end
end
end
When you run this code, instead of returning the sum of the values in each row and
displaying:
ans =
10 10
MATLAB displays:
ans =
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10
Examine the code by following these steps:
20-17
20 Function Basics
1
On the Home tab in the Environment section, click Preferences and select
MATLAB > Colors > Programming tools. Ensure that Automatically highlight
and Variables with shared scope are selected.
2 Copy the rowsum code into the Editor.
Notice the variable appears in teal blue, which indicates i is not a local variable.
Both the rowTotals function and the addToSum functions set and use the variable
i.
The variable n, at line 6 appears in black, indicating that it does not span multiple
functions.
3 Hover the mouse pointer over an instance of variable i.
A tooltip appears: The scope of variable 'i' spans multiple functions.

4 Click the tooltip link for information about variables whose scope span multiple
functions.
5 Click an instance of i.
Every reference to i highlights in sky blue and markers appear in the indicator bar
on the right side of the Editor.
20-18
6 Hover over one of the indicator bar markers.
A tooltip appears and displays the name of the function or variable and the line of
code represented by the marker.
7 Click a marker to navigate to the line indicated in tooltip for that marker.
This is particularly useful when your file contains more code than you can view at
one time in the Editor.
Fix the code by changing the instance of i at line 15 to y.
You can see similar highlighting effects when you click on a function reference. For
instance, click on addToSum.
20-19
20 Function Basics
Types of Functions
In this section...
“Local and Nested Functions in a File” on page 20-20
“Private Functions in a Subfolder” on page 20-21
“Anonymous Functions Without a File” on page 20-21
Local and Nested Functions in a File

Program files can contain multiple functions. Local and nested functions are useful for
dividing programs into smaller tasks, making it easier to read and maintain your code.
Local functions are subroutines that are available within the same file. Local functions
are the most common way to break up programmatic tasks. In a function file, which
contains only function definitions, local functions can appear in the file in any order after
the main function in the file. In a script file, which contains commands and function
definitions, local function must be at the end of the file. (Functions in scripts are
supported in R2016b or later.)
For example, create a function file named myfunction.m that contains a main function,
myfunction, and two local functions, squareMe and doubleMe:
function b = myfunction(a)
b = squareMe(a)+doubleMe(a);
end
function y = squareMe(x)
y = x.^2;
end
function y = doubleMe(x)
y = x.*2;
end
You can call the main function from the command line or another program file, although
the local functions are only available to myfunction:
myfunction(pi)
ans =
16.1528
20-20
Types of Functions
Nested functions are completely contained within another function. The primary
difference between nested functions and local functions is that nested functions can use
variables defined in parent functions without explicitly passing those variables as
arguments.
Nested functions are useful when subroutines share data, such as applications that pass
data between components. For example, create a function that allows you to set a value
between 0 and 1 using either a slider or an editable text box. If you use nested functions
for the callbacks, the slider and text box can share the value and each other’s handles
without explicitly passing them:
function myslider
value = 0;
f = figure;
s = uicontrol(f,'Style','slider','Callback',@slider);
e = uicontrol(f,'Style','edit','Callback',@edittext,...
'Position',[100,20,100,20]);
function slider(obj,~)
value = obj.Value;
e.String = num2str(value);
end
function edittext(obj,~)
value = str2double(obj.String);
s.Value = value;
end
end
Private Functions in a Subfolder

Like local or nested functions, private functions are accessible only to functions in a
specific location. However, private functions are not in the same file as the functions that
can call them. Instead, they are in a subfolder named private. Private functions are
available only to functions in the folder immediately above the private folder. Use
private functions to separate code into different files, or to share code between multiple,
related functions.
Anonymous Functions Without a File

Anonymous functions allow you to define a function without creating a program file, as
long as the function consists of a single statement. A common application of anonymous
20-21
20 Function Basics
functions is to define a mathematical expression, and then evaluate that expression over
a range of values using a MATLAB® function function, i.e., a function that accepts a
function handle as an input.
For example, this statement creates a function handle named s for an anonymous
function:
s = @(x) sin(1./x);
This function has a single input, x . The @ operator creates the function handle.
You can use the function handle to evaluate the function for particular values, such as
y = s(pi)
y = 0.3130
Or, you can pass the function handle to a function that evaluates over a range of values,
such as fplot:
range = [0.01,0.1];
fplot(s,range)
20-22
See Also
See Also
More About
• “Private Functions” on page 20-41
20-23
20 Function Basics
Anonymous Functions
In this section...
“What Are Anonymous Functions?” on page 20-24
“Variables in the Expression” on page 20-25
“Multiple Anonymous Functions” on page 20-26
“Functions with No Inputs” on page 20-27
“Functions with Multiple Inputs or Outputs” on page 20-27
“Arrays of Anonymous Functions” on page 20-28
What Are Anonymous Functions?

An anonymous function is a function that is not stored in a program file, but is associated
with a variable whose data type is function_handle. Anonymous functions can accept
inputs and return outputs, just as standard functions do. However, they can contain only
a single executable statement.
For example, create a handle to an anonymous function that finds the square of a
number:
sqr = @(x) x.^2;
Variable sqr is a function handle. The @ operator creates the handle, and the
parentheses () immediately after the @ operator include the function input arguments.
This anonymous function accepts a single input x, and implicitly returns a single output,
an array the same size as x that contains the squared values.
Find the square of a particular value (5) by passing the value to the function handle, just
as you would pass an input argument to a standard function.
a = sqr(5)
a =
25
Many MATLAB functions accept function handles as inputs so that you can evaluate
functions over a range of values. You can create handles either for anonymous functions
or for functions in program files. The benefit of using anonymous functions is that you do
not have to edit and maintain a file for a function that requires only a brief definition.
20-24
Anonymous Functions
For example, find the integral of the sqr function from 0 to 1 by passing the function
handle to the integral function:
q = integral(sqr,0,1);
You do not need to create a variable in the workspace to store an anonymous function.
Instead, you can create a temporary function handle within an expression, such as this
call to the integral function:
q = integral(@(x) x.^2,0,1);
Variables in the Expression

Function handles can store not only an expression, but also variables that the expression
requires for evaluation.
For example, create a function handle to an anonymous function that requires

coefficients a, b, and c.
a = 1.3;
b = .2;
c = 30;
parabola = @(x) a*x.^2 + b*x + c;
Because a, b, and c are available at the time you create parabola, the function handle
includes those values. The values persist within the function handle even if you clear the
variables:
clear a b c
x = 1;
y = parabola(x)
y =
31.5000
To supply different values for the coefficients, you must create a new function handle:
a = -3.9;
b = 52;
c = 0;
parabola = @(x) a*x.^2 + b*x + c;
x = 1;
y = parabola(1)
20-25
20 Function Basics
y =
48.1000
You can save function handles and their associated values in a MAT-file and load them
in a subsequent MATLAB session using the save and load functions, such as
save myfile.mat parabola
Use only explicit variables when constructing anonymous functions. If an anonymous

function accesses any variable or nested function that is not explicitly referenced in the
argument list or body, MATLAB throws an error when you invoke the function. Implicit
variables and function calls are often encountered in the functions such
as eval, evalin, assignin, and load. Avoid using these functions in the body of
anonymous functions.
Multiple Anonymous Functions

The expression in an anonymous function can include another anonymous function. This
is useful for passing different parameters to a function that you are evaluating over a
range of values. For example, you can solve the equation
for varying values of c by combining two anonymous functions:

g = @(c) (integral(@(x) (x.^2 + c*x + 1),0,1));
Here is how to derive this statement:
1 Write the integrand as an anonymous function,

@(x) (x.^2 + c*x + 1)
2 Evaluate the function from zero to one by passing the function handle to integral,
integral(@(x) (x.^2 + c*x + 1),0,1)
3 Supply the value for c by constructing an anonymous function for the entire
equation,
g = @(c) (integral(@(x) (x.^2 + c*x + 1),0,1));
The final function allows you to solve the equation for any value of c. For example:
20-26
Anonymous Functions
g(2)
ans =
2.3333
Functions with No Inputs

If your function does not require any inputs, use empty parentheses when you define and
call the anonymous function. For example:
t = @() datestr(now);
d = t()
d =
26-Jan-2012 15:11:47
Omitting the parentheses in the assignment statement creates another function handle,
and does not execute the function:
d = t
d =
@() datestr(now)
Functions with Multiple Inputs or Outputs

Anonymous functions require that you explicitly specify the input arguments as you
would for a standard function, separating multiple inputs with commas. For example,
this function accepts two inputs, x and y:
myfunction = @(x,y) (x^2 + y^2 + x*y);
x = 1;
y = 10;
z = myfunction(x,y)
z = 111
However, you do not explicitly define output arguments when you create an anonymous
function. If the expression in the function returns multiple outputs, then you can request
them when you call the function. Enclose multiple output variables in square brackets.
For example, the ndgrid function can return as many outputs as the number of input
vectors. This anonymous function that calls ndgrid can also return multiple outputs:
20-27
20 Function Basics
c = 10;
mygrid = @(x,y) ndgrid((-x:x/c:x),(-y:y/c:y));
[x,y] = mygrid(pi,2*pi);
You can use the output from mygrid to create a mesh or surface plot:
z = sin(x) + cos(y);
mesh(x,y,z)
Arrays of Anonymous Functions

Although most MATLAB fundamental data types support multidimensional arrays,
function handles must be scalars (single elements). However, you can store multiple
20-28
See Also
function handles using a cell array or structure array. The most common approach is to
use a cell array, such as
f = {@(x)x.^2;
@(y)y+10;
@(x,y)x.^2+y+10};
When you create the cell array, keep in mind that MATLAB interprets spaces as column
separators. Either omit spaces from expressions, as shown in the previous code, or
enclose expressions in parentheses, such as
f = {@(x) (x.^2);
@(y) (y + 10);
@(x,y) (x.^2 + y + 10)};
Access the contents of a cell using curly braces. For example, f{1} returns the first
function handle. To execute the function, pass input values in parentheses after the curly
braces:
x = 1;
y = 10;
f{1}(x)
f{2}(y)
f{3}(x,y)
ans =
1
ans =
20
ans =
21
See Also
More About
20-29
20 Function Basics
Local Functions
This topic explains the term local function, and shows how to create and use local
functions.
MATLAB program files can contain code for more than one function. In a function file,
the first function in the file is called the main function. This function is visible to
functions in other files, or you can call it from the command line. Additional functions
within the file are called local functions, and they can occur in any order after the main
function. Local functions are only visible to other functions in the same file. They are
equivalent to subroutines in other programming languages, and are sometimes called
subfunctions.
As of R2016b, you can also create local functions in a script file, as long as they all
appear after the last line of script code. For more information, see “Add Functions to
Scripts” on page 18-18.
For example, create a function file named mystats.m that contains a main function,
mystats, and two local functions, mymean and mymedian.
function [avg, med] = mystats(x)

n = length(x);
avg = mymean(x,n);
med = mymedian(x,n);
end
function a = mymean(v,n)
% MYMEAN Example of a local function.
a = sum(v)/n;
end
function m = mymedian(v,n)
% MYMEDIAN Another example of a local function.
w = sort(v);
if rem(n,2) == 1
m = w((n + 1)/2);
else
m = (w(n/2) + w(n/2 + 1))/2;
end
end
20-30
See Also
The local functions mymean and mymedian calculate the average and median of the input
list. The main function mystats determines the length of the list n and passes it to the
local functions.
Although you cannot call a local function from the command line or from functions in
other files, you can access its help using the help function. Specify names of both the file
and the local function, separating them with a > character:
help mystats>mymean
mymean Example of a local function.
Local functions in the current file have precedence over functions in other files. That is,
when you call a function within a program file, MATLAB checks whether the function is
a local function before looking for other main functions. Therefore, you can create an
alternate version of a particular function while retaining the original in another file.
All functions, including local functions, have their own workspaces that are separate
from the base workspace. Local functions cannot access variables used by other functions
unless you pass them as arguments. In contrast, nested functions (functions completely
contained within another function) can access variables used by the functions that
contain them.
See Also
localfunctions
More About
20-31
20 Function Basics
Nested Functions
In this section...
“What Are Nested Functions?” on page 20-32
“Requirements for Nested Functions” on page 20-32
“Sharing Variables Between Parent and Nested Functions” on page 20-33
“Using Handles to Store Function Parameters” on page 20-34
“Visibility of Nested Functions” on page 20-37
What Are Nested Functions?

A nested function is a function that is completely contained within a parent function.
Any function in a program file can include a nested function.
For example, this function named parent contains a nested function named nestedfx:
function parent
disp('This is the parent function')
nestedfx
function nestedfx
disp('This is the nested function')
end
end
The primary difference between nested functions and other types of functions is that they
can access and modify variables that are defined in their parent functions. As a result:
• Nested functions can use variables that are not explicitly passed as input arguments.
• In a parent function, you can create a handle to a nested function that contains the
data necessary to run the nested function.
Requirements for Nested Functions

• Typically, functions do not require an end statement. However, to nest any function
in a program file, all functions in that file must use an end statement.
20-32
Nested Functions
• You cannot define a nested function inside any of the MATLAB program control
statements, such as if/elseif/else, switch/case, for, while, or try/catch.
• You must call a nested function either directly by name (without using feval), or
using a function handle that you created using the @ operator (and not str2func).
• All of the variables in nested functions or the functions that contain them must be
explicitly defined. That is, you cannot call a function or script that assigns values to
variables unless those variables already exist in the function workspace. (For more
information, see “Variables in Nested and Anonymous Functions” on page 20-39.)
Sharing Variables Between Parent and Nested Functions

In general, variables in one function workspace are not available to other functions.
However, nested functions can access and modify variables in the workspaces of the
functions that contain them.
This means that both a nested function and a function that contains it can modify the
same variable without passing that variable as an argument. For example, in each of
these functions, main1 and main2, both the main function and the nested function can
access variable x:
function main1 function main2
x = 5; nestfun2
nestfun1
function nestfun2
function nestfun1 x = 5;
x = x + 1; end
end
x = x + 1;
end end
When parent functions do not use a given variable, the variable remains local to the
nested function. For example, in this function named main, the two nested functions
have their own versions of x that cannot interact with each other:
function main
nestedfun1
nestedfun2
function nestedfun1
x = 1;
end
20-33
20 Function Basics
function nestedfun2
x = 2;
end
end
Functions that return output arguments have variables for the outputs in their
workspace. However, parent functions only have variables for the output of nested
functions if they explicitly request them. For example, this function parentfun does not
have variable y in its workspace:
function parentfun
x = 5;
nestfun;
function y = nestfun
y = x + 1;
end
end
If you modify the code as follows, variable z is in the workspace of parentfun:
function parentfun
x = 5;
z = nestfun;
function y = nestfun
y = x + 1;
end
end
Using Handles to Store Function Parameters

Nested functions can use variables from three sources:
• Input arguments
• Variables defined within the nested function
• Variables defined in a parent function, also called externally scoped variables
When you create a function handle for a nested function, that handle stores not only the
name of the function, but also the values of externally scoped variables.
20-34
Nested Functions
For example, create a function in a file named makeParabola.m. This function accepts
several polynomial coefficients, and returns a handle to a nested function that calculates
the value of that polynomial.
function p = makeParabola(a,b,c)
p = @parabola;
function y = parabola(x)
y = a*x.^2 + b*x + c;
end
end
The makeParabola function returns a handle to the parabola function that includes
values for coefficients a, b, and c.
At the command line, call the makeParabola function with coefficient values of 1.3, .2,
and 30. Use the returned function handle p to evaluate the polynomial at a particular
point:
p = makeParabola(1.3,.2,30);
X = 25;
Y = p(X)
Y =
847.5000
Many MATLAB functions accept function handle inputs to evaluate functions over a
range of values. For example, plot the parabolic equation from -25 to +25:
fplot(p,[-25,25])
20-35
20 Function Basics
You can create multiple handles to the parabola function that each use different
polynomial coefficients:
firstp = makeParabola(0.8,1.6,32);
secondp = makeParabola(3,4,50);
range = [-25,25];
figure
hold on
fplot(firstp,range)
fplot(secondp,range,'r:')
hold off
20-36
Nested Functions
Visibility of Nested Functions

Every function has a certain scope, that is, a set of other functions to which it is visible. A
nested function is available:
• From the level immediately above it. (In the following code, function A can call B or D,
but not C or E.)
• From a function nested at the same level within the same parent function. (Function
B can call D, and D can call B.)
• From a function at any lower level. (Function C can call B or D, but not E.)
function A(x, y) % Main function
B(x,y)
20-37
20 Function Basics
D(y)
function B(x,y) % Nested in A

C(x)
D(y)
function C(x) % Nested in B

D(x)
end
end
function D(x) % Nested in A

E(x)
function E(x) % Nested in D

disp(x)
end
end
end
The easiest way to extend the scope of a nested function is to create a function handle
and return it as an output argument, as shown in “Using Handles to Store Function
Parameters” on page 20-34. Only functions that can call a nested function can create a
handle to it.
See Also
More About
• “Variables in Nested and Anonymous Functions” on page 20-39
• “Argument Checking in Nested Functions” on page 21-11
20-38
Variables in Nested and Anonymous Functions
Variables in Nested and Anonymous Functions

The scoping rules for nested and anonymous functions require that all variables used
within the function be present in the text of the code.
If you attempt to dynamically add a variable to the workspace of an anonymous function,

a nested function, or a function that contains a nested function, then MATLAB issues an
error of the form
Attempt to add variable to a static workspace.
This table describes typical operations that attempt dynamic assignment, and the
recommended ways to avoid it.
Type of Operation Best Practice to Avoid Dynamic Assignment
load Specify the variable name as an input to the
load function. Or, assign the output from the
load function to a structure array.
eval, evalin, or assignin If possible, avoid using these functions
altogether. See “Alternatives to the eval
Function” on page 2-83.
Calling a MATLAB script that creates Convert the script to a function and pass the
a variable variable using arguments. This approach also
clarifies the code.
Assigning to a variable in the Assign the variable into the base workspace,
MATLAB debugger such as
K>> assignin('base','X',myvalue)
Another way to avoid dynamic assignment is to explicitly declare the variable within the
function. For example, suppose a script named makeX.m assigns a value to variable X. A
function that calls makeX and explicitly declares X avoids the dynamic assignment error
because X is in the function workspace. A common way to declare a variable is to
initialize its value to an empty array:
function noerror
X = [];
nestedfx
function nestedfx
makeX
20-39
20 Function Basics
end
end
See Also
More About
20-40
Private Functions
Private Functions
This topic explains the term private function, and shows how to create and use private
functions.
Private functions are useful when you want to limit the scope of a function. You
designate a function as private by storing it in a subfolder with the name private.
Then, the function is available only to functions in the folder immediately above the
private subfolder, or to scripts called by the functions that reside in the parent folder.
For example, within a folder that is on the MATLAB search path, create a subfolder
named private. Do not add private to the path. Within the private folder, create a
function in a file named findme.m:
function findme
% FINDME An example of a private function.
disp('You found the private function.')
Change to the folder that contains the private folder and create a file named
visible.m.
function visible
findme
Change your current folder to any location and call the visible function.
visible
You found the private function.
Although you cannot call the private function from the command line or from functions
outside the parent of the private folder, you can access its help:
help private/findme
findme An example of a private function.
Private functions have precedence over standard functions, so MATLAB finds a private
function named test.m before a nonprivate program file named test.m. This allows you
to create an alternate version of a particular function while retaining the original in
another folder.
20-41
20 Function Basics
See Also
More About
20-42
Function Precedence Order

This topic explains how MATLAB determines which function to call when multiple
functions in the current scope have the same name. The current scope includes the
current file, an optional private subfolder relative to the currently running function, the
current folder, and the MATLAB path.
MATLAB uses this precedence order:
1 Variables
Before assuming that a name matches a function, MATLAB checks for a variable
with that name in the current workspace.
Note If you create a variable with the same name as a function, MATLAB cannot
run that function until you clear the variable from memory.
2 Imported package functions
A package function is associated with a particular folder. When you import a

package function using the import function, it has precedence over all other
functions with the same name.
3 Nested functions within the current function
4 Local functions within the current file
5 Private functions
Private functions are functions in a subfolder named private that is immediately

below the folder of the currently running file.
6 Object functions
An object function accepts a particular class of object in its input argument list.
When there are multiple object functions with the same name, MATLAB checks the
classes of the input arguments to determine which function to use.
7 Class constructors in @ folders
MATLAB uses class constructors to create a variety of objects (such as timeseries

or audioplayer), and you can define your own classes using object-oriented
programming. For example, if you create a class folder @polynom and a constructor
20-43
20 Function Basics
function @polynom/polynom.m, the constructor takes precedence over other

functions named polynom.m anywhere on the path.
8 Loaded Simulink® models
9 Functions in the current folder
10 Functions elsewhere on the path, in order of appearance
When determining the precedence of functions within the same folder, MATLAB
considers the file type, in this order:
1 Built-in function
2 MEX-function
3 Simulink model files that are not loaded, with file types in this order:
a SLX file
b MDL file
4 App file (.mlapp) created using MATLAB App Designer
5 Program file with a .mlx extension
6 P-file (that is, an encoded program file with a .p extension)
7 Program file with a .m extension
For example, if MATLAB finds a .m file and a P-file with the same name in the same
folder, it uses the P-file. Because P-files are not automatically regenerated, make sure
that you regenerate the P-file whenever you edit the program file.
To determine the function MATLAB calls for a particular input, include the function
name and the input in a call to the which function. For example, determine the location
of the max function that MATLAB calls for double and int8 values:
testval = 10;
which max(testval)
% double method
built-in (matlabroot\toolbox\matlab\datafun\@double\max)
testval = int8(10);
which max(testval)
% int8 method
built-in (matlabroot\toolbox\matlab\datafun\@int8\max)
20-44
• “What Is the MATLAB Search Path?”

• Variables on page 1-5
• “Class Precedence and MATLAB Path”
20-45
21
Function Arguments
• “Find Number of Function Arguments” on page 21-2

• “Support Variable Number of Inputs” on page 21-4
• “Support Variable Number of Outputs” on page 21-6
• “Validate Number of Function Arguments” on page 21-8
• “Ignore Function Inputs” on page 21-13
• “Check Function Inputs with validateattributes” on page 21-14
• “Parse Function Inputs” on page 21-17
• “Input Parser Validation Functions” on page 21-21
21 Function Arguments
Find Number of Function Arguments

This example shows how to determine how many input or output arguments your
function receives using nargin and nargout.
Input Arguments
Create a function in a file named addme.m that accepts up to two inputs. Identify the
number of inputs with nargin.
function c = addme(a,b)
switch nargin
case 2
c = a + b;
case 1
c = a + a;
otherwise
c = 0;
end
Call addme with one, two, or zero input arguments.

addme(42)
ans =
84
addme(2,4000)
ans =
4002
addme
ans =
0
Output Arguments
Create a new function in a file named addme2.m that can return one or two outputs (a
result and its absolute value). Identify the number of requested outputs with nargout.
function [result,absResult] = addme2(a,b)
21-2
See Also
switch nargin
case 2
result = a + b;
case 1
result = a + a;
otherwise
result = 0;
end
if nargout > 1
absResult = abs(result);
end
Call addme2 with one or two output arguments.
value = addme2(11,-22)
value =
-11
[value,absValue] = addme2(11,-22)
value =
-11
absValue =
11
Functions return outputs in the order they are declared in the function definition.
See Also
nargin | narginchk | nargout | nargoutchk
21-3
Support Variable Number of Inputs

This example shows how to define a function that accepts a variable number of input
arguments using varargin. The varargin argument is a cell array that contains the
function inputs, where each input is in its own cell.
Create a function in a file named plotWithTitle.m that accepts a variable number of

paired (x,y) inputs for the plot function and an optional title. If the function receives an
odd number of inputs, it assumes that the last input is a title.
function plotWithTitle(varargin)
if rem(nargin,2) ~= 0
myTitle = varargin{nargin};
numPlotInputs = nargin - 1;
else
myTitle = 'Default Title';
numPlotInputs = nargin;
end
plot(varargin{1:numPlotInputs})
title(myTitle)
Because varargin is a cell array, you access the contents of each cell using curly braces,
{}. The syntax varargin{1:numPlotInputs} creates a comma-separated list of inputs
to the plot function.
Call plotWithTitle with two sets of (x,y) inputs and a title.
x = [1:.1:10];
y1 = sin(x);
y2 = cos(x);
plotWithTitle(x,y1,x,y2,'Sine and Cosine')
You can use varargin alone in an input argument list, or at the end of the list of inputs,
such as
function myfunction(a,b,varargin)
21-4
See Also
In this case, varargin{1} corresponds to the third input passed to the function, and
nargin returns length(varargin) + 2.
See Also
nargin | varargin
Related Examples
More About
21-5
Support Variable Number of Outputs

This example shows how to define a function that returns a variable number of output
arguments using varargout. Output varargout is a cell array that contains the
function outputs, where each output is in its own cell.
Create a function in a file named magicfill.m that assigns a magic square to each
requested output.
function varargout = magicfill

nOutputs = nargout;
varargout = cell(1,nOutputs);
for k = 1:nOutputs
varargout{k} = magic(k);
end
Indexing with curly braces {} updates the contents of a cell.
Call magicfill and request three outputs.
[first,second,third] = magicfill
first =
1
second =
1 3
4 2
third =
8 1 6
3 5 7
4 9 2
MATLAB assigns values to the outputs according to their order in the varargout array.
For example, first == varargout{1}.
You can use varargout alone in an output argument list, or at the end of the list of
outputs, such as
function [x,y,varargout] = myfunction(a,b)
21-6
See Also
In this case, varargout{1} corresponds to the third output that the function returns,
and nargout returns length(varargout) + 2.
See Also
nargout | varargout
Related Examples
More About
21-7
Validate Number of Function Arguments

This example shows how to check whether your custom function receives a valid number
of input or output arguments. MATLAB performs some argument checks automatically.
For other cases, you can use narginchk or nargoutchk.
Automatic Argument Checks
MATLAB checks whether your function receives more arguments than expected when it
can determine the number from the function definition. For example, this function
accepts up to two outputs and three inputs:
function [x,y] = myFunction(a,b,c)
If you pass too many inputs to myFunction, MATLAB issues an error. You do not need
to call narginchk to check for this case.
[X,Y] = myFunction(1,2,3,4)
Error using myFunction

Too many input arguments.
Use the narginchk and nargoutchk functions to verify that your function receives:
• A minimum number of required arguments.

• No more than a maximum number of arguments, when your function uses varargin
or varargout.
Input Checks with narginchk
Define a function in a file named testValues.m that requires at least two inputs. The
first input is a threshold value to compare against the other inputs.
function testValues(threshold,varargin)
minInputs = 2;
maxInputs = Inf;
narginchk(minInputs,maxInputs)
for k = 1:(nargin-1)
if (varargin{k} > threshold)
fprintf('Test value %d exceeds %d\n',k,threshold);
end
end
21-8
Validate Number of Function Arguments
Call testValues with too few inputs.
testValues(10)
Error using testValues (line 4)

Call testValues with enough inputs.
testValues(10,1,11,111)
Test value 2 exceeds 10

Test value 3 exceeds 10
Output Checks with nargoutchk
Define a function in a file named mysize.m that returns the dimensions of the input
array in a vector (from the size function), and optionally returns scalar values
corresponding to the sizes of each dimension. Use nargoutchk to verify that the number
of requested individual sizes does not exceed the number of available dimensions.
function [sizeVector,varargout] = mysize(x)
minOutputs = 0;
maxOutputs = ndims(x) + 1;
nargoutchk(minOutputs,maxOutputs)
sizeVector = size(x);
varargout = cell(1,nargout-1);
for k = 1:length(varargout)
varargout{k} = sizeVector(k);
end
Call mysize with a valid number of outputs.
A = rand(3,4,2);
[fullsize,nrows,ncols,npages] = mysize(A)
fullsize =
3 4 2
nrows =
3
ncols =
21-9
npages =
2
Call mysize with too many outputs.
A = 1;
[fullsize,nrows,ncols,npages] = mysize(A)
Error using mysize (line 4)

Too many output arguments.
See Also
narginchk | nargoutchk
Related Examples
• “Support Variable Number of Inputs” on page 21-4
• “Support Variable Number of Outputs” on page 21-6
21-10
Argument Checking in Nested Functions
Argument Checking in Nested Functions

This topic explains special considerations for using varargin, varargout, nargin, and
nargout with nested functions.
varargin and varargout allow you to create functions that accept variable numbers of
input or output arguments. Although varargin and varargout look like function
names, they refer to variables, not functions. This is significant because nested functions
share the workspaces of the functions that contain them.
If you do not use varargin or varargout in the declaration of a nested function, then
varargin or varargout within the nested function refers to the arguments of an outer
function.
For example, create a function in a file named showArgs.m that uses varargin and has
two nested functions, one that uses varargin and one that does not.
function showArgs(varargin)
nested1(3,4)
nested2(5,6,7)
function nested1(a,b)
disp('nested1: Contents of varargin{1}')
disp(varargin{1})
end
function nested2(varargin)
disp('nested2: Contents of varargin{1}')
disp(varargin{1})
end
end
Call the function and compare the contents of varargin{1} in the two nested functions.
showArgs(0,1,2)
nested1: Contents of varargin{1}

0
nested2: Contents of varargin{1}

5
21-11
On the other hand, nargin and nargout are functions. Within any function, including
nested functions, calls to nargin or nargout return the number of arguments for that
function. If a nested function requires the value of nargin or nargout from an outer
function, pass the value to the nested function.
For example, create a function in a file named showNumArgs.m that passes the number
of input arguments from the primary (parent) function to a nested function.
function showNumArgs(varargin)
disp(['Number of inputs to showNumArgs: ',int2str(nargin)]);

nestedFx(nargin,2,3,4)
function nestedFx(n,varargin)
disp(['Number of inputs to nestedFx: ',int2str(nargin)]);
disp(['Number of inputs to its parent: ',int2str(n)]);
end
end
Call showNumArgs and compare the output of nargin in the parent and nested
functions.
showNumArgs(0,1)
Number of inputs to showNumArgs: 2

Number of inputs to nestedFx: 4
Number of inputs to its parent: 2
See Also
nargin | nargout | varargin | varargout
21-12
Ignore Function Inputs
Ignore Function Inputs

This example shows how to ignore inputs in your function definition using the tilde (~)
operator.
Use this operator when your function must accept a predefined set of inputs, but your
function does not use all of the inputs. Common applications include defining callback
functions, as shown here, or deriving a class from a superclass.
Define a callback for a push button in a file named colorButton.m that does not use the
eventdata input. Ignore the input with a tilde.
function colorButton
figure;
uicontrol('Style','pushbutton','String','Click me','Callback',@btnCallback)
function btnCallback(h,~)
set(h,'BackgroundColor',rand(3,1))
The function declaration for btnCallback is essentially the same as
function btnCallback(h,eventdata)
However, using the tilde prevents the addition of eventdata to the function workspace
and makes it clearer that the function does not use eventdata.
You can ignore any number of function inputs, in any position in the argument list.
Separate consecutive tildes with a comma, such as
myfunction(myinput,~,~)
21-13
Check Function Inputs with validateattributes

Verify that the inputs to your function conform to a set of requirements using the
validateattributes function.
validateattributes requires that you pass the variable to check and the supported
data types for that variable. Optionally, pass a set of attributes that describe the valid
dimensions or values.
Check Data Type and Other Attributes
Define a function in a file named checkme.m that accepts up to three inputs: a, b, and c.
Check whether:
• a is a two-dimensional array of positive double-precision values.

• b contains 100 numeric values in an array with 10 columns.
• c is a nonempty character vector or cell array.
function checkme(a,b,c)
validateattributes(a,{'double'},{'positive','2d'})
validateattributes(b,{'numeric'},{'numel',100,'ncols',10})
validateattributes(c,{'char','cell'},{'nonempty'})
disp('All inputs are ok.')
The curly braces {} indicate that the set of data types and the set of additional attributes
are in cell arrays. Cell arrays allow you to store combinations of text and numeric data,
or character vectors of different lengths, in a single variable.
Call checkme with valid inputs.
checkme(pi,rand(5,10,2),'text')
All inputs are ok.
The scalar value pi is two-dimensional because size(pi) = [1,1].
Call checkme with invalid inputs. The validateattributes function issues an error
for the first input that fails validation, and checkme stops processing.
checkme(-4)
21-14
Check Function Inputs with validateattributes
Error using checkme (line 3)

Expected input to be positive.
checkme(pi,rand(3,4,2))

Expected input to be an array with number of elements equal to 100.
checkme(pi,rand(5,10,2),struct)

Expected input to be one of these types:
char, cell
Instead its type was struct.
The default error messages use the generic term input to refer to the argument that
failed validation. When you use the default error message, the only way to determine
which input failed is to view the specified line of code in checkme.
Add Input Name and Position to Errors
Define a function in a file named checkdetails.m that performs the same validation as
checkme, but adds details about the input name and position to the error messages.
function checkdetails(a,b,c)
validateattributes(a,{'double'},{'positive','2d'},'','First',1)
validateattributes(b,{'numeric'},{'numel',100,'ncols',10},'','Second',2)
validateattributes(c,{'char'},{'nonempty'},'','Third',3)
disp('All inputs are ok.')
The empty character vector '' for the fourth input to validateattributes is a
placeholder for an optional function name. You do not need to specify a function name
because it already appears in the error message. Specify the function name when you
want to include it in the error identifier for additional error handling.
Call checkdetails with invalid inputs.

checkdetails(-4)
Error using checkdetails (line 3)

Expected input number 1, First, to be positive.
21-15
checkdetails(pi,rand(3,4,2))
Error using checkdetails (line 4)

Expected input number 2, Second, to be an array with
number of elements equal to 100.
See Also
validateattributes | validatestring
21-16
Parse Function Inputs

This example shows how to define required and optional inputs, assign defaults to
optional inputs, and validate all inputs to a custom function using the Input Parser.
The Input Parser provides a consistent way to validate and assign defaults to inputs,
improving the robustness and maintainability of your code. To validate the inputs, you
can take advantage of existing MATLAB functions or write your own validation routines.
Step 1. Define your function.
Create a function in a file named printPhoto.m. The printPhoto function has one
required input for the file name, and optional inputs for the finish (glossy or matte), color
space (RGB or CMYK), width, and height.
function printPhoto(filename,varargin)
In your function declaration statement, specify required inputs first. Use varargin to
support optional inputs.
Step 2. Create an InputParser object.
Within your function, call inputParser to create a parser object.
p = inputParser;
Step 3. Add inputs to the scheme.
Add inputs to the parsing scheme in your function using addRequired, addOptional,
or addParameter. For optional inputs, specify default values.
For each input, you can specify a handle to a validation function that checks the input
and returns a scalar logical (true or false) or errors. The validation function can be an
existing MATLAB function (such as ischar or isnumeric) or a function that you create
(such as an anonymous function or a local function).
In the printPhoto function, filename is a required input. Define finish and color
as optional inputs, and width and height as optional parameter value pairs.
defaultFinish = 'glossy';
validFinishes = {'glossy','matte'};
checkFinish = @(x) any(validatestring(x,validFinishes));
21-17
defaultColor = 'RGB';
validColors = {'RGB','CMYK'};
checkColor = @(x) any(validatestring(x,validColors));
defaultWidth = 6;
defaultHeight = 4;
addRequired(p,'filename',@ischar);
addOptional(p,'finish',defaultFinish,checkFinish)
addOptional(p,'color',defaultColor,checkColor)
addParameter(p,'width',defaultWidth,@isnumeric)
addParameter(p,'height',defaultHeight,@isnumeric)
Inputs that you add with addRequired or addOptional are positional arguments.
When you call a function with positional inputs, specify those values in the order they
are added to the parsing scheme.
Inputs added with addParameter are not positional, so you can pass values for height
before or after values for width. However, parameter value inputs require that you pass
the input name ('height' or 'width') along with the value of the input.
If your function accepts optional input strings or character vectors and parameter name
and value pairs, specify validation functions for the optional inputs. Otherwise, the Input
Parser interprets the optional strings or character vectors as parameter names. For
example, the checkFinish validation function ensures that printPhoto interprets
'glossy' as a value for finish and not as an invalid parameter name.
Step 4. Set properties to adjust parsing (optional).
By default, the Input Parser makes assumptions about case sensitivity, function names,
structure array inputs, and whether to allow additional parameter names and values
that are not in the scheme. Properties allow you to explicitly define the behavior. Set
properties using dot notation, similar to assigning values to a structure array.
Allow printPhoto to accept additional parameter value inputs that do not match the
input scheme by setting the KeepUnmatched property of the Input Parser.
p.KeepUnmatched = true;
If KeepUnmatched is false (default), the Input Parser issues an error when inputs do
not match the scheme.
21-18
Step 5. Parse the inputs.
Within your function, call the parse method. Pass the values of all of the function
inputs.
parse(p,filename,varargin{:})
Step 6. Use the inputs in your function.
Access parsed inputs using these properties of the inputParser object:
• Results — Structure array with names and values of all inputs in the scheme.
• Unmatched — Structure array with parameter names and values that are passed to
the function, but are not in the scheme (when KeepUnmatched is true).
• UsingDefaults — Cell array with names of optional inputs that are assigned their
default values because they are not passed to the function.
Within the printPhoto function, display the values for some of the inputs:
disp(['File name: ',p.Results.filename])

disp(['Finish: ', p.Results.finish])
if ~isempty(fieldnames(p.Unmatched))
disp('Extra inputs:')
disp(p.Unmatched)
end
if ~isempty(p.UsingDefaults)
disp('Using defaults: ')
disp(p.UsingDefaults)
end
Step 7. Call your function.
The Input Parser expects to receive inputs as follows:
• Required inputs first, in the order they are added to the parsing scheme with
addRequired.
• Optional positional inputs in the order they are added to the scheme with
addOptional.
• Positional inputs before parameter name and value pair inputs.
• Parameter names and values in the form Name1,Value1,...,NameN,ValueN.
21-19
Pass several combinations of inputs to printPhoto, some valid and some invalid:
printPhoto('myfile.jpg')
File name: myfile.jpg

Finish: glossy
Using defaults:
'finish' 'color' 'width' 'height'
printPhoto(100)
Error using printPhoto (line 23)

The value of 'filename' is invalid. It must satisfy the function: ischar.
printPhoto('myfile.jpg','satin')
Error using printPhoto (line 23)

The value of 'finish' is invalid. Expected input to match one of these strings:
'glossy', 'matte'
The input, 'satin', did not match any of the valid strings.
printPhoto('myfile.jpg','height',10,'width',8)
File name: myfile.jpg

Finish: glossy
Using defaults:
'finish' 'color'
To pass a value for the nth positional input, either specify values for the previous (n – 1)
inputs or pass the input as a parameter name and value pair. For example, these
function calls assign the same values to finish (default 'glossy') and color:
printPhoto('myfile.gif','glossy','CMYK') % positional
printPhoto('myfile.gif','color','CMYK') % name and value
See Also
inputParser | varargin
More About
• “Input Parser Validation Functions” on page 21-21
21-20
Input Parser Validation Functions
Input Parser Validation Functions

This topic shows ways to define validation functions that you pass to the Input Parser to
check custom function inputs.
The Input Parser methods addRequired, addOptional, and addParameter each

accept an optional handle to a validation function. Designate function handles with an at
(@) symbol.
Validation functions must accept a single input argument, and they must either return a
scalar logical value (true or false) or error. If the validation function returns false,
the Input Parser issues an error and your function stops processing.
There are several ways to define validation functions:
• Use an existing MATLAB function such as ischar or isnumeric. For example,

check that a required input named num is numeric:
p = inputParser;
checknum = @isnumeric;
addRequired(p,'num',checknum)
parse(p,'text')
The value of 'num' is invalid. It must satisfy the function: isnumeric.
• Create an anonymous function. For example, check that input num is a numeric scalar
greater than zero:
p = inputParser;
checknum = @(x) isnumeric(x) && isscalar(x) && (x > 0);
addRequired(p,'num',checknum)
parse(p,rand(3))
The value of 'num' is invalid. It must satisfy the function: @(x) isnumeric(x) && isscalar(x) && (x>0).
• Define your own function, typically a local function in the same file as your primary
function. For example, in a file named usenum.m, define a local function named
checknum that issues custom error messages when the input num to usenum is not a
numeric scalar greater than zero:
function usenum(num)
p = inputParser;
21-21
addRequired(p,'num',@checknum);
parse(p,num);
function TF = checknum(x)
TF = false;
if ~isscalar(x)
error('Input is not scalar');
elseif ~isnumeric(x)
error('Input is not numeric');
elseif (x <= 0)
error('Input must be > 0');
else
TF = true;
end
Call the function with an invalid input:

usenum(-1)
Error using usenum (line 4)

The value of 'num' is invalid. Input must be > 0
See Also
inputParser | is* | validateattributes
Related Examples
• “Parse Function Inputs” on page 21-17
More About
21-22
22
Debugging MATLAB Code
• “Debug a MATLAB Program” on page 22-2

• “Set Breakpoints” on page 22-9
• “Examine Values While Debugging” on page 22-16
22 Debugging MATLAB Code
Debug a MATLAB Program

To debug your MATLAB program graphically, use the Editor/Debugger. Alternatively,
you can use debugging functions in the Command Window. Both methods are
interchangeable.
Before you begin debugging, make sure that your program is saved and that the program
and any files it calls exist on your search path or in the current folder.
• If you run a file with unsaved changes from within the Editor, then the file is
automatically saved before it runs.
• If you run a file with unsaved changes from the Command Window, then MATLAB
software runs the saved version of the file. Therefore, you do not see the results of
your changes.
Set Breakpoint
Set breakpoints to pause the execution of a MATLAB file so you can examine the value or
variables where you think a problem could be. You can set breakpoints using the Editor,
using functions in the Command Window, or both.
There are three different types of breakpoints: standard, conditional, and error. To add a
standard breakpoint in the Editor, click the breakpoint alley at an executable line where
you want to set the breakpoint. The breakpoint alley is the narrow column on the left
side of the Editor, to the right of the line number. Executable lines are indicated by a
dash ( — ) in the breakpoint alley. For example, click the breakpoint alley next to line 2
in the code below to add a breakpoint at that line.
22-2
If an executable statement spans multiple lines, you can set a breakpoint at each line in
that statement, even though the additional lines do not have a — (dash) in the
breakpoint alley. For example, in this code. you can set a breakpoint at all four lines:
For more information on the different types of breakpoints, see “Set Breakpoints” on
page 22-9.
Run File
After setting breakpoints, run the file from the Command Window or the Editor.
Running the file produces these results:
• The Run button changes to a Pause button.

• The prompt in the Command Window changes to K>> indicating that MATLAB is in
debug mode and that the keyboard is in control.
• MATLAB pauses at the first breakpoint in the program. In the Editor, a green arrow
just to the right of the breakpoint indicates the pause. The program does not execute
the line where the pause occurs until it resumes running. For example, here the
debugger pauses before the program executes x = ones(1,10);.
• MATLAB displays the current workspace in the Function Call Stack, on the Editor
tab in the Debug section.
22-3
If you use debugging functions from the Command Window, use dbstack to view the
Function Call Stack.
Tip To debug a program, run the entire file. MATLAB does not pause at breakpoints
when you run an individual section.
For more information on using the Function Call Stack, see “Select Workspace” on page
22-16
Pause a Running File

To pause the execution of a program while it is running, go to the Editor tab and click
the Pause button. MATLAB pauses execution at the next executable line, and the
Pause button changes to a Continue button. To continue execution, press the
Continue button.
Pausing is useful if you want to check on the progress of a long running program to
ensure that it is running as expected.
Note Clicking the pause button can cause MATLAB to pause in a file outside your own
program file. Pressing the Continue button resumes normal execution without
changing the results of the file.
Find and Fix a Problem

While your code is paused, you can view or change the values of variables, or you can
modify the code.
22-4
View or Change Variable While Debugging
View the value of a variable while debugging to see whether a line of code has produced
the expected result or not. To do this, position your mouse pointer to the left of the
variable. The current value of the variable appears in a data tip.
The data tip stays in view until you move the pointer. If you have trouble getting the
data tip to appear, click the line containing the variable, and then move the pointer next
to the variable. For more information, see “Examine Values While Debugging” on page
22-16.
You can change the value of a variable while debugging to see if the new value produces
expected results. With the program paused, assign a new value to the variable in the
Command Window, Workspace browser, or Variables Editor. Then, continue running or
stepping through the program.
For example, here MATLAB is paused inside a for loop where n = 2:
• Type n = 7; in the command line to change the current value of n from 2 to 7.

•
Press Continue to run the next line of code.
22-5
MATLAB runs the code line x(n) = 2 * x(n-1); with n = 7.
Modify Section of Code While Debugging
You can modify a section of code while debugging to test possible fixes without having to
save your changes. Usually, it is a good practice to modify a MATLAB file after you quit
debugging, and then save the modification and run the file. Otherwise, you might get
unexpected results. However, there are situations where you want to experiment during
debugging.
To modify a program while debugging:
1 While your code is paused, modify a part of the file that has not yet run.
Breakpoints turn gray, indicating they are invalid.

2 Select all the code after the line at which MATLAB is paused, right-click, and then
select Evaluate Selection from the context menu.
After the code evaluation is complete, stop debugging and save or undo any changes
made before continuing the debugging process.
22-6
Step Through File

While debugging, you can step through a MATLAB file, pausing at points where you
want to examine values.
This table describes available debugging actions and the different methods you can use to
execute them.
Description Toolbar Button Function Alternative
Continue execution of file until the line None
where the cursor is positioned. Also Run to Cursor
available on the context menu.
Execute the current line of the file. Step
dbstep
Execute the current line of the file and, if Step In dbstep in

the line is a call to another function, step
into that function.
Resume execution of file until completion or Continue
dbcont
until another breakpoint is encountered.
After stepping in, run the rest of the called Step Out dbstep out
function or local function, leave the called
function, and pause.
Pause debug mode. Pause None
Exit debug mode. Quit Debugging

dbquit
End Debugging Session

After you identify a problem, end the debugging session by going to the Editor tab and
clicking Quit Debugging . You must end a debugging session if you want to change
and save a file, or if you want to run other programs in MATLAB.
After you quit debugging, pause indicators in the Editor display no longer appear, and
the normal >> prompt reappears in the Command Window in place of the K>>. You no
longer can access the call stack.
If MATLAB software becomes nonresponsive when it pauses at a breakpoint, press Ctrl

+c to return to the MATLAB prompt.
22-7
See Also
Related Examples
22-8
Set Breakpoints
Set Breakpoints
In this section...
“Standard Breakpoints” on page 22-10
“Conditional Breakpoints” on page 22-11
“Error Breakpoints” on page 22-12
“Breakpoints in Anonymous Functions” on page 22-12
“Invalid Breakpoints” on page 22-13
“Disable Breakpoints” on page 22-14
“Clear Breakpoints” on page 22-14
Setting breakpoints pauses the execution of your MATLAB program so that you can
examine values where you think a problem might be. You can set breakpoints using the
Editor or by using functions in the Command Window.
There are three types of breakpoints:
• Standard breakpoints
• Conditional breakpoints
• Error breakpoints
You can set breakpoints only at executable lines in saved files that are in the current
folder or in folders on the search path. You can set breakpoints at any time, whether
MATLAB is idle or busy running a file.
By default, MATLAB automatically opens files when it reaches a breakpoint. To disable

this option:
1
From the Home tab, in the Environment section, click Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box opens.

2 Select MATLAB > Editor/Debugger.
3 Clear the Automatically open file when MATLAB reaches a breakpoint option
and click OK.
22-9
Standard Breakpoints
A standard breakpoint pauses at a specified line in a file.
To set a standard breakpoint click the breakpoint alley at an executable line where you
want to set the breakpoint. The breakpoint alley is the narrow column on the left side of
the Editor, to the right of the line number. Executable lines are indicated by a — (dash)
in the breakpoint alley. If an executable statement spans multiple lines, you can set a
breakpoint at each line in that statement, even though the additional lines do not have a
— (dash) in the breakpoint alley. For example, in this code, you can set a breakpoint at
all four lines:
If you attempt to set a breakpoint at a line that is not executable, such as a comment or a
blank line, MATLAB sets it at the next executable line.
You also can set a standard breakpoint programmatically using the dbstop function. For
example, to add a breakpoint at line 2 in a file named myprogram.m, type:
dbstop in myprogram at 2
MATLAB adds a breakpoint at line 2 in the function myprogram.
22-10
Set Breakpoints
To examine values at increments in a for loop, set the breakpoint within the loop, rather
than at the start of the loop. If you set the breakpoint at the start of the for loop, and
then step through the file, MATLAB pauses at the for statement only once. However, if
you place the breakpoint within the loop, MATLAB pauses at each pass through the loop.
Conditional Breakpoints
A conditional breakpoint causes MATLAB to pause at a specified line in a file only when
the specified condition is met. Use conditional breakpoints when you want to examine
results after some iterations in a loop.
To set a conditional breakpoint, right-click the breakpoint alley at an executable line

where you want to set the breakpoint and select Set/Modify Condition.
When the Editor dialog box opens, enter a condition and click OK. A condition is any
valid MATLAB expression that returns a logical scalar value.
As noted in the dialog box, MATLAB evaluates the condition before running the line. For
example, suppose that you have a file called myprogram.m.
Add a breakpoint with the following condition at line 6:
n >= 4
A yellow, conditional breakpoint icon appears in the breakpoint alley at that line.
22-11
You also can set a standard breakpoint programmatically using the dbstop function. For
example, to add a conditional breakpoint in myprogram.m at line 6 type:
dbstop in myprogram at 6 if n>=4
When you run the file, MATLAB enters debug mode and pauses at the line when the
condition is met. In the myprogram example, MATLAB runs through the for loop twice
and pauses on the third iteration at line 6 when n is 4. If you continue executing,
MATLAB pauses again at line 6 on the fourth iteration when n is 5.
Error Breakpoints
An error breakpoint causes MATLAB to pause program execution and enter debug mode
if MATLAB encounters a problem. Unlike standard and conditional breakpoints, you do
not set these breakpoints at a specific line in a specific file. When you set an error
breakpoint, MATLAB pauses at any line in any file if the error condition specified occurs.
MATLAB then enters debug mode and opens the file containing the error, with the
execution arrow at the line containing the error.
To set an error breakpoint, on the Editor tab, click Run and select from these
options:
• Pause on Errors to pause on all errors.

• Pause on Warnings to pause on all warnings.
• Pause on NaN or Inf to pause on NaN (not-a-number) or Inf (infinite) values.
You also can set a breakpoint programmatically by using the dbstop function with a
specified condition. For example, to pause execution on all errors, type
dbstop if error
To pause execution at the first run-time error within the try portion of a try/catch
block that has a message ID of MATLAB:ls:InputsMustBeStrings, type
dbstop if caught error MATLAB:ls:InputsMustBeStrings
Breakpoints in Anonymous Functions

You can set multiple breakpoints in a line of MATLAB code that contains anonymous
functions. For example, you can set a breakpoint for the line itself, where MATLAB
22-12
Set Breakpoints
software pauses at the start of the line. Or, alternatively, you can set a breakpoint for
each anonymous function in the line.
When you add a breakpoint to a line containing an anonymous function, the Editor asks
where in the line you want to add the breakpoint. If there is more than one breakpoint in
a line, the breakpoint icon is blue, regardless of the status of any of the breakpoints on
that line.
To view information about all the breakpoints on a line, hover your pointer on the
breakpoint icon. A tooltip appears with available information. For example, in this code,
line 5 contains two anonymous functions, with a breakpoint at each one. The tooltip tells
us that both breakpoints are enabled.
When you set a breakpoint in an anonymous function, MATLAB pauses when the
anonymous function is called. A green arrow shows where the code defines the
anonymous function. A white arrow shows where the code calls the anonymous functions.
For example, in this code, MATLAB pauses the program at a breakpoint set for the
anonymous function sqr, at line 2 in a file called myanonymous.m. The white arrow
indicates that the sqr function is called from line 3.
Invalid Breakpoints
A gray breakpoint indicates an invalid breakpoint.
Breakpoints are invalid for these reasons:
• There are unsaved changes in the file. To make breakpoints valid, save the file. The
gray breakpoints become red, indicating that they are now valid.
22-13
• There is a syntax error in the file. When you set a breakpoint, an error message
appears indicating where the syntax error is. To make the breakpoint valid, fix the
syntax error and save the file.
Disable Breakpoints
You can disable selected breakpoints so that your program temporarily ignores them and
runs uninterrupted. For example, you might disable a breakpoint after you think you
identified and corrected a problem, or if you are using conditional breakpoints.
To disable a breakpoint, right-click the breakpoint icon, and select Disable Breakpoint
from the context menu.
An X appears through the breakpoint icon to indicate that it is disabled.
To reenable a breakpoint, right-click the breakpoint icon and select Enable Breakpoint
from the context menu.
The X no longer appears on the breakpoint icon and program execution pauses at that
line.
To enable or disable all breakpoints in the file, select Enable All in File or Disable All
in File. These options are only available if there is at least one breakpoint to enable or
disable.
Clear Breakpoints
All breakpoints remain in a file until you clear (remove) them or until they are cleared
automatically at the end of your MATLAB session.
To clear a breakpoint, right-click the breakpoint icon and select Clear Breakpoint from
the context menu.
You also can use the dbclear function. For example, to clear the breakpoint at line 6 in
a file called myprogram.m, type
dbclear in myprogram at 6
22-14
See Also
To clear all breakpoints in the file, right-click the breakpoint alley and select Clear All
in File. You can also use the dbclear all command. For example, to clear all the
breakpoints in a file called myprogram.m, type
dbclear all in myprogram
To clear all breakpoints in all files, including error breakpoints, right-click the
breakpoint alley and select Clear All. You also can use the dbclear all command.
Breakpoints clear automatically when you end a MATLAB session. To save your
breakpoints for future sessions, see the dbstatus function.
See Also
Related Examples
22-15
Examine Values While Debugging

While your program is paused, you can view the value of any variable currently in the
workspace. Examine values when you want to see whether a line of code produces the
expected result or not. If the result is as expected, continue running or step to the next
line. If the result is not as you expect, then that line, or a previous line, might contain an
error.
Select Workspace
To examine a variable during debugging, you must first select its workspace. Variables
that you assign through the Command Window or create using scripts belong to the base
workspace. Variables that you create in a function belong to their own function
workspace. To view the current workspace, select the Editor tab. The Function Call
Stack field shows the current workspace. Alternatively, you can use the dbstack
function in the Command Window.
To select or change the workspace for the variable you want to view, use either of these
methods:
• From the Editor tab, in the Debug section, choose a workspace from the Function
Call Stack menu list.
• From the Command Window, use the dbup and dbdown functions to select the
previous or next workspace in the Function Call Stack.
To list the variables in the current workspace, use who or whos.
View Variable Value

There are several ways to view the value of a variable while debugging a program:
22-16
Examine Values While Debugging
• View variable values in the Workspace browser and Variables Editor.
The Workspace browser displays all variables in the current workspace. The Value
column of the Workspace browser shows the current value of the variable. To see
more details, double-click the variable. The Variables Editor opens, displaying the
content for that variable. You also can use the openvar function to open a variable in
the Variables Editor.
• View variable values in the MATLAB Editor.
Use your mouse to select the variable or equation. Right-click and select Evaluate
Selection from the context menu. The Command Window displays the value of the
variable or equation.
Note You cannot evaluate a selection while MATLAB is busy, for example, running a
file.
22-17
• View variable values as a data tip in the MATLAB Editor.
To do this, position your mouse pointer over the variable. The current value of the
variable appears in a data tip. The data tip stays in view until you move the pointer.
If you have trouble getting the data tip to appear, click the line containing the
variable, and then move the pointer next to the variable.
Data tips are enabled by default in the Live Editor. To enable or disable them, with a
live script open in the Live Editor, go to the View tab, and in the Display section,
select or deselect Datatips.
To view data tips in the Editor, enable them in your MATLAB preferences.
1
On the Home tab, in the Environment section, click Preferences. Then
select MATLAB > Editor/Debugger > Display.
2 Under General display options, select Enable datatips in edit mode.
• View variable values in the Command Window.
To see all the variables currently in the workspace, call the who function. To view the
current value of a variable, type the variable name in the Command Window. For the
example, to see the value of a variable n, type n and press Enter. The Command
Window displays the variable name and its value.
When you set a breakpoint in a function and attempt to view the value of a variable in a
parent workspace, the value of that variable might not be available. This error occurs
when you attempt to access a variable while MATLAB is in the process of overwriting it.
In such cases, MATLAB returns the following message, where x represents the variable
whose value you are trying to examine.
K>> x
Reference to a called function result under construction x.
The error occurs whether you select the parent workspace by using the dbup command or
by using Function Call Stack field in the Debug section of the Editor tab.
22-18
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
22-19
23
Presenting MATLAB Code
MATLAB software enables you to present your MATLAB code in various ways. You can
share your code and results with others, even if they do not have MATLAB software. You
can save MATLAB output in various formats, including HTML, XML, and LaTeX. If
Microsoft Word or Microsoft PowerPoint applications are on your Microsoft Windows
system, you can publish to their formats as well.
• “Options for Presenting Your Code” on page 23-2

• “Publishing MATLAB Code” on page 23-4
• “Publishing Markup” on page 23-7
• “Output Preferences for Publishing” on page 23-26
• “Create a MATLAB Notebook with Microsoft Word” on page 23-40
23 Presenting MATLAB Code
Options for Presenting Your Code

MATLAB provides options for presenting your code to others, including using publishing
and live scripts.
Method Description Output Formats Details
Command-line Use comments at the start of • ASCII text “Add Help for Your
help a MATLAB file to display Program” on page 20-6
help comments when you type
help file_name in the
Command Window.
Live Scripts Use live scripts to create • MLX “Live Scripts”
cohesive, shareable • HTML
documents that include
executable MATLAB code, • PDF
embedded output, and • LaTeX
formatted text.
Publish Use comments with basic • XML “Publishing MATLAB
markup to publish a • HTML Code” on page 23-4
document that includes text,
bulleted or numbered lists, • LaTeX Publishing MATLAB
MATLAB code, and code • Microsoft Word Code from the Editor
results. (.doc/.docx) video
• Microsoft
PowerPoint (ppt)
• PDF
Help Browser Create HTML and XML files • HTML “Display Custom
Topics to provide your own MATLAB Documentation” on page
help topics for viewing from 30-15
the MATLAB Help browser or
the web.
23-2
Options for Presenting Your Code
Method Description Output Formats Details
MATLAB Report Use MATLAB Report • RTF MATLAB Report

Generator™ Generator to build complex Generator
• PDF
reports.
• Word
You must have MATLAB • HTML
Report Generator software
installed. • XML
23-3
Publishing MATLAB Code

Publishing a MATLAB Code file (.m) creates a formatted document that includes your
code, comments, and output. Common reasons to publish code are to share the
documents with others for teaching or demonstration, or to generate readable, external
documentation of your code. To create an interactive document that contains your code,
formatted content, and output together in the MATLAB Editor, see “Create Live Scripts
in the Live Editor” on page 19-8.
This code demonstrates the Fourier series expansion for a square wave.
MATLAB Code with Markup Published Document
To publish your code:
1 Create a MATLAB script or function. Divide the code into steps or sections by
inserting two percent signs (%%) at the beginning of each section.
2 Document the code by adding explanatory comments at the beginning of the file and
within each section.
23-4
See Also
Within the comments at the top of each section, you can add markup that enhances
the readability of the output. For example, the code in the preceding table includes
the following markup.
Titles %% Square Waves from Sine Waves
%% Add an Odd Harmonic and Plot It
%% Note About Gibbs Phenomenon

Variable name in % As _k_ increases, ...
italics
LaTeX equation % $$ y = y + \frac{sin(k*t)}{k} $$
Note When you have a file containing text that has characters in a different
encoding than that of your platform, when you save or publish your file, MATLAB
displays those characters as garbled text.
3 Publish the code. On the Publish tab, click Publish.
By default, MATLAB creates a subfolder named html, which contains an HTML file
and files for each graphic that your code creates. The HTML file includes the code,
formatted comments, and output. Alternatively, you can publish to other formats,
such as PDF files or Microsoft PowerPoint presentations. For more information on
publishing to other formats, see “Specify Output File” on page 23-27.
The sample code that appears in the previous figure is part of the installed
documentation. You can view the code in the Editor by running this command:
edit(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_env', ...
'examples','fourier_demo2.m'))
See Also
publish
More About
23-5
23-6
Publishing Markup
Publishing Markup
In this section...
“Markup Overview” on page 23-7
“Sections and Section Titles” on page 23-10
“Text Formatting” on page 23-11
“Bulleted and Numbered Lists” on page 23-12
“Text and Code Blocks” on page 23-13
“External File Content” on page 23-14
“External Graphics” on page 23-15
“Image Snapshot” on page 23-17
“LaTeX Equations” on page 23-18
“Hyperlinks” on page 23-20
“HTML Markup” on page 23-23
“LaTeX Markup” on page 23-24
Markup Overview
To insert markup, you can:
• Use the formatting buttons and drop-down menus on the Publish tab to format the
file. This method automatically inserts the text markup for you.
• Select markup from the Insert Text Markup list in the right click menu.
• Type the markup directly in the comments.
The following table provides a summary of the text markup options. Refer to this table if
you are not using the MATLAB Editor, or if you do not want to use the Publish tab to
apply the markup.
Note When working with markup:
• Spaces following the comment symbols (%) often determine the format of the text that
follows.
23-7
• Starting new markup often requires preceding blank comment lines, as shown in
examples.
• Markup only works in comments that immediately follow a section break.
Result in Output Example of Corresponding File Markup

“Sections and Section Titles” on %% SECTION TITLE
page 23-10 % DESCRIPTIVE TEXT
%%% SECTION TITLE WITHOUT SECTION BREAK

% DESCRIPTIVE TEXT
“Text Formatting” on page 23-11 % _ITALIC TEXT_
% *BOLD TEXT*
% |MONOSPACED TEXT|
% Trademarks:
% TEXT(TM)
% TEXT(R)
“Bulleted and Numbered Lists” on %% Bulleted List
page 23-12 %
% * BULLETED ITEM 1
% * BULLETED ITEM 2
%
%% Numbered List
%
% # NUMBERED ITEM 1
% # NUMBERED ITEM 2
%
23-8
Publishing Markup

“Text and Code Blocks” on page %%
23-13 %
% PREFORMATTED
% TEXT
%
%% MATLAB(R) Code
%
% for i = 1:10
% disp x
% end
%
“External File Content” on page %
23-14 % <include>filename.m</include>
%
“External Graphics” on page 23- %
15 % <<FILENAME.PNG>>
%
“Image Snapshot” on page 23-17 snapnow;
“LaTeX Equations” on page 23-18 %% Inline Expression

% $x^2+e^{\pi i}$
%% Block Equation
%
% $$e^{\pi i} + 1 = 0$$
%
“Hyperlinks” on page 23-20 % <http://www.mathworks.com MathWorks>
% <matlab:FUNCTION DISPLAYED_TEXT>
“HTML Markup” on page 23-23 %
% <html>
% <table border=1><tr>
% <td>one</td>
% <td>two</td></tr></table>
% </html>
%
23-9

“LaTeX Markup” on page 23-24 %% LaTeX Markup Example
% <latex>
% \begin{tabular}{|r|r|}
% \hline $n$&$n!$\\
% \hline 1&1\\ 2&2\\ 3&6\\
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% </latex>
%
Sections and Section Titles

Code sections allow you to organize, add comments, and execute portions of your code.
Code sections begin with double percent signs (%%) followed by an optional section title.
The section title displays as a top-level heading (h1 in HTML), using a larger, bold font.
Note You can add comments in the lines immediately following the title. However, if you
want an overall document title, you cannot add any MATLAB code before the start of the
next section (a line starting with %%).
For instance, this code produces a polished result when published.

%% Vector Operations
% You can perform a number of binary operations on vectors.
%%
A = 1:3;
B = 4:6;
%% Dot Product
% A dot product of two vectors yields a scalar.
% MATLAB has a simple command for dot products.
s = dot(A,B);
%% Cross Product
% A cross product of two vectors yields a third
% vector perpendicular to both original vectors.
% Again, MATLAB has a simple command for cross products.
v = cross(A,B);
23-10
Publishing Markup
By saving the code in an Editor and clicking the Publish button on the Publish tab,
MATLAB produces the output as shown in this figure. Notice that MATLAB
automatically inserts a Contents menu from the section titles in the MATLAB file.
Text Formatting
You can mark selected text in the MATLAB comments so that they display in italic, bold,
or monospaced text when you publish the file. Simply surround the text with _, *, or |
for italic, bold, or monospaced text, respectively.
For instance, these lines display each of the text formatting syntaxes if published.
% _Define_ the *range* for |x|
23-11
Trademark Symbols
If the comments in your MATLAB file include trademarked terms, you can include text
to produce a trademark symbol (™) or registered trademark symbol (®) in the output.
Simply add (R) or (TM) directly after the term in question, without any space in
between.
For example, suppose that you enter these lines in a file.
%% Basic Matrix Operations in MATLAB(R)

% This is a demonstration of some aspects of MATLAB(R)
% software and the Neural Network Toolbox(TM) software.
If you publish the file to HTML, it appears in the MATLAB web browser.
Bulleted and Numbered Lists

MATLAB allows bulleted and numbered lists in the comments. You can use this syntax
to produce bulleted and numbered lists.
%% Two Lists
%
% * ITEM1
% * ITEM2
%
% # ITEM1
23-12
Publishing Markup
% # ITEM2
%
Publishing the example code produces this output.
Text and Code Blocks

Preformatted Text
Preformatted text appears in monospace font, maintains white space, and does not wrap
long lines. Two spaces must appear between the comment symbol and the text of the first
line of the preformatted text.
Publishing this code produces a preformatted paragraph.

%%
% Many people find monospaced texts easier to read:
%
% A dot product of two vectors yields a scalar.
% MATLAB has a simple command for dot products.
23-13
Syntax Highlighted Sample Code
Executable code appears with syntax highlighting in published documents. You also can
highlight sample code. Sample code is code that appears within comments.
To indicate sample code, you must put three spaces between the comment symbol and
the start of the first line of code. For example, clicking the Code button on the Publish
tab inserts the following sample code in your Editor.
%%
%
% for i = 1:10
% disp(x)
% end
%
Publishing this code to HTML produces output in the MATLAB web browser.
External File Content

To add external file content into MATLAB published code, use the <include> markup.
Specify the external file path relative to the location of the published file. Included
MATLAB code files publish as syntax highlighted code. Any other files publish as plain
text.
For example, this code inserts the contents of sine_wave.m into your published output:
%% External File Content Example
% This example includes the file contents of sine_wave.m into published
% output.
%
% <include>sine_wave.m</include>
%
% The file content above is properly syntax highlighted
Publish the file to HTML.
23-14
Publishing Markup
External Graphics
To publish an image that the MATLAB code does not generate, use text markup. By
default, MATLAB already includes code-generated graphics.
This code inserts a generic image called FILENAME.PNG into your published output.
%%
%
% <<FILENAME.PNG>>
%
MATLAB requires that FILENAME.PNG be a relative path from the output location to
your external image or a fully qualified URL. Good practice is to save your image in the
same folder that MATLAB publishes its output. For example, MATLAB publishes HTML
documents to a subfolder html. Save your image file in the same subfolder. You can
change the output folder by changing the publish configuration settings.
External Graphics Example Using surf(peaks)
This example shows how to insert surfpeaks.jpg into a MATLAB file for publishing.
To create the surfpeaks.jpg, run this code in the Command Window.
saveas(surf(peaks),'surfpeaks.jpg');
To produce an HTML file containing surfpeaks.jpg from a MATLAB file:
23-15
1 Create a subfolder called html in your current folder.

2 Create surfpeaks.jpg by running this code in the Command Window.
saveas(surf(peaks),'html/surfpeaks.jpg');
3 Publish this MATLAB code to HTML.
%% Image Example
% This is a graphic:
%
% <<surfpeaks.jpg>>
%
Valid Image Types for Output File Formats
The type of images you can include when you publish depends on the output type of that
document as indicated in this table. For greatest compatibility, best practice is to use the
default image format for each output type.
23-16
Publishing Markup
Output File Format Default Image Format Types of Images You Can Include
doc png Any format that your installed version of
Microsoft Office supports.
html png All formats publish successfully. Ensure
that the tools you use to view and process
the output files can display the output
format you specify.
latex png or epsc2 All formats publish successfully. Ensure
format you specify.
pdf bmp bmp and jpg.
ppt png Any format that your installed version of
xml png All formats publish successfully. Ensure
format you specify.
Image Snapshot
You can insert code that captures a snapshot of your MATLAB output. This is useful, for
example, if you have a for loop that modifies a figure that you want to capture after
each iteration.
The following code runs a for loop three times and produces output after every iteration.
The snapnow command captures all three images produced by the code.
%% Scale magic Data and Display as Image
for i=1:3
imagesc(magic(i))
snapnow;
end
If you publish the file to HTML, it resembles the following output. By default, the images
in the HTML are larger than shown in the figure. To resize images generated by
MATLAB code, use the Max image width and Max image height fields in the
23-17
Publish settings pane, as described in “Output Preferences for Publishing” on page 23-
26.
LaTeX Equations
Inline LaTeX Expression
MATLAB enables you to include an inline LaTeX expression in any code that you intend
to publish. To insert an inline expression, surround your LaTeX markup with dollar sign
characters ($). The $ must immediately precede the first word of the inline expression,
and immediately follow the last word of the inline expression, without any space in
between.
Note
• All publishing output types support LaTeX expressions, except Microsoft PowerPoint.
• MATLAB publishing supports standard LaTeX math mode directives. Text mode
directives or directives that require additional packages are not supported.
This code contains a LaTeX expression:
23-18
Publishing Markup
%% LaTeX Inline Expression Example

%
% This is an equation: $x^2+e^{\pi i}$. It is
% inline with the text.
If you publish the sample text markup to HTML, this is the resulting output.
LaTeX Display Equation
MATLAB enables you to insert LaTeX symbols in blocks that are offset from the main
comment text. Two dollar sign characters ($$) on each side of an equation denote a block
LaTeX equation. Publishing equations in separate blocks requires a blank line in
between blocks.
This code is a sample text markup.

%% LaTeX Equation Example
%
% This is an equation:
%
% $$e^{\pi i} + 1 = 0$$
%
% It is not in line with the text.
If you publish to HTML, the expression appears as shown here.
23-19
Hyperlinks
Static Hyperlinks
You can insert static hyperlinks within a MATLAB comment, and then publish the file to
HTML, XML, or Microsoft Word. When specifying a static hyperlink to a web location,
include a complete URL within the code. This is useful when you want to point the
reader to a web location. You can display or hide the URL in the published text. Consider
excluding the URL, when you are confident that readers are viewing your output online
and can click the hyperlink.
Enclose URLs and any replacement text in angled brackets.
%%
% For more information, see our web site:
% <http://www.mathworks.com MathWorks>
Publishing the code to HTML produces this output.
Eliminating the text MathWorks after the URL produces this modified output.
Note If your code produces hyperlinked text in the MATLAB Command Window, the
output shows the HTML code rather than the hyperlink.
Dynamic Hyperlinks
You can insert dynamic hyperlinks, which MATLAB evaluates at the time a reader clicks
that link. Dynamic hyperlinks enable you to point the reader to MATLAB code or
documentation, or enable the reader to run code. You implement these links using
matlab: syntax. If the code that follows the matlab: declaration has spaces in it,
replace them with %20.
23-20
Publishing Markup
Note Dynamic links only work when viewing HTML in the MATLAB web browser.
Diverse uses of dynamic links include:
• “Dynamic Link to Run Code” on page 23-21

• “Dynamic Link to a File” on page 23-22
• “Dynamic Link to a MATLAB Function Reference Page” on page 23-22
Dynamic Link to Run Code
You can specify a dynamic hyperlink to run code when a user clicks the hyperlink. For
example, this matlab: syntax creates hyperlinks in the output, which when clicked
either enable or disable recycling:
%% Recycling Preference
% Click the preference you want:
%
% <matlab:recycle('off') Disable recycling>
%
% <matlab:recycle('on') Enable recycling>
The published result resembles this HTML output.
When you click one of the hyperlinks, MATLAB sets the recycle command accordingly.
After clicking a hyperlink, run recycle in the Command Window to confirm that the
setting is as you expect.
23-21
Dynamic Link to a File
You can specify a link to a file that you know is in the matlabroot of your reader. You
do not need to know where each reader installed MATLAB. For example, link to the
function code for publish.
%%
% See the
% <matlab:edit(fullfile(matlabroot,'toolbox','matlab','codetools','publish.m')) code>
% for the publish function.
Next, publish the file to HTML.
When you click the code link, the MATLAB Editor opens and displays the code for the
publish function. On the reader's system, MATLAB issues the command (although the
command does not appear in the reader's Command Window).
Dynamic Link to a MATLAB Function Reference Page
You can specify a link to a MATLAB function reference page using matlab: syntax. For
example, suppose that your reader has MATLAB installed and running. Provide a link to
the publish reference page.
%%
% See the help for the <matlab:doc('publish') publish> function.
Publish the file to HTML.
When you click the publish hyperlink, the MATLAB Help browser opens and displays
the reference page for the publish function. On the reader's system, MATLAB issues
the command, although the command does not appear in the Command Window.
23-22
Publishing Markup
HTML Markup
You can insert HTML markup into your MATLAB file. You must type the HTML markup
since no button on the Publish tab generates it.
Note When you insert text markup for HTML code, the HTML code publishes only when
the specified output file format is HTML.
This code includes HTML tagging.

%% HTML Markup Example
% This is a table:
%
% <html>
% <table border=1><tr><td>one</td><td>two</td></tr>
% <tr><td>three</td><td>four</td></tr></table>
% </html>
%
If you publish the code to HTML, MATLAB creates a single-row table with two columns.
The table contains the values one, two, three, and four.
If a section produces command-window output that starts with <html> and ends with </
html>, MATLAB includes the source HTML in the published output. For example,
MATLAB displays the disp command and makes a table from the HTML code if you
publish this code:
disp('<html><table><tr><td>1</td><td>2</td></tr></table></html>')
23-23
LaTeX Markup
You can insert LaTeX markup into your MATLAB file. You must type all LaTeX markup
since no button on the Publish tab generates it.
Note When you insert text markup for LaTeX code, that code publishes only when the
specified output file format is LaTeX.
This code is an example of LaTeX markup.
%% LaTeX Markup Example

% This is a table:
%
% <latex>
% \begin{tabular}{|c|c|} \hline
% $n$ & $n!$ \\ \hline
% 1 & 1 \\
% 2 & 2 \\
% 3 & 6 \\ \hline
% \end{tabular}
% </latex>
If you publish the file to LaTeX, then the Editor opens a new .tex file containing the
LaTeX markup.
% This LaTeX was auto-generated from MATLAB code.

% To make changes, update the MATLAB code and republish this document.
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{graphicx}
23-24
See Also
\usepackage{color}
\sloppy
\definecolor{lightgray}{gray}{0.5}
\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
\begin{document}
\section*{LaTeX Markup Example}
\begin{par}
This is a table:
\end{par} \vspace{1em}
\begin{par}
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|} \hline
$n$ & $n!$ \\ \hline
1 & 1 \\
2 & 2 \\
3 & 6 \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
\end{par} \vspace{1em}
\end{document}
MATLAB includes any additional markup necessary to compile this file with a LaTeX
program.
See Also
More About
23-25
Output Preferences for Publishing

In this section...
“How to Edit Publishing Options” on page 23-26
“Specify Output File” on page 23-27
“Run Code During Publishing” on page 23-28
“Manipulate Graphics in Publishing Output” on page 23-30
“Save a Publish Setting” on page 23-34
“Manage a Publish Configuration” on page 23-36
How to Edit Publishing Options

Use the default publishing preferences if your code requires no input arguments and you
want to publish to HTML. However, if your code requires input arguments, or if you
want to specify output settings, code execution, or figure formats, then specify a custom
configuration.
1 Locate the Publish tab and click the Publish button arrow .
2 Select Edit Publishing Options.
The Edit Configurations dialog box opens. Specify output preferences.
23-26
The MATLAB expression pane specifies the code that executes during publishing. The
Publish settings pane contains output, figure, and code execution options. Together,
they make what MATLAB refers to as a publish configuration. MATLAB associates each
publish configuration with an .m file. The name of the publish configuration appears in
the top left pane.
Specify Output File

You specify the output format and location on the Publish settings pane.
MATLAB publishes to these formats.

Format Notes
html Publishes to an HTML document. You can use an Extensible
Stylesheet Language (XSL) file.
xml Publishes to XML document. You can use an Extensible Stylesheet
Language (XSL) file.
latex Publishes to LaTeX document. Does not preserve syntax highlighting.
You can use an Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) file.
23-27
Format Notes
doc Publishes to a Microsoft Word document. Does not preserve syntax
highlighting. This format is only available on Windows platforms.
ppt Publishes to a Microsoft PowerPoint document. Does not preserve
syntax highlighting. This format is only available on Windows
platforms.
pdf Publishes to a PDF document.
Note XSL files allow you more control over the appearance of the output document. For
more details, see http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/doc/.
Run Code During Publishing

• “Specifying Code” on page 23-28
• “Evaluating Code” on page 23-29
• “Including Code” on page 23-29
• “Catching Errors” on page 23-30
• “Limiting the Amount of Output” on page 23-30
Specifying Code
By default, MATLAB executes the .m file that you are publishing. However, you can
specify any valid MATLAB code in the MATLAB expression pane. For example, if you
want to publish a function that requires input, then run the command
function(input). Additional code, whose output you want to publish, appears after
the functions call. If you clear the MATLAB expression area, then MATLAB publishes
the file without evaluating any code.
Note Publish configurations use the base MATLAB workspace. Therefore, a variable in
the MATLAB expression pane overwrites the value for an existing variable in the base
workspace.
23-28
Evaluating Code
Another way to affect what MATLAB executes during publishing is to set the Evaluate
code option in the Publish setting pane. This option indicates whether MATLAB
evaluates the code in the .m file that is publishing. If set to true, MATLAB executes the
code and includes the results in the output document.
Because MATLAB does not evaluate the code nor include code results when you set the
Evaluate code option to false, there can be invalid code in the file. Therefore, consider
first running the file with this option set to true.
For example, suppose that you include comment text, Label the plot, in a file, but
forget to preface it with the comment character. If you publish the document to HTML,
and set the Evaluate code option to true, the output includes an error.
Use the false option to publish the file that contains the publish function. Otherwise,
MATLAB attempts to publish the file recursively.
Including Code
You can specify whether to display MATLAB code in the final output. If you set the
Include code option to true, then MATLAB includes the code in the published output
document. If set to false, MATLAB excludes the code from all output file formats,
except HTML.
If the output file format is HTML, MATLAB inserts the code as an HTML comment that
is not visible in the web browser. If you want to extract the code from the output HTML
file, use the MATLAB grabcode function.
23-29
For example, suppose that you publish H:/my_matlabfiles/my_mfiles/

sine_wave.m to HTML using a publish configuration with the Include code option set
to false. If you share the output with colleagues, they can view it in a web browser. To
see the MATLAB code that generated the output, they can issue the following command
from the folder containing sine_wave.html:
grabcode('sine_wave.html')
MATLAB opens the file that created sine_wave.html in the Editor.
Catching Errors
You can catch and publish any errors that occur during publishing. Setting the Catch
error option to true includes any error messages in the output document. If you set
Catch error to false, MATLAB terminates the publish operation if an error occurs
during code evaluation. However, this option has no effect if you set the Evaluate code
property to false.
Limiting the Amount of Output
You can limit the number of lines of code output that is included in the output document
by specifying the Max # of output lines option in the Publish settings pane. Setting
this option is useful if a smaller, representative sample of the code output suffices.
For example, the following loop generates 100 lines in a published output unless Max #
of output lines is set to a lower value.
for n = 1:100
disp(x)
end;
Manipulate Graphics in Publishing Output

• “Choosing an Image Format” on page 23-31
• “Setting an Image Size” on page 23-31
• “Capturing Figures” on page 23-32
• “Specifying a Custom Figure Window” on page 23-32
• “Creating a Thumbnail” on page 23-34
23-30
Choosing an Image Format
When publishing, you can choose the image format that MATLAB uses to store any
graphics generated during code execution. The available image formats in the drop-down
list depend on the setting of the Figure capture method option. For greatest
compatibility, select the default as specified in this table.
Output File Format Default Image Format Types of Images You Can Include
doc png Any format that your installed version of
html png All formats publish successfully. Ensure
format you specify.
latex png or epsc2 All formats publish successfully. Ensure
format you specify.
pdf bmp bmp and jpg.
ppt png Any format that your installed version of
xml png All formats publish successfully. Ensure
format you specify.
Setting an Image Size
You set the size of MATLAB generated images in the Publish settings pane on the Edit
Configurations dialog window. You specify the image size in pixels to restrict the width
and height of images in the output. The pixel values act as a maximum size value
because MATLAB maintains an image’s aspect ratio. MATLAB ignores the size setting
for the following cases:
• When working with external graphics as described in “External Graphics” on page 23-
15
• When using vector formats, such as .eps
• When publishing to .pdf
23-31
Capturing Figures
You can capture different aspects of the Figure window by setting the Figure capture
method option. This option determines the window decorations (title bar, toolbar, menu
bar, and window border) and plot backgrounds for the Figure window.
This table summarizes the effects of the various Figure capture methods.
Use This Figure Capture To Get Figure Captures with These Appearance Details
Method
Window Decorations Plot Backgrounds
entireGUIWindow Included for dialog boxes; Excluded Set to white for figures; matches
for figures the screen for dialog boxes
print Excluded for dialog boxes and Set to white
figures
getframe Excluded for dialog boxes and Matches the screen plot
figures background
entireFigureWindow Included for dialog boxes and Matches the screen plot
figures background
Note Typically, MATLAB figures have the HandleVisibility property set to on.
Dialog boxes are figures with the HandleVisibility property set to off or callback.
If your results are different from the results listed in the preceding table, the
HandleVisibility property of your figures or dialog boxes might be atypical. For more
information, see HandleVisibility.
Specifying a Custom Figure Window
MATLAB allows you to specify custom appearance for figures it creates. If the Use new
figure option in the Publish settings pane is set to true, then in the published output,
MATLAB uses a Figure window at the default size and with a white background. If the
Use new figure option is set to false, then MATLAB uses the properties from an open
Figure window to determine the appearance of code-generated figures. This preference
does not apply to figures included using the syntax in “External Graphics” on page 23-15.
Use the following code as a template to produce Figure windows that meet your needs.
% Create figure
figure1 = figure('Name','purple_background',...
23-32
'Color',[0.4784 0.06275 0.8941]);

colormap('hsv');
% Create subplot
subplot(1,1,1,'Parent',figure1);
box('on');
% Create axis labels

xlabel('x-axis');
ylabel({'y-axis'})
% Create title
title({'Title'});
23-33
% Enable printed output to match colors on screen

set(figure1,'InvertHardcopy','off')
By publishing your file with this window open and the Use new figure option set to
false, any code-generated figure takes the properties of the open Figure window.
Note You must set the Figure capture method option to entireFigureWindow for
the final published figure to display all the properties of the open Figure window.
Creating a Thumbnail
You can save the first code-generated graphic as a thumbnail image. You can use this
thumbnail to represent your file on HTML pages. To create a thumbnail, follow these
steps:
1 On the Publish tab, click the Publish button drop-down arrow and select Edit
Publishing Options. The Edit Configurations dialog box opens.
2 Set the Image Format option to a bitmap format, such as .png or .jpg. MATLAB
creates thumbnail images in bitmap formats.
3 Set the Create thumbnail option to true.
MATLAB saves the thumbnail image in the folder specified by the Output folder
option in the Publish settings pane.
Save a Publish Setting

You can save your publish settings, which allows you to reproduce output easily. It can
be useful to save your commonly used publish settings.
23-34
When the Publish settings options are set, you can follow these steps to save the
settings:
1 Click Save As when the options are set in the manner you want.
The Save Publish Settings As dialog box opens and displays the names of all the
currently defined publish settings. By default the following publish settings install
with MATLAB:
• Factory Default
You cannot overwrite the Factory Default and can restore them by selecting
Factory Default from the Publish settings list.
• User Default
Initially, User Default settings are identical to the Factory Default

settings. You can overwrite the User Default settings.
23-35
2 In the Settings Name field, enter a meaningful name for the settings. Then click
Save.
You can now use the publish settings with other MATLAB files.
You also can overwrite the publishing properties saved under an existing name.
Select the name from the Publish settings list, and then click Overwrite.
Manage a Publish Configuration

• “Running an Existing Publish Configuration” on page 23-36
• “Creating Multiple Publish Configurations for a File” on page 23-36
• “Reassociating and Renaming Publish Configurations” on page 23-37
• “Using Publish Configurations Across Different Systems” on page 23-38
Together, the code in the MATLAB expression pane and the settings in the Publish
settings pane make a publish configuration that is associated with one file. These
configurations provide a simple way to refer to publish preferences for individual files.
To create a publish configuration, click the Publish button drop-down arrow on the
Publish tab, and select Edit Publishing Options. The Edit Configurations dialog box
opens, containing the default publish preferences. In the Publish configuration name
field, type a name for the publish configuration, or accept the default name. The publish
configuration saves automatically.
Running an Existing Publish Configuration
After saving a publish configuration, you can run it without opening the Edit
Configurations dialog box:
1 Click the Publish button drop-down arrow If you position your mouse pointer on a
publish configuration name, MATLAB displays a tooltip showing the MATLAB
expression associated with the specific configuration.
2 Select a configuration name to use for the publish configuration. MATLAB publishes
the file using the code and publish settings associated with the configuration.
Creating Multiple Publish Configurations for a File
You can create multiple publish configurations for a given file. You might do this to
publish the file with different values for input arguments, with different publish setting
23-36
property values, or both. Create a named configuration for each purpose, all associated
with the same file. Later you can run whichever particular publish configuration you
want.
Use the following steps as a guide to create new publish configurations.
1 Open a file in your Editor.

2 Click the Publish button drop-down arrow, and select Edit Publishing Options.
The Edit Configurations dialog box opens.
3
Click the Add button located on the left pane.
A new name appears on the configurations list, filename_n, where the value of n
depends on the existing configuration names.
4 If you modify settings in the MATLAB expression or Publish setting pane,

MATLAB automatically saves the changes.
Reassociating and Renaming Publish Configurations
Each publish configuration is associated with a specific file. If you move or rename a file,
redefine its association. If you delete a file, consider deleting the associated
configurations, or associating them with a different file.
23-37
When MATLAB cannot associate a configuration with a file, the Edit Configurations
dialog box displays the file name in red and a File Not Found message. To reassociate a
configuration with another file, perform the following steps.
1
Click the Clear search button on the left pane of the Edit Configurations dialog
box.
2 Select the file for which you want to reassociate publish configurations.
3 In the right pane of the Edit Configurations dialog box, click Choose.... In the Open
dialog box, navigate to and select the file with which you want to reassociate the
configurations.
You can rename the configurations at any time by selecting a configuration from the list
in the left pane. In the right pane, edit the value for the Publish configuration name.
Note To run correctly after a file name change, you might need to change the code
statements in the MATLAB expression pane. For example, change a function call to
reflect the new file name for that function.
Using Publish Configurations Across Different Systems
Each time you create or save a publish configuration using the Edit Configurations
dialog box, the Editor updates the publish_configurations.m file in your preferences
folder. (This is the folder that MATLAB returns when you run the MATLAB prefdir
function.)
Although you can port this file from the preferences folder on one system to another, only
one publish_configurations.m file can exist on a system. Therefore, only move the
file to another system if you have not created any publish configurations on the second
system. In addition, because the publish_configurations.m file might contain
references to file paths, be sure that the specified files and paths exist on the second
system.
MathWorks recommends that you not update publish_configurations.m in the

MATLAB Editor or a text editor. Changes that you make using tools other than the Edit
Configurations dialog box might be overwritten later.
23-38
See Also
See Also
More About
23-39
Create a MATLAB Notebook with Microsoft Word

In this section...
“Getting Started with MATLAB Notebooks” on page 23-40
“Creating and Evaluating Cells in a MATLAB Notebook” on page 23-42
“Formatting a MATLAB Notebook” on page 23-47
“Tips for Using MATLAB Notebooks” on page 23-49
“Configuring the MATLAB Notebook Software” on page 23-50
Getting Started with MATLAB Notebooks
Note notebook will be removed in a future version. Use the Live Editor on page 19-2
instead.
You can use the notebook function to open Microsoft Word and record MATLAB
sessions to supplement class notes, textbooks, or technical reports. After executing the
notebook function, you run MATLAB commands directly from Word itself. This Word
document is known as a MATLAB Notebook. As an alternative, consider using the
MATLAB publish function.
Using the notebook command, you create a Microsoft Word document. You then can
type text, input cells (MATLAB commands), and output cells (results of MATLAB
commands) directly into this document. You can format the input in the same manner as
any Microsoft Word document. You can think of this document as a record of an
interactive MATLAB session annotated with text, or as a document embedded with live
MATLAB commands and output.
Note The notebook command is available only on Windows systems that have a 32–bit
version of Microsoft Word installed. The notebook command is not available for 64–bit
versions of Microsoft Word.
23-40
Creating or Opening a MATLAB Notebook
If you are running the notebook command for the first time since you installed a new
version of MATLAB, follow the instructions in “Configuring the MATLAB Notebook
Software” on page 23-50. Otherwise, you can create a new or open an existing notebook:
• To open a new notebook, execute the notebook function in the MATLAB Command
Window.
The notebook command starts Microsoft Word on your system and creates a
MATLAB Notebook, called Document1. If a dialog box appears asking you to enable
or disable macros, choose to enable macros.
Word adds the Notebook menu to the Word Add-Ins tab, as shown in the following
figure.
Microsoft product screen shot reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
• To open an existing notebook, execute notebook file_name in the MATLAB
Command Window, where file_name is the name of an existing MATLAB notebook.
Converting a Word Document to a MATLAB Notebook
To convert a Microsoft Word document to a MATLAB Notebook, insert the document into
a notebook file:
1 Create a MATLAB Notebook.

2 From the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the arrow next to Object.
3 Select Text from File. The Insert File dialog box opens.
4 Navigate and select the Word file that you want to convert in the Insert File dialog
box.
23-41
Running Commands in a MATLAB Notebook
You enter MATLAB commands in a notebook the same way you enter text in any other
Word document. For example, you can enter the following text in a Word document. The
example uses text in Courier Font, but you can use any font:
Here is a sample MATLAB Notebook.
a = magic(3)
Execute a single command by pressing Ctrl+Enter on the line containing the MATLAB
command. Execute a series of MATLAB commands using these steps:
1 Highlight the commands you want to execute.

2 Click the Notebook drop-down list on the Add-Ins tab.
3 Select Evaluate Cell.
MATLAB displays the results in the Word document below the original command or
series of commands.
Note A good way to experiment with MATLAB Notebook is to open a sample notebook,
Readme.doc. You can find this file in the matlabroot/notebook/pc folder.
Creating and Evaluating Cells in a MATLAB Notebook

• “Creating Input Cells” on page 23-42
• “Evaluating Input Cells” on page 23-44
• “Undefining Cells” on page 23-46
• “Defining Calc Zones” on page 23-46
Creating Input Cells
Input cells allow you to break up your code into manageable pieces and execute them
independently. To define a MATLAB command in a Word document as an input cell:
1 Type the command into the MATLAB Notebook as text. For example,
This is a sample MATLAB Notebook.
a = magic(3)
23-42
2 Position the cursor anywhere in the command, and then select Define Input Cell
from the Notebook drop-down list. If the command is embedded in a line of text, use
the mouse to select it. The characters appear within cell markers ([ ]). Cell markers
are bold, gray brackets. They differ from the brackets used to enclose matrices by
their size and weight.
[a = magic(3)]
Creating Autoinit Input Cells
Autoinit cells are identical to input cells with additional characteristics:
• Autoinit cells evaluate when MATLAB Notebook opens.

• Commands in autoinit cells display in dark blue characters.
To create an autoinit cell, highlight the text, and then select Define AutoInit Cell from
the Notebook drop-down list.
Creating Cell Groups
You can collect several input cells into a single input cell, called a cell group. All the
output from a cell group appears in a single output cell immediately after the group. Cell
groups are useful when you need several MATLAB commands to execute in sequence.
For instance, defining labels and tick marks in a plot requires multiple commands:
x = -pi:0.1:pi;
plot(x,cos(x))
title('Sample Plot')
xlabel('x')
ylabel('cos(x)')
set(gca,'XTick',-pi:pi:pi)
set(gca,'XTickLabel',{'-pi','0','pi'})
To create a cell group:
1 Use the mouse to select the input cells that are to make up the group.
2 Select Group Cells from the Notebook drop-down list.
A single pair of cell markers now surrounds the new cell group.
[x = -pi:0.1:pi;
plot(x,cos(x))
title('Sample Plot')
xlabel('x')
23-43
ylabel('cos(x)')
set(gca,'XTick',-pi:pi:pi)
set(gca,'XTickLabel',{'-pi','0','pi'})]
When working with cell groups, you should note several behaviors:
• A cell group cannot contain output cells. If the selection includes output cells, they are
deleted.
• A cell group cannot contain text. If the selection includes text, the text appears after
the cell group, unless it precedes the first input cell in the selection.
• If you select part or all of an output cell, the cell group includes the respective input
cell.
• If the first line of a cell group is an autoinit cell, then the entire group is an autoinit
cell.
Evaluating Input Cells
After you define a MATLAB command as an input cell, you can evaluate it in your
MATLAB Notebook using these steps:
1 Highlight or place your cursor in the input cell you want to evaluate.
2 Select Evaluate Cell in the Notebook drop-down list, or press Ctrl+Enter.
The notebook evaluates and displays the results in an output cell immediately
following the input cell. If there is already an output cell, its contents update
wherever the output cell appears in the notebook. For example:
This is a sample MATLAB Notebook.
[a = magic(3) ]
[a =
8 1 6
3 5 7
4 9 2 ]
To evaluate more than one MATLAB command contained in different, but contiguous
input cells:
1 Select a range of cells that includes the input cells you want to evaluate. You can
include text that surrounds input cells in your selection.
2 Select Evaluate Cell in the Notebook drop-down list or press Ctrl+Enter.
23-44
Note Text or numeric output always displays first, regardless of the order of the
commands in the group.
When each input cell evaluates, new output cells appear or existing ones are replaced.
Any error messages appear in red, by default.
Evaluating Cell Groups
Evaluate a cell group the same way you evaluate an input cell (because a cell group is an
input cell):
1 Position the cursor anywhere in the cell or in its output cell.

2 Select Evaluate Cell in the Notebook drop-down list or press Ctrl+Enter.
When MATLAB evaluates a cell group, the output for all commands in the group appears
in a single output cell. By default, the output cell appears immediately after the cell
group the first time the cell group is evaluated. If you evaluate a cell group that has an
existing output cell, the results appear in that output cell, wherever it is located in the
MATLAB Notebook.
Using a Loop to Evaluate Input Cells Repeatedly
MATLAB allows you to evaluate a sequence of MATLAB commands repeatedly, using

these steps:
1 Highlight the input cells, including any text or output cells located between them.
2 Select Evaluate Loop in the Notebook drop-down list. The Evaluate Loop dialog
box appears.
23-45
3 Enter the number of times you want to evaluate the selected commands in the Stop
After field, then click Start. The button changes to Stop. Command evaluation
begins, and the number of completed iterations appears in the Loop Count field.
You can increase or decrease the delay at the end of each iteration by clicking Slower or
Faster.
Evaluating an Entire MATLAB Notebook
To evaluate an entire MATLAB Notebook, select Evaluate MATLAB Notebook in the

Notebook drop-down list. Evaluation begins at the top of the notebook, regardless of the
cursor position and includes each input cell in the file. As it evaluates the file, Word
inserts new output cells or replaces existing output cells.
If you want to stop evaluation if an error occurs, set the Stop evaluating on error
check box on the Notebook Options dialog box.
Undefining Cells
You can always convert cells back to normal text. To convert a cell (input, output, or a
cell group) to text:
1 Highlight the input cell or position the cursor in the input cell.
2 Select Undefine Cells from the Notebook drop-down list.
When the cell converts to text, the cell contents reformat according to the Microsoft Word
Normal style.
Note
• Converting input cells to text also converts their output cells.

• If the output cell is graphical, the cell markers disappear and the graphic dissociates
from its input cell, but the contents of the graphic remain.
Defining Calc Zones
You can partition a MATLAB Notebook into self-contained sections, called calc zones. A
calc zone is a contiguous block of text, input cells, and output cells. Section breaks appear
before and after the section, defining the calc zone. The section break indicators include
bold, gray brackets to distinguish them from standard Word section breaks.
23-46
You can use calc zones to prepare problem sets, making each problem a calc zone that
you can test separately. A notebook can contain any number of calc zones.
Note Calc zones do not affect the scope of the variables in a notebook. Variables defined
in one calc zone are accessible to all calc zones.
Creating a Calc Zone
1 Select the input cells and text you want to include in the calc zone.
2 Select Define Calc Zone under the Notebook drop-down list.
A calc zone cannot begin or end in a cell.

Evaluating a Calc Zone
1 Position the cursor anywhere in the calc zone.

2 Select Evaluate Calc Zone from the Notebook drop-down list or press Alt+Enter.
By default, the output cell appears immediately after the calc zone the first time you
evaluate the calc zone. If you evaluate a calc zone with an existing output cell, the results
appear in the output cell wherever it is located in the MATLAB Notebook.
Formatting a MATLAB Notebook

• “Modifying Styles in the MATLAB Notebook Template” on page 23-47
• “Controlling the Format of Numeric Output” on page 23-48
• “Controlling Graphic Output” on page 23-48
Modifying Styles in the MATLAB Notebook Template
You can control the appearance of the text in your MATLAB Notebook by modifying the
predefined styles in the notebook template, m-book.dot. These styles control the
appearance of text and cells.
This table describes MATLAB Notebook default styles. For general information about
using styles in Microsoft Word documents, see the Microsoft Word documentation.
23-47
Style Font Size Weight Color

Normal Times New 10 points N/A Black
Roman®
AutoInit Courier New 10 points Bold Dark blue
Error Courier New 10 points Bold Red
Input Courier New 10 points Bold Dark green
Output Courier New 10 points N/A Blue
When you change a style, Word applies the change to all characters in the notebook that
use that style and gives you the option to change the template. Be cautious about
changing the template. If you choose to apply the changes to the template, you affect all
new notebooks that you create using the template. See the Word documentation for more
information.
Controlling the Format of Numeric Output
To change how numeric output displays, select Notebook Options from the Notebook
drop-down list. The Notebook Options dialog box opens, containing the Numeric format
pane.
You can select a format from the Format list. Format choices correspond to the same
options available with the MATLAB format command.
The Loose and Compact settings control whether a blank line appears between the
input and output cells. To suppress this blank line, select Compact.
Controlling Graphic Output
MATLAB allows you to embed graphics, suppress graphic output and adjust the graphic
size.
23-48
By default, MATLAB embeds graphic output in a Notebook. To display graphic output in

a separate figure window, click Notebook Options from the Notebook drop-down list.
The Notebook Options dialog box opens, containing the Figure options pane.
From this pane, you can choose whether to embed figures in the MATLAB Notebook. You
can adjust the height and width of the figure in inches, centimeters, or points.
Note Embedded figures do not include graphics objects generated by the uicontrol and
uimenu functions.
To prevent an input cell from producing a figure, select Toggle Graph Output for Cell
from the Notebook drop-down list. The text (no graph) appears after the input cell
and the input cell does not produce a graph if evaluated. To undo the figure suppression,
select Toggle Graph Output for Cell again or delete the text (no graph).
Note Toggle Graph Output for Cell overrides the Embed figures in MATLAB
Notebook option, if that option is set.
Tips for Using MATLAB Notebooks

Protecting the Integrity of Your Workspace in MATLAB Notebooks
If you work on more than one MATLAB Notebook in a single word-processing session,
notice that
• Each notebook uses the same MATLAB executable.
23-49
• All notebooks share the same workspace. If you use the same variable names in more
than one notebook, data used in one notebook can be affected by another notebook.
Note You can protect the integrity of your workspace by specifying the clear command
as the first autoinit cell in the notebook.
Ensuring Data Consistency in MATLAB Notebooks
You can think of a MATLAB Notebook as a sequential record of a MATLAB session.

When executed in sequential order, the notebook accurately reflects the relationships
among the commands.
If, however, you edit input cells or output cells as you refine your notebook, it can contain
inconsistent data. Input cells that depend on the contents or the results of other cells do
not automatically recalculate when you make a change.
When working in a notebook, consider selecting Evaluate MATLAB Notebook

periodically to ensure that your notebook data is consistent. You can also use calc zones
to isolate related commands in a section of the notebook, and then use Evaluate Calc
Zone to execute only those input cells contained in the calc zone.
Debugging and MATLAB Notebooks
Do not use debugging functions or the Editor while evaluating cells within a MATLAB
Notebook. Instead, use this procedure:
1 Complete debugging files from within MATLAB.

2 Clear all the breakpoints.
3 Access the file using notebook.
If you debug while evaluating a notebook, you can experience problems with MATLAB.
Configuring the MATLAB Notebook Software

After you install MATLAB Notebook software, but before you begin using it, specify that
Word can use macros, and then configure the notebook command. The notebook
function installs as part of the MATLAB installation process on Microsoft Windows
platforms. For more information, see the MATLAB installation documentation.
23-50
See Also
Note Word explicitly asks whether you want to enable macros. If it does not, refer to the
Word help. You can search topics relating to macros, such as “enable or disable macros”.
To configure MATLAB Notebook software, type the following in the MATLAB Command
Window:
notebook -setup
MATLAB configures the Notebook software and issues these messages in the Command
Window:
Welcome to the utility for setting up the MATLAB Notebook

for interfacing MATLAB to Microsoft Word
Setup complete
When MATLAB configures the software, it:
1 Accesses the Microsoft Windows system registry to locate Microsoft Word and the
Word templates folder. It also identifies the version of Word.
2 Copies the m-book.dot template to the Word templates folder.
The MATLAB Notebook software supports Word versions 2002, 2003, 2007, and 2010.
After you configure the software, typing notebook in the MATLAB Command Window
starts Microsoft Word and creates a new MATLAB Notebook.
If you suspect a problem with the current configuration, you can explicitly reconfigure
the software by typing:
notebook -setup
See Also
More About
23-51
24
Coding and Productivity Tips
• “Open and Save Files” on page 24-2

• “Check Code for Errors and Warnings” on page 24-6
• “Improve Code Readability” on page 24-21
• “Find and Replace Text in Files” on page 24-28
• “Go To Location in File” on page 24-33
• “Display Two Parts of a File Simultaneously” on page 24-38
• “Add Reminders to Files” on page 24-41
• “MATLAB Code Analyzer Report” on page 24-44
24 Coding and Productivity Tips
Open and Save Files

In this section...
“Open Existing Files” on page 24-2
“Save Files” on page 24-3
Open Existing Files

To open an existing file or files in the Editor, choose the option that achieves your goals,
as described in this table.
Goal Steps Additional Information
Open with associated On the Editor, Live Editor, or Home For example, this option
tool opens a file with a .m or .mlx
tab, in the File section, click . extension in the Editor and
Open a file using the loads a MAT-file into the
appropriate MATLAB tool Workspace browser.
for the file type.
Open as text file On the Editor tab, in the File section, This is useful, for example, if
click Open , and select Open as Text. you have imported a tab-
Open a file in the Editor as delimited data file (.dat)
a text file, even if the file into the workspace and you
type is associated with find you want to add a data
another application or tool. point. Open the file as text in
the Editor, make your
addition, and then save the
file.
Open function from Position the cursor on the name within You also can use this method
within file the open file, and then right-click and to open a variable or
select Open file-name from the Simulink model.
Open a local function or context menu.
function file from within a For details, see “Open a File
file in the Editor. or Variable from Within a
File” on page 24-37.
24-2
Open and Save Files
Goal Steps Additional Information

Reopen file At the bottom of the Open drop-down To change the number of files
list, select a file under Recent Files.
Reopen a recently used file. on the list, click
Preferences, and then select
MATLAB and Editor/
Debugger. Under Most
recently used file list,
change the value for
Number of entries.
Reopen files at startup On the Home tab, in the None.
At startup, automatically Environment section, click

open the files that were Preferences and select MATLAB and
open when the previous Editor/Debugger. Then, select On
MATLAB session ended. restart reopen files from previous
MATLAB session.
Open file displaying in Drag the file from the other tool into For example, drag files from
another tool the Editor. the Current Folder browser
or from Windows Explorer.
Open a file name displaying
in another MATLAB
desktop tool or Microsoft
tool.
Open file using a Use the edit or open function. For example, type the
function following to open collatz.m:
edit collatz.m
If collatz.m is not on the

search path or in the current
folder, use the relative or
absolute path for the file.
For special considerations on the Macintosh platform, see “Navigating Within the
MATLAB Root Folder on Macintosh Platforms”.
Save Files
24-3
After you modify a file in the Editor, an asterisk (*) follows the file name. This asterisk
indicates that there are unsaved changes to the file.
You can perform four different types of save operations, which have various effects, as
described in this table.
Save Option Steps
Save file to disk and keep file open in the On the Editor or Live Editor tab, in the
Editor.
File section, click .
Rename file, save it to disk, and make it 1 On the Editor or Live Editor tab, in the
the active Editor document. Original file File section, click Save and select Save
remains unchanged on disk. As.
2 Specify a new name, type, or both for the
file, and then click Save.
Save file to disk under new name. 1 On the Editor tab, in the File section,
Original file remains open and unsaved. click Save and select Save Copy As.
MATLAB opens the Select File for

Backup dialog box.
2 Specify a name and type for the backup
file, and then click Save.
Save changes to all open files using On the Editor tab, in the File section, click
current file names. Save and select Save All.
All files remain open.
Recommendations on Saving Files
MathWorks recommends that you save files you create and files from MathWorks that
you edit to a folder that is not in the matlabroot/toolbox folder tree, where
matlabroot is the folder returned when you type matlabroot in the Command
Window. If you keep your files in matlabroot/toolbox folders, they can be overwritten
when you install a new version of MATLAB software.
At the beginning of each MATLAB session, MATLAB loads and caches in memory the
locations of files in the matlabroot/toolbox folder tree. Therefore, if you:
• Save files to matlabroot/toolbox folders using an external editor, run rehash

toolbox before you use the files in the current session.
24-4
Open and Save Files
• Add or remove files from matlabroot/toolbox folders using file system operations,
run rehash toolbox before you use the files in the current session.
• Modify existing files in matlabroot/toolbox folders using an external editor, run
clear function-name before you use these files in the current session.
For more information, see rehash or “Toolbox Path Caching in MATLAB”.
Backing Up Files
When you modify a file in the Editor, the Editor saves a copy of the file using the same
file name but with an .asv extension every 5 minutes. The backup version is useful if
you have system problems and lose changes you made to your file. In that event, you can
open the backup version, filename.asv, and then save it as filename.m to use the last
good version of filename.
Note The Editor does not save backup copies of live scripts.
To select preferences, click Preferences, and then select MATLAB > Editor/
Debugger > Backup Files on the Home tab, in the Environment section. You can
then:
• Turn the backup feature on or off.

• Automatically delete backup files when you close the corresponding source file.
By default, MATLAB automatically deletes backup files when you close the Editor. It
is best to keep backup-to-file relationships clear and current. Therefore, when you
rename or remove a file, consider deleting or renaming the corresponding backup file.
• Specify the number of minutes between backup saves.
• Specify the file extension for backup files.
• Specify a location for backup files
If you edit a file in a read-only folder and the back up Location preference is Source
file directories, then the Editor does not create a backup copy of the file.
24-5
Check Code for Errors and Warnings

MATLAB Code Analyzer can automatically check your code for coding problems.
In this section...
“Automatically Check Code in the Editor — Code Analyzer” on page 24-6
“Create a Code Analyzer Message Report” on page 24-11
“Adjust Code Analyzer Message Indicators and Messages” on page 24-11
“Understand Code Containing Suppressed Messages” on page 24-15
“Understand the Limitations of Code Analysis” on page 24-16
“Enable MATLAB Compiler Deployment Messages” on page 24-19
Automatically Check Code in the Editor — Code Analyzer

You can view warning and error messages about your code, and modify your file based on
the messages. The messages update automatically and continuously so you can see if
your changes addressed the issues noted in the messages. Some messages offer
additional information, automatic code correction, or both.
Enable Continuous Code Checking
To enable continuous code checking in a MATLAB code file in the Editor:
1
2 Select MATLAB > Code Analyzer, and then select the Enable integrated
warning and error messages check box.
3 Set the Underlining option to Underline warnings and errors, and then click
OK.
Note Preference changes do not apply in live scripts. Continuous code checking is always
enabled.
Use Continuous Code Checking
You can use continuous code checking in MATLAB code files in the Editor:
24-6
1 Open a MATLAB code file in the Editor. This example uses the sample file
lengthofline.m that ships with the MATLAB software:
a Open the example file:
open(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_env',...
'examples','lengthofline.m'))
b Save the example file to a folder to which you have write access. For the
example, lengthofline.m is saved to C:\my_MATLAB_files.
2 Examine the message indicator at the top of the message bar to see the Code
Analyzer messages reported for the file:
• Red indicates that syntax errors were detected. Another way to detect some of
these errors is using syntax highlighting to identify unterminated character
vectors, and delimiter matching to identify unmatched keywords, parentheses,
braces, and brackets.
• Orange indicates warnings or opportunities for improvement, but no errors, were
detected.
• Green indicates no errors, warnings, or opportunities for improvement were
detected.
In this example, the indicator is red, meaning that there is at least one error in the
file.
24-7
3 Click the message indicator to go to the next code fragment containing a message.
The next code fragment is relative to the current cursor position, viewable in the
status bar.
In the lengthofline example, the first message is at line 21. The cursor moves to
the beginning of line 21.
The code fragment for which there is a message is underlined in either red for errors
or orange for warnings and improvement opportunities.
4 View the message by moving the mouse pointer within the underlined code
fragment.
The message opens in a tooltip and contains a Details button that provides access to
additional information by extending the message. Not all messages have additional
information.
5 Click the Details button.
The window expands to display an explanation and user action.

6 Modify your code, if needed.
The message indicator and underlining automatically update to reflect changes you
make, even if you do not save the file.
7 On line 27, hover over prod.
The code is underlined because there is a warning message, and it is highlighted

because an automatic fix is available. When you view the message, it provides a
button to apply the automatic fix.
24-8
8 Fix the problem by doing one of the following:
• If you know what the fix is (from previous experience), click Fix.
• If you are unfamiliar with the fix, view, and then apply it as follows:
a Right-click the highlighted code (for a single-button mouse, press Ctrl+

click), and then view the first item in the context menu.
b Click the fix.
MATLAB automatically corrects the code.
In this example, MATLAB replaces prod(size(hline)) with

numel(hline).
9 Go to a different message by doing one of the following:
• To go to the next message, click the message indicator or the next underlined
code fragment.
• To go to a line that a marker represents, click a red or orange line in the indicator
bar.
To see the first error in lengthofline, click the first red marker in the message
bar. The cursor moves to the first suspect code fragment in line 47. The Details
and Fix buttons are dimmed, indicating that there is no more information about
this message and there is no automatic fix.
24-9
Multiple messages can represent a single problem or multiple problems.

Addressing one might address all of them, or after addressing one, the other
messages might change or what you need to do might become clearer.
10 Modify the code to address the problem noted in the message—the message
indicators update automatically.
The message suggests a delimiter imbalance on line 47. You can investigate that as
follows:
a
b Select MATLAB > Keyboard.
c Under Delimiter Matching, select Match on arrow key, and then click OK.
d In the Editor, move the arrow key over each of the delimiters to see if MATLAB
indicates a mismatch.
In the example, it might appear that there are no mismatched delimiters.

However, code analysis detects the semicolon in parentheses: data{3}(;), and
interprets it as the end of a statement. The message reports that the two
statements on line 47 each have a delimiter imbalance.
e In line 47, change data{3}(;) to data{3}(:).
Now, the underline no longer appears in line 47. The single change addresses
the issues in both of the messages for line 47.
Because the change removed the only error in the file, the message indicator at
the top of the bar changes from red to orange, indicating that only warnings and
potential improvements remain.
24-10
After modifying the code to address all the messages, or disabling designated messages,
the message indicator becomes green. The example file with all messages addressed has
been saved as lengthofline2.m. Open the corrected example file with the command:
open(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc',...
'matlab_env', 'examples','lengthofline2.m'))
Create a Code Analyzer Message Report

You can create a report of messages for an individual file, or for all files in a folder using
one of these methods:
• Run a report for an individual MATLAB code file:
1 On the Editor window, click and select Show Code Analyzer Report.
A Code Analyzer Report appears in the MATLAB Web Browser.

2 Modify your file based on the messages in the report.
3 Save the file.
4 Rerun the report to see if your changes addressed the issues noted in the
messages.
• Run a report for all files in a folder:
1 On the Current Folder browser, click .

2 Select Reports > Code Analyzer Report.
3 Modify your files based on the messages in the report.
For details, see “MATLAB Code Analyzer Report” on page 24-44.

4 Save the modified file(s).
5 Rerun the report to see if your changes addressed the issues noted in the
messages.
Adjust Code Analyzer Message Indicators and Messages

Depending on the stage at which you are in completing a MATLAB file, you might want
to restrict the code underlining. You can do this by using the Code Analyzer preference
referred to in step 1, in “Check Code for Errors and Warnings” on page 24-6. For
24-11
example, when first coding, you might prefer to underline only errors because warnings
would be distracting.
Code analysis does not provide perfect information about every situation and sometimes,
you might not want to change the code based on a message. If you do not want to change
the code, and you do not want to see the indicator and message for that line, suppress
them. For the lengthofline example, in line 49, the first message is Terminate
statement with semicolon to suppress output (in functions). Adding a
semicolon to the end of a statement suppresses output and is a common practice. Code
analysis alerts you to lines that produce output, but lack the terminating semicolon. If
you want to view output from line 49, do not add the semicolon as the message suggests.
There are a few different ways to suppress (turn off) the indicators for warning and error
messages:
• “Suppress an Instance of a Message in the Current File” on page 24-12

• “Suppress All Instances of a Message in the Current File” on page 24-13
• “Suppress All Instances of a Message in All Files” on page 24-14
• “Save and Reuse Code Analyzer Message Settings” on page 24-14
You cannot suppress error messages such as syntax errors. Therefore, instructions on
suppressing messages do not apply to those types of messages.
Note Code Analyzer Message preference changes do not apply in live scripts. All Code
Analyzer messages are always enabled.
Suppress an Instance of a Message in the Current File
You can suppress a specific instance of a Code Analyzer message in the current file. For
example, using the code presented in “Check Code for Errors and Warnings” on page 24-
6 , follow these steps:
1 In line 49, right-click at the first underline (for a single-button mouse, press Ctrl
+click).
2 From the context menu, select Suppress 'Terminate statement with
semicolon...' > On This Line.
24-12
The comment %#ok<NOPRT> appears at the end of the line, which instructs
MATLAB not to check for a terminating semicolon at that line. The underline and
mark in the indicator bar for that message disappear.
3 If there are two messages on a line that you do not want to display, right-click
separately at each underline and select the appropriate entry from the context menu.
The %#ok syntax expands. For the example, in the code presented in “Check Code for
Errors and Warnings” on page 24-6, ignoring both messages for line 49 adds
%#ok<NBRAK,NOPRT>.
Even if Code Analyzer preferences are set to enable this message, the specific
instance of the message suppressed in this way does not appear because the %#ok
takes precedence over the preference setting. If you later decide you want to check
for a terminating semicolon at that line, delete %#ok<NOPRT> from the line.
Suppress All Instances of a Message in the Current File
You can suppress all instances of a specific Code Analyzer message in the current file.
For example, using the code presented in “Check Code for Errors and Warnings” on page
24-6, follow these steps:
+click).
semicolon...' > In This File.
The comment %#ok<*NOPRT> appears at the end of the line, which instructs MATLAB
not to check for a terminating semicolon throughout the file. All underlines and marks in
the message indicator bar that correspond to this message disappear.
If there are two messages on a line that you do not want to display anywhere in the
current file, right-click separately at each underline, and then select the appropriate
entry from the context menu. The %#ok syntax expands. For the example, in the code
presented in “Check Code for Errors and Warnings” on page 24-6, ignoring both
messages for line 49 adds %#ok<*NBRAK,*NOPRT>.
Even if Code Analyzer preferences are set to enable this message, the message does not
appear because the %#ok takes precedence over the preference setting. If you later decide
you want to check for a terminating semicolon in the file, delete %#ok<*NOPRT> from the
line.
24-13
Suppress All Instances of a Message in All Files
You can disable all instances of a Code Analyzer message in all files. For example, using
the code presented in “Check Code for Errors and Warnings” on page 24-6, follow these
steps:
+click).
semicolon...' > In All Files.
This modifies the Code Analyzer preference setting.
If you know which message or messages you want to suppress, you can disable them
directly using Code Analyzer preferences, as follows:
1
2 Select MATLAB > Code Analyzer.
3 Search the messages to find the ones you want to suppress.
4 Clear the check box associated with each message you want to suppress in all files.
5 Click OK.
Save and Reuse Code Analyzer Message Settings
You can specify that you want certain Code Analyzer messages enabled or disabled, and
then save those settings to a file. When you want to use a settings file with a particular
file, you select it from the Code Analyzer preferences pane. That setting file remains in
effect until you select another settings file. Typically, you change the settings file when
you have a subset of files for which you want to use a particular settings file.
Follow these steps:
1

3 Enable or disable specific messages, or categories of messages.
24-14
4 Click the Actions button , select Save as, and then save the settings to a txt
file.
5 Click OK.
You can reuse these settings for any MATLAB file, or provide the settings file to another
user.
To use the saved settings:
1

3 Use the Active Settings drop-down list to select Browse....
The Open dialog box appears.

4 Choose from any of your settings files.
The settings you choose are in effect for all MATLAB files until you select another
set of Code Analyzer settings.
Understand Code Containing Suppressed Messages

If you receive code that contains suppressed messages, you might want to review those
messages without the need to unsuppress them first. A message might be in a
suppressed state for any of the following reasons:
• One or more %#ok<message-ID> directives are on a line of code that elicits a

message specified by <message-ID>.
• One or more %#ok<*message-ID> directives are in a file that elicits a message
specified by <message-ID>.
• It is cleared in the Code Analyzer preferences pane.
• It is disabled by default.
To determine the reasons why some messages are suppressed:
1 Search the file for the %#ok directive and create a list of all the message IDs
associated with that directive.
24-15
2

4 In the search field, type msgid: followed by one of the message IDs, if any, you
found in step 1.
The message list now contains only the message that corresponds to that ID. If the
message is a hyperlink, click it to see an explanation and suggested action for the
message. This can provide insight into why the message is suppressed or disabled.
The following image shows how the Preferences dialog box appears when you enter
msgid:CPROP in the search field.
5
Click the button to clear the search field, and then repeat step 4 for each message
ID you found in step 1.
6 Display messages that are disabled by default and disabled in the Preferences pane
by clicking the down arrow to the right of the search field. Then, click Show
Disabled Messages.
7 Review the message associated with each message ID to understand why it is
suppressed in the code or disabled in Preferences.
Understand the Limitations of Code Analysis

Code analysis is a valuable tool, but there are some limitations:
24-16
• Sometimes, it fails to produce Code Analyzer messages where you expect them.
By design, code analysis attempts to minimize the number of incorrect messages it

returns, even if this behavior allows some issues to go undetected.
• Sometimes, it produces messages that do not apply to your situation.
When provided with message, click the Detail button for additional information,
which can help you to make this determination. Error messages are almost always
problems. However, many warnings are suggestions to look at something in the code
that is unusual and therefore suspect, but might be correct in your case.
Suppress a warning message if you are certain that the message does not apply to
your situation. If your reason for suppressing a message is subtle or obscure, include a
comment giving the rationale. That way, those who read your code are aware of the
situation.
For details, see “Adjust Code Analyzer Message Indicators and Messages” on page 24-
11.
These sections describe code analysis limitations regarding the following:
• “Distinguish Function Names from Variable Names” on page 24-17

• “Distinguish Structures from Handle Objects” on page 24-18
• “Distinguish Built-In Functions from Overloaded Functions” on page 24-18
• “Determine the Size or Shape of Variables” on page 24-19
• “Analyze Class Definitions with Superclasses” on page 24-19
• “Analyze Class Methods” on page 24-19
Distinguish Function Names from Variable Names
Code analysis cannot always distinguish function names from variable names. For the
following code, if the Code Analyzer message is enabled, code analysis returns the
message, Code Analyzer cannot determine whether xyz is a variable or a
function, and assumes it is a function. Code analysis cannot make a
determination because xyz has no obvious value assigned to it. However, the program
might have placed the value in the workspace in a way that code analysis cannot detect.
function y=foo(x)
.
.
24-17
.
y = xyz(x);
end
For example, in the following code, xyz can be a function, or can be a variable loaded
from the MAT-file. Code analysis has no way of making a determination.
function y=foo(x)
load abc.mat
y = xyz(x);
end
Variables might also be undetected by code analysis when you use the eval, evalc,
evalin, or assignin functions.
If code analysis mistakes a variable for a function, do one of the following:
• Initialize the variable so that code analysis does not treat it as a function.
• For the load function, specify the variable name explicitly in the load command line.
For example:
function y=foo(x)
load abc.mat xyz
y = xyz(x);
end
Distinguish Structures from Handle Objects
Code analysis cannot always distinguish structures from handle objects. In the following
code, if x is a structure, you might expect a Code Analyzer message indicating that the
code never uses the updated value of the structure. If x is a handle object, however, then
this code can be correct.
function foo(x)
x.a = 3;
end
Code analysis cannot determine whether x is a structure or a handle object. To minimize

the number of incorrect messages, code analysis returns no message for the previous
code, even though it might contain a subtle and serious bug.
Distinguish Built-In Functions from Overloaded Functions
If some built-in functions are overloaded in a class or on the path, Code Analyzer
messages might apply to the built-in function, but not to the overloaded function you are
24-18
calling. In this case, suppress the message on the line where it appears or suppress it for
the entire file.
For information on suppressing messages, see “Adjust Code Analyzer Message Indicators
and Messages” on page 24-11.
Determine the Size or Shape of Variables
Code analysis has a limited ability to determine the type of variables and the shape of
matrices. Code analysis might produce messages that are appropriate for the most
common case, such as for vectors. However, these messages might be inappropriate for
less common cases, such as for matrices.
Analyze Class Definitions with Superclasses
Code Analyzer has limited capabilities to check class definitions with superclasses. For
example, Code Analyzer cannot always determine if the class is a handle class, but it can
sometimes validate custom attributes used in a class if the attributes are inherited from
a superclass. When analyzing class definitions, Code Analyzer tries to use information
from the superclasses but often cannot get enough information to make a certain
determination.
Analyze Class Methods
Most class methods must contain at least one argument that is an object of the same
class as the method. But it does not always have to be the first argument. When it is,
code analysis can determine that an argument is an object of the class you are defining,
and it can do various checks. For example, it can check that the property and method
names exist and are spelled correctly. However, when code analysis cannot determine
that an object is an argument of the class you are defining, then it cannot provide these
checks.
Enable MATLAB Compiler Deployment Messages

You can switch between showing or hiding Compiler deployment messages when you
work on a file. Change the Code Analyzer preference for this message category. Your
choice likely depends on whether you are working on a file to be deployed. When you
change the preference, it also changes the setting in the Editor. The converse is also true
—when you change the setting from the Editor, it effectively changes this preference.
However, if the dialog box is open at the time you modify the setting in the Editor, you
will not see the changes reflected in the Preferences dialog box. Whether you change the
24-19
setting from the Editor or from the Preferences dialog box, it applies to the Editor and to
the Code Analyzer Report.
To enable MATLAB Compiler™ deployment messages:
1

3 Click the down arrow next to the search field, and then select Show Messages in
Category > MATLAB Compiler (Deployment) Messages.
4 Click the Enable Category button.
5 Clear individual messages that you do not want to display for your code (if any).
6 Decide if you want to save these settings, so you can reuse them next time you work
on a file to be deployed.
The settings txt file, which you can create as described in “Save and Reuse Code
Analyzer Message Settings” on page 24-14, includes the status of this setting.
24-20
Improve Code Readability

In this section...
“Indenting Code” on page 24-21
“Right-Side Text Limit Indicator” on page 24-23
“Code Folding — Expand and Collapse Code Constructs” on page 24-23
Indenting Code
Indenting code makes reading statements such as while loops easier. To set and apply
indenting preferences to code in the Editor:
1

2 Select MATLAB > Editor/Debugger > Language.
3 Choose a computer language from the Language drop-down list.
4 In the Indenting section, select or clear Apply smart indenting while typing,
depending on whether you want indenting applied automatically, as you type.
If you clear this option, you can manually apply indenting by selecting the lines in
the Editor to indent, right-clicking, and then selecting Smart Indent from the
context menu.
5 Do one of the following:
• If you chose any language other than MATLAB in step 2, click OK.
• If you chose MATLAB in step 2, select a Function indenting format, and then
click OK. Function indent formats are:
• Classic — The Editor aligns the function code with the function declaration.
• Indent nested functions — The Editor indents the function code within a
nested function.
• Indent all functions — The Editor indents the function code for both
main and nested functions.
This image illustrates the function indenting formats.
24-21
Note Indenting preferences are not supported for MATLAB live scripts, TLC, VHDL, or
Verilog.
Regardless of whether you apply indenting automatically or manually, you can move
selected lines further to the left or right, by doing one of the following:
•
On the Editor tab, in the Edit section, click , , or . In live scripts, this
functionality is available on the Live Editor tab, in the Format section.
• Pressing the Tab key or the Shift+Tab key, respectively.
This works differently if you select the Editor/Debugger Tab preference for Emacs-
style Tab key smart indenting—when you position the cursor in any line or select
a group of lines and press Tab, the lines indent according to smart indenting
practices.
24-22
Right-Side Text Limit Indicator

By default, a light gray vertical line (rule) appears at column 75 in the Editor, indicating
where a line exceeds 75 characters. You can set this text limit indicator to another value,
which is useful, for example, if you want to view the code in another text editor that has
a different line width limit. The right-side text limit indicator is not supported in live
scripts.
To hide, or change the appearance of the vertical line:
1

2 Select MATLAB > Editor/Debugger > Display.
3 Adjust the settings in the Right-hand text limit section.
Note This limit is a visual cue only and does not prevent text from exceeding the limit.
To wrap comment text at a specified column number automatically, adjust the settings in
the Comment formatting section under MATLAB > Editor/Debugger > Language
in the Preferences dialog box.
Code Folding — Expand and Collapse Code Constructs

Code folding is the ability to expand and collapse certain MATLAB programming
constructs. This improves readability when a file contains numerous functions or other
blocks of code that you want to hide when you are not currently working with that part of
the file. MATLAB programming constructs include:
• Code sections for running and publishing code

• Class code
• for and parfor blocks
• Function and class help
• Function code
To see the entire list of constructs, select Editor/Debugger > Code Folding in the
Preferences dialog box.
24-23
To expand or collapse code, click the plus or minus sign that appears to the left of
the construct in the Editor. You can also press Ctrl+Shift+. (period) or Ctrl+.
(period).
To expand or collapse all of the code in a file, place your cursor anywhere within the file,
right-click, and then select Code Folding > Expand All or Code Folding > Fold All
from the context menu. You can also press Ctrl+Shift+= or Ctrl+=.
Note Code folding is not supported in live scripts.
View Folded Code in a Tooltip
You can view code that is currently folded by positioning the pointer over its ellipsis .
The code appears in a tooltip.
The following image shows the tooltip that appears when you place the pointer over the
ellipsis on line 23 of lenghtofline.m when a for loop is folded.
Print Files with Collapsed Code
If you print a file with one or more collapsed constructs, those constructs are expanded in
the printed version of the file.
Code Folding Behavior for Functions that Have No Explicit End Statement
If you enable code folding for functions and a function in your code does not end with an
explicit end statement, you see the following behavior:
• If a line containing only comments appears at the end of such a function, then the
Editor does not include that line when folding the function. MATLAB does not include
24-24
trailing white space and comments in a function definition that has no explicit end
statement.
“Code Folding Enabled for Function Code Only” on page 24-25 illustrates this
behavior. Line 13 is excluded from the fold for the foo function.
• If a fold for a code section overlaps the function code, then the Editor does not show
the fold for the overlapping section.
The three figures that follow illustrate this behavior. The first two figures, “Code
Folding Enabled for Function Code Only” on page 24-25 and “Code Folding Enabled
for Sections Only” on page 24-26 illustrate how the code folding appears when you
enable it for function code only and then section only, respectively. The last figure,
“Code Folding Enabled for Both Functions and Sections” on page 24-27, illustrates
the effects when code folding is enabled for both. Because the fold for section 3 (lines
11–13) overlaps the fold for function foo (lines 4–12), the Editor does not display the
fold for section 3.
Code Folding Enabled for Function Code Only
24-25
Code Folding Enabled for Sections Only
24-26
Code Folding Enabled for Both Functions and Sections
24-27
Find and Replace Text in Files

In this section...
“Find Any Text in the Current File” on page 24-28
“Find and Replace Functions or Variables in the Current File” on page 24-28
“Automatically Rename All Functions or Variables in a File” on page 24-30
“Find and Replace Any Text” on page 24-32
“Find Text in Multiple File Names or Files” on page 24-32
“Function Alternative for Finding Text” on page 24-32
“Perform an Incremental Search in the Editor” on page 24-32
Find Any Text in the Current File

You can search for text in your files using the Find & Replace tool.
1 Within the current file, select the text you want to find.
2
On the Editor or Live Editor tab, in the Navigate section, click Find , and
then select Find....
A Find & Replace dialog box opens.

3 Click Find Next to continue finding more occurrences of the text.
To find the previous occurrence of selected text (find backwards) in the current file, click
Find Previous on the Find & Replace dialog box.
Find and Replace Functions or Variables in the Current File

To search for references to a particular function or variable, use the automatic
highlighting feature for variables and functions. This feature is more efficient than using
the text finding tools. Function and variable highlighting indicates only references to a
particular function or variable, not other occurrences. For instance, it does not find
instances of the function or variable name in comments. Furthermore, variable
highlighting only includes references to the same variable. That is, if two variables use
the same name, but are in different scopes on page 20-11, highlighting one does not cause
the other to highlight.
24-28
To enable automatic highlighting:
1

2 Select MATLAB > Colors > Programming Tools.
3 Under Variable and function colors, select Automatically highlight, deselect
Variables with shared scope, and then click Apply.
4 In a file open in the Editor, click an instance of the variable you want to find
throughout the file.
MATLAB indicates all occurrences of that variable within the file by:
• Highlighting them in teal blue (by default) throughout the file

• Adding a marker for each in the indicator bar
If a code analyzer indicator and a variable indicator appear on the same line in a
file, the marker for the variable takes precedence.
5 Hover over a marker in the indicator bar to see the line it represents.
6 Click a marker in the indicator bar to navigate to that occurrence of the variable.
Replace an instance of a function or variable by editing the occurrence at a line to

which you have navigated.
The following image shows an example of how the Editor looks with variable highlighting
enabled. In this image, the variable i appears highlighted in sky blue, and the indicator
bar contains three variable markers.
24-29
Automatically Rename All Functions or Variables in a File

To help prevent typographical errors, MATLAB provides a feature that helps rename
multiple references to a function or variable within a file when you manually change any
of the following:
Function or Variable Renamed Example
Function name in a function declaration Rename foo in:
function foo(m)
Input or output variable name in a function Rename y or m in:
declaration
function y = foo(m)
Variable name on the left side of Rename y in:
assignment statement
y = 1
As you rename such a function or variable, a tooltip opens if there is more than one
reference to that variable or function in the file. The tooltip indicates that MATLAB will
rename all instances of the function or variable in the file when you press Shift + Enter.
24-30
Typically, multiple references to a function appear when you use nested functions or local
functions.
Note MATLAB does not prompt you when you change:
• The name of a global variable.

• The function input and output arguments, varargin and varargout.
To undo automatic name changes, click once.
By default, this feature is enabled. To disable it:
1

2 Select MATLAB > Editor/Debugger > Language.
3 In the Language field, select MATLAB.
24-31
4 Clear Enable automatic variable and function renaming.
Find and Replace Any Text

You can search for, and optionally replace specified text within a file. On the Editor or
Live Editor tab, in the Navigate section, click Find to open and use the Find &
Replace dialog box.
Find Text in Multiple File Names or Files

You can find folders and file names that include specified text, or whose contents contain
specified text. On the Editor or Live Editor tab, in the File section, click Find
Files to open the Find Files dialog box. For details, see “Find Files and Folders”.
Function Alternative for Finding Text

Use lookfor to search for the specified text in the first line of help for all files with
the .m extension on the search path.
Perform an Incremental Search in the Editor

When you perform an incremental search, the cursor moves to the next or previous
occurrence of the specified text in the current file. It is similar to the Emacs search
feature. In the Editor, incremental search uses the same controls as incremental search
in the Command Window. For details, see “Search Using Keyboard Shortcuts”.
24-32
Go To Location in File
In this section...
“Navigate to a Specific Location” on page 24-33
“Set Bookmarks” on page 24-35
“Navigate Backward and Forward in Files” on page 24-36
“Open a File or Variable from Within a File” on page 24-37
Navigate to a Specific Location

This table summarizes the steps for navigating to a specific location within a file open in
the Editor. In some cases, different sets of steps are available for navigating to a
particular location. Choose the set that works best with your workflow.
Go To Steps Notes
Line Number 1 On the Editor or Live Editor None
tab, in the Navigate section, click
Go To
2 Select Go to Line...
3 Specify the line to which you want
to navigate.
1 On the Editor tab, in the Includes local functions and nested
functions
Navigate section, click Go
To . For both class and function files, the
Function 2 Under the heading Function, functions list in alphabetical order—
definition select the local function or nested except that in function files, the name
function to which you want to of the main function always appears at
navigate. the top of the list.
Not supported in live scripts.
24-33
Go To Steps Notes
1 In the Current Folder browser, Functions list in order of appearance
click the name of the file open in within your file.
the Editor.
2 Click the up arrow at the
bottom of Current Folder browser
to open the detail panel.
3 In the detail panel, double-click
the function icon

corresponding to the title of the
function or local function to which
you want to navigate.
1 On the Editor tab, in the
Navigate section, click Go

To .
2 Under Sections, select the title of
the code section to which you
want to navigate.
1 For more information, see “Divide
In the Current Folder browser,
Your File into Code Sections” on page
click the name of the file that is
Code Section 18-7
open in the Editor.
2 Click the up arrow at the Not supported in live scripts.
the section icon corresponding

to the title of the section to which
you want to navigate.
24-34
Go To Steps Notes
Property 1 In the Current Folder browser, For more information, see “Ways to
click the name of the file that is Use Properties”
open in the Editor.
3 On the detail panel, double-click
the property icon

corresponding to the name of the
property to which you want to
navigate.
Method 1 In the Current Folder browser, For more information, see “Methods in
click the name of the file that is Class Design”
open in the Editor.
the icon corresponding to the

name of the method to which you
want to navigate.
Bookmark 1 On the Editor tab, in the For information on setting and
clearing bookmarks, see “Set
Navigate section, click Go Bookmarks” on page 24-35.
To .
2 Under Bookmarks, select the Not supported in live scripts.
bookmark to which you want to
navigate.
Set Bookmarks
You can set a bookmark at any line in a file in the Editor so you can quickly navigate to
the bookmarked line. This is particularly useful in long files. For example, suppose while
working on a line, you want to look at another part of the file, and then return. Set a
24-35
bookmark at the current line, go to the other part of the file, and then use the bookmark
to return.
Bookmarks are not supported in live scripts.
To set a bookmark:
1 Position the cursor anywhere on the line.

2
On the Editor tab, in the Navigate section, click Go To .
3 Under Bookmarks, select Set/Clear
A bookmark icon appears to the left of the line.
To clear a bookmark, position the cursor anywhere on the line. Click Go To and
select Set/Clear under Bookmarks.
MATLAB does not maintain bookmarks after you close a file.
Navigate Backward and Forward in Files

To access lines in a file in the same sequence that you previously navigated or edited
them, use and .
Backward and forward navigation is not supported in live scripts.
Interrupting the Sequence of Go Back and Go Forward
The back and forward sequence is interrupted if you:
1
Click .
2
Click .
3 Edit a line or navigate to another line using the list of features described in
“Navigate to a Specific Location” on page 24-33.
You can still go to the lines preceding the interruption point in the sequence, but you
cannot go to any lines after that point. Any lines you edit or navigate to after
interrupting the sequence are added to the sequence after the interruption point.
24-36
For example:
1 Open a file.
2 Edit line 2, line 4, and line 6.
3
Click to return to line 4, and then to return to line 2.
4
Click to return to lines 4 and 6.
5
Click to return to line 1.
6 Edit at 3.
This interrupts the sequence. You can no longer use to return to lines 4 and 6.
You can, however, click to return to line 1.
Open a File or Variable from Within a File

You can open a function, file, variable, or Simulink model from within a file in the Editor.
Position the cursor on the name, and then right-click and select Open selection from the
context menu. Based on what the selection is, the Editor performs a different action, as
described in this table.
Item Action
Local function Navigates to the local function within the current file, if that
file is a MATLAB code file. If no function by that name exists
in the current file, the Editor runs the open function on the
selection, which opens the selection in the appropriate tool.
Text file Opens in the Editor.
Figure file (.fig) Opens in a figure window.
MATLAB variable that is Opens in the Variables Editor.
in the current workspace
Model Opens in Simulink.
Other If the selection is some other type, Open selection looks for a
matching file in a private folder in the current folder and
performs the appropriate action.
24-37
Display Two Parts of a File Simultaneously

You can simultaneously display two different parts of a file in the Editor by splitting the
screen display, as shown in the image that follows. This feature makes it easy to compare
different lines in a file or to copy and paste from one part of a file to another.
Displaying two parts of a file simultaneously is not supported in live scripts.
The following table describes the various ways you can split the Editor and manipulate
the split-screen views. When you open a document, it opens unsplit, regardless of its split
status it had when you closed it.
Split the screen Do either of the following:
horizontally.
• Right-click and, select Split Screen > Top/Bottom from
the Context Menu.
• If there is a vertical scroll bar, as shown in the
illustration that follows, drag the splitter bar down.
24-38
Display Two Parts of a File Simultaneously
Split the screen vertically. Do either of the following:
• From the Context Menu, select Split Screen > Left/

Right.
• If there is a horizontal scroll bar, as shown in the
illustration that follows, drag the splitter bar from the
left of the scroll bar.
Specify the active view. Do either of the following:
• From the Context Menu, select Split Screen > Switch

Focus.
• Click in the view you want to make active.
Updates you make to the document in the active view are

also visible in the other view.
Remove the splitter Do one of the following:
• Double-click the splitter.

• From the Context Menu, Split Screen > Off.
24-39
See Also
More About
• “Document Layout”
24-40
Add Reminders to Files

Annotating a file makes it easier to find areas of your code that you intend to improve,
complete, or update later.
To annotate a file, add comments with the text TODO, FIXME, or any text of your
choosing.
After you annotate several files, run the TODO/FIXME Report, to identify all the
MATLAB code files within a given folder that you have annotated.
This sample TODO/FIXME Report shows a file containing the text TODO, FIXME, and
NOTE. The search is case insensitive.
Working with TODO/FIXME Reports

1 Use the Current Folder browser to navigate to the folder containing the files for
which you want to produce a TODO/FIXME report.
Note You cannot run reports when the path is a UNC (Universal Naming
Convention) path; that is, a path that starts with \\. Instead, use an actual hard
drive on your system, or a mapped network drive.
2 On the Current Folder browser, click , and then select Reports > TODO/FIXME
Report.
The TODO/FIXME Report opens in the MATLAB Web Browser.

3 In the TODO/FIXME Report window, select one or more of the following to specify
the lines that you want the report to include:
24-41
• TODO
• FIXME
• The text field check box
You can then enter any text in this field, including a regular expression on page
2-41. For example, you can enter NOTE, tbd, or re.*check.
4 Run the report on the files in the current folder, by clicking Rerun This Report.
The window refreshes and lists all lines in the MATLAB files within the specified
folder that contain the text you selected in step 1. Matches are not case sensitive.
If you want to run the report on a folder other than the one currently specified in the
report window, change the current folder. Then, click Run Report on Current
Folder.
To open a file in the Editor at a specific line, click the line number in the report. Then
you can change the file, as needed.
Suppose you have a file, area.m, in the current folder. The code for area.m appears in
the image that follows.
When you run the TODO/FIXME report on the folder containing area.m, with the text
TODO and FIXME selected and the text NOTE specified and selected, the report lists:
9 and rectangle. (todo)
14 Fixme: Is the area of hemisphere as below?
24-42
17 fIXME
21 NOTE: Find out from the manager if we need to include
Notice the report includes the following:
• Line 9 as a match for the text TODO. The report includes lines that have the selected
text regardless of its placement within a comment.
• Lines 14 and 17 as a match for the text FIXME. The report matches selected text in
the file regardless of their casing.
• Line 21 as a match for the text NOTE. The report includes lines that have text as
specified in the text field, assuming that you select the text field.
24-43
MATLAB Code Analyzer Report

In this section...
“Running the Code Analyzer Report” on page 24-44
“Changing Code Based on Code Analyzer Messages” on page 24-46
“Other Ways to Access Code Analyzer Messages” on page 24-46
Running the Code Analyzer Report

The Code Analyzer Report displays potential errors and problems, as well as
opportunities for improvement in your code through messages. For example, a common
message indicates that a variable foo might be unused.
To run the Code Analyzer Report:
1 In the Current Folder browser, navigate to the folder that contains the files you want
to check. To use the example shown in this documentation, lengthofline.m, you
can change the current folder by running
cd(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_env','examples'))
2 If you plan to modify the example, save the file to a folder for which you have write
access. Then, make that folder the current MATLAB folder. This example saves the
file in C:\my_MATLAB_files.
3 In the Current Folder browser, click , and then select Reports > Code Analyzer
Report.
The report displays in the MATLAB Web Browser, showing those files identified as
having potential problems or opportunities for improvement.
24-44
4 For each message in the report, review the suggestion and your code. Click the line
number to open the file in the Editor at that line, and change the file based on the
message. Use the following general advice:
• If you are unsure what a message means or what to change in the code, click the
link in the message if one appears. For details, see “Check Code for Errors and
Warnings” on page 24-6.
• If the message does not contain a link, and you are unsure what a message means
or what to do, search for related topics in the Help browser. For examples of
messages and what to do about them, including specific changes to make for the
example, lengthofline.m, see “Changing Code Based on Code Analyzer
Messages” on page 24-46.
• The messages do not provide perfect information about every situation and in
some cases, you might not want to change anything based on the message. For
details, see “Understand the Limitations of Code Analysis” on page 24-16.
• If there are certain messages or types of messages you do not want to see, you can
suppress them. For details, see “Adjust Code Analyzer Message Indicators and
Messages” on page 24-11.
5 After modifying the file, save it. Consider saving the file to a different name if you
made significant changes that might introduce errors. Then you can refer to the
24-45
original file, if needed, to resolve problems with the updated file. Use the
Compare button on the Editor or Live Editor tab to help you identify the changes
you made to the file. For more information, see “Comparing Text and Live Scripts”.
6 Run and debug the file or files again to be sure that you have not introduced any
inadvertent errors.
7 If the report is displaying, click Rerun This Report to update the report based on
the changes you made to the file. Ensure that the messages are gone, based on the
changes you made to the files.
Changing Code Based on Code Analyzer Messages

For information on how to correct the potential problems presented in Code Analyzer
messages, use the following resources:
• Open the file in the Editor and click the Details button in the tooltip, as shown in the
image following this list. An extended message opens. However, not all messages have
extended messages.
• Use the Help browser Search pane to find documentation about terms presented in
the messages.
The following image shows a tooltip with a Details button. The orange line under the
equals (=) sign indicates a tooltip displays if you hover over the equals sign. The orange
highlighting indicates that an automatic fix is available.
Other Ways to Access Code Analyzer Messages

You can get Code Analyzer messages using any of the following methods. Each provides
the same messages, but in a different format:
24-46
• Access the Code Analyzer Report for a file from the Profiler detail report.
• Run the checkcode function, which analyzes the specified file and displays messages
in the Command Window.
• Run the mlintrpt function, which runs checkcode and displays the messages in the
Web Browser.
• Use automatic code checking while you work on a file in the Editor. See
“Automatically Check Code in the Editor — Code Analyzer” on page 24-6.
24-47
25
Programming Utilities
• “Identify Program Dependencies” on page 25-2

• “Protect Your Source Code” on page 25-7
• “Create Hyperlinks that Run Functions” on page 25-10
• “Create and Share Toolboxes” on page 25-13
• “Manage Java Class Path for Toolboxes” on page 25-20
25 Programming Utilities
Identify Program Dependencies

If you need to know what other functions and scripts your program is dependent upon,
use one of the techniques described below.
In this section...
“Simple Display of Program File Dependencies” on page 25-2
“Detailed Display of Program File Dependencies” on page 25-2
“Dependencies Within a Folder” on page 25-3
Simple Display of Program File Dependencies

For a simple display of all program files referenced by a particular function, follow these
steps:
1 Type clear functions to clear all functions from memory (see Note below).
Note clear functions does not clear functions locked by mlock. If you have locked
functions (which you can check using inmem) unlock them with munlock, and then
repeat step 1.
2 Execute the function you want to check. Note that the function arguments you
choose to use in this step are important, because you can get different results when
calling the same function with different arguments.
3 Type inmem to display all program files that were used when the function ran. If you
want to see what MEX-files were used as well, specify an additional output:
[mfiles, mexfiles] = inmem
Detailed Display of Program File Dependencies

For a more detailed display of dependent function information, use the
matlab.codetools.requiredFilesAndProducts function. In addition to program
files, matlab.codetools.requiredFilesAndProducts shows which MathWorks
products a particular function depends on. If you have a function, myFun, that calls to the
edge function in the Image Processing Toolbox™:
[fList,pList] = matlab.codetools.requiredFilesAndProducts('myFun.m');
fList
25-2
fList =
'C:\work\myFun.m'
The only required program file, is the function file itself, myFun.
{pList.Name}'
ans =
'MATLAB'
'Image Processing Toolbox'
The file, myFun.m, requires both MATLAB and the Image Processing Toolbox.
Dependencies Within a Folder

The Dependency Report shows dependencies among MATLAB code files in a folder. Use
this report to determine:
• Which files in the folder are required by other files in the folder
• If any files in the current folder will fail if you delete a file
• If any called files are missing from the current folder
The report does not list:
• Files in the toolbox/matlab folder because every MATLAB user has those files.
Therefore, if you use a function file that shadows a built-in function file, MATLAB
excludes both files from the list.
• Files called from anonymous functions.
• The superclass for a class file.
• Files called from eval, evalc, run, load, function handles, and callbacks.
MATLAB does not resolve these files until run time, and therefore the Dependency
Report cannot discover them.
• Some method files.
The Dependency Report finds class constructors that you call in a MATLAB file.
However, any methods you execute on the resulting object are unknown to the report.
25-3
These methods can exist in the classdef file, as separate method files, or files
belonging to superclass or superclasses of a method file.
To provide meaningful results, the Dependency Report requires the following:
• The search path when you run the report is the same as when you run the files in the
folder. (That is, the current folder is at the top of the search path.)
• The files in the folder for which you are running the report do not change the search
path or otherwise manipulate it.
• The files in the folder do not load variables, or otherwise create name clashes that
result in different program elements with the same name.
Note Do not use the Dependency Report to determine which MATLAB code files someone
else needs to run a particular file. Instead use the
matlab.codetools.requiredFilesAndProducts function.
Creating Dependency Reports
1 Use the Current Folder pane to navigate to the folder containing the files for which
you want to produce a Dependency Report.
2 On the Current Folder pane, click , and then select Reports > Dependency
Report.
The Dependency Report opens in the MATLAB Web Browser.

3 If you want, select one or more options within the report, as follows:
• To see a list of all MATLAB code files (children) called by each file in the folder
(parent), select Show child functions.
The report indicates where each child function resides, for example, in a specified
toolbox. If the report specifies that the location of a child function is unknown, it
can be because:
25-4
• The child function is not on the search path.

• The child function is not in the current folder.
• The file was moved or deleted.
• To list the files that call each MATLAB code file, select Show parent functions.
The report limits the parent (calling) functions to functions in the current folder.
• To include local functions in the report, select Show subfunctions. The report
lists local functions directly after the main function and highlights them in gray.
4 Click Run Report on Current Folder.
Reading and Working with Dependency Reports
The following image shows a Dependency Report. It indicates that chirpy.m calls two
files in Signal Processing Toolbox™ and one in Image Processing Toolbox. It also shows
that go.m calls mobius.m, which is in the current folder.
The Dependency Report includes the following:
25-5
• MATLAB File List
The list of files in the folder on which you ran the Dependency Report. Click a link in
this column to open the file in the Editor.
• Children
The function or functions called by the MATLAB file.
Click a link in this column to open the MATLAB file listed in the same row, and go to
the first reference to the called function. For instance, suppose your Dependency
Report appears as shown in the previous image. Clicking \images\images\erode.m
opens chirpy.m and places the cursor at the first line that references erode. In other
words, it does not open erode.m.
• Multiple class methods
Because the report is a static analysis, it cannot determine run-time data types and,
therefore, cannot identify the particular class methods required by a file. If multiple
class methods match a referenced method, the Dependency Report inserts a question
mark link next to the file name. The question mark appears in the following image.
Click the question mark link to list the class methods with the specified name that
MATLAB might use. MATLAB lists almost all the method files on the search path
that match the specified method file (in this case, freqresp.m). Do not be concerned
if the list includes methods of classes and MATLAB built-in functions that are
unfamiliar to you.
It is not necessary for you to determine which file MATLAB will use. MATLAB
determines which method to use depending on the object that the program calls at
run time.
25-6
Protect Your Source Code

Although MATLAB source code (.m) is executable by itself, the contents of MATLAB
source files are easily accessed, revealing design and implementation details. If you do
not want to distribute your proprietary application code in this format, you can use one of
these options instead:
• Deploy as P-code on page 25-7 — Convert some or all of your source code files to a
content-obscured form called a P-code file (from its .p file extension), and distribute
your application code in this format. When MATLAB P-codes a file, the file is
obfuscated not encrypted. While the content in a .p file is difficult to understand, it
should not be considered secure. It is not recommended that you P-code files to protect
your intellectual property.
MATLAB does not support converting live scripts to P-code files.

• Compile into binary format on page 25-8 — Compile your source code files using the
MATLAB Compiler to produce a standalone application. Distribute the latter to end
users of your application.
Building a Content Obscured Format with P-Code

A P-code file behaves the same as the MATLAB source from which it was produced. The
P-code file also runs at the same speed as the source file. P-code files are purposely
obfuscated. They are not encrypted. While the content in a .p file is difficult to
understand, it should not be considered secure. It is not recommended that you P-code
files to protect your intellectual property.
Note Because users of P-code files cannot view the MATLAB code, consider providing
diagnostics to enable a user to proceed in the event of an error.
Building the P-Code File
To generate a P-code file, enter the following command in the MATLAB Command
Window:
pcode file1 file2, ...
The command produces the files, file1.p, file2.p, and so on. To convert all .m source
files residing in your current folder to P-code files, use the command:
25-7
pcode *.m
See the pcode function reference page for a description of all syntaxes for generating P-
code files.
Invoking the P-Code File
You invoke the resulting P-code file in the same way you invoke the MATLAB .m source
file from which it was derived. For example, to invoke file myfun.p, type
[out, out2, ...] = myfun(in1, in2, ...);
To invoke script myscript.p, type
myscript;
When you call a P-code file, MATLAB gives it execution precedence over its
corresponding .m source file. This is true even if you happen to change the source code at
some point after generating the P-code file. Remember to remove the .m source file before
distributing your code.
Running Older P-Code Files on Later Versions of MATLAB
P-code files are designed to be independent of the release under which they were created
and the release in which they are used (backward and forward compatibility). New and
deprecated MATLAB features can be a problem, but it is the same problem that would
exist if you used the original MATLAB input file. To fix errors of this kind in a P-code
file, fix the corresponding MATLAB input file and create a new P-code file.
P-code files built using MATLAB Version 7.4 and earlier have a different format than
those built with more recent versions of MATLAB. These older P-code files do not run in
MATLAB 8.6 (R2015b) or later. Rebuild any P-code files that were built with MATLAB
7.4 or earlier using a more recent version of MATLAB, and then redistribute them as
necessary.
Building a Standalone Executable

Another way to protect your source code is to build it into a standalone executable and
distribute the executable, along with any other necessary files, to external customers.
You must have the MATLAB Compiler and a supported C or C++ compiler installed to
prepare files for deployment. The end user, however, does not need MATLAB.
25-8
To build a standalone application for your MATLAB application, develop and debug your
application following the usual procedure for MATLAB program files. Then, generate the
executable file or files following the instructions in “Steps by the Developer to Deploy to
End Users” (MATLAB Compiler).
25-9
Create Hyperlinks that Run Functions

The special keyword matlab: lets you embed commands in other functions. Most
commonly, the functions that contain it display hyperlinks, which execute the commands
when you click the hyperlink text. Functions that support matlab: syntax include disp,
error, fprintf, help, and warning.
Use matlab: syntax to create a hyperlink in the Command Window that runs one or
more functions. For example, you can use disp to display the word Hypotenuse as an
executable hyperlink as follows:
disp('<a href="matlab:a=3; b=4;c=hypot(a,b)">Hypotenuse</a>')
Clicking the hyperlink executes the three commands following matlab:, resulting in
c =
5
Executing the link creates or redefines the variables a, b, and c in the base workspace.
The argument to disp is an <a href> HTML hyperlink. Include the full hypertext text,
from '<a href= to </a>' within a single line, that is, do not continue long text on a
new line. No spaces are allowed after the opening < and before the closing >. A single
space is required between a and href.
You cannot directly execute matlab: syntax. That is, if you type
matlab:a=3; b=4;c=hypot(a,b)
you receive an error, because MATLAB interprets the colon as an array operator in an
illegal context:
??? matlab:a=3; b=4;c=hypot(a,b)

|
Error: The expression to the left of the equals sign
is not a valid target for an assignment.
You do not need to use matlab: to display a live hyperlink to the Web. For example, if
you want to link to an external Web page, you can use disp, as follows:
disp('<a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hypotenuse">Hypotenuse</a>')
25-10
Create Hyperlinks that Run Functions
The result in the Command Window looks the same as the previous example, but instead
opens a page at en.wikipedia.org:
Hypotenuse
Using matlab:, you can:
• “Run a Single Function” on page 25-11

• “Run Multiple Functions” on page 25-11
• “Provide Command Options” on page 25-12
• “Include Special Characters” on page 25-12
Run a Single Function

Use matlab: to run a specified statement when you click a hyperlink in the Command
Window. For example, run this command:
disp('<a href="matlab:magic(4)">Generate magic square</a>')
It displays this link in the Command Window:
When you click the link, MATLAB runs magic(4).
Run Multiple Functions

You can run multiple functions with a single link. For example, run this command:
disp('<a href="matlab: x=0:1:8;y=sin(x);plot(x,y)">Plot x,y</a>')
It displays this link in the Command Window:
When you click the link, MATLAB runs this code:

x = 0:1:8;
y = sin(x);
plot(x,y)
Redefine x in the base workspace:
25-11
x = -2*pi:pi/16:2*pi;
Click the hyperlink, Plot x,y again and it changes the current value of x back to
0:1:8. The code that matlab: runs when you click the Plot x,y defines x in the base
workspace.
Provide Command Options

Use multiple matlab: statements in a file to present options, such as
disp('<a href = "matlab:state = 0">Disable feature</a>')

disp('<a href = "matlab:state = 1">Enable feature</a>')
The Command Window displays the links that follow. Depending on which link you click,
MATLAB sets state to 0 or 1.
Include Special Characters

MATLAB correctly interprets most text that includes special characters, such as a
greater than symbol (>). For example, the following statement includes a greater than
symbol (>).
disp('<a href="matlab:str = ''Value > 0''">Positive</a>')
and generates the following hyperlink.
Some symbols might not be interpreted correctly and you might need to use the ASCII
value for the symbol. For example, an alternative way to run the previous statement is to
use ASCII 62 instead of the greater than symbol:
disp('<a href="matlab:str=[''Value '' char(62) '' 0'']">Positive</a>')
25-12
Create and Share Toolboxes
In this section...
“Create Toolbox” on page 25-13
“Share Toolbox” on page 25-17
You can package MATLAB files to create a toolbox to share with others. These files can
include MATLAB code, data, apps, examples, and documentation. When you create a
toolbox, MATLAB generates a single installation file (.mltbx) that enables you or others
to install your toolbox.
Create Toolbox
To create a toolbox installation file:
1
In the Environment section of the Home tab, select Package Toolbox from
the Add-Ons menu.
2
In the Package a Toolbox dialog box, click the button and select your toolbox
folder. It is good practice to create the toolbox package from the folder level above
your toolbox folder. The .mltbx toolbox file contains information about the path
settings for your toolbox files and folders. By default, any of the included folders and
files that are on your path when you create the toolbox appear on their paths after
the end users install the toolbox.
3 In the dialog box, add the following information about your toolbox.
Toolbox Description
Information
Field
Toolbox Enter the toolbox name, if necessary. By default, the toolbox name is
Name the name of the toolbox folder. The Toolbox Name becomes
the .mltbx file name.
Version Enter the toolbox version number in the Major.Minor.Bug.Build
format. Bug and Build are optional.
25-13
Toolbox Description
Information
Field
Author Enter contact information for the toolbox author. To save the contact
Name, information, click Set as default contact.
Email, and
Company
Toolbox To select an image that represents your toolbox, click Select toolbox
Image image.
Summary Enter the toolbox summary and description. It is good practice to keep
and the Summary text brief and to add detail to the Description text.
Description
4 To ensure MATLAB detects the expected components, review the toolbox contents.
The following sections of the Package a Toolbox dialog box appear after you select a
toolbox folder.
Package a Description
Toolbox
Dialog Box
Section
Toolbox List of the folders and files contained in your toolbox. The listed files
Files and and folders are only those files that are located in the top level of the
Folders toolbox folder. You cannot navigate through the folders in the Toolbox
Packaging dialog box. To exclude a file or folder from the toolbox,
register it in the text file that is displayed when you click Exclude
files and folders. It is good practice to exclude any source control files
related to your toolbox.
External List of the files required for your toolbox that are located outside the
Files toolbox folder. By default, MATLAB includes the required files. You
can choose to omit any files you do not want in your toolbox.
Install MATLAB Path—List of folders that are added to the user’s MATLAB
Actions path when they install a toolbox. By default, the list includes any of
the toolbox folders that are on your path when you create the toolbox.
You can exclude folders from being added to the user’s path by clearing
them from the list. To manage the path for when a toolbox is installed,
click Manage the current MATLAB path. To reset the list to the
default list, click Reset to the current MATLAB path.
25-14
Toolbox
Dialog Box
Section
Java Class Path—List of Java files that are added to the user’s Java
class path when they install a toolbox. Upon toolbox installation, the
JAR files are added to the dynamic path for the duration of the
MATLAB session. When the toolbox user restarts MATLAB, the JAR
files are added to the static path.
Products List of MathWorks products required by your toolbox. Create this list
manually.
Examples, Examples—Published MATLAB examples associated with your
Apps, and toolbox. For the Package a Toolbox tool to recognize examples, first
Document publish them to HTML in MATLAB. Include the code files and the
ation HTML files in your toolbox folder.
• For a live script (.mlx) example, export it to HTML. On the Live

Editor tab, select Save > Export to HTML and save it in a folder
named html.
• For a script (.m) example, publish it to HTML with the publish
function. Do not specify an output folder when publishing your
examples. For the Package a Toolbox tool to recognize the examples,
the output folder must be the default folder (html).
To create different categories for your examples, place the examples in

different subfolders within your toolbox folder. When you add your
toolbox folder to the Package a Toolbox dialog box, MATLAB creates a
demos.xml file to describe your examples, and takes the example
subfolder name as the example category name. Alternatively, you can
create your own demos.xml file. The demos.xml file allows recipients
to access your examples through the Supplemental Software link at
the bottom of the Help browser home page. For more information, see
“Display Custom Examples” on page 30-25.
25-15
Toolbox
Dialog Box
Section
Apps—Published MATLAB installable apps associated with your
toolbox. The Package a Toolbox tool recognizes apps (.mlapp files) and
app installer files (.mlappinstall files) and includes them in your
toolbox.
• To specify which apps (.mlapp files) are also installed and

registered in the user's MATLAB Apps Gallery, select the apps.
• All .mlappinstall files in your toolbox folder are installed and
registered in the user's MATLAB Apps Gallery.
Getting Started Guide—Quick start guide for your toolbox. For the
Package a Toolbox tool to recognize a Getting Started Guide, include
the guide as a live script named GettingStarted.mlx in a doc
subfolder within your toolbox folder.
Alternatively, you can generate and edit GettingStarted.mlx from

the Package a Toolbox dialog box.
Users of your toolbox can view the Getting Started Guide through the
Options menu for the toolbox in the Add-On Manager. For more
information, see “Manage Your Add-Ons”.
25-16
Toolbox
Dialog Box
Section
Help Browser Integration—Custom documentation associated with
your toolbox. For the Package a Toolbox tool to recognize custom
documentation, include an info.xml file to identify your
documentation files. If you use the builddocsearchdb function to
build the documentation database before packaging your toolbox, you
can include the generated helpsearch subfolder in your toolbox. The
info.xml file and the helpsearch folder allow recipients to access
your documentation through the Supplemental Software link at the
bottom of the Help browser home page. For more information, see
“Display Custom Documentation” on page 30-15.
Alternatively, you can generate info.xml and helptoc.xml template

files from the Package a Toolbox dialog box. To access your
documentation through the Help browser, complete the documentation
templates and include info.xml on the MATLAB
5 Package your toolbox.
• To save your toolbox, click Package at the top of the Package a Toolbox dialog
box. Packaging your toolbox generates a .mltbx file in your current MATLAB
folder.
• To save your toolbox and share it on MATLAB Central File Exchange, select
Package and Share from the Package menu at the top of the Package a
Toolbox dialog box. This option generates a .mltbx file in your current MATLAB
folder and opens a web page for your toolbox submission to File Exchange.
MATLAB populates the File Exchange submission form with information about
the toolbox. Review and submit the form to share your toolbox on File Exchange.
When you create a toolbox, MATLAB generates a .prj file that contains information
about the toolbox and saves it frequently. It is good practice to save this
associated .prj file so that you can quickly create future revisions of your toolbox.
Share Toolbox
To share your toolbox with others, give them the .mltbx file. All files you added when
you packaged the toolbox are included in the .mltbx file. When the end users install
25-17
your toolbox, they do not need to be concerned with the MATLAB path or other
installation details. The .mltbx file manages these details for end users.
For information on installing, uninstalling, and viewing information about toolboxes, see
“Get Add-Ons” and “Manage Your Add-Ons”.
You can share your toolbox with others by attaching the .mltbx file to an email
message, or using any other method you typically use to share files—such as uploading to
MATLAB Central File Exchange. If you upload your toolbox to File Exchange, your users
can download the toolbox from within MATLAB. For more information, see “Get Add-
Ons”.
Alternatively, you can upload your toolbox to File Exchange when you package it. Select
Package and Share from the Package menu at the top of the Package a Toolbox dialog
box.
Note While .mltbx files can contain any files you specify, MATLAB Central File
Exchange places additional limitations on submissions. If your toolbox contains any of
the following, it cannot be submitted to File Exchange:
• MEX-files.
• Other binary executable files, such as DLLs or ActiveX® controls. (Data and image
files are typically acceptable.)
See Also
matlab.addons.toolbox.installToolbox |
matlab.addons.toolbox.installedToolboxes |
matlab.addons.toolbox.packageToolbox |
matlab.addons.toolbox.toolboxVersion |
matlab.addons.toolbox.uninstallToolbox | publish
Related Examples
• “Get Add-Ons”
• “Manage Your Add-Ons”
• “Display Custom Examples” on page 30-25
25-18
See Also
• “Package Apps From the MATLAB Toolstrip”

25-19
Manage Java Class Path for Toolboxes
Note In R2017b, management of the Java class path for toolboxes changed. In MATLAB
R2017b and later, when a user installs a toolbox, toolbox JAR files are added to the
dynamic path for the duration of the MATLAB session. When the toolbox user restarts
MATLAB, the JAR files are added to the static path.
MATLAB loads Java class definitions from files that are on the Java class path. The Java
class path is segmented into a static path and a dynamic path. Keep the following in
mind when you determine if Java class definitions are static or dynamic path entries.
• When packaging a toolbox, JAR files are detected so they can be included on the
dynamic path.
• The dynamic path is convenient but intended for development and debugging. When
packaging your toolbox, consider instructing your users to add your Java classes to
their static path.
• The static path offers better class loading performance than the dynamic path.
• Modifying the static path, requires MATLAB to be restarted. You can change the
dynamic path without restarting MATLAB.
• Classes on the static path run the same way as they do in Java. Classes on the
dynamic path might not behave the same as classes on the static path.
• Classes on the static path cannot have dependencies on classes on the dynamic path.
For more information about static and dynamic Java class paths, see “Java Class Path”.
You can specify files to include on the user’s dynamic Java class path when they install
the toolbox. MATLAB automatically detects JAR files to include in the toolbox. When
packaging a toolbox, review the entries under Java Class Path in the Install Actions
section of the Package a Toolbox dialog box. These files are added to the user’s dynamic
Java class path when they install the toolbox.
If Java classes need to be on the static class path, it is good practice to include
information with your toolbox to help users modify their static paths. For example, to
include static Java class path entries in your toolbox:
1 Provide a classpath.txt file in the toolbox root with the relative path entries for
Java files. If Java files are located outside of your toolbox root, make sure that they
are listed under External Files when you package your toolbox.
25-20
See Also
2 Provide instructions for the user to modify their static path via a readme.txt file or
your toolbox documentation. To modify their static path, the user must add your
static entries to their javaclasspath.txt. They might have to create this file and
they will need to restart MATLAB. For more information, see “Static Path”.
See Also
javaaddpath | javaclasspath | javarmpath
More About
• “Java Class Path”
25-21
Software Development
23
26
Error Handling
• “Exception Handling in a MATLAB Application” on page 26-2

• “Capture Information About Exceptions” on page 26-5
• “Throw an Exception” on page 26-15
• “Respond to an Exception” on page 26-17
• “Clean Up When Functions Complete” on page 26-22
• “Issue Warnings and Errors” on page 26-28
• “Suppress Warnings” on page 26-32
• “Restore Warnings” on page 26-35
• “Change How Warnings Display” on page 26-38
• “Use try/catch to Handle Errors” on page 26-40
26 Error Handling
Exception Handling in a MATLAB Application

In this section...
“Getting an Exception at the Command Line” on page 26-2
“Getting an Exception in Your Program Code” on page 26-3
“Generating a New Exception” on page 26-4
Overview
No matter how carefully you plan and test the programs you write, they may not always
run as smoothly as expected when executed under different conditions. It is always a
good idea to include error checking in programs to ensure reliable operation under all
conditions.
In the MATLAB software, you can decide how your programs respond to different types
of errors. You may want to prompt the user for more input, display extended error or
warning information, or perhaps repeat a calculation using default values. The error-
handling capabilities in MATLAB help your programs check for particular error
conditions and execute the appropriate code depending on the situation.
When MATLAB detects a severe fault in the command or program it is running, it

collects information about what was happening at the time of the error, displays a
message to help the user understand what went wrong, and terminates the command or
program. This is called throwing an exception. You can get an exception while entering
commands at the MATLAB command prompt or while executing your program code.
Getting an Exception at the Command Line

If you get an exception at the MATLAB prompt, you have several options on how to deal
with it as described below.
Determine the Fault from the Error Message
Evaluate the error message MATLAB has displayed. Most error messages attempt to
explain at least the immediate cause of the program failure. There is often sufficient
information to determine the cause and what you need to do to remedy the situation.
26-2
Exception Handling in a MATLAB Application
Review the Failing Code
If the function in which the error occurred is implemented as a MATLAB program file,
the error message should include a line that looks something like this:
surf
Error using surf (line 50)

The text includes the name of the function that threw the error (surf, in this case) and
shows the failing line number within that function's program file. Click the line number;
MATLAB opens the file and positions the cursor at the location in the file where the
error originated. You may be able to determine the cause of the error by examining this
line and the code that precedes it.
Step Through the Code in the Debugger
You can use the MATLAB Debugger to step through the failing code. Click the
underlined error text to open the file in the MATLAB Editor at or near the point of the
error. Next, click the hyphen at the beginning of that line to set a breakpoint at that
location. When you rerun your program, MATLAB pauses execution at the breakpoint
and enables you to step through the program code. The command dbstop on error is
also helpful in finding the point of error.
See the documentation on “Debug a MATLAB Program” on page 22-2 for more
information.
Getting an Exception in Your Program Code

When you are writing your own program in a program file, you can catch exceptions and
attempt to handle or resolve them instead of allowing your program to terminate. When
you catch an exception, you interrupt the normal termination process and enter a block
of code that deals with the faulty situation. This block of code is called a catch block.
Some of the things you might want to do in the catch block are:
• Examine information that has been captured about the error.

• Gather further information to report to the user.
• Try to accomplish the task at hand in some other way.
26-3
26 Error Handling
• Clean up any unwanted side effects of the error.
When you reach the end of the catch block, you can either continue executing the
program, if possible, or terminate it.
The documentation on “Capture Information About Exceptions” on page 26-5 describes

how to acquire information about what caused the error, and “Respond to an Exception”
on page 26-17 presents some ideas on how to respond to it.
Generating a New Exception

When your program code detects a condition that will either make the program fail or
yield unacceptable results, it should throw an exception. This procedure
• Saves information about what went wrong and what code was executing at the time of
the error.
• Gathers any other pertinent information about the error.
• Instructs MATLAB to throw the exception.
The documentation on “Capture Information About Exceptions” on page 26-5 describes

how to use an MException object to capture information about the error, and “Throw an
Exception” on page 26-15 explains how to initiate the exception process.
26-4
Capture Information About Exceptions
In this section...
“The MException Class” on page 26-5
“Properties of the MException Class” on page 26-7
“Methods of the MException Class” on page 26-14
Overview
When the MATLAB software throws an exception, it captures information about what
caused the error in a data structure called an MException object. This object is an
instance of the MATLAB MException class. You can obtain access to the MException
object by catching the exception before your program aborts and accessing the object
constructed for this particular error via the catch command. When throwing an
exception in response to an error in your own code, you will have to create a new
MException object and store information about the error in that object.
This section describes the MException class and objects constructed from that class:
Information on how to use this class is presented in later sections on “Respond to an

Exception” on page 26-17 and “Throw an Exception” on page 26-15.
The MException Class

The figure shown below illustrates one possible configuration of an object of the
MException class. The object has four properties: identifier, message, stack, and
cause. Each of these properties is implemented as a field of the structure that
represents the MException object. The stack field is an N-by-1 array of additional
structures, each one identifying a function, and line number from the call stack. The
cause field is an M-by-1 cell array of MException objects, each representing an
exception that is related to the current one.
See “Properties of the MException Class” on page 26-7 for a full description of these
properties.
26-5
26 Error Handling
MException
Object
MException
Object
MException
Object
MException
Object
Object Constructor
Any code that detects an error and throws an exception must also construct an
MException object in which to record and transfer information about the error. The
syntax of the MException constructor is
ME = MException(identifier, message)
where identifier is a MATLAB message identifier on page 26-8 of the form
component:mnemonic
26-6
that is enclosed in single quotes, and message is text, also enclosed in single quotes, that
describes the error. The output ME is the resulting MException object.
If you are responding to an exception rather than throwing one, you do not have to
construct an MException object. The object has already been constructed and populated
by the code that originally detected the error.
Properties of the MException Class

The MException class has four properties. Each of these properties is implemented as a
field of the structure that represents the MException object. Each of these properties is
described in the sections below and referenced in the sections on “Respond to an
Exception” on page 26-17 and “Throw an Exception” on page 26-15. All are read-only;
their values cannot be changed.
The MException properties are:
• identifier on page 26-8

• message on page 26-10
• stack on page 26-11
• cause on page 26-12
If you call the surf function with no inputs, MATLAB throws an exception. If you catch
the exception, you can see the four properties of the MException object structure. (This
example uses try/catch in an atypical fashion. See the section on “The try/catch
Statement” on page 26-17 for more information on using try/catch).
try
surf
catch ME
ME
end
Run this at the command line and MATLAB returns the contents of the MException
object:
ME =
MException object with properties:
identifier: 'MATLAB:narginchk:notEnoughInputs'
26-7
26 Error Handling
message: 'Not enough input arguments.'

stack: [1x1 struct]
cause: {}
The stack field shows the filename, function, and line number where the exception was
thrown:
ME.stack
ans =
file: 'matlabroot\toolbox\matlab\graph3d\surf.m'
name: 'surf'
line: 54
The cause field is empty in this case. Each field is described in more detail in the
sections that follow.
Message Identifiers
A message identifier is a tag that you attach to an error or warning statement that
makes that error or warning uniquely recognizable by MATLAB. You can use message
identifiers with error reporting to better identify the source of an error, or with warnings
to control any selected subset of the warnings in your programs.
The message identifier is a read-only character vector that specifies a component and a
mnemonic label for an error or warning. The format of a simple identifier is
component:mnemonic
A colon separates the two parts of the identifier: component and mnemonic. If the
identifier uses more than one component, then additional colons are required to
separate them. A message identifier must always contain at least one colon.
Some examples of message identifiers are

MATLAB:rmpath:DirNotFound
MATLAB:odearguments:InconsistentDataType
Simulink:actionNotTaken
TechCorp:OpenFile:notFoundInPath
Both the component and mnemonic fields must adhere to the following syntax rules:
• No white space (space or tab characters) is allowed anywhere in the identifier.

• The first character must be alphabetic, either uppercase or lowercase.
26-8
• The remaining characters can be alphanumeric or an underscore.
There is no length limitation to either the component or mnemonic. The identifier can
also be an empty character vector.
Component Field
The component field specifies a broad category under which various errors and warnings
can be generated. Common components are a particular product or toolbox name, such as
MATLAB or Control, or perhaps the name of your company, such as TechCorp in the
preceding example.
You can also use this field to specify a multilevel component. The following statement
has a three-level component followed by a mnemonic label:
TechCorp:TestEquipDiv:Waveform:obsoleteSyntax
The component field enables you to guarantee the uniqueness of each identifier. Thus,
while the internal MATLAB code might use a certain warning identifier like
MATLAB:InconsistentDataType, that does not preclude you from using the same
mnemonic, as long as you precede it with a unique component. For example,
warning('TechCorp:InconsistentDataType', ...
'Value %s is inconsistent with existing properties.' ...
sprocketDiam)
Mnemonic Field
The mnemonic field is normally used as a tag relating to the particular message. For
example, when reporting an error resulting from the use of ambiguous syntax, a simple
component and mnemonic such as the following might be appropriate:
MATLAB:ambiguousSyntax
Message Identifiers in an MException Object
When throwing an exception, create an appropriate identifier and save it to the

MException object at the time you construct the object using the syntax
ME = MException(identifier, text)
For example,
ME = MException('AcctError:NoClient', ...
'Client name not recognized.');
26-9
26 Error Handling
ME.identifier
ans =
AcctError:NoClient
When responding to an exception, you can extract the message identifier from the
MException object as shown here. Using the surf example again,
try
surf
catch ME
id = ME.identifier
end
id =
MATLAB:narginchk:notEnoughInputs
Text of the Error Message
An error message in MATLAB is a read-only character vector issued by the program code
and returned in the MException object. This message can assist the user in determining
the cause, and possibly the remedy, of the failure.
When throwing an exception, compose an appropriate error message and save it to the
MException object at the time you construct the object using the syntax
ME = MException(identifier, text)
If your message requires formatting specifications, like those available with the sprintf
function, use this syntax for the MException constructor:
ME = MException(identifier, formatstring, arg1, arg2, ...)
For example,
S = 'Accounts'; f1 = 'ClientName';
ME = MException('AcctError:Incomplete', ...
'Field ''%s.%s'' is not defined.', S, f1);
ME.message
ans =
Field 'Accounts.ClientName' is not defined.
When responding to an exception, you can extract the error message from the
MException object as follows:
26-10
try
surf
catch ME
msg = ME.message
end
msg =
The Call Stack
The stack field of the MException object identifies the line number, function, and
filename where the error was detected. If the error occurs in a called function, as in the
following example, the stack field contains the line number, function name, and
filename not only for the location of the immediate error, but also for each of the calling
functions. In this case, stack is an N-by-1 array, where N represents the depth of the
call stack. That is, the stack field displays the function name and line number where the
exception occurred, the name and line number of the caller, the caller's caller, etc., until
the top-most function is reached.
When throwing an exception, MATLAB stores call stack information in the stack field.
You cannot write to this field; access is read-only.
For example, suppose you have three functions that reside in two separate files:
mfileA.m
=========================
.
.
42 function A1(x, y)
43 B1(x, y);
mfileB.m
=========================
.
.
8 function B1(x, y)
9 B2(x, y)
.
.
26 function B2(x, y)
27 .
26-11
26 Error Handling
28 .
29 .
30 .
31 % Throw exception here
Catch the exception in variable ME and then examine the stack field:
for k=1:length(ME.stack)
ME.stack(k)
end
ans =
file: 'C:\matlab\test\mfileB.m'
name: 'B2'
line: 31
ans =
file: 'C:\matlab\test\mfileB.m'
name: 'B1'
line: 9
ans =
file: 'C:\matlab\test\mfileA.m'
name: 'A1'
line: 43
The Cause Array
In some situations, it can be important to record information about not only the one
command that caused execution to stop, but also other exceptions that your code caught.
You can save these additional MException objects in the cause field of the primary
exception.
The cause field of an MException is an optional cell array of related MException

objects. You must use the following syntax when adding objects to the cause cell array:
primaryException = addCause(primaryException, secondaryException)
This example attempts to assign an array D to variable X. If the D array does not exist,
the code attempts to load it from a MAT-file and then retries assigning it to X. If the load
fails, a new MException object (ME3) is constructed to store the cause of the first two
errors (ME1 and ME2):
try
X = D(1:25)
catch ME1
26-12
try
filename = 'test200';
load(filename);
X = D(1:25)
catch ME2
ME3 = MException('MATLAB:LoadErr', ...
'Unable to load from file %s', filename);
ME3 = addCause(ME3, ME1);
end
end
There are two exceptions in the cause field of ME3:
ME3.cause
ans =
[1x1 MException]
[1x1 MException]
Examine the cause field of ME3 to see the related errors:
ME3.cause{:}
ans =
identifier: 'MATLAB:UndefinedFunction'
message: 'Undefined function or method 'D' for input
arguments of type 'double'.'
stack: [0x1 struct]
cause: {}
ans =
identifier: 'MATLAB:load:couldNotReadFile'
message: 'Unable to read file test204: No such file or
directory.'
stack: [0x1 struct]
cause: {}
26-13
26 Error Handling
Methods of the MException Class

There are ten methods that you can use with the MException class. The names of these
methods are case-sensitive. See the MATLAB function reference pages for more
information.
Method Name Description
MException.addCause Append an MException to the cause field of
another MException.
MException.getReport Return a formatted message based on the
current exception.
MException.last Return the last uncaught exception. This is a
static method.
MException.rethrow Reissue an exception that has previously been
caught.
MException.throw Issue an exception.
MException.throwAsCaller Issue an exception, but omit the current stack
frame from the stack field.
26-14
Throw an Exception
Throw an Exception
When your program detects a fault that will keep it from completing as expected or will
generate erroneous results, you should halt further execution and report the error by
throwing an exception. The basic steps to take are
1 Detect the error. This is often done with some type of conditional statement, such as
an if or try/catch statement that checks the output of the current operation.
2 Construct an MException object to represent the error. Add a message identifier
and error message to the object when calling the constructor.
3 If there are other exceptions that may have contributed to the current error, you can
store the MException object for each in the cause field of a single MException that
you intend to throw. Use the addCause method for this.
4 Use the throw or throwAsCaller function to have the MATLAB software issue the
exception. At this point, MATLAB stores call stack information in the stack field of
the MException, exits the currently running function, and returns control to either
the keyboard or an enclosing catch block in a calling function.
This example illustrates throwing an exception using the steps just described:
Create an array, and an index into it with a logical array.

A = [13 42; 7 20];
idx = [1 0 1; 0 1 0];
Create an exception that provides general information about an error. Test the index
array and add exceptions with more detailed information about the source of the failure.
% 1) Detect the error.
try
A(idx);
catch
% 2) Construct an MException object to represent the error.

msgID = 'MYFUN:BadIndex';
msg = 'Unable to index into array.';
baseException = MException(msgID,msg);
% 3) Store any information contributing to the error.

try
assert(islogical(idx),'MYFUN:notLogical',...
26-15
26 Error Handling
'Indexing array is not logical.')

catch causeException
baseException = addCause(baseException,causeException);
end
if any(size(idx) > size(A))

msgID = 'MYFUN:incorrectSize';
msg = 'Indexing array is too large.';
causeException2 = MException(msgID,msg);
baseException = addCause(baseException,causeException2);
end
% 4) Throw the exception to stop execution and display an error

% message.
throw(baseException)
end
Unable to index into array.
Caused by:
Indexing array is not logical.
Indexing array is too large.
26-16
Respond to an Exception
In this section...
“The try/catch Statement” on page 26-17
“Suggestions on How to Handle an Exception” on page 26-19
Overview
The MATLAB software, by default, terminates the currently running program when an
exception is thrown. If you catch the exception in your program, however, you can
capture information about what went wrong, and deal with the situation in a way that is
appropriate for the particular condition. This requires a try/catch statement.
This section covers the following topics:
The try/catch Statement

When you have statements in your code that could generate undesirable results, put
those statements into a try/catch block that catches any errors and handles them
appropriately.
A try/catch statement looks something like the following pseudocode. It consists of two
parts:
• A try block that includes all lines between the try and catch statements.
• A catch block that includes all lines of code between the catch and end statements.
try
Perform one ...
or more operations
A catch ME
Examine error info in exception object ME
Attempt to figure out what went wrong
Either attempt to recover, or clean up and abort
end
B Program continues
26-17
26 Error Handling
The program executes the statements in the try block. If it encounters an error, it skips
any remaining statements in the try block and jumps to the start of the catch block
(shown here as point A). If all operations in the try block succeed, then execution skips
the catch block entirely and goes to the first line following the end statement (point B).
Specifying the try, catch, and end commands and also the code of the try and catch
blocks on separate lines is recommended. If you combine any of these components on the
same line, separate them with commas:
try, surf, catch ME, ME.stack, end

ans =
file: 'matlabroot\toolbox\matlab\graph3d\surf.m'
name: 'surf'
line: 54
Note You cannot define nested functions within a try or catch block.
The Try Block
On execution, your code enters the try block and executes each statement as if it were
part of the regular program. If no errors are encountered, MATLAB skips the catch
block entirely and continues execution following the end statement. If any of the try
statements fail, MATLAB immediately exits the try block, leaving any remaining
statements in that block unexecuted, and enters the catch block.
The Catch Block
The catch command marks the start of a catch block and provides access to a data
structure that contains information about what caused the exception. This is shown as
the variable ME in the preceding pseudocode. This data structure is an object of the
MATLAB MException class. When an exception occurs, MATLAB constructs an
instance of this class and returns it in the catch statement that handles that error.
You are not required to specify any argument with the catch statement. If you do not
need any of the information or methods provided by the MException object, just specify
the catch keyword alone.
The MException object is constructed by internal code in the program that fails. The
object has properties that contain information about the error that can be useful in
26-18
determining what happened and how to proceed. The MException object also provides
access to methods that enable you to respond to the exception. See the section on “The
MException Class” on page 26-5 to find out more about the MException class.
Having entered the catch block, MATLAB executes the statements in sequence. These
statements can attempt to
• Attempt to resolve the error.

• Capture more information about the error.
• Switch on information found in the MException object and respond appropriately.
• Clean up the environment that was left by the failing code.
The catch block often ends with a rethrow command. The rethrow causes MATLAB to
exit the current function, keeping the call stack information as it was when the exception
was first thrown. If this function is at the highest level, that is, it was not called by
another function, the program terminates. If the failing function was called by another
function, it returns to that function. Program execution continues to return to higher
level functions, unless any of these calls were made within a higher-level try block, in
which case the program executes the respective catch block.
More information about the MException class is provided in the section “Capture
Information About Exceptions” on page 26-5.
Suggestions on How to Handle an Exception

The following example reads the contents of an image file. The try block attempts to
open and read the file. If either the open or read fails, the program catches the resulting
exception and saves the MException object in the variable ME1.
The catch block in the example checks to see if the specified file could not be found. If
so, the program allows for the possibility that a common variation of the filename
extension (e.g., jpeg instead of jpg) was used by retrying the operation with a modified
extension. This is done using a try/catch statement nested within the original try/
catch.
function d_in = read_image(filename)
[path name ext] = fileparts(filename);
try
fid = fopen(filename, 'r');
d_in = fread(fid);
26-19
26 Error Handling
catch ME1
% Get last segment of the error message identifier.
idSegLast = regexp(ME1.identifier, '(?<=:)\w+$', 'match');
% Did the read fail because the file could not be found?
if strcmp(idSegLast, 'InvalidFid') && ...
~exist(filename, 'file')
% Yes. Try modifying the filename extension.

switch ext
case '.jpg' % Change jpg to jpeg
filename = strrep(filename, '.jpg', '.jpeg')
case '.jpeg' % Change jpeg to jpg
filename = strrep(filename, '.jpeg', '.jpg')
case '.tif' % Change tif to tiff
filename = strrep(filename, '.tif', '.tiff')
case '.tiff' % Change tiff to tif
filename = strrep(filename, '.tiff', '.tif')
otherwise
fprintf('File %s not found\n', filename);
rethrow(ME1);
end
% Try again, with modifed filenames.

try
fid = fopen(filename, 'r');
d_in = fread(fid);
catch ME2
fprintf('Unable to access file %s\n', filename);
rethrow(ME2)
end
end
end
This example illustrates some of the actions that you can take in response to an
exception:
• Compare the identifier field of the MException object against possible causes of
the error.
• Use a nested try/catch statement to retry the open and read operations using a
known variation of the filename extension.
26-20
• Display an appropriate message in the case that the file truly does not exist and then
rethrow the exception.
• Add the first MException object to the cause field of the second.
• Rethrow the exception. This stops program execution and displays the error message.
Cleaning up any unwanted results of the error is also advisable. For example, your
program may have allocated a significant amount of memory that it no longer needs.
26-21
26 Error Handling
Clean Up When Functions Complete

In this section...
“Examples of Cleaning Up a Program Upon Exit” on page 26-23
“Retrieving Information About the Cleanup Routine” on page 26-25
“Using onCleanup Versus try/catch” on page 26-26
“onCleanup in Scripts” on page 26-27
Overview
A good programming practice is to make sure that you leave your program environment
in a clean state that does not interfere with any other program code. For example, you
might want to
• Close any files that you opened for import or export.

• Restore the MATLAB path.
• Lock or unlock memory to prevent or allow erasing MATLAB function or MEX-files.
• Set your working folder back to its default if you have changed it.
• Make sure global and persistent variables are in the correct state.
MATLAB provides the onCleanup function for this purpose. This function, when used
within any program, establishes a cleanup routine for that function. When the function
terminates, whether normally or in the event of an error or Ctrl+C, MATLAB
automatically executes the cleanup routine.
The following statement establishes a cleanup routine cleanupFun for the currently
running program:
cleanupObj = onCleanup(@cleanupFun);
When your program exits, MATLAB finds any instances of the onCleanup class and
executes the associated function handles. The process of generating and activating
function cleanup involves the following steps:
1 Write one or more cleanup routines for the program under development. Assume for
now that it takes only one such routine.
26-22
2 Create a function handle for the cleanup routine.

3 At some point, generally early in your program code, insert a call to the oncleanup
function, passing the function handle.
4 When the program is run, the call to onCleanup constructs a cleanup object that
contains a handle to the cleanup routine created in step 1.
5 When the program ends, MATLAB implicitly clears all objects that are local
variables. This invokes the destructor method for each local object in your program,
including the cleanup object constructed in step 4.
6 The destructor method for this object invokes this routine if it exists. This perform
the tasks needed to restore your programming environment.
You can declare any number of cleanup routines for a program file. Each call to
onCleanup establishes a separate cleanup routine for each cleanup object returned.
If, for some reason, the object returned by onCleanup persists beyond the life of your
program, then the cleanup routine associated with that object is not run when your
function terminates. Instead, it will run whenever the object is destroyed (e.g., by
clearing the object variable).
Your cleanup routine should never rely on variables that are defined outside of that
routine. For example, the nested function shown here on the left executes with no error,
whereas the very similar one on the right fails with the error, Undefined function or
variable 'k'. This results from the cleanup routine's reliance on variable k which is
defined outside of the nested cleanup routine:
function testCleanup function testCleanup
k = 3; k = 3;
myFun obj = onCleanup(@myFun);
function myFun function myFun
fprintf('k is %d\n', k) fprintf('k is %d\n', k)
end end
end end
Examples of Cleaning Up a Program Upon Exit

Example 1 — Close Open Files on Exit
MATLAB closes the file with identifier fid when function openFileSafely terminates:
function openFileSafely(fileName)
fid = fopen(fileName, 'r');
26-23
26 Error Handling
c = onCleanup(@()fclose(fid));
s = fread(fid);
.
.
.
end
Example 2 — Maintain the Selected Folder
This example preserves the current folder whether functionThatMayError returns an

error or not:
function changeFolderSafely(fileName)
currentFolder = pwd;
c = onCleanup(@()cd(currentFolder));
functionThatMayError;
end % c executes cd(currentFolder) here.
Example 3 — Close Figure and Restore MATLAB Path
This example extends the MATLAB path to include files in the toolbox\images folders,
and then displays a figure from one of these folders. After the figure displays, the
cleanup routine restore_env closes the figure and restores the path to its original
state:
function showImageOutsidePath(imageFile)
fig1 = figure;
imgpath = genpath([matlabroot '\toolbox\images']);
% Define the cleanup routine.

cleanupObj = onCleanup(@()restore_env(fig1, imgpath));
% Modify the path to gain access to the image file,

% and display the image.
addpath(imgpath);
rgb = imread(imageFile);
fprintf('\n Opening the figure %s\n', imageFile);
image(rgb);
pause(2);
% This is the cleanup routine.

function restore_env(fighandle, newpath)
26-24
disp ' Closing the figure'

close(fighandle);
pause(2)
disp ' Restoring the path'

rmpath(newpath);
end
end
Run the function as shown here. You can verify that the path has been restored by
comparing the length of the path before and after running the function:
origLen = length(path);
showImageOutsidePath('greens.jpg')
Opening the figure greens.jpg
Closing the figure
Restoring the path
currLen = length(path);
currLen == origLen
ans =
1
Retrieving Information About the Cleanup Routine

In Example 3 shown above, the cleanup routine and data needed to call it are contained
in a handle to an anonymous function:
@()restore_env(fig1, imgpath)
The details of that handle are then contained within the object returned by the
onCleanup function:
cleanupObj = onCleanup(@()restore_env(fig1, imgpath));
You can access these details using the task property of the cleanup object as shown here.
(Modify the showImageOutsidePath function by adding the following code just before
the comment line that says, “% This is the cleanup routine.”)
disp ' Displaying information from the function handle:'

task = cleanupObj.task;
fun = functions(task)
26-25
26 Error Handling
wsp = fun.workspace{2,1}
fprintf('\n');
pause(2);
Run the modified function to see the output of the functions command and the
contents of one of the workspace cells:
showImageOutsidePath('greens.jpg')
Opening the figure greens.jpg

Displaying information from the function handle:
fun =
function: '@()restore_env(fig1,imgpath)'
type: 'anonymous'
file: 'c:\work\g6.m'
workspace: {2x1 cell}
wsp =
imageFile: 'greens.jpg'
fig1: 1
imgpath: [1x3957 char]
cleanupObj: [1x1 onCleanup]
rgb: [300x500x3 uint8]
task: @()restore_env(fig1,imgpath)
Closing the figure

Restoring the path
Using onCleanup Versus try/catch

Another way to run a cleanup routine when a function terminates unexpectedly is to use
a try, catch statement. There are limitations to using this technique however. If the
user ends the program by typing Ctrl+C, MATLAB immediately exits the try block, and
the cleanup routine never executes. The cleanup routine also does not run when you exit
the function normally.
The following program cleans up if an error occurs, but not in response to Ctrl+C:
function cleanupByCatch
try
pause(10);
catch
disp(' Collecting information about the error')
disp(' Executing cleanup tasks')
end
26-26
Unlike the try/catch statement, the onCleanup function responds not only to a
normal exit from your program and any error that might be thrown, but also to Ctrl+C.
This next example replaces the try/catch with onCleanup:
function cleanupByFunc
obj = onCleanup(@()...
disp(' Executing cleanup tasks'));
pause(10);
onCleanup in Scripts
onCleanup does not work in scripts as it does in functions. In functions, the cleanup
object is stored in the function workspace. When the function exits, this workspace is
cleared thus executing the associated cleanup routine. In scripts, the cleanup object is
stored in the base workspace (that is, the workspace used in interactive work done at the
command prompt). Because exiting a script has no effect on the base workspace, the
cleanup object is not cleared and the routine associated with that object does not execute.
To use this type of cleanup mechanism in a script, you would have to explicitly clear the
object from the command line or another script when the first script terminates.
26-27
26 Error Handling
Issue Warnings and Errors

In this section...
“Issue Warnings” on page 26-28
“Throw Errors” on page 26-28
“Add Run-Time Parameters to Your Warnings and Errors” on page 26-29
“Add Identifiers to Warnings and Errors” on page 26-30
Issue Warnings
You can issue a warning to flag unexpected conditions detected when running a program.
The warning function prints a warning message to the command line. Warnings differ
from errors in two significant ways:
• Warnings do not halt the execution of the program.

• You can suppress any unhelpful MATLAB warnings.
Use the warning function in your code to generate a warning message during execution.
Specify the message as the input argument to the warning function:
warning('Input must be text')
For example, you can insert a warning in your code to verify the software version:
function warningExample1
if ~strncmp(version, '7', 1)
warning('You are using a version other than v7')
end
Throw Errors
You can throw an error to flag fatal problems within the program. Use the error
function to print error messages to the command line. After displaying the message,
MATLAB stops the execution of the current program.
For example, suppose you construct a function that returns the number of combinations
of k elements from n elements. Such a function is nonsensical if k > n; you cannot
choose 8 elements if you start with just 4. You must incorporate this fact into the
function to let anyone using combinations know of the problem:
26-28
Issue Warnings and Errors
function com = combinations(n,k)

if k > n
error('Cannot calculate with given values')
end
com = factorial(n)/(factorial(k)*factorial(n-k));
end
If the combinations function receives invalid input, MATLAB stops execution

immediately after throwing the error message:
combinations(4,8)
Error using combinations (line 3)

Cannot calculate with given values
Add Run-Time Parameters to Your Warnings and Errors

To make your warning or error messages more specific, insert components of the message
at the time of execution. The warning function uses conversion characters that are the
same as those used by the sprintf function. Conversion characters act as placeholders
for substrings or values, unknown until the code executes.
For example, this warning uses %s and %d to mark where to insert the values of variables
arrayname and arraydims:
warning('Array %s has %d dimensions.',arrayname,arraydims)
If you execute this command with arrayname = 'A' and arraydims = 3, MATLAB
responds:
Warning: Array A has 3 dimensions.
Adding run-time parameters to your warnings and errors can clarify the problems within
a program. Consider the function combinations from “Throw Errors” on page 26-28.
You can throw a much more informative error using run-time parameters:

if k > n
error('Cannot choose %i from %i elements',k,n)
end
end
26-29
26 Error Handling
If this function receives invalid arguments, MATLAB throws an error message and stops
the program:
combinations(6,9)
Error using combinations (line 3)

Cannot choose 9 from 6 elements
Add Identifiers to Warnings and Errors

A message identifier provides a way to uniquely reference a warning or an error.
Enable or disable warnings with identifiers. Use an identifying text argument with the
warning function to attach a unique tag to a message:
warning(identifier_text,message_text)
For example, you can add an identifier tag to the previous MATLAB warning about
which version of software is running:
minver = '7';
if ~strncmp(version,minver,1)
warning('MYTEST:VERCHK','Running a version other than v%s',minver)
end
Adding an identifier to an error message allows for negative testing. However, adding
and recovering more information from errors often requires working with MException
objects.
See Also
MException | lastwarn | warndlg | warning
Related Examples
• “Capture Information About Exceptions” on page 26-5
• “Exception Handling in a MATLAB Application” on page 26-2
26-30
See Also
More About
• “Message Identifiers” on page 26-8
26-31
26 Error Handling
Suppress Warnings
Your program might issue warnings that do not always adversely affect execution. To
avoid confusion, you can hide warning messages during execution by changing their
states from 'on' to 'off'.
To suppress specific warning messages, you must first find the warning identifier. Each
warning message has a unique identifier. To find the identifier associated with a
MATLAB warning, reproduce the warning. For example, this code reproduces a warning
thrown if MATLAB attempts to remove a nonexistent folder:
rmpath('folderthatisnotonpath')
Warning: "folderthatisnotonpath" not found in path.
Note If this statement does not produce a warning message, use the following code to
temporarily enable the display of all warnings, and then restore the original warning
state:
w = warning ('on','all');
warning(w)
To obtain information about the most recently issued warning, use the warning or
lastwarn functions. This code uses the query state to return a data structure
containing the message identifier and the current state of the last warning:
w = warning('query','last')
w =
identifier: 'MATLAB:rmpath:DirNotFound'
state: 'on'
You can save the identifier field in the variable, id:

id = w.identifier;
Note warning('query','last') returns the last displayed warning. MATLAB only

displays warning messages that have state: 'on' and a warning identifier.
26-32
Suppress Warnings
Using the lastwarn function, you can retrieve the last warning message, regardless of
its display state:
lastwarn
ans =
"folderthatisnotonpath" not found in path.
Turn Warnings On and Off

After you obtain the identifier from the query state, use this information to disable or
enable the warning associated with that identifier.
Continuing the example from the previous section, turn the warning
'MATLAB:rmpath:DirNotFound' off, and repeat the operation.
warning('off',id)
MATLAB displays no warning.
Turn the warning on, and try to remove a nonexistent path:

warning('on',id)
MATLAB now issues a warning.
Tip Turn off the most recently invoked warning with warning('off','last').
Controlling All Warnings
The term all refers only to those warnings that have been issued or modified during your
current MATLAB session. Modified warning states persist only through the current
session. Starting a new session restores the default settings.
Use the identifier 'all' to represent the group of all warnings. View the state of all
warnings with either syntax:
26-33
26 Error Handling
warning('query','all')
warning
To enable all warnings and verify the state:

warning('on','all')
warning('query','all')
All warnings have the state 'on'.
To disable all warnings and verify the state, use this syntax:
warning('off','all')
warning
All warnings have the state 'off'.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Change How Warnings Display” on page 26-38
26-34
Restore Warnings
Restore Warnings
MATLAB allows you to save the on-off warning states, modify warning states, and
restore the original warning states. This is useful if you need to temporarily turn off
some warnings and later reinstate the original settings.
The following statement saves the current state of all warnings in the structure array
called orig_state:
orig_state = warning;
To restore the original state after any warning modifications, use this syntax:
warning(orig_state);
You also can save the current state and toggle warnings in a single command. For
example, the statement, orig_state = warning('off','all'); is equivalent to the
commands:
orig_state = warning;
warning('off','all')
Disable and Restore a Particular Warning

This example shows you how to restore the state of a particular warning.
1 Query the Control:parameterNotSymmetric warning:
warning('query','Control:parameterNotSymmetric')
The state of warning 'Control:parameterNotSymmetric' is 'on'.

2 Turn off the Control:parameterNotSymmetric warning:
orig_state = warning('off','Control:parameterNotSymmetric')
orig_state =
identifier: 'Control:parameterNotSymmetric'
state: 'on'
orig_state contains the warning state before MATLAB turns

Control:parameterNotSymmetric off.
26-35
26 Error Handling
3 Query all warning states:

warning
The default warning state is 'on'. Warnings not set to the default are
State Warning Identifier
off Control:parameterNotSymmetric
MATLAB indicates that Control:parameterNotSymmetric is 'off'.

4 Restore the original state:
warning(orig_state)
warning('query','Control:parameterNotSymmetric')
The state of warning 'Control:parameterNotSymmetric' is 'on'.
Disable and Restore Multiple Warnings

This example shows you how to save and restore multiple warning states.
1 Disable three warnings, and query all the warnings:

w(1) = warning('off','MATLAB:rmpath:DirNotFound');
w(2) = warning('off','MATLAB:singularMatrix');
w(3) = warning('off','Control:parameterNotSymmetric');
warning
The default warning state is 'on'. Warnings not set to the default are
State Warning Identifier
off Control:parameterNotSymmetric
off MATLAB:rmpath:DirNotFound
off MATLAB:singularMatrix
2 Restore the three warnings to their the original state, and query all warnings:
warning(w)
warning
All warnings have the state 'on'.
You do not need to store information about the previous warning states in an array,
but doing so allows you to restore warnings with one command.
26-36
See Also
Note When temporarily disabling multiple warnings, using methods related to

onCleanup might be advantageous.
Alternatively, you can save and restore all warnings.
1 Enable all warnings, and save the original warning state:

orig_state = warning('on','all');
2 Restore your warnings to the previous state:
warning(orig_state)
See Also
onCleanup | warning
Related Examples
• “Clean Up When Functions Complete” on page 26-22
26-37
26 Error Handling
Change How Warnings Display

You can control how warnings appear in MATLAB by modifying two warning modes,
verbose and backtrace.
Mode Description Default
verbose Display a message on how to off (terse)
suppress the warning.
backtrace Display a stack trace after a on (enabled)
warning is invoked.
Note The verbose and backtrace modes present some limitations:
• prev_state does not contain information about the backtrace or verbose modes
in the statement, prev_state = warning('query','all').
• A mode change affects all enabled warnings.
Enable Verbose Warnings

When you enable verbose warnings, MATLAB displays an extra line of information with
each warning that tells you how to suppress it.
For example, you can turn on all warnings, disable backtrace, and enable verbose
warnings:
warning on all
warning off backtrace
warning on verbose
Running a command that produces an error displays an extended message:


(Type "warning off MATLAB:rmpath:DirNotFound" to suppress this warning.)
Display a Stack Trace on a Specific Warning

It can be difficult to locate the source of a warning when it is generated from code buried
in several levels of function calls. When you enable the backtrace mode, MATLAB
26-38
Change How Warnings Display
displays the file name and line number where the warning occurred. For example, you
can enable backtrace and disable verbose:
warning on backtrace
warning off verbose
Running a command that produces an error displays a hyperlink with a line number:
> In rmpath at 58
Clicking the hyperlink takes you to the location of the warning.
26-39
26 Error Handling
Use try/catch to Handle Errors

You can use a try/catch statement to execute code after your program encounters an
error. try/catch statements can be useful if you:
• Want to finish the program in another way that avoids errors

• Need to clean up unwanted side effects of the error
• Have many problematic input parameters or commands
Arrange try/catch statements into blocks of code, similar to this pseudocode:
try
try block...
catch
catch block...
end
If an error occurs within the try block, MATLAB skips any remaining commands in
the try block and executes the commands in the catch block. If no error occurs within
try block, MATLAB skips the entire catch block.
For example, a try/catch statement can prevent the need to throw errors. Consider the
combinations function that returns the number of combinations of k elements from n
elements:
end
MATLAB throws an error whenever k > n. You cannot construct a set with more
elements, k, than elements you possess, n. Using a try/catch statement, you can avoid the
error and execute this function regardless of the order of inputs:
function com = robust_combine(n,k)
try
catch
com = factorial(k)/(factorial(n)*factorial(k-n));
end
end
robust_combine treats any order of integers as valid inputs:
26-40
See Also
C1 = robust_combine(8,4)
C2 = robust_combine(4,8)
C1 =
70
C2 =
70
Optionally, you can capture more information about errors if a variable follows your
catch statement:
catch MExc
MExc is an MException class object that contains more information about the thrown
error. To learn more about accessing information from MException objects, see
“Exception Handling in a MATLAB Application” on page 26-2.
See Also
MException | onCleanup
26-41
27
Program Scheduling
• “Schedule Command Execution Using Timer” on page 27-2

• “Timer Callback Functions” on page 27-5
• “Handling Timer Queuing Conflicts” on page 27-10
27 Program Scheduling
Schedule Command Execution Using Timer

In this section...
“Example: Displaying a Message” on page 27-3
Overview
The MATLAB software includes a timer object that you can use to schedule the execution
of MATLAB commands. This section describes how you can create timer objects, start a
timer running, and specify the processing that you want performed when a timer fires. A
timer is said to fire when the amount of time specified by the timer object elapses and the
timer object executes the commands you specify.
To use a timer, perform these steps:
1 Create a timer object.
You use the timer function to create a timer object.

2 Specify which MATLAB commands you want executed when the timer fires and
control other aspects of timer object behavior.
You use timer object properties to specify this information. To learn about all the
properties supported by the timer object, see timer and set. You can also set timer
object properties when you create them, in step 1.
3 Start the timer object.
After you create the timer object, you must start it, using either the start or
startat function.
4 Delete the timer object when you are done with it.
After you are finished using a timer object, you should delete it from memory. See
delete for more information.
Note The specified execution time and the actual execution of a timer can vary because
timer objects work in the MATLAB single-threaded execution environment. The length of
this time lag is dependent on what other processing MATLAB is performing. To force the
execution of the callback functions in the event queue, include a call to the drawnow
function in your code. The drawnow function flushes the event queue.
27-2
See Also
Example: Displaying a Message

The following example sets up a timer object that executes a MATLAB command
character vector after 10 seconds elapse. The example creates a timer object, specifying
the values of two timer object properties, TimerFcn and StartDelay. TimerFcn
specifies the timer callback function. This is the MATLAB command or program file that
you want to execute when the timer fires. In the example, the timer callback function
sets the value of the MATLAB workspace variable stat and executes the MATLAB disp
command. The StartDelay property specifies how much time elapses before the timer
fires.
After creating the timer object, the example uses the start function to start the timer
object. (The additional commands in this example are included to illustrate the timer but
are not required for timer operation.)
t = timer('TimerFcn', 'stat=false; disp(''Timer!'')',...
'StartDelay',10);
start(t)
stat=true;
while(stat==true)
disp('.')
pause(1)
end
When you execute this code, it produces this output:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Timer!
delete(t) % Always delete timer objects after using them.
See Also
timer
27-3
More About
27-4
Timer Callback Functions

In this section...
“Associating Commands with Timer Object Events” on page 27-5
“Creating Callback Functions” on page 27-6
“Specifying the Value of Callback Function Properties” on page 27-8
Note Callback function execution might be delayed if the callback involves a CPU-
intensive task such as updating a figure.
Associating Commands with Timer Object Events

The timer object supports properties that let you specify the MATLAB commands that
execute when a timer fires, and for other timer object events, such as starting, stopping,
or when an error occurs. These are called callbacks. To associate MATLAB commands
with a timer object event, set the value of the associated timer object callback property.
The following diagram shows when the events occur during execution of a timer object
and give the names of the timer object properties associated with each event. For
example, to associate MATLAB commands with a start event, assign a value to the
StartFcn callback property. Error callbacks can occur at any time.
27-5
Timer Object Events and Related Callback Function
Creating Callback Functions

When the time period specified by a timer object elapses, the timer object executes one or
more MATLAB functions of your choosing. You can specify the functions directly as the
value of the callback property. You can also put the commands in a function file and
specify the function as the value of the callback property.
Specifying Callback Functions Directly
This example creates a timer object that displays a greeting after 5 seconds. The example
specifies the value of the TimerFcn callback property directly, putting the commands in
a character vector.
27-6
t = timer('TimerFcn',@(x,y)disp('Hello World!'),'StartDelay',5);
Note When you specify the callback commands directly as the value of the callback
function property, the commands are evaluated in the MATLAB workspace.
Putting Commands in a Callback Function
Instead of specifying MATLAB commands directly as the value of a callback property,

you can put the commands in a MATLAB program file and specify the file as the value of
the callback property.
When you create a callback function, the first two arguments must be a handle to the
timer object and an event structure. An event structure contains two fields: Type and
Data. The Type field contains a character vector that identifies the type of event that
caused the callback. The value of this field can be any of the following: 'StartFcn',
'StopFcn', 'TimerFcn', or 'ErrorFcn'. The Data field contains the time the event
occurred.
In addition to these two required input arguments, your callback function can accept
application-specific arguments. To receive these input arguments, you must use a cell
array when specifying the name of the function as the value of a callback property. For
more information, see “Specifying the Value of Callback Function Properties” on page 27-
8.
Example: Writing a Callback Function
This example implements a simple callback function that displays the type of event that
triggered the callback and the time the callback occurred. To illustrate passing
application-specific arguments, the example callback function accepts as an additional
argument a character vector and includes this text in the display output. To see this
function used with a callback property, see “Specifying the Value of Callback Function
Properties” on page 27-8.
function my_callback_fcn(obj, event, text_arg)
txt1 = ' event occurred at ';

txt2 = text_arg;
event_type = event.Type;
event_time = datestr(event.Data.time);
27-7
msg = [event_type txt1 event_time];

disp(msg)
disp(txt2)
Specifying the Value of Callback Function Properties

You associate a callback function with a specific event by setting the value of the
appropriate callback property. You can specify the callback function as a cell array or
function handle. If your callback function accepts additional arguments, you must use a
cell array.
The following table shows the syntax for several sample callback functions and describes
how you call them.
Callback Function Syntax How to Specify as a Property Value for
Object t
function myfile(obj, event) t.StartFcn = @myfile
function myfile t.StartFcn = @(~,~)myfile
function myfile(obj, event, arg1, t.StartFcn = {@myfile, 5, 6}
arg2)
This example illustrates several ways you can specify the value of timer object callback
function properties, some with arguments and some without. To see the code of the
callback function, my_callback_fcn, see “Example: Writing a Callback Function” on
page 27-7:
1 Create a timer object.

t = timer('StartDelay', 4, 'Period', 4, 'TasksToExecute', 2, ...
'ExecutionMode', 'fixedRate');
2 Specify the value of the StartFcn callback. Note that the example specifies the
value in a cell array because the callback function needs to access arguments passed
to it:
t.StartFcn = {@my_callback_fcn, 'My start message'};
3 Specify the value of the StopFcn callback. Again, the value is specified in a cell
array because the callback function needs to access the arguments passed to it:
t.StopFcn = { @my_callback_fcn, 'My stop message'};
4 Specify the value of the TimerFcn callback. The example specifies the MATLAB
commands in a character vector:
27-8
See Also
t.TimerFcn = @(x,y)disp('Hello World!');

5 Start the timer object:
start(t)
The example outputs the following.

StartFcn event occurred at 10-Mar-2004 17:16:59
My start message
Hello World!
Hello World!
StopFcn event occurred at 10-Mar-2004 17:16:59
My stop message
6 Delete the timer object after you are finished with it.
delete(t)
See Also
timer
More About
27-9
Handling Timer Queuing Conflicts

At busy times, in multiple-execution scenarios, the timer may need to add the timer
callback function (TimerFcn) to the MATLAB execution queue before the previously
queued execution of the callback function has completed. You can determine how the
timer object handles this scenario by setting the BusyMode property to use one of these
modes:
In this section...
“Drop Mode (Default)” on page 27-10
“Error Mode” on page 27-12
“Queue Mode” on page 27-13
Drop Mode (Default)

If you specify 'drop' as the value of the BusyMode property, the timer object adds the
timer callback function to the execution queue only when the queue is empty. If the
execution queue is not empty, the timer object skips the execution of the callback.
For example, suppose you create a timer with a period of 1 second, but a callback that
requires at least 1.6 seconds, as shown here for mytimer.m.
function mytimer()
t = timer;
t.Period = 1;
t.ExecutionMode = 'fixedRate';
t.TimerFcn = @mytimer_cb;
t.BusyMode = 'drop';
t.TasksToExecute = 5;
t.UserData = tic;
start(t)
end
function mytimer_cb(h,~)
timeStart = toc(h.UserData)
pause(1.6);
27-10
Handling Timer Queuing Conflicts
timeEnd = toc(h.UserData)
end
This table describes how the timer manages the execution queue.
Approximate Action
Elapsed Time
(Seconds)
0 Start the first execution of the callback.
1 Attempt to start the second execution of the callback. The first
execution is not complete, but the execution queue is empty. The
timer adds the callback to the queue.
1.6 Finish the first callback execution, and start the second. This action
clears the execution queue.
2 Attempt to start the third callback execution. The second execution is
not complete, but the queue is empty. The timer adds the callback to
the queue.
3 Attempt to start the fourth callback execution. The third callback is
in the execution queue, so the timer drops this execution of the
function.
3.2 Finish the second callback and start the third, clearing the execution
queue.
4 Attempt to start another callback execution. Because the queue is
empty, the timer adds the callback to the queue. This is the fifth
attempt, but only the fourth instance that will run.
4.8 Finish the third execution and start the fourth instance, clearing the
queue.
5 Attempt to start another callback. An instance is running, but the
execution queue is empty, so the timer adds it to the queue. This is
the fifth instance that will run.
6 Do nothing: the value of the TasksToExecute property is 5, and the
fifth instance to run is in the queue.
6.4 Finish the fourth callback execution and start the fifth.
8 Finish the fifth callback execution.
27-11
Error Mode
The 'error' mode for the BusyMode property is similar to the 'drop' mode: In both
modes, the timer allows only one instance of the callback in the execution queue.
However, in 'error' mode, when the queue is nonempty, the timer calls the function
that you specify using the ErrorFcn property, and then stops processing. The currently
running callback function completes, but the callback in the queue does not execute.
For example, modify mytimer.m (described in the previous section) so that it includes an
error handling function and sets BusyMode to 'error'.
function mytimer()
t = timer;
t.Period = 1;
t.ExecutionMode = 'fixedRate';
t.TimerFcn = @mytimer_cb;
t.ErrorFcn = @myerror;
t.BusyMode = 'error';
t.TasksToExecute = 5;
t.UserData = tic;
start(t)
end
function mytimer_cb(h,~)
timeStart = toc(h.UserData)
pause(1.6);
timeEnd = toc(h.UserData)
end
function myerror(h,~)
disp('Reached the error function')
end
This table describes how the timer manages the execution queue.
Approximate Action
Elapsed Time
(Seconds)
0 Start the first execution of the callback.
27-12
See Also
Approximate Action
Elapsed Time
(Seconds)
1 Attempt to start the second execution of the callback. The first
execution is not complete, but the execution queue is empty. The
timer adds the callback to the queue.
1.6 Finish the first callback execution, and start the second. This action
clears the execution queue.
2 Attempt to start the third callback execution. The second execution is
not complete, but the queue is empty. The timer adds the callback to
the queue.
3 Attempt to start the fourth callback execution. The third callback is
in the execution queue. The timer does not execute the third callback,
but instead calls the error handling function.
3.2 Finish the second callback and start the error handling function.
Queue Mode
If you specify 'queue', the timer object waits until the currently executing callback
function finishes before queuing the next execution of the timer callback function.
In 'queue' mode, the timer object tries to make the average time between executions
equal the amount of time specified in the Period property. If the timer object has to wait
longer than the time specified in the Period property between executions of the timer
function callback, it shortens the time period for subsequent executions to make up the
time.
See Also
timer
More About
27-13
28
Performance
• “Measure Performance of Your Program” on page 28-2

• “Profile to Improve Performance” on page 28-5
• “Use Profiler to Determine Code Coverage” on page 28-12
• “Techniques to Improve Performance” on page 28-14
• “Preallocation” on page 28-17
• “Vectorization” on page 28-19
28 Performance
Measure Performance of Your Program

In this section...
“Overview of Performance Timing Functions” on page 28-2
“Time Functions” on page 28-2
“Time Portions of Code” on page 28-2
“The cputime Function vs. tic/toc and timeit” on page 28-3
“Tips for Measuring Performance” on page 28-3
Overview of Performance Timing Functions

The timeit function and the stopwatch timer functions, tic and toc, enable you to
time how long your code takes to run. Use the timeit function for a rigorous
measurement of function execution time. Use tic and toc to estimate time for smaller
portions of code that are not complete functions.
For additional details about the performance of your code, such as function call
information and execution time of individual lines of code, use the MATLAB Profiler. For
more information, see “Profile to Improve Performance” on page 28-5.
Time Functions
To measure the time required to run a function, use the timeit function. The timeit
function calls the specified function multiple times, and returns the median of the
measurements. It takes a handle to the function to be measured and returns the typical
execution time, in seconds. Suppose that you have defined a function,
computeFunction, that takes two inputs, x and y, that are defined in your workspace.
You can compute the time to execute the function using timeit.
f = @() myComputeFunction; % handle to function

timeit(f)
Time Portions of Code

To estimate how long a portion of your program takes to run or to compare the speed of
different implementations of portions of your program, use the stopwatch timer
28-2
Measure Performance of Your Program
functions, tic and toc. Invoking tic starts the timer, and the next toc reads the
elapsed time.
tic
% The program section to time.
toc
Sometimes programs run too fast for tic and toc to provide useful data. If your code is
faster than 1/10 second, consider measuring it running in a loop, and then average to
find the time for a single run.
The cputime Function vs. tic/toc and timeit

It is recommended that you use timeit or tic and toc to measure the performance of
your code. These functions return wall-clock time. Unlike tic and toc,
the timeit function calls your code multiple times, and, therefore, considers first-time
costs.
The cputime function measures the total CPU time and sums across all threads. This
measurement is different from the wall-clock time that timeit or tic/toc return, and
could be misleading. For example:
• The CPU time for the pause function is typically small, but the wall-clock time
accounts for the actual time that MATLAB execution is paused. Therefore, the wall-
clock time might be longer.
• If your function uses four processing cores equally, the CPU time could be
approximately four times higher than the wall-clock time.
Tips for Measuring Performance

Consider the following tips when you are measuring the performance of your code:
• Time a significant enough portion of code. Ideally, the code you are timing should take
more than 1/10 second to run.
• Put the code you are trying to time into a function instead of timing it at the
command line or inside a script.
• Unless you are trying to measure first-time cost, run your code multiple times. Use
the timeit function.
28-3
28 Performance
• Avoid clear all when measuring performance. For more information, see the
clear function.
• Assign your output to a variable instead of letting it default to ans.
See Also
profile | tic | timeit | toc
Related Examples
• MATLAB Performance Measurement White Paper on MATLAB Central File
Exchange
28-4
Profile to Improve Performance

In this section...
“What Is Profiling?” on page 28-5
“Profiling Process and Guidelines” on page 28-5
“Using the Profiler” on page 28-6
“Profile Summary Report” on page 28-8
“Profile Detail Report” on page 28-9
What Is Profiling?
Profiling is a way to measure where a program spends time. After you identify which
functions are consuming the most time, you can evaluate them for possible performance
improvements. Also, you can profile your code as a debugging tool. For example,
determining which lines of code MATLAB does not run can help you develop test cases
that exercise that code. If you get an error in the file when profiling, you can see what
ran and what did not to help you isolate the problem.
Tip Code that is prematurely optimized can be unnecessarily complex without providing
a significant gain in performance. Make your first implementation as simple as possible.
Then, if speed is an issue, use profiling to identify bottlenecks.
You can profile your code using the MATLAB Profiler. The Profiler is a user interface
based on the results returned by the profile function. If you are profiling code that
runs in parallel, for best results use the Parallel Computing Toolbox™ parallel profiler.
For details, see “Profiling Parallel Code” (Parallel Computing Toolbox).
Profiling Process and Guidelines

Use this general process to improve performance in your code:
1 Run the Profiler on your code.

2 In the Profile Summary report, look for functions that use a significant amount of
time or that are called most frequently.
3 View the Profile Detail report for those functions, and look for the lines of code that
take the most time or are called most often.
28-5
28 Performance
Consider keeping a copy of your first detail report as a basis for comparison. After
you change your code, you can run the Profiler again and compare the reports.
4 Determine whether there are changes you can make to those lines of code to improve
performance.
For example, if you have a load statement within a loop, you might be able to move
the load statement outside the loop so that it is called only once.
5 Implement the potential performance improvements in your code. Save the files, and
run clear all. Run the Profiler again and compare the results to the original
report.
If you profile the identical code twice, you can get slightly different results each time
due to inherent time fluctuations that are not dependent on your code.
6 To continue improving the performance of your code, repeat these steps.
When your code spends most of its time on calls to a few built-in functions, you have
probably optimized the code as much as possible.
Using the Profiler

To profile a MATLAB code file or a line of code:
1 Open the Profiler using one of the following methods:
• In the Command Window, type profile viewer.

•
On the Home tab, in the Code section, click Run and Time.
•
In the Editor, on the Editor tab, in the Run section, click Run and Time. If
you use this method, the Profiler automatically profiles the code in the current
Editor tab. If that is the code you want to profile, skip to step 4.
2 In the Run this code field, type the statement you want to run.
For example, you can run the Lotka-Volterra example, which is provided with
MATLAB:
[t,y] = ode23('lotka',[0 2],[20;20])
If, in the current MATLAB session, you previously profiled the statement, select it
from the Run this code list. MATLAB automatically starts profiling the code, and
you can skip to step 4.
28-6
3 Click Start Profiling.
While the Profiler is running, the Profile time indicator is green and the number of
seconds it reports increases. The Profile time indicator appears at the top right of
the Profiler window.
When the Profiler finishes, the Profile time indicator turns black and shows the
length of time the Profiler ran. The statements you profiled display as having been
executed in the Command Window.
This time is not the actual time that your statements took to run. It is the time
elapsed from when you clicked Start Profiling until the profiling stops. If the time
reported is very different from what you expected (for example, hundreds of seconds
for a simple statement), you might have profiled longer than necessary. This time
does not match the time reported in Profile Summary report statistics, which is
based on performance clock time by default. To view profile statistics using a
different type of clock, use the profile function instead of the Profiler.
4 When profiling is complete, the Profile Summary report appears in the Profiler
window. For more information, see “Profile Summary Report” on page 28-8.
Profile Multiple Statements in Command Window
To profile more than one statement:
1 In the Profiler, click Start Profiling. Make sure that no code appears in the Run
this code field.
2 In the Command Window, enter and run the statements you want to profile.
3 After running all the statements, click Stop Profiling in the Profiler, and view the
Profile Summary report.
Profile a User Interface
You can run the Profiler for a user interface, such as the Filter Design and Analysis tool
included with Signal Processing Toolbox. Or, you can profile an interface you created,
such as one built using GUIDE.
To profile a user interface:
28-7
28 Performance
1 In the Profiler, click Start Profiling. Make sure that no code appears in the Run
this code field.
2 Start the user interface.
3 Use the interface. When you finish, click Stop Profiling in the Profiler, and view
the Profile Summary report.
Note To exclude the user interface startup process in the profile, reverse steps 1 and 2.
In other words, start the user interface before you click Start Profiling.
Profile Summary Report

The Profile Summary report presents statistics about the overall execution of the
function and provides summary statistics for each function called. The following is an
image of the Profile Summary report for the Lotka-Volterra model. See “Using the
Profiler” on page 28-6.
28-8
The Profile Summary report presents this information.

Column Description
Function List of all the functions called by the profiled code. Initially the functions
Name appear in order of time they took to process.
Calls Number of times the profiled code called the function.
Total Time Total time spent in a function, including all accessed child functions, in
seconds. The time for a function includes time spent in child functions.
The Profiler itself takes some time, which is included in the results. The
total time can be zero for files whose run time is inconsequential.
Self Time Total time in seconds spent in a function, excluding time spent in any
child functions. Self time also includes some overhead resulting from the
process of profiling.
Total Time Graphic display showing self time compared to total time.
Plot
In the summary report, you can:
• Print the report, by clicking the print button .

• Get more detailed information about a particular function by clicking its name in the
Function Name column. For more information, see “Profile Detail Report” on page
28-9.
• Sort by a given column by clicking the name of the column. For example, click the
Function Name link to sort the functions alphabetically. Initially the results appear
in order by Total Time.
Profile Detail Report

The Profile Detail report shows profiling results for a function that MATLAB called while
profiling.
To open the Profile Detail report, click a function name in the Profile Summary report.
To return to the Profile Summary report from the Profile Detail report, click in the
toolbar of the Profile window.
The header of the Profile Detail report contains this information.
• Name of the profiled function
28-9
28 Performance
• Number of times the parent function called the profiled function

• Time spent in the profiled function
• Link to open the function in your default editor
• Link to copy the report to a separate window. Saving a copy of the report is helpful to
compare the impact of changes to your function. when you change the file.
To specify which sections the Profile Detail Report includes, select the check boxes at the
top of the report, and click the Refresh button. Use the check boxes to select from these
options.
Display Option Details
Show parent functions Display information about the parent functions, with links to
their detail reports. To open a Profile Detail report for a
parent function, click the name of the function.
Show busy lines List the lines in the profiled function that used the greatest
amount of processing time.
Show child functions List all the functions called by the profiled function. To open
a Profile Detail report for a child function, click the name of
the function.
Show Code Analyzer Display information about problems and potential
results improvements for the profiled function.
Show file coverage Display statistics about the lines of code in the function that
MATLAB executed while profiling.
28-10
See Also
Display Option Details

Show function listing Display the source code for the function, if it is a MATLAB
code file.
For each line of code, the Function listing includes these

columns:
• Execution time for each line of code

• Number of times that MATLAB executed the line of code
• The line number
• The source code for the function. The color of the text
indicates the following:
• Green — Commented lines

• Black — Executed lines of code
• Gray — Non-executed lines of code
By default, the Profile Detail report highlights lines of code

with the longest execution time. The darker the highlighting,
the longer the line of code took to execute. To change the
highlighting criteria, use the color highlight code drop-down
list.
See Also
profile
More About
• “Use Profiler to Determine Code Coverage” on page 28-12
28-11
28 Performance
Use Profiler to Determine Code Coverage

When you run the Profiler on a file, some code might not run, such as a block containing
an if statement.
To determine how much of a file MATLAB executed when you profiled it, run the
Coverage Report.
1 Profile your MATLAB code file. For more information, see “Profile to Improve
Performance” on page 28-5 or the profile function.
2 Ensure that the Profiler is not currently profiling.
• In the Profiler, a Stop Profiling button displays if the Profiler is running. If the
Profiler is running, click the Stop Profiling button.
• At the command prompt, check the Profiler status using profile status. If the
ProfilerStatus is 'on', stop the Profiler by typing profile off.
3 Use the Current Folder browser to navigate to the folder containing the profiled code
file.
4 On the Current Folder browser, click , and then select Reports > Coverage
Report.
The Profiler Coverage Report opens, providing a summary of coverage for the
profiled file. In the following image, the profiled file is lengthofline2.m.
28-12
See Also
5 Click the Coverage link to see the Profile Detail Report for the file.
See Also
profile
More About
28-13
28 Performance
Techniques to Improve Performance

In this section...
“Environment” on page 28-14
“Code Structure” on page 28-14
“Programming Practices for Performance” on page 28-14
“Tips on Specific MATLAB Functions” on page 28-15
To speed up the performance of your code, consider these techniques.
Environment
Be aware of background processes that share computational resources and decrease the
performance of your MATLAB code.
Code Structure
While organizing your code:
• Use functions instead of scripts. Functions are generally faster.

• Prefer local functions over nested functions. Use this practice especially if the
function does not need to access variables in the main function.
• Use modular programming. To avoid large files and files with infrequently accessed
code, split your code into simple and cohesive functions. This practice can decrease
first-time run costs.
Programming Practices for Performance

Consider these programming practices to improve the performance of your code.
• Preallocate — Instead of continuously resizing arrays, consider preallocating the

maximum amount of space required for an array. For more information, see
“Preallocation” on page 28-17.
• Vectorize — Instead of writing loop-based code, consider using MATLAB matrix and
vector operations. For more information, see “Vectorization” on page 28-19.
28-14
Techniques to Improve Performance
• Place independent operations outside loops — If code does not evaluate differently
with each for or while loop iteration, move it outside of the loop to avoid redundant
computations.
• Create new variables if data type changes — Create a new variable rather than
assigning data of a different type to an existing variable. Changing the class or array
shape of an existing variable takes extra time to process.
• Use short-circuit operators — Use short-circuiting logical operators, && and || when
possible. Short-circuiting is more efficient because MATLAB evaluates the second
operand only when the result is not fully determined by the first operand. For more
information, see Logical Operators: Short Circuit.
• Avoid global variables — Minimizing the use of global variables is a good
programming practice, and global variables can decrease performance of your
MATLAB code.
• Avoid overloading built-ins — Avoid overloading built-in functions on any standard
MATLAB data classes.
• Avoid using “data as code” — If you have large portions of code (for example, over 500
lines) that generate variables with constant values, consider constructing the
variables and saving them in a MAT-file. Then you can load the variables instead of
executing code to generate them.
Tips on Specific MATLAB Functions

Consider the following tips on specific MATLAB functions when writing performance
critical code.
• Avoid clearing more code than necessary. Do not use clear all programmatically.
For more information, see clear.
• Avoid functions that query the state of MATLAB such as inputname, which, whos,
exist(var), and dbstack. Run-time introspection is computationally expensive.
• Avoid functions such as eval, evalc, evalin, and feval(fname). Use the function
handle input to feval whenever possible. Indirectly evaluating a MATLAB
expression from text is computationally expensive.
• Avoid programmatic use of cd, addpath, and rmpath, when possible. Changing the
MATLAB path during run time results in code recompilation.
28-15
28 Performance
See Also
More About
• “Preallocation” on page 28-17
• “Vectorization” on page 28-19
• “Graphics Performance”
28-16
Preallocation
Preallocation
for and while loops that incrementally increase the size of a data structure each time
through the loop can adversely affect performance and memory use. Repeatedly resizing
arrays often requires MATLAB to spend extra time looking for larger contiguous blocks
of memory, and then moving the array into those blocks. Often, you can improve code
execution time by preallocating the maximum amount of space required for the array.
The following code displays the amount of time needed to create a scalar variable, x, and
then to gradually increase the size of x in a for loop.
tic
x = 0;
for k = 2:1000000
x(k) = x(k-1) + 5;
end
toc
Elapsed time is 0.301528 seconds.
If you preallocate a 1-by-1,000,000 block of memory for x and initialize it to zero, then the
code runs much faster because there is no need to repeatedly reallocate memory for the
growing data structure.
tic
x = zeros(1, 1000000);
for k = 2:1000000
x(k) = x(k-1) + 5;
end
toc
Elapsed time is 0.011938 seconds.
Use the appropriate preallocation function for the kind of array you want to initialize:
• zeros for numeric arrays

• cell for character arrays
Preallocating a Nondouble Matrix

When you preallocate a block of memory to hold a matrix of some type other than
double, avoid using the method
28-17
28 Performance
A = int8(zeros(100));
This statement preallocates a 100-by-100 matrix of int8, first by creating a full matrix
of double values, and then by converts each element to int8. Creating the array as
int8 values saves time and memory. For example:
A = zeros(100, 'int8');
See Also
Related Examples
• “Resizing and Reshaping Matrices”
• “Preallocate Memory for Cell Array” on page 12-18
• “Preallocate Arrays of Graphics Objects”
• “Construct Object Arrays”
More About
28-18
Vectorization
Vectorization
In this section...
“Using Vectorization” on page 28-19
“Array Operations” on page 28-20
“Logical Array Operations” on page 28-22
“Matrix Operations” on page 28-23
“Ordering, Setting, and Counting Operations” on page 28-24
“Functions Commonly Used in Vectorization” on page 28-26
Using Vectorization
MATLAB is optimized for operations involving matrices and vectors. The process of
revising loop-based, scalar-oriented code to use MATLAB matrix and vector operations is
called vectorization. Vectorizing your code is worthwhile for several reasons:
• Appearance: Vectorized mathematical code appears more like the mathematical

expressions found in textbooks, making the code easier to understand.
• Less Error Prone: Without loops, vectorized code is often shorter. Fewer lines of code
mean fewer opportunities to introduce programming errors.
• Performance: Vectorized code often runs much faster than the corresponding code
containing loops.
Vectorizing Code for General Computing
This code computes the sine of 1,001 values ranging from 0 to 10:
i = 0;
for t = 0:.01:10
i = i + 1;
y(i) = sin(t);
end
This is a vectorized version of the same code:
t = 0:.01:10;
y = sin(t);
28-19
28 Performance
The second code sample usually executes faster than the first and is a more efficient use
of MATLAB. Test execution speed on your system by creating scripts that contain the
code shown, and then use the tic and toc functions to measure their execution time.
Vectorizing Code for Specific Tasks
This code computes the cumulative sum of a vector at every fifth element:
x = 1:10000;
ylength = (length(x) - mod(length(x),5))/5;
y(1:ylength) = 0;
for n= 5:5:length(x)
y(n/5) = sum(x(1:n));
end
Using vectorization, you can write a much more concise MATLAB process. This code
shows one way to accomplish the task:
x = 1:10000;
xsums = cumsum(x);
y = xsums(5:5:length(x));
Array Operations
Array operators perform the same operation for all elements in the data set. These types
of operations are useful for repetitive calculations. For example, suppose you collect the
volume (V) of various cones by recording their diameter (D) and height (H). If you collect
the information for just one cone, you can calculate the volume for that single cone:
V = 1/12*pi*(D^2)*H;
Now, collect information on 10,000 cones. The vectors D and H each contain 10,000
elements, and you want to calculate 10,000 volumes. In most programming languages,
you need to set up a loop similar to this MATLAB code:
for n = 1:10000
V(n) = 1/12*pi*(D(n)^2)*H(n));
end
With MATLAB, you can perform the calculation for each element of a vector with similar
syntax as the scalar case:
% Vectorized Calculation
V = 1/12*pi*(D.^2).*H;
28-20
Vectorization
Note Placing a period (.) before the operators *, /, and ^, transforms them into array
operators.
Array operators also enable you to combine matrices of different dimensions. This
automatic expansion of size-1 dimensions is useful for vectorizing grid creation, matrix
and vector operations, and more.
Suppose that matrix A represents test scores, the rows of which denote different classes.
You want to calculate the difference between the average score and individual scores for
each class. Using a loop, the operation looks like:
A = [97 89 84; 95 82 92; 64 80 99;76 77 67;...
88 59 74; 78 66 87; 55 93 85];
mA = mean(A);
B = zeros(size(A));
for n = 1:size(A,2)
B(:,n) = A(:,n) - mA(n);
end
A more direct way to do this is with A - mean(A), which avoids the need of a loop and is
significantly faster.
devA = A - mean(A)
devA =
18 11 0
16 4 8
-15 2 15
-3 -1 -17
9 -19 -10
-1 -12 3
-24 15 1
Even though A is a 7-by-3 matrix and mean(A) is a 1-by-3 vector, MATLAB implicitly
expands the vector as if it had the same size as the matrix, and the operation executes as
a normal element-wise minus operation.
The size requirement for the operands is that for each dimension, the arrays must either
have the same size or one of them is 1. If this requirement is met, then dimensions where
one of the arrays has size 1 are expanded to be the same size as the corresponding
28-21
28 Performance
dimension in the other array. For more information, see “Compatible Array Sizes for
Basic Operations” on page 2-19.
Another area where implicit expansion is useful for vectorization is if you are working
with multidimensional data. Suppose you want to evaluate a function, F, of two
variables, x and y.
F(x,y) = x*exp(-x2 - y2)
To evaluate this function at every combination of points in the x and y vectors, you need
to define a grid of values. For this task you should avoid using loops to iterate through
the point combinations. Instead, if one of the vectors is a column and the other is a row,
then MATLAB automatically constructs the grid when the vectors are used with an array
operator, such as x+y or x-y. In this example, x is a 21-by-1 vector and y is a 1-by-16
vector, so the operation produces a 21-by-16 matrix by expanding the second dimension
of x and the first dimension of y.
x = (-2:0.2:2)'; % 21-by-1
y = -1.5:0.2:1.5; % 1-by-16
F = x.*exp(-x.^2-y.^2); % 21-by-16
In cases where you want to explicitly create the grids, you can use the meshgrid and
ndgrid functions.
Logical Array Operations

A logical extension of the bulk processing of arrays is to vectorize comparisons and
decision making. MATLAB comparison operators accept vector inputs and return vector
outputs.
For example, suppose while collecting data from 10,000 cones, you record several
negative values for the diameter. You can determine which values in a vector are valid
with the >= operator:
D = [-0.2 1.0 1.5 3.0 -1.0 4.2 3.14];

D >= 0
ans =
0 1 1 1 0 1 1
28-22
Vectorization
You can directly exploit the logical indexing power of MATLAB to select the valid cone
volumes, Vgood, for which the corresponding elements of D are nonnegative:
Vgood = V(D >= 0);
MATLAB allows you to perform a logical AND or OR on the elements of an entire vector
with the functions all and any, respectively. You can throw a warning if all values of D
are below zero:
if all(D < 0)
warning('All values of diameter are negative.')
return
end
MATLAB can also compare two vectors with compatible sizes, allowing you to impose
further restrictions. This code finds all the values where V is nonnegative and D is
greater than H:
V((V >= 0) & (D > H))
The resulting vector is the same size as the inputs.
To aid comparison, MATLAB contains special values to denote overflow, underflow, and
undefined operators, such as Inf and NaN. Logical operators isinf and isnan exist to
help perform logical tests for these special values. For example, it is often useful to
exclude NaN values from computations:
x = [2 -1 0 3 NaN 2 NaN 11 4 Inf];

xvalid = x(~isnan(x))
xvalid =
2 -1 0 3 2 11 4 Inf
Note Inf == Inf returns true; however, NaN == NaN always returns false.
Matrix Operations
When vectorizing code, you often need to construct a matrix with a particular size or
structure. Techniques exist for creating uniform matrices. For instance, you might need a
5-by-5 matrix of equal elements:
28-23
28 Performance
A = ones(5,5)*10;
Or, you might need a matrix of repeating values:
v = 1:5;
A = repmat(v,3,1)
A =
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
The function repmat possesses flexibility in building matrices from smaller matrices or
vectors. repmat creates matrices by repeating an input matrix:
A = repmat(1:3,5,2)
B = repmat([1 2; 3 4],2,2)
A =
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
B =
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
Ordering, Setting, and Counting Operations

In many applications, calculations done on an element of a vector depend on other
elements in the same vector. For example, a vector, x, might represent a set. How to
iterate through a set without a for or while loop is not obvious. The process becomes
much clearer and the syntax less cumbersome when you use vectorized code.
28-24
Vectorization
Eliminating Redundant Elements
A number of different ways exist for finding the redundant elements of a vector. One way
involves the function diff. After sorting the vector elements, equal adjacent elements
produce a zero entry when you use the diff function on that vector. Because diff(x)
produces a vector that has one fewer element than x, you must add an element that is
not equal to any other element in the set. NaN always satisfies this condition. Finally, you
can use logical indexing to choose the unique elements in the set:
x = [2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 1 3];
x = sort(x);
difference = diff([x,NaN]);
y = x(difference~=0)
y =
1 2 3
Alternatively, you could accomplish the same operation by using the unique function:
y=unique(x);
However, the unique function might provide more functionality than is needed and slow
down the execution of your code. Use the tic and toc functions if you want to measure
the performance of each code snippet.
Counting Elements in a Vector
Rather than merely returning the set, or subset, of x, you can count the occurrences of an
element in a vector. After the vector sorts, you can use the find function to determine
the indices of zero values in diff(x) and to show where the elements change value. The
difference between subsequent indices from the find function indicates the number of
occurrences for a particular element:
x = [2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 1 3];
x = sort(x);
difference = diff([x,max(x)+1]);
count = diff(find([1,difference]))
y = x(find(difference))
count =
3 4 3
28-25
28 Performance
y =
1 2 3
The find function does not return indices for NaN elements. You can count the number of
NaN and Inf values using the isnan and isinf functions.
count_nans = sum(isnan(x(:)));
count_infs = sum(isinf(x(:)));
Functions Commonly Used in Vectorization

all Determine if all array elements are nonzero or true
any Determine if any array elements are nonzero
cumsum Cumulative sum
diff Differences and Approximate Derivatives
find Find indices and values of nonzero elements
ind2sub Subscripts from linear index
ipermute Inverse permute dimensions of N-D array
logical Convert numeric values to logicals
meshgrid Rectangular grid in 2-D and 3-D space
ndgrid Rectangular grid in N-D space
permute Rearrange dimensions of N-D array
prod Product of array elements
repmat Repeat copies of array
reshape Reshape array
shiftdim Shift dimensions
sort Sort array elements
squeeze Remove singleton dimensions
sub2ind Convert subscripts to linear indices
sum Sum of array elements
28-26
See Also
See Also
More About
• “Matrix Indexing”
External Websites
• MathWorks Newsletter: Matrix Indexing in MATLAB
28-27
29
Memory Usage
• “Strategies for Efficient Use of Memory” on page 29-2

• “Resolve “Out of Memory” Errors” on page 29-9
29 Memory Usage
Strategies for Efficient Use of Memory

In this section...
“Ways to Reduce the Amount of Memory Required” on page 29-2
“Using Appropriate Data Storage” on page 29-4
“How to Avoid Fragmenting Memory” on page 29-6
“Reclaiming Used Memory” on page 29-8
Ways to Reduce the Amount of Memory Required

The source of many "out of memory" problems often involves analyzing or processing an
existing large set of data such as in a file or a database. This requires bringing all or part
of the data set into the MATLAB software process. The following techniques deal with
minimizing the required memory during this stage.
Load Only As Much Data As You Need
Only import into MATLAB as much of a large data set as you need for the problem you
are trying to solve. This is not usually a problem when importing from sources such as a
database, where you can explicitly search for elements matching a query. But this is a
common problem with loading large flat text or binary files. Rather than loading the
entire file, use the appropriate MATLAB function to load parts of files.
MAT-Files
Load part of a variable by indexing into an object that you create with the matfile
function.
Text Files
Use the textscan function to access parts of a large text file by reading only the selected
columns and rows. If you specify the number of rows or a repeat format number with
textscan, MATLAB calculates the exact amount of memory required beforehand.
Binary Files
You can use low-level binary file I/O functions, such as fread, to access parts of any file
that has a known format. For binary files of an unknown format, try using memory
mapping with the memmapfile function.
29-2
Image, HDF, Audio, and Video Files
Many of the MATLAB functions that support loading from these types of files allow you
to select portions of the data to read. For details, see the function reference pages listed
in “Supported File Formats for Import and Export”.
Process Data By Blocks
Consider block processing, that is, processing a large data set one section at a time in a
loop. Reducing the size of the largest array in a data set reduces the size of any copies or
temporaries needed. You can use this technique in either of two ways:
• For a subset of applications that you can break into separate chunks and process
independently.
• For applications that only rely on the state of a previous block, such as filtering.
Avoid Creating Temporary Arrays
Avoid creating large temporary variables, and also make it a practice to clear those
temporary variables you do use when they are no longer needed. For example, when you
create a large array of zeros, instead of saving to a temporary variable A, and then
converting A to a single:
A = zeros(1e6,1);
As = single(A);
use just the one command to do both operations:

A = zeros(1e6,1,'single');
Using the repmat function, array preallocation and for loops are other ways to work on
nondouble data without requiring temporary storage in memory.
Use Nested Functions to Pass Fewer Arguments
When working with large data sets, be aware that MATLAB makes a temporary copy of
an input variable if the called function modifies its value. This temporarily doubles the
memory required to store the array, which causes MATLAB to generate an error if
sufficient memory is not available.
One way to use less memory in this situation is to use nested functions. A nested
function shares the workspace of all outer functions, giving the nested function access to
29-3
29 Memory Usage
data outside of its usual scope. In the example shown here, nested function setrowval
has direct access to the workspace of the outer function myfun, making it unnecessary to
pass a copy of the variable in the function call. When setrowval modifies the value of A,
it modifies it in the workspace of the calling function. There is no need to use additional
memory to hold a separate array for the function being called, and there also is no need
to return the modified value of A:
function myfun
A = magic(500);
function setrowval(row, value)

A(row,:) = value;
end
setrowval(400, 0);
disp('The new value of A(399:401,1:10) is')
A(399:401,1:10)
end
Using Appropriate Data Storage

MATLAB provides you with different sizes of data classes, such as double and uint8, so
you do not need to use large classes to store your smaller segments of data. For example,
it takes 7 KB less memory to store 1,000 small unsigned integer values using the uint8
class than it does with double.
Use the Appropriate Numeric Class
The numeric class you should use in MATLAB depends on your intended actions. The
default class double gives the best precision, but requires 8 bytes per element of
memory to store. If you intend to perform complicated math such as linear algebra, you
must use a floating-point class such as a double or single. The single class requires
only 4 bytes. There are some limitations on what you can do with the single class, but
most MATLAB Math operations are supported.
If you just need to carry out simple arithmetic and you represent the original data as
integers, you can use the integer classes in MATLAB. The following is a list of numeric
classes, memory requirements (in bytes), and the supported operations.
Class (Data Type) Bytes Supported Operations
single 4 Most math
29-4
Class (Data Type) Bytes Supported Operations

double 8 All math
logical 1 Logical/conditional operations
int8, uint8 1 Arithmetic and some simple functions
int64, int64 8 Arithmetic and some simple functions
Reduce the Amount of Overhead When Storing Data
MATLAB arrays (implemented internally as mxArrays) require room to store meta

information about the data in memory, such as type, dimensions, and attributes. This
takes about 80 bytes per array. This overhead only becomes an issue when you have a
large number (e.g., hundreds or thousands) of small mxArrays (e.g., scalars). The whos
command lists the memory used by variables, but does not include this overhead.
Because simple numeric arrays (comprising one mxArray) have the least overhead, you
should use them wherever possible. When data is too complex to store in a simple array
(or matrix), you can use other data structures.
Cell arrays are comprised of separate mxArrays for each element. As a result, cell arrays
with many small elements have a large overhead.
Structures require a similar amount of overhead per field (see “Array Headers” on page
29-14). Structures with many fields and small contents have a large overhead and
should be avoided. A large array of structures with numeric scalar fields requires much
more memory than a structure with fields containing large numeric arrays.
Also note that while MATLAB stores numeric arrays in contiguous memory, this is not
the case for structures and cell arrays.
Import Data to the Appropriate MATLAB Class
When reading data from a binary file with fread, it is a common error to specify only the
class of the data in the file, and not the class of the data MATLAB uses once it is in the
workspace. As a result, the default double is used even if you are reading only 8-bit
values. For example,
fid = fopen('large_file_of_uint8s.bin', 'r');
a = fread(fid, 1e3, 'uint8'); % Requires 8k
29-5
29 Memory Usage
whos a
a 1000x1 8000 double
a = fread(fid, 1e3, 'uint8=>uint8'); % Requires 1k

whos a
a 1000x1 1000 uint8
Make Arrays Sparse When Possible
If your data contains many zeros, consider using sparse arrays, which store only nonzero
elements. The following example compares the space required for storage of an array of
mainly zeros:
A = eye(1000); % Full matrix with ones on the diagonal

As = sparse(A); % Sparse matrix with only nonzero elements
whos
A 1000x1000 8000000 double

As 1000x1000 24008 double sparse
You can see that this array requires only approximately 4 KB to be stored as sparse, but
approximately 8 MB as a full matrix. In general, for a sparse double array with nnz
nonzero elements and ncol columns, the memory required is
• 16 * nnz + 8 * ncol + 8 bytes (on a 64-bit machine)

• 12 * nnz + 4 * ncol + 4 bytes (on a 32-bit machine)
Note that MATLAB does not support all mathematical operations on sparse arrays.
How to Avoid Fragmenting Memory

MATLAB always uses a contiguous segment of memory to store a numeric array. As you
manipulate this data, however, the contiguous block can become fragmented. When
memory is fragmented, there might be plenty of free space, but not enough contiguous
memory to store a new large variable. Increasing fragmentation can use significantly
more memory than is necessary.
29-6
Preallocate Contiguous Memory When Creating Arrays
In the course of a MATLAB session, memory can become fragmented due to dynamic
memory allocation and deallocation. for and while loops that incrementally increase, or
grow, the size of a data structure each time through the loop can add to this
fragmentation as they have to repeatedly find and allocate larger blocks of memory to
store the data.
To make more efficient use of your memory, preallocate a block of memory large enough
to hold the matrix at its final size before entering the loop. When you preallocate memory
for an array, MATLAB reserves sufficient contiguous space for the entire full-size array
at the beginning of the computation. Once you have this space, you can add elements to
the array without having to continually allocate new space for it in memory.
For more information on preallocation, see “Preallocation” on page 28-17.
Allocate Your Larger Arrays First
MATLAB uses a heap method of memory management. It requests memory from the
operating system when there is not enough memory available in the heap to store the
current variables. It reuses memory as long as the size of the memory segment required
is available in the heap.
The following statements can require approximately 4.3 MB of RAM. This is because
MATLAB might not be able to reuse the space previously occupied by two 1 MB arrays
when allocating space for a 2.3 MB array:
a = rand(1e6,1);
b = rand(1e6,1);
clear
c = rand(2.3e6,1);
The simplest way to prevent overallocation of memory is to allocate the largest vectors
first. These statements require only about 2.0 MB of RAM:
c = rand(2.3e6,1);
clear
a = rand(1e6,1);
b = rand(1e6,1);
Long-Term Usage (Windows Systems Only)
On 32-bit Microsoft Windows, the workspace of MATLAB can fragment over time due to
the fact that the Windows memory manager does not return blocks of certain types and
29-7
29 Memory Usage
sizes to the operating system. Clearing the MATLAB workspace does not fix this
problem. You can minimize the problem by allocating the largest variables first. This
cannot address, however, the eventual fragmentation of the workspace that occurs from
continual use of MATLAB over many days and weeks, for example. The only solution to
this is to save your work and restart MATLAB.
The pack command, which saves all variables to disk and loads them back, does not help
with this situation.
Reclaiming Used Memory

One simple way to increase the amount of memory you have available is to clear large
arrays that you no longer use.
Save Your Large Data Periodically to Disk
If your program generates very large amounts of data, consider writing the data to disk
periodically. After saving that portion of the data, use the clear function to remove the
variable from memory and continue with the data generation.
Clear Old Variables from Memory When No Longer Needed
When you are working with a very large data set repeatedly or interactively, clear the old
variable first to make space for the new variable. Otherwise, MATLAB requires
temporary storage of equal size before overriding the variable. For example,
a = rand(100e6,1) % 800 MB array
b = rand(100e6,1) % New 800 MB array
Error using rand
Out of memory. Type HELP MEMORY for your options.
clear a
a = rand(100e6,1) % New 800 MB array
29-8
Resolve “Out of Memory” Errors
Resolve “Out of Memory” Errors
In this section...
“General Suggestions for Reclaiming Memory” on page 29-9
“Increase System Swap Space” on page 29-10
“Set the Process Limit on Linux Systems” on page 29-10
“Disable Java VM on Linux Systems” on page 29-10
“Free System Resources on Windows Systems” on page 29-11
General Suggestions for Reclaiming Memory

The MATLAB software is a 64-bit application that runs on 64-bit operating systems. It
generates an Out of Memory message whenever it requests a segment of memory from
the operating system that is larger than what is available. When you see the Out of
Memory message, use any of the techniques discussed under “Strategies for Efficient Use
of Memory” on page 29-2 to help optimize the available memory including:
• Reducing required memory

• Selecting appropriate data storage
• Using contiguous memory
• Reclaiming used memory
If the Out of Memory message still appears, you can try any of the following:
• If possible, reduce the size of your data. For example, break large matrices into
several smaller matrices so that less memory is used at any one time.
• If you have large files and data sets, see “Large Files and Big Data”.
• Make sure that there are no external constraints on the memory accessible to
MATLAB. On Linux® systems, use the limit command to investigate.
• Increase the size of the swap file. We recommend that you configure your system with
twice as much swap space as you have RAM. For more information, see “Increase
System Swap Space” on page 29-10.
• Add more memory to the system.
29-9
29 Memory Usage
Increase System Swap Space

The total memory available to applications on your computer is composed of physical
memory (RAM), plus a page file, or swap file, on disk. The swap file can be very large (for
example, 512 terabytes on 64-bit Windows). The operating system allocates the virtual
memory for each process to physical memory or to the swap file, depending on the needs
of the system and other processes.
Most systems enable you to control the size of your swap file. The steps involved depend
on your operating system.
• Windows Systems — Use the Windows Control Panel to change the size of the virtual
memory paging file on your system. For more information, refer to the Windows help.
• Linux Systems — Change your swap space by using the mkswap and swapon
commands. For more information, at the Linux prompt type man followed by the
command name.
There is no interface for directly controlling the swap space on macOS systems.
Set the Process Limit on Linux Systems

The process limit is the maximum amount of virtual memory a single process (or
application) can address. The process limit must be large enough to accommodate:
• All the data to process

• MATLAB program files
• The MATLAB executable itself
• Additional state information
The 64-bit operating systems support a process limit of 8 terabytes. On Linux systems,
see the ulimit command to view and set user limits including virtual memory.
Disable Java VM on Linux Systems

On Linux systems, if you start MATLAB without the Java JVM™, you can increase the
available workspace memory by approximately 400 megabytes. To start MATLAB
without Java JVM, use the command-line option -nojvm. This option also increases the
size of the largest contiguous memory block by about the same. By increasing the largest
contiguous memory block, you increase the largest possible matrix size.
29-10
See Also
Using -nojvm comes with a penalty in that you lose many features that rely on the Java
software, including the entire development environment. Starting MATLAB with the -
nodesktop option does not save any substantial amount of memory.
Free System Resources on Windows Systems

There are no MATLAB functions to manipulate the way MATLAB handles Microsoft
Windows system resources. Windows systems use these resources to track fonts,
windows, and screen objects. For example, using multiple figure windows, multiple fonts,
or several UI controls can deplete resources. One way to free up system resources is to
close all inactive windows. Windows system icons still use resources.
If total system memory is the limiting factor, shutting down other applications and
services can help (for example, using msconfig on Windows systems). However, the
process limit is usually the main limiting factor.
See Also
memory
Related Examples
• “Strategies for Efficient Use of Memory” on page 29-2
• “Large Files and Big Data”
• “Java Heap Memory Preferences”
29-11
29 Memory Usage
How MATLAB Allocates Memory
In this section...
“Memory Allocation for Arrays” on page 29-12
“Data Structures and Memory” on page 29-16
Memory Allocation for Arrays

The following topics provide information on how the MATLAB software allocates memory
when working with arrays and variables. The purpose is to help you use memory more
efficiently when writing code. Most of the time, however, you should not need to be
concerned with these internal operations as MATLAB handles data storage for you
automatically.
• “Creating and Modifying Arrays” on page 29-12

• “Copying Arrays” on page 29-13
• “Array Headers” on page 29-14
• “Function Arguments” on page 29-15
Note Any information on how the MATLAB software handles data internally is subject
to change in future releases.
Creating and Modifying Arrays
When you assign a numeric or character array to a variable, MATLAB allocates a

contiguous virtual block of memory and stores the array data in that block. MATLAB
also stores information about the array data, such as its class and dimensions, in a
separate, small block of memory called a header.
If you add new elements to an existing array, MATLAB expands the existing array in
memory in a way that keeps its storage contiguous. This usually requires finding a new
block of memory large enough to hold the expanded array. MATLAB then copies the
contents of the array from its original location to this new block in memory, adds the new
elements to the array in this block, and frees up the original array location in memory.
29-12
If you remove elements from an existing array, MATLAB keeps the memory storage
contiguous by removing the deleted elements, and then compacting its storage in the
original memory location.
Working with Large Data Sets
If you are working with large data sets, you need to be careful when increasing the size of
an array to avoid getting errors caused by insufficient memory. If you expand the array
beyond the available contiguous memory of its original location, MATLAB must make a
copy of the array and set this copy to the new value. During this operation, there are two
copies of the original array in memory. This temporarily doubles the amount of memory
required for the array and increases the risk of your program running out of memory
during execution. It is better to preallocate sufficient memory for the largest potential
size of the array at the start. See “Preallocation” on page 28-17.
Copying Arrays
Internally, multiple variables can point to the same block of data, thus sharing that
array's value. When you copy a variable to another variable (e.g., B = A), MATLAB
makes a copy of the array reference, but not the array itself. As long as you do not modify
the contents of the array, there is no need to store more than one copy of it. If you do
modify any elements of the array, MATLAB makes a copy of the array and then modifies
that copy.
The following example demonstrates this. Start by creating a simple script memUsed.m to
display how much memory is being used by your MATLAB process. Put these two lines of
code in the script:
[usr, sys] = memory;
usr.MemUsedMATLAB
Get an initial reading of how much memory is being used by your MATLAB process:
format short eng;
memUsed
ans =
295.4977e+006
Create a 2000-by-2000 numeric array A. This uses about 32MB of memory:

A = magic(2000);
memUsed
ans =
327.6349e+006
29-13
29 Memory Usage
Make a copy of array A in B. As there is no need to have two copies of the array data,
MATLAB only makes a copy of the array reference. This requires no significant
additional memory:
B = A;
memUsed
ans =
327.6349e+006
Now modify B by making it one half its original size (that is, set 1000 rows to empty).
This requires that MATLAB make a copy of at least the first 1000 rows of the A array,
and assign that copy to B:
B(1001:2000,:) = [];
format short; size(B)
ans =
1000 2000
Check the memory used again. Even though B is significantly smaller than it was
originally, the amount of memory used by the MATLAB process has increased by about
16 MB (1/2 of the 32 MB originally required for A) because B could no longer remain as
just a reference to A:
format short eng; memUsed

ans =
343.6421e+006
Array Headers
When you assign an array to a variable, MATLAB also stores information about the
array (such as class and dimensions) in a separate piece of memory called a header. For
most arrays, the memory required to store the header is insignificant. There is a small
advantage to storing large data sets in a small number of large arrays as opposed to a
large number of small arrays. This is because the former configuration requires fewer
array headers.
Structure and Cell Arrays
For structures and cell arrays, MATLAB creates a header not only for each array, but
also for each field of the structure and for each cell of a cell array. Because of this, the
amount of memory required to store a structure or cell array depends not only on how
much data it holds, but also on how it is constructed.
29-14
For example, take a scalar structure array S1 having fields R, G, and B. Each field of size
100-by-50 requires one array header to describe the overall structure, one header for
each unique field name, and one header per field for the 1-by-1 structure array. This
makes a total of seven array headers for the entire data structure:
S1.R(1:100,1:50)
S1.G(1:100,1:50)
S1.B(1:100,1:50)
On the other hand, take a 100-by-50 structure array S2 in which each element has scalar
fields R, G, and B. In this case, you need one array header to describe the overall
structure, one for each unique field name, and one per field for each of the 5,000 elements
of the structure, making a total of 15,004 array headers for the entire data structure:
S2(1:100,1:50).R
S2(1:100,1:50).G
S2(1:100,1:50).B
Even though S1 and S2 contain the same amount of data, S1 uses significantly less space
in memory. Not only is less memory required, but there is a corresponding speed benefit
to using the S1 format, as well.
See “Cell Arrays” and “Structures” under “Data Structures and Memory” on page 29-16.
Memory Usage Reported By the whos Function
The whos function displays the amount of memory consumed by any variable. For
reasons of simplicity, whos reports only the memory used to store the actual data. It does
not report storage for the array header, for example.
Function Arguments
MATLAB handles arguments passed in function calls in a similar way. When you pass a
variable to a function, you are actually passing a reference to the data that the variable
represents. As long as the input data is not modified by the function being called, the
variable in the calling function and the variable in the called function point to the same
location in memory. If the called function modifies the value of the input data, then
MATLAB makes a copy of the original array in a new location in memory, updates that
copy with the modified value, and points the input variable in the called function to this
new array.
In the example below, function myfun modifies the value of the array passed into it.
MATLAB makes a copy in memory of the array pointed to by A, sets variable X as a
29-15
29 Memory Usage
reference to this new array, and then sets one row of X to zero. The array referenced by A
remains unchanged:
A = magic(500);
myfun(A);
function myfun(X)
X(400,:) = 0;
If the calling function needs the modified value of the array it passed to myfun, you need
to return the updated array as an output of the called function, as shown here for
variable A:
A = magic(500);
A = myfun(A);
sprintf('The new value of A is %d', A)
function Y = myfun(X)
X(400,:) = 0;
Y = X;
Data Structures and Memory

Memory requirements differ for the various types of MATLAB data structures. You
might be able to reduce the amount of memory used for these structures by considering
how MATLAB stores them.
Numeric Arrays
MATLAB requires 1, 2, 4, or 8 bytes to store 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit, and 64-bit signed and
unsigned integers, respectively. For floating-point numbers, MATLAB uses 4 or 8 bytes
for single and double types. To conserve memory when working with numeric arrays,
MathWorks recommends that you use the smallest integer or floating-point type that
contains your data without overflowing. For more information, see “Numeric Types”.
Complex Arrays
MATLAB stores complex data as separate real and imaginary parts. If you make a copy
of a complex array variable, and then modify only the real or imaginary part of the array,
MATLAB creates an array containing both real and imaginary parts.
29-16
Sparse Matrices
It is best to store matrices with values that are mostly zero in sparse format. Sparse
matrices can use less memory and might also be faster to manipulate than full matrices.
You can convert a full matrix to sparse format using the sparse function.
Compare two 1000-by-1000 matrices: X, a matrix of doubles with 2/3 of its elements equal
to zero; and Y, a sparse copy of X. The following example shows that the sparse matrix
requires approximately half as much memory:
whos
X 1000x1000 8000000 double array

Y 1000x1000 4004000 double array (sparse)
Cell Arrays
In addition to data storage, cell arrays require a certain amount of additional memory to
store information describing each cell. This information is recorded in a header, and
there is one header for each cell of the array. You can determine the amount of memory
required for a cell array header by finding the number of bytes consumed by a 1-by-1 cell
that contains no data, as shown below for a 32-bit system:
A = {[]}; % Empty cell array
whos A
A 1x1 60 cell
In this case, MATLAB shows the number of bytes required for each header in the cell
array on a 32-bit system to be 60. This is the header size that is used in all of the 32-bit
examples in this section. For 64-bit systems, the header size is assumed to be 112 bytes
in this documentation. You can find the correct header size on a 64-bit system using the
method just shown for 32 bits.
To predict the size of an entire cell array, multiply the number you have just derived for
the header by the total number of cells in the array, and then add to that the number of
bytes required for the data you intend to store in the array:
(header_size x number_of_cells) + data
29-17
29 Memory Usage
So a 10-by-20 cell array that contains 400 bytes of data would require 22,800 bytes of
memory on a 64-bit system:
(112 x 200) + 400 = 22800
Note While numeric arrays must be stored in contiguous memory, structures and cell
arrays do not.
Example 1 – Memory Allocation for a Cell Array
The following 4-by-1 cell array records the brand name, screen size, price, and on-sale
status for three laptop computers:
Laptops = {['SuperrrFast 89X', 'ReliablePlus G5', ...
'UCanA4dIt 140L6']; ...
[single(17), single(15.4), single(14.1)]; ...
[2499.99, 1199.99, 499.99]; ...
[true, true, false]};
On a 32-bit system, the cell array header alone requires 60 bytes per cell:
4 cells * 60 bytes per cell = 240 bytes for the cell array
Calculate the memory required to contain the data in each of the four cells:
45 characters * 2 bytes per char = 90 bytes
3 doubles * 8 bytes per double = 24 bytes
3 singles * 4 bytes per single = 12 bytes
3 logicals * 1 byte per logical = 3 bytes
90 + 24 + 12 + 3 = 129 bytes for the data
Add the two, and then compare your result with the size returned by MATLAB:
240 + 129 = 369 bytes total
whos Laptops
Laptops 4x1 369 cell
Structures
S.A = [];
B = whos('S');
29-18
B.bytes - 60
ans =
64
Compute the memory needed for a structure array as follows:
32-bit systems: fields x ((60 x array elements) + 64) + data

64-bit systems: fields x ((112 x array elements) + 64) + data
On a 64-bit computer system, a 4-by-5 structure Clients with fields Address and
Phone uses 4,608 bytes just for the structure:
2 fields x ((112 x 20) + 64) = 2 x (2240 + 64) = 4608 bytes
To that sum, you must add the memory required to hold the data assigned to each field.
If you assign a 25-character vector to Address and a 12-character vector to Phone in
each element of the 4-by-5 Clients array, you use 1480 bytes for data:
(25+12) characters * 2 bytes per char * 20 elements = 1480 bytes
Add the two and you see that the entire structure consumes 6,088 bytes of memory.
Example 1 – Memory Allocation for a Structure Array
Compute the amount of memory that would be required to store the following 6-by-5
structure array having the following four fields on a 32-bit system:
A: 5-by-8-by-6 signed 8-bit integer array

B: 1-by-500 single array
C: 30-by-30 unsigned 16-bit integer array
D: 1-by-27 character array
Construct the array:
A = int8(ones(5,8,6));
B = single(1:500);
C = uint16(magic(30));
D = 'Company Name: MathWorks';
s = struct('f1', A, 'f2', B, 'f3', C, 'f4', D);
for m=1:6
for n=1:5
s(m,n)=s(1,1);
29-19
29 Memory Usage
end
end
Calculate the amount of memory required for the structure itself, and then for the data it
contains:
structure = fields x ((60 x array elements) + 64) =
4 x ((60 x 30) + 64) = 7,456 bytes
data = (field1 + field2 + field3 + field4) x array elements =

(240 + 2000 + 1800 + 54) x 30 = 122,820 bytes
Add the two, and then compare your result with the size returned by MATLAB:
Total bytes calculated for structure s: 7,456 + 122,820 = 130,276
whos s
s 6x5 130036 struct
29-20
30
Custom Help and Documentation
• “Create Help for Classes” on page 30-2

• “Check Which Programs Have Help” on page 30-9
30 Custom Help and Documentation
Create Help for Classes

In this section...
“Help Text from the doc Command” on page 30-2
“Custom Help Text” on page 30-3
Help Text from the doc Command

When you use the doc command to display help for a class, MATLAB automatically
displays information that it derives from the class definition.
For example, create a class definition file named someClass.m with several properties
and methods, as shown.
classdef someClass
% someClass Summary of this class goes here
% Detailed explanation goes here
properties
One % First public property
Two % Second public property
end
properties (Access=private)
Three % Do not show this property
end
methods
function obj = someClass
% Summary of constructor
end
function myMethod(obj)
% Summary of myMethod
disp(obj)
end
end
methods (Static)
function myStaticMethod
% Summary of myStaticMethod
end
end
end
30-2
View the help text and the details from the class definition using the doc command.
doc someClass
Custom Help Text

You can add information about your classes that both the doc command and the help
command include in their displays. The doc command displays the help text at the top of
the generated HTML pages, above the information derived from the class definition. The
help command displays the help text in the Command Window. For details, see:
• “Classes” on page 30-4

• “Methods” on page 30-5
• “Properties” on page 30-5
• “Enumerations” on page 30-6
30-3
• “Events” on page 30-7
Classes
Create help text for classes by including comments on lines immediately after the
classdef statement in a file. For example, create a file named myClass.m, as shown.
classdef myClass
% myClass Summary of myClass
% This is the first line of the description of myClass.
% Descriptions can include multiple lines of text.
%
% myClass Properties:
% a - Description of a
% b - Description of b
%
% myClass Methods:
% doThis - Description of doThis
% doThat - Description of doThat
properties
a
b
end
methods
function obj = myClass
end
function doThis(obj)
end
function doThat(obj)
end
end
end
Lists and descriptions of the properties and methods in the initial comment block are
optional. If you include comment lines containing the class name followed by
Properties or Methods and a colon (:), then MATLAB creates hyperlinks to the help
for the properties or methods.
View the help text for the class in the Command Window using the help command.
help myClass
30-4
myClass Summary of myClass

This is the first line of the description of myClass.
Descriptions can include multiple lines of text.
myClass Properties:
a - Description of a
b - Description of b
myClass Methods:
doThis - Description of doThis
doThat - Description of doThat
Methods
Create help for a method by inserting comments immediately after the function
definition statement. For example, modify the class definition file myClass.m to include
help for the doThis method.
function doThis(obj)
% doThis Do this thing
% Here is some help text for the doThis method.
%
% See also DOTHAT.
disp(obj)
end
View the help text for the method in the Command Window using the help command.
Specify both the class name and method name, separated by a dot.
help myClass.doThis
doThis Do this thing

Here is some help text for the doThis method.
See also doThat.
Properties
There are two ways to create help for properties:
• Insert comment lines above the property definition. Use this approach for multiline
help text.
30-5
• Add a single-line comment next to the property definition.
Comments above the definition have precedence over a comment next to the definition.
For example, modify the property definitions in the class definition file myClass.m.
properties
a % First property of myClass
% b - Second property of myClass

% The description for b has several
% lines of text.
b % Other comment
end
View the help for properties in the Command Window using the help command. Specify
both the class name and property name, separated by a dot.
help myClass.a
a - First property of myClass
help myClass.b
b - Second property of myClass

The description for b has several
lines of text.
Enumerations
Like properties, there are two ways to create help for enumerations:
• Insert comment lines above the enumeration definition. Use this approach for
multiline help text.
• Add a single-line comment next to the enumeration definition.
For example, create an enumeration class in a file named myEnumeration.m.
classdef myEnumeration
enumeration
uno, % First enumeration
30-6
% DOS - Second enumeration

% The description for DOS has several
% lines of text.
dos % A comment (not help text)
end
end
View the help in the Command Window using the help command. Specify both the class
name and enumeration member, separated by a dot.
help myEnumeration.uno
uno - First enumeration
help myEnumeration.dos
dos - Second enumeration

The description for dos has several
lines of text.
Events
Like properties and enumerations, there are two ways to create help for events:
• Insert comment lines above the event definition. Use this approach for multiline help
text.
• Add a single-line comment next to the event definition.
For example, create a class in a file named hasEvents.m.

classdef hasEvents < handle
events
Alpha % First event
% Beta - Second event

% Additional text about second event.
Beta % (not help text)
end
methods
function fireEventAlpha(h)
notify(h,'Alpha')
end
30-7
function fireEventBeta(h)
notify(h,'Beta')
end
end
end
View the help in the Command Window using the help command. Specify both the class
name and event, separated by a dot.
help hasEvents.Alpha
Alpha - First event
help hasEvents.Beta
Beta - Second event

Additional text about second event.
See Also
doc | help
More About
• “Role of Classes in MATLAB”
• “User-Defined Classes”
30-8
Check Which Programs Have Help
Check Which Programs Have Help

To determine which of your programs files have help text, you can use the Help Report.
In the Help Report, you specify a set of help components for which you want to search,
such as examples or See Also lines. For each file searched, MATLAB displays the help
text for the components it finds. Otherwise, MATLAB displays a highlighted message to
indicate that the component is missing.
To generate a Help Report, in the Current Folder browser, navigate to the folder you
want to check, click , and then select Reports > Help Report. The Help Report
displays in the MATLAB web browser.
Note You cannot run reports when the path is a UNC (Universal Naming Convention)
path; that is, a path that starts with \\. Instead, use an actual hard drive on your
system, or a mapped network drive.
30-9
This table describes the available options for Help Reports.

Help Report Option Description
Show class Include methods in the report. If you do not select this option,
methods then the report includes results for classes, but not for methods
within a class definition file.
Show all help Display all help text found in each file. If you also select
individual help components, such as Description, then help text
appears twice in the report for each file: once for the overall help
text, and once for the component.
If your program has the same name as other programs on the

MATLAB search path, then the help command generates a list
of those overloaded items. MATLAB automatically adds links to
the help for those items.
Description Check for an initial, nonempty comment line in the file. This line
is sometimes called the H1 line.
Examples Check for examples in the help text. The Help Report performs a
case-insensitive search for a help line with a single-word variant
of example. The report displays that line and subsequent
nonblank comment lines, along with the initial line number.
See Also Check for a line in the help that begins with the words See
also. The report displays the text and the initial line number.
If the programs listed after See also are on the search path,
then the help command generates hyperlinks to the help for
those programs. The Help Report indicates when a program in
the See also line is not on the path.
Copyright Check for a comment line in the file that begins with the word
Copyright. When there is a copyright line, the report also
checks whether the end year is current. The date check requires
that the copyright line includes either a single year (such as
2012) or a range of years with no spaces (such as 2001-2012).
The recommended practice is to include a range of years from the

year you created the file to the current year.
30-10
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
30-11
Create Help Summary Files — Contents.m

In this section...
“What Is a Contents.m File?” on page 30-12
“Create a Contents.m File” on page 30-13
“Check an Existing Contents.m File” on page 30-13
What Is a Contents.m File?

A Contents.m file provides a summary of the programs in a particular folder. The help,
doc, and ver functions refer to Contents.m files to display information about folders.
Contents.m files contain only comment lines. The first two lines are headers that
describe the folder. Subsequent lines list the program files in the folder, along with their
descriptions. Optionally, you can group files and include category descriptions. For
example, view the functions available in the codetools folder:
help codetools
Commands for creating and debugging code

MATLAB Version 8.5 (R2015a) 02-Oct-2014
Editing and publishing

edit - Edit or create a file
grabcode - Copy MATLAB code from published HTML
mlint - Check files for possible problems
notebook - Open MATLAB Notebook in Microsoft Word
publish - Publish file containing cells to output file
snapnow - Force snapshot of image for published document
Directory tools
mlintrpt - Run mlint for file or folder, reporting results in browser
visdiff - Compare two files (text, MAT, or binary) or folders
...
If you do not want others to see a summary of your program files, place an empty
Contents.m file in the folder. An empty Contents.m file causes help foldername to
report No help found for foldername. Without a Contents.m file, the help and
doc commands display a generated list of all program files in the folder.
30-12
Create Help Summary Files — Contents.m
Create a Contents.m File

When you have a set of existing program files in a folder, the easiest way to create a
Contents.m file is to use the Contents Report. The primary purpose of the Contents
Report is to check that an existing Contents.m file is up-to-date. However, it also checks
whether Contents.m exists, and can generate a new file based on the contents of the
folder. Follow these steps to create a file:
1 In the Current Folder browser, navigate to the folder that contains your program
files.
2 Click , and then select Reports > Contents Report.
3 In the report, where prompted to make a Contents.m file, click yes. The new file
includes the names of all program files in the folder, using the description line (the
first nonempty comment line) whenever it is available.
4 Open the generated file in the Editor, and modify the file so that the second
comment line is in this form:
% Version xxx dd-mmm-yyyy
Do not include any spaces in the date. This comment line enables the ver function to
detect the version information.
Note MATLAB does not include live scripts when creating a Contents Report.
Check an Existing Contents.m File

Verify whether your Contents.m file reflects the current contents of the folder using the
Contents Report, as follows:
1 In the Current Folder browser, navigate to the folder that contains the Contents.m
file.
2 Click , and then select Reports > Contents Report.
Note You cannot run reports when the path is a UNC (Universal Naming Convention)
path; that is, a path that starts with \\. Instead, use an actual hard drive on your
system, or a mapped network drive.
30-13
The Contents Report performs the following checks.

Check Whether the Contents.m File... Details
Exists If there is no Contents.m file in the folder,
you can create one from the report.
Includes all programs in the folder Missing programs appear in gray
highlights. You do not need to add
programs that you do not want to expose to
end users.
Incorrectly lists nonexistent files Listed programs that are not in the folder
appear in pink highlights.
Matches the program file descriptions The report compares file descriptions in
Contents.m with the first nonempty
comment line in the corresponding file.
Discrepancies appear in pink highlights.
You can update either the program file or
the Contents.m file.
Uses consistent spacing between file names Fix the alignment by clicking fix spacing
and descriptions at the top of the report.
You can make all the suggested changes by clicking fix all, or open the file in the Editor
by clicking edit Contents.m.
See Also
doc | help | ver
30-14
Display Custom Documentation

In this section...
“Create HTML Help Files” on page 30-16
“Create info.xml File” on page 30-17
“Create helptoc.xml File” on page 30-19
“Build a Search Database” on page 30-21
“Address Validation Errors for info.xml Files” on page 30-22
Overview
If you create a toolbox that works with MathWorks products, even if it only contains a
few functions, you can include custom documentation in the form of HTML help files.
Custom documentation for your toolbox can include figures, diagrams, screen captures,
equations, and formatting to make your toolbox help more usable.
To display properly, your custom documentation must contain these files:
• HTML help files — These files contain your custom documentation information.
• info.xml file — This file enables MATLAB to find and identify your HTML help
files.
• helptoc.xml file — This file contain the Table of Contents for your documentation
that displays in the Contents pane of the Help browser. This file must be stored in
the folder that contains your HTML help files.
• Search database (optional) — These files enable searching in your HTML help
files.
To view your custom documentation, open the Help browser and navigate to the home
page. At the bottom right of the home page, under Supplemental Software, click the
name of your toolbox. Your help opens in the current window.
30-15
Create HTML Help Files

You can create HTML help files in any text editor or web publishing software. To create
help files in MATLAB, use either of these two methods:
• Create a live script (*.mlx) and export it to HTML. For more information, see “Share
Live Scripts” on page 19-49.
• Create a script (*.m), and publish it to HTML. For more information, see “Publishing
MATLAB Code” on page 23-4.
Store all your HTML help files in one folder, such as an html subfolder in your toolbox
folder. This folder must be:
• On the MATLAB search path

• Outside the matlabroot folder
• Outside any installed hardware support package help folder
Documentation sets often contain:
• A roadmap page (that is, an initial landing page for the documentation)
• Examples and topics that explain how to use the toolbox
• Function or block reference pages
30-16
Create info.xml File

The info.xml file describes your custom documentation, including the name to display
for your documentation. It also identifies where to find your HTML help files and the
helptoc.xml file. Create a file named info.xml for each toolbox you document.
To create info.xml to describe your toolbox, you can adapt this template:
<productinfo xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="optional">
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl"href="optional"?>
<matlabrelease>R2016b</matlabrelease>
<name>MyToolbox</name>
<type>toolbox</type>
<icon></icon>
<help_location>html</help_location>
</productinfo>
You can also create info.xml by using the template info_template.xml included
with the MATLAB documentation. To create and edit a copy of the template file in your
current folder, run this code in the command window:
copyfile(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_env',...
'examples','templates','info_template.xml'),pwd)
fileattrib('info_template.xml','+w')
edit('info_template.xml')
The following table describes the required elements of the info.xml file.
XML Tag Description Value in Template Notes
<matlabrelease> Release of R2016b Indicates when you added help
MATLAB files. Not displayed in the
browser.
<name> Title of toolbox MyToolbox The name to display for your
custom documentation in the
browser Contents pane.
<type> Label for the toolbox Allowable values: matlab,
toolbox toolbox, simulink,
blockset, links_targets,
other.
30-17
XML Tag Description Value in Template Notes

<icon> Icon for the none No longer used, but the <icon>
Start button element is still required for
(not used) MATLAB to parse the
info.xml file.
<help_location> Location of html Name of the subfolder
help files containing helptoc.xml and
the HTML help files for your
toolbox. If the help location is
not a subfolder of the
info.xml file location, specify
the path to help_location
relative to the info.xml file. If
you provide HTML help files for
multiple toolboxes, the
help_location in each
info.xml file must be a
different folder.
<help_contents_icon> Icon to display none Ignored in MATLAB R2015a
in Contents and later. Does not cause error
pane if it appears in the info.xml
file, but is not required.
You also can include comments in your info.xml file, such as copyright and contact
information. Create comments by enclosing the text on a line between .
When you create the info.xml file, make sure that:
• You include all required elements.

• The entries are in the same order as in the preceding table.
• File and folder names in the XML exactly match the names of your files and folders
and are capitalized identically.
• The info.xml file is in a folder on the MATLAB search path.
Note MATLAB parses the info.xml file and displays your documentation when you
add the folder that contains info.xml to the path. If you created an info.xml file in
a folder already on the path, remove the folder from the path. Then add the folder
30-18
again, so that MATLAB parses the file. Make sure that the folder you are adding is
not your current folder.
Create helptoc.xml File

The helptoc.xml file defines the hierarchy of help files displayed in the Contents pane
of the Supplemental Software browser.
You can create a helptoc.xml file by using the template included with the MATLAB
documentation. To create and edit a copy of the template file helptoc_template.xml
in your current folder, run this code in the Command Window:
copyfile(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_env',...
'examples','templates','helptoc_template.xml'),pwd)
fileattrib('helptoc_template.xml','+w')
edit('helptoc_template.xml')
Place the helptoc.xml file in the folder that contains your HTML documentation files.
This folder must be referenced as the <help_location> in your info.xml file.
Each <tocitem> entry in the helptoc.xml file references one of your HTML help files.
The first <tocitem> entry in the helptoc.xml file serves as the initial landing page for
your documentation.
Within the top-level <toc> element, the nested <tocitem> elements define the
structure of your table of contents. Each <tocitem> element has a target attribute
that provides the file name. File and path names are case-sensitive.
When you create the helptoc.xml file, make sure that:
• The location of the helptoc.xml files is listed as the <help_location> in your

info.xml file.
• All file and path names exactly match the names of the files and folders, including
capitalization.
• All path names use URL file path separators (/). Windows style file path separators
(\) can cause the table of contents to display incorrectly. For example, if you have an
HTML help page firstfx.html located in a subfolder called refpages within the
main documentation folder, the <tocitem> target attribute value for that page
would be refpages/firstfx.html.
30-19
Example helptoc.xml File
Suppose that you have created the following HTML files:
• A roadmap or starting page for your toolbox, mytoolbox.html.

• A page that lists your functions, funclist.html.
• Three function reference pages: firstfx.html, secondfx.html, and
thirdfx.html.
• An example, myexample.html.
Include file names and descriptions in a helptoc.xml file as follows:

<?xml version='1.0' encoding="utf-8"?>
<toc version="2.0">
<tocitem target="mytoolbox.html">My Toolbox

<tocitem target="funclist.html">Functions
<tocitem target="firstfx.html">first</tocitem>
<tocitem target="secondfx.html">second</tocitem>
<tocitem target="thirdfx.html">third</tocitem>
</tocitem>
<tocitem target="myexample.html">My Example
</tocitem>
</tocitem>
</toc>
This helptoc.xml file, paired with a properly formulated info.xml file, produced this
display in the Help browser.
30-20
Build a Search Database

To make your documentation searchable, create a search database, also referred to as a
search index, using the builddocsearchdb command. When using this command,
specify the complete path to the folder that contains your HTML files.
For example, suppose that your HTML files are in C:\MATLAB\MyToolbox\html. This
command creates a searchable database for those files:
builddocsearchdb('C:\MATLAB\MyToolbox\html')
builddocsearchdb creates a subfolder of C:\MATLAB\MyToolbox\html named

helpsearch-v3, which contains the database files.
You can search for terms in your toolbox from the Search Documentation field in the
Help browser.
30-21
Beginning with MATLAB R2014b, you can maintain search indexes side by side. For
instance, if you already have a search index for MATLAB R2014a or earlier, run
builddocsearchdb against your help files using MATLAB R2014b. Then, when you run
any MATLAB release, the help browser automatically uses the appropriate index for
searching your documentation database.
Address Validation Errors for info.xml Files

What Are XML Validation Errors?
When MATLAB finds an info.xml file on the search path or in the current folder, it
automatically validates the file against the supported schema. If there is an invalid
construct in the info.xml file, MATLAB displays an error in the Command Window.
The error is typically of the form:
Warning: File <yourxmlfile.xml> did not validate.

...
An info.xml validation error can occur when you start MATLAB or add folders to the
search path.
The primary causes of an XML file validation error are:
• Entities are missing or out of order in the info.xml file.

• An unrelated info.xml file exists.
• Syntax errors in the info.xml file.
• MATLAB is trying to access an outdated info.xml file for a MathWorks product.
30-22
Entities Missing or Out of Order in info.xml
If you do not list required XML elements in the prescribed order, you receive an XML
validation error:
Often, errors result from incorrect ordering of XML tags. Correct the error by updating
the info.xml file contents to follow the guidelines in the MATLAB help documentation.
For a description of the elements you need in an info.xml file and their required
ordering, see “Create info.xml File” on page 30-17.
Unrelated info.xml File
Suppose that you have a file named info.xml that has nothing to do with custom
documentation. Because this info.xml file is an unrelated file, if it causes an error, you
can safely ignore it. To prevent the error message from reoccurring, rename the
unrelated info.xml file. Alternatively, ensure that the file is not on the search path or
in the current folder.
Syntax Errors in the info.xml File.
Use the error message to isolate the problem or use any XML schema validator. For more
information about the structure of the info.xml file, consult its schema at
matlabroot/sys/namespace/info/v1/info.xsd.
Outdated info.xml File for a MathWorks Product
If you have an info.xml file from a different version of MATLAB, that file could contain
constructs that are not valid with your version. To identify an info.xml file from
another version, look at the full path names reported in the error message. The path
usually includes a version number, for example, ...\MATLAB\R14\.... In this
situation, the error is not actually causing any problems, so you can safely ignore the
error message. To ensure that the error does not reoccur, remove the offending info.xml
file. Alternatively, remove the outdated info.xml file from the search path and out of
the current folder.
30-23
See Also
Related Examples
• “Create and Share Toolboxes” on page 25-13
30-24
Display Custom Examples

In this section...
“How to Display Examples” on page 30-25
“Elements of the demos.xml File” on page 30-26
How to Display Examples

To display examples such as videos, published program scripts, or other files that
illustrate the use of your programs in the MATLAB help browser, follow these steps:
1 Create your example files. Store the files in a folder that is on the MATLAB search
path, but outside the matlabroot folder.
Tip MATLAB includes a feature that converts scripts or functions to formatted

HTML files, which you can display as examples. To create these HTML files in
MATLAB, use either of these two methods:
• Create a live script (*.mlx) and export it to HTML. For more information, see
“Share Live Scripts” on page 19-49.
• Create a script (*.m), and publish it to HTML. For more information, see
“Publishing MATLAB Code” on page 23-4.
2 Create a demos.xml file that describes the name, type, and display information for
your examples.
For example, suppose that you have a toolbox named My Sample, which contains a
script named my_example that you published to HTML. This demos.xml file allows
you to display my_example:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<demos>
<name>My Sample</name>
<type>toolbox</type>
<icon>HelpIcon.DEMOS</icon>
<description>This text appears on the main page for your examples.</description>
<website><a href="http://www.mathworks.com">Link to your Web site</a></website>
<demosection>
<label>First Section</label>
<demoitem>
30-25
<label>My Example Title</label>

<type>M-file</type>
<source>my_example</source>
</demoitem>
</demosection>
</demos>
Note <demosection> elements are optional.

3 View your examples.
a In the Help browser, navigate to the home page.

b At the bottom of the page, under Supplemental Software click the link for
your example.
Your example opens in the main help window.
Elements of the demos.xml File

• “General Information in <demos>” on page 30-26
• “Categories Using <demosection>” on page 30-27
• “Information About Each Example in <demoitem>” on page 30-27
General Information in <demos>
Within the demos.xml file, the root tag is <demos>. This tag includes elements that
determine the contents of the main page for your examples.
XML Tag Notes
<name> Name of your toolbox or collection of examples.
<type> Possible values are matlab, simulink, toolbox, or
blockset.
<icon> Ignored in MATLAB R2015a and later.
In previous releases, this icon was the icon for your example.
In those releases, you can use a standard icon,
HelpIcon.DEMOS. Or, you can provide a custom icon by
specifying a path to the icon relative to the location of the
demos.xml file.
30-26
XML Tag Notes

<description> The description that appears on the main page for your
examples.
<website> (Optional) Link to a website. For example, MathWorks
examples include a link to the product page at http://
www.mathworks.com.
Categories Using <demosection>
Optionally, define categories for your examples by including a <demosection> for each
category. If you include any categories, then all examples must be in categories.
Each <demosection> element contains a <label> that provides the category name, and
the associated <demoitem> elements.
Information About Each Example in <demoitem>

XML Tag Notes
<label> Defines the title to display in the browser.
<type> Possible values are M-file, model, M-GUI, video, or
other.
Typically, if you published your example using the publish

function, the appropriate <type> is M-file.
<source> If <type> is M-file, model, M-GUI, then <source> is the
name of the associated .m file or model file, with no
extension. Otherwise, do not include a <source> element,
but include a <callback> element.
<file> Use this element only for examples with a <type> value
other than M-file when you want to display an HTML file
that describes the example. Specify a relative path from the
location of demos.xml.
<callback> Use this element only for examples with a <type> value of
video or other to specify an executable file or a MATLAB
command to run the example.
30-27
XML Tag Notes

<dependency> (Optional) Specifies other products required to run the
example, such as another toolbox. The text must match a
product name specified in an info.xml file that is on the
search path or in the current folder.
30-28
31
Source Control Interface
The source control interface provides access to your source control system from the
MATLAB desktop.
• “About MathWorks Source Control Integration” on page 31-3

• “Select or Disable Source Control System” on page 31-6
• “Create New Repository” on page 31-7
• “Review Changes in Source Control” on page 31-9
• “Mark Files for Addition to Source Control” on page 31-10
• “Resolve Source Control Conflicts” on page 31-11
• “Commit Modified Files to Source Control” on page 31-15
• “Revert Changes in Source Control” on page 31-16
• “Set Up SVN Source Control” on page 31-17
• “Check Out from SVN Repository” on page 31-24
• “Update SVN File Status and Revision” on page 31-28
• “Get SVN File Locks” on page 31-29
• “Set Up Git Source Control” on page 31-30
• “Clone from Git Repository” on page 31-36
• “Update Git File Status and Revision” on page 31-38
• “Branch and Merge with Git” on page 31-40
• “Pull, Push and Fetch Files with Git” on page 31-45
• “Move, Rename, or Delete Files Under Source Control” on page 31-48
• “Customize External Source Control to Use MATLAB for Diff and Merge”
on page 31-49
• “MSSCCI Source Control Interface” on page 31-52
• “Set Up MSSCCI Source Control” on page 31-53
• “Check Files In and Out from MSSCCI Source Control” on page 31-60
• “Additional MSSCCI Source Control Actions” on page 31-63
31 Source Control Interface
• “Access MSSCCI Source Control from Editors” on page 31-70

• “Troubleshoot MSSCCI Source Control Problems” on page 31-71
31-2
About MathWorks Source Control Integration

You can use MATLAB to work with files under source control. You can perform
operations such as update, commit, merge changes, and view revision history directly
from the Current Folder browser.
MATLAB integrates with:
• Subversion® (SVN)
• Git™
To use source control in your project, use any of these workflows:
• Retrieve files from an existing repository. See “Check Out from SVN Repository” on
page 31-24 or “Clone from Git Repository” on page 31-36.
• Add source control to a folder. See “Create New Repository” on page 31-7.
• Add new files in a folder already under source control. See “Mark Files for Addition to
Source Control” on page 31-10.
Additional source control integrations, such as Microsoft Source-Code Control Interface

(MSSCCI), are available for download from the Add-On Explorer. For more information,
see “Get Add-Ons”.
Classic and Distributed Source Control

This diagram represents the classic source control workflow (for example, using SVN).
31-3
Benefits of classic source control:
• Locking and user permissions on a per-file basis (e.g., you can enforce locking of
model files)
• Central server, reducing local storage needs
• Simple and easy to learn
This diagram represents the distributed source control workflow (for example, using Git).
Benefits of distributed source control:
• Offline working
• Local repository, which provides full history
• Branching
• Multiple remote repositories, enabling large-scale hierarchical access control
To choose classic or distributed source control, consider these tips.
Classic source control can be helpful if:
• You need file locks.

• You are new to source control.
Distributed source control can be helpful if:
31-4
• You need to work offline, commit regularly, and need access to the full repository
history.
• You need to branch locally.
31-5
Select or Disable Source Control System
Select Source Control System

If you are just starting to use source control in MATLAB, select a source control system
that is part of the MathWorks source control integration with the Current Folder
browser, such as Subversion or Git. Doing so enables you to take advantage of the built-
in nature of the integration. MathWorks source control integration is on by default.
1 On the Home tab, in the Environment section, click Preferences.

2 In the preferences dialog box, navigate to the MATLAB > General > Source
Control pane.
3 To use the MathWorks source control integration, which is accessible through the
Current Folder browser, select Enable MathWorks source control integration.
Use this option for source control systems such as Subversion and Git. This is the
default option, unless you previously set up source control with MATLAB.
Disable Source Control

When you disable source control, MATLAB does not destroy repository information. For
example, it does not remove the .svn folder. You can put the folder back under source
control by enabling the source control integration again.

2 In the Preferences dialog box, in the MATLAB > General > Source Control pane,
select None.
31-6
Create New Repository
Create New Repository

You can use MATLAB to add source control to files in a folder. If you want to add version
control to your files without sharing with another user, it is quickest to create a local Git
repository in your sandbox.
To use a Git server for your remote repository, you can set up your own Apache™ Git
server or use a Git server hosting solution. If you cannot set up a server and must use a
remote repository via the file system using the file:/// protocol, make sure that it is a
bare repository with no checked out working copy.
For SVN, check that your sandbox folder is on a local hard disk. Using a network folder
with SVN is slow and unreliable.
Before using source control, you must register binary files with your source control tools
to avoid corruption. See “Register Binary Files with SVN” on page 31-18 or “Register
Binary Files with Git” on page 31-32.
Tip To check out an existing SVN repository, see “Check Out from SVN Repository” on
page 31-24. To clone an existing remote Git repository, see “Clone from Git Repository”
on page 31-36.
1 Right-click in the white space (any blank area) of the MATLAB Current Folder
browser. Select Source Control > Manage Files.
2 In the Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box, in the Source control
integration list:
• For an SVN repository, select Built-In SVN Integration.

• For a Git repository, select Git.
3 Click the Change button to open the Specify SVN Repository URL dialog box if you
are using SVN or the Select a Repository dialog box if you are using Git.
If you are using Git, you can change the repository URL after the repository is
created. In the Current Folder browser, in a folder under source control, right-click
and select Source Control > Remote and specify a new URL.
4
Click the Create a repository button to create a repository on disk.
31-7
5 Select an empty folder or create a new folder in which you want to create the
repository and click Select Folder to create the repository.
For SVN, the URL of the new repository is in the Repository URL box, and the
trunk folder is selected. Specify file:// URLs and create new repositories for
single users only. For multiple users, see “Share a Subversion Repository” on page
31-22.
6 In the Specify SVN Repository URL (SVN) or Select a Repository (Git), click
Validate to check the path to the selected repository, and then click OK.
If your SVN repository has a file URL, a warning appears that file URLs are for
single users. Click OK to continue.
7 In the Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box, choose the location for your
sandbox, and then click Retrieve.
For an SVN sandbox, the selected folder can contain files. However, for a Git
sandbox, the selected folder must be empty. You cannot clone a remote repository
into a folder that contains files.
You need some additional setup steps if you want to merge branches with Git. See
“Install Command-Line Git Client” on page 31-31.
After integrity checks are complete, you can commit the first version of your files to the
new repository.
See Also
Related Examples
31-8
Review Changes in Source Control
Review Changes in Source Control

The files under source control that you have changed display the Modified File symbol
in the Current Folder browser. Right-click the file in the Current Folder browser, select
Source Control, and select:
• Show Revisions to open the File Revisions dialog box and browse the history of a
file. You can view information about who previously committed the file, when they
committed it, and the log messages. You can select multiple files and view revision
history for each file.
• Compare to Revision to open a dialog box where you can select the revisions you
want to compare and view a comparison report. You can either:
• Select a revision and click Compare to Local.

• Select two revisions and click Compare Selected.
• Compare to Ancestor to run a comparison with the last checked-out version in the
sandbox (SVN) or against the local repository (Git). The Comparison Tool displays a
report.
If you need to update the status of the modified files, see “Update SVN File Status and
Revision” on page 31-28 or “Update Git File Status and Revision” on page 31-38.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Revert Changes in Source Control” on page 31-16
31-9
Mark Files for Addition to Source Control

When you create a new file in a folder under source control, the Not Under Source
Control symbol appears in the status column of the Current Folder browser. To add a
file to source control, right-click the file in the Current Folder browser, and select
Source Control and then the Add option appropriate to your source control system. For
example, select Add to Git or Add to SVN.
When the file is marked for addition to source control, the symbol changes to Added .
31-10
Resolve Source Control Conflicts
Examining and Resolving Conflicts

If you and another user change the same file in different sandboxes or on different
branches, a conflict message appears when you try to commit your modified files. Follow
the procedure “Resolve Conflicts” on page 31-11 to extract conflict markers if necessary,
compare the differences causing the conflict, and resolve the conflict.
To resolve conflicts you can:
• Use the Comparison Tool to merge changes between revisions.

• Decide to overwrite one set of changes with the other.
• Make changes manually by editing files.
For details on using the Comparison Tool to merge changes, see “Merge Text Files” on
page 31-12.
After you are satisfied with the file that is marked conflicted, you can mark the conflict
resolved and commit the file.
Resolve Conflicts
1 Look for conflicted files in the Current Folder browser.
2 Check the source control status column (SVN or Git) for files with a red warning
symbol , which indicates a conflict.
3 Right-click the conflicted file and select Source Control > View Conflicts to
compare versions.
4 Examine the conflict. A comparison report opens that shows the differences between
the conflicted files.
With SVN, the comparison shows the differences between the file and the version of
the file in conflict.
With Git, the comparison shows the differences between the file on your branch and
the branch you want to merge into.
5 Use the Comparison Tool report to determine how to resolve the conflict.
31-11
You can use the Comparison Tool to merge changes between revisions, as described
in “Merge Text Files” on page 31-12.
6 When you have resolved the changes and want to commit the version in your
sandbox, in the Current Folder browser, right-click the file and select Source
Control > Mark Conflict Resolved.
With Git, the Branch status in the Source Control Details dialog box changes from
MERGING to SAFE.
7 Commit the modified files.
Merge Text Files

When comparing text files, you can merge changes from one file to the other. Merging
changes is useful when resolving conflicts between different versions of files.
If you see conflict markers in a text comparison report like this:
<<<<<<< .mine
then extract the conflict markers before merging, as described in “Extract Conflict
Markers” on page 31-13.
Tip When comparing a file to another version in source control, by default the right file is
the version in your sandbox and the left file is either a temporary copy of the previous
version or another version causing a conflict (e.g., filename_theirs). You can swap the
position of the files, so be sure to observe the file paths of the left and right file at the top
of the comparison report. Merge differences from the temporary copy to the version in
your sandbox to resolve conflicts.
1 In the Comparison Tool report, select a difference in the report and click Merge. The
selected difference is copied from the left file to the right file.
Merged differences display gray row highlighting and a green merge arrow.
The merged file name at the top of the report displays with an asterisk
(filename.m*) to show you that the file contains unsaved changes.
31-12
2 Click Save Merged File to save the file in your sandbox. To resolve conflicts, save
the merged file over the conflicted file.
3 If you want to inspect the files in the editor, click the line number links in the report.
Note If you make any further changes in the editor, the comparison report does not
update to reflect changes and report links can become incorrect.
4 When you have resolved the changes mark them as conflict resolved. Right-click the
file in the Current Folder browser and select Source Control > Mark Conflict
Resolved.
Extract Conflict Markers

• “What Are Conflict Markers?” on page 31-13
• “Extract Conflict Markers” on page 31-14
What Are Conflict Markers?
Source control tools can insert conflict markers in files that you have not registered as
binary (e.g., text files). You can use MATLAB to extract the conflict markers and
compare the files causing the conflict. This process helps you to decide how to resolve the
conflict.
Caution Register files with source control tools to prevent them from inserting conflict
markers and corrupting files. See “Register Binary Files with SVN” on page 31-18 or
“Register Binary Files with Git” on page 31-32. If your files already contains conflict
markers, the MATLAB tools can help you to resolve the conflict.
Conflict markers have the following form:
<<<<<<<["mine" file descriptor]

["mine" file content]
=======
["theirs" file content]
<<<<<<<["theirs" file descriptor]
If you try to open a file containing conflict markers, the Conflict Markers Found dialog
box opens. Follow the prompts to fix the file by extracting the conflict markers. After you
31-13
extract the conflict markers, resolve the conflicts as described in “Examining and
Resolving Conflicts” on page 31-11.
To view the conflict markers, in the Conflict Markers Found dialog box, click Load File.
Do not try to load files, because MATLAB does not recognize conflict markers. Instead,
click Fix File to extract the conflict markers.
MATLAB checks only conflicted files for conflict markers.
Extract Conflict Markers
When you open a conflicted file or select View Conflicts, MATLAB checks files for
conflict markers and offers to extract the conflict markers. MATLAB checks only
conflicted files for conflict markers.
However, some files that are not marked as conflicted can still contain conflict markers.
This can happen if you or another user marked a conflict resolved without removing the
conflict markers and then committed the file. If you see conflict markers in a file that is
not marked conflicted, you can extract the conflict markers.
1 In the Current Folder browser, right-click the file, and select Source Control >
Extract Conflict Markers to File.
2 In the Extract Conflict Markers to File dialog box, leave the default option to copy
“mine” file version over the conflicted file. Leave the Compare extracted files
check box selected. Click Extract.
3 Use the Comparison Tool report as usual to continue to resolve the conflict.
31-14
Commit Modified Files to Source Control
Commit Modified Files to Source Control

Before you commit modified files, review changes and mark any new files for addition
into source control. The files under source control that you can commit to a repository
display the Added to Source Control symbol or the Modified File symbol in the
Current Folder browser.
1 Right-click in the Current Folder browser and select Source Control > View and
Commit Changes. In the View and Commit Changes dialog box, select the files to
commit to the repository.
2 Enter comments in the dialog box, and click Submit.
3 A message appears if you cannot commit because the repository has moved ahead.
Before you can commit the file, you must update the revision up to the current
HEAD revision.
• If you are using SVN source control, right-click in the Current Folder browser.
Select Source Control > Update All from SVN.
• If you are using Git source control, right-click in the Current Folder browser.
Select Source Control > Pull.
Resolve any conflicts before you commit.
See Also
Related Examples
31-15
Revert Changes in Source Control
Revert Local Changes

With SVN, if you want to roll back local changes in a file, right-click the file and select
Source Control > Revert Local Changes and Release Locks. This command
releases locks and reverts to the version in the last sandbox update (that is, the last
version you synchronized or retrieved from the repository). If your file is not locked, the
menu option is Source Control > Revert Local Changes. To abandon all local
changes, select all the files in the Current Folder browser before you select the command.
With Git, right-click a file and select Source Control > Revert Local Changes. Git
does not have locks. To remove all local changes, right-click a blank space in the Current
Folder browser and select Source Control > Branches. In the Branches dialog box,
click Revert to Head.
Revert a File to a Specified Revision

1 Right-click a file in the Current Folder browser and select Source Control >
Revert using SVN or Revert using Git.
2 In the Revert Files dialog box, choose a revision to revert to. Select a revision to view
information about the change such as the author, date, and log message.
3 Click Revert.
If you revert a file to an earlier revision and then make changes, you cannot commit the
file until you resolve the conflict with the repository history.
See Also
Related Examples
31-16
Set Up SVN Source Control

MATLAB provides built-in SVN integration for use with Subversion (SVN) sandboxes
and repositories. Because the implementation is built in to MATLAB, you do not need to
install SVN. The built-in SVN integration supports secure logins. This integration
ignores any existing SVN installation.
In this section...
“SVN Source Control Options” on page 31-17
“Register Binary Files with SVN” on page 31-18
“Standard Repository Structure” on page 31-21
“Tag Versions of Files” on page 31-21
“Enforce Locking Files Before Editing” on page 31-22
“Share a Subversion Repository” on page 31-22
SVN Source Control Options

To use the version of SVN provided with MATLAB, when you retrieve a file from source
control, select Built-In SVN Integration in the Source control integration list.
For instructions, see “Check Out from SVN Repository” on page 31-24. When you create
a new sandbox using the MATLAB built-in SVN integration, the new sandbox uses the
latest version of SVN provided by MATLAB.
Caution Before using source control, you must register binary files with the source
control tools to avoid corruption. See “Register Binary Files with SVN” on page 31-18.
If you need to use a version of SVN other than the built-in version, you can create a
repository using the Command-Line SVN Integration (compatibility mode)
Source control integration option, but you must also install a command-line SVN
client.
Command-line SVN integration communicates with any Subversion (SVN) client that
supports the command-line interface. With Command-Line SVN Integration
(compatibility mode), if you try to rename a file or folder to a name that contains an
@ character, an error occurs because command-line SVN treats all characters after the @
symbol as a peg revision value.
31-17
Register Binary Files with SVN

If you use third-party source control tools, you must register your MATLAB and
Simulink file extensions such as .mlx, .mat, .fig, .mdl, and .slx as binary formats. If
you do not register the extensions, these tools can corrupt your files when you submit
them by changing end-of-line characters, expanding tokens, substituting keywords, or
attempting to automerge. Corruption can occur whether you use the source control tools
outside of MATLAB or if you try submitting files from MATLAB without first registering
your file formats.
Also check that other file extensions are registered as binary to avoid corruption at
check-in. Check and register files such as .mdlp, .slxp, .sldd, .p, MEX-
files, .xlsx, .jpg, .pdf, .docx, etc.
You must register binary files if you use any version of SVN, including the built-in SVN
integration provided by MATLAB. If you do not register your extensions as binary, SVN
might add annotations to conflicted MATLAB files and attempt automerge. To avoid this
problem when using SVN, register file extensions.
1 Locate your SVN config file. Look for the file in these locations:
• C:\Users\myusername\AppData\Roaming\Subversion\config or C:
\Documents and Settings\myusername\Application Data\Subversion
\config on Windows
• ~/.subversion on Linux or macOS
2 If you do not find a config file, create a new one. See “Create SVN Config File” on
page 31-18.
3 If you find an existing config file, you have previously installed SVN. Edit the
config file. See “Update Existing SVN Config File” on page 31-19.
Create SVN Config File
1 If you do not find an SVN config file, create a text file containing these lines:
[miscellany]
enable-auto-props = yes
[auto-props]
*.mlx = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mat = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.fig = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
31-18
*.mdl = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.slx = svn:mime-type= application/octet-stream
2 Check for other file types you use that you also need to register as binary to avoid
corruption at check-in. Check for files such as .mat, .mdlp, .slxp, .p, MEX-files
(.mexa64, .mexmaci64, .mexw64), .xlsx, .jpg, .pdf, .docx, etc. Add a line to the
config file for each file type you need. Examples:
*.mdlp = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.slxp = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.sldd = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.p = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mexa64 = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mexw64 = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mexmaci64 = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.xlsx = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.docx = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.pdf = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.jpg = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.png = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
3 Name the file config and save it in the appropriate location:
• C:\Users\myusername\AppData\Roaming\Subversion\config or C:
\Documents and Settings\myusername\Application Data\Subversion
\config on Windows
• ~/.subversion on Linux or macOS.
After you create the SVN config file, SVN treats new files with these extensions as
binary. If you already have binary files in repositories, see “Register Files Already in
Repositories” on page 31-21.
Update Existing SVN Config File
If you find an existing config file, you have previously installed SVN. Edit the config
file to register files as binary.
1 Edit the config file in a text editor.

2 Locate the [miscellany] section, and verify the following line enables auto-props
with yes:
enable-auto-props = yes
31-19
Ensure that this line is not commented (that is, that it does not start with #). Config
files can contain example lines that are commented out. If there is a # character at
the beginning of the line, delete it.
3 Locate the [auto-props] section. Ensure that [auto-props] is not commented. If
there is a # character at the beginning, delete it.
4 Add the following lines at the end of the [auto-props] section:
*.mlx = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mat = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.fig = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mdl = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.slx = svn:mime-type= application/octet-stream
These lines prevent SVN from adding annotations to MATLAB and Simulink files on
conflict and from automerging.
corruption at check-in. Check for files such as .mdlp, .slxp, .p, MEX-files
config file for each file type you use. Examples:
*.mdlp = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.slxp = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.sldd = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.p = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mexa64 = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mexw64 = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.mexmaci64 = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.xlsx = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.docx = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.pdf = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.jpg = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
*.png = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream
6 Save the config file.
After you create or update the SVN config file, SVN treats new files as binary. If you
already have files in repositories, register them as described in “Register Files Already in
Repositories” on page 31-21.
31-20
Register Files Already in Repositories
Caution Changing your SVN config file does not affect files already committed to an
SVN repository. If a file is not registered as binary, use svn propset to manually
register the files as binary.
To manually register a file in a repository as binary, use the following command with
command-line SVN:
svn propset svn:mime-type application/octet-stream binaryfilename
Standard Repository Structure

Create your repository with the standard tags, trunk, and branches folders, and check
out files from trunk. The Subversion project recommends this structure. See the Web
page:
http://svn.apache.org/repos/asf/subversion/trunk/doc/user/svn-best-practices.html
If you use MATLAB to create an SVN repository, it creates the standard repository
structure. To enable tagging, the repository must have the standard trunk/ and tags/
folders. After you create a repository with this structure, you can click Tag in the
Source Control context menu to add tags to all of your files. For more information, see
“Tag Versions of Files” on page 31-21.
Tag Versions of Files

With SVN, you can use tags to identify specific revisions of all files. To use tags with
SVN, you need the standard folder structure in your repository and you need to check out
your files from trunk. See “Standard Repository Structure” on page 31-21.
1 Right-click in the Current Folder browser, and select Source Control > Tag.
2 Specify the tag text and click Submit. The tag is added to every file in the folder.
Errors appear if you do not have a tags folder in your repository.
Note You can retrieve a tagged version of your files from source control, but you cannot
tag them again with a new tag. You must check out from trunk to create new tags.
31-21
Enforce Locking Files Before Editing

To require that users remember to get a lock on files before editing, configure SVN to
make files with specified extensions read only. When your files are read only, you need to
select Right-click in the Current Folder browser, and select Source Control > Get File
Lock before you can edit them. This setting prevents editing of files without getting the
file lock. When the file has a lock, other users know the file is being edited, and you can
avoid merge issues.
To enforce locking files, modify entries in the SVN config file. To locate your SVN
config file, see “Register Binary Files with SVN” on page 31-18.
1 To make files with a .m extension read only, add a property to your SVN config file
in the [auto-props] section. If there is no entry for files with a .m extension, add
one with the needs-lock property.
*.m = svn:needs-lock=yes
If an entry exists, you can combine properties in any order, but multiple entries
must be on a single line separated by semicolons.
2 To make files with a .mlx extension read only, add a property to your SVN config
file in the [auto-props] section. Since you must register files with a .mlx
extension as binary, there is an entry for the file type. Add the needs-lock property
to the entry in any order, but on the same line and separated by a semicolon.
*.mlx = svn:mime-type=application/octet-stream;svn:needs-lock=yes
3 Re-create the sandbox for the configuration to take effect.
With this setting, you need to select Get File Lock before you can edit files with a .m
extension. See “Get SVN File Locks” on page 31-29.
Share a Subversion Repository

You can specify a repository location using the file:// protocol. However, Subversion
documentation strongly recommends that only a single user access a repository directly
via file:// URLs. See the Web page:
http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.7/svn-book.html#svn.serverconfig.choosing.recommendations
31-22
See Also
Caution Do not allow multiple users to access a repository directly via file:// URLs or
you risk corrupting the repository. Use file:// URLs only for single-user repositories.
Be aware of this caution if you use MATLAB to create a repository. MATLAB uses the
file:// protocol. Creating new repositories is provided for local, single-user access only,
for testing and debugging. Accessing a repository via file:// URLs is slower than using
a server.
When you want to share a repository, you need to set up a server. You can use svnserve
or the Apache SVN module. See the Web page references:
http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.7/svn-book.html#svn.serverconfig.svnserve
http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.7/svn-book.html#svn.serverconfig.httpd
See Also
Related Examples
31-23
Check Out from SVN Repository

Create a new local copy of a repository by retrieving files from source control.
1 Right-click in the white space (any blank area) in the Current Folder browser and
select Source Control > Manage Files.
2 In the Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box, select the source control
interface from the Source control integration list. To use SVN, leave the default
Built-In SVN Integration.
3 Click Change to browse for and validate the repository path. (If you know your
repository location, you can paste it into the Repository Path box and proceed to
step 8.)
4 In the Specify Repository URL dialog box, specify the repository URL by entering a
URL in the box, using the list of recent repositories, or by using the Generate URL
from folder button .
Caution Use file:// URLs only for single-user repositories. For more information,
see “Share a Subversion Repository” on page 31-22.
5 Click Validate to check the repository path.
31-24
Check Out from SVN Repository
If the path is invalid, check the URL against your source control repository browser.
6 If you see an authentication dialog box for your repository, enter login information to
continue.
7 If necessary, select a deeper folder in the repository tree. You might want to check
out from trunk or from a branch folder under tags, if your repository contains
tagged versions of files. You can check out from a branch, but the built-in SVN
integration does not support branch merging. Use an external tool such as
TortoiseSVN to perform branch merging. The example shows trunk selected, and
the Selected URL displays at the bottom of the dialog box. The retriever uses this
URL when you click OK.
8 When you have finished specifying the URL path you want to retrieve, click OK.
9 In the Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box, select the sandbox folder
where you want to put the retrieved files, and click Retrieve.
Caution Use local sandbox folders. Using a network folder with SVN slows source
control operations.
31-25
The Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box displays messages as it retrieves
the files from source control.
Note To update an existing sandbox from source control, see “Update SVN File Status
and Revision” on page 31-28.
Retrieve Tagged Version of Repository

To use tags with SVN, you need the standard folder structure in your repository. For
more information, see “Standard Repository Structure” on page 31-21.
1 Right-click in the white space in the Current Folder browser, and select Source
Control > Manage Files.
2 In the Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box, select the source control
interface from the Source control integration list. To use SVN, leave the default
Built-In SVN Integration.
3 Click Change to select the Repository Path that you want to retrieve files from.
31-26
See Also
4 In the Specify Repository URL dialog box:
a Select a recent repository from the Repository URL list, or click the Generate
URL from folder button to browse for the repository location.
b Click Validate to show the repository browser.
c Expand the tags folder in the repository tree, and select the tag version you
want. Navigate up a level in the repository if the URL contains the trunk.
d Click OK to continue and return to the Manage Files Using Source Control
dialog box.
5 Select the sandbox folder to receive the tagged files. You must use an empty sandbox
folder or specify a new folder.
6 Click Retrieve.
See Also
Related Examples
31-27
Update SVN File Status and Revision
In this section...
“Refresh Status of Files” on page 31-28
“Update Revisions of Files” on page 31-28
Refresh Status of Files

To refresh the source control status of files, select one or more files in the Current Folder
browser, right-click and select Source Control > Refresh SVN status.
To refresh the status of all files in a folder, right-click the white space of the Current
Folder browser and select Source Control > Refresh SVN status.
Note For SVN, refreshing the source control status does not contact the repository. To
get the latest revisions, see “Update Revisions of Files” on page 31-28.
Update Revisions of Files

To update the local copies of selected files, select one or more files in the Current Folder
browser, right-click and select Source Control > Update Selection from SVN.
To update all files in a folder, right-click the Current Folder browser and select Source
Control > Update All from SVN.
See Also
Related Examples
31-28
Get SVN File Locks
Get SVN File Locks

It is good practice to get a file lock before editing a file. The lock tells other users that the
file is being edited, and you can avoid merge issues. When you set up source control, you
can configure SVN to make files with certain extensions read only. Users must get a lock
on these read-only files before editing.
In the Current Folder browser, select the files you want to check out. Right-click the
selected files and select Source Control > Get File Lock. A lock symbol appears in
the source control status column. Other users cannot see the lock symbol in their
sandboxes, but they cannot get a file lock or check in a change when you have the lock.
If you see an SVN message reporting a working copy locked error, remove stale
locks. In the Current Folder browser, right-click and select Source Control > SVN
Cleanup. SVN uses working copy locks internally and they are not the file locks you
control using Source Control > Get File Lock.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Enforce Locking Files Before Editing” on page 31-22
31-29
Set Up Git Source Control

In this section...
“About Git Source Control” on page 31-30
“Install Command-Line Git Client” on page 31-31
“Register Binary Files with Git” on page 31-32
“Add Git Submodules” on page 31-34
About Git Source Control

Git integration with MATLAB provides distributed source control with support for
creating and merging branches. Git is a distributed source control tool, so you can
commit changes to a local repository and later synchronize with other remote
repositories.
Git supports distributed development because every sandbox contains a complete

repository. The full revision history of every file is saved locally. This enables working
offline, because you do not need to contact remote repositories for every local edit and
commit, only when pushing batches of changes. In addition, you can create your own
branches and commit local edits. Doing so is fast, and you do not need to merge with
other changes on each commit.
Capabilities of Git source control:
• Branch management
• Local full revision history
• Local access that is quicker than remote access
• Offline working
• Tracking of file names and contents separately
• Enforcing of change logs for tracing accountability
• Integration of batches of changes when ready
These capabilities do not suit every situation. If your project is not appropriate for offline
working or your repository is too large for a full local revision history, for example, Git is
not the ideal source control. In addition, if you need to enforce locking of files before
editing, Git does not have this ability. In that situation, SVN is the better choice.
31-30
When you use Git in MATLAB, you can:
• Create local Git repositories.

• Pull and fetch files from remote Git repositories.
• Create and switch branches.
• Merge branches locally.
• Commit locally.
• Push files to remote Git repositories.
This diagram represents the distributed Git workflow.
Install Command-Line Git Client

If you want to use Git to merge branches in MATLAB, you must also install a command-
line Git client that is available systemwide. You can use other Git functionality without
any additional installation.
Some clients are not available systemwide, including the mingw32 environment provided
by GitHub® (Git Shell on the Start menu). Installing command-line Git makes it
available systemwide, and then MATLAB can locate standard ssh keys.
31-31
Check if Git is available by using the command !git in MATLAB. If Git is not available,
install it. After you have installed a command-line Git client and registered your files as
binary, you can use the merging features of Git in MATLAB.
On Windows:
1 Download the Git installer and run it. You can find command-line Git at:
http://msysgit.github.io/
2 In the section on adjusting your PATH, choose the install option to Use Git from the
Windows Command Prompt. This option adds Git to your PATH variable, so that
MATLAB can communicate with Git.
3 In the section on configuring the line-ending conversions, choose the option
Checkout as-is, commit as-is to avoid converting any line endings in files.
4 To avoid corrupting binary files, before using Git to merge branches, register the
binary files.
On Linux, Git is available for most distributions. Install Git for your distribution. For
example, on Debian®, install Git by entering:
sudo apt-get install git
On Mac, on Mavericks (10.9) or above, try to run git from the Terminal. If you do not
have Git installed already, it will prompt you to install Xcode Command Line Tools. For
more options, see http://git-scm.com/doc.
Register Binary Files with Git

If you use third-party source control tools, you must register your MATLAB and
Simulink file extensions such as .mlx, .mat, .fig, .mdl, and .slx as binary formats. If
you do not register the extensions, these tools can corrupt your files when you submit
them by changing end-of-line characters, expanding tokens, substituting keywords, or
attempting to automerge. Corruption can occur whether you use the source control tools
outside of MATLAB or if you try submitting files from MATLAB without first registering
your file formats.
Also check that other file extensions are registered as binary to avoid corruption at
check-in. Check and register files such as .mdlp, .slxp, .sldd, .p, MEX-
files, .xlsx, .jpg, .pdf, .docx, etc.
31-32
After you install a command-line Git client, you can prevent Git from corrupting your
files by inserting conflict markers. To do so, edit your .gitattributes file to register
binary files. For details, see:
http://git-scm.com/docs/gitattributes
1 If you do not already have a .gitattributes file in your sandbox folder, create one
at the MATLAB command prompt:
edit .gitattributes
2 Add these lines to the .gitattributes file:
*.mlx -crlf -diff -merge

*.mat -crlf -diff -merge
*.fig -crlf -diff -merge
*.p -crlf -diff -merge
*.slx -crlf -diff -merge
*.mdl -crlf -diff -merge
These lines specify not to try automatic line feed, diff, and merge attempts for these
types of files.
corruption at check-in. Check for files such as .mdlp, .slxp, MEX-files
attributes file for each file type you need.
Examples:
*.mdlp -crlf -diff -merge

*.slxp -crlf -diff -merge
*.sldd -crlf -diff -merge
*.mexa64 -crlf -diff -merge
*.mexw64 -crlf -diff -merge
*.mexmaci64 -crlf -diff -merge
*.xlsx -crlf -diff -merge
*.docx -crlf -diff -merge
*.pdf -crlf -diff -merge
*.jpg -crlf -diff -merge
*.png -crlf -diff -merge
4 Restart MATLAB so you can start using the Git client.
31-33
Add Git Submodules

To reuse code from another repository, you can specify Git submodules.
To clone an external Git repository as a submodule:
1 Right-click in the MATLAB Current Folder browser, and select Source Control >
Submodules.
2 In the Submodules dialog box, click the + button.
3 In the Add Submodule dialog box, in the Remote box, specify a repository location.
Optionally, click Validate.
4 In the Path box, specify a location for the submodule and click OK. The Submodules
dialog box displays the status and details of the submodule.
5 Check the status message, and click Close.
Use Fetch to Get Latest Submodule Version
When you want to manage the added submodule, open the Submodules dialog box.
1 To get the latest version of a submodule, in the Submodules dialog box, click Fetch.
2 After fetching, you must merge. Check the Status message in the Submodules dialog
box for information about your current branch relative to the remote tracking branch
in the repository. When you see the message Behind, you need to merge in changes
from the repository to your local branch.
3 Click Branches and merge in the origin changes to your local branch using the
Branches dialog box. See “Fetch and Merge” on page 31-46.
Use Push to Send Changes to the Submodule Repository
If you make changes in your submodule and want to send changes back to the repository:
1 Perform a local commit in the parent folder.

2 Open the Submodules dialog box and click Push.
If you want other users to obtain your changes in the submodule when they clone the
parent folder, make sure the index and head match.
1 In the Submodules dialog box, check the index and head values. The index points to
the head commit at the time you first cloned the submodule, or when you last
31-34
See Also
committed the parent folder. If the index and head do not match, you must update
the index.
2 To update the index, commit your changes in the parent folder, and then click Push
in the Submodules dialog box. This action makes the index and head the same.
See Also
Related Examples
31-35
Clone from Git Repository

Clone a remote Git repository to retrieve repository files.
1 Right-click in the white space (any blank area) in the Current Folder browser, and
select Source Control > Manage Files.
2 In the Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box, select Git from the Source
control integration list.
3 Click Change to browse for and validate the repository path. (If you know your
repository location, you can paste it into the Repository Path box and proceed to
step 7.)
4 In the Select a Repository dialog box, specify the repository path by entering the
path in the box, using the list of recent repositories, or by using the Browse to a Git
repository on disk button .
5 Click Validate to check the repository path.
If the path is invalid, check it against your source control repository browser.
6 If you see an authentication dialog box for your repository, enter login information to
continue.
7 When you have finished specifying the path you want to retrieve, click OK.
31-36
See Also
8 In the Manage Files Using Source Control dialog box, select the sandbox folder
where you want to put the retrieved files, and click Retrieve.
Troubleshooting
If you encounter errors like OutOfMemoryError: Java heap space, for example
when cloning big Git repositories, then edit your MATLAB preferences to increase the
heap size.

2 Select MATLAB > General > Java Heap Memory.
3 Move the slider to increase the heap size, and then click OK.
4 Restart MATLAB.
See Also
Related Examples
31-37
Update Git File Status and Revision

In this section...
“Refresh Status of Files” on page 31-38
“Update Revisions of Files” on page 31-38
Refresh Status of Files

To refresh the source control status of files, select one or more files in the Current Folder
browser, right-click and select Source Control > Refresh Git status.
To refresh the status of all files in the repository, right-click the white space of the
Current Folder browser and select Source Control > Refresh Git status.
Update Revisions of Files

To update all files in a repository, right-click in the Current Folder browser and select
Source Control > Pull.
Caution Ensure you have registered binary files with Git before using Pull. If you do not,
conflict markers can corrupt your files. For more information, see “Register Binary Files
with Git” on page 31-32.
Pull fetches the latest changes and merges them into your current branch. If you are not
sure what is going to come in from the repository, use fetch to examine the changes first
and then merge the changes manually. For more information, see “Pull, Push and Fetch
Files with Git” on page 31-45.
Pull might fail if you have conflicts. With a complicated change you might want to create
a branch from the origin, make some compatibility changes, then merge that branch into
the main tracking branch.
31-38
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
31-39
Branch and Merge with Git

In this section...
“Create Branch” on page 31-40
“Switch Branch” on page 31-42
“Compare Branches” on page 31-42
“Merge Branches” on page 31-42
“Revert to Head” on page 31-43
“Delete Branches” on page 31-43
Create Branch
1 From within your Git repository folder, right-click the white space of the Current
Folder browser and select Source Control > Branches. In the Branches dialog box,
you can view, switch, create, and merge branches.
Tip You can inspect information about each commit node. Select a node in the
Branch Browser diagram to view the author, date, commit message, and changed
files.
The Branch Browser in this figure shows an example branch history.
31-40
2 Select a source for the new branch. Click a node in the Branch Browser diagram,
or enter a unique identifier in the Source text box. You can enter a tag, branch
name, or a unique prefix of the SHA1 hash (for example, 73c637 to identify a
specific commit). Leave the default to create a branch from the head of the current
branch.
3 Enter a name in the Branch name text box and click Create.
4 To work on the files on your new branch, switch your project to the branch.
31-41
In the Branches drop-down list, select the branch you want to switch to and click
Switch.
5 Close the Branches dialog box and work on the files on your branch.
For next steps, see “Pull, Push and Fetch Files with Git” on page 31-45.
Switch Branch
Folder browser and select Source Control > Branches.
2 In the Branches dialog box, in the Branches drop-down list, select the branch you
want to and click Switch.
Compare Branches
From within your Git repository folder, right-click the white space of the Current Folder
browser and select Source Control > Branches. In the Branches dialog box, to examine
differences from the parent, right-click a file in the tree under Differences from
parent and select Show Difference. MATLAB opens a comparison report.
If you want to examine added or deleted files, or to test how the code ran in previous
versions, you can save a copy of the selected or parent files. Right-click a file and select
Save As or Save Parent As.
Merge Branches
Before you can merge branches, you must install command-line Git on your system path
and register binary files to prevent Git from inserting conflict markers. See “Install
Command-Line Git Client” on page 31-31.
Tip After you fetch changes, you must merge. For more information, see “Fetch and
Merge” on page 31-46.
To merge any branches:
Folder browser and select Source Control and Branches.
31-42
2 In the Branches dialog box, from the Branches drop-down list, select a branch you
want to merge into the current branch, and click Merge.
If the branch merge causes a conflict that Git cannot resolve automatically, an error
dialog box reports that automatic merge failed. Resolve the conflicts before proceeding.
Caution Do not move or delete files outside of MATLAB because this can cause errors on
merge.
Keep Your Version
1 To keep your version of the file, right-click the file and select Mark Conflict
Resolved.
2 Click Commit Modified Files to commit your change that marks the conflict
resolved.
View Conflicts in Branch Versions
If you merge a branch and there is a conflict in a file, Git marks the file as conflicted and
does not modify the contents. Right-click the file and select Source Control > View
Conflicts. A comparison report opens that shows the differences between the file on your
branch and the branch you want to merge into. Decide how to resolve the conflict. See
“Resolve Source Control Conflicts” on page 31-11.
Revert to Head
Folder browser and select Source Control > Branches.
2 In the Branches dialog box, click Revert to Head to remove all local changes.
Delete Branches
1 In the Branches dialog box under Branch Browser, expand the Branches drop-
down list, and select the branch you want to delete.
2 On the far right, click the down arrow and select Delete Branch.
31-43
Caution You cannot undo branch deletion.
See Also
Related Examples
31-44
Pull, Push and Fetch Files with Git
Pull, Push and Fetch Files with Git

Use this workflow to work with a remote repository. With Git, there is a two-step
workflow: commit local changes, and then push to the remote repository. In MATLAB,
the only access to the remote repository is through the Pull, Push and Fetch menu
options. All other actions, such as Compare to Ancestor and Commit, use the local
repository. This diagram represents the Git workflow.
Pull and Push

To get the latest changes, right-click the Current Folder browser and select Source
Control > Pull. Pull fetches the latest changes and merges them into your current
branch. If you are not sure what is going to come in from the repository, use fetch to
examine the changes first and then merge the changes manually.
Note Before you can merge, you must install command-line Git and register binary files
to prevent Git from inserting conflict markers. See “Install Command-Line Git Client” on
page 31-31.
Pull might fail if you have conflicts. With a complicated change you might want to create
a branch from the origin, make some compatibility changes, then merge that branch into
the main tracking branch.
31-45
To commit changes to the local repository, right-click the Current Folder browser and
select Source Control > View and Commit Changes.
To see if your local changes have moved ahead of the remote tracking branch, right-click
the file or white space of the Current Folder browser and select Source Control > View
Details. The Git information field indicates whether your committed local changes are
ahead of, behind, or coincident with the remote tracking branch.
To send local commits to the remote repository, right-click in the Current Folder browser
and select Source Control > Push. A message appears if you cannot push your changes
directly because the repository has moved on. Right-click in the Current Folder browser
and select Source Control > Fetch to fetch all changes from the remote repository.
Merge branches and resolve conflicts, and then you can push your changes.
Using Git, you cannot add empty folders to source control, so you cannot select Push and
then clone an empty folder. You can create an empty folder in MATLAB, but if you push
changes and then sync a new sandbox, then the empty folder does not appear in the new
sandbox. To push empty folders to the repository for other users to sync, create a
gitignore file in the folder and then push your changes.
Fetch and Merge

Use Fetch to get changes and merge manually. Use Pull instead to fetch the latest
changes and merge them into your current branch.
Note After fetching, you must merge. Before you can merge branches, you must install
command-line Git and register binary files to prevent Git from inserting conflict
markers. See “Install Command-Line Git Client” on page 31-31.
To fetch changes from the remote repository, right-click in the Current Folder browser
and select Source Control > Fetch. Fetch updates all of the origin branches in the local
repository. Your sandbox files do not change. To see others’ changes, you need to merge
in the origin changes to your local branches.
For information about your current branch relative to the remote tracking branch in the
repository, right-click the file or white space of the Current Folder browser and select
Source Control > View Details. The Git information field indicates whether your
committed local changes are ahead of, behind, or coincident with the remote tracking
31-46
See Also
branch. When you see the message Behind, you need to merge in changes from the
repository to your local branch.
For example, if you are on the master branch, get all changes from the master branch in
the remote repository.
1 Right-click in the Current Folder browser and select Source Control > Fetch
2 Right-click in the Current Folder browser and select Source Control > Branches.
3 In the Branches dialog box, select origin/master in the Branches list.
4 Click Merge. The origin branch changes merge into the master branch in your
sandbox.
If you right-click the Current Folder browser and select Source Control > View
Details, the Git information field indicates Coincident with /origin/master.
You can now view the changes that you fetched and merged from the remote repository
in your local sandbox.
See Also
Related Examples
31-47
Move, Rename, or Delete Files Under Source Control

Move, rename, or delete files using the MATLAB Source Control context menu options or
another source control client application.
To move a file under source control, right-click the file in the Current Folder browser,
select Source Control > Move, and enter a new file location.
To rename a file under source control, right-click the file in the Current Folder browser,
select Source Control > Rename, and enter a new file name.
To delete a file from the repository, mark the file for deletion.
• To mark a file for deletion from the repository and retain a local copy, right-click the
file in the Current Folder browser. Select Source Control and then Delete from
SVN or Delete from Git. When the file is marked for deletion from source control,
the symbol changes to Deleted . The file is removed from the repository at the next
commit.
• To mark a file for deletion from the repository and from your disk, right-click the file
in the Current Folder browser. Select Source Control and then Delete from SVN
and disk or Delete from Git and disk. The file disappears from the Current Folder
browser and is immediately deleted from your disk. The file is removed from the
repository at the next commit.
See Also
Related Examples
31-48
Customize External Source Control to Use MATLAB for Diff and Merge
Customize External Source Control to Use MATLAB for Diff and

Merge
You can customize external source control tools to use the MATLAB Comparison Tool for
diff and merge. If you want to compare MATLAB files such as live scripts, MAT, SLX, or
MDL files from your source control tool, then you can configure your source control tool to
open the MATLAB Comparison Tool.
MATLAB Comparison Tool provides useful merge tools for MathWorks files and is
compatible with all popular software configuration management and version control
systems.
Set up your source control tool to use MATLAB as the application for diff and merge for
the file extensions you want, for example, .mlx, .mat, .slx, or .mdl, by following these
steps:
1 To get the required file paths and set the preference to reuse open MATLAB
sessions, run this command in MATLAB:
comparisons.ExternalSCMLink.setup()
This command sets the MATLAB preference, under Comparison, called Allow
external source control tools to use open MATLAB sessions for diffs and
merges.
The command also displays the file paths you will copy and paste into your source
control tool setup:
• On Windows:
matlabroot\bin\win64\mlDiff.exe
matlabroot\bin\win64\mlMerge.exe
• On Linux:
matlabroot/bin/glnxa64/mlDiff
matlabroot/bin/glnxa64/mlMerge
On Mac:
matlabroot/bin/maci64/mlDiff
31-49
matlabroot/bin/maci64/mlMerge
Where matlabroot is replaced with the full path to your installation, for
example, C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2016b.
2 Set up diff.
a In the MATLAB Command Window, copy the file path to mlDiff, for example,
C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2016b\bin\win64\mlDiff.exe.
b In your source control tool, locate the diff setting, and add an entry to specify
what to do with a particular file extension (for example, .slx). Paste in the file
path to mlDiff that you copied from the MATLAB Command Window.
c After the path to the script, or in the arguments box, add arguments to specify
the input files. Look up the argument names specific to your source control tool.
Specify the inputs for diffs, in this order: leftFile, rightFile.
For example, for Tortoise SVN:

"C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2016b\bin\win64\mlDiff.exe" %base %mine
For Perforce® P4V:

"C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2016b\bin\win64\mlDiff.exe" %1 %2
3 Set up merge.
a In the MATLAB Command Window, copy the file path to mlMerge.

b In your source control tool, locate the merge setting, and add an entry to specify
what to do with a particular file extension (for example, .slx). Paste in the file
path to mlMerge that you copied from the MATLAB Command Window.
c After the path to the script, or in the arguments box, add arguments to specify
the input files. Look up the argument names specific to your source control tool.
Specify the inputs for merges, in this order: base, mine, theirs, and merged
target file.
For example, for Tortoise SVN:

"C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2016b\bin\win64\mlMerge.exe" %base %mine %theirs %merged
For Perforce P4V:

"C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2016b\bin\win64\mlMerge.exe" %b %2 %1 %r
4 After this setup, when you use diff or merge, your external source control tool opens
a report in MATLAB Comparison Tool. Use the report to view changes and resolve
merges.
31-50
See Also
Your diff and merge operations use open MATLAB sessions if available, and only
open MATLAB when necessary.The comparison only uses the specified MATLAB
installation.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Comparing Text and Live Scripts”
• “Comparing MAT-Files”
• “Comparing Variables”
• “Merge Simulink Models from the Comparison Report” (Simulink)
31-51
MSSCCI Source Control Interface
Note MSSCCI support will be removed in a future release. Replace this functionality
with one of the following options.
• Use a source control system that is part of the MathWorks “Source Control
Integration” with the Current Folder browser.
• Use the Source Control Software Development Kit to create a plug-in for your source
control.
• Use the MATLAB system function to access the command-line API for your source
control tool. This option does not provide integration with the MATLAB Current
Folder browser menus or source control status column.
If you use source control systems to manage your files, you can interface with the
systems to perform source control actions from within the MATLAB, Simulink, and
Stateflow products. Use menu items in the MATLAB, Simulink, or Stateflow products, or
run functions in the MATLAB Command Window to interface with your source control
systems.
The source control interface on Windows works with any source control system that
conforms to the Microsoft Common Source Control standard, Version 1.1. If your source
control system does not conform to the standard, use a Microsoft Source Code Control
API wrapper product for your source control system so that you can interface with it from
the MATLAB, Simulink, and Stateflow products.
This documentation uses the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe® software as an example. Your
source control system might use different terminology and not support the same options
or might use them in a different way. Regardless, you should be able to perform similar
actions with your source control system based on this documentation.
Perform most source control interface actions from the Current Folder browser. You can
also perform many of these actions for a single file from the MATLAB Editor, a Simulink
model window, or a Stateflow chart window—for more information, see “Access MSSCCI
Source Control from Editors” on page 31-70.
31-52
Set Up MSSCCI Source Control
control.
In this section...
“Create Projects in Source Control System” on page 31-53
“Specify Source Control System with MATLAB Software” on page 31-55
“Register Source Control Project with MATLAB Software” on page 31-56
“Add Files to Source Control” on page 31-58
Create Projects in Source Control System

In your source control system, create the projects that your folders and files will be
associated with.
All files in a folder must belong to the same source control project. Be sure the working
folder for the project in the source control system specifies the correct path to the folder
on disk.
Example of Creating Source Control Project
This example uses the project my_thesis_files in Microsoft Visual SourceSafe. This
illustration of the Current Folder browser shows the path to the folder on disk, D:
\my_thesis_files.
31-53
The following illustration shows the example project in the source control system.
To set the working folder in Microsoft Visual SourceSafe for this example, select
my_thesis_files, right-click, select Set Working Folder from the context menu, and
specify D:\my_thesis_files in the resulting dialog box.
31-54
Specify Source Control System with MATLAB Software

In MATLAB, specify the source control system you want to access. On the Home tab, in
the Environment section, click Preferences > MATLAB > General > Source
Control.
The currently selected system is shown in the Preferences dialog box. The list includes
all installed source control systems that support the Microsoft Common Source Control
standard.
Select the source control system you want to interface with and click OK.
31-55
MATLAB remembers preferences between sessions, so you only need to perform this
action again when you want to access a different source control system.
Source Control with 64-Bit Versions of MATLAB
If you run a 64-bit version of MATLAB and want MATLAB to interface with your source
control system, your source control system must be 64-bit compliant. If you have a 32-bit
source control system, or if you have a 64-bit source control system running in 32-bit
compatibility mode, MATLAB cannot use it. In that event, MATLAB displays a warning
about the problem in the Source Control preference pane.
Register Source Control Project with MATLAB Software

Register a source control system project with a folder in MATLAB, that is, associate a
source control system project with a folder and all files in that folder. Do this only one
time for any file in the folder, which registers all files in that folder:
1 In the MATLAB Current Folder browser, select a file that is in the folder you want
to associate with a project in your source control system. For example, select D:
\my_thesis_files\wind.m. This will associate all files in the my_thesis_files
folder.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Register
Name_of_Source_Control_System Project with MATLAB. The
31-56
Name_of_Source_Control_System is the source control system you selected using

preferences as described in “Specify Source Control System with MATLAB Software”
on page 31-55.
The following example shows Microsoft Visual SourceSafe.
3 In the resulting Name_of_Source_Control_System Login dialog box, provide the

user name and password you use to access your source control system, and click OK.
31-57
4 In the resulting Choose project from Name_of_Source_Control_System dialog

box, select the source control system project to associate with the folder and click
OK. This example shows my_thesis_files.
The selected file, its folder, and all files in the folder, are associated with the source
control system project you selected. For the example, MATLAB associates all files in
D:\my_thesis_files with the source control project my_thesis_files.
Add Files to Source Control

Add files to the source control system. Do this only once for each file:
1 In the Current Folder browser, select files you want to add to the source control
system.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Add to Source
Control.
31-58
3 The resulting Add to source control dialog box lists files you selected to add. You
can add text in the Comments field. If you expect to use the files soon, select the
Keep checked out check box (which is selected by default). Click OK.
If you try to add an unsaved file, the file is automatically saved upon adding.
31-59
Check Files In and Out from MSSCCI Source Control
control.
In this section...
“Check Files Into Source Control” on page 31-60
“Check Files Out of Source Control” on page 31-61
“Undoing the Checkout” on page 31-61
Before checking files into and out of your source control system from the MATLAB
desktop, be sure to set up your system for use with MATLAB as described in “Set Up
MSSCCI Source Control” on page 31-53.
Check Files Into Source Control

After creating or modifying files using MATLAB software or related products, check the
files into the source control system by performing these steps:
1 In the Current Folder browser, select the files to check in. A file can be open or
closed when you check it in, but it must be saved, that is, it cannot contain unsaved
changes.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Check In.
3 In the resulting Check in file(s) dialog box, you can add text in the Comments
field. If you want to continue working on the files, select the check box Keep
checked out. Click OK.
31-60
Check Files In and Out from MSSCCI Source Control
If a file contains unsaved changes when you try to check it in, you will be prompted to
save the changes to complete the checkin. If you did not keep the file checked out and you
keep the file open, note that it is a read-only version.
Check Files Out of Source Control

From MATLAB, to check out the files you want to modify, perform these steps:
1 In the Current Folder browser, select the files to check out.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Check Out.
3 The resulting Check out file(s) dialog box lists files you selected to check out. Enter
comment text in the Comments field, which appears if your source control system
supports comments on checkout. Click OK.
After checking out a file, make changes to it in MATLAB or another product, and save
the file. For example, edit a file in the Editor.
If you try to change a file without first having checked it out, the file is read-only, as seen
in the title bar, and you will not be able to save any changes. This protects you from
accidentally overwriting the source control version of the file.
If you end the MATLAB session, the file remains checked out. You can check in the file
from within MATLAB during a later session, or folder from your source control system.
Undoing the Checkout

You can undo the checkout for files. The files remain checked in, and do not have any of
the changes you made since you last checked them out. To save any changes you have
31-61
made since checking out a particular file click Save on the Editor or Live Editor tab,
select Save As, and supply a different file name before you undo the checkout.
To undo a checkout, follow these steps:
1 In the MATLAB Current Folder browser, select the files for which you want to undo
the checkout.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Undo Checkout.
The MATLAB Undo checkout dialog box opens, listing the files you selected.
3 Click OK.
31-62
Additional MSSCCI Source Control Actions
control.
In this section...
“Getting the Latest Version of Files for Viewing or Compiling” on page 31-63
“Removing Files from the Source Control System” on page 31-64
“Showing File History” on page 31-65
“Comparing the Working Copy of a File to the Latest Version in Source Control” on page
31-66
“Viewing Source Control Properties of a File” on page 31-68
“Starting the Source Control System” on page 31-68
Getting the Latest Version of Files for Viewing or Compiling

You can get the latest version of a file from the source control system for viewing or
running. Getting a file differs from checking it out. When you get a file, it is write
protected so you cannot edit it, but when you check out a file, you can edit it.
To get the latest version, follow these steps:
1 In the MATLAB Current Folder browser, select the folders or files that you want to
get. If you select files, you cannot select folders too.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Get Latest
Version.
31-63
The MATLAB Get latest version dialog box opens, listing the files or folders you
selected.
3 Click OK.
You can now open the file to view it, run the file, or check out the file for editing.
Removing Files from the Source Control System

To remove files from the source control system, follow these steps:
1 In the MATLAB Current Folder browser, select the files you want to remove.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Remove from
Source Control.
The MATLAB Remove from source control dialog box opens, listing the files you
selected.
3 Click OK.
31-64
Showing File History

To show the history of a file in the source control system, follow these steps:
1 In the MATLAB Current Folder browser, select the file for which you want to view
the history.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > History.
A dialog box, which is specific to your source control system, opens. For Microsoft
Visual SourceSafe, the History Options dialog box opens, as shown in the following
example illustration.
3 Complete the dialog box to specify the range of history you want for the selected file
and click OK. For example, enter my_name for User.
The history presented depends on your source control system. For Microsoft Visual
SourceSafe, the History dialog box opens for that file, showing the file's history in
the source control system.
31-65
Comparing the Working Copy of a File to the Latest Version in Source

Control
You can compare the current working copy of a file with the latest checked-in version of
the file in the source control system. This highlights the differences between the two
files, showing the changes you made since you checked out the file.
To view the differences, follow these steps:
differences. This is a file that has been checked out and edited.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Differences.
A dialog box, which is specific to your source control system, opens. For Microsoft
Visual SourceSafe, the Difference Options dialog box opens.
3 Review the default entries in the dialog box, make any needed changes, and click
OK. The following example is for Microsoft Visual SourceSafe.
31-66
The method of presenting differences depends on your source control system. For
Microsoft Visual SourceSafe, the Differences for dialog box opens. This highlights
the differences between the working copy of the file and the latest checked-in version
of the file.
31-67
Viewing Source Control Properties of a File

To view the source control properties of a file, follow these steps:
properties.
2 Right-click, and from the context menu, select Source Control > Properties.
A dialog box, which is specific to your source control system, opens. The following
example shows the Microsoft Visual SourceSafe properties dialog box.
Starting the Source Control System

All the MATLAB source control actions automatically start the source control system to
perform the action, if the source control system is not already open. If you want to start
the source control system from MATLAB without performing a specific action source
control action,
31-68
1 Right-click any folder or file in the MATLAB Current Folder browser

2 From the context menu, select Source Control > Start Source Control System.
The interface to your source control system opens, showing the source control project
associated with the current folder in MATLAB. The following example shows the
Microsoft Visual SourceSafe Explorer interface.
31-69
Access MSSCCI Source Control from Editors
control.
You can create or open a file in the Editor, the Simulink or Stateflow products and
perform most source control actions from their File > Source Control menus, rather
than from the Current Folder browser. Following are some differences in the source
control interface process when you use the Editor, Simulink, or Stateflow:
• You can perform actions on only one file at time.

• Some of the dialog boxes have a different icon in the title bar. For example, the
Check out file(s) dialog box uses the MATLAB Editor icon instead of the MATLAB
icon.
• You cannot add a new (Untitled) file, but must instead first save the file.
• You cannot register projects from the Simulink or Stateflow products. Instead,
register a project using the Current Folder browser, as described in “Register Source
Control Project with MATLAB Software” on page 31-56.
31-70
Troubleshoot MSSCCI Source Control Problems
control.
In this section...
“Source Control Error: Provider Not Present or Not Installed Properly” on page 31-71
“Restriction Against @ Character” on page 31-72
“Add to Source Control Is the Only Action Available” on page 31-72
“More Solutions for Source Control Problems” on page 31-73
Source Control Error: Provider Not Present or Not Installed Properly

In some cases, MATLAB software recognizes your source control system but you cannot
use source control features for MATLAB. Specifically, when you select MATLAB >
General > Source Control in the Preferences dialog box, MATLAB lists your source
control system, but you cannot perform any source control actions. Only the Start
Source Control System item is available, and when you select it, MATLAB displays
this error:
Source control provider is not present or not installed properly.
Often, this error occurs because a registry key that MATLAB requires from the source
control application is not present. Make sure this registry key is present:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\SourceCodeControlProvider\
InstalledSCCProviders
The registry key refers to another registry key that is similar to
31-71
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\SourceSafe\SccServerPath
This registry key has a path to a DLL-file in the file system. Make sure the DLL-file
exists in that location. If you are not familiar with registry keys, ask your system
administrator for help.
If this does not solve the problem and you use Microsoft Visual SourceSafe, try running a
client setup for your source control application. When SourceSafe is installed on a server
for a group to use, each machine client can run a setup but is not required to do so.
However, some applications that interface with SourceSafe, including MATLAB, require
you to run the client setup. Run the client setup, which should resolve the problem.
If the problem persists, access source control outside of MATLAB.
Restriction Against @ Character

Some source control systems, such as Perforce and Synergy™, reserve the @ character.
Perforce, for example, uses it as a revision specifier. Therefore, you might experience
problems if you use these source control systems with MATLAB files and folders that
include the @ character in the folder or file name.
You might be able to work around this restriction by quoting nonstandard characters in
file names, such as with an escape sequence, which some source control systems allow.
Consult your source control system documentation or technical support resources for a
workaround.
Add to Source Control Is the Only Action Available

To use source control features for a file in the Simulink or Stateflow products, the file's
source control project must first be registered with MATLAB. When a file's source control
project is not registered with MATLAB, all MATLAB > General > Source Control
menu items on the Preferences dialog box are disabled except Add to Source Control.
You can select Add to Source Control, which registers the project with MATLAB, or
you can register the project using the Current Folder browser, as described in “Register
Source Control Project with MATLAB Software” on page 31-56. You can then perform
source control actions for all files in that project (folder).
31-72
More Solutions for Source Control Problems

The latest solutions for problems interfacing MATLAB with a source control system
appear on the MathWorks Web page for support at http://www.mathworks.com/
support/. Search Solutions and Technical Notes for “source control.”
31-73
32
Unit Testing
• “Write Test Using Live Script” on page 32-3

• “Write Script-Based Unit Tests” on page 32-7
• “Write Script-Based Test Using Local Functions” on page 32-14
• “Extending Script-Based Tests” on page 32-18
• “Write Function-Based Unit Tests” on page 32-22
• “Write Simple Test Case Using Functions” on page 32-27
• “Write Test Using Setup and Teardown Functions” on page 32-32
• “Extending Function-Based Tests” on page 32-39
• “Author Class-Based Unit Tests in MATLAB” on page 32-44
• “Write Simple Test Case Using Classes” on page 32-48
• “Write Setup and Teardown Code Using Classes” on page 32-53
• “Types of Qualifications” on page 32-57
• “Tag Unit Tests” on page 32-60
• “Write Tests Using Shared Fixtures” on page 32-65
• “Create Basic Custom Fixture” on page 32-69
• “Create Advanced Custom Fixture” on page 32-72
• “Create Basic Parameterized Test” on page 32-79
• “Create Advanced Parameterized Test” on page 32-85
• “Create Simple Test Suites” on page 32-94
• “Run Tests for Various Workflows” on page 32-97
• “Programmatically Access Test Diagnostics” on page 32-101
• “Add Plugin to Test Runner” on page 32-102
• “Write Plugins to Extend TestRunner” on page 32-105
• “Create Custom Plugin” on page 32-109
• “Write Plugin to Save Diagnostic Details” on page 32-116
• “Plugin to Generate Custom Test Output Format” on page 32-121
32 Unit Testing
• “Analyze Test Case Results” on page 32-125

• “Analyze Failed Test Results” on page 32-129
• “Dynamically Filtered Tests” on page 32-132
• “Create Custom Constraint” on page 32-140
• “Create Custom Boolean Constraint” on page 32-143
• “Create Custom Tolerance” on page 32-146
• “Overview of Performance Testing Framework” on page 32-152
• “Test Performance Using Scripts or Functions” on page 32-157
• “Test Performance Using Classes” on page 32-163
• “Create Mock Object” on page 32-171
• “Specify Mock Object Behavior” on page 32-180
• “Qualify Mock Object Interaction” on page 32-187
32-2
Write Test Using Live Script

This example shows how to test a function that you create by writing a live script,
'TestRightTriLiveScriptExample.mlx'. The example function computes the angles
of a right triangle, and you create a live-script-based unit test to test the function.
A live-script-based test must adhere to the following conventions:
• The name of the live-script file must start or end with the word 'test', which is case-
insensitive.
• Place each unit test into a separate section of the live-script file. The heading of each
section becomes the name of the test element. If a section has no heading, MATLAB
assigns a name to the test.
• Consider how you are running your live-script-based test. If you run the test using the
Run buttons in the Live Editor and MATLAB encounters a test failure, then it stops
execution of the script and does not run any remaining tests. If you run the live script
using the unit testing framework, such as with the runtests function, then if
MATLAB encounters a test failure, it still runs remaining tests.
• When a live script is runs as a test, variables defined in one test are not accessible
within other tests. Similarly, variables defined in other workspaces are not accessible
to the tests.
Outside of this example, in your current MATLB folder, create a function in a file,
rightTri.m. This function takes lengths of two sides of a triangle as input and returns
the three angles of the corresponding right triangle. The input sides are the two shorter
edges of the triangle, not the hypotenuse.
type rightTri.m
function angles = rightTri(sides)
A = atand(sides(1)/sides(2));
B = atand(sides(2)/sides(1));
hypotenuse = sides(1)/sind(A);
C = asind(hypotenuse*sind(A)/sides(1));
angles = [A B C];
end
32-3
32 Unit Testing
Test: Small angle approximation
You can include equations and images in your live script to help document the test. Create
the following test for the small angle approximation. Typically, when you compare
floating-point values, you specify a tolerance for the comparison.
The rightTri function should return values consistent with the small angle
approximation, such that .
angles = rightTri([1 1500]);

smallAngleInRadians = (pi/180)*angles(1); % convert to radians
approx = sin(smallAngleInRadians);
assert(abs(approx-smallAngleInRadians) <= 1e-10, 'Problem with small angle approximatio
Test: Sum of Angles
You can have multiple assert statements in the same test. However, if the first assertion
fails, the MATLAB does not evaluate the remaining statements.
The sum of all angles of the resulting right triangle should always be 180 degrees.

assert(sum(angles) == 180)

angles = rightTri([2 2*sqrt(3)]);

Test: 30-60-90 triangle
32-4
Test that the sides of the triangle reduce to 1 and . In which case, the angles are
.
tol = 1e-10;
angles = rightTri([2 2*sqrt(3)]);
assert(abs(angles(1)-30)<= tol)
Test: Isosceles Triangles
For isosceles triangles, both of the non-right angles must be 45 degrees; otherwise assert
throws an error.
Test that two sides of the triangle are equal. In which case, the corresponding angles are
equal.
32-5
32 Unit Testing

assert(angles(1) == 45)
assert(angles(1) == angles(2))
To run your tests, best practice is to use the testing framework via the runtests function
instead of the Run button in the Live Editor. The testing framework provides additional
diagnostic information. In the event of a test failure, the framework runs subsequent tests
but the Run button in the Live Editor does not. For example, to run this test at the
MATLAB command prompt, type result =
runtests('TestRightTriLiveScriptExample'). For more information, see
runtests.
See Also
assert | runtests
Related Examples
32-6
Write Script-Based Unit Tests

This example shows how to write a script that tests a function that you create. The
example function computes the angles of a right triangle, and you create a script-based
unit test to test the function.
Create rightTri Function to Test
Create this function in a file, rightTri.m, in your current MATLAB® folder. This
function takes lengths of two sides of a triangle as input and returns the three angles of
the corresponding right triangle. The input sides are the two shorter edges of the
triangle, not the hypotenuse.
function angles = rightTri(sides)
A = atand(sides(1)/sides(2));
B = atand(sides(2)/sides(1));
hypotenuse = sides(1)/sind(A);
C = asind(hypotenuse*sind(A)/sides(1));
angles = [A B C];
end
Create Test Script
In your working folder, create a new script, rightTriTest.m. Each unit test checks a
different output of the rightTri function. A test script must adhere to the following
conventions:
• The name of the script file must start or end with the word 'test', which is case-
insensitive.
• Place each unit test into a separate section of the script file. Each section begins with
two percent signs (%%), and the text that follows on the same line becomes the name of
the test element. If no text follows the %%, MATLAB assigns a name to the test. If
MATLAB encounters a test failure, it still runs remaining tests.
• In a test script, the shared variable section consists of any code that appears before
the first explicit code section (the first line beginning with %%). Tests share the
variables that you define in this section. Within a test, you can modify the values of
32-7
32 Unit Testing
these variables. However, in subsequent tests, the value is reset to the value defined
in the shared variables section.
• In the shared variables section (first code section), define any preconditions necessary
for your tests. If the inputs or outputs do not meet this precondition, MATLAB does
not run any of the tests. MATLAB marks the tests as failed and incomplete.
• When a script is run as a test, variables defined in one test are not accessible within
other tests unless they are defined in the shared variables section (first code section).
Similarly, variables defined in other workspaces are not accessible to the tests.
• If the script file does not include any code sections, MATLAB generates a single test
element from the full contents of the script file. The name of the test element is the
same as the script file name. In this case, if MATLAB encounters a failed test, it halts
execution of the entire script.
In rightTriTest.m, write four tests to test the output of rightTri. Use the assert
function to test the different conditions. In the shared variables section, define four
triangle geometries and define a precondition that the rightTri function returns a right
triangle.
% test triangles
tri = [7 9];
triIso = [4 4];
tri306090 = [2 2*sqrt(3)];
triSkewed = [1 1500];
% preconditions
angles = rightTri(tri);
assert(angles(3) == 90,'Fundamental problem: rightTri not producing right triangle')
%% Test 1: sum of angles

angles = rightTri(triIso);
angles = rightTri(tri306090);
angles = rightTri(triSkewed);
32-8
%% Test 2: isosceles triangles

%% Test 3: 30-60-90 triangle

%% Test 4: Small angle approximation

smallAngle = (pi/180)*angles(1); % radians
approx = sin(smallAngle);
assert(approx == smallAngle, 'Problem with small angle approximation')
Test 1 tests the summation of the triangle angles. If the summation is not equal to 180
degrees, assert throws an error.
Test 2 tests that if two sides are equal, the corresponding angles are equal. If the non-
right angles are not both equal to 45 degrees, the assert function throws an error.
Test 3 tests that if the triangle sides are 1 and sqrt(3), the angles are 30, 60, and 90
degrees. If this condition is not true, assert throws an error.
Test 4 tests the small-angle approximation. The small-angle approximation states that
for small angles the sine of the angle in radians is approximately equal to the angle. If it
is not true, assert throws an error.
Run Tests
Execute the runtests function to run the four tests in rightTriTest.m. The
runtests function executes each test in each code section individually. If Test 1 fails,
MATLAB still runs the remaining tests. If you execute rightTriTest as a script
instead of by using runtests, MATLAB halts execution of the entire script if it
encounters a failed assertion. Additionally, when you run tests using the runtests
function, MATLAB provides informative test diagnostics.
result = runtests('rightTriTest');
Running rightTriTest
..
32-9
32 Unit Testing
================================================================================
Error occurred in rightTriTest/Test3_30_60_90Triangle and it did not run to completion.
---------
Error ID:
---------
'MATLAB:assertion:failed'
--------------
Error Details:
--------------
Error using rightTriTest (line 31)
Assertion failed.
================================================================================
.
================================================================================
Error occurred in rightTriTest/Test4_SmallAngleApproximation and it did not run to comp
---------
Error ID:
---------
''
--------------
Error Details:
--------------
Error using rightTriTest (line 39)
Problem with small angle approximation
================================================================================
.
Done rightTriTest
__________
Failure Summary:
Name Failed Incomplete Reason(s)

===========================================================================
rightTriTest/Test3_30_60_90Triangle X X Errored.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
rightTriTest/Test4_SmallAngleApproximation X X Errored.
The test for the 30-60-90 triangle and the test for the small-angle approximation fail in
the comparison of floating-point numbers. Typically, when you compare floating-point
32-10
values, you specify a tolerance for the comparison. In Test 3 and Test 4, MATLAB throws
an error at the failed assertion and does not complete the test. Therefore, the test is
marked as both Failed and Incomplete.
To provide diagnostic information (Error Details) that is more informative than

'Assertion failed' (Test 3), consider passing a message to the assert function (as
in Test 4). Or you can also consider using function-based unit tests.
Revise Test to Use Tolerance
Save rightTriTest.m as rightTriTolTest.m, and revise Test 3 and Test 4 to use a

tolerance. In Test 3 and Test 4, instead of asserting that the angles are equal to an
expected value, assert that the difference between the actual and expected values is less
than or equal to a specified tolerance. Define the tolerance in the shared variables section
of the test script so it is accessible to both tests.
For script-based unit tests, manually verify that the difference between two values is less
than a specified tolerance. If instead you write a function-based unit test, you can access
built-in constraints to specify a tolerance when comparing floating-point values.
% test triangles
tri = [7 9];
triIso = [4 4];
tri306090 = [2 2*sqrt(3)];
triSkewed = [1 1500];
% Define an absolute tolerance

tol = 1e-10;
% preconditions
assert(angles(3) == 90,'Fundamental problem: rightTri not producing right triangle')
%% Test 1: sum of angles

32-11
32 Unit Testing
%% Test 2: isosceles triangles

%% Test 3: 30-60-90 triangle

assert(abs(angles(1)-30) <= tol)
%% Test 4: Small angle approximation

smallAngle = (pi/180)*angles(1); % radians
approx = sin(smallAngle);
assert(abs(approx-smallAngle) <= tol, 'Problem with small angle approximation')
Rerun the tests.

result = runtests('rightTriTolTest');
Running rightTriTolTest
....
Done rightTriTolTest
__________
All the tests pass.
Create a table of test results.

rt = table(result)
rt =
4x6 table
Name Passed Failed Incomplete

_______________________________________________ ______ ______ __________
32-12
See Also
'rightTriTolTest/Test1_SumOfAngles' true false false

'rightTriTolTest/Test2_IsoscelesTriangles' true false false
'rightTriTolTest/Test3_30_60_90Triangle' true false false
'rightTriTolTest/Test4_SmallAngleApproximation' true false false
See Also
assert | runtests
Related Examples
• “Write Script-Based Test Using Local Functions” on page 32-14
32-13
32 Unit Testing
Write Script-Based Test Using Local Functions

This example shows how to write a script-based test that uses local functions as helper
functions. The example function approximates the sine and cosine of an angle. The
script-based test checks the approximation using local functions to check for equality
within a tolerance.
Create approxSinCos Function to Test
Create this function in a file, approxSinCos.m, in your current MATLAB folder. This
function takes an angle in radians and approximates the sine and cosine of the angle
using Taylor series.
function [sinA,cosA] = approxSinCos(x)

% For a given angle in radians, approximate the sine and cosine of the angle
% using Taylor series.
sinA = x;
cosA = 1;
altSign = -1;
for n = 3:2:26
sinA = sinA + altSign*(x^n)/factorial(n);
cosA = cosA + altSign*(x^(n-1))/factorial(n-1);
altSign = -altSign;
end
Create Test Script
In your current MATLAB folder, create a new script, approxSinCosTest.m.
Note: Including functions in scripts requires MATLAB® R2016b or later.
%% Test 0rad
% Test expected values of 0
[sinApprox,cosApprox] = approxSinCos(0);
assertWithAbsTol(sinApprox,0)
assertWithRelTol(cosApprox,1)
%% Test 2pi
% Test expected values of 2pi
[sinApprox,cosApprox] = approxSinCos(2*pi);
32-14
Write Script-Based Test Using Local Functions
assertWithAbsTol(sinApprox,0)
assertWithRelTol(cosApprox,1)
%% Test pi over 4 equality

% Test sine and cosine of pi/4 are equal
[sinApprox,cosApprox] = approxSinCos(pi/4);
assertWithRelTol(sinApprox,cosApprox,'sine and cosine should be equal')
%% Test matches MATLAB fcn

% Test values of 2pi/3 match MATLAB output for the sin and cos functions
x = 2*pi/3;
[sinApprox,cosApprox] = approxSinCos(x);
assertWithRelTol(sinApprox,sin(x),'sin does not match')
assertWithRelTol(cosApprox,cos(x),'cos does not match')
function assertWithAbsTol(actVal,expVal,varargin)
% Helper function to assert equality within an absolute tolerance.
% Takes two values and an optional message and compares
% them within an absolute tolerance of 1e-6.
tol = 1e-6;
tf = abs(actVal-expVal) <= tol;
assert(tf, varargin{:});
end
function assertWithRelTol(actVal,expVal,varargin)
% Helper function to assert equality within a relative tolerance.
% Takes two values and an optional message and compares
% them within a relative tolerance of 0.1%.
relTol = 0.001;
tf = abs(expVal - actVal) <= relTol.*abs(expVal);
assert(tf, varargin{:});
end
Each unit test uses assert to check different output of the approxSinCos function.
Typically, when you compare floating-point values, you specify a tolerance for the
comparison. The local functions assertWithAbsTol and assertWithRelTol are helper
functions to compute whether the actual and expected values are equal within the
specified absolute or relative tolerance.
• Test 0rad tests whether the computed and expected values for an angle of 0 radians
are within an absolute tolerance of 1e-6 or a relative tolerance 0.1%. Typically, you
use absolute tolerance to compare values close to 0.
32-15
32 Unit Testing
• Test 2pi tests whether the computed and expected values for an angle of radians
are equal within an absolute tolerance of 1e-6 or a relative tolerance 0.1%.
• Test pi over 4 equality tests whether the sine and cosine of are equal
within a relative tolerance of 0.1%.
• Test matches MATLAB fcn tests whether the computed sine and cosine of
are equal to the values from the sin and cos functions within a relative tolerance of
0.1%.
Run Tests
Execute the runtests function to run the four tests in approxSinCosTest.m. The
runtests function executes each test individually. If one test fails, MATLAB still runs
the remaining tests. If you execute approxSinCosTest as a script instead of using
runtests, MATLAB halts execution of the entire script if it encounters a failed
assertion. Additionally, when you run tests using the runtests function, MATLAB
provides informative test diagnostics.
results = runtests('approxSinCosTest');
Running approxSinCosTest
....
Done approxSinCosTest
__________
All the tests pass.
Create a table of test results.

rt = table(results)
rt =
4x6 table
Name Passed Failed Incomplete Durati

_______________________________________ ______ ______ __________ ______
'approxSinCosTest/Test0rad' true false false 0.594

'approxSinCosTest/Test2pi' true false false 0.0357
'approxSinCosTest/TestPiOver4Equality' true false false 0.0325
32-16
See Also
'approxSinCosTest/TestMatchesMATLABFcn' true false false 0.0757
See Also
assert | runtests
Related Examples
More About
32-17
32 Unit Testing
Extending Script-Based Tests

In this section...
“Test Suite Creation” on page 32-18
“Test Selection” on page 32-19
“Programmatic Access of Test Diagnostics” on page 32-20
“Test Runner Customization” on page 32-20
Typically, with script-based tests, you create a test file, and pass the file name to the
runtests function without explicitly creating a suite of Test objects. If you create an
explicit test suite, there are additional features available in script-based testing. These
features include selecting tests and using plugins to customize the test runner. For
additional functionality, consider using “Function-Based Unit Tests” or “Class-Based
Unit Tests”.
Test Suite Creation

To create a test suite from a script-based test directly, use the testsuite function. For a
more explicit test suite creation, use the fromFile method of TestSuite. Then you can
use the run method instead of the runtests function to run the tests. For example, if
you have a script-based test in a file rightTriTolTest.m, these three approaches are
equivalent.
% Implicit test suite

result = runtests('rightTriTolTest.m');
% Explicit test suite

suite = testsuite('rightTriTolTest.m');
result = run(suite);
% Explicit test suite

suite = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromFile('rightTriTolTest.m');
result = run(suite);
Also, you can create a test suite from all the test files in a specified folder using the
TestSuite.fromFolder method. If you know the name of a particular test in your
script-based test file, you can create a test suite from that test using
TestSuite.fromName.
32-18
Extending Script-Based Tests
Test Selection
With an explicit test suite, use selectors to refine your suite. Several of the selectors are
applicable only for class-based tests, but you can select tests for your suite based on the
test name:
• Use the 'Name' name-value pair argument in a suite generation method, such as
fromFile.
• Use a selectors instance and optional constraints instance.
Use these approaches in a suite generation method, such as fromFile, or create a suite
and filter it using the TestSuite.selectIf method. For example, in this listing, the
four values of suite are equivalent.
import matlab.unittest.selectors.HasName
import matlab.unittest.constraints.ContainsSubstring
import matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromFile
f = 'rightTriTolTest.m';
selector = HasName(ContainsSubstring('Triangle'));
% fromFile, name-value pair

suite = TestSuite.fromFile(f,'Name','*Triangle*')
% fromFile, selector
suite = TestSuite.fromFile(f,selector)
% selectIf, name-value pair

fullSuite = TestSuite.fromFile(f);
suite = selectIf(fullSuite,'Name','*Triangle*')
% selectIf, selector
suite = selectIf(fullSuite,selector)
If you use one of the suite creation methods with a selector or name-value pair, the
testing framework creates the filtered suite. If you use the TestSuite.selectIf
method, the testing framework creates a full test suite and then filters it. For large test
suites, this approach can have performance implications.
32-19
32 Unit Testing
Programmatic Access of Test Diagnostics

If you run tests with the runtests function or the run method of TestSuite or
TestCase, the test framework uses a DiagnosticsRecordingPlugin plugin that
records diagnostics on test results.
After you run tests, you can access recorded diagnostics via the DiagnosticRecord field
in the Details property on TestResult. For example, if your test results are stored in
the variable results, find the recorded diagnostics for the second test in the suite by
invoking records = result(2).Details.DiagnosticRecord.
The recorded diagnostics are DiagnosticRecord objects. To access particular types of

test diagnostics for a particular test, use the selectFailed, selectPassed,
selectIncomplete, and selectLogged methods of the DiagnosticRecord class.
By default, the DiagnosticsRecordingPlugin plugin records qualification failures

and logged events at the matlab.unittest.Verbosity.Terse level of verbosity. For
more information, see DiagnosticsRecordingPlugin and DiagnosticRecord.
Test Runner Customization

Use a TestRunner object to customize the way the framework runs a test suite. With a
TestRunner object you can:
• Produce no output in the command window using the withNoPlugins method.

• Run tests in parallel using the runInParallel method.
• Add plugins to the test runner using the addPlugin method.
For example,use test suite, suite, to create a silent test runner and run the tests with
the run method of TestRunner.
runner = matlab.unittest.TestRunner.withNoPlugins;
results = runner.run(suite);
Use plugins to customize the test runner further. For example, you can redirect output,
determine code coverage, or change how the test runner responds to warnings. For more
information, see “Add Plugin to Test Runner” on page 32-102 and the plugins classes.
32-20
See Also
See Also
TestRunner | TestSuite | constraints | plugins | selectors
Related Examples
32-21
32 Unit Testing
Write Function-Based Unit Tests

In this section...
“Create Test Function” on page 32-22
“Run the Tests” on page 32-25
“Analyze the Results” on page 32-25
Create Test Function

Your test function is a single MATLAB file that contains a main function and your
individual local test functions. Optionally, you can include file fixture and fresh fixture
functions. File fixtures consist of setup and teardown functions shared across all the tests
in a file. These functions are executed once per test file. Fresh fixtures consist of setup
and teardown functions that are executed before and after each local test function.
Create the Main Function
The main function collects all of the local test functions into a test array. Since it is the
main function, the function name corresponds to the name of your .m file and follows the
naming convention of starting or ending in the word ‘test’, which is case-insensitive. In
this sample case, the MATLAB file is exampleTest.m. The main function needs to make
a call to functiontests to generate a test array, tests. Use localfunctions as the
input to functiontests to automatically generate a cell array of function handles to all
the local functions in your file. This is a typical main function.
function tests = exampleTest

tests = functiontests(localfunctions);
end
Create Local Test Functions
Individual test functions are included as local functions in the same MATLAB file as the
main (test-generating) function. These test function names must begin or end with the
case-insensitive word, ‘test’. Each of the local test functions must accept a single input,
which is a function test case object, testCase. The Unit Test Framework automatically
generates this object. For more information on creating test functions, see “Write Simple
Test Case Using Functions” on page 32-27 and “Types of Qualifications” on page 32-57.
This is a typical example of skeletal local-test functions.
32-22
Write Function-Based Unit Tests
function testFunctionOne(testCase)
% Test specific code
end
function FunctionTwotest(testCase)
end
Create Optional Fixture Functions
Setup and teardown code, also referred to as test fixture functions, set up the pretest
state of the system and return it to the original state after running the test. There are
two types of these functions: file fixture functions that run once per test file, and fresh
fixture functions that run before and after each local test function. These functions are
not required to generate tests. In general, it is preferable to use fresh fixtures over file
fixtures to increase unit test encapsulation.
A function test case object, testCase, must be the only input to file fixture and fresh
fixture functions. The Unit Test Framework automatically generates this object. The
TestCase object is a means to pass information between setup functions, test functions,
and teardown functions. Its TestData property is, by default, a struct, which allows
easy addition of fields and data. Typical uses for this test data include paths and
graphics handles. For an example using the TestData property, see “Write Test Using
Setup and Teardown Functions” on page 32-32.
File Fixture Functions
Use file fixture functions to share setup and teardown functions across all the tests in a
file. The names for the file fixture functions must be setupOnce and teardownOnce,
respectively. These functions execute a single time for each file. You can use file fixtures
to set a path before testing, and then reset it to the original path after testing. This is a
typical example of skeletal file fixture setup and teardown code.
function setupOnce(testCase) % do not change function name
% set a new path, for example
end
function teardownOnce(testCase) % do not change function name

% change back to original path, for example
end
32-23
32 Unit Testing
Fresh Fixture Functions
Use fresh fixture functions to set up and tear down states for each local test function. The
names for these fresh fixture functions must be setup and teardown, respectively. You
can use fresh fixtures to obtain a new figure before testing and to close the figure after
testing. This is typical example of skeletal test function level setup and teardown code.
function setup(testCase) % do not change function name
% open a figure, for example
end
function teardown(testCase) % do not change function name

% close figure, for example
end
Program Listing Template

%% Main function to generate tests
function tests = exampleTest
end
%% Test Functions
function testFunctionOne(testCase)
end
function FunctionTwotest(testCase)
end
%% Optional file fixtures

function setupOnce(testCase) % do not change function name
% set a new path, for example
end
function teardownOnce(testCase) % do not change function name

% change back to original path, for example
end
%% Optional fresh fixtures

function setup(testCase) % do not change function name
% open a figure, for example
end
32-24
See Also
function teardown(testCase) % do not change function name

% close figure, for example
end
Run the Tests

The figure below details the tasks executed when you run the tests.
To run tests from the command prompt, use the runtests command with your MATLAB
test file as input. For example:
results = runtests('exampleTest.m')
Alternatively, you can run tests using the run function.
results = run(exampleTest)
For more information on running tests see the runtests reference page and “Run Tests
for Various Workflows” on page 32-97.
Analyze the Results

To analyze the test results, examine the output structure from runtests or run. For
each test, the result contains the name of the test function, whether it passed, failed, or
didn’t complete, and the time it took to run the test. For more information, see “Analyze
Test Case Results” on page 32-125 and “Analyze Failed Test Results” on page 32-129.
See Also
functiontests | localfunctions | runtests
32-25
32 Unit Testing
Related Examples
• “Write Simple Test Case Using Functions” on page 32-27
• “Write Test Using Setup and Teardown Functions” on page 32-32
32-26
Write Simple Test Case Using Functions

This example shows how to write a unit test for a MATLAB function,
quadraticSolver.m.
Create quadraticSolver.m Function
This MATLAB function solves quadratic equations. Create this function in a folder on
your MATLAB path.
function roots = quadraticSolver(a, b, c)
% quadraticSolver returns solutions to the
% quadratic equation a*x^2 + b*x + c = 0.
if ~isa(a,'numeric') || ~isa(b,'numeric') || ~isa(c,'numeric')

error('quadraticSolver:InputMustBeNumeric', ...
'Coefficients must be numeric.');
end
roots(1) = (-b + sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);

roots(2) = (-b - sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);
end
Create solverTest Function
Create this function in a folder on your MATLAB path.

function tests = solverTest
end
A call to functiontests using localfunctions as input creates an array of tests from

each local function in the solverTest.m file. Each test is a local function that follows
the naming convention of having ’test’ at the beginning or end of the function name.
Local functions that do not follow this convention are not included in the test array. Test
functions must accept a single input argument into which the test framework passes a
function test case object. The function uses this object for verifications, assertions,
assumptions, and fatal assertions. It contains a TestData structure that allows data to
be passed between setup, test, and teardown functions.
32-27
32 Unit Testing
Create Test Function for Real Solutions
Create a test function, testRealSolution, to verify that quadraticSolver returns

the correct value for real solutions. For example, the equation x2 - 3x + 2 = 0 has
real solutions x = 1 and x = 2. This function calls quadraticSolver with the inputs
of this equation. The expected solution, expSolution, is [2,1].
Use the qualification function, verifyEqual, to compare the output of the function,
actSolution, to the desired output, expSolution. If the qualification fails, the
framework continues executing the test. Typically, when using verifyEqual on floating
point values, you specify a tolerance for the comparison. For more information, see
matlab.unittest.constraints.
Add this function to the solverTest.m file.
function testRealSolution(testCase)
actSolution = quadraticSolver(1,-3,2);
expSolution = [2 1];
verifyEqual(testCase,actSolution,expSolution)
end
Create Test Function for Imaginary Solutions
Create a test to verify that quadraticSolver returns the right value for imaginary
solutions. For example, the equation x2 + 2x + 10 = 0 has imaginary solutions x =
-1 + 3i and x = -1 - 3i. Typically, when using verifyEqual on floating point
values, you specify a tolerance for the comparison. For more information, see
matlab.unittest.constraints.
Add this function, testImaginarySolution, to the solverTest.m file.
function testImaginarySolution(testCase)
actSolution = quadraticSolver(1,2,10);
expSolution = [-1+3i -1-3i];
end
The order of the tests within the solverTest.m file does not matter because they are
fully independent test cases.
32-28
Save solverTest Function
The following is the complete solverTest.m test file. Save this file in a folder on your
MATLAB path.
function tests = solverTest

end
expSolution = [2 1];
end
expSolution = [-1+3i -1-3i];
end
Run Tests in solverTest Function
Run the tests.
results = runtests('solverTest.m')
Running solverTest
..
Done solverTest
__________
results =
1x2 TestResult array with properties:
Name
Passed
Failed
Incomplete
Duration
Totals:
32-29
32 Unit Testing
2 Passed, 0 Failed, 0 Incomplete.

0.19172 seconds testing time.
Both of the tests passed.
Introduce an Error in quadraticSolver.m and Run Tests
Cause one of the tests to fail by forcing roots in quadraticSolver.m to be real. Before
ending the function, add the line: roots = real(roots);. (Do not change
solverTest.m.) Save the file and run the tests.
results = runtests('solverTest.m')
Running solverTest
.
================================================================================
Verification failed in solverTest/testImaginarySolution.
---------------------
Framework Diagnostic:
---------------------
verifyEqual failed.
--> Complexity does not match.
Actual Complexity:
Real
Expected Complexity:
Complex
Actual Value:
-1 -1
Expected Value:
-1.000000000000000 + 3.000000000000000i -1.000000000000000 - 3.000000000000000
------------------
Stack Information:
------------------
In C:\work\solverTest.m (testImaginarySolution) at 14
================================================================================
.
Done solverTest
__________
Failure Summary:
32-30
See Also

===============================================================================
solverTest/testImaginarySolution X Failed by verification.
results =
Name
Passed
Failed
Incomplete
Duration
Totals:
The imaginary test verification failed.
Restore quadraticSolver.m to its previous, correct version by removing the roots =

real(roots); code.
See Also
matlab.unittest.constraints
More About
32-31
32 Unit Testing
Write Test Using Setup and Teardown Functions

This example shows how to write a unit test for a couple of MATLAB® figure axes
properties using fresh fixtures and file fixtures.
Create axesPropertiesTest File
Create a file containing the main function that tests figure axes properties and include
two test functions. One function verifies that the x-axis limits are correct, and the other
one verifies that the face color of a surface is correct.
In a folder on your MATLAB path, create axesPropertiesTest.m. In the main

function of this file, have functiontests create an array of tests from each local
function in axesPropertiesTest.m with a call to the localfunctions function.
function tests = axesPropertiesTest

end
Create File Fixture Functions
File fixture functions are setup and teardown code that runs a single time in your test
file. These fixtures are shared across the test file. In this example, the file fixture
functions create a temporary folder and set it as the current working folder. They also
create and save a new figure for testing. After tests are complete, the framework
reinstates the original working folder and deletes the temporary folder and saved figure.
In this example, a helper function creates a simple figure — a red cylinder. In a more
realistic scenario, this code is part of the product under test and is computationally
expensive, thus motivating the intent to create the figure only once and to load
independent copies of the result for each test function. For this example, however, you
want to create this helper function as a local function to axesPropertiesTest. Note
that the test array does not include the function because its name does not start or end
with ‘test’.
Write a helper function that creates a simple red cylinder and add it as a local function to
axesPropertiesTest.
32-32
function f = createFigure
f = figure;
ax = axes('Parent', f);
cylinder(ax,10)
h = findobj(ax,'Type','surface');
h.FaceColor = [1 0 0];
end
You must name the setup and teardown functions of a file test fixture setupOnce and
teardownOnce, respectively. These functions take a single input argument, testCase,
into which the test framework automatically passes a function test case object. This test
case object contains a TestData structure that allows data to pass between setup, test,
and teardown functions. In this example, the TestData structure uses assigned fields to
store the original path, the temporary folder name, and the figure file name.
Create the setup and teardown functions as a local functions to axesPropertiesTest.
function setupOnce(testCase)
% create and change to temporary folder
testCase.TestData.origPath = pwd;
testCase.TestData.tmpFolder = ['tmpFolder' datestr(now,30)];
mkdir(testCase.TestData.tmpFolder)
cd(testCase.TestData.tmpFolder)
% create and save a figure

testCase.TestData.figName = 'tmpFig.fig';
aFig = createFigure;
saveas(aFig,testCase.TestData.figName,'fig')
close(aFig)
end
function teardownOnce(testCase)
delete(testCase.TestData.figName)
cd(testCase.TestData.origPath)
rmdir(testCase.TestData.tmpFolder)
32-33
32 Unit Testing
end
Create Fresh Fixture Functions
Fresh fixtures are function level setup and teardown code that runs before and after each
test function in your file. In this example, the functions open the saved figure and find
the handles. After testing, the framework closes the figure.
You must name fresh fixture functions setup and teardown, respectively. Similar to the
file fixture functions, these functions take a single input argument, testCase. In this
example, these functions create a new field in the TestData structure that includes
handles to the figure and to the axes. This allows information to pass between setup,
test, and teardown functions.
Create the setup and teardown functions as a local functions to axesPropertiesTest.

Open the saved figure for each test to ensure test independence.
function setup(testCase)
testCase.TestData.Figure = openfig(testCase.TestData.figName);
testCase.TestData.Axes = findobj(testCase.TestData.Figure,...
'Type','Axes');
end
function teardown(testCase)
close(testCase.TestData.Figure)
end
In addition to custom setup and teardown code, the Unit Testing Framework provides
some classes for creating fixtures. For more information see
matlab.unittest.fixtures.
Create Test Functions
Each test is a local function that follows the naming convention of having ‘test’ at the
beginning or end of the function name. The test array does not include local functions
that do not follow this convention. Similar to setup and teardown functions, individual
test functions must accept a single input argument, testCase. Use this test case object
for verifications, assertions, assumptions, and fatal assertions functions.
32-34
The testDefaultXLim function test verifies that the x-axis limits are large enough to
display the cylinder. The lower limit needs to be less than -10, and the upper limit needs
to be greater than 10. These values come from the figure generated in the helper function
— a cylinder with a 10 unit radius centered on the origin. This test function opens the
figure created and saved in the setupOnce function, queries the axes limit, and verifies
the limits are correct. The qualification functions, verifyLessThanOrEqual and
verifyGreaterThanOrEqual, takes the test case, the actual value, the expected value,
and optional diagnostic information to display in the case of failure as inputs.
Create the testDefaultXLim function as local function to axesPropertiesTest.
function testDefaultXLim(testCase)
xlim = testCase.TestData.Axes.XLim;
verifyLessThanOrEqual(testCase, xlim(1), -10,...
'Minimum x-limit was not small enough')
verifyGreaterThanOrEqual(testCase, xlim(2), 10,...
'Maximum x-limit was not big enough')
end
The surfaceColorTest function accesses the figure that you created and saved in the
setupOnce function. surfaceColorTest queries the face color of the cylinder and
verifies that it is red. The color red has an RGB value of [1 0 0]. The qualification
function, verifyEqual, takes as inputs the test case, the actual value, the expected
value, and optional diagnostic information to display in the case of failure. Typically
when using verifyEqual on floating point-values, you specify a tolerance for the
comparison. For more information, see matlab.unittest.constraints.
Create the surfaceColorTest function as local function to axesPropertiesTest.
function surfaceColorTest(testCase)
h = findobj(testCase.TestData.Axes,'Type','surface');
co = h.FaceColor;
verifyEqual(testCase, co, [1 0 0],'FaceColor is incorrect')
32-35
32 Unit Testing
end
Now the axesPropertiesTest.m file is complete with a main function, file fixture
functions, fresh fixture functions, and two local test functions. You are ready to run the
tests.
Run Tests
The next step is to run the tests using the runtests function. In this example, the call to
runtests results in the following steps:
1 The main function creates a test array.

2 The file fixture records the working folder, creates a temporary folder, sets the
temporary folder as the working folder, then generates and saves a figure.
3 The fresh fixture setup opens the saved figure and finds the handles.
4 The testDefaultXLim test is run.
5 The fresh fixture teardown closes the figure.
6 The fresh fixture setup opens the saved figure and finds the handles.
7 The surfaceColorTest test is run.
8 The fresh fixture teardown closes the figure.
9 The file fixture teardown deletes the saved figure, changes back to the original path
and deletes the temporary folder.
At the command prompt, generate and run the test suite.

results = runtests('axesPropertiesTest.m')
Running axesPropertiesTest
..
Done axesPropertiesTest
__________
results =
Name
Passed
32-36
Failed
Incomplete
Duration
Details
Totals:
Create Table of Test Results
To access functionality available to tables, create one from the TestResult object.
rt = table(results)
rt =
2x6 table
Name Passed Failed Incomplete Duration

_____________________________________ ______ ______ __________ ________
'axesPropertiesTest/testDefaultXLim' true false false 1.4945

'axesPropertiesTest/surfaceColorTest' true false false 0.45152
Export test results to an Excel® spreadsheet.
writetable(rt,'myTestResults.xls')
Sort the test results by increasing duration.

sortrows(rt,'Duration')
ans =
2x6 table

_____________________________________ ______ ______ __________ ________
'axesPropertiesTest/surfaceColorTest' true false false 0.45152
32-37
32 Unit Testing
'axesPropertiesTest/testDefaultXLim' true false false 1.4945
See Also
matlab.unittest.constraints | matlab.unittest.fixtures
More About
32-38
Extending Function-Based Tests
In this section...
“Fixtures for Setup and Teardown Code” on page 32-39
“Test Logging and Verbosity” on page 32-40
“Test Suite Creation” on page 32-41
“Test Selection” on page 32-41
“Test Running” on page 32-42
“Programmatic Access of Test Diagnostics” on page 32-42
“Test Runner Customization” on page 32-43
Typically, with function-based tests, you create a test file and pass the file name to the
runtests function without explicitly creating a suite of Test objects. However, if you
create an explicit test suite, additional features are available in function-based testing.
These features include:
• Test logging and verbosity

• Test selection
• Plugins to customize the test runner
For additional functionality, consider using “Class-Based Unit Tests”.
Fixtures for Setup and Teardown Code

When writing tests, use the TestCase.applyFixture method to handle setup and
teardown code for actions such as:
• Changing the current working folder

• Adding a folder to the path
• Creating a temporary folder
• Suppressing the display of warnings
These fixtures take the place of manually coding the actions in the setupOnce,
teardownOnce, setup, and teardown functions of your function-based test.
32-39
32 Unit Testing
For example, if you manually write setup and teardown code to set up a temporary folder
for each test, and then you make that folder your current working folder, your setup and
teardown functions could look like this.
% store current folder
testCase.TestData.origPath = pwd;
% create temporary folder

testCase.TestData.tmpFolder = ['tmpFolder' datestr(now,30)];
mkdir(testCase.TestData.tmpFolder)
% change to temporary folder

cd(testCase.TestData.tmpFolder)
end
function teardown(testCase)
% change to original folder
cd(testCase.TestData.origPath)
% delete temporary folder

rmdir(testCase.TestData.tmpFolder)
end
However, you also can use a fixture to replace both of those functions with just a
modified setup function. The fixture stores the information necessary to restore the
initial state and performs the teardown actions.
% create temporary folder
f = testCase.applyFixture(matlab.unittest.fixtures.TemporaryFolderFixture);
% change to temporary folder

testCase.applyFixture(matlab.unittest.fixtures.CurrentFolderFixture(f.Folder));
end
Test Logging and Verbosity

Your test functions can use the TestCase.log method. By default, the test runner
reports diagnostics logged at verbosity level 1 (Terse). Use the
LoggingPlugin.withVerbosity method to respond to messages of other verbosity
levels. Construct a TestRunner object, add the LoggingPlugin, and run the suite with
32-40
the TestRunner.run method. For more information on creating a test runner, see “Test
Runner Customization” on page 32-43.
Test Suite Creation

Calling your function-based test returns a suite of Test objects. You also can use the
testsuite function or the TestSuite.fromFile method. If you want a particular test
and you know the test name, you can use TestSuite.fromName. If you want to create a
suite from all tests in a particular folder, you can use TestSuite.fromFolder.
Test Selection
With an explicit test suite, use selectors to refine your suite. Several of the selectors are
applicable only for class-based tests, but you can select tests for your suite based on the
test name:
• Use the 'Name' name-value pair argument in a suite generation method, such as
fromFile.
• Use a selectors instance and optional constraints instance.
Use these approaches in a suite generation method, such as fromFile, or create a suite
and filter it using the TestSuite.selectIf method. For example, in this listing, the
four values of suite are equivalent.
import matlab.unittest.selectors.HasName
import matlab.unittest.constraints.ContainsSubstring
import matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromFile
f = 'rightTriTolTest.m';
selector = HasName(ContainsSubstring('Triangle'));
% fromFile, name-value pair

suite = TestSuite.fromFile(f,'Name','*Triangle*')
% fromFile, selector
suite = TestSuite.fromFile(f,selector)
% selectIf, name-value pair

suite = selectIf(fullSuite,'Name','*Triangle*')
32-41
32 Unit Testing
% selectIf, selector
suite = selectIf(fullSuite,selector)
If you use one of the suite creation methods with a selector or name-value pair, the
testing framework creates the filtered suite. If you use the TestSuite.selectIf
method, the testing framework creates a full test suite and then filters it. For large test
suites, this approach can have performance implications.
Test Running
There are several ways to run a function-based test.
To Run All Tests Use Function
In a file runtests with the name of the test file
In a suite TestSuite.run with the suite
In a suite with a custom test TestRunner.run. (See “Test Runner Customization” on
runner page 32-43.)
For more information, see “Run Tests for Various Workflows” on page 32-97.
Programmatic Access of Test Diagnostics



and logged events at the matlab.unittest.Verbosity.Terse level of verbosity. For
more information, see DiagnosticsRecordingPlugin and DiagnosticRecord.
32-42
See Also
Test Runner Customization

Use a TestRunner object to customize the way the framework runs a test suite. With a
TestRunner object you can:
• Produce no output in the command window using the withNoPlugins method.

• Run tests in parallel using the runInParallel method.
• Add plugins to the test runner using the addPlugin method.
For example,use test suite, suite, to create a silent test runner and run the tests with
the run method of TestRunner.
results = runner.run(suite);
Use plugins to customize the test runner further. For example, you can redirect output,
determine code coverage, or change how the test runner responds to warnings. For more
information, see “Add Plugin to Test Runner” on page 32-102 and the plugins classes.
See Also
matlab.unittest.TestCase | matlab.unittest.TestSuite |
matlab.unittest.constraints | matlab.unittest.diagnostics |
matlab.unittest.qualifications | matlab.unittest.selectors
Related Examples
32-43
32 Unit Testing
Author Class-Based Unit Tests in MATLAB

To test a MATLAB program, write a unit test using qualifications that are methods for
testing values and responding to failures.
In this section...
“The Test Class Definition” on page 32-44
“The Unit Tests” on page 32-44
“Additional Features for Advanced Test Classes” on page 32-46
The Test Class Definition

A test class must inherit from matlab.unittest.TestCase and contain a methods
block with the Test attribute. The methods block contains functions, each of which is a
unit test. A general, basic class definition follows.
%% Test Class Definition
classdef MyComponentTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
%% Test Method Block

methods (Test)
% includes unit test functions
end
end
The Unit Tests

A unit test is a method that determines the correctness of a unit of software. Each unit
test is contained within a methods block. The function must accept a TestCase instance
as an input.
%% Test Class Definition
classdef MyComponentTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
%% Test Method Block

methods (Test)
%% Test Function
function testASolution(testCase)
%% Exercise function under test
32-44
Author Class-Based Unit Tests in MATLAB
% act = the value from the function under test
%% Verify using test qualification

% exp = your expected value
% testCase.<qualification method>(act,exp);
end
end
end
Qualifications are methods for testing values and responding to failures. This table lists
the types of qualifications.
Verifica Use this qualification to matlab.unittest.qualifications.Verifi
tions produce and record failures able
without throwing an
exception. The remaining
tests run to completion.
Assum Use this qualification to matlab.unittest.qualifications.Assuma
ptions ensure that a test runs only ble
when certain preconditions
are satisfied. However,
running the test without
satisfying the preconditions
does not produce a test
failure. When an assumption
failure occurs, the testing
framework marks the test as
filtered.
Asserti Use this qualification to matlab.unittest.qualifications.Assert
ons ensure that the able
preconditions of the current
test are met.
Fatal Use this qualification when matlab.unittest.qualifications.FatalA
assertio the failure at the assertion ssertable
ns point renders the remainder
of the current test method
invalid or the state is
unrecoverable.
The MATLAB Unit Testing Framework provides approximately 25 qualification methods

for each type of qualification. For example, use verifyClass or assertClass to test
32-45
32 Unit Testing
that a value is of an expected class, and use assumeTrue or fatalAssertTrue to test if

the actual value is true. For a summary of qualification methods, see “Types of
Qualifications” on page 32-57.
Often, each unit test function obtains an actual value by exercising the code that you are
testing and defines the associated expected value. For example, if you are testing the
plus function, the actual value might be plus(2,3) and the expected value 5. Within
the test function, you pass the actual and expected values to a qualification method. For
example:
testCase.verifyEqual(plus(2,3),5)
For an example of a basic unit test, see “Write Simple Test Case Using Classes” on page
32-48.
Additional Features for Advanced Test Classes

The MATLAB Unit Testing Framework includes several features for authoring more
advanced test classes:
• Setup and teardown methods blocks to implicitly set up the pretest state of the
system and return it to the original state after running the tests. For an example of a
test class with setup and teardown code, see “Write Setup and Teardown Code Using
Classes” on page 32-53.
• Advanced qualification features, including actual value proxies, test diagnostics, and
a constraint interface. For more information, see matlab.unittest.constraints
and matlab.unittest.diagnostics.
• Parameterized tests to combine and execute tests on the specified lists of parameters.
For more information, see “Create Basic Parameterized Test” on page 32-79 and
“Create Advanced Parameterized Test” on page 32-85.
• Ready-to-use fixtures for handling the setup and teardown of frequently used testing
actions and for sharing fixtures between classes. For more information, see
matlab.unittest.fixtures and “Write Tests Using Shared Fixtures” on page 32-
65.
• Ability to create custom test fixtures. For more information see “Create Basic Custom
Fixture” on page 32-69 and “Create Advanced Custom Fixture” on page 32-72.
32-46
See Also
See Also
Related Examples
• “Analyze Failed Test Results” on page 32-129
32-47
32 Unit Testing
Write Simple Test Case Using Classes

This example shows how to write a unit test for a MATLAB® function,
quadraticSolver.m.
Create quadraticSolver.m Function
The following MATLAB function solves quadratic equations. Create this function in a
folder on your MATLAB path.


end
roots(1) = (-b + sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);

roots(2) = (-b - sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);
end
Create SolverTest Class Definition
To use the matlab.unittest framework, write MATLAB functions (tests) in the form of
a test case, a class derived from matlab.unittest.TestCase.
Create a subclass, SolverTest.
classdef SolverTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
methods (Test)
end
32-48
end
The following steps show how to create specific tests. Put these tests inside the methods
block with the (Test) attribute.
Create Test Method for Real Solutions
Create a test method, testRealSolution, to verify that quadraticSolver returns the

right value for real solutions. For example, the equation has real
solutions and . This method calls quadraticSolver with the inputs of this
equation. The solution, expSolution, is [2,1].
Use the matlab.unittest.TestCase method, verifyEqual to compare the output of

the function, actSolution, to the desired output, expSolution. If the qualification
fails, the test continues execution.
expSolution = [2,1];
testCase.verifyEqual(actSolution,expSolution)
end
Add this function inside the methods (Test) block.
Create Test Method for Imaginary Solutions
Create a test to verify that quadraticSolver returns the right value for imaginary
solutions. For example, the equation has imaginary solutions
and . Add this function, testImaginarySolution, inside the
methods (Test) block.
32-49
32 Unit Testing
expSolution = [-1+3i, -1-3i];

end
The order of the tests within the block does not matter.
Save Class Definition
The following is the complete SolverTest class definition. Save this file in a folder on
your MATLAB path.

% SolverTest tests solutions to the quadratic equation
% a*x^2 + b*x + c = 0
methods (Test)
testCase.verifyEqual(actSolution,expSolution);
end
end
end
end
Run Tests in SolverTest Test Case
Run all the tests in the SolverTest class definition file.
testCase = SolverTest;
res = run(testCase)
Running SolverTest
..
Done SolverTest
__________
32-50
res =
Name
Passed
Failed
Incomplete
Duration
Details
Totals:
Run Single Test Method
To run the single test, testRealSolution:
testCase = SolverTest;
res = run(testCase,'testRealSolution')
Running SolverTest
.
Done SolverTest
__________
res =
TestResult with properties:
Name: 'SolverTest/testRealSolution'
Passed: 1
Failed: 0
Incomplete: 0
Duration: 0.0266
Details: [1x1 struct]
Totals:
32-51
32 Unit Testing
See Also
Related Examples
32-52
Write Setup and Teardown Code Using Classes

In this section...
“Test Fixtures” on page 32-53
“Test Case with Method-Level Setup Code” on page 32-53
“Test Case with Class-Level Setup Code” on page 32-54
Test Fixtures
Test fixtures are setup and teardown code that sets up the pretest state of the system
and returns it to the original state after running the test. Setup and teardown methods
are defined in the TestCase class by the following method attributes:
• TestMethodSetup and TestMethodTeardown methods run before and after each

test method.
• TestClassSetup and TestClassTeardown methods run before and after all test
methods in the test case.
The testing framework guarantees that TestMethodSetup and TestClassSetup

methods of superclasses are executed before those in subclasses.
It is good practice for test authors to perform all teardown activities from within the
TestMethodSetup and TestClassSetup blocks using the addTeardown method
instead of implementing corresponding teardown methods in the TestMethodTeardown
and TestClassTeardown blocks. This guarantees the teardown is executed in the
reverse order of the setup and also ensures that the test content is exception safe.
Test Case with Method-Level Setup Code

The following test case, FigurePropertiesTest, contains setup code at the method
level. The TestMethodSetup method creates a figure before running each test, and
TestMethodTeardown closes the figure afterwards. As discussed previously, you should
try to define teardown activities with the addTeardown method. However, for
illustrative purposes, this example shows the implementation of a
TestMethodTeardown block.
classdef FigurePropertiesTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
32-53
32 Unit Testing
properties
TestFigure
end
methods(TestMethodSetup)
function createFigure(testCase)
% comment
testCase.TestFigure = figure;
end
end
methods(TestMethodTeardown)
function closeFigure(testCase)
close(testCase.TestFigure)
end
end
methods(Test)
function defaultCurrentPoint(testCase)
cp = testCase.TestFigure.CurrentPoint;
testCase.verifyEqual(cp, [0 0], ...
'Default current point is incorrect')
end
function defaultCurrentObject(testCase)
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsEmpty
co = testCase.TestFigure.CurrentObject;
testCase.verifyThat(co, IsEmpty, ...
'Default current object should be empty')
end
end
end
Test Case with Class-Level Setup Code

The following test case, BankAccountTest, contains setup code at the class level.
To setup the BankAccountTest, which tests the BankAccount class example described
in “Developing Classes — Typical Workflow”, add a TestClassSetup method,
32-54
addBankAccountClassToPath. This method adds the path to the BankAccount

example file. Typically, you set up the path using a PathFixture. this example performs
the setup and teardown activities manually for illustrative purposes.
classdef BankAccountTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
% Tests the BankAccount class.
methods (TestClassSetup)
function addBankAccountClassToPath(testCase)
p = path;
testCase.addTeardown(@path,p);
addpath(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_oop',...
'examples'));
end
end
methods (Test)
function testConstructor(testCase)
b = BankAccount(1234, 100);
testCase.verifyEqual(b.AccountNumber, 1234, ...
'Constructor failed to correctly set account number');
testCase.verifyEqual(b.AccountBalance, 100, ...
'Constructor failed to correctly set account balance');
end
function testConstructorNotEnoughInputs(testCase)
import matlab.unittest.constraints.Throws;
testCase.verifyThat(@()BankAccount, ...
Throws('MATLAB:minrhs'));
end
function testDesposit(testCase)
b.deposit(25);
testCase.verifyEqual(b.AccountBalance, 125);
end
function testWithdraw(testCase)
b.withdraw(25);
end
function testNotifyInsufficientFunds(testCase)
32-55
32 Unit Testing
callbackExecuted = false;
function testCallback(~,~)
callbackExecuted = true;
end
b.addlistener('InsufficientFunds', @testCallback);
b.withdraw(50);
testCase.assertFalse(callbackExecuted, ...
'The callback should not have executed yet');
b.withdraw(60);
testCase.verifyTrue(callbackExecuted, ...
'The listener callback should have fired');
end
end
end
See Also
addTeardown | matlab.unittest.TestCase
Related Examples
32-56
Types of Qualifications
Types of Qualifications
Qualifications are functions for testing values and responding to failures. There are four
types of qualifications:
• Verifications — Produce and record failures without throwing an exception, meaning

the remaining tests run to completion.
• Assumptions — Ensure that a test runs only when certain preconditions are satisfied
and the event should not produce a test failure. When an assumption failure occurs,
the testing framework marks the test as filtered.
• Assertions — Ensure that the preconditions of the current test are met.
• Fatal assertions — Use this qualification when the failure at the assertion point
renders the remainder of the current test method invalid or the state is
unrecoverable.
Type of Test Verification Assumption Assertion Fatal Assertion

Value is true. verifyTrue assumeTrue assertTrue fatalAssertTrue
Value is false. verifyFalse assumeFalse assertFalse fatalAssertFalse
Value is equal to verifyEqual assumeEqual assertEqual fatalAssertEqual
specified value.
Value is not verifyNotEqua assumeNotEqual assertNotEqual fatalAssertNotEq
equal to l ual
specified value.
Two values are verifySameHan assumeSameHand assertSameHand fatalAssertSameH
handles to same dle le le andle
instance.
Value is not verifyNotSame assumeNotSameH assertNotSameH fatalAssertNotSa
handle to Handle andle andle meHandle
specified
instance.
Function verifyReturns assumeReturnsT assertReturnsT fatalAssertRetur
returns true True rue rue nsTrue
when evaluated.
32-57
32 Unit Testing

Test produces verifyFail assumeFail assertFail fatalAssertFail
unconditional
failure.
Value meets verifyThat assumeThat assertThat fatalAssertThat
given constraint.
Value is greater verifyGreater assumeGreaterT assertGreaterT fatalAssertGreat
than specified Than han han erThan
value.
Value is greater verifyGreater assumeGreaterT assertGreaterT fatalAssertGreat
than or equal to ThanOrEqual hanOrEqual hanOrEqual erThanOrEqual
specified value.
Value is less verifyLessTha assumeLessThan assertLessThan fatalAssertLessT
than specified n han
value.
Value is less verifyLessTha assumeLessThan assertLessThan fatalAssertLessT
than or equal to nOrEqual OrEqual OrEqual hanOrEqual
specified value.
Value is exact verifyClass assumeClass assertClass fatalAssertClass
specified class.
Value is object of verifyInstanc assumeInstance assertInstance fatalAssertInsta
specified type. eOf Of Of nceOf
Value is empty. verifyEmpty assumeEmpty assertEmpty fatalAssertEmpty
Value is not verifyNotEmpt assumeNotEmpty assertNotEmpty fatalAssertNotEm
empty. y pty
Value has verifySize assumeSize assertSize fatalAssertSize
specified size.
Value has verifyLength assumeLength assertLength fatalAssertLengt
specified length. h
Value has verifyNumElem assumeNumEleme assertNumEleme fatalAssertNumEl
specified ents nts nts ements
element count.
String contains verifySubstri assumeSubstrin assertSubstrin fatalAssertSubst
specified string. ng g g ring
32-58
See Also

Text matches verifyMatches assumeMatches assertMatches fatalAssertMatch
specified regular es
expression.
Function throws verifyError assumeError assertError fatalAssertError
specified
exception.
Function issues verifyWarning assumeWarning assertWarning fatalAssertWarni
specified ng
warning.
Function issues verifyWarning assumeWarningF assertWarningF fatalAssertWarni
no warnings. Free ree ree ngFree
See Also
Assertable | Assumable | FatalAssertable | Verifiable |
matlab.unittest.qualifications
32-59
32 Unit Testing
Tag Unit Tests

You can use test tags to group tests into categories and then run tests with specified
tags. Typical test tags identify a particular feature or describe the type of test.
In this section...
“Tag Tests” on page 32-60
“Select and Run Tests” on page 32-61
Tag Tests
To define test tags, use a cell array of meaningful character vectors or a string array. For
example, TestTags = {'Unit'} or TestTags = ["Unit","FeatureA"].
• To tag individual tests, use the TestTags method attribute.

• To tag all the tests within a class, use the TestTags class attribute. If you use the
TestTags class attribute in a superclass, tests in the subclasses inherit the tags.
This sample test class, ExampleTagTest, uses the TestTags method attribute to tag
individual tests.
classdef ExampleTagTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
methods (Test)
function testA (testCase)
% test code
end
end
methods (Test, TestTags = {'Unit'})
function testB (testCase)
% test code
end
function testC (testCase)
% test code
end
end
methods (Test, TestTags = {'Unit','FeatureA'})
function testD (testCase)
% test code
end
end
32-60
Tag Unit Tests
methods (Test, TestTags = {'System','FeatureA'})

function testE (testCase)
% test code
end
end
end
Several of the tests in class ExampleTagTest are tagged. For example, testD is tagged
with 'Unit' and 'FeatureA'. One test, testA, is not tagged.
This sample test class, ExampleTagClassTest, uses a TestTags class attribute to tag
all the tests within the class, and a TestTags method attribute to add tags to individual
tests.
classdef (TestTags = {'FeatureB'}) ...

ExampleTagClassTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
methods (Test)
function testF (testCase)
% test code
end
end
methods (Test, TestTags = {'FeatureC','System'})
function testG (testCase)
% test code
end
end
methods (Test, TestTags = {'System','FeatureA'})
function testH (testCase)
% test code
end
end
end
Each test in class ExampleTagClassTest is tagged with 'FeatureB'. Additionally,

individual tests are tagged with various tags including 'FeatureA', 'FeatureC', and
'System'.
Select and Run Tests

There are three ways of selecting and running tagged tests:
• “Run Selected Tests Using runtests” on page 32-62
32-61
32 Unit Testing
• “Select Tests Using TestSuite Methods” on page 32-63

• “Select Tests Using HasTag Selector” on page 32-63
Run Selected Tests Using runtests
Use the runtests function to select and run tests without explicitly creating a test suite.
Select and run all the tests from ExampleTagTest and ExampleTagClassTest that
include the 'FeatureA' tag.
results = runtests({'ExampleTagTest','ExampleTagClassTest'},'Tag','FeatureA');
Running ExampleTagTest
..
Done ExampleTagTest
__________
Running ExampleTagClassTest
.
Done ExampleTagClassTest
__________
runtests selected and ran three tests.
Display the results in a table.

table(results)
ans =
3×6 table
Name Passed Failed Incomplete Duration De

___________________________ ______ ______ __________ __________ ____
'ExampleTagTest/testE' true false false 0.00039529 [1×1

'ExampleTagTest/testD' true false false 0.00045658 [1×1
'ExampleTagClassTest/testH' true false false 0.00043899 [1×1
The selected tests are testE and testD from ExampleTagTest, and testH from
ExampleTagClassTest.
32-62
Tag Unit Tests
Select Tests Using TestSuite Methods
Create a suite of tests from the ExampleTagTest class that are tagged with
'FeatureA'.
import matlab.unittest.TestSuite
sA = TestSuite.fromClass(?ExampleTagTest,'Tag','FeatureA');
Create a suite of tests from the ExampleTagClassTest class that are tagged with
'FeatureC'.
sB = TestSuite.fromFile('ExampleTagClassTest.m','Tag','FeatureC');
Concatenate the suite and view the names of the tests.

suite = [sA sB];
{suite.Name}'
ans =
3×1 cell array
'ExampleTagTest/testE'
'ExampleTagTest/testD'
'ExampleTagClassTest/testG'
Select Tests Using HasTag Selector
Create a suite of all the tests from the ExampleTagTest and ExampleTagClassTest
classes.
import matlab.unittest.selectors.HasTag
sA = TestSuite.fromClass(?ExampleTagTest);
sB = TestSuite.fromFile('ExampleTagClassTest.m');
suite = [sA sB];
Select all the tests that do not have tags.

s1 = suite.selectIf(~HasTag)
s1 =
Test with properties:
Name: 'ExampleTagTest/testA'
32-63
32 Unit Testing
BaseFolder: 'C:\work'
ProcedureName: 'testA'
SharedTestFixtures: [0×0 matlab.unittest.fixtures.EmptyFixture]
Parameterization: [0×0 matlab.unittest.parameters.EmptyParameter]
Tags: {1×0 cell}
Tests Include:
0 Parameterizations, 0 Shared Test Fixture Classes, 0 Tags.
Select all the tests with the 'Unit' tag and display their names.
s2 = suite.selectIf(HasTag('Unit'));
{s2.Name}'
ans =
3×1 cell array
'ExampleTagTest/testD'
'ExampleTagTest/testB'
'ExampleTagTest/testC'
Select all the tests with the 'FeatureB' or 'System' tag using a constraint.
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsEqualTo
constraint = IsEqualTo('FeatureB') | IsEqualTo('System');
s3 = suite.selectIf(HasTag(constraint));
{s3.Name}'
ans =
4×1 cell array
'ExampleTagTest/testE'
'ExampleTagClassTest/testH'
'ExampleTagClassTest/testG'
'ExampleTagClassTest/testF'
See Also
matlab.unittest.constraints | matlab.unittest.selectors.HasTag |
runtests
32-64
Write Tests Using Shared Fixtures

This example shows how to use shared fixtures when creating tests. You can share test
fixtures across test classes using the SharedTestFixtures attribute of the TestCase
class. To exemplify this attribute, create multiple test classes in a subdirectory of your
current working folder. The test methods are shown only at a high level.
The two test classes used in this example test the DocPolynom class and the
BankAccount class. You can access both classes in MATLAB, but you must add them to
the MATLAB path. A path fixture adds the directory to the current path, runs the tests,
and removes the directory from the path. Since both classes require the same addition to
the path, the tests use a shared fixture.
Create a Test for the DocPolynom Class
Create a test file for the DocPolynom class. Create the shared fixture by specifying the
SharedTestFixtures attribute for the TestCase and passing in a PathFixture.
DocPolynomTest Class Definition File

classdef (SharedTestFixtures={matlab.unittest.fixtures.PathFixture( ...
fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_oop','examples'))}) ...
DocPolynomTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
% Tests the DocPolynom class.
properties
msgEqn = 'Equation under test: ';
end
methods (Test)
p = DocPolynom([1, 0, 1]);
testCase.verifyClass(p, ?DocPolynom)
end
function testAddition(testCase)
p1 = DocPolynom([1, 0, 1]);
p2 = DocPolynom([5, 2]);
actual = p1 + p2;
expected = DocPolynom([1, 5, 3]);
msg = [testCase.msgEqn,...
32-65
32 Unit Testing
'(x^2 + 1) + (5*x + 2) = x^2 + 5*x + 3'];

testCase.verifyEqual(actual, expected, msg)
end
function testMultiplication(testCase)
p1 = DocPolynom([1, 0, 3]);
p2 = DocPolynom([5, 2]);
actual = p1 * p2;
expected = DocPolynom([5, 2, 15, 6]);
msg = [testCase.msgEqn,...
'(x^2 + 3) * (5*x + 2) = 5*x^3 + 2*x^2 + 15*x + 6'];
testCase.verifyEqual(actual, expected, msg)
end
end
end
Create a Test for the BankAccount Class
Create a test file for the BankAccount class. Create the shared fixture by specifying the
SharedTestFixtures attribute for the TestCase and passing in a PathFixture.
BankAccountTest Class Definition File

classdef (SharedTestFixtures={matlab.unittest.fixtures.PathFixture( ...
fullfile(matlabroot, 'help', 'techdoc', 'matlab_oop', ...
'examples'))}) BankAccountTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase
methods (Test)
'Constructor failed to correctly set account number')
'Constructor failed to correctly set account balance')
end
import matlab.unittest.constraints.Throws
Throws('MATLAB:minrhs'))
end
32-66
b.deposit(25)
testCase.verifyEqual(b.AccountBalance, 125)
end
b.withdraw(25)
testCase.verifyEqual(b.AccountBalance, 75)
end
end
b.withdraw(50)
'The callback should not have executed yet')
b.withdraw(60)
'The listener callback should have fired')
end
end
end
Build the Test Suite
The classes DocPolynomTest.m and BankAccountTest.m are in your working

directory. Create a test suite from your current working directory. If you have additional
tests, they are included in the suite when you use the TestSuite.fromFolder method.
Create the test suite at the command prompt.
import matlab.unittest.TestSuite;
suiteFolder = TestSuite.fromFolder(pwd);
Run the Tests
At the command prompt, run the tests in the test suite.
32-67
32 Unit Testing
result = run(suiteFolder);
Setting up PathFixture.
Description: Adds 'C:\Program Files\MATLAB\R2013b\help\techdoc\matlab_oop\examples' to
__________
Running BankAccountTest
.....
Done BankAccountTest
__________
Running DocPolynomTest
...
Done DocPolynomTest
__________
Tearing down PathFixture.

Description: Restores the path to its previous state.
__________
The test framework sets up the test fixture, runs all the tests in each file, and then tears
the fixture down. If the path fixture was set up and torn down using TestClassSetup
methods, the fixture is set up and torn down twice—once for each test file.
See Also
PathFixture | TestCase | matlab.unittest.fixtures
32-68
Create Basic Custom Fixture
Create Basic Custom Fixture

This example shows how to create a basic custom fixture that changes the display format
to hexadecimal representation. The example also shows to use the fixture to test a
function that displays a column of numbers as text. After the testing completes, the
framework restores the display format to its pretest state.
Create FormatHexFixture Class Definition
In a file in your working folder, create a new class, FormatHexFixture that inherits
from the matlab.unittest.fixtures.Fixture class. Since we want the fixture to
restore the pretest state of the MATLAB display format, create an OriginalFormat
property to keep track of the original display format.
classdef FormatHexFixture < matlab.unittest.fixtures.Fixture
OriginalFormat
end
Implement Setup and Teardown Methods
Subclasses of the Fixture class must implement the setup method. Use this method to
record the pretest display format, and set the format to 'hex'. Use the teardown
method to restore the original display format. Define the setup and teardown methods
in the methods block of the FormatHexFixture.m file.
methods
function setup(fixture)
fixture.OriginalFormat = get(0, 'Format');
set(0, 'Format', 'hex')
end
function teardown(fixture)
set(0, 'Format', fixture.OriginalFormat)
end
end
end
Apply Custom Fixture
In a file in your working folder, create the following test class, SampleTest.m.
classdef SampleTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase

methods (Test)
32-69
32 Unit Testing
function test1(testCase)
testCase.applyFixture(FormatHexFixture);
actStr = getColumnForDisplay([1;2;3], 'Small Integers');
expStr = ['Small Integers '
'3ff0000000000000'
'4000000000000000'
'4008000000000000'];
testCase.verifyEqual(actStr, expStr)
end
end
end
function str = getColumnForDisplay(values, title)

elements = cell(numel(values)+1, 1);
elements{1} = title;
for idx = 1:numel(values)
elements{idx+1} = displayNumber(values(idx));
end
str = char(elements);
end
function str = displayNumber(n)

str = strtrim(evalc('disp(n);'));
end
This test applies the custom fixture and verifies that the displayed column of
hexadecimal representation is as expected.
At the command prompt, run the test.

run(SampleTest);
Running SampleTest
.
Done SampleTest
__________
See Also
matlab.unittest.fixtures.Fixture
32-70
See Also
Related Examples
• “Create Advanced Custom Fixture” on page 32-72
32-71
32 Unit Testing
Create Advanced Custom Fixture

This example shows how to create a custom fixture that sets an environment variable.
Prior to testing, this fixture will save the current UserName variable.
Create UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture Class Definition
In a file in your working folder, create a new class,

UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture that inherits from the
matlab.unittest.fixtures.Fixture class. Since you want to pass the fixture a user
name, create a UserName property to pass the data between methods.
classdef UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture < ...
properties (SetAccess=private)
UserName
end
Define Fixture Constructor
In the methods block of the UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture.m file, create a

constructor method that validates the input and defines the SetupDescription. Have
the constructor accept a character vector and set the fixture’s UserName property.
methods
function fixture = UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture(name)
validateattributes(name, {'char'}, {'row'}, '','UserName')
fixture.UserName = name;
fixture.SetupDescription = sprintf( ...
'Set the UserName environment variable to "%s".',...
fixture.UserName);
end
Implement setup Method
Subclasses of the Fixture class must implement the setup method. Use this method to
save the original UserName variable. This method also defines the
TeardownDescription and registers the teardown task of setting the UserName to the
original state after testing.
Define the setup method within the methods block of the

UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture.m file.
originalUserName = getenv('UserName');
32-72
fixture.assertNotEmpty(originalUserName, ...
'An existing UserName environment variable must be defined.')
fixture.addTeardown(@setenv, 'UserName', originalUserName)
fixture.TeardownDescription = sprintf(...
'Restored the UserName environment variable to "%s".',...
originalUserName);
setenv('UserName', fixture.UserName)
end
end
Implement isCompatible Method
Classes that derive from Fixture must implement the isCompatible method if the
constructor is configurable. Since you can configure the UserName property through the
constructor, UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture must implement
isCompatible.
The isCompatible method is called with two instances of the same class. In this case, it
is called with two instances of UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture. The testing
framework considers the two instances compatible if their UserName properties are
equal.
In a new methods block within UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture.m, define an

isCompatible method which returns logical 1 (true) or logical 0 (false).
methods (Access=protected)
function bool = isCompatible(fixture, other)
bool = strcmp(fixture.UserName, other.UserName);
end
end
Fixture Class Definition Summary
Below are the complete contents of UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture.m.

UserName
end
methods
fixture.UserName);
end
32-73
32 Unit Testing
originalUserName = getenv('UserName');
fixture.assertNotEmpty(originalUserName, ...
fixture.addTeardown(@setenv, 'UserName', originalUserName)
originalUserName);
end
end
end
end
end
Apply Custom Fixture to Single Test Class
In a file in your working folder, create the following test class, ExampleTest.m.
classdef ExampleTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase

function mySetup(testCase)
testCase.applyFixture(...
UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture('David'));
end
end
methods (Test)
function t1(~)
fprintf(1, 'Current UserName: "%s"', getenv('UserName'))
end
end
end
This test uses the UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture for each test in the

ExampleTest class.
At the command prompt, run the test.
run(ExampleTest);
Running ExampleTest
Current UserName: "David".
32-74
Done ExampleTest
__________
Apply Custom Fixture as Shared Fixture
In your working folder, create three test classes using a shared fixture. Using a shared
fixture allows the UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture to be shared across
classes.
Create testA.m as follows.
classdef (SharedTestFixtures={...
UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture('David')}) ...
testA < matlab.unittest.TestCase
methods (Test)
function t1(~)
end
end
end
Create testB.m as follows.
UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture('Andy')}) ...
testB < matlab.unittest.TestCase
methods (Test)
function t1(~)
end
end
end
Create testC.m as follows.
UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture('Andy')}) ...
testC < matlab.unittest.TestCase
methods (Test)
function t1(~)
end
end
end
32-75
32 Unit Testing
At the command prompt, run the tests.

runtests({'testA','testB','testC'});
Setting up UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture
Done setting up UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture: Set the UserName environment variab
__________
Running testA
Current UserName: "David".
Done testA
__________
Tearing down UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture

Done tearing down UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture: Restored the UserName environment
__________
Setting up UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture
Done setting up UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture: Set the UserName environment variab
__________
Running testB
Current UserName: "Andy".
Done testB
__________
Running testC
Current UserName: "Andy".
Done testC
__________
Tearing down UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture

Done tearing down UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture: Restored the UserName environment
__________
Recall that the fixtures are compatible if their UserName properties match. The tests in
testA and testB use incompatible shared fixtures, since 'David' is not equal to
'Andy'. Therefore, the framework invokes the fixture teardown and setup methods
between calls to testA and testB. However, the shared test fixture in testC is
compatible with the fixture in testB, so the framework doesn’t repeat fixture teardown
and setup before testC.
32-76
Alternative Approach to Calling addTeardown in setup Method
An alternate approach to using the addTeardown method within the setup method is to
implement a separate teardown method . Instead of the setup method described above,
implement the following setup and teardown methods within
UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture.m.
Alternate UserNameEnvironmentVariableFixture Class Definition

OriginalUser
end
UserName
end
methods
fixture.UserName);
end
fixture.OriginalUser = getenv('UserName');
fixture.assertNotEmpty(fixture.OriginalUser, ...
end
function teardown(fixture)
fixture.OriginalUser);
setenv('UserName', fixture.OriginalUser)
end
end
end
end
end
32-77
32 Unit Testing
The setup method does not contain a call to addTeardown or a definition for
TeardownDescription. These tasks are relegated to the teardown method. The
alternative class definition contains an additional property, OriginalUser, which
allows the information to be passed between methods.
See Also
Related Examples
• “Create Basic Custom Fixture” on page 32-69
32-78
Create Basic Parameterized Test

This example shows how to create a basic parameterized test.
Create Function to Test
In your working folder, create a function in the file sierpinski.m. This function returns
a matrix representing an image of a Sierpinski carpet fractal. It takes as input the
fractal level and an optional data type.
function carpet = sierpinski(nLevels,classname)
if nargin == 1
classname = 'single';
end
mSize = 3^nLevels;
carpet = ones(mSize,classname);
cutCarpet(1,1,mSize,nLevels) % begin recursion
function cutCarpet(x,y,s,cL)
if cL
ss = s/3; % define subsize
for lx = 0:2
for ly = 0:2
if lx == 1 && ly == 1
% remove center square
carpet(x+ss:x+2*ss-1,y+ss:y+2*ss-1) = 0;
else
% recurse
cutCarpet(x + lx*ss, y + ly*ss, ss, cL-1)
end
end
end
end
end
end
Create TestCarpet Test Class
In a file in your working folder, create a new class, TestCarpet, to test the sierpinski
function.
classdef TestCarpet < matlab.unittest.TestCase
32-79
32 Unit Testing
Define properties Block
Define the properties used for parameterized testing. In the TestCarpet class, define
these properties in a property block with the TestParameter attribute.
properties (TestParameter)
type = {'single','double','uint16'};
level = struct('small', 2,'medium', 4, 'large', 6);
side = struct('small', 9, 'medium', 81,'large', 729);
end
The type property contains the different data types you want to test. The level
property contains the different fractal level you want to test. The side property contains
the number of rows and columns in the Sierpinski carpet matrix and corresponds to the
level property. To provide meaningful names for each parameterization value, level
and side are defined as structs.
Define Test methods Block
Define the following test methods in the TestCarpet class.

methods (Test)
function testRemainPixels(testCase, level)
% expected number pixels equal to 1
expPixelCount = 8^level;
% actual number pixels equal to 1
actPixels = find(sierpinski(level));
testCase.verifyNumElements(actPixels,expPixelCount)
end
function testClass(testCase, type, level)

testCase.verifyClass(...
sierpinski(level,type), type);
end
function testDefaultL1Output(testCase)
exp = single([1 1 1; 1 0 1; 1 1 1]);
testCase.verifyEqual(sierpinski(1), exp)
end
end
The testRemainPixels method tests the output of the sierpinski function by

verifying that the number of nonzero pixels is the same as expected for a particular level.
32-80
This method uses the level property and, therefore, results in three test elements—one
for each value in level. The testClass method tests the class of the output from the
sierpinski function with each combination of the type and level properties. This
approach results in nine test elements. The testDefaultL1Output test method does
not use a TestParameter property and, therefore, is not parameterized. This test
method verifies that the level 1 matrix contains the expected values. Since the test
method is not parameterized, it results in a one test element.
In the test methods above, you did not define the ParameterCombination attribute of
the Test methods block. This attribute is, by default, 'exhaustive'. The test
framework invokes a given test method once for every combination of the test
parameters.
Define Test methods Block with ParameterCombination Attribute
Define the following test methods in the TestCarpet class to ensure that the matrix
output by the sierpinski function has the correct number of elements. Set the
ParameterCombination attribute to 'sequential'.
methods (Test, ParameterCombination='sequential')

function testNumel(testCase, level, side)
import matlab.unittest.constraints.HasElementCount
testCase.verifyThat(sierpinski(level),...
HasElementCount(side^2))
end
end
end
Test methods with the ParameterCombination attribute set to 'sequential' are

invoked once for each corresponding value of the parameter. The properties, level and
side, must have the same number of values. Since these properties each have three
values, the testNumel method is invoked three times.
TestCarpet Class Definition Summary
The complete contents of TestCarpet.m follows.
classdef TestCarpet < matlab.unittest.TestCase
type = {'single','double','uint16'};
level = struct('small', 2,'medium', 4, 'large', 6);
32-81
32 Unit Testing
side = struct('small', 9, 'medium', 81,'large', 729);

end
methods (Test)
function testRemainPixels(testCase, level)
% expected number pixels equal to 1
expPixelCount = 8^level;
% actual number pixels equal to 1
actPixels = find(sierpinski(level));
testCase.verifyNumElements(actPixels,expPixelCount)
end
function testClass(testCase, type, level)

testCase.verifyClass(...
sierpinski(level,type), type)
end
function testDefaultL1Output(testCase)
exp = single([1 1 1; 1 0 1; 1 1 1]);
testCase.verifyEqual(sierpinski(1), exp)
end
end

function testNumel(testCase, level, side)
import matlab.unittest.constraints.HasElementCount
testCase.verifyThat(sierpinski(level),...
HasElementCount(side^2))
end
end
end
Run All Tests
At the command prompt, create a suite from TestCarpet.m.
suite = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromFile('TestCarpet.m');
{suite.Name}'
ans =
'TestCarpet/testNumel(level=small,side=small)'
'TestCarpet/testNumel(level=medium,side=medium)'
'TestCarpet/testNumel(level=large,side=large)'
'TestCarpet/testRemainPixels(level=small)'
32-82
'TestCarpet/testRemainPixels(level=medium)'
'TestCarpet/testRemainPixels(level=large)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=single,level=small)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=single,level=medium)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=single,level=large)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=double,level=small)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=double,level=medium)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=double,level=large)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=uint16,level=small)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=uint16,level=medium)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=uint16,level=large)'
'TestCarpet/testDefaultL1Output'
The suite had 16 test elements. The element’s Name indicates any parameterization.
suite.run;
Running TestCarpet
..........
......
Done TestCarpet
__________
Run Tests with level Parameter Property Named small
Use the selectIf method of the TestSuite to select test elements that use a particular
parameterization. Select all test elements that use the parameter name small in the
level parameter property list.
s1 = suite.selectIf('ParameterName','small');
{s1.Name}'
ans =
'TestCarpet/testNumel(level=small,side=small)'
'TestCarpet/testRemainPixels(level=small)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=single,level=small)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=double,level=small)'
'TestCarpet/testClass(type=uint16,level=small)'
The suite has five elements.

s1.run;
Running TestCarpet
.....
32-83
32 Unit Testing
Done TestCarpet
__________
Alternatively, create the same test suite directly from the fromFile method of
TestSuite.
import matlab.unittest.selectors.HasParameter
s1 = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromFile('TestCarpet.m',...
HasParameter('Name','small'));
See Also
matlab.unittest.TestCase | matlab.unittest.TestSuite.selectIf |
matlab.unittest.selectors.HasParameter
Related Examples
• “Create Advanced Parameterized Test” on page 32-85
32-84
Create Advanced Parameterized Test

This example shows how to create a test that is parameterized in the TestClassSetup,
TestMethodSetup, and Test methods blocks. The example test class tests the random
number generator.
Test Overview
The TestRand test class is parameterized at three different levels.

Parameterization Method Attribute Property Attribute
Level
Test level Test TestParameter
Method setup level TestMethodSetup MethodSetupParameter
Class setup level TestClassSetup ClassSetupParameter
At each test level, you can use the ParameterCombination method attribute to specify
the test parameterization.
ParameterCombinatio Method Invocation
n Attribute
'exhaustive' (default) Methods are invoked for all combinations of parameters. The
test framework uses this default combination if you do not
specify the ParameterCombination attribute.
'sequential' Methods are invoked with corresponding values from each
parameter. Each parameter must contain the same number of
values.
'pairwise' Methods are invoked for every pair of parameter values at
least once. While the test framework guarantees that tests are
created for every pair of values at least once, you should not
rely on that size, ordering, or specific set of test suite
elements.
For example, use the combined methods attribute TestMethodSetup,

ParameterCombination='sequential' to specify sequential combination of the
method setup-level parameters defined in the MethodSetupParameter properties block.
For this example, class setup-level parameterization defines the type of random number
generator. The method setup-level parameterization defines the seed for the random
32-85
32 Unit Testing
number generator, and the test-level parameterization defines the data type and size of
the random number output.
Create TestRand Test Class
In a file in your working folder, create a class that inherits from

matlab.unittest.TestCase. This class tests various aspects of random number
generation.
classdef TestRand < matlab.unittest.TestCase
Define properties Blocks
Define the properties used for parameterized testing. Each properties block
corresponds to parameterization at a particular level.
properties (ClassSetupParameter)
generator = {'twister','combRecursive','multFibonacci'};
end
properties (MethodSetupParameter)
seed = {0, 123, 4294967295};
end
dim1 = struct('small', 1,'medium', 2, 'large', 3);
type = {'single','double'};
end
Define Test Class and Test Method Setup Methods
Define the setup methods at the test class and test method level. These methods register
the initial random number generator state. After the framework runs the tests, the
methods restore the original state. The ClassSetup method defines the type of random
number generator, and the TestMethodSetup seeds the generator.
function ClassSetup(testCase, generator)
orig = rng;
testCase.addTeardown(@rng, orig)
rng(0, generator)
end
32-86
end
methods (TestMethodSetup)
function MethodSetup(testCase, seed)
orig = rng;
rng(seed)
end
end
Define Sequential Parameterized Test Methods
Define a methods block with the Test and ParameterCombination='sequential'

attributes. The test framework invokes these methods once for each corresponding
property value.

function testSize(testCase,dim1,dim2,dim3)
testCase.verifySize(rand(dim1,dim2,dim3),[dim1 dim2 dim3])
end
end
The method tests the size of the output for each corresponding parameter in dim1, dim2,
and dim3. For example, to test all the 'medium' values use:
testCase.verifySize(rand(2,3,4),[2 3 4]);. For a given TestClassSetup and
TestMethodSetup parameterization, the framework calls the testSize method three
times—once each for the 'small', 'medium', and 'large' values.
Define Pairwise Parameterized Test Methods
Define a methods block with the Test and ParameterCombination='pairwise'

attributes. The test framework invokes these methods at least once for every pair of
property values.
methods (Test, ParameterCombination='pairwise')

function testRepeatable(testCase,dim1,dim2,dim3)
state = rng;
firstRun = rand(dim1,dim2,dim3);
rng(state)
secondRun = rand(dim1,dim2,dim3);
testCase.verifyEqual(firstRun,secondRun)
end
end
32-87
32 Unit Testing
The test method verifies that the random number generator results are repeatable. For a
given TestClassSetup and TestMethodSetup parameterization, the framework calls
the testRepeatble method 10 times to ensure testing of each pair of dim1, dim2, and
dim3. However, if the parameter combination attribute is exhaustive, the framework
calls the method 3^3=27 times.
Define Exhaustive Parameterized Test Methods
Define a methods block with the Test attribute or no defined parameter combination.
The parameter combination is exhaustive by default. The test framework invokes these
methods once for every combination of property values.
methods (Test)
function testClass(testCase,dim1,dim2,type)
testCase.verifyClass(rand(dim1,dim2,type), type)
end
end
The test method verifies that the class of the output from rand is the same as the
expected class. For a given TestClassSetup and TestMethodSetup parameterization,
the framework calls the testClass method 3*3*2=18 times to ensure testing of each
combination of dim1, dim2, and type.
TestRand Class Definition Summary
classdef TestRand < matlab.unittest.TestCase

properties (ClassSetupParameter)
generator = {'twister','combRecursive','multFibonacci'};
end
properties (MethodSetupParameter)
seed = {0, 123, 4294967295};
end
type = {'single','double'};
end
function ClassSetup(testCase, generator)
32-88
orig = rng;
rng(0, generator)
end
end
methods (TestMethodSetup)
function MethodSetup(testCase, seed)
orig = rng;
rng(seed)
end
end

function testSize(testCase,dim1,dim2,dim3)
testCase.verifySize(rand(dim1,dim2,dim3),[dim1 dim2 dim3])
end
end
methods (Test, ParameterCombination='pairwise')

function testRepeatable(testCase,dim1,dim2,dim3)
state = rng;
firstRun = rand(dim1,dim2,dim3);
rng(state)
secondRun = rand(dim1,dim2,dim3);
testCase.verifyEqual(firstRun,secondRun);
end
end
methods (Test)
function testClass(testCase,dim1,dim2,type)
testCase.verifyClass(rand(dim1,dim2,type), type)
end
end
end
Create Suite from All Tests
At the command prompt, create a suite from TestRand.m class.
suite = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromClass(?TestRand)
suite =
32-89
32 Unit Testing
1×279 Test array with properties:
Name
BaseFolder
ProcedureName
SharedTestFixtures
Parameterization
Tags
Tests Include:
17 Unique Parameterizations, 0 Shared Test Fixture Classes, 0 Tags.
The test suite contains 279 test elements. For a given TestClassSetup and
TestMethodSetup parameterization, the framework creates 3+10+18=31 test elements.
These 31 elements are called three times—once for each TestMethodSetup
parameterization resulting in 3*31=93 test elements for each TestClassSetup
parameterization. There are three TestClassSetup parameterizations resulting in a
total of 3*93=279 test elements.
Examine the names of the first test element.
suite(1).Name
ans =
'TestRand[generator=twister]/[seed=value1]testClass(dim1=small,dim2=small,type=sing
The name of each element is constructed from the combination of the following:
• Test class: TestRand

• Class setup property and property name: [generator=twister]
• Method setup property and property name: [seed=value1]
• Test method name: testClass
• Test method properties and property names:
(dim1=small,dim2=small,type=single)
The name for the seed property isn’t particularly meaningful (value1). The testing
framework provided this name because the seed property values are numbers. For a
more meaningful name, define the seed property as a struct with more descriptive field
names.
32-90
Run Suite from Class Using Selector
At the command prompt, create a selector to select test elements that test the
'twister' generator for 'single' precision. Omit test elements that use properties
with the 'large' name.
s = HasParameter('Property','generator', 'Name','twister') & ...
HasParameter('Property','type', 'Name','single') & ...
~HasParameter('Name','large');
suite2 = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromClass(?TestRand,s)
suite2 =
1×12 Test array with properties:
Name
BaseFolder
ProcedureName
SharedTestFixtures
Parameterization
Tags
Tests Include:
9 Unique Parameterizations, 0 Shared Test Fixture Classes, 0 Tags.
If you first generate the full suite, construct the same test suite as above using the
selectIf method.
suite = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromClass(?TestRand);
suite2 = selectIf(suite,s);
Run the test suite.
suite2.run;
Running TestRand
..........
..
Done TestRand
__________
32-91
32 Unit Testing
Run Suite from Method Using Selector
At the command prompt, create a selector that omits test elements that use properties
with the 'large' or 'medium' name. Limit results to test elements from the
testRepeatable method.
s = ~(HasParameter('Name','large') | HasParameter('Name','medium'));
suite3 = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromMethod(?TestRand,'testRepeatable',s);
{suite3.Name}'
ans =
9×1 cell array
'TestRand[generator=twister]/[seed=value1]testRepeatable(dim1=small,dim2=small,dim3=small)'
'TestRand[generator=combRecursive]/[seed=value1]testRepeatable(dim1=small,dim2=small,dim3=small)'
'TestRand[generator=multFibonacci]/[seed=value1]testRepeatable(dim1=small,dim2=small,dim3=small)'
Run the test suite.

suite3.run;
Running TestRand
.........
Done TestRand
__________
Run All Double Precision Tests
At the command prompt, run all the test elements from TestRand.m that use the
parameter name 'double'.
runtests('TestRand','ParameterName','double');
Running TestRand
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
32-92
See Also
..........
..........
.
Done TestRand
__________
See Also
matlab.unittest.selectors
Related Examples
• “Create Basic Parameterized Test” on page 32-79
32-93
32 Unit Testing
Create Simple Test Suites

This example shows how to combine tests into test suites, using the SolverTest test
case. Use the static from* methods in the matlab.unittest.TestSuite class to
create suites for combinations of your tests, whether they are organized in packages and
classes or files and folders, or both.
Create Quadratic Solver Function
Create the following function that solves roots of the quadratic equation in a file,
quadraticSolver.m, in your working folder.

end
roots(1) = (-b + sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);

roots(2) = (-b - sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);
end
Create Test for Quadratic Solver Function
Create the following test class in a file, SolverTest.m, in your working folder.
% a*x^2 + b*x + c = 0
methods (Test)
end
32-94
Create Simple Test Suites
end
end
end
Import TestSuite Class
At the command prompt, add the matlab.unittest.TestSuite class to the current

import list.
Make sure the SolverTest class definition file is on your MATLAB path.
Create Suite from SolverTest Class
The fromClass method creates a suite from all Test methods in the SolverTest class.
suiteClass = TestSuite.fromClass(?SolverTest);
result = run(suiteClass);
Create Suite from SolverTest Class Definition File
The fromFile method creates a suite using the name of the file to identify the class.
suiteFile = TestSuite.fromFile('SolverTest.m');
result = run(suiteFile);
Create Suite from All Test Case Files in Current Folder
The fromFolder method creates a suite from all test case files in the specified folder.
For example, the following files are in the current folder:
• BankAccountTest.m
• DocPolynomTest.m
• FigurePropertiesTest.m
• IsSupportedTest.m
• SolverTest.m
suiteFolder = TestSuite.fromFolder(pwd);
result = run(suiteFolder);
32-95
32 Unit Testing
Create Suite from Single Test Method
The fromMethod method creates a suite from a single test method.
suiteMethod = TestSuite.fromMethod(?SolverTest,'testRealSolution')'
result = run(suiteMethod);
See Also
TestSuite
Related Examples
32-96
Run Tests for Various Workflows

In this section...
“Set Up Example Tests” on page 32-97
“Run All Tests in Class or Function” on page 32-97
“Run Single Test in Class or Function” on page 32-98
“Run Test Suites by Name” on page 32-99
“Run Test Suites from Test Array” on page 32-99
“Run Tests with Customized Test Runner” on page 32-99
Set Up Example Tests

To explore different ways to run tests, create a class-based test and a function-based test
in your current working folder. For the class-based test file use the DocPolynomTest
example test presented in the matlab.unittest.qualifications.Verifiable
example. For the function-based test file use the axesPropertiesTest example test
presented in “Write Test Using Setup and Teardown Functions” on page 32-32.
Run All Tests in Class or Function

Use the run method of the TestCase class to directly run tests contained in a single test
file. When running tests directly, you do not need to explicitly create a Test array.
% Directly run a single file of class-based tests

results1 = run(DocPolynomTest);
% Directly run a single file of function-based tests

results2 = run(axesPropertiesTest);
You can also assign the test file output to a variable and run the tests using the
functional form or dot notation.
% Create Test or TestCase objects
t1 = DocPolynomTest; % TestCase object from class-based test
t2 = axesPropertiesTest; % Test object from function-based test
% Run tests using functional form

results1 = run(t1);
32-97
32 Unit Testing
results2 = run(t2);
% Run tests using dot notation

results1 = t1.run;
results2 = t2.run;
Alternatively, you can run tests contained in a single file by using runtests.
Run Single Test in Class or Function

Run a single test from within a class-based test file by specifying the test method as an
input argument to the run method. For example, only run the test,
testMultiplication, from the DocPolynomTest file.
results1 = run(DocPolynomTest,'testMultiplication');
Function-based test files return an array of Test objects instead of a single TestCase
object. You can run a particular test by indexing into the array. However, you must
examine the Name field in the test array to ensure you run the correct test. For example,
only run the test, surfaceColorTest, from the axesPropertiesTest file.
t2 = axesPropertiesTest; % Test object from function-based test

t2(:).Name
ans =
axesPropertiesTest/testDefaultXLim
ans =
axesPropertiesTest/surfaceColorTest
The surfaceColorTest test corresponds to the second element in the array.
Only run the surfaceColorTest test.
results2 = t2(2).run; % or results2 = run(t2(2));
32-98
Run Test Suites by Name

You can run a group, or suite, of tests together. To run the test suite using runtests,
the suite is defined as a cell array of character vectors representing a test file, a test
class, a package that contains tests or a folder that contains tests.
suite = {'axesPropertiesTest','DocPolynomTest'};
runtests(suite);
Run all tests in the current folder using the pwd as input to the runtests function.
runtests(pwd);
Alternatively, you can explicitly create Test arrays and use the run method to run them.
Run Test Suites from Test Array

You can explicitly create Test arrays and use the run method in the TestSuite class to
run them. Using this approach, you explicitly define TestSuite objects and, therefore,
can examine the contents. The runtests function does not return the TestSuite object.
s1 = TestSuite.fromClass(?DocPolynomTest);
s2 = TestSuite.fromFile('axesPropertiesTest.m');
% generate test suite and then run

fullSuite = [s1 s2];
result = run(fullSuite);
Since the suite is explicitly defined, it is easy for you to perform further analysis on the
suite, such as rerunning failed tests.
failedTests = fullSuite([result.Failed]);
result2 = run(failedTests);
Run Tests with Customized Test Runner

You can specialize the test running by defining a custom test runner and adding plugins.
The run method of the TestRunner class operates on a TestSuite object.
import matlab.unittest.TestRunner
32-99
32 Unit Testing
import matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunProgressPlugin
% Generate TestSuite.
s1 = TestSuite.fromClass(?DocPolynomTest);
s2 = TestSuite.fromFile('axesPropertiesTest.m');
suite = [s1 s2];
% Create silent test runner.

runner = TestRunner.withNoPlugins;
% Add plugin to display test progress.

runner.addPlugin(TestRunProgressPlugin.withVerbosity(2))
% Run tests using customized runner.

result = run(runner,[suite]);
See Also
matlab.unittest.TestCase.run | matlab.unittest.TestRunner.run |
matlab.unittest.TestSuite.run | runtests
32-100
Programmatically Access Test Diagnostics
Programmatically Access Test Diagnostics



and events logged at a Terse level. To configure the plugin to record passing diagnostics
or other logged messages at different verbosity levels, configure an instance of
DiagnosticsRecordingPlugin and add it to the test runner.
See Also
matlab.unittest.TestResult |
matlab.unittest.plugins.DiagnosticsRecordingPlugin |
matlab.unittest.plugins.diagnosticrecord.DiagnosticRecord
Related Examples
32-101
32 Unit Testing
Add Plugin to Test Runner

This example shows how to add a plugin to the test runner. The
matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunProgressPlugin displays progress messages
about a test case. This plugin is part of the matlab.unittest package. MATLAB® uses
it for default test runners.
Create a Test for the BankAccount Class
In a file in your working folder, create a test file for the BankAccount class.
type BankAccountTest.m
classdef BankAccountTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase

function addBankAccountClassToPath(testCase)
p = path;
testCase.addTeardown(@path,p);
addpath(fullfile(matlabroot,'help','techdoc','matlab_oop',...
'examples'));
end
end
methods (Test)
'Constructor failed to correctly set account number');
'Constructor failed to correctly set account balance');
end
import matlab.unittest.constraints.Throws;
Throws('MATLAB:minrhs'));
end
b.deposit(25);
32-102
Add Plugin to Test Runner
end
b.withdraw(25);
end
end
b.withdraw(50);
'The callback should not have executed yet');
b.withdraw(60);
'The listener callback should have fired');
end
end
end
Create Test Suite
At the command prompt, create a test suite, ts, from the BankAccountTest test case.
ts = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromClass(?BankAccountTest);
Show Results with No Plugins
Create a test runner with no plugins.

res = runner.run(ts);
No output displayed.
Customize Test Runner
Add the custom plugin, TestRunProgressPlugin.
32-103
32 Unit Testing
import matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunProgressPlugin
runner.addPlugin(TestRunProgressPlugin.withVerbosity(2))
res = runner.run(ts);
Running BankAccountTest
.....
Done BankAccountTest
__________
MATLAB displays progress messages about BankAccountTest.
See Also
matlab.unittest.plugins
32-104
Write Plugins to Extend TestRunner

In this section...
“Custom Plugins Overview” on page 32-105
“Extending Test Level Plugin Methods” on page 32-106
“Extending Test Class Level Plugin Methods” on page 32-106
“Extending Test Suite Level Plugin Methods” on page 32-107
Custom Plugins Overview

TestRunnerPlugin methods have three levels: Test Suite, Test Class, and Test. At each
level, you implement methods to extend the creation, setup, run, and teardown of tests or
test fixtures. The TestRunner runs these methods as shown in the figure.
Additionally, the reportFinalizedResult method enables the test runner to report

finalized test results. A test result is finalized when no remaining test content can modify
the results. The test runner determines if it invokes the reportFinalizedResult
method at each level.
The creation methods are the only set of TestRunnerPlugin methods with an output
argument. Typically, you extend the creation methods to listen for various events
32-105
32 Unit Testing
originating from the test content at the corresponding level. Since both TestCase and
Fixture instances inherit from the handle class, you add these listeners using the
addlistener method. The methods that set up, run and tear down test content extend
the way the TestRunner evaluates the test content.
Extending Test Level Plugin Methods

The TestRunnerPlugin methods at the test level extend the creation, setup, run, and
teardown of a single test suite element. A single test element consists of one test method
or, if the test is parameterized, one instance of the test’s parameterization.
Type of Method Test Level Falls Within Scope of runTest
creation method createTestMethodInstance
setup method setupTestMethod
run method runTestMethod
teardown method teardownTestMethod
At this level, the createTestMethodInstance method is the only plugin method with
an output argument. It returns the TestCase instances created for each Test element.
The test framework passes each of these instances into corresponding Test methods, and
into any methods with the TestMethodSetup or TestMethodTeardown attribute.
The test framework evaluates methods at the test level within the scope of the runTest
method. Provided the test framework completes all TestMethodSetup work, it invokes
the plugin methods in this level a single time per test element.
Extending Test Class Level Plugin Methods

The TestRunnerPlugin methods at the test class level extend the creation, setup, run,
and teardown of test suite elements that belong to the same test class or the same
function-based test. These methods apply to a subset of the full TestSuite that the
TestRunner runs.
Type of Method Test Class Level Falls Within Scope of runTestClass
creation method createTestClassInstance
setup method setupTestClass
run method runTest
32-106
Type of Method Test Class Level Falls Within Scope of runTestClass

teardown method teardownTestClass
At this level, the createTestClassInstance method is the only plugin method with an
output argument. It returns the TestCase instances created at the class level. For each
class, the test framework passes the instance into any methods with the
TestClassSetup or TestClassTeardown attribute.
A test class setup is parameterized if it contains properties with the

ClassSetupParameter attribute. In this case, the test framework evaluates the
setupTestClass and teardownTestClass methods as many times as the class setup
parameterization dictates.
The run method at this level, runTest, extends the running of a single TestSuite
element, and incorporates the functionality described for the test level plugin methods.
The test framework evaluates methods at the test class level within the scope of the
runTestClass method. If TestClassSetup completes successfully, it invokes the
runTest method one time for each element in the Test array. Each TestClassSetup
parameterization invokes the creation, setup, and teardown methods a single time.
Extending Test Suite Level Plugin Methods

The TestRunnerPlugin methods at the test suite level extend the creation, setup, run,
and teardown of shared test fixtures. These methods fall within the scope of
runTestSuite.
Type of Method Test Level Falls Within Scope of runTestSuite
creation method createSharedTestFixture
setup method setupSharedTestFixture
run method runTestClass
teardown method teardownSharedTestFixture
At this level, the createSharedTestFixture method is the only plugin method with an
output argument. It returns the Fixture instances for each shared fixture required by a
test class. These fixture instances are available to the test through the
getSharedTestFixtures method of TestCase.
32-107
32 Unit Testing
The run method at this level, runTestClass, extends the running of tests that belong to
the same test class or the same function-based test, and incorporates the functionality
described for the test class level plugin methods.
See Also
addlistener | matlab.unittest.TestCase | matlab.unittest.TestRunner |
matlab.unittest.fixtures.Fixture |
matlab.unittest.plugins.OutputStream |
matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin
Related Examples
32-108
Create Custom Plugin

This example shows how to create a custom plugin that counts the number of passing
and failing assertions when running a specified test suite. The plugin prints a brief
summary at the end of the testing.
Create AssertionCountingPlugin Class
In a file in your working folder, create a new class, AssertionCountingPlugin, that

inherits from the matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin class. For a
complete version of the code for an AssertionCountingPlugin, see
"AssertionCountingPlugin Class Definition Summary".
Keep track of the number of passing and failing assertions. Within a properties block,
create NumPassingAssertions and NumFailingAssertions properties to pass the
data between methods.
properties
NumPassingAssertions = 0;
NumFailingAssertions = 0;
end
Extend Running of TestSuite
Implement the runTestSuite method in a methods block with protected access.

methods (Access = protected)
function runTestSuite(plugin, pluginData)
suiteSize = numel(pluginData.TestSuite);
fprintf('## Running a total of %d tests\n', suiteSize)
plugin.NumPassingAssertions = 0;
plugin.NumFailingAssertions = 0;
runTestSuite@matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin(...
plugin, pluginData);
fprintf('## Done running tests\n')

plugin.printAssertionSummary()
end
end
The test framework evaluates this method one time. It displays information about the
total number of tests, initializes the assertion count, and invokes the superclass method.
32-109
32 Unit Testing
After the framework completes evaluating the superclass method, the runTestSuite
method displays the assertion count summary.
Extend Creation of Shared Test Fixtures and TestCase Instances
Add listeners to AssertionPassed and AssertionFailed events to count the

assertions. To add these listeners, extend the methods that the test framework uses to
create the test content. The test content comprises TestCase instances for each Test
element, class-level TestCase instances for the TestClassSetup and
TestClassTeardown methods, and Fixture instances that are used when a TestCase
class has the SharedTestFixtures attribute.
Invoke the corresponding superclass method when you override the creation methods.
The creation methods return the content that the test framework creates for each of their
respective contexts. When implementing one of these methods, pass this argument out of
your own implementation, and add the listeners required by this plugin.
Add these creation methods to a methods block with protected access.

function fixture = createSharedTestFixture(plugin, pluginData)
fixture = createSharedTestFixture@...
matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin(plugin, pluginData);
fixture.addlistener('AssertionPassed', ...
@(~,~)plugin.incrementPassingAssertionsCount);
fixture.addlistener('AssertionFailed', ...
@(~,~)plugin.incrementFailingAssertionsCount);
end
function testCase = createTestClassInstance(plugin, pluginData)

testCase = createTestClassInstance@...
testCase.addlistener('AssertionPassed', ...
testCase.addlistener('AssertionFailed', ...
end
function testCase = createTestMethodInstance(plugin, pluginData)

testCase = createTestMethodInstance@...
32-110
end
end
Extend Running of Single Test Suite Element
Extend runTest to display the name of each test at run time. Include this function in a
methods block with protected access. Like all plugin methods, when you override this
method you must invoke the corresponding superclass method.

function runTest(plugin, pluginData)
fprintf('### Running test: %s\n', pluginData.Name)
runTest@matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin(...
end
end
Define Helper Functions
In a methods block with private access, define three helper functions. These functions
increment the number of passing or failing assertions, and print out the assertion count
summary.
methods (Access = private)

function incrementPassingAssertionsCount(plugin)
plugin.NumPassingAssertions = plugin.NumPassingAssertions + 1;
end
function incrementFailingAssertionsCount(plugin)
plugin.NumFailingAssertions = plugin.NumFailingAssertions + 1;
end
function printAssertionSummary(plugin)
fprintf('%s\n', repmat('_', 1, 30))
fprintf('Total Assertions: %d\n', ...
plugin.NumPassingAssertions + plugin.NumFailingAssertions)
fprintf('\t%d Passed, %d Failed\n', ...
plugin.NumPassingAssertions, plugin.NumFailingAssertions)
32-111
32 Unit Testing
end
end
AssertionCountingPlugin Class Definition Summary

classdef AssertionCountingPlugin < ...
properties
NumPassingAssertions = 0;
NumFailingAssertions = 0;
end

suiteSize = numel(pluginData.TestSuite);
fprintf('## Running a total of %d tests\n', suiteSize)
plugin.NumPassingAssertions = 0;
plugin.NumFailingAssertions = 0;
runTestSuite@matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin(...
fprintf('## Done running tests\n')

plugin.printAssertionSummary()
end
function fixture = createSharedTestFixture(plugin, pluginData)

fixture = createSharedTestFixture@...
fixture.addlistener('AssertionPassed', ...
fixture.addlistener('AssertionFailed', ...
end
function testCase = createTestClassInstance(plugin, pluginData)

testCase = createTestClassInstance@...
end

32-112
end
function runTest(plugin, pluginData)

fprintf('### Running test: %s\n', pluginData.Name)
runTest@matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin(...
end
end

function incrementPassingAssertionsCount(plugin)
plugin.NumPassingAssertions = plugin.NumPassingAssertions + 1;
end
function incrementFailingAssertionsCount(plugin)
plugin.NumFailingAssertions = plugin.NumFailingAssertions + 1;
end
function printAssertionSummary(plugin)
fprintf('%s\n', repmat('_', 1, 30))
fprintf('Total Assertions: %d\n', ...
plugin.NumPassingAssertions + plugin.NumFailingAssertions)
fprintf('\t%d Passed, %d Failed\n', ...
plugin.NumPassingAssertions, plugin.NumFailingAssertions)
end
end
end
Create Example Test Class
In your working folder, create the file ExampleTest.m containing the following test
class.
methods(Test)
function testOne(testCase) % Test fails
testCase.assertEqual(5, 4)
end
function testTwo(testCase) % Test passes
testCase.verifyEqual(5, 5)
end
function testThree(testCase) % Test passes
testCase.assertEqual(7*2, 14)
end
end
end
32-113
32 Unit Testing
Add Plugin to TestRunner and Run Tests
At the command prompt, create a test suite from the ExampleTest class.
suite = TestSuite.fromClass(?ExampleTest);
Create a test runner with no plugins. This code creates a silent runner and provides you
with complete control over the installed plugins.
Run the tests.
result = runner.run(suite);
Add AssertionCountingPlugin to the runner and run the tests.
runner.addPlugin(AssertionCountingPlugin)
## Running a total of 3 tests

### Running test: ExampleTest/testOne
### Running test: ExampleTest/testTwo
### Running test: ExampleTest/testThree
## Done running tests
______________________________
Total Assertions: 2
1 Passed, 1 Failed
See Also
matlab.unittest.fixtures.Fixture |
matlab.unittest.plugins.OutputStream |
Related Examples
32-114
See Also
32-115
32 Unit Testing
Write Plugin to Save Diagnostic Details

This example shows how to create a custom plugin to save diagnostic details. The plugin
listens for test failures and saves diagnostic information so you can access it after the
framework completes the tests.
Create Plugin
In a file in your working folder, create a class, myPlugin, that inherits from the
matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin class. In the plugin class:
• Define a FailedTestData property on the plugin that stores information from failed
tests.
• Override the default createTestMethodInstance method of TestRunnerPlugin
to listen for assertion, fatal assertion, and verification failures, and to record relevant
information.
• Override the default runTestSuite method of TestRunnerPlugin to initialize the
FailedTestData property value. If you do not initialize value of the property, each
time you run the tests using the same test runner, failed test information is appended
to the FailedTestData property.
• Define a helper function, recordData, to save information about the test failure as a
table.
The plugin saves information contained in the PluginData and

QualificationEventData objects. It also saves the type of failure and timestamp.
classdef DiagnosticRecorderPlugin < matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin
properties
FailedTestData
end

plugin.FailedTestData = [];
runTestSuite@...
end

32-116
testName = pluginData.Name;
@(~,event)plugin.recordData(event,testName, 'Assertion'));
testCase.addlistener('FatalAssertionFailed', ...
@(~,event)plugin.recordData(event,testName, 'Fatal Assertion'));
testCase.addlistener('VerificationFailed', ...
@(~,event)plugin.recordData(event,testName, 'Verification'));
end
end

function recordData(plugin,eventData,name,failureType)
s.Name = {name};
s.Type = {failureType};
if isempty(eventData.TestDiagnosticResult)
s.TestDiagnostics = 'TestDiagnostics not provided';
else
s.TestDiagnostics = eventData.TestDiagnosticResult;
end
s.FrameworkDiagnostics = eventData.FrameworkDiagnosticResult;
s.Stack = eventData.Stack;
s.Timestamp = datetime;
plugin.FailedTestData = [plugin.FailedTestData; struct2table(s)];

end
end
end
Create Test Class
class.
methods(Test)
function testOne(testCase)
testCase.assertGreaterThan(5,10)
end
function testTwo(testCase)
wrongAnswer = 'wrong';
testCase.verifyEmpty(wrongAnswer,'Not Empty')
testCase.verifyClass(wrongAnswer,'double','Not double')
end
32-117
32 Unit Testing
function testThree(testCase)
testCase.assertEqual(7*2,13,'Values not equal')
end
function testFour(testCase)
testCase.fatalAssertEqual(3+2,6);
end
end
end
The fatal assertion failure in testFour causes the framework to halt and throw an
error. In this example, there are no subsequent tests. If there was a subsequent test, the
framework would not run it.
Add Plugin to Test Runner and Run Tests
At the command prompt, create a test suite from the ExampleTest class, and create a
test runner.
Create an instance of myPlugin and add it to the test runner. Run the tests.
p = DiagnosticRecorderPlugin;
runner.addPlugin(p)
Error using ExampleTest/testFour (line 16)

Fatal assertion failed.
With the failed fatal assertion, the framework throws an error, and the test runner does
not return a TestResult object. However, the DiagnosticRecorderPlugin stores
information about the tests preceding and including the test with the failed assertion.
Inspect Diagnostic Information
At the command prompt, view information about the failed tests. The information is
saved in the FailedTestData property of the plugin.
T = p.FailedTestData
32-118
T =
5×6 table
Name Type TestDiagnostics

_______________________ _________________ ______________________________ _______________________
'ExampleTest/testOne' 'Assertion' 'TestDiagnostics not provided' 'assertGreaterThan fail

'ExampleTest/testTwo' 'Verification' 'Not Empty' 'verifyEmpty failed.↵-
'ExampleTest/testTwo' 'Verification' 'Not double' 'verifyClass failed.↵-
'ExampleTest/testThree' 'Assertion' 'Values not equal' 'assertEqual failed.↵-
'ExampleTest/testFour' 'Fatal Assertion' 'TestDiagnostics not provided' 'fatalAssertEqual faile
There are many options to archive or post-process this information. For example, you can
save the variable as a MAT-file or use writetable to write the table to various file
types, such as .txt, .csv, or .xls.
View the stack information for the third test failure
T.Stack(3)
ans =
struct with fields:
file: 'C:\Work\ExampleTest.m'
name: 'ExampleTest.testTwo'
line: 9
Display the diagnostics that the framework displayed for the fifth test failure.
celldisp(T.FrameworkDiagnostics(5))
ans{1} =
fatalAssertEqual failed.
--> The values are not equal using "isequaln".
--> Failure table:
Actual Expected Error RelativeError
______ ________ _____ __________________
5 6 -1 -0.166666666666667
Actual Value:
5
32-119
32 Unit Testing
Expected Value:
6
See Also
Related Examples
32-120
Plugin to Generate Custom Test Output Format

This example shows how to create a plugin that uses a custom format to write finalized
test results to an output stream.
Create Plugin
In a file in your working folder, create a class, ExampleCustomPlugin, that inherits

from the matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin class. In the plugin class:
• Define a Stream property on the plugin that stores the OutputStream instance. By
default, the plugin writes to standard output.
• Override the default runTestSuite method of TestRunnerPlugin to output text
that indicates the test runner is running a new test session. This information is
especially useful if you are writing to a single log file, as it allows you to differentiate
the test runs.
• Override the default reportFinalizedResult method of TestRunnerPlugin to
write finalized test results to the output stream. You can modify the print method to
output the test results in a format that works for your test logs or continuous
integration system.
classdef ExampleCustomPlugin < matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin
Stream
end
methods
function p = ExampleCustomPlugin(stream)
if ~nargin
stream = matlab.unittest.plugins.ToStandardOutput;
end
validateattributes(stream,...
{'matlab.unittest.plugins.OutputStream'},{})
p.Stream = stream;
end
end
function runTestSuite(plugin,pluginData)
plugin.Stream.print('\n--- NEW TEST SESSION at %s ---\n',...
char(datetime))
runTestSuite@...
32-121
32 Unit Testing
matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin(plugin,pluginData);
end
function reportFinalizedResult(plugin,pluginData)
thisResult = pluginData.TestResult;
if thisResult.Passed
status = 'PASSED';
elseif thisResult.Failed
status = 'FAILED';
elseif thisResult.Incomplete
status = 'SKIPPED';
end
plugin.Stream.print(...
'### YPS Company - Test %s ### - %s in %f seconds.\n',...
status,thisResult.Name,thisResult.Duration)
reportFinalizedResult@...
matlab.unittest.plugins.TestRunnerPlugin(plugin,pluginData)
end
end
end
Create Test Class
class. In this test class, two of the tests pass and the others result in a verification or
assumption failure.

methods(Test)
function testOne(testCase)
testCase.assertGreaterThan(5,1)
end
function testTwo(testCase)
wrongAnswer = 'wrong';
testCase.verifyEmpty(wrongAnswer,'Not Empty')
testCase.verifyClass(wrongAnswer,'double','Not double')
end
function testThree(testCase)
testCase.assumeEqual(7*2,13,'Values not equal')
end
function testFour(testCase)
testCase.verifyEqual(3+2,5);
end
32-122
end
end
Add Plugin to Test Runner and Run Tests
At the command prompt, create a test suite from the ExampleTest class, and create a
test runner.
Create an instance of ExampleCustomPlugin and add it to the test runner. Run the
tests.
import matlab.unittest.plugins.ToFile
fname = 'YPS_test_results.txt';
p = ExampleCustomPlugin(ToFile(fname));
runner.addPlugin(p)
View the contents of the output file.

type(fname)
--- NEW TEST SESSION at 26-Jan-2015 10:41:24 ---

### YPS Company - Test PASSED ### - ExampleTest/testOne in 0.123284 seconds.
### YPS Company - Test FAILED ### - ExampleTest/testTwo in 0.090363 seconds.
### YPS Company - Test SKIPPED ### - ExampleTest/testThree in 0.518044 seconds.
### YPS Company - Test PASSED ### - ExampleTest/testFour in 0.020599 seconds.
Rerun the Incomplete tests using the same test runner. View the contents of the output
file.
suiteFiltered = suite([result.Incomplete]);
result2 = runner.run(suiteFiltered);
type(fname)
32-123
32 Unit Testing
### YPS Company - Test PASSED ### - ExampleTest/testOne in 0.123284 seconds.

### YPS Company - Test FAILED ### - ExampleTest/testTwo in 0.090363 seconds.
### YPS Company - Test PASSED ### - ExampleTest/testFour in 0.020599 seconds.

See Also
ToFile | ToStandardOutput | matlab.unittest.plugins.OutputStream |
Related Examples
32-124
Analyze Test Case Results

This example shows how to analyze the information returned by a test runner created
from the SolverTest test case.
Create Quadratic Solver Function
Create the following function that solves roots of the quadratic equation in a file,
quadraticSolver.m, in your working folder.
type quadraticSolver.m


end
roots(1) = (-b + sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);

roots(2) = (-b - sqrt(b^2 - 4*a*c)) / (2*a);
end
Create Test for Quadratic Solver Function
Create the following test class in a file, SolverTest.m, in your working folder.
type SolverTest.m

% a*x^2 + b*x + c = 0
methods (Test)
end
32-125
32 Unit Testing

end
end
end
Run SolverTest Test Case
Create a test suite, quadTests.
quadTests = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromClass(?SolverTest);
result = run(quadTests);
Running SolverTest
..
Done SolverTest
__________
All tests passed.
Explore Output Argument, result
The output argument, result, is a matlab.unittest.TestResult object. It contains

information of the two tests in SolverTest.
whos result
result 1x2 498 matlab.unittest.TestResult
Display Information for One Test
To see the information for one value, type:

result(1)
ans =
Name: 'SolverTest/testRealSolution'
Passed: 1
Failed: 0
Incomplete: 0
32-126
Duration: 0.9214
Totals:
Create Table of Test Results
To access functionality available to tables, create one from the TestResult object.
rt = table(result)
rt=2x6 table
__________________________________ ______ ______ __________ ________
'SolverTest/testRealSolution' true false false 0.92138

'SolverTest/testImaginarySolution' true false false 0.032093
Sort the test results by duration.

sortrows(rt,'Duration')
ans=2x6 table
__________________________________ ______ ______ __________ ________
'SolverTest/testImaginarySolution' true false false 0.032093

'SolverTest/testRealSolution' true false false 0.92138
Export test results to a CSV file.
32-127
32 Unit Testing
writetable(rt,'myTestResults.csv','QuoteStrings',true)
See Also
Related Examples
32-128
Analyze Failed Test Results

This example shows how to identify and rerun failed tests.
Create an Incorrect Test Method
Using the SolverTest test case, add a method, testBadRealSolution. This test,
based on testRealSolution, calls the quadraticSolver function with inputs 1,3,2,
but tests the results against an incorrect solution, [2,1].
function testBadRealSolution(testCase)
end
Run New Test Suite
Save the updated SolverTest class definition and rerun the tests.
quadTests = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromClass(?SolverTest);
result1 = run(quadTests);
Running SolverTest
..
================================================================================
Verification failed in SolverTest/testBadRealSolution.
---------------------
---------------------
verifyEqual failed.
--> The values are not equal using "isequaln".
--> Failure table:
Index Actual Expected Error RelativeError
_____ ______ ________ _____ _____________
1 -1 2 -3 -1.5
2 -2 1 -3 -3
Actual Value:
-1 -2
Expected Value:
2 1
32-129
32 Unit Testing
------------------
Stack Information:
------------------
In C:\work\SolverTest.m (SolverTest.testBadRealSolution) at 19
================================================================================
.
Done SolverTest
__________
Failure Summary:

=============================================================================
SolverTest/testBadRealSolution X Failed by verification.
Analyze Results
The output tells you SolverTest/testBadRealSolution failed. From the Framework

Diagnostic you see the following:
Actual Value:
-1 -2
Expected Value:
2 1
At this point, you must decide if the error is in quadraticSolver or in your value for
expSolution.
Correct Error
Edit the value of expSolution in testBadRealSolution:

expSolution = [-1 -2];
Rerun Tests
Save SolverTest and rerun only the failed tests.

failedTests = quadTests([result1.Failed]);
result2 = run(failedTests)
Running SolverTest
.
Done SolverTest
32-130
__________
result2 =
Name: 'SolverTest/testBadRealSolution'
Passed: 1
Failed: 0
Incomplete: 0
Duration: 0.0108
Totals:
32-131
32 Unit Testing
Dynamically Filtered Tests

In this section...
“Test Methods” on page 32-132
“Method Setup and Teardown Code” on page 32-135
“Class Setup and Teardown Code” on page 32-137
Assumption failures produce filtered tests. In the matlab.unittest.TestResult

class, such a test is marked Incomplete.
Since filtering test content through the use of assumptions does not produce test failures,
it has the possibility of creating dead test code. Avoiding this requires monitoring of
filtered tests.
Test Methods
If an assumption failure is encountered inside of a TestCase method with the Test
attribute, the entire method is marked as filtered, but MATLAB runs the subsequent
Test methods.
The following class contains an assumption failure in one of the methods in the Test
block.
methods(Test)
function testA(testCase)
testCase.verifyTrue(true)
end
function testB(testCase)
testCase.assumeEqual(0,1)
% remaining test code is not exercised
end
function testC(testCase)
testCase.verifyFalse(true)
end
end
end
Since the testB method contains an assumption failure, when you run the test, the
testing framework filters that test and marks it as incomplete. After the assumption
32-132
failure in testB, the testing framework proceeds and executes testC, which contains a
verification failure.
ts = matlab.unittest.TestSuite.fromClass(?ExampleTest);
res = ts.run;
Running ExampleTest
.
================================================================================
ExampleTest/testB was filtered.
Details
================================================================================
.
================================================================================
Verification failed in ExampleTest/testC.
---------------------
---------------------
verifyFalse failed.
--> The value must evaluate to "false".
Actual logical:
1
------------------
Stack Information:
------------------
In C:\work\ExampleTest.m (ExampleTest.testC) at 11
================================================================================
.
Done ExampleTest
__________
Failure Summary:

================================================================
ExampleTest/testB X Filtered by assumption.
----------------------------------------------------------------
ExampleTest/testC X Failed by verification.
If you examine the TestResult, you notice that there is a passed test, a failed test, and
a test that did not complete due to an assumption failure.
32-133
32 Unit Testing
res
res =
1×3 TestResult array with properties:
Name
Passed
Failed
Incomplete
Duration
Details
Totals:
The testing framework keeps track of incomplete tests so that you can monitor filtered
tests for nonexercised test code. You can see information about these tests within the
TestResult object.
res([res.Incomplete])
ans =
Name: 'ExampleTest/testB'
Passed: 0
Failed: 0
Incomplete: 1
Duration: 2.2578
Details: [1×1 struct]
Totals:
To create a modified test suite from only the filtered tests, select incomplete tests from
the original test suite.
tsFiltered = ts([res.Incomplete])
tsFiltered =
32-134
Test with properties:
Name: 'ExampleTest/testB'
BaseFolder: 'C:\work'
ProcedureName: 'testB'
SharedTestFixtures: [0×0 matlab.unittest.fixtures.EmptyFixture]
Parameterization: [0×0 matlab.unittest.parameters.EmptyParameter]
Tags: {1×0 cell}
Tests Include:
0 Parameterizations, 0 Shared Test Fixture Classes, 0 Tags.
Method Setup and Teardown Code

If an assumption failure is encountered inside a TestCase method with the
TestMethodSetup attribute, MATLAB filters the method which was to be run for that
instance. If a test uses assumptions from within the TestMethodSetup block, consider
instead using the assumptions in the TestClassSetup block, which likewise filters all
Test methods in the class but is less verbose and more efficient.
One of the methods in the following TestMethodSetup block within ExampleTest.m

contains an assumption failure.
function setupMethod1(testCase)
end
disp('* Running setupMethod2 *')
testCase.assertEqual(1,1)
end
end
Updated ExampleTest Class Definition

end
32-135
32 Unit Testing

end
end
methods(Test)
end
end
end
end
end
When you run the test, you see that the framework completes executes all the methods in
the TestMethodSetup block that do not contain the assumption failure, and it marks as
incomplete all methods in the Test block.
res = ts.run;
Running ExampleTest
================================================================================
ExampleTest/testA was filtered.
Details
================================================================================
* Running setupMethod2 *
.
================================================================================
ExampleTest/testB was filtered.
Details
================================================================================
.
================================================================================
ExampleTest/testC was filtered.
Details
================================================================================
32-136
.
Done ExampleTest
__________
Failure Summary:

================================================================
ExampleTest/testA X Filtered by assumption.
----------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------
ExampleTest/testC X Filtered by assumption.
The Test methods did not change but all 3 are filtered due to an assumption failure in
the TestMethodSetup block. The testing framework executes methods in the
TestMethodSetup block without assumption failures, such as setupMethod2. As
expected, the testing framework executes setupMethod2 3 times, once before each Test
method.
Class Setup and Teardown Code

If an assumption failure is encountered inside of a TestCase method with the
TestClassSetup or TestClassTeardown attribute, MATLAB filters the entire
TestCase class.
The methods in the following TestClassSetup block within ExampleTest.m contains

an assumption failure.
methods(TestClassSetup)
function setupClass(testCase)
end
end
Updated ExampleTest Class Definition

methods(TestClassSetup)
function setupClass(testCase)
32-137
32 Unit Testing
end
end
end
end
end
methods(Test)
end
end
end
end
end
When you run the test, you see that the framework does not execute any of the methods
in the TestMethodSetup or Test.
res = ts.run;
Running ExampleTest
================================================================================
All tests in ExampleTest were filtered.
Details
================================================================================
Done ExampleTest
__________
Failure Summary:
32-138
See Also

================================================================
ExampleTest/testA X Filtered by assumption.
----------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------
ExampleTest/testC X Filtered by assumption.
The Test and TestMethodSetup methods did not change but everything is filtered due
to an assumption failure in the TestClassSetup block.
See Also
TestCase | TestResult | matlab.unittest.qualifications.Assumable
32-139
32 Unit Testing
Create Custom Constraint

This example shows how to create a custom constraint that determines if a given value is
the same size as an expected value.
In a file in your working folder, create a HasSameSizeAs.m. The constructor accepts a

value to compare to the actual size. This value is stored within the
ValueWithExpectedSize property. Since, it is recommended that Constraint
implementations are immutable, set the property SetAccess=immutable.
classdef HasSameSizeAs < matlab.unittest.constraints.Constraint
properties(SetAccess=immutable)
ValueWithExpectedSize
end
methods
function constraint = HasSameSizeAs(value)
constraint.ValueWithExpectedSize = value;
end
end
end
Classes that derive from Constraint must implement the satisfiedBy method. This
method must contain the comparison logic and return a boolean value.
Include the satisfiedBy method in the methods block in HasSameSizeAs.m.
function bool = satisfiedBy(constraint, actual)

bool = isequal(size(actual), size(constraint.ValueWithExpectedSize));
end
If the actual size and expected size are equal, this method returns true.
Classes deriving from Constraint must implement the getDiagnosticFor method.

This method must evaluate the actual value against the constraint and provide a
Diagnostic object. In this example, getDiagnosticFor returns a
StringDiagnostic. Include the getDiagnosticFor method in the methods block in
HasSameSizeAs.m.
function diag = getDiagnosticFor(constraint, actual)

import matlab.unittest.diagnostics.StringDiagnostic
32-140
Create Custom Constraint
if constraint.satisfiedBy(actual)
diag = StringDiagnostic('HasSameSizeAs passed.');
else
diag = StringDiagnostic(sprintf(...
'HasSameSizeAs failed.\nActual Size: [%s]\nExpectedSize: [%s]',...
int2str(size(actual)),...
int2str(size(constraint.ValueWithExpectedSize))));
end
end
HasSameSizeAs Class Definition Summary

classdef HasSameSizeAs < matlab.unittest.constraints.Constraint
end
methods
end
end
else
end
end
end
end
At the command prompt, create a test case for interactive testing.

import matlab.unittest.TestCase
testCase = TestCase.forInteractiveUse;
Test a passing case.

testCase.verifyThat(zeros(5), HasSameSizeAs(repmat(1,5)))
Interactive verification passed.
Test a failing case.
32-141
32 Unit Testing
testCase.verifyThat(zeros(5), HasSameSizeAs(ones(1,5)))
Interactive verification failed.
---------------------
---------------------
HasSameSizeAs failed.
Actual Size: [5 5]
ExpectedSize: [1 5]
See Also
matlab.unittest.constraints.Constraint
Related Examples
• “Create Custom Boolean Constraint” on page 32-143
32-142
Create Custom Boolean Constraint
Create Custom Boolean Constraint

This example shows how to create a custom boolean constraint that determines if a given
value is the same size as an expected value.
In a file in your working folder, create a file HasSameSizeAs.m. The constructor accepts
a value to compare to the actual size. This value is stored within the
ValueWithExpectedSize property. It is recommended that BooleanConstraint
implementations be immutable, so set the property SetAccess=immutable.
classdef HasSameSizeAs < matlab.unittest.constraints.BooleanConstraint
end
methods
end
end
end
Include these methods in the methods block in HasSameSizeAs.m. Since the

BooleanConstraint class is a subclass of Constraint, classes that derive from it must
implement the satisfiedBy and getDiagnosticFor methods. For more information
about these methods, see matlab.unittest.constraints.Constraint.
methods
end
else
end
end
end
Include the getNegativeDiagnosticFor method in the methods block with protected

access in HasSameSizeAs.m. Classes that derive from BooleanConstraint must
implement the getNegativeDiagnosticFor method. This method must provide a
Diagnostic object that is expressed in the negative sense of the constraint.
methods(Access=protected)
function diag = getNegativeDiagnosticFor(constraint, actual)
32-143
32 Unit Testing
['Negated HasSameSizeAs failed.\nSize [%s] of ' ...
'Actual Value and Expected Value were the same ' ...
'but should not have been.'], int2str(size(actual))));
else
diag = StringDiagnostic('Negated HasSameSizeAs passed.');
end
end
end
In exchange for implementing the required methods, the constraint inherits the
appropriate and, or, and not overloads so it can be combined with other
BooleanConstraint objects or negated.
HasSameSizeAs Class Definition Summary

classdef HasSameSizeAs < matlab.unittest.constraints.BooleanConstraint
end
methods
end
end
else
int2str(size(actual)), ...
end
end
end
methods(Access=protected)
function diag = getNegativeDiagnosticFor(constraint, actual)
['Negated HasSameSizeAs failed.\nSize [%s] of ' ...
'Actual Value and Expected Value were the same ' ...
'but should not have been.'], int2str(size(actual))));
else
diag = StringDiagnostic('Negated HasSameSizeAs passed.');
end
end
end
end
At the command prompt, create a test case for interactive testing.
32-144
See Also
import matlab.unittest.constraints.HasLength
Test a passing case.
testCase.verifyThat(zeros(5), HasLength(5) | ~HasSameSizeAs(repmat(1,5)))
The test passes because one of the or conditions, HasLength(5), is true.
Test a failing case.
testCase.verifyThat(zeros(5), HasLength(5) & ~HasSameSizeAs(repmat(1,5)))
---------------------
---------------------
AndConstraint failed.
--> + [First Condition]:
| HasLength passed.
--> AND
+ [Second Condition]:
| Negated HasSameSizeAs failed.
| Size [5 5] of Actual Value and Expected Value were the same but should not ha
-+---------------------
The test fails because one of the and conditions, ~HasSameSizeAs(repmat(1,5)), is

false.
See Also
matlab.unittest.constraints.BooleanConstraint
Related Examples
• “Create Custom Constraint” on page 32-140
32-145
32 Unit Testing
Create Custom Tolerance

This example shows how to create a custom tolerance to determine if two DNA sequences
have a Hamming distance within a specified tolerance. For two DNA sequences of the
same length, the Hamming distance is the number of positions in which the nucleotides
(letters) of one sequence differ from the other.
In a file, DNA.m, in your working folder, create a simple class for a DNA sequence.
classdef DNA
Sequence
end
methods
function dna = DNA(sequence)
validLetters = ...
sequence == 'A' | ...
sequence == 'C' | ...
sequence == 'T' | ...
sequence == 'G';
if ~all(validLetters(:))
error('Sequence contained a letter not found in DNA.')
end
dna.Sequence = sequence;
end
end
end
In a file in your working folder, create a tolerance class so that you can test that DNA
sequences are within a specified Hamming distance. The constructor requires a Value
property that defines the maximum Hamming distance.
classdef HammingDistance < matlab.unittest.constraints.Tolerance

properties
Value
end
methods
function tolerance = HammingDistance(value)
tolerance.Value = value;
end
32-146
end
end
In a methods block with the HammingDistance class definition, include the following
method so that the tolerance supports DNA objects. Tolerance classes must implement a
supports method.
methods
function tf = supports(~, value)
tf = isa(value, 'DNA');
end
end
In a methods block with the HammingDistance class definition, include the following
method that returns true or false. Tolerance classes must implement a satisfiedBy
method. The testing framework uses this method to determine if two values are within
the tolerance.
methods
function tf = satisfiedBy(tolerance, actual, expected)
if ~isSameSize(actual.Sequence, expected.Sequence)
tf = false;
return
end
tf = hammingDistance(actual.Sequence,expected.Sequence) <= tolerance.Value;
end
end
In the HammingDistance.m file, define the following helper functions outside of the
classdef block. The isSameSize function returns true if two DNA sequences are the
same size, and the hammingDistance function returns the Hamming distance between
two sequences.
function tf = isSameSize(str1, str2)

tf = isequal(size(str1), size(str2));
end
function distance = hammingDistance(str1, str2)

distance = nnz(str1 ~= str2);
end
The function returns a Diagnostic object with information about the comparison. In a
methods block with the HammingDistance class definition, include the following
32-147
32 Unit Testing
method that returns a StringDiagnostic. Tolerance classes must implement a

getDiagosticFor method.
methods
function diag = getDiagnosticFor(tolerance, actual, expected)
str = 'The DNA sequences must be the same length.';
else
str = sprintf('%s%d.\n%s%d.', ...
'The DNA sequences have a Hamming distance of ', ...
hammingDistance(actual.Sequence, expected.Sequence), ...
'The allowable distance is ', ...
tolerance.Value);
end
diag = StringDiagnostic(str);
end
end
HammingDistance Class Definition Summary

classdef HammingDistance < matlab.unittest.constraints.Tolerance
properties
Value
end
methods
function tolerance = HammingDistance(value)
tolerance.Value = value;
end
function tf = supports(~, value)

tf = isa(value, 'DNA');
end
function tf = satisfiedBy(tolerance, actual, expected)

tf = false;
return
end
tf = hammingDistance(actual.Sequence,expected.Sequence) <= tolerance.Value;
end
function diag = getDiagnosticFor(tolerance, actual, expected)
32-148
str = 'The DNA sequences must be the same length.';
else
str = sprintf('%s%d.\n%s%d.', ...
'The DNA sequences have a Hamming distance of ', ...
hammingDistance(actual.Sequence, expected.Sequence), ...
'The allowable distance is ', ...
tolerance.Value);
end
diag = StringDiagnostic(str);
end
end
end
function tf = isSameSize(str1, str2)

tf = isequal(size(str1), size(str2));
end
function distance = hammingDistance(str1, str2)

distance = nnz(str1 ~= str2);
end
At the command prompt, create a TestCase for interactive testing.
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsEqualTo
Create two DNA objects.

sampleA = DNA('ACCTGAGTA');
sampleB = DNA('ACCACAGTA');
Verify that the DNA sequences are equal to each other.

testCase.verifyThat(sampleA, IsEqualTo(sampleB))
---------------------
---------------------
32-149
32 Unit Testing
IsEqualTo failed.
--> ObjectComparator failed.
--> The objects are not equal using "isequal".
Actual Object:
DNA with properties:
Sequence: 'ACCTGAGTA'
Expected Object:
Sequence: 'ACCACAGTA'
Verify that the DNA sequences are equal to each other within a Hamming distance of 1.
testCase.verifyThat(sampleA, IsEqualTo(sampleB,...
'Within', HammingDistance(1)))
---------------------
---------------------
IsEqualTo failed.
--> ObjectComparator failed.
--> The objects are not equal using "isequal".
--> The DNA sequences have a Hamming distance of 2.
The allowable distance is 1.
Actual Object:
Sequence: 'ACCTGAGTA'
Expected Object:
Sequence: 'ACCACAGTA'
The sequences are not equal to each other within a tolerance of 1. The testing framework
displays additional diagnostics from the getDiagnosticFor method.
Verify that the DNA sequences are equal to each other within a Hamming distance of 2.
testCase.verifyThat(sampleA, IsEqualTo(sampleB,...
'Within', HammingDistance(2)))
32-150
See Also
See Also
matlab.unittest.constraints.Tolerance
32-151
32 Unit Testing
Overview of Performance Testing Framework

In this section...
“Determine Bounds of Measured Code” on page 32-152
“Types of Time Experiments” on page 32-153
“Write Performance Tests with Measurement Boundaries” on page 32-154
“Run Performance Tests” on page 32-155
“Understand Invalid Test Results” on page 32-155
The performance test interface leverages the script, function, and class-based unit
testing interfaces. You can perform qualifications within your performance tests to
ensure correct functional behavior while measuring code performance. Also, you can run
your performance tests as standard regression tests to ensure that code changes do not
break performance tests.
Determine Bounds of Measured Code

This table indicates what code is measured for the different types of tests.
Type of Test What Is Measured What Is Excluded
Script-based Code in each section of the • Code in the shared
script variables section
• Measured estimate of
the framework overhead
Function-based Code in each test function • Code in the following
functions: setup,
setupOnce, teardown,
and teardownOnce
32-152
Type of Test What Is Measured What Is Excluded

Class-based Code in each method tagged • Code in the methods
with the Test attribute with the following
attributes:
TestMethodSetup,
TestMethodTeardown,
TestClassSetup, and
TestClassTeardown
• Shared fixture setup and
teardown
Class-based deriving from Code between calls to • Code outside of the
matlab.perftest.TestCa startMeasuring and startMeasuring/
se and using stopMeasuring in each stopMeasuring
startMeasuring and method tagged with the boundary
stopMeasuring methods Test attribute • Measured estimate of
Types of Time Experiments

You can create two types of time experiments.
• A frequentist time experiment collects a variable number of measurements to achieve

a specified margin of error and confidence level. Use a frequentist time experiment to
define statistical objectives for your measurement samples. Generate this experiment
using the runperf function or the limitingSamplingError static method of the
TimeExperiment class.
• A fixed time experiment collects a fixed number of measurements. Use a fixed time
experiment to measure first-time costs of your code or to take explicit control of your
sample size. Generate this experiment using the withFixedSampleSize static
method of the TimeExperiment class.
This table summarizes the differences between the frequentist and fixed time
experiments.
32-153
32 Unit Testing
Frequentist time experiment Fixed time experiment

Warm-up measurements 4 by default, but 0 by default, but
configurable through configurable through
TimeExperiment.limitin TimeExperiment.withFix
gSamplingError edSampleSize
Number of samples Between 4 and 32 by Defined during experiment
default, but configurable construction
through
TimeExperiment.limitin
gSamplingError
Relative margin of error 5% by default, but Not applicable
configurable through
gSamplingError
Confidence level 95% by default, but Not applicable
configurable through
gSamplingError
Framework behavior for Stops measuring a test and Collects specified number of
invalid test result moves to the next one samples
Write Performance Tests with Measurement Boundaries

If your class-based tests derive from matlab.perftest.TestCase instead of
matlab.unittest.TestCase, then you can use the startMeasuring and
stopMeasuring methods multiple times to define boundaries for performance test
measurements. A test method with measurement boundaries must have a call to
startMeasuring that precedes a call to stopMeasuring. If a test method has multiple
calls to startMeasuring and stopMeasuring, then the performance framework
accumulates and sums the measurements. The performance framework does not support
nested measurement boundaries. If you use these methods incorrectly in a Test method
and run the test as a TimeExperiment, then the framework marks the measurement as
invalid. Also, you still can run these performance tests as unit tests. For more
information, see “Test Performance Using Classes” on page 32-163.
32-154
Run Performance Tests

There are two ways to run performance tests:
• Use the runperf function to run the tests. This function uses a variable number of
measurements to reach a sample mean with a 0.05 relative margin of error within a
0.95 confidence level. It runs the tests four times to warm up the code and between 4
and 32 times to collect measurements that meet the statistical objectives.
• Generate an explicit test suite using the testsuite function or the methods in the
TestSuite class, and then create and run a time experiment.
• Use the withFixedSampleSize method of the TimeExperiment class to

construct a time experiment with a fixed number of measurements. You can
specify a fixed number of warm-up measurements and a fixed number of samples.
• Use the limitingSamplingError method of the TimeExperiment class to
construct a time experiment with specified statistical objectives, such as margin of
error and confidence level. Also, you can specify the number of warm-up
measurements and the minimum and maximum number of samples.
You can run your performance tests as regression tests. For more information, see “Run
Tests for Various Workflows” on page 32-97.
Understand Invalid Test Results

In some situations, the MeasurementResult for a test result is marked invalid. A test
result is marked invalid when the performance testing framework sets the Valid
property of the MeasurementResult to false. This invalidation occurs if your test fails
or is filtered. Also, if your test incorrectly uses the startMeasuring and
stopMeasuring methods of matlab.perftest.TestCase, then the
MeasurementResult for that test is marked invalid.
When the performance testing framework encounters an invalid test result, it behaves
differently depending on the type of time experiment:
• If you create a frequentist time experiment, then the framework stops measuring for
that test and moves to the next test.
• If you create a fixed time experiment, then the framework continues collecting the
specified number of samples.
32-155
32 Unit Testing
See Also
matlab.perftest.TimeExperiment |
matlab.unittest.measurement.MeasurementResult | runperf | testsuite
Related Examples
• “Test Performance Using Scripts or Functions” on page 32-157
• “Test Performance Using Classes” on page 32-163
32-156
Test Performance Using Scripts or Functions

This example shows how to create a script or function-based performance test that times
the preallocation of a vector using four different approaches.
Write Performance Test
Create a performance test in a file, preallocationTest.m, in your current working

folder. In this example, you can choose to use either the following script-based test or the
function-based test. The output in this example is for the function-based test. If you use
the script-based test, then your test names will be different.
Script-Based Performance Test Function-Based Performance Test
vectorSize = 1e7; function tests = preallocationTest
%% Ones Function end
x = ones(1,vectorSize);
function testOnes(testCase)
%% Indexing With Variable vectorSize = getSize();
id = 1:vectorSize; x = ones(1,vectorSize());
x(id) = 1; end
%% Indexing On LHS function testIndexingWithVariable(testCase)

x(1:vectorSize) = 1; vectorSize = getSize();
id = 1:vectorSize;
%% For Loop x(id) = 1;
for i=1:vectorSize end
x(i) = 1;
end function testIndexingOnLHS(testCase)
vectorSize = getSize();
x(1:vectorSize) = 1;
end
function testForLoop(testCase)
vectorSize = getSize();
for i=1:vectorSize
x(i) = 1;
end
end
function vectorSize = getSize()

vectorSize = 1e7;
end
32-157
32 Unit Testing
Run Performance Test
Run the performance test. Depending on your system, the warnings you see might vary.
In this example output, the performance testing framework ran the
preallocationTest/testOnes test the maximum number of times, but it did not
achieve a 0.05 relative margin of error with a 0.95 confidence level.
results = runperf('preallocationTest.m')
Running preallocationTest
..........
..........
..........
......Warning: The target Relative Margin of Error was not met after running the MaxSam
....
..........
..........
..........
..........
.....
Done preallocationTest
__________
results =
1x4 MeasurementResult array with properties:
Name
Valid
Samples
TestActivity
Totals:
4 Valid, 0 Invalid.
The results variable is a 1x4 MeasurementResult array. Each element in the array
corresponds to one of the tests defined in the code section in preallocationTest.m.
Display Test Results
Display the measurement results for the second test. Your results might vary.
results(2)
32-158
ans =
MeasurementResult with properties:
Name: 'preallocationTest/testIndexingWithVariable'
Valid: 1
Samples: [17x7 table]
TestActivity: [21x12 table]
Totals:
1 Valid, 0 Invalid.
As indicated by the size of the TestActivity property, the performance testing

framework collected 21 measurements. This number of measurements includes four
measurements to warm up the code. The Samples property excludes warm-up
measurements.
Display the sample measurements for the second test.

results(2).Samples
ans =
Name MeasuredTime Timestamp

__________________________________________ ____________ ____________________
preallocationTest/testIndexingWithVariable 0.12496 31-Dec-2015 06:29:38

32-159
32 Unit Testing
Compute Statistics for Single Test Element
Display the mean measured time for the second test. To exclude data collected in the
warm-up runs, use the values in the Samples field.
sampleTimes = results(2).Samples.MeasuredTime;
meanTest2 = mean(sampleTimes)
meanTest2 =
0.1391
The performance testing framework collected 17 sample measurements for the second
test. The test took an average of 0.1391 second.
Compute Statistics for All Test Elements
Determine the average time for all the test elements. The preallocationTest test
includes four different methods for allocating a vector of ones. Compare the time for each
method (test element).
Since the performance testing framework returns a Samples table for each test element,
concatenate all these tables into one table. Then group the rows by test element Name,
and compute the mean MeasuredTime for each group.
fullTable = vertcat(results.Samples);
summaryStats = varfun(@mean,fullTable,...
'InputVariables','MeasuredTime','GroupingVariables','Name')
summaryStats =
Name GroupCount mean_MeasuredTime

__________________________________________ __________ _________________
preallocationTest/testOnes 32 0.031445
preallocationTest/testIndexingWithVariable 17 0.13912
preallocationTest/testIndexingOnLHS 23 0.071286
preallocationTest/testForLoop 4 0.80677
Recall that the performance testing framework issued a warning stating that the
measurements for the preallocationTest/testOnes test did not meet the statistical
objectives. The testing framework collected the maximum number of samples, which is
32, and then it stopped the test. By contrast, the measurements for the
32-160
preallocationTest/testForLoop test met statistical objectives in the minimum

number of samples, which is four.
Change Statistical Objectives and Rerun Tests
Change the statistical objectives defined by the runperf function by constructing and
running a time experiment. Construct a time experiment with measurements that reach
a sample mean with an 8% relative margin of error within a 97% confidence level.
Construct an explicit test suite.

suite = testsuite('preallocationTest');
Construct a time experiment with a variable number of sample measurements, and run
the tests.
import matlab.perftest.TimeExperiment
experiment = TimeExperiment.limitingSamplingError('NumWarmups',2,...
'RelativeMarginOfError',0.08, 'ConfidenceLevel', 0.97);
resultsTE = run(experiment,suite);
Running preallocationTest
..........
..........
.......
Done preallocationTest
__________
Compute the statistics for all the test elements.

fullTableTE = vertcat(resultsTE.Samples);
summaryStatsTE = varfun(@mean,fullTableTE,...
summaryStatsTE =

__________________________________________ __________ _________________
preallocationTest/testOnes 4 0.025568
preallocationTest/testIndexingWithVariable 6 0.12898
32-161
32 Unit Testing
preallocationTest/testIndexingOnLHS 5 0.066603
preallocationTest/testForLoop 4 0.78484
See Also
matlab.perftest.TimeExperiment |
32-162
Test Performance Using Classes

This example shows how to create a performance test and regression test for the
fprintf function.
Write Performance Test
Consider the following unit (regression) test. You can run this test as a performance test
using runperf('fprintfTest') instead of runtests('fprintfTest').
classdef fprintfTest < matlab.unittest.TestCase

properties
file
fid
end
function openFile(testCase)
testCase.file = tempname;
testCase.fid = fopen(testCase.file,'w');
testCase.assertNotEqual(testCase.fid,-1,'IO Problem')
testCase.addTeardown(@delete,testCase.file);
testCase.addTeardown(@fclose,testCase.fid);
end
end
methods(Test)
function testPrintingToFile(testCase)
textToWrite = repmat('abcdef',1,5000000);
fprintf(testCase.fid,'%s',textToWrite);
testCase.verifyEqual(fileread(testCase.file),textToWrite)
end
function testBytesToFile(testCase)
textToWrite = repmat('tests_',1,5000000);
nbytes = fprintf(testCase.fid,'%s',textToWrite);
testCase.verifyEqual(nbytes,length(textToWrite))
end
end
end
The measured time does not include the time to open and close the file or the assertion
because these activities take place inside a TestMethodSetup block, and not inside a
32-163
32 Unit Testing
Test block. However, the measured time includes the time to perform the verifications.
Best practice is to measure a more accurate performance boundary.
Create a performance test in a file, fprintfTest.m, in your current working folder. This
test is similar to the regression test with the following modifications:
• The test inherits from matlab.perftest.TestCase instead of

matlab.unittest.TestCase.
• The test calls the startMeasuring and stopMeasuring methods to create a
boundary around the fprintf function call.
classdef fprintfTest < matlab.perftest.TestCase

properties
file
fid
end
function openFile(testCase)
testCase.file = tempname;
testCase.fid = fopen(testCase.file,'w');
testCase.assertNotEqual(testCase.fid,-1,'IO Problem')
testCase.addTeardown(@delete,testCase.file);
testCase.addTeardown(@fclose,testCase.fid);
end
end
methods(Test)
function testPrintingToFile(testCase)
textToWrite = repmat('abcdef',1,5000000);
testCase.startMeasuring();
fprintf(testCase.fid,'%s',textToWrite);
testCase.stopMeasuring();
testCase.verifyEqual(fileread(testCase.file),textToWrite)
end
function testBytesToFile(testCase)
textToWrite = repmat('tests_',1,5000000);
testCase.startMeasuring();
nbytes = fprintf(testCase.fid,'%s',textToWrite);
32-164
testCase.stopMeasuring();
testCase.verifyEqual(nbytes,length(textToWrite))
end
end
end
The measured time for this performance test includes only the call to fprintf, and the
testing framework still evaluates the qualifications.
Run Performance Test
Run the performance test. Depending on your system, you might see warnings that the
performance testing framework ran the test the maximum number of times, but did not
achieve a 0.05 relative margin of error with a 0.95 confidence level.
results = runperf('fprintfTest');
Running fprintfTest
..........
..........
..........
..........
.....
Done fprintfTest
__________
results =
1x2 MeasurementResult array with properties:
Name
Valid
Samples
TestActivity
Totals:
2 Valid, 0 Invalid.
The results variable is a 1x2 MeasurementResult array. Each element in the array
corresponds to one of the tests defined in the test file.
32-165
32 Unit Testing
Display Test Results
Display the measurement results for the first test. Your results might vary.
results(1)
ans =
MeasurementResult with properties:
Name: 'fprintfTest/testPrintingToFile'
Valid: 1
Samples: [10x7 table]
TestActivity: [14x12 table]
Totals:
1 Valid, 0 Invalid.
As indicated by the size of the TestActivity property, the performance testing

framework collected 14 measurements. This number includes 4 measurements to warm
up the code. The Samples property excludes warm-up measurements.
Display the sample measurements for the first test.

results(1).Samples
ans =
Name MeasuredTime Timestamp Host

______________________________ ____________ ____________________ _________
fprintfTest/testPrintingToFile 0.067772 02-Jan-2016 18:24:52 MY-HOSTNA

32-166
Compute Statistics for Single Test Element
Display the mean measured time for the first test. To exclude data collected in the warm-
up runs, use the values in the Samples field.
sampleTimes = results(1).Samples.MeasuredTime;
meanTest = mean(sampleTimes)
meanTest =
0.0729
Compute Statistics for All Test Elements
Determine the average time for all the test elements. The fprintfTest test includes
two different methods. Compare the time for each method (test element).
Since the performance testing framework returns a Samples table for each test element,
concatenate all these tables into one table. Then group the rows by test element Name,
and compute the mean MeasuredTime for each group.
fullTable = vertcat(results.Samples);
summaryStats = varfun(@mean,fullTable,...
summaryStats =

______________________________ __________ _________________
fprintfTest/testPrintingToFile 10 0.072904
fprintfTest/testBytesToFile 27 0.079338
Both test methods write the same amount of data to a file. Therefore, some of the
difference between the mean values is attributed to calling the fprintf function with an
output argument.
Change Statistical Objectives and Rerun Tests
Change the statistical objectives defined by the runperf function by constructing and
running a time experiment. Construct a time experiment with measurements that reach
a sample mean with a 3% relative margin of error within a 97% confidence level. Collect
eight warm-up measurements.
32-167
32 Unit Testing
Construct an explicit test suite.

suite = testsuite('fprintfTest');
Construct a time experiment with a variable number of sample measurements, and run
the tests.
'RelativeMarginOfError',0.03, 'ConfidenceLevel', 0.97);
Running fprintfTest
..........
..........
..........
..........Warning: The target Relative Margin of Error was not met after running the Ma
fprintfTest/testPrintingToFile.
..........
..........
..........
..........Warning: The target Relative Margin of Error was not met after running the Ma
fprintfTest/testBytesToFile.
Done fprintfTest
__________
In this example output, the performance testing framework is not able to meet the
stricter statistical objectives with the default number of maximum samples. Your results
might vary.

summaryStatsTE =

______________________________ __________ _________________
32-168
Increase the maximum number of samples to 100 and rerun the time experiment.
'RelativeMarginOfError',0.03,'ConfidenceLevel',0.97,'MaxSamples',100);
Running fprintfTest
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..
Done fprintfTest
__________
summaryStatsTE =

______________________________ __________ _________________
The testing framework achieves the statistical objectives for both tests in approximately
50 samples.
Measure First-time Cost
Start a new MATLAB session. A new session ensures that MATLAB has not run the code
contained in your tests.
32-169
32 Unit Testing
Measure the first-time cost of your code by creating and running a fixed time experiment
with zero warm-up measurements and one sample measurement.
Construct an explicit test suite. Since you are measuring the first-time cost of the
function, run a single test. To run multiple tests, save the results and start a new
MATLAB session between tests.
suite = testsuite('fprintfTest/testPrintingToFile');
Construct and run the time experiment.

experiment = TimeExperiment.withFixedSampleSize(1);
results = run(experiment,suite);
Running fprintfTest
.
Done fprintfTest
__________
Display the results. Observe the TestActivity table to ensure there are no warm-up
samples.
fullTable = results.TestActivity
fullTable =
Name Passed Failed Incomplete MeasuredTime

______________________________ ______ ______ __________ ____________
fprintfTest/testPrintingToFile true false false 0.065501
The performance testing framework collects one sample for each test.
See Also
matlab.perftest.TestCase | matlab.perftest.TimeExperiment |
32-170
Create Mock Object
Create Mock Object

When unit testing, you are often interested in testing a portion of a complete system,
isolated from the components it depends on. To test a portion of the system, we can
substitute mock objects to replace the depended-on components. A mock object
implements at least part of the same interface as the production object, but often in a
manner that is simple, efficient, predictable, and controllable. When you use the mocking
framework, the component under test is unaware of whether its collaborator is a "real"
object or a mock object.
For example, suppose you want to test an algorithm for buying stock, but you do not
want to test the entire system. You could use a mock object to replace the functionality of
looking up the stock price, and another mock object to verify that the trader purchased
the stock. The algorithm you are testing does not know that it is operating on mock
objects, and you can test the algorithm isolated from the rest of the system.
32-171
32 Unit Testing
Using a mock object, you can define behavior (a process known as stubbing). For
example, you can specify that an object produces predefined responses to queries. You
can also intercept and remember messages sent from the component under test to the
mock object (a process known as spying). For example, you can verify that a particular
method was called or a property was set.
The typical workflow to test a component in isolation is as follows:
1 Create mocks for the depended-on components.

2 Define behaviors of the mocks. For example, define the outputs that a mocked
method or property returns when it is called with a particular set of inputs.
3 Test the component of interest.
4 Qualify interactions between the component of interest and the mocked components.
For example, verify that a mocked method was called with particular inputs, or that
a property was set.
Depended on Components
In this example, the component under test is a simple day-trading algorithm. It is the
part of the system you want to test independent of other components. The day-trading
algorithm has two dependencies: a data service to retrieve the stock price data and a
broker to purchase the stock.
In a file DataService.m in your current working folder, create an abstract class that
includes a lookupPrice method.
classdef DataService
methods (Abstract,Static)
price = lookupPrice(ticker,date)
end
end
In production code, there could be several concrete implementations of the DataService

class, such as a BloombergDataService class. This class uses the Datafeed Toolbox™.
However, since we create a mock of the DataService class, you do not need to have the
toolbox installed to run the tests for the trading algorithm.
classdef BloombergDataService < DataService
32-172
Create Mock Object
methods (Static)
function price = lookupPrice(ticker,date)
% This method assumes you have installed and configured the
% Bloomberg software.
conn = blp;
data = history(conn,ticker,'LAST_PRICE',date-1,date);
price = data(end);
close(conn)
end
end
end
In this example, assume that the broker component has not been developed yet. Once it
is implemented, it will have a buy method that accepts a ticker symbol and a specified
number of shares to buy, and returns a status code. The mock for the broker component
uses an implicit interface, and does not derive from a superclass.
Component Under Test
In a file trader.m in your current working folder, create a simple day trading algorithm.
The trader function accepts as inputs a data service object that looks up the price of the
stock, a broker object that defines how the stock is bought, a ticker symbol, and a number
of shares to purchase. If the price from yesterday is less than the price two days ago,
instruct the broker to buy the specified number of shares.
function trader(dataService,broker,ticker,numShares)
yesterday = datetime('yesterday');
priceYesterday = dataService.lookupPrice(ticker,yesterday);
price2DaysAgo = dataService.lookupPrice(ticker,yesterday-days(1));
if priceYesterday < price2DaysAgo

broker.buy(ticker,numShares);
end
end
Mock Objects and Behavior Objects
The mock object is an implementation of the abstract methods and properties of the
interface specified by a superclass. You can also construct a mock without a superclass,
in which case the mock has an implicit interface. The mock object carries out the actions
for the component under test, such as calling a method or accessing a property.
32-173
32 Unit Testing
When you create a mock, you also create an associated behavior object. The behavior
object defines the same methods as the mock object and controls mock behavior. Use the
behavior object to define mock actions and qualify interactions. For example, use it to
define values a mocked method returns, or verify that a property was accessed.
At the command prompt, create a mock test case for interactive use. Using the mock in a
test class instead of at the command prompt is presented later in this example.
import matlab.mock.TestCase
Create Stub to Define Behavior
Create a mock for the data service dependency and examine the methods on it. The data
service mock returns predefined values, replacing the implementation of the service that
provides actual stock prices. Therefore, it exhibits stubbing behavior.
[stubDataService,dataServiceBehavior] = createMock(testCase,?DataService);
methods(stubDataService)
Methods for class matlab.mock.classes.DataServiceMock:
Static methods:
lookupPrice
In the DataService class, the lookupPrice method is abstract and static. The mocking
framework implements this method as concrete and static.
Define behavior for the data service mock. For ticker symbol "FOO", it returns the price
yesterday as $123 and anything before yesterday is $234. Therefore, according to the
trader function, the broker always buys stock "FOO". For the ticker symbol "BAR", it
returns the price yesterday as $765 and anything before yesterday is $543. Therefore, the
broker never buys stock "BAR".
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsLessThan
testCase.assignOutputsWhen(dataServiceBehavior.lookupPrice(...
"FOO",yesterday),123);
32-174
Create Mock Object
"FOO",IsLessThan(yesterday)),234);
"BAR",yesterday),765);
"BAR",IsLessThan(yesterday)),543);
You can now call the mocked lookupPrice method.

p1 = stubDataService.lookupPrice("FOO",yesterday)
p2 = stubDataService.lookupPrice("BAR",yesterday-days(5))
p1 =
123
p2 =
543
While the assignOutputsWhen method on testCase is convenient to specify behavior,

there is more functionality if you use the AssignOutputs action. For more information,
see “Specify Mock Object Behavior” on page 32-180.
Create Spy to Intercept Messages
Create a mock for the broker dependency and examine the methods on it. Since the
broker mock is used to verify interactions with the component under test (the trader
function), it exhibits spying behavior. The broker mock has an implicit interface. While
the buy method is not currently implemented, you can create a mock with it.
[spyBroker,brokerBehavior] = createMock(testCase,'AddedMethods',{'buy'});
methods(spyBroker)
Methods for class matlab.mock.classes.Mock:
buy
Call the buy method of the mock. By default it returns empty.
32-175
32 Unit Testing
s1 = spyBroker.buy
s2 = spyBroker.buy("inputs",[13 42])
s1 =
[]
s2 =
[]
Since the trader function does not use the status return code, the default mock behavior
of returning empty is acceptable. The broker mock is a pure spy, and does not need to
implement any stubbing behavior.
Call Component Under Test
Call the trader function. In addition to the ticker symbol and the number of shares to
buy, the trader function takes as inputs the data service and the broker. Instead of
passing in actual data service and broker objects, pass in the spyBroker and
stubDataService mocks.
trader(stubDataService,spyBroker,"FOO",100)
trader(stubDataService,spyBroker,"BAR",100)
Verify Function Interactions
Use the broker behavior object (the spy) to verify that the trader function calls the buy
method, as expected.
Use the TestCase.verifyCalled method to verify that the trader function instructed
the buy method to buy 100 shares of the FOO stock.
import matlab.mock.constraints.WasCalled;
testCase.verifyCalled(brokerBehavior.buy("FOO",100))
Verify that FOO stock was purchased two times, regardless of the specified number of
shares. While the verifyCalled method is convenient to specify behavior, there is more
32-176
Create Mock Object
functionality if you use the WasCalled constraint. For example, you can verify that a
mocked method was called a specified number of times.
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsAnything
testCase.verifyThat(brokerBehavior.buy("FOO",IsAnything), ...
WasCalled('WithCount',2))
Verify that the buy method was not called requesting 100 shares of the BAR stock.
testCase.verifyNotCalled(brokerBehavior.buy("BAR",100))
Although the trader function was called requesting 100 shares of BAR stock, the stub
defined yesterday's price for BAR to return a higher value than all days prior to
yesterday. Therefore, the broker never buys stock "BAR".
Test Class for trader Function
The interactive test case is convenient to experiment with at the command prompt.
However, it is typical to create and use mocks within a test class. In a file in your current
working folder, create the following test class that incorporates the interactive testing
from this example.
classdef TraderTest < matlab.mock.TestCase

methods(Test)
function buysStockWhenDrops(testCase)
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsAnything
import matlab.mock.constraints.WasCalled
% Create mocks
[stubDataService,dataServiceBehavior] = createMock(testCase, ...
?DataService);
[spyBroker,brokerBehavior] = createMock(testCase, ...
'AddedMethods',{'buy'});
% Set up behavior
"FOO",yesterday),123);
32-177
32 Unit Testing
"FOO",IsLessThan(yesterday)),234);
% Call function under test

% Verify interactions
testCase.verifyCalled(brokerBehavior.buy("FOO",100))
testCase.verifyThat(brokerBehavior.buy("FOO",IsAnything), ...
end
function doesNotBuyStockWhenIncreases(testCase)
% Create mocks
[stubDataService,dataServiceBehavior] = createMock(testCase, ...
?DataService);
[spyBroker,brokerBehavior] = createMock(testCase, ...
'AddedMethods',{'buy'});
% Set up behavior
"BAR",yesterday),765);
"BAR",IsLessThan(yesterday)),543);
% Call function under test

trader(stubDataService,spyBroker,"BAR",100)
% Verify interactions
testCase.verifyNotCalled(brokerBehavior.buy("BAR",100))
end
end
end
Run the tests and view a table of the results.

results = runtests('TraderTest');
table(results)
Running TraderTest
..
32-178
See Also
Done TraderTest
__________
ans =
2×6 table
Name Passed Failed Incomplete Dura

_________________________________________ ______ ______ __________ ____
'TraderTest/buysStockWhenDrops' true false false 0.1

'TraderTest/doesNotBuyStockWhenIncreases' true false false 0.06
See Also
32-179
32 Unit Testing
Specify Mock Object Behavior

In this section...
“Define Mock Method Behavior” on page 32-180
“Define Mock Property Behavior” on page 32-182
“Define Repeating and Subsequent Behavior” on page 32-183
“Summary of Behaviors” on page 32-185
When you create a mock, you create an associated behavior object that controls mock
behavior. Use this object to define mock method and property behavior (stub). For more
information on creating a mock, see “Create Mock Object” on page 32-171.
in which case the mock has an implicit interface.
Create a mock with an implicit interface. The interface includes Name and ID properties
and a findUser method that accepts an identifier and returns a name. While
the interface is not currently implemented, you can create a mock with it.
testCase = matlab.mock.TestCase.forInteractiveUse;
[mock,behaviorObj] = testCase.createMock('AddedProperties', ...
{'Name','ID'},'AddedMethods',{'findUser'});
Define Mock Method Behavior

You can specify that a mock method returns specific values or throws an exception in
different situations.
Specify that when the findUser method is called with any inputs, it returns
"Unknown". By default, MATLAB returns an empty array when you call the findUser
method.
• The assignOutputsWhen method defines return values for the method call.
• The mocked method call (behaviorObj.findUser) implicitly creates a
MethodCallBehavior object.
• The withAnyInputs method of the MethodCallBehavior object specifies that the
behavior applies to a method call with any number of inputs with any value.
32-180
testCase.assignOutputsWhen(withAnyInputs(behaviorObj.findUser),"Unknown")
n = mock.findUser(1)
n =
"Unknown"
Specify that when the input value is 1701, the mock method returns "Jim". This
behavior supersedes the return of "Unknown" for the input value of 1701 only because it
was defined after that specification.
testCase.assignOutputsWhen(behaviorObj.findUser(1701),"Jim")
n =
"Jim"
Specify that when the findUser method is called with only the object as input, the mock
method returns "Unspecified ID". The withExactInputs method of the
MethodCallBehavior object specifies that the behavior applies to a method call with
the object as the only input value.
testCase.assignOutputsWhen(withExactInputs(behaviorObj.findUser), ...
"Unspecified ID")
n = mock.findUser % equivalent to n = findUser(mock)
n =
"Unspecified ID"
You can use classes in the matlab.unittest.constraints package to help define

behavior. Specify that findUser throws an exception when it is called with an ID
greater than 5000.
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsGreaterThan
testCase.throwExceptionWhen(behaviorObj.findUser(IsGreaterThan(5000)));
Error using
matlab.mock.internal.MockContext/createMockObject/mockMethodCallback (line 323)
The following method call was specified to throw an exception:
findUser([1×1 matlab.mock.classes.Mock], 5001)
32-181
32 Unit Testing
You can define behavior based on the number of outputs requested in a method call. If
the method call requests two output values, return "??" for the name and -1 for the ID.
testCase.assignOutputsWhen(withNargout(2, ...
withAnyInputs(behaviorObj.findUser)),"??",-1)
[n,id] = mock.findUser(13)
n =
"??"
id =
-1
Define Mock Property Behavior

When a mock property is accessed, you can specify that it returns specific or stored
property values. When it is set, you can specify when the mock store the property value.
You can also define when the testing framework throws an exception for mock property
set or access activities.
When defining mock property behavior, keep in mind that displaying a property value in
the command window is a property access (get) operation.
Similar to defining mock method behavior, defining mock property behavior requires an
instance of the PropertyBehavior class. The framework returns an instance of this
class when you access a mock property. To define access behavior, use an instance of
PropertyGetBehavior by calling the get method of the PropertyBehavior class. To
define set behavior, use an instance of the PropertySetBehavior by calling the set or
setToValue method of the PropertyBehavior class.
Specify that when the Name property is set to any value, the testing framework throws
an exception.
• The throwExceptionWhen method instructs the framework to throw an exception

for a specified behavior.
• Accessing a property on the behavior object PropertyBehavior class
(behaviorObj.Name) creates a PropertyBehavior class instance.
32-182
• The call to the set method of the PropertyBehavior class creates a

PropertySetBehavior.
testCase.throwExceptionWhen(set(behaviorObj.Name))
mock.Name = "Sue";
Error using matlab.mock.internal.MockContext/createMockObject/mockPropertySetCallback (

The following property set was specified to throw an exception:
<Mock>.Name = "Sue"
Allow the mock to store the value when the property is set to "David".
testCase.storeValueWhen(setToValue(behaviorObj.Name,"David"));
mock.Name = "David"
mock =
Mock with properties:
Name: "David"
ID: []
Define Repeating and Subsequent Behavior

The matlab.mock.TestCase methods are convenient for defining behavior. However,
there is more functionality when you use a class in the matlab.mock.actions package
instead. Using these classes, you can define behavior that repeats the same action
multiple times and specify subsequent actions. To define repeating or subsequent
behavior, pass an instance of a class in the matlab.mock.actions package to the when
method of the behavior class.
Assign the value of 1138 to the ID property and then throw an exception for property
access.
import matlab.mock.actions.AssignOutputs
import matlab.mock.actions.ThrowException
when(get(behaviorObj.ID),then(AssignOutputs(1138),ThrowException))
id = mock.ID
id = mock.ID
id =
1138
32-183
32 Unit Testing
Error using matlab.mock.internal.MockContext/createMockObject/mockPropertyGetCallback (

The following property access was specified to throw an exception:
<Mock>.ID
Assign the value of 1138 and then 237 to the ID property. Then, throw an exception for
property access. Each call to the then method accepts up to two actions. To specify more
subsequent actions, use multiple calls to then.
when(get(behaviorObj.ID),then(AssignOutputs(1138), ...
then(AssignOutputs(237),ThrowException)))
id = mock.ID
id = mock.ID
id = mock.ID
id =
1138
id =
237
Error using matlab.mock.internal.MockContext/createMockObject/mockPropertyGetCallback (

The following property access was specified to throw an exception:
<Mock>.ID
If the object is the only input value, specify the findUser function return the value of
"Phil" twice.
when(withExactInputs(behaviorObj.findUser),repeat(2,AssignOutputs("Phil")))
n = mock.findUser
n = mock.findUser
n =
"Phil"
n =
"Phil"
32-184
Call the function a third time. If you repeat an action, and do not follow it with a call to
the then method, the mock continues to return the repeated value.
n = mock.findUser
n =
"Phil"
Define behavior for setting the value of Name. Throw an exception the first two times and
then store the value.
import matlab.mock.actions.StoreValue
when(set(behaviorObj.Name),then(repeat(2,ThrowException),StoreValue))
mock.Name = "John"

<Mock>.Name = "John"
mock.Name = "Penny"

<Mock>.Name = "Penny"
mock.Name = "Tommy"
mock =
Name: "Tommy"
Summary of Behaviors
Behavior TestCase Method matlab.mock.Actions
Class (Allows for Definition of
Repeat and Subsequent
Behavior)
Return specified values for assignOutputsWhen AssignOutputs
method call and property
access.
32-185
32 Unit Testing
Behavior TestCase Method matlab.mock.Actions

Class (Allows for Definition of
Repeat and Subsequent
Behavior)
Return stored value when returnStoredValueWhen ReturnStoredValue
property is accessed.
Store value when property storeValueWhen StoreValue
is set.
Throw exception when throwExceptionWhen ThrowException
method is called or when
property is set or accessed.
See Also
matlab.mock.TestCase | matlab.mock.actions.AssignOutputs |
matlab.mock.actions.ReturnStoredValue | matlab.mock.actions.StoreValue
| matlab.mock.actions.ThrowException
Related Examples
• “Create Mock Object” on page 32-171
32-186
Qualify Mock Object Interaction

When you create a mock, you create an associated behavior object that controls mock
behavior. Use this object to access intercepted messages sent from the component under
test to the mock object (a process known as spying). For more information on creating a
mock, see“Create Mock Object” on page 32-171.
In the mocking framework, qualifications are functions used to test interactions with the
object. There are four types of qualifications:
• Verifications — Produce and record failures without throwing an exception. Since

verifications do not throw exceptions, all test content runs to completion even when
verification failures occur. Typically verifications are the primary qualifications for a
unit test since they typically do not require an early exit from the test. Use other
qualification types to test for violation of preconditions or incorrect test setup.
• Assumptions — Ensure that the test environment meets preconditions that otherwise
do not result in a test failure. Assumption failures result in filtered tests, and the
testing framework marks the tests as Incomplete.
• Assertions — Ensure that a failure condition invalidates the remainder of the current
test content, but does not prevent proper execution of subsequent test methods. A
failure at the assertion point marks the current test method as failed and incomplete.
• Fatal Assertions — Abort the test session upon failure. These qualifications are useful
when the failure mode is so fundamental that there is no point in continuing testing.
These qualifications are also useful when fixture teardown does not restore the
MATLAB state correctly and it is preferable to abort testing and start a fresh session.
in which case the mock has an implicit interface. Create a mock with an implicit
interface for a dice class. The interface includes Color and NumSides properties and a
roll method that accepts a number of dice and returns a value. While the interface is
not currently implemented, you can create a mock with it.
{'NumSides','Color'},'AddedMethods',{'roll'});
32-187
32 Unit Testing
Qualify Mock Method Interaction

Since the mock records interactions sent to it, you can qualify that a mock method was
called. Roll one die.
val = mock.roll(1);
Verify that the roll method was called with 1 die.
testCase.verifyCalled(behaviorObj.roll(1))
Verify that the roll method was called with 3 dice. This test fails.
testCase.verifyCalled(behaviorObj.roll(3), ...
'roll method should have been called with input 3.')
----------------
Test Diagnostic:
----------------
roll method should have been called with input 3.
---------------------
---------------------
verifyCalled failed.
--> Method 'roll' was not called with the specified signature.
--> Observed method call(s) with any signature:
out = roll([1×1 matlab.mock.classes.Mock], 1)
Specified method call:

MethodCallBehavior
[...] = roll(<Mock>, 3)
Verify that the roll method was not called with 2 dice.
testCase.verifyNotCalled(behaviorObj.roll(2))
32-188
Since the withAnyInputs, withExactInputs, and withNargout methods of the

MethodCallBehavior class return MethodCallBehavior objects, you can use them in
qualifications. Verify that the roll method was called at least once with any inputs.
testCase.verifyCalled(withAnyInputs(behaviorObj.roll))
Verify that the roll method was not called with 2 outputs and any inputs.
testCase.verifyNotCalled(withNargout(2,withAnyInputs(behaviorObj.roll)))
Qualify Mock Property Interaction

Similar to method calls, the mock records property set and access operations. Set the
color of the dice.
mock.Color = "red"
mock =
NumSides: []
Color: "red"
Verify that the color was set.

testCase.verifySet(behaviorObj.Color)
Verify the color was accessed. This test passes because there is an implicit property
access when MATLAB displays the object.
testCase.verifyAccessed(behaviorObj.Color)
Assert that the number of sides was not set.

testCase.assertNotSet(behaviorObj.NumSides)
32-189
32 Unit Testing
Interactive assertion passed.
Use Mock Object Constraints

The matlab.mock.TestCase methods are convenient for spying on mock interactions.
However, there is more functionality when you use a class in the
matlab.mock.constraints package instead. To use a constraint, pass the behavior
object and constraint to the verifyThat, assumeThat, assertThat or
fatalAssertThat method.
Create a new mock object.

{'NumSides','Color'},'AddedMethods',{'roll'});
Roll 2 dice. Then use a constraint to verify that the roll method was called at least once
with two dice.
val = mock.roll(2);
import matlab.mock.constraints.WasCalled
testCase.verifyThat(behaviorObj.roll(2),WasCalled)
Roll one die. Then verify that the roll method was called at least twice with any inputs.
val = mock.roll(1);
testCase.verifyThat(withAnyInputs(behaviorObj.roll), ...
Verify that NumSides was not accessed.
import matlab.mock.constraints.WasAccessed
testCase.verifyThat(behaviorObj.NumSides,~WasAccessed)
Set the color of the dice. Then verify the property was set once.
32-190
mock.Color = "blue";
import matlab.mock.constraints.WasSet
testCase.verifyThat(behaviorObj.Color,WasSet('WithCount',1))
Access the Color property. Then verify that it was not accessed exactly once. This test
fails.
c = mock.Color
testCase.verifyThat(behaviorObj.Color,~WasAccessed('WithCount',1))
c =
"blue"
---------------------
---------------------
Negated WasAccessed failed.
--> Property 'Color' was accessed the prohibited number of times.
Actual property access count:

1
Prohibited property access count:
1
Specified property access:

PropertyGetBehavior
<Mock>.Color
Set the number of sides. Then, verify that the number of sides was set to 22.
mock.NumSides = 22;
testCase.verifyThat(behaviorObj.NumSides,WasSet('ToValue',22))
Use a constraint from the matlab.unittest.constraints package to assert that the

number of dice sides isn't set to more than 20. This test fails.
32-191
32 Unit Testing
import matlab.unittest.constraints.IsLessThanOrEqualTo
testCase.verifyThat(behaviorObj.NumSides, ...
WasSet('ToValue',IsLessThanOrEqualTo(20)))
---------------------
---------------------
WasSet failed.
--> Property 'NumSides' was not set to the specified value.
--> Observed property set(s) to any value:
<Mock>.NumSides = 22
Specified property set:

PropertySetBehavior
<Mock>.NumSides = <IsLessThanOrEqualTo constraint>
Summary of Qualifications
Type of TestCase Method matlab.mock.Constraint Class
Qualification Use With
matlab.unittest.Test matlab.mock.Const
Case Method raint Class
Method was verifyCalled or verifyThat WasCalled
called verifyNotCalled
assumeCalled or assumeThat
assumeNotCalled
assertCalled or assertThat
assertNotCalled
fatalAssertCall fatalAssertThat
ed or
fatalAssertNotC
alled
Method was Not applicable verifyThat, WasCalled
called a assumeThat,
certain assertThat, or
number of fatalAssertThat
times
32-192

Property was verifyAccessed verifyThat WasAccessed
accessed or
verifyNotAccess
ed
assumeAccessed assumeThat
or
assumeNotAccess
ed
assertAccessed assertThat
or
assertNotAccess
ed
fatalAssertAcce fatalAssertThat
ssed or
fatalAssertNotA
ccessed
Property was Not applicable verifyThat, WasAccessed
accessed a assumeThat,
certain assertThat, or
number of fatalAssertThat
times
Property was verifySet or verifyThat WasSet
set verifyNotSet
assumeSet or assumeThat
assumeNotSet
assertSet or assertThat
assertNotSet
fatalAssertSet fatalAssertThat
or
fatalAssertNotS
et
32-193
32 Unit Testing

Property was Not applicable verifyThat, WasSet
set a certain assumeThat,
number of assertThat, or
times fatalAssertThat
Property was Not applicable verifyThat, WasSet
set to a certain assumeThat,
value assertThat, or
fatalAssertThat
See Also
32-194
33
System object Usage and Authoring
• “What Are System Objects?” on page 33-2

• “System Objects vs MATLAB Functions” on page 33-6
• “System Design in MATLAB Using System Objects” on page 33-9
• “Define Basic System Objects” on page 33-15
• “Change Number of Inputs or Outputs” on page 33-18
• “Validate Property and Input Values” on page 33-22
• “Initialize Properties and Setup One-Time Calculations” on page 33-25
• “Set Property Values at Construction Time” on page 33-28
• “Reset Algorithm and Release Resources” on page 33-30
• “Define Property Attributes” on page 33-33
• “Hide Inactive Properties” on page 33-37
• “Limit Property Values to Finite List” on page 33-39
• “Process Tuned Properties” on page 33-42
• “Define Composite System Objects” on page 33-44
• “Define Finite Source Objects” on page 33-47
• “Save and Load System Object” on page 33-49
• “Define System Object Information” on page 33-53
• “Specify Locked Input Size” on page 33-55
• “Use Update and Output for Nondirect Feedthrough” on page 33-57
• “Methods Timing” on page 33-60
• “Best Practices for Defining System Objects” on page 33-63
• “Insert System Object Code Using MATLAB Editor” on page 33-66
• “Analyze System Object Code” on page 33-74
• “Use Enumerations in System Objects” on page 33-77
• “Use Global Variables in System Objects” on page 33-78
33 System object Usage and Authoring
What Are System Objects?

In this section...
“Running a System Object” on page 33-3
“System Object Methods” on page 33-4
A System object is a specialized kind of MATLAB object. System Toolboxes include

System objects and most System Toolboxes also have MATLAB functions and Simulink
blocks. System objects are designed specifically for implementing and simulating
dynamic systems with inputs that change over time. Many signal processing,
communications, and controls systems are dynamic. In a dynamic system, the values of
the output signals depend on both the instantaneous values of the input signals and on
the past behavior of the system. System objects use internal states to store that past
behavior, which is used in the next computational step. As a result, System objects are
optimized for iterative computations that process large streams of data in segments, such
as video and audio processing systems. This ability to process streaming data provides
the advantage of not having to hold large amounts of data in memory. Use of streaming
data also allows you to use simplified programs that use loops efficiently.
For example, you could use System objects in a system that reads data from a file, filters
that data and then writes the filtered output to another file. Typically, a specified
amount of data is passed to the filter in each loop iteration. The file reader object uses a
state to keep track of where in the file to begin the next data read. Likewise, the file
writer object keeps tracks of where it last wrote data to the output file so that data is not
overwritten. The filter object maintains its own internal states to ensure that the
filtering is performed correctly. This diagram represents a single loop of the system.
These advantages make System objects particularly well suited for processing streaming
data.
Many System objects support:
• Fixed-point arithmetic (requires a Fixed-Point Designer™ license)
33-2
What Are System Objects?
• C code generation (requires a MATLAB Coder™ or Simulink Coder license)

• HDL code generation (requires an HDL Coder™ license)
• Executable files or shared libraries generation (requires a MATLAB Compiler license)
Note Check your product documentation to confirm fixed-point, code generation, and
MATLAB Compiler support for the specific System objects you want to use.
System objects use a minimum of two commands to process data—a constructor to create
the object (such as, fft256 = dsp.FFT) and a function call (such as, fft256(x)) to run
data through the object. This separation of declaration from execution lets you create
multiple, persistent, reusable objects, each with different settings. Using this approach
avoids repeated input validation and verification, allows for easy use within a
programming loop, and improves overall performance. In contrast, MATLAB functions
must validate parameters every time you call the function.
In addition to the System objects provided with System Toolboxes, you can also create
your own System objects. See “Create System Objects”.
Running a System Object

To run a System object and perform the operation defined by its algorithm, you call the
object as if it were a function. For example, to create an FFT object that uses the
dsp.FFT System object, specifies a length of 1024, and names it dft, use
dft = dsp.FFT;
To run this object on input x, use
dft(x);
If you run a System object without any input arguments, you must include empty
parentheses. For example, asysobj().
When you run a System object, it also performs other important tasks related to data
processing, such as initialization and handling object states.
Note An alternative way to run a System object is to use the step method. For example,
for an object created using dft = dsp.FFT, you can run it using step(dft,x).
33-3
System Object Methods

After you create a System object, you use various object methods to process data or
obtain information from or about the object. The syntax for using methods is
<method>(<system object name>), plus possible extra input arguments. For
example, for txfourier = dsp.FFT, where txfourier is a name you assign, you call
the reset method using reset(txfourier). For more information about methods, see
the descriptions in “Common Methods” on page 33-4.
Common Methods
All System objects support the following methods, each of which is linked from each
object’s reference page. In cases where a method is not applicable to a particular object,
calling that method has no effect on the object.
Method Description
Run System object like Run the object to process data using the algorithm defined by
a function, or that object.
step
Example: For dft = dsp.FFT;, the standard way to run the
object is y = dft(x). The alternative way is y =
step(dft,x).
As part of this processing, the object initializes needed

resources, returns outputs, and updates the object states. After
you start running the object, you cannot change any input
specifications (i.e., dimensions, data type, complexity). During
execution, you can change only tunable properties. Both ways
of running a System object return regular MATLAB variables.
release Releases any special resources allocated by the object, such as
file handles and device drivers, and unlocks the object. For
System objects, use the release method instead of a
destructor.
reset Resets the internal states of a locked object to the initial values
for that object and leaves the object locked
getNumInputs Returns the number of inputs (excluding the object itself)
expected running the object. This number varies for an object
depending on whether any properties enable additional inputs.
33-4
See Also
Method Description
getNumOutputs Returns the number of outputs expected from running the
object. This number varies for an object depending on whether
any properties enable additional outputs.
getDiscreteState Returns the discrete states of the object in a structure. If the
object is unlocked (when the object is first created and before
you have run it or after you have released the object), the
states are empty. If the object has no discrete states,
getDiscreteState returns an empty structure.
clone Creates another object of the same type with the same property
values
isLocked Returns a logical value indicating whether the object is locked.
isDone Applies to source objects only. Returns a logical value
indicating whether the end of the data file has been reached. If
a particular object does not have end-of-data capability, this
method value returns false.
info Returns a structure containing characteristic information
about the object. The fields of this structure vary depending on
the object. If a particular object does not have characteristic
information, the structure is empty.
See Also
matlab.System
Related Examples
• “System Objects vs MATLAB Functions” on page 33-6
• “System Design in MATLAB Using System Objects” on page 33-9
• “System Design in Simulink Using System Objects” (Simulink)
33-5
System Objects vs MATLAB Functions

In this section...
“System Objects vs. MATLAB Functions” on page 33-6
“Process Audio Data Using Only MATLAB Functions Code” on page 33-6
“Process Audio Data Using System Objects” on page 33-7
System Objects vs. MATLAB Functions

Many System objects have MATLAB function counterparts. For simple, one-time
computations use MATLAB functions. However, if you need to design and simulate a
system with many components, use System objects. Using System objects is also
appropriate if your computations require managing internal states, have inputs that
change over time or process large streams of data.
Building a dynamic system with different execution phases and internal states using
only MATLAB functions would require complex programming. You would need code to
initialize the system, validate data, manage internal states, and reset and terminate the
system. System objects perform many of these managerial operations automatically
during execution. By combining System objects in a program with other MATLAB
functions, you can streamline your code and improve efficiency.
Process Audio Data Using Only MATLAB Functions Code

This example shows how to write MATLAB® function-only code for reading audio data.
The code reads audio data from a file, filters it, and then plays the filtered audio data.
The audio data is read in frames. This code produces the same result as the System
objects code in the next example, allowing you to compare approaches.
Locate source audio file.

fname = 'speech_dft_8kHz.wav';
Obtain the total number of samples and the sampling rate from the source file.
audioInfo = audioinfo(fname);
maxSamples = audioInfo.TotalSamples;
fs = audioInfo.SampleRate;
33-6
System Objects vs MATLAB Functions
Define the filter to use.

b = fir1(160,.15);
Initialize the filter states.

z = zeros(1,numel(b)-1);
Define the amount of audio data to process at one time, and initialize the while loop
index.
frameSize = 1024;
nIdx = 1;
Define the while loop to process the audio data in processloop.

type processloop
while nIdx <= maxSamples(1)-frameSize+1

audio = audioread(fname,[nIdx nIdx+frameSize-1]);
[y,z] = filter(b,1,audio,z);
sound(y,fs);
nIdx = nIdx+frameSize;
end
The loop uses explicit indexing and state management, which can be a tedious and error-
prone approach. You must have detailed knowledge of the states, such as, sizes and data
types. Another issue with this MATLAB-only code is that the sound function is not
designed to run in real time. The resulting audio is very choppy and barely audible.
Process Audio Data Using System Objects

This example shows how to write System objects code for reading audio data.
The code uses System objects from the DSP System Toolbox™ software to read audio
data from a file, filter it, and then play the filtered audio data. This code produces the
same result as the MATLAB® code shown previously, allowing you to compare
approaches.
Locate source audio file.

fname = 'speech_dft_8kHz.wav';
33-7
Define the System object to read the file.

audioIn = dsp.AudioFileReader(fname,'OutputDataType','single');
Define the System object to filter the data.

filtLP = dsp.FIRFilter('Numerator',fir1(160,.15));
Define the System object to play the filtered audio data.

audioOut = audioDeviceWriter('SampleRate',audioIn.SampleRate);
Define the while loop to process the audio data.

while ~isDone(audioIn)
audio = audioIn(); % Read audio source file
y = filtLP(audio); % Filter the data
audioOut(y); % Play the filtered data
end
This System objects code avoids the issues present in the MATLAB-only code. Without
requiring explicit indexing, the file reader object manages the data frame sizes while the
filter manages the states. The audio device writer object plays each audio frame as it is
processed.
33-8
System Design in MATLAB Using System Objects

In this section...
“System Design and Simulation in MATLAB” on page 33-9
“Predefined Components” on page 33-10
“Create Components for Your System” on page 33-10
“Component Properties” on page 33-10
“Configure Component Property Values” on page 33-11
“Create and Configure Components at the Same Time” on page 33-11
“Connecting System Objects” on page 33-12
“Connect Components in a System” on page 33-12
“Run Your System” on page 33-13
“Reconfiguring Objects” on page 33-13
“Change a Tunable Property in Your System” on page 33-14
System Design and Simulation in MATLAB

System objects allow you to design and simulate your system in MATLAB. You use
System objects in MATLAB as shown in this diagram.
1 Create individual components — Create the System objects to use in your system.
“Create Components for Your System” on page 33-10. In addition to the System
objects provided with System Toolboxes, you can also create your own System
objects. See “Create System Objects”.
2 Configure components — If necessary, change the objects’ property values to model
your particular system. All System object properties have default values that you
may be able to use without changing them. See “Component Properties” on page 33-
10.
33-9
3 Assemble components into system — Write a MATLAB program that includes those
System objects, connecting them using MATLAB variables as inputs and outputs to
simulate your system. See “Connecting System Objects” on page 33-12.
4 Run the system — Run your program. You can change tunable properties while your
system is running. See “Run Your System” on page 33-13 and “Reconfiguring
Objects” on page 33-13.
Predefined Components
The example in the next section shows how to use System objects that are predefined in
the software. If you use a function to create and use a System object, specify the object
creation using conditional code. This will prevent errors if that function is called within a
loop. You can also create your own System objects, see “Create System Objects”.
Create Components for Your System

Create Components for Your System
This section shows how to set up your system using predefined components from DSP
System Toolbox™ and Audio System Toolbox™:
• dsp.AudioFileReader — Read the file of audio data

• dsp.FIRFilter — Filter the audio data
• audioDeviceWriter — Play the filtered audio data
First, create the component objects, using default property settings.

audioIn = dsp.AudioFileReader;
filtLP = dsp.FIRFilter;
audioOut = audioDeviceWriter;
Component Properties
When to Configure Components
If you did not set an object's properties when you created it and do not want to use
default values, you must explicitly set those properties. Some properties allow you to
change their values while your system is running. See “Reconfiguring Objects” on page
33-13 for information.
33-10
Most properties are independent of each other. However, some System object properties
enable or disable another property or limit the values of another property. To avoid
errors or warnings, you should set the controlling property before setting the dependent
property.
Display Component Property Values
To display the current property values for an object, type that object’s handle name at
the command line (such as audioIn). To display the value of a specific property, type
objecthandle.propertyname (such as audioIn.FileName).
Configure Component Property Values

This section shows how to configure the components for your system by setting the
component objects’ properties.
Use this procedure if you have created your components separately from configuring
them. You can also create and configure your components at the same time, as described
in a later example.
For the file reader object, specify the file to read and set the output data type.
For the filter object, specify the filter numerator coefficients using the fir1 function,
which specifies the lowpass filter order and the cutoff frequency.
For the audio device writer object, specify the sample rate. In this case, use the same
sample rate as the input data.
audioIn.Filename = 'speech_dft_8kHz.wav';
audioIn.OutputDataType = 'single';
filtLP.Numerator = fir1(160,.15);
audioOut.SampleRate = audioIn.SampleRate;
Create and Configure Components at the Same Time

This example shows how to create your System object components and configure the
desired properties at the same time. Specify each property with a 'Name', Value
argument pair.
Create the file reader object, specify the file to read, and set the output data type.
33-11
audioIn = dsp.AudioFileReader('speech_dft_8kHz.wav',...
'OutputDataType','single');
Create the filter object and specify the filter numerator using the fir1 function. Specify
the lowpass filter order and the cutoff frequency of the fir1 function.
filtLP = dsp.FIRFilter('Numerator',fir1(160,.15));
Create the audio player object and set the sample rate to the same rate as the input data.
audioOut = audioDeviceWriter('SampleRate',audioIn.SampleRate);
Connecting System Objects

After you have determined the components you need and have created and configured
your System objects, assemble your system. You use the System objects like other
MATLAB variables and include them in MATLAB code. You can pass MATLAB variables
into and out of System objects.
The main difference between using System objects and using functions is that System
objects use a two-step process. First you create the object and set its parameters and
then, you run the object. Running the object initializes it and controls the data flow and
state management of your system. You typically call a System object within a code loop.
You use the output from an object as the input to another object. For some System
objects, you can use properties of those objects to change the number of inputs or outputs.
To verify that the appropriate number of input and outputs are being used, you can use
getNumInputs and getNumOutputs on any System object. For information on all
available System object functions, see “System Object Methods” on page 33-4.
Connect Components in a System

This section shows how to connect the components together to read, filter, and play a file
of audio data. The while loop uses the isDone function to read through the entire file.
end
33-12
Run Your System

How to Run Your System
Run your code either by typing directly at the command line or running a file containing
your program. When you run the code for your system, data is processed through your
objects.
What You Cannot Change While Your System Is Running
The first call to a System object initializes and then locks the object. When a System
object has started processing data, it is locked to prevent changes that would disrupt its
processing. Use isLocked to verify whether an object is locked. When the object is
locked, you cannot change:
• Number of inputs or outputs

• Data type of inputs or outputs
• Data type of any tunable property
• Dimensions of inputs or tunable properties, except for System objects that support
variable-size data
• Value of any nontunable property
To make changes to your system while it is running, see “Reconfiguring Objects” on page
33-13.
Reconfiguring Objects
When Can You Change Component Properties?
When a System object has started processing data, it is locked to prevent changes that
would disrupt its processing. You can use isLocked on any System object to verify
whether it is locked or not. When processing is complete, you can use the release
method to unlock a System object.
Some object properties are tunable, which enables you to change them even if the object
is locked. Unless otherwise specified, System objects properties are nontunable. Refer to
the object’s reference page to determine whether an individual property is tunable.
Typically, tunable properties are not critical to how the System object processes data.
33-13
Change Input Complexity or Dimensions
During simulation, some System objects do not allow complex data if the object was
initialized with real data. You cannot change any input complexity during code
generation.
You can change the value of a tunable property without a warning or error being
produced. For all other changes at run time, an error occurs.
Change a Tunable Property in Your System

You can change the filter type to a high-pass filter as your code is running by modifying
the Numerator property of the filter object. The change takes effect at the next iteration
of the while loop.
reset(audioIn); % Reset audio file
filtLP.Numerator = fir1(160,0.15,'high');
end
33-14
Define Basic System Objects
Define Basic System Objects

This example shows how to create a basic System object that increments a number by
one. The class definition file used in the example contains the minimum elements
required to define a System object.
In this section...
“Create System Object” on page 33-15
“Define Algorithm” on page 33-15
Create System Object

You can create and edit a MAT-file or use the MATLAB Editor to create your System
object. This example describes how to use the New menu in the MATLAB Editor.
In MATLAB, on the Editor tab, select New > System Object > Basic. A simple System
object template opens.
System objects are composed of a base class, matlab.System and may include one or
more mixin classes. You specify the base class and mixin classes on the first line of your
class definition file.
Subclass your object from matlab.System. Replace Untitled with AddOne in the first
line of your file.
classdef AddOne < matlab.System
Save the file and name it AddOne.m.
Define Algorithm
The stepImpl method contains the algorithm to execute when you run your object.
Define this method so that it contains the actions you want the System object to perform.
1 In the basic System object you created, inspect the stepImpl method template.
function y = stepImpl(obj,u)
% Implement algorithm. Calculate y as a function of input u and
% discrete states.
33-15
y = u;
end
end
The stepImpl method access is always set to protected because it is an internal

method that users do not directly call or run.
All methods, except static methods, expect the System object handle as the first
input argument. The default value, inserted by MATLAB Editor, is obj. You can use
any name for your System object handle.
By default, the number of inputs and outputs are both 1. Inputs and outputs can be
added using Inputs/Outputs. If you use variable number of inputs or outputs,
insert the appropriate getNumInputsImpl or getNumOutputsImpl method.
Alternatively, if you create your System object by editing a MAT-file, you can add the
stepImpl method using Insert Method > Implement algorithm.
2 Change the computation in the y function to add 1 to the value of u.
function y = stepImpl(~,u)
y = u + 1;
end
Note Instead of passing in the object handle, you can use the tilde (~) to indicate
that the object handle is not used in the function. Using the tilde instead of an object
handle prevents warnings about unused variables.
3 Remove the additional, unused methods that are included by default in the basic
template. Alternatively, you can modify these methods to add more System object
actions and properties. You can also make no changes, and the System object still
operates as intended.
The class definition file now has all the code necessary for this System object.
% ADDONE Compute an output value one greater than the input value
% All methods occur inside a methods declaration.

% The stepImpl method has protected access
33-16
See Also
function y = stepImpl(~,u)
y = u + 1;
end
end
end
See Also
getNumInputsImpl | getNumOutputsImpl | matlab.System | stepImpl
Related Examples
• “Change Number of Inputs or Outputs” on page 33-18
• “System Design and Simulation in MATLAB” on page 33-9
33-17
Change Number of Inputs or Outputs

This example shows how to specify two inputs and two outputs to a System object.
If you specify the inputs and outputs to the stepImpl method, you do not need to specify
the getNumInputsImpl and getNumOutputsImpl methods. If you have a variable
number of inputs or outputs (using varargin or varargout), include the
getNumInputsImpl or getNumOutputsImpl method, respectively, in your class
definition file.
You should only use getNumInputsImpl or getNumOutputsImpl methods to change

the number of System object inputs or outputs. Do not use any other handle objects
within a System object to change the number of inputs or outputs.
You always set the getNumInputsImpl and getNumOutputsImpl methods access to

protected because they are internal methods that users do not directly call or run.
Update the Algorithm for Multiple Inputs and Outputs
Update the stepImpl method to specify two inputs and two outputs. You do not need to
implement associated getNumInputsImpl or getNumOutputsImpl methods.

function [y1,y2] = stepImpl(~,x1,x2)
y1 = x1 + 1;
y2 = x2 + 1;
end
end
Update the Algorithm and Associated Methods
Update the stepImpl method to use varargin and varargout. For this case, you must
implement the associated getNumInputsImpl and getNumOutputsImpl methods to
specify two or three inputs and outputs.
function varargout = stepImpl(obj,varargin)
varargout{1} = varargin{1}+1;
if (obj.numInputsOutputs == 3)
end
33-18
Change Number of Inputs or Outputs
end
function validatePropertiesImpl(obj)
if ~((obj.numInputsOutputs == 2) ||...
(obj.numInputsOutputs == 3))
error('Only 2 or 3 input and outputs allowed.');
end
end
function numIn = getNumInputsImpl(obj)

numIn = 3;
numIn = 2;
end
end
function numOut = getNumOutputsImpl(obj)

numOut = 3;
numOut = 2;
end
end
end
To run this System object with two inputs and two outputs, use this syntax at the
command line. Create the object, set the input values for two inputs and two outputs,
and then, run the object. Finally, release the object so you can rerun it.
addOne = AddOne;
x1 = 3;
x2 = 7;
addOne.numInputsOutputs = 2;
[y1,y2] = addOne(x1,x2);
release(addOne);
Use this syntax to use three inputs and outputs.
x1 = 3;
x2 = 7;
x3 = 14;
addOne.numInputsOutputs = 3;
[y1,y2,y3] = addOne(x1,x2,x3);
33-19
Complete Class Definition File with Multiple Inputs and Outputs

% ADDONE Compute output values one greater than the input values
% This property is nontunable and cannot be changed

% after the setup method has been called or when
% the object is running.
properties (Nontunable)
numInputsOutputs = 3; % Default value
end
% All methods occur inside a methods declaration.

% The stepImpl method has protected access
function varargout = stepImpl(obj,varargin)
else
end
end
if ~((obj.numInputsOutputs == 2) ||...
(obj.numInputsOutputs == 3))
error('Only 2 or 3 input and outputs allowed.');
end
end
function numIn = getNumInputsImpl(obj)

numIn = 3;
numIn = 2;
end
end
function numOut = getNumOutputsImpl(obj)

numOut = 3;
numOut = 2;
33-20
See Also
end
end
end
end
See Also
getNumInputsImpl | getNumOutputsImpl
Related Examples
• “Validate Property and Input Values” on page 33-22
• “System Object Input Arguments and ~ in Code Examples” on page 33-65
33-21
Validate Property and Input Values

This example shows how to verify that the user’s inputs and property values are valid.
Validate Properties
This example shows how to validate the value of a single property using
set.PropertyName syntax. In this case, the PropertyName is Increment. Validate the
value of two interdependent properties using the validatePropertiesImpl method. In
this case, the UseIncrement property value must be true and the WrapValue property
value must be less than the Increment property value.
methods
% Validate the properties of the object
function set.Increment(obj,val)
if val >= 10
error('The increment value must be less than 10');
end
obj.Increment = val;
end
end
if obj.UseIncrement && obj.WrapValue > obj.Increment
error('Wrap value must be less than increment value');
end
end
end
Validate Inputs
This example shows how to validate that the first input is a numeric value.
function validateInputsImpl(~,x)
if ~isnumeric(x)
error('Input must be numeric');
end
end
end
33-22
Validate Property and Input Values
Complete Class Definition File with Property and Input Validation

% ADDONE Compute an output value by incrementing the input value
% All properties occur inside a properties declaration.

% These properties have public access (the default)
properties (Logical)
UseIncrement = true
end
properties (PositiveInteger)
Increment = 1
WrapValue = 10
end
methods
% Validate the properties of the object
function set.Increment(obj,val)
if val >= 10
error('The increment value must be less than 10');
end
obj.Increment = val;
end
end

if obj.UseIncrement && obj.WrapValue > obj.Increment
error('Wrap value must be less than increment value');
end
end
% Validate the inputs to the object

function validateInputsImpl(~,x)
if ~isnumeric(x)
error('Input must be numeric');
end
end
function out = stepImpl(obj,in)

if obj.UseIncrement
out = in + obj.Increment;
else
33-23
out = in + 1;
end
end
end
end
See Also
validateInputsImpl | validatePropertiesImpl
Related Examples
• “Change Input Complexity or Dimensions” on page 33-14
• “Property Set Methods”
33-24
Initialize Properties and Setup One-Time Calculations
Initialize Properties and Setup One-Time Calculations

This example shows how to write code to initialize and set up a System object.
In this example, you allocate file resources by opening the file so the System object can
write to that file. You do these initialization tasks one time during setup, rather than
every time you run the object.
Define Public Properties to Initialize
In this example, you define the public Filename property and specify the value of that
property as the nontunable character vector, default.bin. Users cannot change
nontunable properties after the setup method has been called. Refer to the Methods
Timing section for more information.
Filename = 'default.bin'
end
Define Private Properties to Initialize
Users cannot access private properties directly, but only through methods of the System
object. In this example, you define the pFileID property as a private property. You also
define this property as hidden to indicate it is an internal property that never displays to
the user.
properties (Hidden,Access = private)
pFileID;
end
Define Setup
You use the setupImpl method to perform setup and initialization tasks. You should
include code in the setupImpl method that you want to execute one time only. The
setupImpl method is called once the first time you run the object. In this example, you
allocate file resources by opening the file for writing binary data.
methods
function setupImpl(obj)
obj.pFileID = fopen(obj.Filename,'wb');
if obj.pFileID < 0
error('Opening the file failed');
end
33-25
end
end
Although not part of setup, you should close files when your code is done using them. You
use the releaseImpl method to release resources.
Complete Class Definition File with Initialization and Setup

classdef MyFile < matlab.System
% MyFile write numbers to a file
% These properties are nontunable. They cannot be changed

% after the setup method has been called or the object
% is running.
Filename = 'default.bin' % the name of the file to create
end
% These properties are private. Customers can only access

% these properties through methods on this object
pFileID; % The identifier of the file to open
end

% In setup allocate any resources, which in this case
% means opening the file.
obj.pFileID = fopen(obj.Filename,'wb');
if obj.pFileID < 0
end
end
% This System
object™ writes the input to the file.
function stepImpl(obj,data)
fwrite(obj.pFileID,data);
end
% Use release to close the file to prevent the

% file handle from being left open.
function releaseImpl(obj)
fclose(obj.pFileID);
end
33-26
See Also
end
end
See Also
matlab.System Constructor | releaseImpl | setupImpl | stepImpl
Related Examples
• “Release System Object Resources” on page 33-31
33-27
Set Property Values at Construction Time

This example shows how to define a System object constructor and allow it to accept
name-value property pairs as input.
Set Properties to Use Name-Value Pair Input
Define the System object constructor, which is a method that has the same name as the
class (MyFile in this example). Within that method, you use the setProperties
method to make all public properties available for input when the user constructs the
object. nargin is a MATLAB function that determines the number of input arguments.
varargin indicates all of the object’s public properties.
methods
function obj = MyFile(varargin)
setProperties(obj,nargin,varargin{:});
end
end
Complete Class Definition File with Constructor Setup

classdef MyFile < matlab.System
% MyFile write numbers to a file

% after the setup method has been called or while the
% object is running.
Filename ='default.bin' % the name of the file to create
Access = 'wb' % The file access character vector (write, binary)
end
% These properties are private. Customers can only access

% these properties through methods on this object
pFileID; % The identifier of the file to open
end
methods
% You call setProperties in the constructor to let
% a user specify public properties of object as
% name-value pairs.
function obj = MyFile(varargin)
33-28
See Also
end
end

% In setup allocate any resources, which in this case is
% opening the file.
obj.pFileID = fopen(obj.Filename,obj.Access);
if obj.pFileID < 0
end
end
% This System
object™ writes the input to the file.
function stepImpl(obj,data)
fwrite(obj.pFileID,data);
end
% Use release to close the file to prevent the

% file handle from being left open.
fclose(obj.pFileID);
end
end
end
See Also
nargin | setProperties
Related Examples
33-29
Reset Algorithm and Release Resources

In this section...
“Reset Algorithm State” on page 33-30
“Release System Object Resources” on page 33-31
Reset Algorithm State

This example shows how to reset an object state.
Reset Counter to Zero
pCount is an internal counter property of the System object obj. The user calls the
reset method on the locked object, which calls the resetImpl method. In this example,
pCount resets to 0.
Note When resetting an object’s state, make sure you reset the size, complexity, and data
type correctly.

function resetImpl(obj)
obj.pCount = 0;
end
end
Complete Class Definition File with State Reset

classdef Counter < matlab.System
% Counter System
object™ that increments a counter
properties (Access = private)

pCount
end

% Increment the counter and return
% its value as an output
function c = stepImpl(obj)
33-30
Reset Algorithm and Release Resources
obj.pCount = obj.pCount + 1;
c = obj.pCount;
end
% Reset the counter to zero.

obj.pCount = 0;
end
end
end
Release System Object Resources

This example shows how to release resources allocated and used by the System object.
These resources include allocated memory, files used for reading or writing, etc.
Release Memory by Clearing the Object
This method allows you to clear the axes on the Whiteboard figure window while keeping
the figure open.
methods
cla(Whiteboard.getWhiteboard());
hold on
end
end
Complete Class Definition File with Released Resources

classdef Whiteboard < matlab.System
% Whiteboard Draw lines on a figure window
%
% This System
object™ shows the use of StringSets
%
properties
Color = 'blue'
end
properties (Hidden)
% Let user choose a color
ColorSet = matlab.system.StringSet({'red','blue','green'});
end
33-31

function stepImpl(obj)
h = Whiteboard.getWhiteboard();
plot(h, ...
randn([2,1]), randn([2,1]), ...
'Color',obj.Color(1));
end
hold on
end
end
methods (Static)
function a = getWhiteboard()
h = findobj('tag','whiteboard');
if isempty(h)
h = figure('tag','whiteboard');
hold on
end
a = gca;
end
end
end
See Also
releaseImpl | resetImpl
More About
• “Initialize Properties and Setup One-Time Calculations” on page 33-25
33-32
Define Property Attributes

This example shows how to specify property attributes.
Property attributes, which add details to a property, provide a layer of control to your
properties. In addition to the MATLAB property attributes, System objects can use these
three additional attributes: Nontunable, Logical, and PositiveInteger. To specify
multiple attributes, separate them with commas.
Specify Property as Nontunable
Use the nontunable attribute for a property when the algorithm depends on the value
being constant once data processing starts. Defining a property as nontunable may
improve the efficiency of your algorithm by removing the need to check for or react to
values that change. For code generation, defining a property as nontunable allows the
memory associated with that property to be optimized. You should define all properties
that affect the number of input or output ports as nontunable.
System object users cannot change nontunable properties after the setup method has
been called or while the object is running. In this example, you define the InitialValue
property, and set its value to 0.
InitialValue = 0;
end
Specify Property as Logical
Logical properties have the value, true or false. System object users can enter 1 or 0 or
any value that can be converted to a logical. The value, however, displays as true or
false. You can use sparse logical values, but they must be scalar values. In this
example, the Increment property indicates whether to increase the counter. By default,
Increment is tunable property. The following restrictions apply to a property with the
Logical attribute,
• Cannot also be Dependent or PositiveInteger

• Default value must be true or false. You cannot use 1 or 0 as a default value.
Increment = true
end
33-33
Specify Property as Positive Integer
In this example, the private property MaxValue is constrained to accept only real,
positive integers. You cannot use sparse values. The following restriction applies to a
property with the PositiveInteger attribute,
• Cannot also be Dependent or Logical
properties (PositiveInteger)
MaxValue
end
Specify Property as DiscreteState
If your algorithm uses properties that hold state, you can assign those properties the
DiscreteState attribute . Properties with this attribute display their state values
when users call getDiscreteStateImpl via the getDiscreteState method. The
following restrictions apply to a property with the DiscreteState attribute,
• Numeric, logical, or fi value, but not a scaled double fi value

• Does not have any of these attributes: Nontunable, Dependent, Abstract,
Constant, or Transient.
• No default value
• Not publicly settable
• GetAccess = Public by default
• Value set only using the setupImpl method or when the System object is locked
during resetImpl or stepImpl
In this example, you define the Count property.
properties (DiscreteState)
Count;
end
Complete Class Definition File with Property Attributes

% Counter Increment a counter to a maximum value
33-34
% after the setup method has been called or while the

% The inital value of the counter
InitialValue = 0
end
properties (Nontunable, PositiveInteger)
% The maximum value of the counter
MaxValue = 3
end
% Whether to increment the counter
Increment = true
end
% Count state variable
Count
end

% Increment the counter and return its value
% as an output
if obj.Increment && (obj.Count < obj.MaxValue)
obj.Count = obj.Count + 1;
else
disp(['Max count, ' num2str(obj.MaxValue) ',reached'])
end
c = obj.Count;
end
% Setup the Count state variable

obj.Count = 0;
end
% Reset the counter to one.

obj.Count = obj.InitialValue;
end
33-35
end
end
See Also
More About
• “Class Attributes”
• “Property Attributes”
• “What You Cannot Change While Your System Is Running” on page 33-13
33-36
Hide Inactive Properties
Hide Inactive Properties

To display only active System object properties, use the isInactivePropertyImpl
method. This method specifies whether a property is inactive. An inactive property is a
property that does not affect the System object because of the value of other properties.
When you pass the isInactiveProperty method a property and the method returns
true, then that property is inactive and does not display when the disp function is
called.
Specify Inactive Property

This example uses the isInactiveProperty method to check the value a dependant
property. For this System object, the InitialValue property is not relevant if the
UseRandomInitialValue property is set to true. This isInactiveProperty method
checks for that situation and if UseRandomInitialValue is true, returns true to not
display the inactive InitialValue property.
function flag = isInactivePropertyImpl(obj,propertyName)
if strcmp(propertyName,'InitialValue')
flag = obj.UseRandomInitialValue;
else
flag = false;
end
end
end
Complete Class Definition File with Inactive Properties Method

% Counter Increment a counter

% after the setup method has been called or when the
% Allow the user to set the initial value
UseRandomInitialValue = true
InitialValue = 0
end
33-37
% The private count variable, which is tunable by default

pCount
end

% Increment the counter and return its value
% as an output
obj.pCount = obj.pCount + 1;
c = obj.pCount;
end
% Reset the counter to either a random value or the initial

% value.
if obj.UseRandomInitialValue
obj.pCount = rand();
else
obj.pCount = obj.InitialValue;
end
end
% This method controls visibility of the object's properties

function flag = isInactivePropertyImpl(obj,propertyName)
if strcmp(propertyName,'InitialValue')
flag = obj.UseRandomInitialValue;
else
flag = false;
end
end
end
end
See Also
isInactivePropertyImpl
33-38
Limit Property Values to Finite List
Limit Property Values to Finite List

This example shows how to limit a property to accept only a finite set of character vector
values.
Specify a Set of Valid Character Vector Values
String sets use two related properties. You first specify the user-visible property name
and default character vector value. Then, you specify the associated hidden property by
appending “Set” to the property name. You must use a capital “S” in “Set.”
In the “Set” property, you specify the valid character vector values as a cell array of the
matlab.system.StringSet class. This example uses Color and ColorSet as the
associated properties.
properties
Color = 'blue'
end
properties (Hidden,Transient)
end
Complete Class Definition File with StringSet

classdef Whiteboard < matlab.System
% Whiteboard Draw lines on a figure window
%
% This System
object™ illustrates the use of StringSets
properties
Color = 'blue'
end
properties (Hidden,Transient)
% Let them choose a color
end

function stepImpl(obj)
h = Whiteboard.getWhiteboard();
plot(h, ...
33-39
randn([2,1]),randn([2,1]), ...
'Color',obj.Color(1));
end
hold on
end
end
methods (Static)
function a = getWhiteboard()
h = findobj('tag','whiteboard');
if isempty(h)
h = figure('tag','whiteboard');
hold on
end
a = gca;
end
end
end
String Set System Object Example

%%
% Each time you run the object, it draws lines on a whiteboard
%% Construct the System object

hGreenInk = Whiteboard;
hBlueInk = Whiteboard;
% Change the color

% Note: Press tab after typing the first single quote to
% display all enumerated values.
hGreenInk.Color = 'green';
hBlueInk.Color = 'blue';
% Take a few steps

for i=1:3
hGreenInk();
hBlueInk();
end
%% Clear the whiteboard

hBlueInk.release();
33-40
See Also
%% Display System object used in this example

type('Whiteboard.m');
See Also
matlab.system.StringSet
33-41
Process Tuned Properties

This example shows how to specify the action to take when a tunable property value
changes during simulation.
The processTunedPropertiesImpl method is useful for managing actions to prevent

duplication. In many cases, changing one of multiple interdependent properties causes
an action. With the processTunedPropertiesImpl method, you can control when that
action is taken so it is not repeated unnecessarily.
Control When a Lookup Table Is Generated
This example of processTunedPropertiesImpl causes the pLookupTable to be

regenerated when either the NumNotes or MiddleC property changes.

function processTunedPropertiesImpl(obj)
propChange = isChangedProperty(obj,'NumNotes')||...
isChangedProperty(obj,'MiddleC')
if propChange
obj.pLookupTable = obj.MiddleC *...
(1+log(1:obj.NumNotes)/log(12));
end
endend
Complete Class Definition File with Tuned Property Processing
classdef TuningFork < matlab.System

% TuningFork Illustrate the processing of tuned parameters
%
properties
MiddleC = 440
NumNotes = 12
end

pLookupTable
end

obj.MiddleC = 440;
33-42
See Also
obj.pLookupTable = obj.MiddleC * ...

end
function hz = stepImpl(obj,noteShift)
% A noteShift value of 1 corresponds to obj.MiddleC
hz = obj.pLookupTable(noteShift);
end
function processTunedPropertiesImpl(obj)
propChange = isChangedProperty(obj,'NumNotes')||...
isChangedProperty(obj,'MiddleC')
if propChange
obj.pLookupTable = obj.MiddleC *...
end
end
end
See Also
processTunedPropertiesImpl
33-43
Define Composite System Objects

This example shows how to define System objects that include other System objects.
Define a bandpass filter System object from separate highpass and lowpass filter System
objects.
Store System Objects in Properties
To define a System object from other System objects, store those other objects in your
class definition file as properties. In this example, the highpass and lowpass filters are
the separate System objects defined in their own class-definition files.
% Properties that hold filter System objects
pLowpass
pHighpass
end
Complete Class Definition File of Bandpass Filter Composite System Object

classdef BandpassFIRFilter < matlab.System
% Implements a bandpass filter using a cascade of eighth-order lowpass
% and eighth-order highpass FIR filters.

% Properties that hold filter System objects
pLowpass
pHighpass
end

% Setup composite object from constituent objects
obj.pLowpass = LowpassFIRFilter;
obj.pHighpass = HighpassFIRFilter;
end
function yHigh = stepImpl(obj,u)

yLow = obj.pLowpass(u);
yHigh = obj.pHighpass(yLow);
end
reset(obj.pLowpass);
33-44
Define Composite System Objects
reset(obj.pHighpass);
end
end
end
Class Definition File for Lowpass FIR Component of Bandpass Filter
classdef LowpassFIRFilter < matlab.System

% Implements eighth-order lowpass FIR filter with 0.6pi cutoff
% Filter coefficients
Numerator = [0.006,-0.0133,-0.05,0.26,0.6,0.26,-0.05,-0.0133,0.006];
end
State
end

obj.State = zeros(length(obj.Numerator)-1,1);
end
[y,obj.State] = filter(obj.Numerator,1,u,obj.State);
end
end
end
end
Class Definition File for Highpass FIR Component of Bandpass Filter
classdef HighpassFIRFilter < matlab.System

% Implements eighth-order highpass FIR filter with 0.4pi cutoff
% Filter coefficients
Numerator = [0.006,0.0133,-0.05,-0.26,0.6,-0.26,-0.05,0.0133,0.006];
end
33-45
State
end

end
[y,obj.State] = filter(obj.Numerator,1,u,obj.State);
end
end
end
end
See Also
nargin
33-46
Define Finite Source Objects
Define Finite Source Objects

This example shows how to define a System object that performs a specific number of
steps or specific number of reads from a file.
In this section...
“Use the FiniteSource Class and Specify End of the Source” on page 33-47
“Complete Class Definition File with Finite Source” on page 33-47
Use the FiniteSource Class and Specify End of the Source

1 Subclass from finite source class.
classdef RunTwice < matlab.System & ...
matlab.system.mixin.FiniteSource
2 Specify the end of the source with the isDoneImpl method. In this example, the
source has two iterations.
function bDone = isDoneImpl(obj)
bDone = obj.NumSteps==2
end
Complete Class Definition File with Finite Source

classdef RunTwice < matlab.System & ...
% RunTwice System object that runs exactly two times
%
NumSteps
end

obj.NumSteps = 0;
end
function y = stepImpl(obj)
if ~obj.isDone()
33-47
obj.NumSteps = obj.NumSteps + 1;
y = obj.NumSteps;
else
y = 0;
end
end
function bDone = isDoneImpl(obj)

bDone = obj.NumSteps==2;
end
end
end
See Also
More About
• “Subclassing Multiple Classes”
33-48
Save and Load System Object

This example shows how to load and save a System object.
Save System Object and Child Object

Define a saveObjectImpl method to specify that more than just public properties
should be saved when the user saves a System object. Within this method, use the
default saveObjectImpl@matlab.System to save public properties to the struct, s. Use
the saveObject method to save child objects. Save protected and dependent properties,
and finally, if the object is locked, save the object’s state.
function s = saveObjectImpl(obj)
s = saveObjectImpl@matlab.System(obj);
s.child = matlab.System.saveObject(obj.child);
s.protectedprop = obj.protectedprop;
s.pdependentprop = obj.pdependentprop;
if isLocked(obj)
s.state = obj.state;
end
end
end
Load System Object and Child Object

Define a loadObjectImpl method to load a previously saved System object. Within this
method, use the loadObject to load the child System object, load protected and private
properties, load the state if the object is locked, and use loadObjectImpl from the base
class to load public properties.
function loadObjectImpl(obj,s,wasLocked)
obj.child = matlab.System.loadObject(s.child);
obj.protectedprop = s.protectedprop;
obj.pdependentprop = s.pdependentprop;
if wasLocked
obj.state = s.state;
end
33-49
loadObjectImpl@matlab.System(obj,s,wasLocked);
end
end
Complete Class Definition Files with Save and Load

The Counter class definition file sets up an object with a count property. This counter is
used in the MySaveLoader class definition file to count the number of child objects.
properties(DiscreteState)
Count
end
function setupImpl(obj, ~)
obj.Count = 0;
end
function y = stepImpl(obj, u)
if u > 0
end
y = obj.Count;
end
end
end
classdef MySaveLoader < matlab.System

child
pdependentprop = 1
end
properties (Access = protected)

protectedprop = rand;
end
properties (DiscreteState = true)

state
end
properties (Dependent)
dependentprop
33-50
end
methods
function obj = MySaveLoader(varargin)
obj@matlab.System();
end
function set.dependentprop(obj, value)

obj.pdependentprop = min(value, 5);
end
function value = get.dependentprop(obj)

value = obj.pdependentprop;
end
end

obj.state = 42;
obj.child = Counter;
end
function out = stepImpl(obj,in)
obj.state = in + obj.state + obj.protectedprop + ...
obj.pdependentprop;
out = obj.child(obj.state);
end
end
% Serialization
function s = saveObjectImpl(obj)
% Call the base class method
s = saveObjectImpl@matlab.System(obj);
% Save the child System objects

s.child = matlab.System.saveObject(obj.child);
% Save the protected & private properties

s.protectedprop = obj.protectedprop;
s.pdependentprop = obj.pdependentprop;
% Save the state only if object locked

if isLocked(obj)
33-51
s.state = obj.state;
end
end
function loadObjectImpl(obj,s,wasLocked)
% Load child System objects
obj.child = matlab.System.loadObject(s.child);
% Load protected and private properties

obj.protectedprop = s.protectedprop;
obj.pdependentprop = s.pdependentprop;
% Load the state only if object locked

if wasLocked
obj.state = s.state;
end
% Call base class method to load public properties

loadObjectImpl@matlab.System(obj,s,wasLocked);
end
end
end
See Also
loadObjectImpl | saveObjectImpl
33-52
Define System Object Information
Define System Object Information

This example shows how to define information to display for a System object.
Define System Object Info
You can define your own info method to display specific information for your System
object. The default infoImpl method returns an empty struct. This infoImpl method
returns detailed information when info is called using info(x,'details') or only
count information if it is called using info(x).
function s = infoImpl(obj,varargin)
if nargin>1 && strcmp('details',varargin(1))
s = struct('Name','Counter',...
'Properties', struct('CurrentCount', ...
obj.Count,'Threshold',obj.Threshold));
else
s = struct('Count',obj.Count);
end
end
end
Complete Class Definition File with InfoImpl

% Counter Count values above a threshold
properties
Threshold = 1
end
Count
end

obj.Count = 0;
end
obj.Count = 0;
end
33-53
if (u > obj.Threshold)
end
y = obj.Count;
end
function s = infoImpl(obj,varargin)
if nargin>1 && strcmp('details',varargin(1))
s = struct('Name','Counter',...
'Properties', struct('CurrentCount', ...
obj.Count,'Threshold',obj.Threshold));
else
s = struct('Count',obj.Count);
end
end
end
end
See Also
infoImpl
33-54
Specify Locked Input Size
Specify Locked Input Size

This example shows how to specify whether the size of a System object input is locked.
The size of a locked input cannot change until the System object is unlocked. Run the
object to lock it. Use release to unlock the object.
Use the isInputSizeLockedImpl method to specify that the input size is locked.
function flag = isInputSizeLockedImpl(~,~)
flag = true;
end
end
View the method in the complete class definition file.

%Counter Count values above a threshold
properties
Threshold = 1
end
Count
end
methods
function obj = Counter(varargin)
end
end
obj.Count = 0;
end
function y = stepImpl(obj, u1)

if (any(u1 >= obj.Threshold))
end
y = obj.Count;
end
33-55
function flag = isInputSizeLockedImpl(~,~)

flag = true;
end
end
end
See Also
isInputSizeLockedImpl
Related Examples
• “What You Cannot Change While Your System Is Running” on page 33-13
33-56
Use Update and Output for Nondirect Feedthrough
Use Update and Output for Nondirect Feedthrough

This example shows how to implement nondirect feedthrough for a System object using
the updateImpl, outputImpl and isInputDirectFeedthroughImpl methods. In
nondirect feedthrough, the object’s outputs depend only on the internal states and
properties of the object, rather than the input at that instant in time. You use these
methods to separate the output calculation from the state updates of a System object.
Implementing these two methods overrides the stepImpl method. This enables you to
use the object in a feedback loop and prevent algebraic loops.
Subclass from the Nondirect Mixin Class
To use the updateImpl, outputImpl, and isInputDirectFeedthroughImpl

methods, you must subclass from both the matlab.System base class and the
Nondirect mixin class.
classdef IntegerDelaySysObj < matlab.System & ...

matlab.system.mixin.Nondirect
Implement Updates to the Object
Implement an updateImpl method to update the object with previous inputs.

function updateImpl(obj,u)
obj.PreviousInput = [u obj.PreviousInput(1:end-1)];
end
end
Implement Outputs from Object
Implement an outputImpl method to output the previous, not the current input.

function [y] = outputImpl(obj,~)
y = obj.PreviousInput(end);
end
end
Implement Whether Input Is Direct Feedthrough
Implement an isInputDirectFeedthroughImpl method to indicate that the input is

nondirect feedthrough.
33-57

function flag = isInputDirectFeedthroughImpl(~,~)
flag = false;
end
end
Complete Class Definition File with Update and Output

classdef intDelaySysObj < matlab.System & matlab.system.mixin.Nondirect
% intDelaySysObj Delay input by specified number of samples.
properties
InitialOutput = 0;
end
NumDelays = 1;
end
PreviousInput;
end

if ((numel(obj.NumDelays)>1) || (obj.NumDelays <= 0))
error('Number of delays must be positive non-zero ...
scalar value.');
end
if (numel(obj.InitialOutput)>1)
error('Initial Output must be scalar value.');
end
end
obj.PreviousInput = ones(1,obj.NumDelays)*obj.InitialOutput;
end
obj.PreviousInput = ones(1,obj.NumDelays)*obj.InitialOutput;
end
function [y] = outputImpl(obj,~)

y = obj.PreviousInput(end);
end
function updateImpl(obj, u)
33-58
See Also
obj.PreviousInput = [u obj.PreviousInput(1:end-1)];
end
function flag = isInputDirectFeedthroughImpl(~,~)

flag = false;
end
end
end
See Also
isInputDirectFeedthroughImpl | matlab.system.mixin.Nondirect |
outputImpl | updateImpl
More About
• “Subclassing Multiple Classes”
33-59
Methods Timing
In this section...
“Setup Method Call Sequence” on page 33-60
“Running the Object (Step Method) Call Sequence” on page 33-61
“Reset Method Call Sequence” on page 33-61
“Release Method Call Sequence” on page 33-62
The call sequence diagrams show the order in which actions are performed when you run
the specified method. The background color or each action indicates the method type.
• White background — Sealed method

• Green background — User-implemented method
• White and green background — Sealed method that calls a user-implemented method
Setup Method Call Sequence

This hierarchy shows the actions performed when you call the setup method.
33-60
Methods Timing
Running the Object (Step Method) Call Sequence

This hierarchy shows the actions performed when you call the step method.
Reset Method Call Sequence

This hierarchy shows the actions performed when you call the reset method.
33-61
Release Method Call Sequence

This hierarchy shows the actions performed when you call the release method.
See Also
releaseImpl | resetImpl | setupImpl | stepImpl
Related Examples
• “Reset Algorithm State” on page 33-30
• “Set Property Values at Construction Time” on page 33-28
33-62
Best Practices for Defining System Objects

A System object is a specialized kind of MATLAB object that is optimized for iterative
processing. Use System objects when you need to run an object multiple times or process
data in a loop. When defining your own System object, use the following suggestions to
help your code run efficiently.
• Define all one-time calculations in the setupImpl method and cache the results in a
private property. Use the stepImpl method for repeated calculations.
• If properties are accessed more than once in the stepImpl method, cache those
properties as local variables inside the method. A typical example of multiple property
access is a loop. Iterative calculations using cached local variables run faster than
calculations that must access the properties of an object. When the calculations for
the method complete, you can save the local cached results back to the properties of
that System object. Copy frequently used tunable properties into private properties.
This best practice also applies to the updateImpl and outputImpl methods.
In this example, k is accessed multiple times in each loop iteration, but is saved to the
object property only once.
function y = stepImpl(obj,x)
k = obj.MyProp;
for p=1:100
y = k * x;
k = k + 0.1;
end
obj.MyProp = k;
end
• Property default values are shared across all instances of an object. Two instances of
a class can access the same default value if that property has not been overwritten by
either instance.
• Do not use character vector comparisons or character vector-based switch statements
in the stepImpl method. Instead, create a method handle in setupImpl. This
handle points to a method in the same class definition file. Use that handle in a loop
in stepImpl.
This example shows how to use method handles and cached local variables in a loop to
implement an efficient object. In setupImpl, choose myMethod1 or myMethod2 based
on a character vector comparison and assign the method handle to the
pMethodHandle property. Because there is a loop in stepImpl, assign the
33-63
pMethodHandle property to a local method handle, myFun, and then use myFun
inside the loop.
classdef MyClass < matlab.System

if strcmp(obj.Method, 'Method1')
obj.pMethodHandle = @myMethod1;
else
obj.pMethodHandle = @myMethod2;
end
end
function y = stepImpl(obj,x)
myFun = obj.pMethodHandle;
for p=1:1000
y = myFun(obj,x)
end
end
end
function y = myMethod1(x)
y = x+1;
end
function y = myMethod2(x)
y = x-1;
end
end
• If the number of System object inputs does not change, do not implement the
getNumInputsImpl method. Also do not implement the getNumInputsImpl method
when you explicitly list the inputs in the stepImpl method instead of using
varargin. The same caveats apply to the getNumOutputsImpl and varargout
outputs.
• For the getNumInputsImpl and getNumOutputsImpl methods, if you set the return
argument from an object property, that object property must have the Nontunable
attribute.
• If the variables in a method do not need to retain their values between calls use local
scope for those variables in that method.
• For properties that do not change, define them in as Nontunable properties.
Tunable properties have slower access times than Nontunable properties
• Use the protected or private attribute instead of the public attribute for a
property, whenever possible. Some public properties have slower access times than
protected and private properties.
33-64
• Avoid using a customized stepImpl, get, or set methods, whenever possible.

• Avoid using character vector comparisons within a customized stepImpl, get, or set
methods, whenever possible. Use setupImpl for character vector comparisons
instead.
• Specify Boolean values using true or false instead of 1 or 0, respectively.
• For best practices for including System objects in code generation, see “System
Objects in MATLAB Code Generation” (MATLAB Coder).
System Object Input Arguments and ~ in Code Examples

All methods, except static methods, expect the System object handle as the first input
argument. You can use any name for your System object handle. In many examples,
instead of passing in the object handle, ~ is used to indicate that the object handle is not
used in the function. Using ~ instead of an object handle prevents warnings about
unused variables.
33-65
Insert System Object Code Using MATLAB Editor

In this section...
“Define System Objects with Code Insertion” on page 33-66
“Create Fahrenheit Temperature String Set” on page 33-70
“Create Custom Property for Freezing Point” on page 33-71
“Define Input Size As Locked” on page 33-72
Define System Objects with Code Insertion

You can define System objects from the MATLAB Editor using code insertion options.
When you select these options, the MATLAB Editor adds predefined properties, methods,
states, inputs, or outputs to your System object. Use these tools to create and modify
System objects faster, and to increase accuracy by reducing typing errors.
To access the System object editing options, create a new System object, or open an
existing one.
To add predefined code to your System object, select the code from the appropriate menu.
For example, when you click Insert Property > Numeric, the MATLAB Editor adds
the following code:
properties(Nontunable)
Property
end
The MATLAB Editor inserts the new property with the default name Property, which
you can rename. If you have an existing properties group with the Nontunable
attribute, the MATLAB Editor inserts the new property into that group. If you do not
have a property group, the MATLAB Editor creates one with the correct attribute.
33-66
Insert Options
Properties Properties of the System object: Numeric, Logical, String Set, Positive Integer,
Tunable Numeric, Private, Protected, and Custom. When you select String Set or
Custom Properties, a separate dialog box opens to guide you in creating these
properties.
33-67
Methods Methods commonly used in System object definitions. The MATLAB Editor creates
only the method structure. You specify the actions of that method.
The Insert Method menu organizes methods by categories, such as Algorithm,

Inputs and Outputs, and Properties and States. When you select a method from
the menu, the MATLAB Editor inserts the method template in your System object
code. In this example, selecting Insert Method > Release resources inserts the
following code:
% Release resources, such as file handles
end
If a method from the Insert Method menu is present in the System object code, that
method is shown shaded on the Insert Method menu:
33-68
States Properties containing the DiscreteState attribute.
33-69
Inputs / Inputs, outputs, and related methods, such as Validate inputs and Lock input
Outputs size.
When you select an input or output, the MATLAB Editor inserts the specified code in
the stepImpl method. In this example, selecting Insert > Input causes the
MATLAB Editor to insert the required input variable u2. The MATLAB Editor
determines the variable name, but you can change it after it is inserted.
function y = stepImpl(obj,u,u2)
% Implement algorithm. Calculate y as a function of
% input u and discrete states.
y = u;
end
Create Fahrenheit Temperature String Set

1 Open a new or existing System object.
2 In the MATLAB Editor, select Insert Property > String Set.
3 In the String Set dialog box, under Name, replace Color with TemperatureUnit.
4 Remove the existing Color property values with the - (minus) button.
5 Add a property value with the + (plus) button. Enter Fahrenheit.
6 Add another property value with +. Enter Celsius.
7 Add another property value with +. Enter Kelvin.
8 Select Fahrenheit as the default value by clicking Default.
The dialog box now looks as shown:
33-70
9 To create this string set and associated properties, with the default value selected,
click Insert.
Examine the System object definition. The MATLAB Editor has added the following code:
TemperatureUnit = 'Fahrenheit';
end
properties(Constant, Hidden)
TemperatureUnitSet = matlab.system.StringSet({'Fahrenheit','Celsius','Kelvin'});
end
For more information on the StringSet class, see matlab.System.StringSet.
Create Custom Property for Freezing Point

2 In the MATLAB Editor, select Insert Property > Custom Property.
3 In the Custom Property dialog box, under System Object Attributes, select
Nontunable. Under MATLAB Property Attributes, select Constant. Leave
GetAccess as public. SetAccess is grayed out because properties of type constant
can not be set using System object methods.
33-71
The dialog box now looks as shown:
4 To insert the property into the System object code, click Insert.
properties(Nontunable, Constant)
Property
end
5 Replace Property with your property.
properties(Nontunable, Constant)
FreezingPointFahrenheit = 32;
end
Define Input Size As Locked

33-72
See Also
2 In the MATLAB Editor, select Insert Method > Lock input size.
The MATLAB Editor inserts this code into the System object:
function flag = isInputSizeLockedImpl(obj,index)

% Return true if input size is not allowed to change while
% system is running
flag = true;
end
See Also
Related Examples
• “Analyze System Object Code” on page 33-74
33-73
Analyze System Object Code

In this section...
“View and Navigate System object Code” on page 33-74
“Example: Go to StepImpl Method Using Analyzer” on page 33-74
View and Navigate System object Code

View and navigate System object code using the Analyzer.
The Analyzer displays all elements in your System object code.
• Navigate to a specific input, output, property, state, or method by clicking the name of
that element.
• Expand or collapse element sections with the arrow buttons.
• Identify access levels for properties and custom methods with the + (public), #
(protected), and – (private) symbols.
Example: Go to StepImpl Method Using Analyzer

1 Open an existing System object.
2 Select Analyze.
3 Click stepImpl.
33-74
Analyze System Object Code
The cursor in the MATLAB Editor window jumps to the stepImpl method.
33-75
See Also
Related Examples
• “Insert System Object Code Using MATLAB Editor” on page 33-66
33-76
Use Enumerations in System Objects
Use Enumerations in System Objects

Enumerated data is data that is restricted to a finite set of values. To use enumerated
data in a System object in MATLAB or Simulink, you refer to them in your System object
class definition and define your enumerated class in a separate class definition file.
For a System object that will be used in MATLAB only, see “Enumerations”.
For a System object that will be used in a MATLAB System block in Simulink, see
“Enumerated Data” (Simulink)
Enumerations can derive from any integer type smaller than or equal to an int32. For
example,
classdef Bearing < uint8

enumeration
North (0)
East (90)
South (180)
West (270)
end
end
Enumerations can also derive from Simulink.IntEnumType. You use this type of
enumeration to add attributes, such as custom headers, to the input or output of the
MATLAB System block. See “Use Enumerated Data in Simulink Models” (Simulink).
33-77
Use Global Variables in System Objects

Global variables are variables that you can access in other MATLAB functions or
Simulink blocks.
System Object Global Variables in MATLAB

For System objects that are used only in MATLAB, you define global variables in System
object class definition files in the same way that you define global variables in other
MATLAB code (see “Global Variables” on page 20-13).
System Object Global Variables in Simulink

For System objects that are used in the MATLAB System block in Simulink, you also
define global variables as you do in MATLAB. However, to use global variables in
Simulink, you need to declare global variables in the stepImpl, updateImpl, or
outputImpl method if you have declared them in methods called by stepImpl,
updateImpl, or outputImpl, respectively.
You set up and use global variables for the MATLAB System block in the same way as
you do for the MATLAB Function block (see “Data Stores” (Simulink) and “Share Data
Globally” (Simulink)). Like the MATLAB Function block, you must also use variable
name matching with a Data Store Memory block to use global variables in Simulink.
For example, this class definition file defines a System object that increments the first
row of a matrix by 1 at each time step. You must include getGlobalNamesImpl if the
class file is P-coded.
classdef GlobalSysObjMatrix < matlab.System

function y = stepImpl(obj)
global B;
B(1,:) = B(1,:)+1;
y = B;
end
% Include getGlobalNamesImpl only if the class file is P-coded.

function globalNames = getGlobalNamesImpl(~)
globalNames = {'B'};
end
33-78
end
end
This model includes the GlobalSysObjMatrix object in a MATLAB System block and
the associated Data Store Memory block.
33-79
33-80
33-81

Mathworks-Matlab Programming Fundamentals r2017b-2017

Uploaded by

Mathworks-Matlab Programming Fundamentals r2017b-2017

Uploaded by

MATLAB®

Latest news: www.mathworks.com

Sales and services: www.mathworks.com/sales_and_services

User community: www.mathworks.com/matlabcentral

Technical support: www.mathworks.com/support/contact_us

The MathWorks, Inc.

Call Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Ignore Function Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Variable Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Case and Space Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Command vs. Function Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Common Errors When Calling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Array vs. Matrix Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Compatible Array Sizes for Basic Operations . . . . . . . . 2-19

Array Comparison with Relational Operators . . . . . . . . 2-25

Operator Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Average Similar Data Points Using a Tolerance . . . . . . 2-31

Group Scattered Data Using a Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Conditional Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Loop Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Tokens in Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Dynamic Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Comma-Separated Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Alternatives to the eval Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83

Overview of MATLAB Classes

Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Complex Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Infinity and NaN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Identifying Numeric Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

The Logical Class

Determine if Arrays Are Logical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Reduce Logical Arrays to Single Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Truth Table for Logical Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Characters and Strings

Create Character Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Create String Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Analyze Text Data with String Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Test for Empty Strings and Missing Values . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Formatting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Compare Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Search and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53

Convert from Numeric Values to Character Array . . . . 6-60

Convert from Character Arrays to Numeric Values . . . 6-62

Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

Dates and Time

Specify Time Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Convert Date and Time to Julian Date or POSIX

Generate Sequence of Dates and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Share Code and Data Across Locales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Extract or Assign Date and Time Components of

Combine Date and Time from Separate Variables . . . . 7-32

Date and Time Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Compare Dates and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Plot Dates and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Core Functions Supporting Date and Time Arrays . . . . 7-52

Convert Between Datetime Arrays, Numbers, and

Carryover in Date Vectors and Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59

Converting Date Vector Returns Unexpected Output . 7-60

Convert Text in Table Variables to Categorical . . . . . . . 8-7

Plot Categorical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Compare Categorical Array Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Combine Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Combine Categorical Arrays Using Multiplication . . . . 8-27

Access Data Using Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Work with Protected Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Advantages of Using Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

Ordinal Categorical Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Add and Delete Table Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Add and Delete Table Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Clean Messy and Missing Data in Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Modify Units, Descriptions and Table Variable

Access Data in a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Calculations on Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Split Data into Groups and Calculate Statistics . . . . . . 9-45

Split Table Data Variables and Apply Functions . . . . . 9-49